NRG Pigs PDF

Version 1.
11
Released : June 2003
Valid Until : August 2003
Product Information Guides
Multifunctional Machines
Printers
Color Multifunctional
Scanners
Analogue Copiers
Software Solutions
Copyprinters
Main Page WFW WFW-Connect

Always check for latest information on NRG Site
Version 1.11
Multifunctional
DMR15S DMR18S DMR18D DMR35A
DMR45A DMRA070
Memory Matrix
WFW Home NPS

DMR15S/18S/18D Product Information Guide
PRODUCT
INFORMATION GUIDE
DMR15S/18S/18D
Nashuatec 1505/1805/1805d
Rex Rotary 1508/1808/1808D
Gestetner 1502/1802/1802d
This document was initially prepared by NRG Group Head Office and
the specifications are subject to change. If in doubt or further details
are required, please contact NRGI Guernsey.
1
Executive Summary
Segment One (1-20cpm) is a key market commanding over 50% of total units sold in Western
Europe. Yet it has some of the lowest levels of digitalisation (35% in 2000). Our task in this market
is to encourage the migration to digital (thus increasing print volume), but without jeopardising our
market share of the segment one analogue market.
The DMR15S/18S/18D is our second generation of digital machines in this market. Like the first
generation Stinger series, these are A3 15cpm and 18cpm models, and are due to be with the
subsidiaries in May 2001. There is also an 18cpm duplex version which will be available in
December 2001.
These models should not just be seen as simply a replacement to the Stinger series but rather as key
strategic products that will make serious inroads turning our analogue segment one sales into digital
sales as well. Also as a digital connected product, the DMR15S/18S/18D has the potential to take
some ground from the printer market.
The Stinger and Stinger-C1 Lite series had limited successes at bringing about a digital conversion,
largely due to an uncompetitive cost-per-copy price. Our new DMR15S/18S/18D, which has a more
competitive cost-per-copy and mainframe price, will have far greater success.
All figures from Infosource
Marketing Objectives
Increase market share in segment one

To become a leading player in the segment one digital market.
Replace existing analogue MIF and protect overall segment one market share
Increase unit placements and market share
Sell the copier as a digital connected product and erode market share from the printer market
Key Product Attributes
Separate toner and drum

Easy to use and install
Mainframe and CPC price which is comparable with existing analogue machines.
Fast first copy speed
Increased warm- up time
Toner recycle system
Easy Jam recovery
Copier Selling Points
Digital = High Quality (600dpi).

15 and 18 cpm copy speed.
Zoom 50 to 200%
2
Printer Selling Points
15 and 18 ppm print speed.
Easy to install
PCL 6/5e and Postscript 2 clone (option)
Slip Sheet insertion
Fax Selling Points

Modem Speed. 33.6Kbp.
Transmission speed, 3 seconds
Easy to install
Target Markets
Small office users (1-4 People), replacing existing 15-18cpm machines

Demand for a copier processing 4000 or less copies per month.
Mid-to-large offices as a workgroup fax or division printer
Mid-to-large offices as a business personal machine incorporating all functions (printer + fax +
copier)
The main machines which the DMR15S/18S/18D is targeted against are as follows
Digital Machines Analogue Machines

Sharp AR161 Canon NP6317
Canon GP160 Toshiba 1550
Minolta Di181 Xerox 5815
Mita Vi150/155 Minolta EP1054
Sharp AR150/155 Kyocera-Mita DC1560
Xerox DC214 Konica 1216
Toshiba DP1600
Minolta Di1151
Supplies
Toner
Unique Toner Cartridge

Average 9k Copies per cartridge
Please note these are yields according to marketing documents at the time of writing, please
see technical launch documents for accurate yields.
Developer
Unique
Average 60k copies per bag
Please note these are yields according to marketing documents at the time of writing, please
see technical launch documents for accurate yields
Drum
60k per unit
3
Timing
Sample Production
Production December 2000
Arrival January 2001
Mass Production
15/18cpm Mainframe, Fax Option and other accessories

First forecast due November 2000
First firm order due January 2001
Mass Production March 2001
Arrival Europe May 2001
18cpm Duplex
First Forecast due June 2001
First firm order due August 2001
Mass Production October 2001
Arrival Europe December 2001
Printer Controller Option

First Forecast due January 2001
First firm order due Feb 2001
Mass Production April 2001
Arrival Europe June 2001
While the mainframe is expected in May, the printer controller option will arrive one month after
the launch of the mainframe product.
The duplex option will arrive at the end of the year (December 2001).
4
Product Sales
Current trends in the Group show that over 90% of our 15cpm sales are analogue which is far
higher than market rates, the reasons for this are listed below:-
High mainframe cost both in comparison to the 18cpm digital and existing analogue machines.
Absence of fax capability. By not having this function the customer is denied one of the key
advantages of having a digital machine.
High cost per copy.
For the 18cpm, the mainframe price is more attractive and the machine has greater expandability
but the markets for 15cpm and 18cpm users are also rather different. The 15cpm user wants the
cheapest machine; by choosing the 18cpm over the 15cpm the 18cpm user shows that he is
concerned at more issues than just price alone.
3000
2500
2000
Analogue 15cpm
Digital 18cpm
1500
Analogue 18cpm
1000 Digital 15cpm
500
0
M 00
Fe 0
Ja 9
Au 0
00
Se 0
Ap 0
00
De 9
0
No 9
M 0
0
l-0
9
0
9
-0
9
-0
0
r-
n-
c-
p-
n-
g-
v-
ct-
b-
ar
ay
Ju
Ju
O
Conclusion
Segment One is a key strategic area for NRG and it is critical that we have well-positioned
machines which will strengthen and grow our market share. The DMR15S/18S/18D is part of the
next generation of digital machines which later in the year will include our first 13cpm digital
products. These should be seen not only as replacements to the Stinger range, but also as products
which will be attractive to existing analogue users.
5
Product Overview
Product Concept
The DMR15S/18S/18D range consists of three new digital machines:- a 15cpm, an 18cpm and an
18cpm duplex machine. These machines will replace production of the Stinger models.
That said, these machines should not just be seen as Stinger replacements; they are positioned as
products which will be attractive to current analogue users. The production of analogue machines
(Kingfisher II and Grand Kingfisher II) will continue after the launch of the DMR15S/18S/18D;
Ricoh have no intention of discontinuing the analogue 15 and 18cpm at this stage. Therefore
full discontinuation of the analogue products is not likely until the next generation of digital copiers
in which the connected copier is priced at a competitive level to the analogue products.
Key Features, Advantages and Benefits
Separate Toner, Developer and Drum
Like most other first generation low volume digital machines, the previous Stinger series had an all-
in-one cartridge which made its cost-per-copy uncompetitive compared to analogue machines. The
new DMR15S/18S/18D has separate toner, developer and drum which at present estimates makes it
a third of the CPC of the Stinger and almost level with the Kingfisher series. At present the only
other known segment one digital machine with this is the Minolta Di181.
Reduced warm-up time
The warm- up time for the DMR15S/18S/18D is 25 seconds compared to 40 seconds for the Stinger
series.
DMR15S/18S/18D DMR15/18 CMR151C/181C Sharp Minolta Kyocera Mita
AR160 Di181 AI1515
EU/Asia 25 sec 40 sec 45 sec 30 sec 30 sec 45 sec
model
Less Installation Time
The machine is based around the concept of easy-to-sell and easy-to-install. The fax and printer
options take 5 minutes each to install.
Size
The DMR15S/18S/18D is the smallest copier Ricoh have launched, making it suitable to be placed
on the desktop.
Easy Jam Recovery
When the side door is opened, the gears at the fusing roller get released allowing for the paper to be
easily removed.
6
High Productivity
One to one copy speed is the same as continuous copy speed.

DMR15S DMR18S/18D
Continuous copy speed 15 cpm 18 cpm
One to One copy speed 15 cpm 18 cpm
Fax Functionality
The DMR15S/18S/18D has a superior fax capability which will allow it to be positioned as a central
machine for mid-to-large size workgroups. It has a modem speed of 33.6Kbp and a transmission
speed of 3 seconds
Printer Functionality
Collation
Collation feature is available with both the PCL and PS drivers. Please note that Rotate Collate will
not be supported for printing with the original printer controller, but will be compatible with the
new duplex compatible printer controller. Additional memory of 32MB has to be added to the
printer controller to enable this functionality.
Slip Sheet
Feature allows slip sheet to be inserted after every page
Auto Continue
With this feature printing continues automatically after 10 seconds even if the following errors
occur
print overrun
memory overflow
memory full errors occur
Please note that, on the page where the error has occurred, the page may not be printed out
correctly.
If Auto Continue is not on, when these above errors occur, the controller will stop printing and
displays an error message on the operation panel.
Page Protect
This can be used to avoid errors caused by print overrun.
Tray Lock
Can be used to lock any tray including the Bypass tray. Only one tray can be locked at one time.
Font Storage
Font storage is available in RAM memory. Because these are only stored in RAM, they are stored
temporarily so once the power is turned off the stored font will disappear.
7
Product Configuration & Options
Configuration
Platen Cover ADF ARDF

Only for 18cpm duplex
model
15cpm 18cpm 18cpm Duplex
250 250
250
250 250
2 Trays Paper Bank

1 Tray Paper Bank
500 500
500
*Cabinet *Cabinet
*Cabinet
*You can attach either 500 sheets x 1 paper bank or 500 sheets x 2 paper bank.
*Cabinets have to be procured locally.
*Size of those three Cabinets is the same as the Stinger-Cs but the colour is
different
Internal Options
Copier: Fax: Printer:

*Copier Memory(16MB *Fax Option *Printer Controller
(15cpm only), 32MB for *PS2 clone
15cpm and 18cpm) *NIB Ethernet
Please note standard *DIMM(32MB,
memory has been omitted 64MB, 128MB)
from the 15cpm machine
to reduce the analogue-
digital price gap
8
Option Compatibility
Remarks:
1) There are no common external options between the DMR15/18 and the DMR15S/18S/18D.
2) The DMR15S/18S/18D external options will be new body colour.
External Options:
Model DMR15S/18S/18D DMR15/18
Item
Platen Cover m
ADF m
ARDF m
Paper Bank (500 sheets x 1) m
Paper Bank (500 sheets x 2) m
Handset (for US only) m
Internal Options:
Model DMR15S/18S/18D DMR15/18
Item
Copier option memory 16MB for DMR15S m
Fax board m
Printer Controller board m
PS2 clone m
NIB Ethernet m
DIMM(32MB) m (common with Stinger-C printer m (printer controllers
controllers new Type B memory) new Type B memory)
m : Can be used for this model
: Can not be used for this model
Option correlation for basic copier and fax:
DMR15S 15cpm:
- must install together - cannot install together

(500 sheets x 1)
(500 sheets x 2)
Copier memory
32MB Memory
Platen Cover
Paper Bank
Paper Bank
(DIMM)
16MB
ADF
Purchasing Option
Platen Cover
ADF
Paper Bank
(500sheets x 1)
Paper Bank
(500Sheets x 2)
Copier memory
16MB
32MB Memory
(DIMM)
*16MB copier memory is mandatory when installing the ADF, because the machine must have
scan-once-print-many available in order to support ADF one to multiple page copy.
9
DMR18S 18cpm:
(500 sheets x 1)
(500 sheets x 2)
32MB Memory
Platen Cover
Paper Bank
Paper Bank
(DIMM)
ADF
Purchasing Option
Platen Cover
ADF
Paper Bank
(500sheets x 1)
Paper Bank
(500Sheets x 2)
32MB Memory
(DIMM)
DMR18D 18cpm duplex:

(500 sheets x 1)
(500 sheets x 2)
32MB Memory
Platen Cover
Paper Bank
Paper Bank
(DIMM)
ARDF
ADF
Purchasing Option
Platen Cover
ADF
ARDF
Paper Bank
(500sheets x 1)
Paper Bank
(500Sheets x 2)
32MB Memory
(DIMM)
Supplies
Toner
Average 9K copies per cartridge
Developer
Average 60k copies per bag
OPC Drum
Average 60k copies per unit
10
Market Situation
European Market Situation
Konica
Fig. 1 Sharp 6% Others
Analogue and Digital. 8% 20%
Segment One. Year
2000
Xerox
2000 Market Size:
9%
669,204 units
Ricoh
8%
Canon
21%
NRG
9%
Minolta Toshiba
9% 10%
Fig 2.
Digital. Segment One. Year 2000 Fig 3.
2000 Market Size: 192,729 Analogue. Segment One. Year 2000
2000 Market Size: 476,475
Sharp
Konica Konica
Others 4%
5% 6%
14% Others
Sharp Xerox
19% 24%
3%
Canon Ricoh
10%
9%
Toshiba
4%
NRG
Minolta
6% 7%
Xerox
22%
NRG
Ricoh Minolta
13%
10% Canon
7%
25%
Toshiba
12%
11
Fig 4 Segment 1, Digital-Analog
Western Europe
Infosource
100%
90%
80%
70%
60% Digital
50%
Analog
40%
30%
20%
10%
0%
2000 2001 2002 2003
The new DMR15S/18S/18D fits into the Infosource segment one which covers copiers from speeds
of 1 to 20cpm. This segment represents over 50% of the total units sold so is of key importance.
The overall market is predicted to shrink by 3% this year (fig. 1-3, p.13) and remain flat over the
next few years (fig 4), this largely due to the massive growth in the printer market.
At 35% digitalisation in 2000 (fig 1-3, p.13 show 29%), the take-up of digitalisation is small but it
should be noted that this represents a 30% increase on 1999 figures. In 2001, the proportion of
digital machines shipped is expected to reach 60%
Other figures taken from. Infosource Autumn Report 2000, Infosource Spring Report 2000, and Infosource 2000-2003 Long-Range forecast report.
Major Competitors
The main machines which the DMR15S/18S/18D is targeted against are as follows:
Digital Machines Analogue Machines

Sharp AR161 Canon NP6317
Canon GP160 Toshiba 1550
Minolta Di181 Xerox 5815
Mita Vi150/155 Minolta EP1054
Sharp AR150/155 Kyocera-Mita DC1560
Xerox DC214 Konica 1216
Toshiba DP1600
Minolta Di115
Canon Image Class 2200 Series
Figs 1-3 (p.13) show some interesting trends. Sharp and Xerox have strong shares in digital but
have very minor shares in the analogue products. Canon and Toshiba have big analogue strengths
but have failed to match this with similar shares in the digital market. NRGs share of the digital
market is a healthy 13% but this is likely to come under attack from Canon and Minolta as they
have greater success with their ImageClass and Di151/181 products respectively.
Minolta present considerable threat with the well received Minolta Di151 and Di181 machines. The
12
Di181 is a particularly attractive machine as it is the only digital segment one copier on the market
currently with separate supplies. While NRG have grown 0.5% in 2000 in segment one, Minolta
have increased their share by 0.6% to a position where they are threatening to overtake NRG.
According to Better Buys for Business, Minolta have Some of the most aggressively priced
machines in the channel.
Sharps AR series of digital machines provides a considerable threat to our position. Better Buys for
Business describe Sharp as One of the most active vendors in making transition from analogue to
digital. In fact, because of this activity, Sharp has actually lost share in the analogue market.
Canons first generation of digital machine, the ImageClass, are also highly regarded, but by not
having a parallel interface either as an option or as standard, they provide good ground for us to sell
our machines.
Xeroxs new digital machines, the 212 and 214, although well priced, do not have scan-once-print-
many (note neither does the 15cpm the DMR15S/18S/18D until memory is added). The lack of this
feature has little effect on the success of the product which has helped Xerox obtain a 22% digital
market share. Indeed the feedback from the segment one forum meeting was that Scan-Once-Print-
Many was not a key feature which was going to swing analogue users to digital. It was thought that
connectivity would be a far stronger argument for an analogue user to switch to digital.
In terms of analogue discontinuation policy of our competitors, the main information which we
have is that their strategy is the same as ours, ie that discontinuation will be dependent purely on
demand.
13
Duplex Functionality
Duplex functionality is comparatively rare in this segment but is growing. By offering a duplex
option in this segment we can offer considerable competitive advantages over our competition.
Where duplex is offered it tends to be at the 20cpm level where machines are really competing for
segment two share so are a lot more expensive. It should be remembered that the current fit-rate for
duplex on the DMR22/27 is almost 80% showing that there is considerable demand for this
function.
Model Speed RRP Technology Duplex

Xerox DC420 SLX 20 8,795 Digital Yes
Xerox DC420 C 20 4,995 Digital Yes
Konica 7020 20 4,550 Digital Optional
KM Pointsource Vi200 20 4,235 Digital No
Sharp AR-205 20 3,295 Digital No
Sharp AR-200 20 2,895 Digital no
Oce 3018 18 2,750 Analogue Optional
Minolta DiALTA di181 18 2,750 Digital No
Kir 18cpm Duplex 18 2,700 Digital Yes
Minolta EP1085 18 2,433 Analogue No
Kir 18cpm 18 2,400 Digital No
Panasonic FP-7818 18 2,095 Analogue No
Kingfisher 18cpm 18 2,095 Analogue No
Canon NP6317 17 2,390 Analogue No
Canon PageStation GP160 16 2,595 Digital No
Xerox 5815 16 2,400 Analogue No
Sharp AR-161 16 2,295 Digital No
Konica 1216 16 2,290 Analogue No
Kir 15cpm 15 2,200 Digital No
Minolta EP1054 15 2,115 Analogue No
Kingfisher 15cpm 15 2,040 Analogue No
Olivetti Copia 9915C 15 1,995 Analogue No
Toshiba 1550 15 1,995 Analogue No
Panasonic FP7715 15 1,865 Analogue No
Sharp AR150 15 1,695 Digital No
Olivetti Copia 9915 A 15 1,595 Analogue No
Sharp AR-F151 15 1,595 Digital No
Panasonic DP150 15 1,395 Digital No
Xerox XD120F 15 1,299 Analogue No
Minolta DiALTA di151 15 995 Digital No
14
Product Range Plan & Positioning
Product Plan Map
Stinger-C1 Model K-C1c Model K-C1c

18cpm 18cpm 18cpm Duplex
G. Kingfisher2
18 cpm
Kingfisher 2
15cpm
Model K-C1b
Stinger-C1L 15cpm
15 cpm
99 00 01
Replacement Model Comparison
DMR15S/18S/18D Stinger-C1/C1 Lite

Copy Speed 15/18cpm 15/18cpm
Maximum Paper 15cpm 1350 sheets Stinger-C1 Lite 350 sheets
Capacity 18cpm 1600 sheets Stinger C1 1350 sheets
ACV 3.5k for C1b, 4k for C1c/C1c 3k per month
Duplex
Maximum CV 10k per month 10k per month
Lifetime 600k or 5 years whichever 600k or 5 years whiche ver comes

comes first first
First Copy Time 6.9 seconds 6.5 seconds
Multiple copy Up to 99 Up to 99
Resolution 600 dpi 600 dpi
Grey Scale 64 levels 256
Warm-up time 25 seconds 40 seconds
(from Main Switch off)
Enlargement 122, 141 and 200% 122, 141, 200%
Reduction 93, 82, 71 and 50% 93%, 71%, 50%
Zoom 50% to 200% in 1% step 50% to 200% in 1% step
Although the DMR15S/18S/18D does feature improvements on the Stinger series, its crucial
difference is the expectation of better price positioning on both mainframe and particularly cost-per-
copy pricing
15
Price comparison mainframes
Kingfisher 15cpm
Kir 15cpm
Stinger 15cpm
Grand Kingfisher
Price
18cpm
Kir 18cpm
Stinger 18cpm
Kir Duplex
R-C1 22cpm
The 15cpm is 20% below the old DMR15/18 price and 20% higher than analogue. The 18cpm is
only 17% below the old DMR15/18 and 20% above analogue. The reason for the 15cpm being
more competitive against present models is because the standard 16MB memory is omitted to help
bring down the cost. Without the memory, the 15cpm does not have scan-once-print- many.
The duplex machine is positioned at slightly less than the old DMR15/18 and considerably less than
the DMR22A/27A.
Cost per Copy
Toner
Developer
Drum
Kingfisher Stinger Kir
One of the main problems with the old DMR15/18 was the high cost per copy due to the fact that it
was used an all- in-one cartridge.
The new DMR15S/18S/18D comes with separate toner and drum which puts the CPC almost level
with the CMR151. At the time of launch, the DMR15S/18S/18D will be one of few Segment One
machines with separate consumables; at present only the Minolta Di181 has this. Even with the
addition of labour, CPC for the DMR15S/18S/18D will be almost identical to the current
CMR151 CPC.
16
Target Markets
Identifying Target Markets
The DMR15S/18S/18D is targeted at the following markets.

Replacing existing analogue or first generation digital machines in small offices of 1 to 4 people
with copy/print demands of less than 4000 pages per month.
Mid to large offices as a workgroup fax or division printer.
Mid to large offices as personal all- in-one multifunction product.
Targeted Prospects
The different people (all with their own specific role and decision criteria) involved in the decision
making process are:
Buyer: low operating costs, in line with current contractual arrangements and 'best value for
money';
IT manager: connectivity issues, like manageability, upgradeability, reliability and Total Cost of
Ownership;
Operator/User : ease of use, productivity, finishing and quality and
Financial manager: total cost of ownership and future-proof investment
Channels
The chart below shows the NRG channel split year-to-date for Europe. It shows that we are heavily
dependent on the direct channel for our Segment One sales particularly with the digital products.
According to Infosource, the indirect channel in Europe in H1 2000 represents 61% of sales for the
whole copier market. This indicates tha t NRG are behind market trends for segment one for the
indirect channel, not only for digital products but also for the Grand Kingfisher II too. Although this
is partly due to the sales structure of NRG, it does indicate that there should a major focus on the
indirect channel in order to grow the segment one business.
120%
100%
80%
YTD Indirect
60%
YTD Direct
40%
20%
0%
KFsher II Gnd KF II Stinger STINGER
C1-Lite C1
17
Product Selling Points
The main selling points are:
Overall Selling Points

Modular functionality.
Shorter warm- up times than predecessor machines
High productivity.
Easy jam recovery
Simple design of operation panel.
Paper capacity 1350 (15cpm) and 1600 (18cpm)
Compact size
Affordable duplex capability (18cpm duplex machine only)

Digital = High Quality (600dpi).
15 and 18 cpm copy speed.
Zoom 50 to 200%

15 and 18 ppm print speed.
Easy to install
PCL 6/5e and Postscript 2 clone (option)
Slip sheet insertion
Fax Selling Points

Modem speed. 33.6Kbp.
Transmission speed, 3 seconds
Easy to install
18
Marketing Support Materials
The launch of the DMR15S/18S/18D is critical to strengthening our position in the Segment One
market place. This means that this launch has to be carefully supported by a series of Marcoms
activities.
Positioning Objective
To position the DMR15S/18S/18D to existing analogue users to convert them to the benefits of
digitalisation.
Note: A separate 4pp brochure will be produced for the DMR15S/18S/18D duplex product only.
19
Product & Supply Logistic Data
Codes & Contents
Mainframe
Group Short Description Gestetner Rex Rotary Nashuatec
Name Model Name Model Name Model Name
DMR15S DMR15S 15cpm 1502 1508 1505
DMR18S DMR18S 18cpm 1802 1808 1805
DMR18D DMR18D 18cpm Duplex 1802d 1808d 1805d
Paper handling options

Short Name Description
Platen Cover Type 1018 Platen cover

DF72 ADF
DF71 ARDF
PS460 Paper bank (1 tray)
PS450 Paper bank (2 trays)
Internal options
Short Name Description Versatility
DME1018 Copier memory 16MB DMR15S
DIF1018F Fax option DMR15S/18S/18D
DIF1018P Printer controller -NRG DMR15S/18S
TBA Printer controller -NRG DMR15S/18S/18D
DIF1018PS PS2 clone DMR15S/18S/18D
DIF1018E NIC DMR15S/18S/18D
Please note that the DIF1018P will cease production in September and will be replaced by the
DIF1018PV2. First production of the DIF1018PV2 will be in October
Supplies
DD6BLK Developer
DMU21 OPC
DT34BLK Rex Rotary Toner Cartridge
DT34BLK Gestetner Toner Cartridge
DT34BLK Nashautec Toner Cartridge
Common items with Existing Models

DME185P32 Memory 32MB DMR15/18, DMR22/27
20
Operating Instructions
Please note that all copier OIs are NRG branded, but the fax and printer OI are generic Ricoh
products.

DDK1018GB Copier Operator Instructions- English
DDK1018D Copier Operator Instructions- German
DDK1018F Copier Operator Instructions- French
DDK1018I Copier Operator Instructions- Italian
DDK1018NL Copier Operator Instructions- Dutch
DDK1018E Copier Operator Instructions- Spanish
DDK1018S Copier Operator Instructions- Swedish
DDK1018CZ Copier Operator Instructions- Czech
DDK1018H Copier Operator Instructions- Hungarian
DDK1018N Copier Operator Instructions- Norwegian
DDK1018P Copier Operator Instructions- Portuguese
DDK1018PL Copier Operator Instructions- Polish
DDK1018SF Copier Operator Instructions- Finnish
DDK1018DK Copier Operator Instructions- Danish
Copier OIs include copier and fax OI on CD-Rom + hardcopy of system settings and basic features
for the copier.

DDK1018FGB Fax Operator Instructions- English
DDK1018FD Fax Operator Instructions- German
DDK1018FF Fax Operator Instructions- French
DDK1018FI Fax Operator Instructions- Italian
DDK1018FNL Fax Operator Instructions- Dutch
DDK1018FE Fax Operator Instructions- Spanish
DDK1018FS Fax Operator Instructions- Swedish
DDK1018FCZ Fax Operator Instructions- Czech
DDK1018FH Fax Operator Instructions- Hungarian
DDK1018FN Fax Operator Instructions- Norwegian
DDK1018FP Fax Operator Instructions- Portuguese
DDK1018FPL Fax Operator Instructions- Polish
DDK1018FSF Fax Operator Instructions- Finnish
DDK1018FDK Fax Operator Instructions- Danish
Includes hard copy of basic fax features + fax decals.
21

DDK1018PGB Printer Operator Instructions- English
DDK1018PD Printer Operator Instructions- German
DDK1018PF Printer Operator Instructions- French
DDK1018PI Printer Operator Instructions- Italian
DDK1018PNL Printer Operator Instructions- Dutch
DDK1018PE Printer Operator Instructions- Spanish
DDK1018PS Printer Operator Instructions- Swedish
DDK1018PCZ Printer Operator Instructions- Czech
DDK1018PH Printer Operator Instructions- Hungarian
DDK1018PN Printer Operator Instructions- Norwegian
DDK1018PP Printer Operator Instructions- Portuguese
DDK1018PPL Printer Operator Instructions- Polish
DDK1018PSF Printer Operator Instructions- Finnish
DDK1018PDK Printer Operator Instructions- Danish
Includes hardcopy on basic printer reference OI and CD-Rom with advanced printer.
22
Service Plan
Service Concepts
1. Firmware (ROM) files will be distributed via the WEB Server for download to flash memory
cards.
2. To allow for easier handling of machine data, the NVRAM data can be downloaded to a flas h
memory card for temporary storing and then uploaded to the machine again if necessary.
3. Parts replacement times are reduced.
4. Easier PM parts replacement.
5. Easier removal of mechanical units (e.g. fusing unit, Laser unit, photoconductor unit.)
6. Reduced number of PM parts.
7. Relatively long base PM interval (60k copies).
8. When the fax option is installed, it is possible to perform fax parameter adjustments and counter
value checks using future remote diagnostics system (RDS).
9. It is possible to transmit the system parameter list both manually and automatically.
Service Information
Requirements for Assigning Engineers
The following requirements should be considered when assigning field engineers to this model:
Practical skills:
Copier Copier + Fax Copier + Printer

Digital Copier m l q
PPF (Plain Paper fax) l
G3 fax m
Printer m
m: A basic working knowledge .
l: A basic working knowledge of either digital copiers or PPF.
q: A basic working knowledge of either digital copiers or printers.
Other:
Highly capable in customer instruction and consulting.

Highly motivated toward job completeness.
Highly capable in problem diagnosis and reporting.
Good time management and job planning skills.
Service Training Course
The service training curriculum should be completed before the first machine is delivered to the
distributor or dealer. The training should be conducted as follows:
Length:
Copier (2 days) + Printer (2.5 days) + Fax (0.5 days) = 5 days.
23
Prerequisite Courses:
Trainees should have attended either the Russian-C or Stinger-C courses.
Curriculum:
An appropriate training curriculum should be prepared based on the provided Instructors Guide.
The length and curriculum contents can be adjusted depending on the field experience and technical
knowledge of trainees.
Training Materials
Service Manuals
o Base copier
o Fax unit
o Printer (included in NIB section)
Instructors Guides
Parts Catalogue
Printer drivers, utilities, and server (CD-ROM)
IFAP (Initial Field Administration Programme)

Plan
The details of the IFAP will be announced separately.
Period (tentative)
May 2001 November 2001

The following data should be collected to monitor machine performance, especially during the
initial release period:
- ACV: Average Copy Volume

- MCBF: Mean Copies Between Failure
- MCBC: Mean Copies Between Calls
- Call rate
- Description and breakdown of failures
- Parts replaced
24
Technical Information Plan
The following technical documents will be sent periodically or when required. Please ensure that all
of these documents are promptly delivered to appropriate groups or individuals, especially during
the IFAP period.
Technical Document Primary Purpose Final Destination

MB Notifies design change information with Field engineers
(Modification Bulletin) part numbers, interchangeability and
production cut- in serial numbers.
RTB Provides troubleshooting information Field engineers
(Ricoh Technical Bulletin) and Service Manual change information.
Reliability Information
Items Specifications Remarks

ACV DMR15S: 3,500 outputs
DMR18S/18D: 4,000 outputs
Max CV 10,000 outputs
Machine Life 600,000 outputs or 5 years (whichever comes first)
Duty 30,000 outputs
MCBC 27,300 outputs
EM Interval (MCBF) 50,000 outputs
PM Interval 60,000 outputs
NOTE: The figures above assume the following:

- PM is regularly performed as recommended.
- Recommended types of paper are used.
- The machine is installed in the environment required by specification.
25
Service Time Estimations
Product EE EU Inci- Target Recd PM Target Total Target Est Target Total
Ratio Ratio dence PM Calls per PM MTTR PM EM EM Calls EM EM
(%) (%) (EExEU) Interval 1,000k Copies (min./ call) MTTR Interval per MTTR MTTR
(copies) (calls/1,000k) (min./ (copies) 1,000k (min./ (min./
1,000k) copies call) 1,000k)
(calls/
1,000k)
DMR15S 100 100 1.00 60k 16.67 30 500 50k 20 30 600
/18S/18D
ADF 60 90 0.54 80k 3.38 10 33.75 100k 2.7 30 81
(originals) (originals)
ARDF 30 90 0.27 80k 1.69 10 16.88 100k 1.35 30 40.5
(originals) (originals)
Paper 20 40 0.08 120k 0.67 10 6.67 100k 0.8 30 24
Tray Unit
(1tray)
Paper 20 40 0.08 120k 0.67 10 6.67 100k 0.8 30 24
Tray Unit
(2 trays)
Mainframe (DMR18D) + ARDF --- 16.67 --- 516.88 --- 21.35 --- 640.5
System
Full System --- 16.67 --- 523.54 --- 22.15 --- 664.5
(Mainframe(DMR18D) + ARDF +
Paper Tray Unit (2 trays))
The Average Maintenance Times for both the Mainframe/ARDF System and Full System are
calculated using the following:
(Total PM MTTR for System) + (Total EM MTTR for System)

= (Total PM Calls for Mainframe) + (Total EM calls for System)
Mainframe /ARDF System: 30.44 minutes/call

Full System: 30.61 minutes/call
26
Installation Times
Mainframe 30 minutes
A(R)DF : 10 minutes
Paper Bank: 10 minutes
FAX Option: 15 minutes
Printer Option: 15 minutes
NIB: 10 minutes
PS2: 10 minutes
Special Tools
The following special tools should be prepared for field servicing:
Unique or Common
U: Unique to this model
C: Common with listed model
Item Part Description Qty Unique or Common

Number
1 A0069104 Scanner Positioning Pin (4pcs/set) 1 C (DMR15/18/22/27)
2 A2929500 Test Chart S5S (10 pcs/set) 1 C (DMR55A/70A)
3 A0299387 Digital Multimeter FLUKE 87 1 C (DMR15/18/22/27)
4 A2309352 Flash Memory Card 4MB 1 C (DMR15/18/22/27)
5 A2579300 Grease Barrier S552R 1 C (DMR15/18/22/27)
6 52039501 Silicon Grease G-501 1 C (DMR15/18/22/27)
7 B0399099 NVRAM Minus Counter 1 U
8 G0219350 Loop Back Connector 1 C (DMR15/18/22/27)
27
PARTS INFORMATION
PM PARTS
NOTE: Listed PM part items and the ir part numbers are based on the machines produced at the
time this document was issued. Refer to Modification Bulletins (MB) and Ricoh Technical
Bulletins (RTB) for the most updated information.
Copier: B039/B040/B043
Unique/Common
Qty/ PM Unique or
Part Number Description
Unit Interval Common
Paper Feed
B0392740 Paper Feed Roller 2 (1*) 120k U
B0392710 Friction Pad 2 (1*) 120k U
Transfer Roller Unit

B0393820 Transfer Roller 1 120k U
Fusing Unit
AE011057 Hot Roller 1 60k U
AE020100 Pressure Roller 1 120k U
AE044032 Stripper Pawl 5 120k U
G0294174 Pressure Roller Bushing 2 120k C
(PMR14/16/20/21)
Photoconductor Unit
G0523510 Charge Roller 1 60k U
B0392303 Cleaning Sponge Charge Roller 1 60k U
B0392330 Pickoff Pawl 2 60k U
B0392281 Cleaning Blade 1 60k U
* B039 machine
Paper Tray Unit (1 tray): B385

Qty PM Unique or
/Unit Interval Common
A2672751 Paper Feed Roller 1 120k C (PS400/410)
A8602831 Friction Pad 1 120k C (PS400/410)
Paper Tray Unit (2 trays): B384

Qty PM Unique or
A2672751 Paper Feed Roller 2 120k C (PS400/410)
A8602831 Friction Pad 2 120k C (PS400/410)
28
Auto Document Feeder: B387
Qty PM Unique or
/Unit Interval (Originals) Common
A8592141 Belt Paper Feed 1 80k C (DF68/69)
B3871671 Reverse Roller 1 80k U
B3872161 Pick- up Roller 1 80k U
Auto Reverse Document Feeder: B379

Qty PM Unique or
/Unit Interval (Originals) Common
A8592141 Belt Paper Feed 1 80k C (DF68/69)
A8592241 Reverse Roller 1 80k C (DF68/69)
A8592161 Pick- up Roller 1 80k C (DF68/69)
PHOTOCONDUCTOR
Unique/Common
Transport & Storage Conditions
Unique or
Part Number Expected Life Temperature Humidity (%RH)
Common
(C)
B0399510 60k U Same as for the mainframe
29
Service Preparation Schedule
Preparation As of March 15th, 2001

Service Manual / Parts Catalogue in
English: January 29th, 2001
First Draft (Service Manual) February 20th, 2001
Final Draft (Service Manual) February 28th, 2001
Final Draft (Parts catalogue)
Instructors Guide End of March, 2001
Training in Tokyo Jan 29th to Feb 2nd, 2001
Feb 19th to 23rd, 2001
Parts Preparation Schedule
Preparation As of March 15th, 2001

Parts List by Rank November 30th, 2000
Recommended List March 1st, 2001
P/O Due Date March 8th, 2001
Shipment March 20th, 2001
30
General Specifications
Engine
DMR15S.18S/18D Remarks
1. Technology:
a) Reading element Flatbed with moving CCD array image-sensing
element
b) Printing processing Laser beam scanning/marking & electro-
photographic printing.
Dry, dual component toner deve lopment
2. Dimensions (WxDxH):
a) Standard DMR15S: W550 x D568 x H420 mm
configuration DMR18S: W550 x D568 x H518mm
DMR18D: W587 x D568 x H518mm
b) With ADF Height: Approx.
DMR15S:510mm
DMR18S/18D:608mm
c) With ARDF DMR18D: 648mm

3. Weight: DMR15S: 35 kg or less
DMR18S: 42kg or less
DMR18D: 45kg or less
4. Input Capacity:
a) Standard DMR15S: 250 sheets tray x 1
DMR18S/18D: 250 sheets tray x 2
*100 sheets multi bypass tray for both C1b and C1c
b) Options *500 sheets tray x 1 or 500 sheets tray x 2 Max total capacity:
15cpm: 1,350 sheets
18cpm: 1,600 sheets
5. Output Capacity:
a) Standard: 250 sheets (internal tray)
6. Paper size / weight:

a) Size: Standard Tray:
A5(LEF)- A3(SEF),
51/2 x 81/2(LEF)-11 x 17(SEF)
Bypass Tray:
A6 (SEF) - A3 (SEF),
5 1/2x 8 1/2(SEF) - 11x 17(SEF)
b) Weight: Standard Tray : 60 to 90 g/m2

Bypass Tray : 52 to 162 g/m2
Duplex Tray: 64-90g/ m2 DMR18D only
7. Rating power spec: 100V model: 110-120V, 50/60 Hz
200V model: 220-240V, 50/60Hz
8. Power consumption: Full system: Less than 1.2KW
31
Copier Feature
DMR15S/18S/18D Remarks
st
1 copy speed Less than 6.9seconds When polygon mirror
motor is spinning.
(A4 / 8 1/2 x 11 LEF from the standard tray,
no R/E)
Multi copy speed C1b: 15cpm (15 cpm one to one copying) .
C1c: 18 cpm (15 cpm one to one copying)
(A4 / 8 1/2 x 11 LEF, no R/E)
Multiple copy Up to 99
Resolution 600 dpi
Grey Scale (per Scanning: 64 levels, Marking: Binary
dot)
Warm-up time US model: Less than 20 seconds
European/Asian model: Less than 25 seconds
Memory Capacity Standard:
DMR15S - no memory (0MB)
DMR18S/18D - 16MB standard
Option:
DMR15S 16MB memory and 32MB
DMR18S/18D - 32MB
Enlargement US model:121, 129, 155 %
European/Asian/Pacific model:122,141, 200%
Reduction US model: 93, 78, 65, 50%
European/Asian/Pacific model: 93, 82, 71,
50%
Zoom 50% to 200% in 1% step
Image density Manual or automatic
adjustment
Interrupt copy Not available
Electronic counter Standard
User code Standard (50 codes, eight digits)
Language 110-120V
*US model: English, French Spanish
*Taiwan model: complicated Chinese, English
220-240V
*European model:
English, German, French, Italian, Spanish,
Dutch, Swedish, Norwegian, Danish,
Portuguese, Polish, Czech, Finnish,
Hungarian.
*Asian/Pacific model: English, Complicated
Chinese
*Chinese model: Simplified Chinese, English
32
Copy Speed Matrix
15 cpm
Continuous DF 1 to 1
18 cpm
18 cpm duplex
1sided ->1sided 1sided -> 2sided 2sided -> 2sided
33
Enhanced Feature
DMR15S (15cpm) does not support some of the following features with a standard 0MB memory.
So please check carefully the chart below which shows you what can be done with 0MB memory.
DMR15S (15cpm) - No memory DMR18S/18D (18cpm)

APS / AMS Standard Standard
Auto tray switch Option (Available with optional paper Standard
bank.)
Directional No No
magnification
Directional size No No
magnification
Photo mode Standard (photo mode) Standard (photo mode)
Auto start Standard Standard
User program No No
Duplex No C1c: No
C1c duplex: Standard
Electronic sort Option (16MB option memory required) Standard
*For Rotate sorting, 16MB option *Rotate sorting is also
memory and optional Paper Bank is supported.
required.
Scan once copy Option (16MB option memory required) Standard
many If ADF is installed, 16MB option
memory has to be installed otherwise you
cannot do ADF one to multipage
copying.
Image rotation Option (16MB option memory required) Standard
Series copy Option (16MB option memory required) Standard
*Book 2 one sided sheets *Book 2 one sided sheets
Combine copy Option (16MB option memory required) Standard (2 in 1, 4 in 1)
Double copy No No
Erase center / No No
border
Image overlay No No
Repeat copying No No
Positive/Negative No No
Stapling No No
Stamp features No No
Cover/Sheet No No
insertion
34
Option Specification
Fax Features
General Feature
Circuit: PSTN, PBX
Compatibility: ITU-T (CCITT) G3
Resolution: 200x100dpi, 200x200 dpi, 200x400dpi
8 x 3.85 l/mm,, 8x7.7 l/mm, 8x15.4 l/mm
Compression method: MH, MR, MMR
Scanning speed: 1.2 second (200x100dpi, 200x200dpi, A4 / 8
1/2x11 SEF)
2.4 seconds (200x400dpi)
Number of Pages Short Edge Feed
Scanned: 30 pages/ minute (200x100dpi, 200x200dpi)
16 pages/ minute (200x400dpi)
Long Edge Feed
36 pages/ minute (200x100dpi, 200x200dpi)
33 pages/ minute (200x400dpi)
Modem speed: Standard with Automatic Shift Down:
336000, 31200, 28800, 26400, 21600, 19200,
16800, 14400, 12000, 9600, 7200, 4800, 2400 bps
Transmission speed: G3: Approx.3 seconds (200x100dpi, ITUT #1 chart,
TTI off, memory transmission)
SAF memory: Standard: 2 MB Please see 2.4 memory
No SAF memory option available. configuration page 12.
Page memory 4 MB
No page memory option available.
Memory backup: One hour
Super smoothing: Standard
Stamp: Option (Available with document feeder)
TTI/RTI: Standard
CSI: Standard
Quick dial: Standard (32 numbers)
Speed dial: Standard (100 numbers)
Group dial: Standard (9 groups, Max. 100 numbers per group)
Keystroke program: No
Redial: Standard
AI short protocol: Standard
Direct fax number Standard
entry:
Dual access: Standard
Restricted access: Standard (8 digits, 20 Personal Codes)
Label insertion: Standard
35
General Feature (Continued from the previous page)
Auto document No
Telephone directory Standard
Page count No
Auto reduction Standard
Wild cards Standard
Summer time (daylight saving time) Standard
ID code programming Standard (4 digits)
Programming by OMR No
User function key Standard (3 keys)
Night timer No
Energy saver Standard
LCD prompt Standard
Remaining memory indication Standard
Time indicator /clock adjustment No / Standard
User parameter setting Standard
User data transfer Standard
Memory file transfer Standard
Transmission features
Immediate transmission Standard
Memory transmission Standard
Serial broadcasting (later) Standard (Max. 100 numbers)
Send later Standard
Error correction mode Standard
Page retransmission Standard
Economy transmission No
Forwarding Standard
Batch transmission Standard
Parallel memory transmission Standard (Automatically selected.)
Image rotation Standard
Book fax No
Transmission deadline No
Closed network (transmission) No
Confide ntial transmission/with ID No
Transfer request Standard (Transfer station: 1 location)
Transfer transmission No
Multi-step Transfer No
Polling transmission No
Double sided transmission DMR15S/18S: No
DMR18D: Yes (ARDF is required)
Transmission reserve No
Well log transmission Standard (Max. 1.2 m)
36
Reception features
Automatic reception Standard
Manual reception Standard
Substitute reception Standard
Authorised reception Standard
Multicopy No
Reverse order printing No
Memory lock No
Confidential reception No
Special reception numbers No
Closed network No
Polling reception Standard Free polling: Available
Polling with ID: Not available
Poll later Standard
Polling from memory No
Multi-polling reception Standard
Continuous polling No
Reception time printing Standard
Center mark Standard
Checkered mark Standard
2 in 1 (two in one) No
Image reduction Standard
Economy printing mode No
Duplex reception No
Telephone features
Handset / telephone US: Option, Europe/Asia: Procure locally
Telephone connection Standard
Monitor speaker Standard
Automatic voice message No
Voice request No
On hook dial Standard
Tone transmission Standard
Pause Standard
Pulse/tone selection Standard
Chain dialling Standard
Reception mode selection Standard
Automatic fax/phone change No
Reception mode switch over (remote) No
Answering machine interface No
Reception mode switching timer No
Auto answer delay time Standard (UP mode)
Busy tone detection Standard
Silent ringing detection 1300hz/16hz) No
37
Printer Feature
General Specification of Printer Controller
DMR15S/18S/18D
CPU Destiny ASIC D8401A 75MHz (PowerPC 401 microprocessor embedded)
Memory Standard: 16MB SDRAM
Optional: Ricoh original 32MB or 64MB or128MB
Max capacity: 144MB
Hard Disk Drive Not Available
Printer Desc Lang PCL5e , PCL6 , Option: PostScript2 Compatible
Maximum DMR15S 15ppm (A4 LEF / Letter LEF)
Continuous DMR18S 18ppm (A4 LEF / Letter LEF)
Print Speed DMR18S/18D: One side printing 18ppm (A4 LEF / Letter LEF), Duplex printing more than 15ppm
Print Resolution PCL5e PCL6 PS2
300/600 dpi*4 600dpi 300dpi/600dpi
Host Interface Standard: Parallel Port IEEE1284 (ECP), Option: Network Port (100BASE-TX/10BASE-T)
Network Protocol TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk (Auto Switching)
(NIC option reqd)
MIB support MIB II, SNMP Printer MIB and Host Resource MIB (RFC1759), RICOH Private MIB
Operation Panel Mainframes Operation Panel is commonly used for Printer functions (Printer Key Top is on left side of
LCD)
LCD Language Same as mainframe
Win Win NT WinNT
95/98/Me 3.51 WorkStation 4.0 Server 4.0 Server 4.0 Server 4.0
TSE Enterprise Ed.
PCL5e Yes - Yes (SP6a or Yes (SP6 or Yes (SP6a or -
above) above) above)
PCL 6 Yes - Yes (SP6a or Yes (SP6 or Yes (SP6a or -
above) above) above)
PS2 Yes - Yes - Yes -
Drivers Win2000 Win Mac8.x/9.x/
Pro Server Server Terminal Advanced Datacenter 3.1*2 (X)*1
Svc Server Server
PCL5e Yes Yes Yes - - - -
PCL 6 Yes Yes Yes - - - -

PS2 Yes Yes - - - - Yes (PPD)
Supported Driver For PCL5e, PCL6: 1.English, 2.German, 3.French, 4.Italian, 5.Spanish, 6.Dutch, 7.Swedish, 8.Norwegian,
Language 9.Danish, 10.Czech, 11.Hungarian, 12.Finnish, 13.Polish, 14.Portuguese, (15.Traditional Chinese,
(Localization) 16.Simplified Chinese)*3
For PostScript2: 1.English, 2.German, 3.French, 4.Italian, 5.Spanish, 6.Dutch, 7.Swedish 8.Norwegian
9.Danish
Supported Driver For PCL5e, PCL6: 1.English, 2.German, 3.French, 4.Italian, 5.Spanish, 6.Dutch, 7.Swedish, 8.Norwegian,
Language 9.Danish, 10.Czech, 11.Hungarian, 12.Finnish, 13.Polish, 14.Portuguese, (15.Traditional Chinese,
(Localization) 16.Simplified Chinese)*3
For PostScript2: 1.English, 2.German, 3.French, 4.Italian, 5.Spanish, 6.Dutch, 7. Swedish 8. Norwegian 9.
Danish
UNIX Filter (PS2) *5 Solaris HP UX Red Hat Red Hat SCO OpenServer AIX 4.3 AIX 5L
2.6,7,8 10.x, 11.0 Linux 6.x Linux 7 5.x
Installer Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes TBA
Device Option Yes Yes - Yes - TBA TBA
Utility Software SmartNetMonitor for Client / Admin (Win95/98/Me/NT4.0/2000)
Printer Utility for Mac (PS option is required)
Fonts Resident 45 PCL fonts (35 Intellifonts + 10 TrueType Fonts), 80 PS fonts (only available with PS option)
Euro currency font (PCL and PS)
Download 1. Possible to download fonts by using PCLs or PJLs command.
2. Possible to download fonts to Mac by using Printer Utility for Mac.
Note*1: The support of Windows ME and Mac OS10 will be officially announced after the release of these OS.
Note*2: Windows 3.1 driver is not included in the CD. It is possible to request this by the customisation process
38
Note*3: Traditional / Simplified Chinese are not included in standard CD-ROM. These languages will be offered for
China/Taiwan model. Printer controller adapted for duplex will not support these languages
Note *4: Both 300/600dpi is selectable from the printer driver
Note *5: PS2 option is required. Unix filter will be released in Jan 02
Supported Paper Sizes for Printer Controller
Please see the following chart for Supported paper Size for Model K-C1 printer controller.
S means SEF, L means LEF, Y= Size detection available, N= Not Available,
*= Select size from panel, C= Enter size from panel
Paper Size Standard Input Bank Duplex Bypass

(Width*Length) NA EU Asia NA EU Asia
1 Ledger-S 11 * 17 inch Y * * Y Y Y Y *
2 Legal-S 8.5 * 14 inch Y * * Y Y Y Y *
3 Letter-S 8.5 * 11 inch Y * * Y Y Y Y *
4 Letter-L 11 * 8.5 inch Y Y Y Y Y Y Y *
5 Half Letter-S 5.5 * 8.5 inch * * * * * * N *
6 Half Letter-L 8.5 * 5.5 inch N N N N N N N *
7 Executive-S 7.25 * 10.5 inch * * * * * * Y *
8 Executive-L 10.5 * 7.25 inch N N N * * * Y *
9 A3-S 297 * 420 mm * Y Y Y Y Y Y *
10 B4-S 257 * 364 mm * * * * * * Y *
11 A4-S 210 * 297 mm * Y Y Y Y Y Y *
12 A4-L 297 * 210 mm Y Y Y Y Y Y Y *
13 B5-S 182 * 257 mm * * * * * * Y *
14 B5-L 257 * 182 mm * * * * * * Y *
15 A5-S 148 * 210 mm N N N * * * Y *
16 A5-L 210 * 148 mm * Y Y * * * N *
17 Folio-S 8.25 * 13 inch * * * * * * Y *
18 Foolscap-S 8.5 * 13 inch Y Y Y * * * Y *
19 F-S 8 * 13 inch * * * * * * Y *
20 Com10 Env-S 4.125 * 9.5 inch N N N N N N N *
21 Monarch Env-S 3.875 * 7.5 inch N N N N N N N *
22 C6 Env-S 114 * 162 mm N N N N N N N *
23 C5 Env-S 162 * 229 mm N N N N N N N *
24 DL Env-S 110 * 220 mm N N N N N N N *
25 8K-S 267 * 390 mm * * * * * * N *
26 16K-S 195 * 267 mm * * * * * * N *
27 16K-L 267 * 195 mm * * * * * * N *
28 Custom Paper 90 to 297 mm *
Size at bypass 148 to 432 mm N N N N N N N C
Non-Printable Area
PCL6: 4.2mm each edge
PS2: 4mm each edge
Printable Area
[Note] The printable area may depend on the paper size,
printer language and printer driver setting
39
Network Interface Board (Option)
Network Interface Board is necessary for network printing.
Model NIB DPO3000E (NetSilicon DPI)

Topology Ethernet 100BASE-TX / 10BASE-T(auto detected)
Network Interface 1 x RJ45
Cables Requirement:
UTP/STP Cable
Category (Type5) or better
Frame Type EthernetII, IEEE802.3, IEEE802.2, Ethernet_SNAP
Protocol TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk, (Auto Switching)
Network Operating Systems Novell NetWare 3.x, 4.x, 5.0 and Intranetware
Microsoft Windows NT4.0/2000
Microsoft Windows 95/98
Mac OS 8.x/9.x
Other functions for Printing IPP 1.0 support
Other function for Maintenance Standard Web Browser access to HTML
Management Access Program (MAP) utility
Telnet capability for TCP/IP
Netware setup (NWSETUP) utility
Driver Specification
Operation System Brands Remarks

PJL Basic format is based on HP
? ? LJ4000/5000. Extended
specifications are based on Ricohs
specification.
PCL5e Wins3.1, Ricoh, Savin, Resource: Software2000,
Driver Win95/98, Gestetner(US), NRG, development: Ricoh. Equivalent to
WinNT4.0/2000 infotec, Lanier HP LJ4000/5000. Compatibility is
in conformity to HP LJ4000/5000.
PCL6 Wins3.1, Ricoh, Savin, Resource: Software2000,
Driver Win95/98, Gestetner(US), NRG, development: Ricoh. Equivalent to
WinNT4.0/2000 infotec, Lanier HP LJ4000/5000. Protocol level is
2.0.
PS2 Win95/98, Generic Development: Destiny. Emulate
Driver WinNT4.0/2000 Adobe PostScript Level 2.0.
PS PPD Mac OS 8.x/9.x Generic Development: Destiny. Support of
Mac OS 10 is to be announced
40
Driver Function
Major Drivers Function are as follows.
( Yes= available, No=not available, ** indicates default settings)
SETTING PCL5e/6 PS2 SELECTION REMARKS

(Display Name) (Tab name) (Tab name) OPTIONS
User ID: Yes Yes Type 8 alphanumeric User ID is used to identify the
(Setup) (Setup) (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) user associated with a job. It can
characters. be monitored by Smart Net
Monitor for Admin/Client to
identify the user in the job
history (Per job basis).
Layout: Yes Yes 1 page per sheet**
(Setup) (Setup) 2 pages per sheet
4 pages per sheet
6 pages per sheet
9 pages per sheet
16 pages per sheet
Page Order: Yes No Right, then Down** Enabled only if Layout is set
(Setup) Down, then Right more than 2 pagers per sheet.
Left, then Down
Down, then Left
Duplex Yes Yes Off**
(Only available (Setup) (Setup) Open to Left(Side
with Binding)
DMR18S18D) Open to Top(Top
Binding)
Booklet
Custom Paper Yes Yes Measurement Unit :
(Paper) (Paper) cm or Inch
Paper Selection Yes Yes Same paper for all
(Paper) (Paper) pages**
Different paper for
first page
Use slip sheet
Resolution Yes Yes PCL5e/6: only 600fpi
(Print Quality) (Print Quality) PS2: 300/600dpi**
selectable
Edge Smoothing Yes Yes On** When this function On,
(Print Quality) (Print Quality) Off approximately 1200 dpi
appearance
Toner Saver Yes Yes Off**
(Print Quality) (Print Quality) On
Page Protect Yes Yes Auto** Refer to 3.3.5 Page Protect for
(Print Quality) (Print Quality) On details
Watermark Yes Yes (None)** Driver has 5 build in watermarks.
(Watermarks) (Watermarks) CONFIDENTIAL etc. User can create others.
User Code Yes Yes Displays up to 8 This is used for account
(Statistics) (Personality) numeric characters management of the user or the
group (as a guideline). It can be
monitored by Smart Net
Monitor for Admin to refer to
the accumulated statistics.
41
Image of PCL 5e Printer

Driver (Setup Screen)
Image of PS Printer Driver

(Setup Screen)
Printer utility for Mac
This software provides several convenient functions for printing from Macintosh clients. This utility
was originally bundled with MFPs controller options and LPs that supports Adobe PostScript3, and
is installed into Apple Macintosh Clients connected to the MFPs and LPs through EtherTalk
network. Therefore, K-C1 not having Adobe Genuine Postscript, this feature will not be fully
supported. By using this software, Macintosh customers can download PS fonts/files to printers
memory, change Printer Name/Zone etc.
Note: Mac is a trademark of Apple Computer Inc. in several countries. When this utility name is
used in leaflet, catalogue or other materials, the following description must be added.
42
Menu structure
After launching this utility, the Menu bar below appears (File, Edit, Utility and Help).
By selecting each menu, several functions are shown in each dropdown list.
File Edit Utility Help

Download PS Fonts Undo Download PostScript File About Help
Display Printers Cut Select Zone Display Help
Fonts
Initialize Printers Copy Display Printer Status
Disk
Page Setup Paste Launch Dialogue Console
Print Fonts Catalog Clear
Print Fonts Sample Select
All
Rename Printer Font
Restart Printer Size
Quit
Functions
- File Menu -
Download PS Fonts
Download Adobe PS Type1 Fonts to printers memory
The downloaded fonts to printers memory will be deleted when printing device restarts or
power off.
Display Printers Fonts
The names of downloaded font are displayed on this Utility Screen. Also, it is available to
delete the downloaded fonts in this function.
Page Setup
Setup the paper size to print Printer Font Catalog.
Print Font Catalog
Print the names of available fonts.
Rename Printer
Display Printer Name shown in Chooser and allow customer to change the printer name
(Up to 31 alpha/numeric characters).
Restart Printer
Restart the printer from this utility.
- Utility Menu
Download PostScript File
Download PostScript Files to printer
Select Zone
Change current Zone to another
Display Printers Status
Display Printer Name, Zo ne Name, Total VM capacity, Free VM capacity, Total
Disk Space and Free Disk space.
Launch Dialogue Console
Open editor to create, update, save and download PS files interactively (This function is for
skilful customers in handling PostScript files).
[Note]: Initialize Printers Disk and Print Fonts Sample will NOT be supported for the DMR15S/18S/18D
43
Localization
English only
System Requirement
Mac Hardware PowerPC
Mac OS MacOS8.x, 9.x
Network EtherTalk
Supported engines DMR15S/18S/18D
PostScript Type 1018 PostScript level2 Compatible
Unix Support
Printing out from Unix is supported. Since the DMR15S/18S/18D is not a GW architecture
machine, the Super Option is not available.
Ricoh will release a Unix filter to support output from the unix environment. This will be available
through the web
Resident Fonts
Even though the DMR15S/18S/18D does not carry a HDD, font storage is available on RAM
memory. These fonts are stored temporarily, and once you turn off the power, reset, or switch the
PDL such as from PCL to PS, the stored font will not remain.
PCL Fonts
45 PCL Resident fonts are installed, 10 True Type Fonts and 35 Intellifonts.
TrueType Fonts (10 Fonts)

Arial Times New Bold
Arial Bold Times New Bold Italic
Arial Italic Times New Italic
Arial Bold Italic Symbol
Times New Wingdings
Intellifonts (35 Fonts)
CG Times Medium Antique Olive Medium
CG Times Bold Antique Olive Bold
CG Times Italic Antique Olive Italic
CG Times Bold Italic Garamond Antique
CG Omega Medium Garamond Halfbfett
CG Omega Bold Garamond Cursive
CG Omega Italic Garamond Cursive Halfbfett
CG Omega Bold Italic Marigold Medium
Coronet Medium Italic Albertus Medium
Clarendon Condensed Albertus Extra Bold
Universe Medium Courier Medium
Universe Bold Courier Bold
Universe Italic Courier Italic
Universe Bold Italic Courier Bold Italic
Universe Condensed Medium Letter Gothic Medium
Universe Condensed Italic Letter Gothic Bold
Universe Condensed Bold Letter Gothic Italic
Universe Condensed Bold Italic
[Note] Available fonts for PCL are only 45 fonts and not 80 fonts. It is always 45 fonts, even when PS option
is installed.
44
Euro Currency Support

For 80 Resident fonts & Soft TT Fonts ,Symbol set 12J, 5M, 9U, 19L, 5T,9E,19U support EURO.
For Soft Intellifont & Soft PS Font Symbol Set 19L, 5T , 9E,19U support EURO.
PS Fonts
80 PS Resident fonts are used.(Only available with PS option)
Arial Times New Bold
Arial Bold Times New Bold Italic
Arial Italic Times New Italic
Arial Bold Italic Symbol
Times New Wingdings
CG Times Medium Antique Olive Medium
CG Times Bold Antique Olive Bold
CG Times Italic Antique Olive Italic
CG Times Bold Italic Garamond Antique
CG Omega Medium Garamond Halfbfett
CG Omega Bold Garamond Cursive
CG Omega Italic Garamond Cursive Halfbfett
CG Omega Bold Italic Marigold Medium
Coronet Medium Italic Albertus Medium
Clarendon Condensed Albertus Extra Bold
Universe Medium Courier Medium
Universe Bold Courier Bold
Universe Italic Courier Italic
Universe Bold Italic Courier Bold Italic
Universe Condensed Medium Letter Gothic Medium
Universe Condensed Italic Letter Gothic Bold
Universe Condensed Bold Letter Gothic Italic
Universe Condensed Bold Italic
Times Palatino-Italic
Times-Bold Palatino-BoldItalic
Times-Italic Courier
Times-BoldItalic Courier-Bold
ITC Avant Garde Courier-Italic
ITC Avant Garde-Demi Courier-BoldItalic
ITC Avant Garde-BookOblique New Century Schoolbook
ITC Avant Garde-DemiOblique New Century Schoolbook-Bold
Helvetica New Century Schoolbook-Italic
Helvetica-Bold New Century Schoolbook-BoldItalic
Helvetica-Oblique ITC Bookman
Helvetica-BoldOblique ITC Bookman-Demi
Helvetica-Narrow ITC Bookman-LightItalic
Helvetica-Narrow-Bold ITC Bookman-DemiItalic
Helvetica-Narrow-Oblique ITC Zapf Chancery
Helvetica-Narrow-BoldOblique ITC Zapf Dingbats
Palatino Symbol
Palatino-Bold
45
Memory Specification
Basic specification of Additional Memory (printer):
144Pin SDRAM-DIMM
PC100
CL (CAS Latency) = 2
Access time: 6ns
3.3Volt
Capacity: 32MB, 64MB, 128MB
Number of pages stored in the memory when collating:

[Test condition]
OS: Windows 98SE
Resolution: 600dpi
Collate=ON
Copies=2
Test 1 5000 letters.doc

Word 2000, total 200 pages (5000 letters each page) [A4]
Collation Paper PDL Std 48MB 80MB 144MB
Method Direction (16MB) (add32MB) (add64MB) (add 128MB)
Non LEF 5e 107 200 (all) - -
Rotate 6 108 200 (all) - -
PS2 70 200 (all) - -
SEF 5 102 200 (all) - -
6 104 200 (all) - -
PS2 69 200 (all) - -
Rotate Tray1: LEF 5 N/A 40 77 150
Tray2: SEF 6 N/A 41 78 152
PS2 N/A 41 78 151
Test 2 B3068637.pdf
Acrobat Reader 4.05, total 92 pages [Letter]
Non LEF 5e 27 92 (all) - -
Rotate 6 57 92 (all) - -
PS2 18 50 92 (all) -
SEF 5 36 92 (all) - -
6 62 92 (all) - -
PS2 36 92 (all) - -
Rotate Tray1: LEF 5 N/A 76 92 (all) -
Tray2: SEF 6 N/A 92 (all) - -
PS2 N/A 28 41 92 (all)
46
Test 3 Mopresn1.ppt
PowerPoint2000 B/W print, total 200pages [Letter]
Non LEF 5e 45 200 (all) - -
Rotate 6 52 200 (all) - -
PS2 42 200 (all) - -
SEF 5 45 200 (all) - -
6 45 200 (all) - -
PS2 45 200 (all) - -
Rotate Tray1: LEF 5 N/A 94 176 200 (all)
Tray2: SEF 6 N/A 103 195 200 (all)
PS2 N/A 103 195 200 (all)
Test 4 Mopresn1.ppt
PowerPoint2000 Color print, total 200pages [Letter]
Non LEF 5e 5 23 43 77
Rotate 6 3 22 43 83
PS2 3 16 32 63
SEF 5 4 16 34 72
6 3 23 43 83
PS2 3 16 34 66
Rotate Tray1: LEF 5 N/A 13 23 44
Tray2: SEF 6 N/A 13 24 46
PS2 N/A 7 15 31
Note1) These tests are for your reference. The stored pages will greatly depend not only on memory
capacity, but the combination of OS, PDL, print settings, memory condition, type of data etc.
Note2) Additional memory required is printer memory, which is independent of copier memory.
47
Finishing Features
Auto Document Feeder
Original size: A5 - A3 (SEF), 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 - 11 x 17 (SEF)
Original weight: 52 - 105 g/m2 , 14 - 28 lbs.
Stack capacity: 30 sheets (80 g/m2 , 20 lbs.)
Power consumption: 25w or less
Dimensions (W x D x H): 550 x 470 x 90 mm, 21.6 x 18.5 x 3.55
Weight: 7kg (15.4lbs)
Auto Reverse Document Feeder (only for DMR18D machine)

Original size: A5 - A3 (SEF), 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 - 11 x 17 (SEF)
Original weight
Simplex original: 40 - 128 g/m2 , 10 - 34 lbs.
Duplex original: 52 105g/ m2 , 14 - 28 lbs.
Stack capacity 50 sheets (80 g/m2 , 20 lbs.)
Power consumption: 50w or less
Dimensions(W x D x H): 550 x 470 x 130 mm, 21.6 x 18.5 x 5.1
Weight: 10kg (22.05lbs)
Paper Bank (500 sheets x 1)

Paper size: A5 - A3(SEF), 5 1/2 x 8 1/2(SEF) - 11 x 17(SEF)
Paper weight: 60-105 g/m2 , 16 - 28 lbs.
Paper capacity: 500 x 1 tray (80 g/m2 , 20 lbs.)
Power consumption: 30W or less
Weight: 12 kg, 26.5 lbs. or less
Paper Bank (500 sheets x 2)

Paper size: A5 - A3(SEF), 5 1/2 x 8 1/2(SEF) - 11 x 17(SEF)
Paper weight: 60-105 g/m2 , 16 - 28 lbs.
Paper capacity: 500 x 2 trays (80 g/m2 , 20 lbs.)
Power consumption: 30W or less
Weight: 25 kg, 55.1 lbs. or less
Supply Specification
Yield
Toner Cartridge: Average 9K Copies / Cartridge
Developer: Average 60K Copies/ bag
Note: * A4, 6% chart is used to measure the above yield.
* Storage period for toner and developer is max. 1 year.
Interchangeability
Model Item DMR15S/18S/18D PMR26/N DMR15/18
DMR15S/18S/18D Toner m(new)
DMR15S/18S/18D developer m(new)
m : Can be used for this model

: Can not be used for this model
48
Transport and storage condition
Storage Transportation
DMR15S/18S/18D -30 ~ 40C -30 ~ 50C
Less than 80% RH 15% ~ 90% RH
Storage period: Stack Max: 3 carton
Max 12 months
Stack Max: 6 cartons
ADF -30 ~ 40C -30 ~ 50C
Less than 80% RH Less than 90% RH
Max 18 months
Stack Max:
14 cartons
ARDF -30 ~ 40C -30 ~ 50C
Less than 80% RH Less than 90% RH
Max 18 months
Stack Max:
12 cartons
Paper Tray Unit -30 ~ 40C -30 ~ 50C
(500 sheet x 1 Tray) Less than 80% RH Less than 90% RH
Storage period: Stack Max: 8 cartons
Max 18 months
Stack Max:
12 cartons
Paper Tray Unit -30 ~ 40C -30 ~ 50C
(500 sheet x 2 Trays) Less than 80% RH Less than 90% RH
Storage period: Stack Max: 4 cartons
Max 18 months
Stack Max:
8 cartons
49
Standard Accessories List
Main Unit: NRG Europe/ Asia/ Pacific

Model DMR15S/18S/18D
Model Name Nashuatec: 1505/1805/1805d
Rex-Rotary: 1508/1808/1808D
Gestetner 1502/1802/1802d
Product code B039, B040, B043-22
Destination Europe, Asia, Pacific
1 Platen Cover No
2 Operation Panel English
3 Operating Instruction No (provided by RE)
4 Installation Procedure No
5 Multi Language ROM (For Operation Panel) Yes
6 NECR (English) Yes
7 NECR(5 languages) No
8 Manual Holder No
9 Branding and product name plaque Yes (Gestetner, Nashuatec, Rex-Rotary)
10 Energy Star Sticker Yes (attached to machine)
11 Taiwan import regulation sticker No
12 Branding sticker for the operation panel Yes (Gestetner, Nashuatec, Rex-Rotary)
Remarks:
6) For European version, the standard ROM contains English, French, German, Italian, Spanish and
Dutch messages for copier feature. Default language is English. The other 8 languages (Swedish,
Norwegian, Danish, Finnish, Czech, Hungarian, Polish, and Portuguese) will be released on the
server for each sales company to download into IC card.
Options:
Model Platen Cover ADF ARDF
Model Name Platen Cover Type 1018 DF72 DF71
Destination US, Europe, Asia, Pacific US, Europe, US, Europe,
Asia, Pacific Asia, Pacific
1 Parts for Installation Yes Yes Yes
2 Installation Procedure (English) No Yes Yes
3 Installation Procedure No No No
(Multi languages)
4 NECR No No No
5 Decal (Non-Word) Yes Yes Yes
6 Decal (Multi languages) No Yes Yes
Options:
Model 1 tray Paper Bank 2 trays Paper Bank Copy Memory
Model Name PS460 PS450 Copier Feature
Expander Type 1018
Destination US, Europe, Asia, US, Europe, Asia, US, Europe, Asia,
Pacific Pacific Pacific
1 Parts for Installation Yes Yes Yes
50
2 Installation Procedure Yes Yes Yes
(English)
3 Installation Procedure No No No
(Multi languages)
4 NECR (English) No No No
5 Decal (Non-Word) Yes Yes No
6 Decal (Multi No No No
languages)
Options:
Model Fax Option
Model Name Fax Option Type 1018
Destination Europe
1 Parts for Installation Yes
2 Installation Procedure (English) Yes
3 Installation Procedure (Multi languages) No
4 Operation Manual (English) No
5 Operation Manual (Multi languages) No (provided by RE)
6 NECR (English) No
9 Decal (Non-Word) No
10 Decal (Multi languages) No
(provided by RE)
Options:
Model Printer controller
Model Name Printer Controller Type 1018
Destination Europe
3 Installation Procedure (Multi languages) No
4 Operation Manual (English) No
5 Operation Manual (Multi languages) No (provided by RE)
6 NECR No
9 Decal (Non-Word) No
10 Decal (Multi languages) No (provided by RE)
51
Environmental Specifications
Sound Power Level
Mainframe only Complete system
Copying 63dB or less 67dB or less
Stand-by 40dB or less 40dB or less
Ozone Emission Level

0.02 mg/m3 or less
Dust Level
0.075 mg/m3 or less
Styrene Emission Level

Less than 0.07 mg/m3
Identification of Plastic Components

All plastic components for the Model K-C1 which weight more than 25g are identified accordingly
as per DIN54840 or ISO11469.
Power consumption
Copier only Fax and Printer installed

Low Power mode Power consumption
Default interval
Recovery tim e
Sleep mode Power consumption
Default interval
Auto Off mode Power consumption
Default interval
Environmental Regulation
BAM Energy Star Swan Zesm Energy 2000
Yes Yes No No TBA
Comparison with DMR15/18

DMR15S/18S/18D DMR15/18
Sound Power Level 40Db stand-by, 63 operating 30Db stand-by, 66Db operating
Ozone Emission Level 0.02 mg/m3 or less 0.0019mg/m3 or less
Dust Level 0.075 mg/m3 or less 0.1mg/m3 or less
Styrene Emission Level Less than 0.07 mg/m3 less than 0.07mg/m3 or less
Power consumption TBA 450wh
BAM YES YES
Energy Star YES YES
Swan NO NO
Energy Star TBA YES
52
DMR35A/45A Product Information Guide
PRODUCT
INFORMATION GUIDE
DMR35A45A
Nashuatec 3525/4525
Rex Rotary 3508/4508
Gestetner 3502/4502
the specifications are subject to change. If in doubt or further details are
required, please contact NRGI Guernsey.
1
Executive Summary
When originally launched in 1998, the DMR35/S/45 series was a well-positioned product, but since then a
number of competitor products have been introduced which have created a very competitive market in this
segment.
The new DMR35A/45A (35 and 45cpm) contain many newly upgraded features such as a large touch-
screen LCD, 600 DPI printing, document server and network scanner. However the machine afe not
simply upgrades of the DMR35/S/45, but wholly new machines incorporating a completely new
architecture. This architecture (GW Architecture) will bring the cost of a fully configured MFP down, thus
increasing our connectivity rates. This will allow us to gain a considerable competitive advantage over our
competition.
Re-establish our position in this segment by offering a machine which contains many of the features
which have become the standard since the original launch of the DMR35/S/45 series.
Increase the strength of our mono-MFP range with all copiers now printing at 600dpi
To increase unit placements and market share.
To encourage greater connectivity and digitalisation.
Key Product Attributes
Large LCD Panel.

Document Server with 10GB HDD
600 DPI Printing
Much improved warm-up times.
Greater productivity.
GW architecture delivering fully configured MFPs at a far lower price.
Target Markets
The DMR35A is targeted at the walk-up environment in the small to middle office, where the machine will
be shared with between 3 to 10 users
The DMR45A is targeted at a workgroup in the small to middle office, where the machine will be shared
between 20 and 30 users
As a fully configured machine, both machines can also be targeted as a core document solution MFP in the
large office.
2
The main machines, the DMR35A/45A, are targeted against are as follows:-
For DMR35A DMR45A

Canon IR330s/GP335 Canon IR400s/GP405
Xerox Document Center 332 Xerox Document Center 340
Konica 7033 Konica 7040
Toshiba DP3580 Toshiba DP4580
Sharp AR-336 Sharp AR-405
Minolta Dialta DI350
Mita PointSource Ai3010
Supplies
The supplies for the DMR35A/45A are:-
Toner
550g bottle
Average yield 23k A4 @ 6% coverage Unique
Developer
500g cartridge
Average yield 300k Unique
Drum
Average Yield 150k Unique
3
Product Overview
Product Concept
The DMR35A/45A are two new machines with copy/print speeds of 35 and 45 pages per minute. They
have been designed to replace the DMR35/S/45 series, and include a number of new features which the
DMR35/S/45 series did not have and which have become standards for machines in this sector since the
launch of the DMR35/S/45 series.
Large Touch Screen LCD
The DMR35A/45A have a large touch screen LCD which is the same size as the Mojito. Since the
introduction of the DMR35/S/45 series, a touch screen LCD has become a standard for copiers in this
segment. The fact that our replacement machine has this puts us on a level with our competition.
User Tools/Counter Check Modes Program Clear Modes Energy Saver Interrupt
Document Server Key Touch Panel Screen

Copy Key Sample Copy
Application Keys
(Fax, Printer, Scanner)
4
Image Quality
Product Resolution Scanning Marking

Maximum When memory copy
DMR35A/45A 600 dpi 256 shades of gray 4 levels 4 levels
per dot
DMR35/S/45 400 dpi 256 shades of gray 16 levels 16 levels
per dot (option HDD required)
DMR22/27 600 dpi 256 levels shades of 4 levels 4 levels
gray per dot
Whereas the DMR35/S/45 series had a copy quality of 400dpi, the new DMR35A/45A copy at 600dpi.
The addition of the new DMR35A/45A means that all our mono MFPs from 15 to 105cpm offer 600 dpi
image quality.
Network Scanning
With network scanning, the DMR35A/45A become highly productive black and white scanners with
superior image quality of 600dpi with 256 greyscales. The main benefit of this compared to the previous
SCSI scanners is that there is no longer the need for a PC to be located close by. Users can also scan and
send the image to any user on the network, without first having to retrieve the scanned document from a
PC. Please note that the scanner comes as part of a printer/scanner kit and cannot be purchased
separately. Like the printer option, the printer/scanner kit has Desktop Binder, SmartNet Monitor and PC-
Fax, but it also has ScanRouter so that users can effortlessly scan and distribute documents to any other
user on the network.
The scanner option has a limit of 100 users - this can be expanded to 500 users with the addition of the
User Enhance Kit (or NV RAM) option.
Improved Fax Capability
The fax option on the DMR35A/45A has such a powerful specification that it can effectively be positioned
as a central fax of a division or workgroup in middle to large office. It has 3 key features.
High Speed
1) Modem speed 33.6Kbps
2) Transmission speed: 3 secs. (2 seconds with JBIG)
3) Scanning speed of 43 secs., compared to 99 secs. for the DMR35 and 75 secs. for the DMR45
Multi-Port
With the DMR35A/45A fax option one can have up to 3 lines available simultaneously, once additional G3
and G4 (ISDN) are installed.
Quick Dial Maximum of 1200 numbers

Conventional fax machines usually have a quick dial feature limited to a maximum of 56 since these use a
hard key for quick dials. The touch screen on the DMR35A/45A allows this maximum to be increased to
400, and even 1200 with the JBIG option.
5
PC-Fax Software
Unlike the conventional PC-Fax option (TR-29), DMR35A/45A PC-Fax (Software) will be provided as a
software bundle with Printer Kit or Printer / Scanner Kit. This is to prevent the user using the PC-Fax as a
printer without purchasing the Printer or Printer / Scanner Kit.
This PC-Fax allows you to transmit fax messages from your PC, which will reduce the number of steps you
take when you send your fax. It will not receive the fax data as electronic data into your PC. For this
function, you will need to purchase a full version of ScanRouter software.
This software is called PC-Fax.
Document Server
The previous DMR35/S/45 series did not possess a document server feature. The document server on the
new DMR35A/45A is now more advanced than even the Mojito series. The document server on the
DMR55A/70A could only store copy and printer data, with printing as the only way of output.
Document Server for the DMR55A/70A

Input Storage Output
1. Copy HDD Printing

2. Printer
4.3GB
The new document server for the DMR35A/45A can now store not only copy and printer data, but PC-
fax and scanner data as well. This data can then be stored on a hard disk twice the size of the Mojito For
output, one can still print the data but one can also re-fax and re-distribute. The principals advantage of the
document server is that you can merge print and copy jobs to be finished as one document.
Document Server for the DMR35A/45A

Input Storage Output
1. Copy
2. Printer (1) Printing
3. Fax (Transmission) HDD
10GB+ (2) Re-Fax
4. PC-Fax
(Transmission) (3) Re-Distribution
6
Document Explorer - Desktop Binder
Desktop Binder software allows one to use the Document Server function from a networked PC.
With this it is now possible to view, search, print, re-fax and delete the document stored on the Document
Server function direct from the PC.
Shorter Warm-up Times
The combination of a heat roller with ultra thin shell, two internal heaters and a low temperature fusing
toner, give the new DMR35A/45A models a fast warm-up speed. This is much quicker not only than our
own DMR35/S/45 series but much of our competition.
There is considerable evidence to suggest that many customers do not use this feature due to the long
warm-up times on the market at the moment. With the new DMR35A/45A, we expect to see customers
making far greater use of this feature and with more and more environmental standards being introduced
such as ISO 14001 this will be seen as a key selling point of our machine. In recognition of these shorter
warm-up times, the DMR35A/45A, has received the first Copier of the Future award from the Internal
Energy Agency (IEA) for a mid-range network capable digital copier.
Adonic-C2b (35cpm)
Product Name DMR35A DMR35 Canon Xerox Konica Toshiba
IR330S/ 332DC 7033 DP3580
GP335
CPM 35 35 33 32 33 35
Warm-up 15 85 81 60 90 90
Time(sec.)
Recovery 10 83 NA NA NA NA
Time(sec.)
DMR45A
Product Name DMR45A DMR45 Canon Xerox Konica Toshiba
IR400S/ 340DC 7040 DP4580
GP405
CPM 45 45 40 40 40 45
Warm-up 20 100 81 60 90 420
Time(sec.)
Recovery 15 98 NA NA NA NA
Time(sec.)
In recognition of these shorter warm-up times, the DMR35A, has received the first Copier of the Future
award from the Internal Energy Agency (IEA) for a mid-range network capable digital copier. The main
criterea against which this award were given are as follows
7
Award-winning machine
Project Criteria DMR35A DMR45A

Recovery Time 10 seconds 10 seconds 15 seconds
(from Sleep mode)
Sleep Mode Power 10W 6w (11v) 6w (11v)
7w (220v) 7w (220v)
Duplex Productivity 75% (30cpm) More than 95% More than 95%
80% (40cpm)
Auto Shut-down Time 10 seconds 60 seconds 60 seconds
(Default time to sleep mode) (acceptable for 60sec. Default)
Higher Productivity
Improved 1 to 1 Document Feeder Speed

The DMR35/S/45 series has a 5cpm difference between mainframe and document feeder speed. With the
DMR35A/45A the 1 to 1 document feeder speed is much enhanced and now matches engine speed.
1 to 1 Copy Speed
(1) DMR35A
Product ADF 1 to 1 Copy Speed (cpm) Continuous Speed (cpm)
DMR35A 35 35
DMR35 30 35
(2) DMR45A
Product ADF 1 to 1 Copy Speed (cpm) Continuous Speed (cpm)
DMR45A 45 45
DMR45 40 45
Enhanced Duplex Productivity

Like the Bellini, we are now able to offer 95% duplex productivity, both with continuous and 1 to 1 duplex
speed.
(1) Continuous Duplex Speed

Product Duplex Continuous Speed (cpm)
DMR35A/45A 35 / 45
DMR35/S/45 28 / 36
*Note: The data above is a continuous copy speed, not a speed measured by BLI method. The
productivity data by BLI method will be provided later when it is ready.
(2) ADF 1 to 1 Duplex Speed (1 to 2)

Product Duplex ADF 1 to 1 Speed (cpm)
DMR35A/45A 35 / 45
DMR35/S/45 13 / 16
8
Stamp Functions
1. Page Numbering
Absent from the previous DMR35/S/45 series, and present on most of our competitors machines. This
function prints page numbers onto copies.
2. Date Stamp
Again this feature was absent from previous DMR35/S/45 series and can be found on most of our
competitors machines in this sector. This function prints the date on copies
3. Preset Stamp
This function prints preset messages on copies. The messages for preset stamp are available in English,
German, French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Norwegian, Swedish, Danish, Finish, Portuguese, Czech,
Hungarian, Polish and Japanese, and are all pre-installed on the hard drive.
4. Background Numbering
Function prints numbers on the background of copies.
5. User Stamp
Prints custom messages on copies.
Please note stamp functions 3-5 are only available if either the standard memory is expanded by 32MB, or
if a printer or printer/scanner options are added.
Please note that the 32MB should be offered for copier and copier/fax users who need these functions. If
printer or printer scanner option are added, then 64MB should be offered. The reason for this is that there
is only one Dimm slot, so the 32MB Dimm has to be discarded and replaced by the 64MB.
New Toner Bottle

DMR35A/45A employs new toner bottle using environment-friendly material.
This toner bottle :

1. uses PET as its base material which is not only thin but strong enough.
2. is almost half the weight compared with the current Ricoh toner bottle,
which makes it possible to contribute still further to resource conservation.
GW Architecture
The DMR35A/45A is our first GW architecture machine. GW architecture means that you no longer need
separate controller boards for each function; instead all the controller boards are combined in the main
copier controller. To add the printer and fax functionality all is needed is a kit rather than a controller.
9
Previous MFPs DMR35A/45A with GW Architecture
Copy/Engine Engine
HDD Controller HDD RAM NIC
Controller
RAM
Printer Scanner Fax Main(Copy) Controller

Controller Controller Controller
NIC NIC NCU
Printer Printer/Scanner
RAM RAM DIMM DIMM
FAX FCU
DIMM NCU
RAM
RAM
This has a number of key advantages.
1) The kit is a lot cheaper than a controller which means that the configured price for a copier with
printer option is much reduced.
2) Installation is a lot easier and quicker. This should help break down customer preconceptions that
installing printers, faxes etc is a complicated and expensive process. Instead we are offering them a
quick and cost effective upgrade.
3) Faster R&D. With previous MFPs, the printer controller was launched a few months after the
mainframe. This is because the copier engine had to be finalised, before a third party began to work on
the printer controller. With GW architecture, they are now developed in conjunction and for the first
time, we will launching the printer option at the same time as the mainframe.
New Printer Language RPCS

RPDL is a new printer language developed by Ricoh. It is faster than HP's PCL XL language and has a
very easy-to-use graphical interface. The driver interface is very graphical and is based around the principle
of one click. Users no longer have to go through numerous screens to arrange their settings - they can
save their settings as icons, so that all they need do is click on the relevant icon. Further information can be
found on RPCL Sales Handbook in section 11. Please note that RPCS does not support LEF from the
bypass tray as this causes jams.
10
Product Configuration & Options
Configuration
*Sheet Through DF Platen Cover

*Multi Tray Finisher
*1 bin Tray
*Bridge Unit
FIN 1000
External Tray
*Mainframe:
(500 sheet x 2 trays,
50 sheet Bypass,
Mail Box Duplex unit)
MB Bridge unit
1500 sheet LCT

Paper Bank
New Option for DMR35A/45A
New bridge unit is needed to connect either finisher, external tray or mailbox finisher to mainframe.
Mailbox bridge unit is required to connect multitray finisher to mailbox.
Other Options
Copier: Fax: Printer / Scanner:

*Punch Unit (US 2/3 hole) *Fax Kit *Printer Option
*Punch Unit (EU 2/4 hole) *Additional G3 port unit *Printer/Scanner Option
*Punch Unit *G4 unit *64MB Memory
JBIG (common with
(Scandinavian 4 hole) *PS3
DMR22/27)
*32MB Memory for Stamp SAF (common with DMR22/27) *NIC
Key Counter Bracket Fax Stamp marker ink *IEEE 1394 I/F
Handset (only for NA)
11
Option Compatibility
DMR35/S/45 Compatibility DMR35A/45A

DF67 ARDF Sheet Through DF
SR 730 Finisher Multi Tray Finisher
Staple for Multi Tray Finisher
Staple Cartridge Type F (for SR 730)
Staple Cartridge for Multi Tray Finisher
PT300 1 bin Tray 1 bin Tray
3 hole Punch Unit Type 450 US 2/3 hole changeable Punch kit
2 hole Punch Unit Type 450 EU 2/4 hole changeable Punch kit
NA Scandinavian 4 hole Punch kit
Bridge Unit Type 450 Bridge Unit
NA 32MB memory for Stamp
Fax Option Type 450 Fax Unit
Fax Function Upgrade Type185

Fax Feature Expander Type 450
(Common for DMR15/18)
SAF memory (Local

Fax Feature Expander Fax HDD Type 460
Procurement: Commo n for DMR15/18)
NA Additional G3 port unit

ISDN Option (G4) Type 450 G4 unit
Printer Controller Type 450 Printer Option
Scanner Option Type 450 Printer/Scanner Option
NA 64MB Memory
PostScript 3 PS3 Option
Network Interface Card NIB-450E NIC
NA IEEE 1394 I/F
Platen Cover m ?
PS360 Paper Tray Unit m ?
RT36 Large Capacity Tray m ?
SR720 Finisher m ?
Staple Cartridge Type G (for SR720) m ?
External Output Tray Type 450 m ?
Key Counter Bracket Type H m ?
9-Bin Mailbox Option m ?
Mailbox Bridge Unit Type 460 m ?
Cabinet (Local Procurement) m ?
Marker Type 30 m ?
AD340 Duplex Unit Standard
Bypass Tray Type 340 Standard
Interchange Unit Type 340 Standard
Image Enhance Kit (1.7GB HDD) Type 450 HDD Standard
Electric Sort Kit Type 340 Not necessary
Expansion Box Type 450 Not necessary
Fax Stamp Type 450 Not necessary (included in ARDF)
NA (PC-Fax Software bundled with Printer and
PC-Fax Expander Type 450
Printer/Scanner unit.)
Printer Hard Disk Type450(for Font download) Not Necessary (Font can be downloaded in resident HDD)
m Can be used for this model Cannot be used with this model.
12
Option Correlation
o- must install together x- can not install together

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
Mailbox Bridge Unit

Mandatory
Printer/Scanner Unit
Multi Tray Finisher
Option
FAX Stamp Unit

32MB Memory
64MB Memory
400dpi JBIG
ISDN G4 Unit
Finisher 1000
SAF Memory
Platen Cover
External tray
Bridge Unit
Printer Unit
Paper Bank
Punch Unit
IEEE 1394
1 Bin Tray
FAX Unit
Purchasing
Mailbox
G3 Unit
ARDF
Option
LCT
PS3
1 ARDF x
2 Platen Cover x
3 1 Bin Tray
4 Bridge Unit
5 Paper Bank
6 LCT o
7 External tray o x x x x
8 Finisher 1000 o x x x x
9 Multi Tray Finisher o x x
10 Punch Unit o x x o x
11 Mailbox o x x
12 Mailbox Bridge o o
Unit
13 32MB Memory x
14 FAX Unit
15 G3 Unit o
16 ISDN G4 Unit o
17 SAF Memory o
18 400dpi JBIG o
19 FAX Stamp Unit o o
21 Printer Unit x o
22 Printer/Scanner x o
Unit
23 64MB Memory x o o
24 PS3 o o o
25 IEEE 1394 o o o
13
Configuration of GW architecture
F
or
NCU
P(F)
or 64MB
NIC 1394 FCU
P/S(F) PS3 RAM
Centro
Copy RAM
Resident Resident Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3

Program:C RAM:32MB
Program DIMM RAM DIMM
Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 NCU

1394
NIC FCU
F P(F)* P/S(F) PS3 RAM I/F
*
Copy
+F
+P
+FP
+PS
+FPS
: Mandatory
64MB RAM is mandatory for P or P/S option. :Option
* NIC is mandatory for P/S option.
* Fax kit of F DIMM and NCU&FCU board
* Fax DIMM is not necessary for C+F+P or C+F+P/S version

since Fax program is installed in P(F) DIMM and P/S(F) DIMM.
14
Supplies
The supplies for the DMR35A/45A are:-
Toner
550g bottle
Average yield 23k A4 @ 6% coverage Unique
Developer
500g cartridge
Average yield 300k Unique
Photo Conductor
Average Yield 150k Unique
15
Market Situation
European Market Situation
The DMR35A/45A fit into the segment between InfoSource segments 3 and 4. Please find below a review
of the current market situation in this segment. Please note that these percentages include both analogue
and digital products.
31-44cpm. 2000 Full Year Projection

Xerox
15%
Canon
4% Minolta
29%
5% Konica
6% Ricoh
8% NRG
10% 23%
Sharp
Others
45-69cpm. 2000 Full Year Projection
Xerox
13% Canon
29% Minolta
17% Konica
Ricoh
4% 8% NRG
11%
14% 4% Sharp
Others
The DMR35/S/45 series was our second generation of digital MFPs in the 31-44cpm category, and since
its introduction, the market has undergone a lot of changes. Many new machines have been introduced
since 1998, which deliver far better performance, functionality and price performance than the
DMR35/S/45 series. This can always be expected during the lifecycle of a product, but this particularly
affected the DMR35/S/45 because it had a longer lifecycle than originally expected.
The DMR35/S/45 series weak position is reflected in our 5% share of the 31-44cpm market, against a
6% share in 1999. Our position in the 45-69cpm market place is far stronger because we are now on our
second generation of 55-70cpm machines, and indeed we are expected to sell 10% more units than in
1999. In terms of overall market growth the 31-44cpm segment is expected to grow by 2% and the 45-69
segment is expected to decrease by 11%; over 75% of machines are expected to be digital.
Digital machines are expected to account for around 70% of units sold in 2001.
Source: All figures from the Infosource 1999 and 2000 Autumn Report
16
Major Competitors
The main competitors for the DMR35A/45A
DMR35A DMR45A
Many of the digital offerings above deliver better quality and performance than our DMR35/S/45 series.
The launch of these products in this arena is therefore of key importance in stealing a march from the
competition.
17
Product Plan Map
Little
Penguin
50
NAD 40 A-C2/c
40
= Digital
= Analogue
NAD40 A-C2/b
30
1998 1999 2000 2001
18
Copier DMR35A/45A DMR35/S/45

Copy Speed 35/45 35/45
Maximum Paper 2500 sheets 2500 sheets
Capacity
ACV 10/20K per month 10/20K per month
Maximum CV 50k per month (both machines) 40/50k per month
Lifetime 5 years or 3000k whichever comes first DMR35: 5 years or 2400k whichever
(both machines) comes first. DMR45: 5 years or
2400k whichever comes first.
Continuous copy C2b: 35 cpm (A4 / LT long edge feed,
speed No R/E)
C2c: 45 cpm (A4 / LT long edge feed,
No R/E)
One to one copy speed C2b: 35 cpm (A4 / LT long edge feed, DMR35: 30 cpm (A4 / LT long edge
No R/E) feed, No R/E)
C2c: 45 cpm (A4 / LT long edge feed, DMR45: 40 cpm (A4 / LT long edge
No R/E) feed, No R/E)
Resolution 600dpi DMR35/S/45: 400dpi
Gray Scale 256 levels
Warm-up time C2b: 15 seconds DMR35: 85 seconds
(from Main Switch off) C2c: 20 seconds DMR45: 100 seconds
Recovery time C2b: 10 seconds DMR35: 83 seconds
(from Auto Off mode) C2c: 15 seconds DMR45: 98 seconds
Enlargement 115, 122, 141, 200, 400% (EU)
Reduction 93, 82, 75, 71, 65, 50, 25% (EU) DMR35: 93,87,82,71,65,50,25% (EU)
*Both C2b and C2c have minimum 25% DMR45: 93,87,82,71,65,50,35% (EU)
reduction.
Zoom 25% - 400% in 1% step DMR35: 25% - 400% in 1% step
*Both C2b and C2c have 25% (EU)
Minimum reduction. DMR45: 35% - 400% in 1% step
(EU)
Printer DMR35A/45A DMR35/S/45

Print speed 35 / 45 ppm (600/300dpi) 35 / 45 ppm (600/400/300dpi)
Printer language RPCS, PCL6, PCL5e, PS3 PCL6, PCL5e, PS3
Resolution RPCS : 600dpi PCL5e : 600 / 300 dpi
PCL5e : 600 / 300 dpi PCL6 : 600dpi
PCL6 : 600dpi PS3 : 600 / 400 dpi
PS3 : 600 / 300 dpi
NIC Option Ethernet(100 base TX /10 base T)
IEEE1394 Option 2 ports (6 pin) N/A
Network protocol TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, Apple Talk TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, EtherTalk
(Auto Switching)
Memory capacity Standard : 32MB Standard : 8MB
Option : 1 x 64MB Option : up to 2 x 32MB
19
HDD Copier HDD: standard (more than 10GB) Copier HDD: mandatory option

RPCS driver Win95/98/Me, WinNT4.0, Win2000 N/A
(Win3.x on Web)
PCL drivers Win95/98/Me, WinNT4.0, Win2000 Win3.x, Win95/98, Win NT4.0
(Win3.x on Web)
PS drivers Win95/98/Me, WinNT4.0, Win2000 Win3.x, Win95/98/Me, Win NT4.0,
(Win3.x on Web), Mac7.6.1 or later Mac7.1 or later
Fonts 35 intelli fonts , 10 true type fonts, 1 bitmap,
136 Adobe type1 fonts,
Supported languages Mainframe : 16 languages Mainframe : 14 languages
PCL drivers : 16 languages PCL drivers : 14 languages
PS drivers : 9 languages PS drivers : 5 languages
Rotate sort Yes
Stapling Max. 4 position
Punching 2, 3 or 4 holes 2 or 3 holes
Form overlay Yes
Watermarks Yes
Rip once, print many Yes
Mailbox Optional 9bin mailbox
Font download 1. Possible to download fonts by using Yes (PCL5e)
PCLs or PJLs command.
2. Possible to download fonts to Mac by
using Printer Utility for Mac.
When compared to the machines the DMR35A/45A are due to replace, they offer features which not only
improve and update DMR35/S/45 machines, but ensure our new machines are prepared for future market
trends.
Comparison with Competitors
DMR35A DMR45A
20
At the time of writing, both the DMR35A/45A machines are expected to be approximately 5% higher in
price than their DMR35/S/45 counterparts. For that extra price, the customer will be getting a machine
with a far greater functionality, with better print quality, network scanning and a document server.
That is only the copier version of the DMR35A/45A however, as the printer version will be lower than the
DMR35/S/45 with printer controller (3% has been assumed). With the market for 31-69 copiers predicted
to have attachment rates of around 70%, this is going to be extremely attractive and any negative effect
from having a higher copier only price is likely to be limited.
The diagram below shows how this would affect the DMR35A; the DMR45A will have a similar pricing
structure.
NAD 30 Adonis-C2b NAD + printer Adonis-C2b +

printer
Cost per Copy
No definite figures are available but these assumed to be the same as for the DMR35/S/45 series.
21
Target Markets
Identifying Target Markets
The DMR35A/45A is aimed at the following markets.

The small workgroup in a small/medium sized office (35cpm) and a workgroup in a medium sized
office (45cpm). Both of these groups would be looking to replace an analogue or a first generation
digital copier.
Customers who are already used to the principle of multifunctionality and who are looking for a
machine with a lower cost of options.
Replacement of a conventional fax machine in a large office.
The increased hard-drive capacity allows us to offer the DMR35A/45A as a core document
solution MFP in the large office.
Targeted Prospects
The different people (all with their own specific role and decision criteria) involved in the decision making
process are:
Buyer: low operating costs, in line with current contractual arrangements and 'best value for money';
IT manager: connectivity issues, like manageability, upgradeability, reliability and Total Cost of
Ownership;
Operator/User (CRD environment only): ease of use, productivity, finishing and quality and
Financial manager: total cost of ownership and future-proof investment.
22
Overall Selling Points

Modular functionality
Easy configuration of options (GW Architecture)
Powerful document server.
Shorter warm-up times
High productivity
Improved functionality on previous DMR35/S/45 series which puts us on a level playing field with
our competitors

Digital = High Quality (600dpi)
35 and 45 cpm copy speed
Powerful finishing capabilities
Touch screen control panel

Multiple original printing and finishing as opposed to printing then copying
Versatile finishing and sorting options
35 and 45 ppm print speed
Powerful job storage features with the document server
New Ricoh proprietary printer language RPCS (Successor to IPDL-C)
IEEE 1394 Interface
Printer utility for Mac provides several convenient features for printing with Macintosh clients
Fax Selling Points

Modem Speed: 33.6Kbp
Scanning Speed: 43 seconds
Maximum: 3 Lines which are all able to work simultaneously
Has specifications as strong as many existing standalone faxes
Quick dial has a maximum 1200 numbers
23
The launch of The DMR35A/45A is critical to reclaim the successes the DMR35/S/45 had achieved in the
first eighteen months in the market. This means that this launch has to be carefully supported by a series of
Marcoms activities.
Introduce customers to the improved functionality, productivity and efficiency benefits of the new
machine, not just in comparison to the DMR35/S/45 series but with many of its competitor products.
To encourage greater use of the DMR35A/45A as a printer, thus increasing the print volume made on
our products.
To re-launch NRG in the 35-45cpm market place.
24
Product & Supply Logistic Data
Codes & Contents
Mainframe
Group Short Name Gestetner Model Rex Rotary Model Nashuatec Model Factory
Name Name Name
DMR35A 3502 3508 3525 RAI
DMR35A 3502 3508 4525 RPL
DMR45A 4502 4508 4525 RPL
DMR45A 4502 4508 4525 RAI
Paper handling options

DF70 ARDF
SR760 Multi-Tray Finisher
PT1045 1 Bin Tray
DIF1045BUCRAI Bridge Unit
Internal options
DIF1045FCRIC Fax Option for EU
DIF1045G3CRIC G3 Option for EU
DIF1045G4CRIC G4 Option for EU
DIF1045SCRIC Printer/Scanner Kit
DIF1045PXRIC Printer Kit
DMETYPEBP32XRIC 32 MB Memory
RC-210RAM64MBXRIC 64 MB Memory
DIF1045EXRIC NIC
DIF1045PSXRIC PostScript3
DIF1045FWXRIC IEEE 1394 I/F
DHPU451EUXRIC 2/4 hole changeable punch kit for EU
DIF1045FWXRIC Scandinavian 4 hole punch kit
TBA User Account Enhance Kit (NV-RAM)
25
OI Kits
Please note that all copier OIs are NRG branded, but the fax and printer OI are generic Ricoh products

DDK45AGB Copier Operating Instructions- English
DDK45AD Copier Operating Instructions- German
DDK45AF Copier Operating Instructions-French
DDK45AI Copier Operating Instructions- Italian
DDK45NL Copier Operating Instructions- Dutch
DDK45AE Copier Operating Instructions- Spanish
DDK45AS Copier Operating Instructions- Swedish
DDK45ACZ Copier Operating Instructions-Czech
DDK45AH Copier Operating Instructions-Hungarian
DDK45AN Copier Operating Instructions-Norwegian
DDK45AP Copier Operating Instructions-Portuguese
DDK45APL Copier Operating Instructions-Polish
DDK45ASF Copier Operating Instructions-Finnish
DDK45ADK Copier Operating Instructions-Danish

DDK45AFGB Fax Operating Instructions- English
DDK45AFD Fax Operating Instructions- German
DDK45AFF Fax Operating Instructions-French
DDK45AFI Fax Operating Instructions- Italian
DDK45AFNL Fax Operating Instructions- Dutch
DDK45AFE Fax Operating Instructions- Spanish
DDK45AFS Fax Operating Instructions- Swedish
DDK45AFCZ Fax Operating Instructions-Czech
DDK45AFH Fax Operating Instructions-Hungarian
DDK45AFN Fax Operating Instructions-Norwegian
DDK45AFP Fax Operating Instructions-Portuguese
DDK45AFPL Fax Operating Instructions-Polish
DDK45AFSF Fax Operating Instructions-Finnish
DDK45AFDK Fax Operating Instructions-Danish

DDK45APGB Printer Operating Instructions- English
DDK45APD Printer Operating Instructions- German
DDK45APF Printer Operating Instructions-French
DDK45API Printer Operating Instructions- Italian
DDK45APNL Printer Operating Instructions- Dutch
DDK45APE Printer Operating Instructions- Spanish
DDK45APS Printer Operating Instructions- Swedish
DDK45APCZ Printer Operating Instructions-Czech
DDK45APH Printer Operating Instructions-Hungarian
26
DDK45APN Printer Operating Instructions-Norwegian
DDK45APP Printer Operating Instructions-Portuguese
DDK45APPL Printer Operating Instructions-Polish
DDK45APSF Printer Operating Instructions-Finnish
DDK45APDK Printer Operating Instructions-Danish
Please note that contrary to the original information the scanner OI is included in the scanner box.
Supplies

DT33BLK Nashautec Toner
DT33BLK Gestetner Toner
DT33BLK Rex Rotary Toner
DDK5BLK Developer
DMU6CRIC OPC Drum DMR35/S/45
TBA Staple Set Cartridge 1*5000 Multi-Tray Finisher only
TBA Staple Refill Cartridge 3*5000 Multi-Tray Finisher only
CSC720 Staple Cartridge 4X3000 1000 Sheet Finisher only
Common items with Existing Models

Platen Cover DMR35/S/45, DMR35A/45A
SR720 1000-sheet Finisher DMR35/S/45, DMR35A/45A
PS360 Bank DMR35/S/45, DMR35A/45A
RT36 Large Capacity Tray DMR35/S/45, DMR35A/45A
CS360 Mailbox unit DMR35/S/45, DMR35A/45A
DIF460BU Mailbox Bridge unit DMR35/S/45, DMR35A/45A
DOT450 External Output Tray DMR35/S/45, DMR35A/45A
DKCBHXRIC Key Counter Bracket DMR35/S/45, DMR35A/45A
DKCBH Fax Stamp Ink DMR35/S/45, DMR35A/45A
Marker Type30 JBIG option Stinger-C/Russian-C, DMR35A/45A
27
Service Plan
Major technical enhancements
Using GW Architecture
Large touch screen LCD
High image quality, 600dpi
Large capacity HDD (standard)
Extremely short warm-up time
Expandability with Fax, Printer, and Network Scanner
ADVANTAGES FOR SERVICE ACTIVITIES
Installation
With the utilization of GW Architecture, it is relatively easy to add on multi-functional options
such as the Printer and Scanner.
It is now possible to upgrade the software for the controller, engine, NIB, printer and scanner
from one NIC card interface.
Note: This does not include the FCU software.
Maintenance visits
The touch-panel LCD with enlarged display is easier to read and provides for much greater
usability in both Service and User Modes.
With the use of a newly developed technology, the warm-up and recovery times have been
reduced as follows:
Warm-up Time: Recovery

Time:
DMR35A 85 sec 15 sec (Basic Model) 83sec 10 sec
(as compared to the DMR35) 85 sec 18 sec (Printer/Scanner Model)
DMR45A 100 sec 20 sec 98 sec 15 sec
(as compared to the DMR45)
Easier removal of mechanical units (e.g. transfer unit, fusing unit, development unit) and
replacement of PM parts will result in shorter maintenance time.
A longer mainframe PM interval (150K copies) will result in less service visits.
The latest firmware will be available through an internet web server.
Counter check and fax parameter adjustments are possible using the remote diagnostics
system (RDS), when the fax option is installed.
28
Customer Engineers
The following requirements should be considered when assigning field engineers for this model:
Copier Copier+fax Copier+printer Copier+scanner

Digital Copier * * * *
PPF (Plain Paper fax) *
G3 fax *
G4 fax *
Printer *
Scanner *
Customer engineers should have the following qualities:

Highly capable in customer instruction and technical support.
Highly motivated toward job completeness.
Highly capable in problem diagnosis and reporting.
Good time management and job planning skills.
SERVICE TRAINING
Timing: Before the first machine is delivered to the distributor or dealer.
Type: Teacher/Student-based instruction
Requirements for trainees
Trainees should have attended at least one of the following training courses:
Copier engine: DMR35/S/45
Copier option: DMR35/S/45
Fax option: DMR22/27 fax option
Printer option: DMR35/S/45 and DMR22/27 Printer Option
Scanner option: DMR22/27
LENGTH
7 days: 4 days for the copier engine and options, and 3 days for the drivers, utilities and networking.
Part Description Length

Engine/Option Copier 2 days
Copier options 0.5 day
Printer/Scanner options 0.5day
Fax options 1 day
Driver/Networking Drivers installation 1 day
Network setup 0.5 day
Unix 0.5 day
Scanner/Printer utilities 0.5 day
Laurel/Maple 0.5 day
Depending on the field experience and technical knowledge of the trainees, the length and curriculum of the
training can be adjusted.
29
Equipment/environment
No. of trainees per machine = 3 or less
PCs on the LAN
Test telephone line
Materials
Service Manuals (mainframe/fax/printer/scanner)
Instructors Guides
Parts Catalogue
Special tools
IC cards
Server/Client Machines
30
Field Information
FPR
Purpose/Issuing requirements:
All field problems should be fed back to Ricoh Co., Ltd. through the existing information route on the
Global FPR System (Field Problem Report). Copy samples and/or part samples may be required.
Required information for issue:

Symptom description
Possible cause
Action taken and results
Counter values
Additional requirements:
Always
Model type and serial number
System parameter List
Copy image problems

Copy samples
PC Connectivity problems
PC specifications (manufacturer, model, type, CPU, memory)
OS used
Application used
Action taken (step by step)
Fax communication problems

Protocol descriptions
Remote fax machine information (manufacturer, model, network type, location).
Technical Information
The following technical documents will be sent periodically or when required. Please ensure that all of these
documents are promptly delivered to appropriate groups or individuals, especially during the IFAP period.

MB Notifies design change information with part Field engineers
(Modification Bulletin) numbers, interchangeability, and production
cut-in serial numbers.
RTB Provides troubleshooting information, Service Field engineers
(Ricoh Technical Bulletin) Manual change information.
Firmware Release Note Provides firmware update information and the Technical support
firmware files via internet web server.
Driver / Utility Update Provides driver/utility update information and Technical Support
the files via internet web server.
31
Reliability Information
ITEMS DMR35A/45A
ACV DMR35A: 10K/Month
DMR45A: 20K/Month
Max CV 50K/Month
Duty 200K/Month
Unit Life 3000K or 5 years whichever comes first
MCBC 50K
MCBF 75K
* The figures above are calculated based on the following:
PM is regularly performed.
Recommended papers are used.
The machine is installed under operable environmental conditions.
Service Time Estimations
INSTALLATION TIMES
Mainframe
30 minutes
Peripherals
ARDF: 10 minutes
Paper Bank: 10 minutes
1 bin Tray: 20 minutes
Multi Tray Finisher: 10 minutes
Finisher-1000: 15 minutes
LCT: 10 minutes
FAX Option: 15 minutes
Printer Option: 25 minutes
NIB: 10 minutes
IEEE 1394: 10 minutes
32
MAINTENANCE TIMES
DMR35A
Product EE EU Inci- Target Rec- Target Total Target Esti- Target Total
Ratio Ratio dence PM ommen- PM PM EM mated EM EM
(%) (%) (EE Interval ded PM MTTR MTTR Interval EM Calls MTTR MTTR
EU) (copies) Calls per (min./ (min./ (copies) per (min./ (min./
1000k call) 1000k) 1000k call) 1000k)
Copies copies
(calls/ (calls/
1000k) 1000k)
Main frame 100 100 1.00 150k 6.67 60 400 75k 13.33 30 400
ARDF 70 90 0.63 80k 2.62 20 52 80k 2.62 15 40
(originals) (C/O=3) (originals) (C/O=3)
Paper Bank 50 30 0.15 150k 1.00 10 10 400k 0.38 10 4
LCT 10 40 0.04 150k 0.27 10 3 400k 0.10 10 1
Finisher-1000 25 80 0.20 --- --- --- --- 240k 0.83 15 12
2 Tray Finisher 25 80 0.20 --- --- --- --- 240k 0.83 15 12
1 bin Tray 10 10 0.01 --- --- --- --- 400k 0.03 15 0.4
Main Frame + ARDF --- 6.67 --- 452 --- 15.95 --- 440
Main Frame + ARDF + Paper Bank --- 6.67 --- 462 --- 16.33 --- 444
Main Frame + ARDF + Paper Bank + --- 6.67 --- 465 --- 16.43 --- 445
LCT
LCT + Finisher 1000
LCT + 2 Tray Finisher
Main Frame + ARDF + Paper Bank + --- 6.67 --- 465 --- 17.29 --- 457.4
LCT + Finisher 1000 + 1 bin Tray
LCT + 2 Tray Finisher + 1 bin Tray
Average system maintenance times:
Total PM MTTR for System + Total EM MTTR for System

=
Total PM Calls for Maintenance + Total EM Calls for System
Main Frame + ARDF: 39.43 minutes/call

Main Frame + ARDF + Paper Tray Unit: 39.39 minutes/call
Main Frame + ARDF + Paper Tray Unit + LCT: 39.39 minutes/call
Main Frame + ARDF + Paper Tray Unit + LCT + Finisher-1000: 38.53 minutes/call
Main Frame + ARDF + Paper Tray Unit + LCT + Finisher-1000 + 1 bin Tray:
38.50 minutes/call
Main Frame + ARDF + Paper Tray Unit + LCT + 2 Tray Finisher: 38.53 minutes/call
Main Frame + ARDF + Paper Tray Unit + LCT + 2 Tray Finisher + 1 bin Tray:
38.50 minutes/call
33
DMR45A
Product EE EU Inci- Target Rec- Target Total Target Esti- Target Total
Ratio Ratio dence PM ommen- PM PM EM mated EM EM
(%) (%) (EE Interval ded PM MTTR MTTR Interval EM Calls MTTR MTTR
EU) (copies) Calls per (min./ (min./ (copies) per (min./ (min./
1000k call) 1000k) 1000k call) 1000k)
Copies copies
(calls/ (calls/
1000k) 1000k)
Main frame 100 100 1.00 150k 6.67 60 400 75k 13.3 30 400
ARDF 90 90 0.81 80k 3.37 20 67 80k 3.37 15 51
(originals) (C/O=3) (originals) (C/O=3)
Paper Bank 60 30 0.18 150k 1.20 10 12 400k 0.45 10 4.5
LCT 20 40 0.08 150k 0.53 10 5 400k 0.20 10 2
Finisher-1000 20 80 0.16 --- --- --- --- 240k 0.67 15 10
2 Tray Finisher 50 80 0.40 --- --- --- --- 240k 1.67 15 25
1 bin Tray 20 10 0.02 --- --- --- --- 400k 0.05 15 0.8
Main Frame + ARDF --- 6.67 --- 467 --- 16.67 --- 451
Main Frame + ARDF + Paper Bank --- 6.67 --- 479 --- 17.12 --- 455.5
LCT
LCT + Finisher 1000
LCT + 2 Tray Finisher
LCT + Finisher 1000 + 1 bin Tray
LCT + 2 Tray Finisher + 1 bin Tray
Average system maintenance times:
Total PM MTTR for System + Total EM MTTR for System

=
Total PM Calls for Maintenance + Total EM Calls for System
Main Frame + ARDF: 39.33 minutes/call

Main Frame + ARDF + Paper Tray Unit: 39.28 minutes/call
Main Frame + ARDF + Paper Tray Unit + LCT: 39.25 minutes/call
Main Frame + ARDF + Paper Tray Unit + LCT + Finisher-1000: 38.58 minutes/call
Main Frame + ARDF + Paper Tray Unit + LCT + Finisher-1000 + 1 bin Tray:
38.54 minutes/call
Main Frame + ARDF + Paper Tray Unit + LCT + 2 Tray Finisher: 37.67 minutes/call
Main Frame + ARDF + Paper Tray Unit + LCT + 2 Tray Finisher + 1 bin Tray:
37.62 minutes/call
34
Parts information
U: Unique for this model

Qty/ PM Unique or
Unit Interval Common
Around the drum
AD027006 Charge Roller 1 150k C (DMR35/S/45)
G0652280 Cleaning Pad Charge Roller 1 150k C (DMR35/S/45)
AD025021 Pick-off Pawl 2 150k C (DMR35/S/45)
Development
AA012102 Development Filter 1 300k C (DMR35/S/45)
Paper Feed
AF030034 Pick-up Roller (Paper tray) 2 150k U
AF031035 Feed Roller (Paper tray) 2 150k C (DMR35/S/45)
AF032035 Separation Roller (Paper tray) 2 150k C (DMR35/S/45)
AF030036 Pick-up Roller (By-pass) 1 150k C (DMR35/S/45)
AF031036 Feed Roller (By-pass) 1 150k C (DMR35/S/45)
AF032036 Separation Roller (By-pass) 1 150k C (DMR35/S/45)
Cleaning Unit
A2322353 Cleaning Blade 1 150k C (DMR35/S/45)
Transfer Belt Unit

A2323880 Transfer Belt 1 150k C (DMR35/S/45)
A2323830 Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade 1 150k C (DMR35/S/45)
Fusing Unit
AE011064 Hot Roller 1 150k U
AE020108 Pressure Roller 1 150k U
AE044030 Hot Roller Stripper 7 300k U
AW100052 Fusing Thermistor Center 1 150K U
AW100053 Fusing Thermistor Edge 1 150K U
35
ARDF: B351
PM
Qty
Part Number Description Interval Unique or Common
/Unit
(Originals)
B3512222 Paper Feed Belt 1 80K U
B3512126 Pick-up Roller 1 80K U
A8592241 Reverse Roller 1 80K C (HUNT)
Paper Bank: A682

Qty PM Unique or
AF030035 Pick-up Roller 2 150k C (DMR35/S/45)
AF031035 Feed Roller 2 150k C (DMR35/S/45)
AF032035 Separation Roller 2 150k C (DMR35/S/45)
LCT: A683
Part Number Description Qty PM Unique or Common
/Unit Interval
AF031021 Feed Roller 1 150k C (SP5)
AF032021 Separation Roller 1 150k C (SP5)
AF030021 Pick-up Roller 1 150k C (SP5)
Special Tools
The following special tools should be prepared for maintenance of the new model in the field:
Unique or Common:
U: Unique for this model
Item Part Number Description Qty Unique or Common

1 A0069104 Scanner Positioning Pin (4pcs/set) 1 C (DMR35/S/45)
2 A2929500 Test Chart S5S (10 pcs/set) 1 C (DMR35/S/45)
3 A0299387 Digital Multimeter FLUKE 87 1 C (DMR35/S/45)
4 A2309003 Adjustment Cam Laser Unit 1 C (DMR35/S/45)
5 A2309004 Positioning Pin Laser Unit 1 C (DMR35/S/45)
6 A2309352 Flash Memory Card 4MB 1 C (DMR35/S/45)
7 A2579300 Grease Barrierta S552R 1 C (DMR35/S/45)
9 52039501 Silicon Grease G-501 1 C (DMR35/S/45)
10 G0219350 Loop Back Connector 1 C (DMR35/S/45)
36
Mainframe specification
Engine
DMR35A/45A Remarks
1. Technology
a) Scanning element Flatbed with moving CCD array image-sensor
b) Printing processing Twin Laser beams scanning & Electro-
photographic printing.
2. Dimensions (WxDxH): Approx. 670 x 650 x 720 mm
3. Weight Less than 78 kg
4. Input Capacity
a) Standard 500 sheets tray x 2 + 50 sheet bypass tray
b) Options (Bank and LCT) Bank: 500 sheet tray x 2
LCT: 1500 sheets
5. Output Capacity
a) Standard Internal Tray: 500 sheets
With Bridge Unit : 250 sheets
b) Option 1 Bin Tray: 125 sheets
External Tray: 125 sheets
or
Finsher 1000: max 1000 sheets
or
Multi Tray Finisher: Multi Tray Finisher
Upper Tray: 500 sheets can be installed with
Lower Tray: both C2b and C2c.
Default: 2000 sheets,
Multi tray mode: 1500 sheets
Mailbox: 100 sheets x 9 bins + 500 sheets proof
tray (used for printer only)
6. Paper size / weight
a) Size: Trays: A5 SEF - A3 / 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 - 11 x 17
Bypass: A6SEF - A3 / 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 - 11 x 17
LCT: A4 / LT
Duplex: A5 SEF -A3 / 5 1/2x 8 1/2- 11x 17
b) Weight: Paper Tray 1,2 : 64 g/m2 - 105 g/m2
Paper Tray 3,4 : 60 g/m2 - 105 g/m2 DMR35/S/45
LCT: 64 g/m2 - 105 g/m2 Bypass weight :
Bypass: 52 g/m2 163 g/m2 52 g/m2 157 g/m2
Duplex: : 64 g/m2- 105 g/m2
7. Rating power spec.: 100V model: 110-120V, 60 Hz
200V model: 220-240V, 50/60Hz
8. Power consumption: Less than 1.44 kW (100V ver.)
Less than 1.5 kW (200V ver.)
37
Copier Features
DMR35A/45A DMR35/S/45
st
1 copy speed 35cpm: 4.5 seconds DMR35: 3.9 sec.
45cpm : 3.6 seconds DMR45: 3.2 sec.
(A4 / LT long edge feed from first
input tray to internal tray, no reduction/
enlargement)
Continuous copy speed 35 cpm (A4 / LT long edge feed, No
R/E)
45 cpm (A4 / LT long edge feed, No
R/E)
One to one copy spe ed 35 cpm (A4 / LT long edge feed, No DMR35, 30 cpm (A4 / LT long
R/E) edge feed, No R/E)
45 cpm (A4 / LT long edge feed, No DMR45, 40 cpm (A4 / LT long
R/E) edge feed, No R/E)
Resolution 600dpi DMR35/S/45: 400dpi
Grey Scale 256 levels
Warm-up time 35 cpm: 15 seconds DMR35: 85 seconds
(from Main Switch off) 45 cpm: 20 seconds DMR45: 100 seconds
Recovery time 35 cpm: 10 seconds DMR35: 83 seconds
(from Auto Off mode) 45 cpm: 15 seconds DMR45: 98 seconds
Enlargement 121, 129, 155, 200, 400% (US)
115, 122, 141, 200, 400% (EU)
Reduction 93, 85, 78, 73, 65, 50, 25% (US) DMR35:
93, 82, 75, 71, 65, 50, 25% (EU) 93,87,82,71,65,50,25% (EU)
*Both DMR35A and DMR45A have DMR45:
minimum 25% reduction. 93,87,82,71,65,50,35% (EU)
Zoom 25% - 400% in 1% step DMR35: 25% - 400% in 1%
*Both DMR35A and DMR45A have steps (EU)
minimum 25% reduction. DMR45: 35% - 400% in 1%
steps (EU)
Image density Manual or automatic
Adjustment
User code 100 codes (Max. 500 codes with 50 codes
optional User Account Enhance Unit)
Display Languages 220-240V 220-240V
EU model EU model
English, French English, German, French
German, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Swedish,
Swedish, Norwegian, Danish, Finnish, Norwegian, Danish, Finnish,
Portuguese, Polish, Hungarian and Portuguese, Polish, Hungarian and
Czech are provided by FTP server. Czech are provided by FTP server.
Control panel EU model: Symbols
US model: English
38
Enhanced Features
DMR35A/45A DMR35/S/45
Auto Paper Selection Standard
Auto Magnification Standard
Selection
Auto tray switch Standard
Directional magnification (%) Standard
Directional size Standard
magnification (inch/mm)
Series copy Book to Simp. Standard
Series copy - Dup. to Simp.
Photo mode Standard (photo mode, text / photo mode)
Auto start Standard
User program Standard (10 modes)
Combine: 2 in 1 simplex Standard
Combine: 4 in 1 simplex Standard
Combine: 4 in 1 duplex Standard
Combine: 8 in 1 simplex Standard DMR35/S/45: NA
Combine: 8 in 1 duplex Standard
Combine: 16 in 1 duplex Standard DMR35/S/45: NA
Combine: 16 in 1 booklet Standard
Magazine Copy Standard DMR35/S/45: NA
Double copy Standard
Erase centre / border Standard
Stamp / User Stamp Standard: Page Numbering, Date stamp NA
Option*: Background Numbering, User
Stamp, Preset Stamp
*Optional stamps are available with 32MB
64MB memory for Printer or Printer/Scanner
(64MB memory is mandatory for Printer or
Printer/Scanner.)
Electronic / Rotate Sort Standard
Repeat copying Standard
Positive/Negative Standard
Archive File Document Server Standard
Cover insertion Standard
Paper designate Standard
OHP slip sheet Standard
Stapling Finisher 1000: 1 position Finisher 1000: 1
Multi Tray Finisher: 4 position position
*Multi Tray Fin can be installed with both Finisher 3000 (only for
C2b and C2c. DMR35) : 4 position
Margin adjust Standard
Bypass feed Standard
39
Fax Features
General Features
DMR35A/45A
Circuit: PSTN, PBX, ISDN (option)
Compatibility: ITU-T (CCITT) G3, Additional G3 (option), G4 (option )
Resolution: 8 x 3.85, 7.7 l/mm, 200 x 200/100dpi (std.)
8/16 x 15.4 l/mm, 400 x 400 dpi (option)
Compression method: MH, MR, MMR, JBIG(Option)
Scanning speed: DMR35A/45A: Approx. 0.43 second (A4SEF)
Approx .30 seconds (A4LEF)
Number of Pages Scanned: DMR35A/45A: 40 pages per minute (A4SEF)
46 pages per minute (A4LEF)
Modem speed: Standard with Automatic Shift Down:
33600, 31200, 28800, 26400, 21600, 19200, 16800, 14400, 12000,
9600, 7200, 4800, 2400 bps
G4 option: 64000, 56000 bps
Transmission speed: G3: Approx.3 seconds (200x100dpi, ITUT #1 chart, TTI off, memory
transmission)
G3: Approx.2 seconds (200x100 dpi, with JBIG, ITUT #1 chart TTI
off, memory transmission)
G4: Approx.3 seconds (200x200dpi, ITUT #1 chart)
SAF memory: Standard: 2 MB, Option: 24MB (Total 26MB)
Page memory Standard: 2 MB, Option: 8MB (Total: 10MB)
Memory backup: One hour
Super smoothing: Standard
Stamp: Option (with document feeder)
TTI/RTI: Standard
CSI: Standard
Quick and Speed dial: Standard: 400quick dial only (no Speed dial)
Option:1200quick dial / 1000quick dial and 200speed dial, selectable
Group dial: Standard 64group (500 numbers per group)
Program: Standard: 100 numbers, Max. 200 numbers with JBIG option
Redial: Standard
AI short protocol: Standard
Direct fax number entry: Standard
Dual access: Standard
User Code: Standard 100 Codes, (Max. 500 codes with optional User Account
Enhance Unit)
Auto document: Standard (6 documents),Max. 18 documents with option
40
General Feature (Continued from the previous page.)
DMR35A/45A
Page count Standard
Auto reduction Standard
Wild cards: Standard
Summer time (daylight saving time) Standard
ID code programming: Standard (four digits)
Programming by OMR: No
User function key: Standard (3 keys)
Night timer : No
Energy saver : Standard
LCD prompt: Standard
Remaining memory indication Standard
Time indicator /clock adjustment: No / Standard
User parameter setting Standard
User data transfer Standard
Memory file transfer Standard
Transmission features
DMR35A/45A
Immediate transmission Standard
Memory transmission Standard
Serial broadcasting (later) Standard (Max. 500numbers)
Send later Standard
Error correction mode Standard
Page retransmission Standard
Economy transmission Standard
Forwarding Standard
Batch transmission Standard
Parallel memory transmission Standard (Automatically selected.)
Book fax Standard
Closed network (transmission) Standard
Confidential transmission/with Standard
ID
Transfer request Standard (Transfer station: 99 location, receiver: 30 terminals)
Transfer transmission Standard
Multi-step Transfer Standard
Polling transmission Standard
Double sided transmission Yes
Transmission reserve No
41
Reception features
DMR35A/45A
Automatic reception Standard
Manual reception Standard
Substitute reception Standard
Authorized reception Standard (30 patterns) Max 50 patterns with option
Multicopy (1 to 9 sets with sorting) Standard
Reverse order printing No
Memory lock Standard
Confidential reception Standard
Special reception numbers Standard (30 numbers)
Closed network Standard
Polling reception Standard (Max. 500 senders)
Poll later Standard (Max. 500senders)
Polling from memory Standard
Multi-polling reception Standard
Continuous polling Standard
Reception time printing Standard
Centre mark Standard
Checkered mark Standard
2 in 1 (two in one) Standard
Economy printing mode No
Duplex reception Yes
Telephone features
DMR35A/45A
Handset / telephone Option
Telephone connection Standard
Monitor speaker Standard
Automatic voice message No
Voice request No
On hook dial Standard
Tone transmission Standard
Pause Standard
Pulse/tone selection Standard
Chain dialing Standard
Reception mode selection Standard
Automatic fax/phone change Standard
Reception mode switch over (remote) Standard
Answering machine interface Standard
Reception mode switching timer Standard
Auto answer delay time Standard (SP mode)
Busy tone detection Standard
Silent ringing detection Standard
42
Printer Controller
General Features
DMR35A/45A
CPU RM5231 200MHz
Memory 96MB (Resident 32MB + 64MB Memory Option)
*64MB Memory is mandatory item for printing feature
Hard Disk Drive More than 10GB (HDD is standard with DMR35A/45A copier, and it is commonly used for
Printer and/or Scanner function)
Printer Description PCL5e, PCL6, RPCS (Newly supported)
Language Option: PostScript3
Continuous Print DMR35A (A4 LEF / Letter LEF)
Speed DMR45A (A4 LEF / Letter LEF)
Print Resolution PCL5e PCL6 RPCS PS3
300dpi / 600 dpi 600dpi 600dpi 300dpi/600dpi
Host Interface Standard:
Parallel Port IEEE1284 (ECP)
IC Card Slot (for service use only)
Option:
Network Port (100BASE-TX/10BASE-T)
2 ports x IEEE1394 (6 pin)
Network Protocol (NIC TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, AppleTalk (Auto Switching)
option required)
MIB support SMNP Printer MIB, Ricoh MIB
Operation Panel Mainframes Operation Panel is commonly used for Printer functions (Printer Key Top is added
on the left side of LCD )
LCD Language Same as mainframe
Drivers Win WinNT WinNT4.0
95/98/Me 3.51 Service TSE Server Server+
* not included in Pack Level
Driver CD, just for PCL5e Yes - - Yes Yes -
Web Release
PCL 6 Yes - - Yes Yes -
**Adobe does not
RPCS Yes - - - Yes -
release PS driver for
W2K. Only MS- PS3 Yes - - - Yes -
PostScript driver is
available and PPD file Win2000 Win3.1 Mac
for MS-PS is included 7.6.1 -
Professional Server Server Advanced Advanced
in the Driver CD- Terminal Server Server+
ROM. Svc
PCL5e Yes Yes Yes - - Yes* -
PCL 6 Yes Yes Yes - - Yes* -
RPCS Yes Yes - - - - -
PS3 Yes(mini Yes(mini Yes(mini - - - Yes

driver)** driver)** driver)**
Supported Driver For PCL5e, PCL6 and RPCS
Language 1.English, 2.German, 3.French, 4.Italian, 5.Spanish, 6.Dutch, 7.Swedish, 8.Norwegian, 9.Danish,
(Localization) 10.Czech, 11.Hungarian, 12.Finnish, 13.Polish, 14.Portuguese
For PostScript3
1.English, 2.German, 3.French, 4.Italian, 5.Spanish, 6.Dutch, 7. Swedish 8. Norwegian 9.
Danish
UNIX Install Shell and Super Option (Device Option Setting) are available for printing command
Utility Software Printer Option (Number of supported Language) : DeskTopBinder V2 Lite (14) /
(Bundle Software) SmartNetMonitor for Admin (14) / SmartNetMonitor for Client (14) / LAN-FAX M1 (14) /
43
1394 utility (1) / Printer Utility for Mac (1)
Printer / Scanner Option (Number of supported Language) : DeskTopBinder V2 Lite (14) /
SmartNetMonitor for Admin (14) / SmartNetMonitor for Client (14) / ScanRouter V2 Lite (5)
/ LAN-FAX M1 (14) / 1394 utility (1) / Printer Utility for Mac (1)
Note 1: PCL driver and RPCS driver must require Service Pack 4 in order to work in WinNT4.0 Workstation or Server.
PS driver must require Service Pack 5 in order to work in WinNT4.0 Workstation or Server.
PCL driver must require Service Pack 6 for Terminal Server Edition in order to work in WinNT4.0 TSE.
Note 2: Available schedule of DeskTopBinder V2 Lite and ScanRouter V2 Lite
For US and Asia
English version of the software will be available with the 1st Mass Production of Printer Option and
Printer/Scanner Option.
CD-ROM (Bundled with Printer or Printer/Scanner Option)
Printer Option Printer/Scanner Option

CD #1 Printer Drivers and Utilities Printer Drivers and Utilities
CD #2 Document Management Utility Scanner Driver and Document Management Utilities

(DeskTopBinder V2 Lite and Operating (DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, ScanRouter V2 Lite,
Instruction) TWAIN Driver and Operating Instructions)
CD #3 Operating Instructions for Printer Operating Instructions for Printer
The following chart shows which software is available with which option:
Printer Option Printer/Scanner Option NIC PostScript3 IEEE1394
PCL5e/6 X X
RPCS X X
PostScript3 X
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite X X
ScanRouter V2 Lite X
TWAIN X
SmartNetMonitor for Admin & Client X X
Printer Utility for Mac X X
PC-Fax X X
IEEE1394 X
WebStatusMonitor X
Printer Optional Items
Items Remarks Compatibility

1 Printer Unit PCL5e, PCL6, RPCS New
2 Printer/Scanner Unit PCL5e, PCL6, RPCS Scanner New
3 64MB Memory SDRAM-DIMM (144pin) Common with Memory option for PMR26/N
and Win-A+
4 PostScript3 Option Genuine Adobe PostScript3 New
5 NIB Ethernet card with RJ45 port New
6 IEEE1394 Interface IEEE1394 Expansion Card New
Note 1. : No.1 and No.2 cannot be installed together.

Note 2. : 64MB Memory (#3) must be installed with Printer Unit (#1) or Printer/Scanner Unit (#2).
Note 3.: NIB Option (#5) must be installed with Printer/Scanner Unit (#2). (Scanner function is available
only through network.)
44
Configuration of Printer and Scanner related items
Additional
Copier Mandatory items for Printing / Scanning Options
#1
Printer Unit #4 PostScript3
#3
+ 64MB Memory
#5 NIB
DMR35A/45A
Or
#6 IEEE1394
#2 #3
Printer & 64MB Memory
Scanner + #4 PostScript3
Unit
#5 NIB
#6 IEEE1394
64MB Memory (Option)
This option is mandatory item for Printer Option or Printer/Scanner Option.

Note: This item is commonly used with PMR26/Ns (B&W Laser Printer), Win-A+ controller (for CCR060A/62A).
Hardware Specification:
144pin SDRAM-DIMM
PC100 CL2
Access Time: 6ns (3.3volt)
Network Interface Board (Option)
Network Interface Board is necessary for network printing and scanning. This option is a mandatory item
for Printer Scanner Option.
Topology Ethernet 100BASE-TX / 10BASE-T

Network Interface 1 x RJ45
Cables Requirement:
STP (Shielded Twisted-Pair) Cable
Category (Type5) or better
Frame Type Ethernet II, Ethernet 802.2, Ethernet 802.3, Ethernet SNAP
Protocol TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, AppleTalk, (Auto Switching)
Network Operating Systems Novell NetWare 3.12, 3.2, 4.x, 5.0, Microsoft WindowsNT4.0,
Microsoft 2000, Microsoft Windows 95/98, Me Mac OS 7.6.1, 8.1,
8.5, 8.51, 8.6, 9
Other functions for Printing Built-in Web Server, Built-in Telnet Server, Built-in lpd daemon
and Maintenance Built-in IPP daemon
45
IEEE1394 Interface
Hardware Specifications:
Interface: IEEE1394 (6pin) (includes two types of IEEE1394 cables. One is a 6pin-4pin cable and the
other is a 6pin-6pin cable. Length of these cables is 2.0m.)
Number of ports: 2 ports
Data Transmission speed: 400Mbps / 200Mbps / 100Mbps
Scanner Specifications
General features
Item Specification
Optical resolution 600 dpi 256 shades of gray
Scan speed ScanRouter: 52 cpm/ min (200dpi binary/LEF/MMR)
Twain: 34 cpm/ min (200dpi binary/LEF/MMR)
0.8 second/sheet (200 dpi binary/SEF/without compression)
Scan area Main scan: 297mm
Sub scan: 432mm
Detectable original size: contact NA model;
glass DLT SEF, LG SEF, LT SEF/LEF, USB4 SEF, Foolscap SEF,
EngQuarto LEF
EU/Asia model;
A3 SEF, B4 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B5 SEF/LEF, Foolscap SEF, LG
SEF
Detectable original size: ADF NA model;
DLT SEF, LG SEF, LT SEF/LEF, HLT SEF/LEF, USB4 SEF,
EngQuarto LEF
EU/Asia model;
A3 SEF, B4 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B5 SEF/LEF, A5 SEF/LEF,
Foolscap SEF
Compression Method Binary: MH, MR, MMR
Grayscale: JPEG
Network Topology Ethernet 10/100BaseTX
Protocol TCP/IP
Network Interface Connector RJ45
Memory capacity 96MB
Web Status Monitor Standard
Operating Ambient Temperature 0 - 50 degrees C
Operating Humidity 5% - 80%
Power Requirements 5VDC +/- 5%
Power Consumption 5VDC 1A max
Emissions Compliance FCC class A level
46
ScanRouter V2 Lite
Resolution 100, 200, 300, 400, 600 dpi

Scan mode Text, Text/Photo, Photo, Gray Scale
Original size DLT SEF, LG SEF, Foolscap SEF, LT SEF/LEF, HLT SEF/LEF, A3
SEF, B4 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B5 SEF/LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, Free
Image density Lighter to Darker: 7 degrees
2 sided scan Yes (optional ARDF required)
Original mode Text, Text/Photo, Photo, Grayscale
Image format when using TIFF (MH, MR, MMR)
TIFF-F (MH, MR, MMR)
Multi-page TIFF
PDF
JPEG
OS Delivery Server
Windows 95(OSR2 or later), 98/98SE
Windows ME
Windows NT Server4.0 (SP5 or later)
Windows2000Server
Client PC
Windows 95(after OSR2), 98/98SE
Windows ME
Windows NT Workstation 4.0(SP5 or later)
Windows2000 Professional, Windows2000Server
Memory Delivery Server
Min 64MB (128MB or more recommended)
Client PC
Min 48MB (64MB or more recommended)
CPU Delivery Server
Pentium 200MHz minimum
(Pentium350MHz minimum recommended)
Client PC
Pentium 133MHz or faster
(Pentium 266MHz or faster recommended)
HDD Delivery Server
At least 200MB of disk space are required for installation. In addition,
500MB or more are required
Client PC
50MB or more (200MB recommended)
Network Topology: Ethernet 10/100BaseTX
Protocol: TCP/IP
47
Network Twain Driver
Document size Max A3 / 11x17

Resolution Scanner : 600dpi
Driver: Platen Binary 2400dpi
256 level 2400dpi
ADF Binary 1200dpi
256 level 1200dpi
Grayscale 256 level
OS Win95/98/ME, WinNT4.0, 2000
Memory Minimum required memory for OS + 8MB
CPU Pentium 75MHz or more, or minimum required CPU for OS
HDD More than 100MB of disk space is required.
Network Topology: Ethernet 10/100BaseTX
Protocol: TCP/IP
Duplex scanning Yes (With optional ARDF)
Skew correction Yes
Image Rotation Yes
Soft Endorser Yes
External Options
ARDF (New)
Original size
Simplex: B6 SEF - A3, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 SEF - 11 x 17
Duplex: B5 SEF A3, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 SEF - 11 x 17
Original weight: Simplex: 40 - 128 g/m2, 11 - 34 lbs
Duplex: 52 - 105 g/m2, 14 - 28 lbs
Stack capacity: 80 sheets (80 g/m2)
Feeding speed: 35 cpm (C2b), 45 cpm (C2c)
Noise (Power level): less than 66.5dB
Power consumption: less than 60 W
Dimensions (W x D x H): 570 x 518 x 150 mm
Weight: Less than 12 kg
Paper Bank
Paper size: A5 SEF - A3, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 SEF - 11X17

Paper weight: 60 - 105 g/m2, 20- - 28 lbs
Paper capacity: 500 sheets x 2 trays
Noise (Power level): Operating: less than 71 dB (full system)
Stand-by: less than 40 dB (full system)
Power consumption: 50 W
Weight: Less than 25 kg, 55.2 lbs
48
One-Bin Tray (New)
Paper size: A5 SEF - A3, 8 x 5 SEF - 11 x 17

Paper weight: 60 - 105 g/m2
Paper capacity: 125 sheets (80 g/ m2)
Weight: Less than 4 kg
Finisher 1000
Paper size: A6SEF A3, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 SEF - 11 x 17

Stack capacity: 1000 sheets (A4 LEF, 8 x 11 LEF or smaller) (80 g/m2)
500 sheets ( B4, 8 x 14 or larger) (80 g/m2 )
Staple capacity: 30 sheets (A4, B5, 8 x 11 or smaller) (80 g/m2)
20 sheets ( B4, 8 x 14 or larger) (80 g/m2)
Staple paper size: A3 - B5 LEF, LT - 11 x 17
Staple paper weight 64 - 80 g/m2
Staple position: 1 position (upper left)
Sift tray (Doggy tail): Standard
Dimension: 568 x 520 x 625 mm
Weight: 21 kg
Multi Tray Finisher (New)
Upper Tray:
Paper size: A6 A3, HLT 12x18
Stack capacity: 500 sheets (A4/ LT/A5 LEF - 80 g/m2)
250 sheets (12x18, A3, B4, A4 SEF, B5 SEF, DLT, LG,
LT SEF,)
100 sheets (A5 SEF, HLT)
Lower Tray: Normal Mode (Default)
Paper size: A6 A3, HLT 12x18
Stack capacity: 1,500 sheets (A4/ LT LEF - 80 g/m2)
750 sheets (12x18, A3, B4, A4 SEF, B5 SEF, DLT, LG,
LT SEF,)
500 sheets (A5 LEF,)
*Staple output on upper tray is not available in Default mode.
49
Lower Tray: Multi Tray Mode
Paper size: A6,B5,A5 - A3, HLT - DLT
Stack capacity: 1,500 sheets (A4LEF/ LTLEF)
750 sheets (A3, B4, A4 SEF, B5, DLT, LG, LT SEF,)
500 sheets (A5 LEF,)
Staple Capacity 50 Sheets
Dimension: 680 x 620 x 1030 mm
Weight: 53 kg
Mailbox
Number of bins: 9 bins and 1 Proof Tray

Paper size: Each bin: A5 - A3, LT - 11 x 17
Proof Tray: A6 - A3, 8 x 5 - 11 x 17
Paper weight: Each bin: 60 - 90 g/m2
Proof Tray: 52 - 157 g/m2
Stack capacity: Each bin: 100 sheets ( A4 LEF 80 g/m2)
Proof Tray: 500 sheets ( A4 LEF 80 g/m2)
Stapling: Not available
Weight: 40 kg
Bridge Unit (New)
Proof Tray:
Paper size: A5 - A3, B6 SEF, A6 SEF, A4 (LEF), 8 x5 - 11 x 17
Stack capacity: 250 sheets
Bridge to the finisher/mailbox:
Paper size: A5 - A3, B6 SEF, A6 SEF, A4 (LEF), 8 x5 - 11 x 17
LCT
Paper size: A4 (LEF), LT (LEF)

Paper capacity: 1500 sheets
Weight: Less than 17 Kg
50
Punch Kit for US 2/3 hole (New)
Paper size: 2 hole: SEF: A3-A5, HLT-DLT

LEF: A4-A5, LT-HLT
3 hole: LEF: A3, B4, DLT
LEF: A4, B5, LT
Paper weight: 2 hole: 52 - 163 g/m2, 14 43 lbs
3 hole: 52 163 g/m2, 14 - 43 lbs
Weight: 2.9Kg
Punch Kit for EU 2/4 hole (New)
Paper size: 2 hole: SEF: A3-A5, DLT-HLT

LEF: A4-A5, LT-HLT
4 hole: SEF: A3, B4, DLT
LEF: A4, B5, LT
Paper weight: 2 hole: 52 - 163 g/m2
4 hole: 52 163 g/m2
Weight: 2.9 Kg
Punch Kit for Scandinavian 4 hole (New)
Paper size: SEF: A3-A5, DLT-HLT

LEF: A4-A5, LT-HLT
Weight: 2.9 Kg
Driver Specification
RPCS Driver Specification
Type of User Interface: RPCS has 2 types of Driver User Interface, Custom Settings type and Multi-
tab. The customer can select either one and switch from one to another at any time
Custom Settings type User Interface

This is an entirely new, unique user interface with One Click Setting concept.
Multi-tab type User Interface

This is a conventional PDL user interface with multiple tabs. The user interface is similar to a PCL
driver and suits the customer who is familiar with this type of User Interface.
How to switch User Interface

Double click [My Computer] on the desktop and then open [Printer] icon. Select the icon for RPCS
printer and choose [Properties] from the [File] menu. Move to [Print Settings] tab and click [Printer
Configuration] button. Select Multi-tab (radio button) in [Window type] section and press [OK].
51
Details of Specification
Default setting values

SETTING SELECTION SELECTION OPTIONS REMARKS
(Display Name) Method
Custom Setting Click Icon No Setting The mentioned icons are prepared as a default
Paper Saving 1 set.
Watermark (COPY)
Duplex Custom setting can be registered for up to 16
Paper Saving 2 icons.
Meeting Materials
Staple & Duplex Paper Saving 1 2 in 1
Paper Saving 2 2 in 1 and Duplex
Meeting Material Staple (top left)
Staple & Duplex Staple (top left) and Duplex
Manage Icons Push Button
Paper Source Tray: Drop Down List Box Auto Tray Select Tray 3 and Tray 4 are available when Paper
Tray 1 Bank is installed.
Tray 2 Large Capacity Tray is available when Large
Tray 3 capacity Tray is installed.
Tray 4
Large Capacity Tray
Bypass Tray
Paper Type: Drop Down List Box Plain
Recycled
Colour
Special
Letterhead
Preprinted
Prepunched
Bond
Cardstock
Paper Output Tray: Drop Down List Box Printer Defaults Inner Tray 2 is available when Inner 1 bin tray
Internal tray 1 is installed.
Internal tray 2 Finisher Shift Tray is available when
External tray Finsher1000 or 2250 is installed.
Finisher Shift Tray 1 Finisher Proof Tray is available when
Finisher Shift Tray 2 Finisher2250 is installed.
Mailbox Proof Tray Mail box Trays are available when Mailbox is
Mailbox Tray 1: installed.
Mailbox Tray 2:
Mailbox Tray 3:
Mailbox Tray 4:
Mailbox Tray 5:
Mailbox Tray 6:
Mailbox Tray 7:
Mailbox Tray 8:
Mailbox Tray 9:
Add / Change Custom Push Button See Setup Tab, Edit Tab, Finishing Tab and
Settings Misc. Tab.
Original Orientation Radio Button Portrait
Landscape
Original Size: Drop Down List Box A3 (297 x 420 mm) For the US, the default paper is Letter.
A4 (210 x 297 mm) For all other countries, the default paper is A4.
A5 (148 x 210 mm)
A6 (105 x 148 mm)
B4 JIS (257 x 364 mm)
B5 JIS (182 x 257 mm)
Letter (8 1/2 x 11)
52
Legal (8 1/2 x 14)
5 1/2 x 8 1/2
11 x 17
Executive (7 1/4 x 10 1/2)
8 x 13
8 1/4 x 13
8 1/2 x 13
8K (267 x 390 mm)
16K (195 x 267 mm)
Custom paper size 1
Custom paper size 2
Custom paper size 3
Custom paper size 4
Custom paper size 5
Custom paper size 6
Custom paper size 7
Custom paper size 8
Custom paper size 9
Custom paper size 10
Printout paper Size: Drop Down List Box Same as original size
A3 (297 x 420 mm)
A4 (210 x 297 mm)
A5 (148 x 210 mm)
A6 (105 x 148 mm)
B4 JIS (257 x 364 mm)
B5 JIS (182 x 257 mm)
Letter (8 1/2 x 11)
Legal (8 1/2 x 14)
5 1/2 x 8 1/2
11 x 17
Executive (7 1/4 x 10 1/2)
8 x 13
8 1/4 x 13
8 1/2 x 13
8K (267 x 390 mm)
16K (195 x 267 mm)
Copies: Spin Button 1-999 Default =1
Job Type: Drop Down List Box Normal Print Send to JobBinging appears if Desktop
Sample Print Binder V2 (Lite) is installed.
Locked Print
Send to Document Server
Send to JobBinging
Details Push Button Enabled if Locked print or Send to Document
Server is selected in Job Type.
Restore Defaults Push Button Change the screen to the default set
Printer Push Button The following items are available only when
Configuration opened from the printer folder.
Window Type
Custom paper Size
Return to Normal print
Collate Type
Set Mailbox Tray Name
Restore Default
53
(Click Add/Change Custom Settings button in Print Setting Tab)

Reduce/Enlarge Drop Down List Box Fit to paper size Enabled if Original size is different
Scale from Print paper size.
Direct. mag.
Paper Source Tray: Drop Down List Box Auto Tray Select Tray 3 and Tray 4 are available
Tray 1 when Paper Bank is installed.
Tray 2 Large Capacity Tray is available when
Tray 3 Large capacity Tray is installed.
Tray 4
Large Capacity Tray
Bypass Tray
Paper Type: Drop Down List Box Plain
Recycled
Colour
Special
Letterhead
Preprinted
Prepunched
Bond
Cardstock
Paper Output Tray: Drop Down List Box Printer Defaults Inner Tray 2 is available when Inner 1
Internal tray 1 bin tray is installed.
Internal tray 2 Finisher Shift Tray is available when
External tray Finsher1000 or 2250 is installed.
Finisher Shift Tray 1 Finisher Proof Tray is available when
Finisher Shift Tray 2 Finisher2250 is installed.
Mailbox Proof Tray Mail box Trays are available when
Mailbox Tray 1: Mailbox is installed.
Mailbox Tray 2:
Mailbox Tray 3:
Mailbox Tray 4:
Mailbox Tray 5:
Mailbox Tray 6:
Mailbox Tray 7:
Mailbox Tray 8:
Mailbox Tray 9:
Cover sheet Check Box Off
On
Slip sheet Check Box Off
On
54

Custom Setting name:
Layout/Poster Drop Down List Box 2 pages per sheet
4 pages per sheet
9 pages per sheet
16 pages per sheet
Poster
Duplex/Booklet Click Icon Duplex -Open to Left
Duplex -Open to Right
Duplex -Open to Top
Booklet 2 -Open to Left
Booklet 2 -Open to Right
Booklet 1 -Open to Left
Booklet 1 -Open to Right
Watermarks Drop Down List Box COPY
URGENT
CONFIDENTIAL
DRAFT
ORIGINAL
Binding margins Check Box Off
On
Restore Defaults Push Button Change the screen to the default set

Collate Check Box Off
On
Staple Drop Down List Box Top left The selectable options depend on the type of
Top right finisher installed and paper direction
Top left slant
2 at left
2 at right
2 at top
Punch Drop Down List Box 2 at left The selectable options depend on the type of
2 at right finisher installed and paper direction
2 at top
3 at left
3 at right
3 at top
4 at left
4 at right
4 at top

Rotate by 180 degrees Check Box Off
On
Do not print blank pages Check Box Off
On
55
(Click Manage Icons button in Print Setting Tab)

Move to left Push Button
Move to right Push Button
Delete Custom Setting Push Button
Refresh Printer Push Button
Information

Document type Radio Button General documents
Photograph
Toner Saving
Fast
User Setting Drop Down List Print Quality 1
Box Print Quality 2
Print Quality 3
Print Quality 4
Print Quality 5
Print Quality 6
Print Quality 7
Print Quality 8
Print Quality setting by Document Type
Document Type Print Resolution Image Processing Edge Smoothing

Priority
General documents 600dpi High quality Automatic
Photograph 600dpi High quality Photographic
Toner Saving 600dpi Standard Photographic
Fast 600dpi Standard Automatic
56
PCL5e/6 Driver Specification
Configuration of Driver Screen

This section describes the screen or dialogue box configuration and display for the Printer Driver. The
screen layouts are the same for Windows 95/98/Me systems as shown in the following figure. In Windows
NT 4.0, the Accessories tab is located on the Printer Properties dialogue instead of Document
Default dialogue. In Windows 2000 the Accessories tab is located on the Properties dialogue instead of
Printing Preferences dialogue.
Normal Print
Document Server
Sample Print
Setup
Locked Print
About
All Pages
First Page
Paper Other Pages
Slip Sheet
Destination
Custom Paper Size

Print Quality
Accessories
Statistics
Fonts
Watermark
Colour
57
Setup Tab

Job Type: Drop Down List Normal** These settings should be
Box Document Server matched with the printers
Sample Print operation panel.
Locked Print
Detail Push Button
Copies: Spin Button 1-999 (default=1) Number of copies:
1 to 999
Orientation: Drop Down List Portrait** Some applications page
Box Landscape setup may override this
setting.
Rotated Check Box Off** The output page will be
On rotated by 180 degrees.
This feature might affect
some other functions.
Layout: Drop Down List 1 page per sheet**
Box 2 pages per sheet
4 pages per sheet
6 pages per sheet
9 pages per sheet
16 pages per sheet
Draw Frame Border Check Box Off** Enabled only if Layout >
On 1
Page Order: Drop Down List Right, then Down** Enabled only if Layout >
Box Down, then Right 1
Left, then Down
Down, then Left
Collate: Drop Down List Off ** If Collate is On,
Box On Attention: Disable
collates in application is
displayed.
Note: Appropriate
JOBOFFSET command
is sent based on Collate
selection
Duplex: Drop Down List Off**
Box Open to Left
Open to Top
Booklet
58
Settings
Save Push Button Save Drivers Setting

Load Push Button Load Drivers Setting
Staple: Drop Down List Off ** Grayed out when Finisher

Box Top Left Slant is not installed.
Top Right Slant Only Top Left Slant and
Top Left Top Right Slant avail. with
Top Right Finisher 1000, all avail.
Top 2 with Finisher 2250.
Left 2
Right 2 When Staple is selected,
Collate related commands
are sent disregarding
Collate selection in the
GUI.
Punch: Drop Down List Off** Grayed out when Finisher
Box Left 2 2250 with punch unit is
Right 2 not installed.
Top 2
Left 3 Left 2,Right 2, Top 2 can
Right 3 be used when Punch Unit
Top 3 2&3 holes or 2&4 holes
Left 4 Type E is installed.
Right 4
Top 4 Left 3,Right 3, Top 3 can
be used when Punch Unit
2&3 holes is installed.
Left 4,Right 4, Top 4 can

be used when Punch Unit
2&4 holes Type E or 4
holes Type NE is
installed.
** Default Setting values.
59
Paper Tab
This section describes the controls and functions of the Paper Tab as well as functional compatibility
restrictions on selections of paper input source, paper destination and paper output processing.
The Paper Screen consists of two sections. The upper section provides paper size selection and special
options.
Paper Document List Box 11 x 17 For the US, the default

Size: Legal (8.5 x 14) paper is Letter, for all other
Letter (8.5 x 11) countries, it is A4.
Executive (7.25 x 10.5)
5.5 x 8.5
A3 (297 x 420 mm)
A4 (210 x 297 mm)
A5 (148 x 210 mm)
A6 (105 x 148 mm)
B4 JIS (257 x 364 mm)
B5 JIS (182 x 257 mm)
8 x 13
8.25 x 13
8.5 x 13
8K
16K
Custom Paper Size
Fit to Print Size Check Box Off**
On
Print Size: List Box 11 x 17 The default paper is A4
Legal (8.5 x 14)
Letter (8.5 x 11)
5.5 x 8.5
A3 (297 x 420 mm)
A4 (210 x 297 mm)
A5 (148 x 210 mm)
A6 (105 x 148 mm)
B4 JIS (257 x 364 mm)
B5 JIS (182 x 257 mm)
8 x 13
8.25 x 13
8.5 x 13
8K
16K
Paper Radio Button Same paper for all pages**
Selection Use different paper for first
page
Use slip sheet
Paper Input Tray: Drop Down List Auto Tray Select ** All Pages tab in Same
(All Pages) Box Bypass Tray paper for all pages
(First Page) Tray 1 selection.
(Other Pages) Tray 2 First Page and Other
(Slip Sheet) Tray 3 Pages tabs in different
Tray 4 paper for first page
LCT selection.
Slip Sheet and
Document Body tabs in
60
Use slip sheet selection.
Tray 3,Tray 4 are available
when Paper Bank is
installed.
LCT is available when Large
capacity Tray is installed.
Note: Only Bypass Tray is

available in All Pages tab
when Use Slip Sheet is
selected.
Paper Output Tray: Drop Down List Printer Default** (1) Inner Tray 2 is available
(Destination) Box Inner Tray 1 (2) when Inner 1 bin tray is
Inner Tray 2 (3) installed.
External Tray Finisher Shift Tray is
Finisher Shift Tray 2 (5) available when Finsher1000
Finisher Shift Tray 1 Note 4 or 2250 is installed.
MailBox 1 Finisher Proof Tray is
MailBox 2 available when Finisher2250
MailBox 3 is installed.
MailBox 4 Mail box Trays are available
MailBox 5 when Mailbox is installed.
MailBox 6
MailBox 7 Notes:
MailBox 8 1. Printer Default is the
MailBox 9 default output tray
MailBox Proof Tray selected through the
printer Operator
Panel.
2. Lower tray in main
unit.
3. Upper tray in main
unit.
4. Upper tray on Finisher
on 2250 unit only.
Lower tray on 2250, only
tray on 1000 unit.
Paper Type: Drop Down List Plain** Use PCL-XL Command for
(All pages) Box Recycled Media select.
(First page) Special
(Other pages) Thick Media Selection is available
Transparency only in All Pages, First
Colour Page & Other Pages Tab.
Letterhead
Preprinted
Prepunched
Labels
Bond
Cardstock
Custom Paper Push Button Measurement Unit: Inch or Single Custom Paper
Size cm Selection
Custom Paper Size
** Default values
61
Print Quality Tab
TAB SETTING SELECTION SELECTION REMARKS

(Display Name) METHOD OPTIONS (Hot Key)
Print Quality Resolution Drop Down List 600dpi**
Box
Edge Smoothing Radio button Off Edge

On ** Smoothing will
be disabled
and set to off
when Toner
Saver is
turned on.
Toner Saver Radio button Off **
On
Graphics Mode: Drop Down List Vector**
Box Raster
True Type Mode: Drop Down List Download as TrueType

Box **
Download as bit image
Print as graphics
Print Quality Use Printer Fonts Check box Off
On **
Print All Text As Black Check box Off **
On
**.. Default values
62
Accessories Tab
The Accessories screen is used to configure optional devices installed on the printer. The installed options
can be configured regardless of the bi-directional communication capability.
The installed accessories are checked in the list, and displayed in the graphics on the left. Available
accessories change by model. Installation of an accessory enables certain capabilities and selections in the
other driver screens.
Note the manual configuration is always allowed, regardless of the communication channel. This is because
bi-directional communication may fail at any time. After the driver disables the manual configuration, the
printer may be turned off or the communication channel changed, making inquiry impossible. The driver
can not detect communication failure until the user presses Update Now button again.
SETTING SELECTION METHOD SELECTION OPTIONS REMARKS
Paper Bank Check Box Off**

On
Large Capacity Tray Check Box Off**

On
Mailbox Check Box Off** Available
On combinations are,
External Tray Check Box Off** External Tray or
On Mailbox or
Finisher Type1000 Check Box Off** Finisher 1000 or
On Finisher 2250 or
Mailbox+Finisher2
250.
Finisher Type2250 Check Box Off**
On
Punch Unit: Drop Down List Box None** Available when
2&3 holes Finisher 2250
2&4 holes Type E installed
4 holes Type NE
Inner Tray Check Box Off**
On
Additional Memory: Drop Down List Box 32 MB** DMR35A/45A is

64 MB shipped with
32MB on board
and 32MB** in
DIMM slot.
Update Now Button
**.. Default values
63
Watermark
The Watermark function in the printer supports the automatic printing of a watermark on each page or
selected pages of a document. Watermarks can be created in a variety of fonts, colours, sizes and levels of
darkness and placed at a variety of positions and angles on the document.
Limitations:
l Watermark printing is not guaranteed when Graphics Mode = Raster.

l Applications may print graphics image on top of watermark, and the watermark may not be visible in
the printed output

(Display Name) METHOD OPTIONS
Watermark Watermark (text of Drop Down List Box (None) Driver has 5
watermark) CONFIDENTIAL built-in
DRAFT watermarks.
COPY Users can create
URGENT others.
ORIGINAL
Watermarks created by user
Add Button None If no text
entered in Text
box this button
is disabled
Watermark Update Button None If no change is
made to the
current
watermark this
button is
disabled.
Delete Button None If (None)
selected this
button is
disabled.
Text: Type in window Same value as Watermark
Drop Down List Box selection
Size: (in points) Slide bar 6 to 900
Angle: (in degrees) Slide bar -90 to +90
Colour Button None Brings up the
Colour Screen
Fonts Button None Brings up the
Fonts screen
Position (horizontal) Slide bar Left side of page to right
Position (vertical) Slide bar Top of page to bottom
Centre watermark Button None Automatically
centres
watermark on
page
Transparent Text Checkbox On** Watermark text
Off will be in
background
On first Page Only Checkbox Off**
On
As Outline Only Checkbox Off**
On
**.. Default values
64
Statistics
The Statistics Tab is used to specify user information.
PostScript3 Driver Specification
Configuration of Driver Screen: PS3 for Windows 9x
Driver User Interface of PostScript3 for Win9x is changed to PCL-like (U/I for WinNT/2000 will remain
the same).
Normal Print
Setup
Sample Print
Locked Print
Paper
Document Server
About
Print Quality
All Pages
Statistics First Page
Other Pages
Accessories Slip Sheet
Destination
Fonts Custom Paper Size
PostScript
Fonts
Watermarks
(Win95/98 only)
Color
65
Setup Tab
SETTING SELECTION SELECTION REMARKS

(Display Name) Method OPTIONS
Job Type Drop Down List Normal** These settings should be matched
Box Document Server with the printers operation
Sample Print panel.
Locked Print
Details Push Button
Layout Drop Down List 1 page per sheet**
Box 2 pages per sheet
4 pages per sheet
6 pages per sheet
9 pages per sheet
16 pages per sheet
Draw Frame Border Check Box Off** Enabled only if Layout > 1
On
Orientation Drop Down List Portrait ** Some applications page setup
Box Landscape may override
Rotated Check Box Off** Only available when Orientation
On is Landscape. Used to rotate
Landscape 180 degrees to
generated Rotated Landscape
Collate Drop Down List Off ** With application that handles
Box On collate by itself (e.g. MS Word),
collate setting in driver will
always be overridden by collate
setting in the Print Dialogue.
Duplex Drop Down List Off**
Box Open to Left
Open to Top
Settings: Save Push Button Save current driver settings to
disk file
Load Push Button
Load driver settings previously
saved in disk file
Staple Drop Down List Off ** Grayed out when Finisher is not
Box Top Left Slant installed.
Top Right Slant Only Top Left Slant and Top Right
Top Left Slant avail. with Finisher 1000, all
Top Right avail. with Finisher 2250.
Top 2 Note: When Staple is selected
Collate related Commands are Sent
Left 2
irrespective of users Collate
Right 2. selection in the GUI
**..Default Values
66
Paper Tab
This section describes the controls and functions of the Paper Tab as well as functional compatibility and
restrictions related to paper input source, paper destination and paper output controls.
The Paper Screen consists of two sections. The upper section includes Document Size and Paper
Selection controls.
Paper Document List Box 11 x 17 For the US, the default paper is
Size Legal (8.5 x 14) Letter, for all other countries, it
Letter (8.5 x 11) is A4.
5.5 x 8.5
A3 (297 x 420 mm)
A4 (210 x 297 mm)
A5 (148 x 210 mm)
A6 (105 x 148 mm)
B4 JIS (257 x 364 mm)
B5 JIS (182 x 257 mm)
8 x 13
8.25 x 13
8.5 x 13
8K
16K
Custom Paper Size
Paper Radio Button Same paper for all pages **
Selection Different paper for first page
Use slip sheet
Paper Tray Drop Down Auto Tray Select ** All Pages tab in Same paper
(All Pages) List Box Bypass Tray for all pages selection.
(First Page) Tray 1 First Page and Other Pages
(Other Pages) Tray 2 tabs in different paper for first
(Slip Sheet) Tray 3 page selection.
Tray 4 Slip Sheet and Document
LCT Body tabs in Use slip sheet
selection.
Tray 3,Tray 4 are available when
Paper Bank is installed.
LCT is available when Large
capacity Tray is installed.
Note: Only Bypass Tray is

available in All Pages tab when
Use Slip Sheet is selected.
Type Drop Down Plain** Media selection is available
List Box Recycled only in All Pages , First
Special Page and Other Pages Tabs.
Thick
Transparency
Color
Letterhead
Preprinted
Prepunched
Labels
Bond
Cardstock
67
Paper Tray Drop Down Printer Default** Note 1 Inner Tray 2 is available when
(Destination) List Box Inner Tray 1 Note 2 Inner 1 bin tray is installed.
Inner Tray 2 Note 3 Finisher Shift Tray is available
External Tray when Finsher1000 or 2250 is
Finisher Proof Tray Note 4 installed.
Finisher Shift Tray Note 5 Finisher Proof Tray is available
MailBox 1 when Finisher2250 is installed.
MailBox 2 Mail box Trays are available
MailBox 3 when Mailbox is installed.
MailBox 4
MailBox 5 Notes:
MailBox 6 1. Printer Default is the
MailBox 7 default output tray selected
MailBox 8 through the printer
MailBox 9 Operator Panel.
MailBox Proof Tray 2. Lower tray in main unit.
3. Upper tray in main unit.
4. Upper tray on Finisher on
2250 unit only.
Lower tray on 2250, only tray on
1000 unit.
Custom Paper Push Button Measurement Unit: Inch or cm Provide only one Custom Paper
Custom Paper Size Selection
A: Width[9.00 . 29.69]
B: Length[14.80 43.18]
**..Default Values
Print Quality Tab

Print Quality Resolution Drop Down List Box 600dpi
Edge Smoothing Radio button Off When checked

On ** on, Toner Saver
is disabled
Toner Saver Radio button Off & disabled** When checked
On on, Edge
Smoothing is
disabled
Special Click the radio Printed as a Negative
button image
Printed as a Mirror
image
Scaling Spin or enter a 100** (%)
percentage in the
scroll box
**..Default Values
68
Statistics
The Statistics Tab is used to specify user information.

(Display Name) METHOD
User Code Type in edit field Displays up to 8 numeric
characters.
Accessories Tab
The Accessories screen is used to configure optional accessories devices to the printer.

METHOD
Paper Bank Check Box Off**
On
Large Capacity Tray Check Box Off**

On
Mailbox Check Box Off** Available combinations
On are,
External Tray Check Box Off** External Tray or
On Mailbox or
Finisher Type1000 Check Box Off** Finisher 1000 or
On Finisher 2250 or
Mailbox+Finisher2250.
Finisher Type2250 Check Box Off**

On
Punch Drop Down List None** Available when Finisher
Box 2&3 holes 2250 installed
2&4 holes Type E
4 holes Type NE
Inner Tray Check Box Off**
On
Additional Memory Drop Down List 32 MB** DMR35A/45A is shipped
Box 64 MB with 32MB on board and
32MB** in DIMM slot.
**..Default Values
69
Watermark Tab
The Watermark function in the printer supports the automatic printing of a watermark on each page or on
selected pages of a document. Watermarks can be created in a variety of fonts, colours, sizes and levels of
darkness and placed at a variety of positions and angles on the document.

Watermark Watermark (text of watermark) Drop Down List (None) Driver has 3 built-in
Box CONFIDENTIAL watermarks.
DRAFT Default is None.
COPY
Select a Watermark Press Up/Down None or a Watermark
key or highlight message line
using mouse
pointer
New (ALT-W) Button To add a new
Watermark
Edit (ALT-E) Button When a Watermark is
Highlighted
Delete (ALT-D) Button When a Watermark is
Highlighted
Watermark Text Edit box Manually enter
Specification Font Combo box Based on the
Windows system
Size Edit box with 7 - 600
scroll bar
Style Combo box Regular, Bold, Italic,
and Bold Italic
Angle Edit box with From -90 to +90
scroll bar
Automatically Radio button Automatically centre
centre and Position relative
to centre, one and
only one is turned on
Position relative Radio button
to center
X Edit box with 0 99.99 Disabled if Position
scroll bar relative to centre
button is off
Y Edit box with 0 99.99 Disabled if Position
scroll bar relative to centre
button is off
Red Edit box with 0 255
scroll bar
Green Edit box with 0 255
scroll bar
Blue Edit box with 0 - 255
scroll bar
Choose colour ...
On first page only (ALT-F) Checkbox On When a Watermark
Off** text is selected
In background (ALT-B) Checkbox Off When a Watermark
On** text is selected
As Outline Only (ALT-O) Checkbox Off When a Watermark
On** text is selected
**..Default values
70
Configuration of Driver Screen: PS3 for Windows NT/2000
Windows NT
General
Ports
Scheduling
Sharing
Security
Device Settings
IEEE Interface
IEEE1394 is the New Standard Serial interface for Multimedia products and PC peripherals including
printing devices. Major features of IEEE1394 are as follows:
High Speed data transmission 400/200/100Mbps

Easy connection Hot PnP
Easy handling Thin cable (around 5.5mm in diameter)
Outline
IEEE1394 is one of the industry standards, which was authorized as IEEE1394-1995 by IEEE (Institute of
Electrical and Electronics Engineers) in 1995. This interface is expected to be used for sending large-
capacity data such as multimedia data at high speed. Digital Video Camera is one of the popular products
having this interface. Recently, the interface is equipped with many PCs as standard, and also many
IEEE1394 expansion cards for PCs are available in the market.
Features of IEEE1394
IEEE1394 provides High Speed data transmission at 100Mbps, 200Mbps and 400Mbps. It offers much
faster speed than USB, Universal Serial Bus, which has 1.5Mbps and 12Mbps mode.
Connecting Cable & Connector

IEEE1394 cable is simple and flexible like USB cable.
There are 2 types of IEEE1394 cables in the market. One is 6 wires with 6-pin connector, and the other
is 4 wires with 4-pin connector.
The Picture 1 below shows the cable structure of 6 wires cable and its diameter is 5.5mm. The 4 wires
cable does not have 2 Electric wires and is used for digital video and digital camera etc. (diameter is 4mm).
71
Picture 1: Cable structure of IEEE1394 (6-wires)
Electric wires
Twisted pair
(signal wires) Signal wire shield
Shield of the Cable
Picture 2: Interface
USB IEEE1394 IEEE1394

4pin connector 6pin connector
Network Style Topology
Two ways are available for network style of IEEE1394: Daisy Chain and Node Branch. The Daisy
Chain style allows users to connect a maximum of 16 nodes (machines which have 1394 port), and the
maximum cable length is 4.5m (between each device). Node branch style allows users to connect a
maximum of 63 nodes (physically possible node address). (See Picture 3)
Also, Hot-plug-in is available. With it, users can connect & pull out the cable while the machine is working.
Picture3. Network Style of IEEE1394

Workstation PC HDD
400Mbps 200Mbps
CD-R Camera Printer Scanner
100Mbps
100 200Mbps
Mbps 100Mbps
72
Standard Accessory List
Copier Mainframe:
Brand NRG
Destination EU/Asia/ Pacific
1 Copy Tray no (Inner Tray)
2 Operation Panel Symbol
3 Language ROM 1.English 2.French
4 Platen Cover no (option)
5 Drum yes
6 Operating Instruction (English) no
7 Operating Instruction (Multi Languages) procured locally
8 Inner Instruction Sheet (Non Word) yes
9 NECR (English) no
10 NECR (5 languages) yes
11 Energy Star Sticker Yes (attached to machine)
12 Branding/Product Name Emblem Yes (Nash/Rex /Ges)
Printer Option

3 Function Key Top (English / Non-Word) Yes
4 Printer Reference 1 (Documents) No
5 CD-ROM Printer Drivers and Utilities Yes
Document Management Utility Yes
Operating Instructions for Printer No
6 EULA 14 Languages
7 Caution decal 14 Languages
Fax Option

3 Operating Instruction (Multi languages) No
4 Operating Instruction (English) No
5 NECR (English) No
6 NECR (5 languages) No
7 Fax Decal (Non-Word) No
8 Fax Decal (Multi languages) No
73
Printer/Scanner Option

2 Installation Procedure Yes
(English)
3 Function Key Top Yes
(English / Non-Word)
4 Printer Reference 1 No
(Documents)
5 CD-ROM Printer Drivers and Utilities Yes
Scanner Driver and Document Yes
Management Utilities
Operating Instructions for Printer No
6 EULA 14 Languages
7 Caution decal 14 Languages
74
Mechanical noise level (power level)
(1) Sound power level
A) 100V model
Mainframe Complete System*
DMR35A DMR45A DMR35A DMR45A
Stand-By Less than 51dB(A) Less than 51dB(A) Less than 52dB(A) Less than 52dB(A)
Less than 67dB(A) Less than 67dB(A) Less than 70dB(A) Less than 70dB(A)
*Note: Complete System consists of mainframe, Finisher and LCT.
B) 200V model
(2) Sound pressure level
A) 100V model
DMR35A DMR45A DMR35A DMR45A 5
B) 200V model

Maximum: 0.02PPM
Dust Level
0.075mg/m3

0.07mg/m3
75
Power Consumption
A)100V model
Copier Only or Copier with Printer Fax, Printer and Scanner installed
Low Power mode 115 W 150 W 118 W 153 W
Auto Off mode 6W 6W 8W 8W
B)200V model
Copier Only Fax, Printer and Scanner installed
DMR35A DMR45A DMR35A DMR45A 5
Low Power mode 120 W 155 W 123 W 158 W
Auto Off mode 7W 7W 9W 9W
BAM Energy Star Swan
Yes Yes No
76
DMRA07 Product Information Guide
PRODUCT
INFORMATION GUIDE
DMRA07
Nashuatec A070
Rex Rotary A070
Gestetner A070
This document was initially prepared by NRG Group Head Office
and the specifications are subject to change. If in doubt or
further details are required, please contact NRGI Guernsey.
1
Executive Summary
NRG have experienced strong growth within the Analogue Wide Format product range and
operations have been demanding a digital product. The opportunity now exists to launch a
new Digital Wide Format Copier which will enable us to target increased page volume in
Wide Format Markets, as well as introducing the benefits of Digital technology to our Wide
Format offering.
Group Marketing recommends the launch of this product to those Operations already selling
Wide Format, in addition certain digitally oriented operations are considering launch. This
document presents the case for the A070
Background
Analogue Wide Format Copiers are currently sold by the Group in most markets. Germany,
Benelux, Spain, Italy, Ireland and Austria treat it as a low-priority product range, selling the
machine directly or through dealers (50:50). UK and Rex France sell units when demanded
by their clients. For NRG-I, Wide Format is a strategically important product, especially in
Russia and the Middle East.
Analogue sales have risen over 3 years to reach 589 units in 2000 (actual). This is about 40
% of Ricohs European business. Together, Ricoh & NRG have a 20% Market Share in
Europe, although this share varies widely from the mean in countries such as Spain
(MS=50%) and Austria (MS=4%).
The current models have proven to be cheap and reliable machines and are positioned at the
bottom end of the market. They are particularly popular for their Price, Image Quality and
Office- and User-friendliness. This is more and more important as inexperienced, non-
specialists become the typical user.
Competition in the digital market will come from Oc (64%), Xerox Engineering Systems
(16%), Mita (12%) and KIP (8%). Both Xerox and Mita provide an opportunity due to their
current financial weakness. Most units are sold by specialist engineering sales people and not
by general office salesmen.
It is now intended to improve the NRG product offering with a move into the mid section of
the digital market. This will provide us with a competitive product in a market where the
higher page volumes offer the opportunity to generate good supplies revenue.
Marketing Objectives of new Products
Offer existing customers a total solution to include their engineering copying needs
To extend a strong revenue stream of supplies in a market where pirates are absent and
margins remain high.(RUK have experienced GP of 49.2%)
To obtain the same market share position in digital as has already been achieved in
Analogue, becoming a strong no.2 in the market behind Oc
2
Key Product Issues
New plaque (the new square style located centrally on the machine)
5.4 m/min engine speed
3-roll feeder option
All roll- feeders built into mainframe (not separate option)
New consumables
Key Selling Points

Plotting and Scanning in one box
Concurrent Printing and Scanning (with controller)
First machine to market with genuine 600dpi scanning and printing
Noticeably better copy quality than any competitor
Easy to use, even for first-time users Touch Panel Screen
Environmentally friendly OPC drum, toner in a cartridge, Energy Star, Energy
Saver mode
Target Market
The primary target markets for the A070 are:
Architects
Engineers
Design Agencies
Utilities
Local Government
Copy shops
We should approach customers who are currently using an A0 copier, or who are
paying money to a Print/Copy shop.
Sales Area
European Region - Austria, Benelux, Germany, Italy, Spain, Ireland, U.K
NRG International
Mass Production Schedule
The first Mass production is scheduled for end of June 2001. These units will arrive at
Roosendaal at the end of August 2001. First forecasts and firm orders are required in March
2001.
3
Product Overview
Model D Mainframe
Internal Output Tray
2 nd Roll Feeder (Option)
The A070 offers full digital functionality, printing and scanning concurrently with the
controller fitted. It has the following options available:
2nd Roll Tray (for 3rd roll)
Roll Holder
Copy Stacker
Hard Disk Drive (for electronic sorting)
Controller
Scan Option
PS3 and CGM Options
The roll feeders are built into the mainframe, unlike previous analogue products.
Features that differentiate the product include:

1st to market with genuine 600dpi scanning and printing
Touch screen LCD
5.4m/min engine speed
Simple paper setting technique
Printer and scanner combined in one box
Genuinely superior copy quality
Operation Panel
4
Market Situation
General Background
The Wide Format market in Europe continues to be affected by 2 trends:
1. A decline in the effectiveness of the specialist sales fo rces of Xerox and Mita due to their
respective financial difficulties.
2. A move from analogue to digital technology
As we launch this new model into this market we have to position NRG strongly as a digital
solutions provider for Wide Format. Our current channel has been demanding a digital
product, and as such we expect to have a ready market for this product from launch. NRG-Is
main markets have also expressed interest in the product and initial growth prospects are
strong.
European market overview
The European market shows a different trend from that of the US market. The Infosource
1999 Spring edition says that the total demand of the WF copier is going down in 1999. This
trend was seen in 1998 (from 1997),too, so this is the continuous trend in the last 3 years.
14,000
12,000
4,366
10,000 4,314
4,878
8,000 Digital
6,000 Analog
8,269
4,000 6,986 5,959
2,000
0
97 98 99
Market situation
(Europe)
Europe
Year 97 98 99 98 to 99
Analog 8,269 6,986 5,959 -14.7%
Digital 4,366 4,314 4,878 13%
Total 12,635 11,300 10,837 -4%
Digital % 35% 38% 45%
(Data source: Inforsource)
From 1998 to 1999, the total WF market is decreasing by 4%. (In the last 3 years, from 1997
to 1999, the total market decreased by 14.2%.) The decrease mainly comes from the analogue
segment.
5
The analogue market went down by 14.7% from 1997 to 1999. Many players did not launch
new analogue models during these years. Therefore, the market is not stimulated, and the
customers would not be interested to replace their models. However, it would be a good
chance to relaese new models into the analogue market. .
During the same period, the digital segment increased drastically by 13%. We expect steady
growth in the digital segment. Thats why we need new and powerful digital models.
(European market share in 1999 by manufacture)

Total (Analogue + Digital) Analogue technology
9.8% 1.5% Oce 7.3% 2.4% Oce

9.3% 10.4%
Xerox Ricoh
46.7%
Ricoh KTA
Mita Xerox
12.0% 54.5% 11.5%
KTA Mita
12.9% others 21.7% others
Digital technology
7.7% 0.3%
11.7% Oce
Xerox
Mita
15.9% KTA
64.4% othes
(Data: Inforsource)
The European overview is as follows:

1. Oce is the strongest player not only in the total, but also in each category such as
the digital and the analogue technology.
2. Ricoh as a manufacturer performs very well in the analogue category (No.2
position)
3. Ricoh is in others in the digital technology because they have not launched a
Ricoh manufactured product.
6
Digital Wide Format Europe Sales Results
5000
4500
1995
4000
1996
3500
1997
3000
1998
2500
1999
2000
2000
1500 2001
1000 2002
500 2003
0
1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003
Source Infosource: No Mita or XES data; Estimates 00-03.
Market Demand Shift
The market demand is categorized into 4 cells for Wide Format, according to the product
category and the connectivity. (Please see the following matrix.)
Users belonging to each cell will move to the next cell in the direction of the arrows.
Analog Digital
13 k Units/ Year
PPC 14 k Units/ Year
II IV
Electrostatic
I III Plotter
100k Units of 5-10 k

Other MIF 200~Units/Y
250k Units/ Y
s
Diazo Machine Plotter
Stand Alone Connected
I ) Diazo machine (Other/Stand alone)

It is estimated that the diazo MIF would be around 100,000 units all over the world.
Customers who use the diazo will/are going to replace them by analogue wide format
7
copiers because of the environmental requirement, clear image, ease of paper handling and
so on. At the same time, some customers are moving to the digital technology directly.
II ) Analogue technology wide format copiers (PPC/Stand alone)
The installation of analogue copiers would be around 14,000 unit a year worldwide. Many
users are expected to move to the digital wide format copiers because of CAD popularity
(PC connection).
III) Plotters (Other/connectivity)
The inkjet plotters dominate the main part of the plotter market. Some users need to
duplicate the originals and use the wide format copiers.
There may be old electrostatic plotters in the market. These can be replaced by the digital
wide format because they are very old fashined and expensive to run.
IV) Digital wide format copiers
Because of growth in the use of CAD/CAE, the importatance of connectivity has increased
in the wide format market. The market is moving towards digital, and digital has already
exceeded analogue demand as the statistics show.
European Wide Format Market Shares
70
60
50
40
% Analogue
30 Digital
20
10
0
Kip Ricoh Xerox Oce Mita
As one of only 5 ma jor manufacturers, Ricoh intends to continue to increase market share at
the expense of the major MIF holder Oc and weaker companies such as XES and Mita.
Ricohs strong analogue range partly explains its market share in this area; its absence in the
digital market provides an opportunity to attack this area and attain a strong number 2
position. Ricohs only branded digital wide format machine in Europe is manufactured by
Mita. (Both Xerox and Mita market shares are suspect, but the indication from Infosource is
that they are in the right area)
Suppliers
Oc
Oc, with its European manufacturing base, and the largest MIF of Diazo machines, is the
key player in the European digital wide format market. Oc has a market share of about 64 %
in the digital market, partly as a result of having the largest MIF. Oc is in the process of
updating their product range to include extensive connectivity options with drivers for most
commonly used CAD/CAM packages. Oc offer a wide range of optional accessories such as
8
additional roll feeders (up to six). Their systems are modular with separate scanner and
printer, apart from this one weakness, their (arrogant) dominance of the market leads many
customers to consider an alternative supplier. NRG should not attack Oc directly.
Xerox (XES)
XES has a range of older digital models spanning 4 digital machines. Xerox systems are also
modular featuring a separate scanner and printer unit. Although it has the oldest product
range, they also have the widest product range of any of the 4 major manufacturers.
However, their high end machine is OEMd from KIP, giving us the opportunity to up sell
their customers to our machine.. XES sales are in decline and have dropped to 15 %. As a
non core activity Xerox Engineering Systems is up for sale. XES employees are active in the
employment market, seeking job security. Customers are becoming increasingly concerned
about service issues as Xeroxs financial problems deepen.
Ricoh
Ricoh, although a leader in the Japanese market, has only a limited range in the European
market, and NRG currently takes the full Ricoh range of analogue products. Currently it
takes about 20 % of the European market. In terms of digital product Ricoh has been selling
the Cetus (OEMd from Mita) without great success due in part to territory limitations from
Mita, and also because of the un-competitive price and low duty cycle.
Kip
Kip is the fourth manufacturer, with an 8 % digital market share. Kip is the European brand
for Katsuragawa Electric Co Ltd. In the US they have been sold as Shacoh, although this
company and its brand have been bought out by Kip. Shacoh also distributed Kip in Europe,
but they have been bought out by management and now call themselves Europoint. With a
strong focus on the solution, and a very wide range of product from many manufacturers, the
Kip channel has grown over the past few years, at the expense of the box- moving badges like
Regma, Ozalid and Neolt.
Mita
Mita sells mainly in Germany under its own brand and that of Utax, as well as other
Germany-only distributors like Sihl. In the rest of Europe it does not have a strong channel to
distribute product. As Germany is the largest market in Europe, this gives Mita a
disproportionately large market share. However the weakness of their Xi8020, especially its
low duty cycle provides NRG with an opportunity, particularly in Germany and Austria.
9
Channels
Both Oc and Xerox employ a large direct specialist sales force, these sales forces
concentrate on selling high end Digital solutions and only selected dealers are offered the
opportunity to take these products adding local or applications support. A good example of
how manufacturer support is provided is from the following recruitment advertisement from
Oc UK.
Consultant Wide Format Printing Systems

Strategic Major Accounts Group
This role is required within the Wide Format Printing Systems (WFPS)
Division of Oc (UK) Limited, to build strategic partnerships within a complex
market that has complex selling cycles. This position will introduce "added
value" to the sales process by facilitating a consultancy service, which will
enable a solution sell. The key focus will be to provide high level support to
the Account Managers and Regional Managers within Oc WFPS and to
utilise new technology to exploit information management.
Areas of expertise will include:
Document Flow Analysis
Network Needs Analysis
Document Conversion Analysis
Solution Design incorporating third party products
Ideally you will have a complete understanding of the WFPS market, also you
will need to have a good understanding of business and information
distribution processes, full IT literacy is a pre-requisite for this position.
Your personal qualities will include: high communication skills at all levels,
good co-ordination / organisational skills and the ability to work under
pressure to tight deadlines whilst balancing the needs of several stakeholders.
The advertisement stresses the added value of a consultancy approach needed to succeed in
this business, as well as the business knowledge to understand both the customers document
flow and the technological process of document conversion.
The opportunity for NRG exists in the fact that we can provide, through our dealers and
direct sales forces, a total document solution that expands far beyond that which can be
offered by Oc, Xerox or KIP.
We already have customers in Government and Engineering, for example, who will be using
Wide Format Machines and we can offer these customers the opportunity to centralize their
purchasing of office solutions completely. None of the competitors in this channel can offer
that facility, since both Oc and Xerox have separate divisions for Wide Format and KIP is a
specialist.
10
NRG Sales History
Unit Totals Wide Format

0
70
0
60
0
50
0
40
0
30
0
20
0
10
0
Dec-97 Dec-98 Dec-99 Dec-00 Dec-01 Bud

CMRA03 CMRA08A CMRA08B CMRA07 DMRA070
The Opportunity
While most Operations take wide format business as a gift horse, some have been lucky to
find suitable channels to push large numbers of units. Spain and Ireland, with a limited
effort, have achieved considerable market presence. In Spain, NRG & Ricoh now have a
market share of over 50 %.
Other Operations should take these targets as achievable, given the weakness of Xerox and
Kip distribution channels.
11
Target customer
Any person creating, reproducing or archiving paper documents bigger than A3
(420x297mm).
The A070 is exactly what is needed in the following public sectors which use the wide format
frequently in the daily workflow;
Sectors Governmental use Commercial use

Gas, Electricity, Utilities Suppliers
Waterworks
Construction Public planning Contractors, Architects,
Designers, Engineers
Educational institute Universities, Art and
Design Engineering
college, Military
engineering school,
CAD/CAE/GIS
Document Volumes
The volume of paper/film can be anything from 1000 copies per month to about 10,000
copies per month (A1) for regular users signing a 3-5 year contract. The anticipated average
monthly volume is 2530 A1 copies.
Target Remarks
Unit life 60 months or 657K copies @ Whichever comes first
A1/D (390km)
ACV 2,530 copies @ A1/D or
1,500m / 4,920 feet
Max CV 10,940 copies @ A1/D or
6,500m / 21,320 feet
Target MCBC 5.73K @ A1/D (3.4km)
PM cycle 16.8K copies @ A1/D LEF
(10Km)
Document Types
These can be:

handmade drawings in pencil
ink drawings
CAD plots
Blue prints
Diazo prints
Sepia prints
Offset prints
(Although modern large documents are typically (re)produced on robust paper, older types of
documents can be flimsy, fragile, damaged and often changed by paste-ups which make
copying harder.)
12
Industry Types
In the creation of large documents, for the design areas of many industries, such as:
Engineering automotive, aerospace, oil & gas, plant (process & production factory),
Construction civil engineers, architects, contractors, labourers
Housing architects, designers, decorators, landscape gardeners, housing associations
Utilities supply electricity, water, gas, oil
Government land registries, utility management, town planning
Copy & Print shops supplying services to the above

Libraries company, private & public storing these records, typically for over 100 years
Replacing Equipment
Target customers will be:
Existing Aficio customers with a need for digital Wide Format

Users of plotter + diazo
Users of plotter + analogue Wide Format
Users of separate plotter and scanner
Customers with high image quality archiving requirements
Special Cases
There may be special cases where a company specialising in document archiving or scanning
wishes to scan a large library of documents to create an electronic archive.. A070 would be
ideal for this type of project. Also, the A070 would be ideal for making multiple copies of
maps, utility services, construction drawings etc., in a war/disaster zone.
13
Product Sales Points
Copy Quality
The A070 provides the first product in the digital wide format market with genuine 600dpi
scanning, giving excellent quality copies and the markets best quality scan. Copy Quality is
a major concern in the engineering market, where engineering drawings are often drawn to
scale. The major issue for all toner or ink based copiers is the fact that Diazo, for all its
faults, produces the best quality copy of any copying technology.
Problems with Diazo:
Can only use translucent originals

Environmentally unfriendly, requiring special chemicals
Needs reasonably experienced user to get good results
Diazo copies need to be frequently re-copied
Diazo paper, though cheap, has a limited shelf life
No paste ups, duplex originals, or writing on the back possible
Many diazo copies include greyscales, because the diazo technology allows this
Key Copy Quality problems that users face include:
Shrinking of paper over time (many drawings are kept for 100 years or more)
Shrinking of copy paper especially when being fused
Changes in copies over a long run, caused by changes to the original, toner run out
Fading of ink drawings over time
Fading of diazo copies over time
Reproduction of diazo greyscales
Smudging of ink-based drawings when handled or used in the rain/damp
The need to copy with an increased margin on the leading and/or trailing edge to allow
for binding, folding, labeling etc
A070 achieves consistent, high copy quality on a wide range of copy media, by a combination
of engine design items, which cannot be easily copied by our competitors:
Unique 600dpi scanning resolution (can be digitally enhanced to 1200dpi)
A0 Wide Toner Cartridge distribution system
Mid-temperature with Pressure Fusing
Black Toner
Glass Contact Sensor
256 Gray scale scanning, 4 gray scale printing
Toner
Oc has developed a rapid fusing system, which is also used in other Oc machines, and
similar technology is used by Canon in office copiers. One characteristic of these systems is
the grey quality of the toner once deposited. This has the effect of making further copies
even greyer, with a consequent reduction in accuracy. The Ricoh toner is black, avoiding this
problem.
14
Toner Cartridge
Oc supply the toner in a bottle, which is placed at one end of the machine. The toner then
runs along the entire length of the drum. On long copy runs, the toner may struggle to reach
the far end of an A0 copy and so later copies may have less toner on one side than the early
copies.
A070 has an A0 long toner cartridge, which is not only cleaner to use toner always remains
sealed but also ensures that toner is always available across the length of the copy.
Fusing
The ideal fusing should combine low heat with low pressure to ensure that the copy paper
does not stretch nor shrink, together with high temperature and high pressure to make sure
that the toner is firmly welded to the paper.
Oc tries to compromise with a very hot fuser system (the Toast Rack), and no pressure at all.
The result is that any paper jams in the fuser section lead to a small fire (the fragility of the
Ocs insides makes this much more likely than with a roller type fuser in the NRG model).
All Oc digital copiers (which copy more than twice as fast) come with a fire extinguisher for
these emergencies. Even with this system, the grey toner does not bond with the paper and is
easily scratched off.
A070 has a heat and pressure system which is a better compromise than the Oc system, and
is supported by much better optics, than Oc or Xerox provide. The fusing can also be
controlled by the user, allowing selection to be made depending on the copy paper type. This
means that NRG copiers can also handle much wider paper weight and film thickness ranges
than other machines.
Contact Sensor
The contact sensor (scanner) of the Oc models is made of plastic, and as originals are
frequently pasted up, or dusty, this can be easily scratched. Once scratched, this will affect
copy quality. NRG copiers have contact sensors made of glass which will withstand much
rougher treatment than plastic.
Ease of Use
Again, this term is much used, and again in the case of A070 this is absolutely true. If the
problems with Diazo are that an experienced hand is required to get the best quality, digital
toner copiers provide a suitable alternative for normal, office staff.
A070 is one of the easiest copiers in the world to use:
Touch Screen LCD Control Panel the same as an normal office copier
Original side guides
Flange roll paper setting
Manual or Automatic original feed
Most productive
Speedy warm up time (2 minutes)
15
Side Guides
The side guides help users to align the original in the centre of the copy roll. Amazingly,
this feature is not available on other manufacturers copiers making it very difficult to feed
large pieces of paper centrally. Expert users often find them a distraction. A070 has original
feeder guides as standard.
Flange-type Roll Paper Setting
Current wide format feeders require that the paper roll is threaded onto a metal pole, and
centered by eye. This can result in mis-registration. The A070 has a revolutionary flange-
type mechanism that simplifies the changing of rolls, and allows inexperienced users to
change rolls easily and to have multiple rolls, beyond the capacity of the feeder trays.
Manual or Automatic Original Feeding
First-time users will take more time than experienced ones to align a large original before
starting to copy. Automatic original feeding is necessary, especially for those making many
copies. However, Oc models only have a manual feed button and take the original as soon
as this button is pressed, while the user has only one hand on the original skews are the
natural result with large originals.
Previous NRG wide format models had a variable delay after setting the original, but
obviously if there were many users this would only be optimised to one user. Now, the
automatic feeding on the A070 can be changed to manual feeding, so that any user can be
confident that the original can be placed in their own time.
Productivity
Although Xerox, Oc and Kip all sell copiers in the mid range with engine speeds around 4-5
m/min, the A070 is the fastest in its class at 5.4m/min. Also tests have shown that the
technology in NRGs copiers will outperform similar engine speed machines. This is partly
due to the ease of setting the originals, partly due to the faster return of the machine to ready
after a copy and partly due to the much faster first copy time.
Office Friendliness
More and more wide format machines are installed in normal office environments, close to
staff users, customers and buyers. Copyshops are typical office working environments and
do not want the environmental hazards of diazo machines near workers for a full working
day.
A070 combines the most office and user environment-friendliness of any digital wide format
device.
Office Friendly
Unlike some competitors machines, the A070 comes with wheels, and as it consists of only
one unit for both scanning and printing, is easier to locate in the office. For cleaning,
recabling, or any other move, the A070 does not require special equipment or labourers.
The machine can be installed against a wall, as the A070 can be used purely as front
operational. The Oc needs space at the side for toner replenishment.
16
User Friendly
A070 is the simplest, easiest to use digital wide format copier. However, it is also friendly to
users in other ways.
The A070 has a simple touch screen LCD control panel, which makes it as easy to use
as a normal office copier.
When it is time to change toner, the cartridge system ensures that users never come
into contact with the toner.
In an emergency (for example, a misfeed) the Emergency Stop button is easily found
on the Operation Panel, stopping the feeds immediately.
Any mis-feeds are easily cleared from the clamshell and rotating drum system, unlike
the Oc models, which also require clearing of the dangerously hot toast rack fuser
system or the Xerox.
Inexperienced hands can also be reluctant to open up the fragile Oc models, but A070
is simple and robust.
Setting new paper rolls is also made easier with the new flange type system. And the
paper roll used is automatic.
A roll can weigh anything up to 26 lb/12 kg; with an A070, the user simply lifts out
and drops in the new roll - with competitive models the user has to crouch down and
place the roll with outstretched arms, again requiring confidence and experience.
Environment Friendly
The drum is of the environmentally- friendly organic type; The toner comes in a cartridge,
making it much easier to dispose of cleanly than the bottle type Oc. Both models are Energy
Star rated and have a selectable Energy Saver mode. All plastic parts are marked for
recycling.
17
Major Features
Major features
The A070 is the first digital WF model for NRG. It is the best (mid-range) digital WF on the
market, with its handsome plot and scan in one unit, it promises to be a salesmans dream.
1) Superb features
Electronic sorting (with optional hard disk)
Stamp (with optional hard disk & stamp board)
Overlay
Double copy
Mirroring
Reduction/Enlargement
Major features
Sort/Rotate sort
The A070 can make copies and sort the sequential originals.
(Sort)
3 3 3 3
2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1
(Rotate sort)
3 1 2 3
3 3
2
2 2
1
1 1
Alternate sets are rotated and delivered to the internal output tray. (see diagram)
The rotate sort will not work when the original is just one sheet.
Maximum paper size to be rotated is A2.
The number of originals that can be scanned for the Sort and the Rotate sort functions is as
follows:
Original size Standard memory Optional HDD
A0/E 1 sheet 50 sheets
A1/D 2 sheets 100 sheets
A2/C 4 sheets 100 sheets
A3/B 8 sheets 100 sheets
A4/A 16 sheets 100 sheets
18
Image shift
The user can move (shift) the copy images UP, DOWN, LEFT, RIGHT to create the
margin.
A user can shift the images between 0-200mm

(0-7.8) in 1mm (0.1) steps. The default setting
is 20mm (2.0).
R The user can shift the image in a combination of

UP/DOWN and LEFT/RIGHT.( direction)
Delete inside/outside
Delete inside
A user can copy the image(s), erasing a section inside of the specified area.
The area is specified by defining two points for top-left (X1,Y1) and bottom-right
(X2,Y2).
(These X and Y value are measured.)
Delete outside
A user can copy the image(s), erasing a section outside of the specified area.
The area is specified by defining two points for top-left (X1,Y1) and bottom-right
(X2,Y2).
Note
1)You can specify up to 5 areas in A1 size or smaller size.
2)You can specify 1 area only because of the memory management in A0 size.
Double Copies
One original image is copied twice onto one copy.
R R R
An original (image) up to A2/C in size can be copied, and a paper in size up to

A1 can be used with this feature
A user can erase the separation line between two images.
Using the Double copies feature, the paper size must be twice as large as the
original (if paper is the full size.) When using the Reduce/Enlarge feature, the
user needs to consider the magnification ratio.
Image repeat
The original image is copied repeatedly.The number of repeated images depends on
the combination of the original size, copy paper size and the reproduction ratio.
The repeated image may be cropped, depending on above combination.
The bypass tray cannot be used with the Image repeat feature.
19
Positive/Negative
Black and white areas of the original can be reversed.
The largest original is A0/E size. Longer length cannot be reversed.
Mirror Image
The image is flipped along the left /right axis, so that it appears as it would be viewed in a
mirror.
Image Overlay
Two originals are combined onto one copy.
The first scanned original is stored like the background. The second original is overlayed on
the first original.
After every two originals are scanned, one composite image is copied. If a third image is
scanned, this will become the background of the second composite copy.
+ =
First original Second original First Composite image
+ =
Third original Fourth original Second composite image
NOTE
The longer size original cannot be used for the overlay feature
The size of the second scanned original defines the size of composite image.
Standard memory Maximum Image size: A1
Maximum paper size: A1
Optional HDD Maximum Image size: A0
20
Format Overlay
With the HDD option, the Format Overlay is possible.
The first scanned original is used as a Format (and can be stored and recalled for the
next use). The second, thirdoriginals are overlayed on this Format.
(The difference from Image Overlay is that Format Overlay feature can repeatedly
use the first original (Format).
+ =
First original Second original Composite image

(Format)
+ =
Third original Composite image

NOTE
The longer size original cannot used for the overlay feature.
HDD is necessary. Maximum Image size: A0
Stamp
With the HDD and the stamp board option, the following stamp modes are available on
copies.
Background Numbering
The numbering on the background is printed. The numbering is from 1 to 999.
User Stamp Repeat
Original images such as the company logo, symbols and so on are stored and
printed repeatedly on the background.
Preset Stamp
Preset messages such as:
COPY, PRIORITY
PRELIMINARY
CONFIDENTIAL
URGENT
For Your Info.
For Internal Use Only can be printed.
User Stamp
Original images such as the company logo, symbols and so on are stored and
printed in one position on the background
Date Stamp
The date can be printed in a position selected by the user.
Page Numbering
The page numbering can be printed on copies.
21
Mainframe, Options & Consumables Logistics
Contents Whats In The Box?
Item Contents Comments

Mainframe cartons Mainframe Plaques (new Cyclops-
Drum style) will be provided
Branding Plaques x 3 (N, R, G) in the box from the
English- language operation panel decals factory.
Installation instruction sheet (international)
Operating Instructions English, French, German, Spanish, Italian will Note no English manual
be available only as separate items. Includes in the box.
Operation Manual
Used Toner warning decals
Packaging & Branding
Mainframe Packaging
The mainframe carton is unbranded.
Options Packaging
All options have neutral (common) packaging with no branding.
Supplies Packaging
Toner is available in three brands. Developer and drum are branded NRG
Operating Instructions Language Kits
The OI manuals have three front covers with the model number and the brand on them. They
can be torn off to leave the one correctly branded cover.
English is not available in the box.
Product Code and Versatility Table

Mainframe
Manufacturers Group Short Gestetner Rex Rotary Nashuatec First Arrival
Model Name Generic Model Name Model Name Model Name
B010-32 A070 A070 A070 A070 August 2001
Notes: Unitechno Factory
Mechanical Peripheral Options
Note: Estimated Fit Rate for options is our expected average fit rate which is used for
Group purchasing.
Short Name Description Versatility Est. Fit Rate to Mainframe First Arrival
DRT2NDA07 2nd Roll Tray A070 50% August 2001
DRHLDA07 Roll Holder A070 10 % August 2001
DSTA07 Original Tray A070 50% August 2001
22
Mainframe Electronic Options
Note: Estimated Fit Rate for options is our expected average fit rate which is used for
Group purchasing.
Short Name Description Versatility Est. Fit Rate to Mainframe First Arrival
DHDA07 Hard Disk A070 50% August 2001
DIFPRC470W Printer Controller A070 80% Sept 2001
DIFPRC470W Printer Interface A070 80% Sept 2001
DSBA070 Stamp Board A070 50% August 2001
DSWL470SCO Scan Option A070 60% Sept 2001
DSWL470PS3 PS3 Option A070 10% Sept 2001
DSWL470CGM CGM Option A070 5% Sept 2001
Supplies
Short Name Description Contents (g) Yield at 6% A1 Qty. Inner Qty. Outer Versatility
DT70BLK Nash Toner 800 g 2,200 A1 copies 1 10
DT70BLK Rex Toner 800 g 2,200 A1 copies 1 10
DT70BLK Gest Toner 800 g 2,200 A1 copies 1 10 A070
DD70 Developer 2.4 kg 67 k A1 1 6
DOPC70 OPC Drum 90 k A1 1 1
Language Kits

CDKA070GB A070 Language Kit English A070
CDKA070F A070 Language Kit French A070
CDKA070G A070 Language Kit German A070
CDKA070I A070 Language Kit Italian A070
CDKA070E A070 Language Kit Spanish A070
CDKA070NL A070 Language Kit Dutch A070
Product Discontinuations
There will be no product discontinuations.
Supplies Yield
Target Remarks
Unit life 60 months or 657K copies @ A1/D (390km) Whichever comes first
ACV 2,530 copies @ A1/D or
1,500m / 4,920 feet
Max CV 10,940 copies @ A1/D or
6,500m / 21,320 feet
Target MCBC 5.73K @ A1/D (3.4km)
PM cycle 16.8K copies @ A1/D LEF (10Km)
23
Environmental Improvements
(all data below are maximum figures: actual figures achieved in analogue models
(CMRA08A) are in brackets)
1. Sound Power Level
A070
(Working) 72dB (70.7 dB)
(waiting) 52dB (54.7 dB)
2. Ozone Emission Level
less than 0.02mg/m3 (0.008 mg/m3 )
3. Dust Level
less than 0.075mg/m3 (0.015 mg/m3 )
4. Styrene Emission Level
5. Identification of Plastic Components
TBA (All plastic components which weigh more than 50 g are identified according to
ISO11469.)
6. Environmental Regulation
BAM Energy Star Swan Energy 2000

TBA Yes TBA TBA
24
Specifications
(SEF: short-edge feed, LEF: long-edge feed)
Technology
Configuration : Console
Copying/Printing Process : Electro-photographic printing

Photo-conductor : OPC drum (970mm x 80)
Drum yield : 40K/A1 or D (24Km)
Charge system : Scorotron (corona charge)
Development system : Magnetic brush
Dual component dry toner system
Fusing : Heat and Pressure
Roller material Heat roller : Teflon
Pressure roller : Silicone rubber
Fuse oil : Not used
Cleaning system : Counter Blade
PM cycle : 16.8K copies @ A1/D LEF (10Km)
11.2 Main Specification

Original feed : Sheet original
Original set position : Centre
Original image (scan) size : Maximum 914mm(36) x 6,000mm (6M)

Minimum 210mm(8.3) x 182mm(7.1)
Copy size : Maximum 914mm(36) x 6,000mm (6M: roll paper)
914mm(36) x 2,000mm (2M) (Bypass feeding)
Minimum 210mm(8.3) x 182mm(7.1)
(Length: min.210mm from 1st roll tray
Min.250mm (10) from 2nd roll tray)
Max. original width :950mm
Original paper feed : 3 ways (Top, Top-rear, Rear straight path)
Copying speed : 4 cpm/ppm @ A0, 3.8cpm/ppm @E (SEF)

: 7 cpm/ppm @A1/D (LEF)
Copy Paper feed Front and Rear : switchable

(Front) Internal output tray
(Rear) Copy Tray
Reproduction ratio : 1
Reduction/Enlargement
Inch Version Metric Version

Engineer Architecture
Reduction 25,32,50,65 % 25,33,50,67% 25, 35, 50, 71%
100% 100 % 100 % 100%
Enlargement 129,259,400 % 133,267,400 % 141, 200, 283, 400%
25
Zoom : 25.0% to 200.0% by 0.1% step

200.0% to 400% by 0.2% step
Resolution : 600dpi
Gray Scale : Scanning 256 levels
Printing 4 levels
Image density : Auto 7 steps, Manual 7 steps
Warm up time : less than 2 minutes (20C, US:120V, EU:230V)

First copy time : 18 sec. @A1 (LEF), 25 sec. @A0 (SEF)
19 sec. @D, 26 sec. @E
No. of repeat copy : 1-99 (Ten key input)
Paper capacity (Roll paper) : Max. Diameter: 175mm, Max. length:150M

Bypass feed
Output tray capacity Front : 99 sheets @A1/D (Plain paper)
10 sheets @A1/D (Application paper)
Rear : 10 sheets @A0/E, A1/D (Plain paper)
1 sheets @A0/E, A1/D (Application paper)
Paper cut method : Synchronized cut, Preset size cut, Variable cut
Memory Capacity : 160MB (equivalent to 1 x A0/E size)

HDD (optional) :more than 4.3GB
Power source : NA 120V/60Hz, 20A

EU 220V-240V, 50/60Hz, 10A
Maximum Power Consumption : NA less than 1.80kw
EU less than 1.76kw
Dimensions (Wx D x H) : 1,260 x 740 x 1,200 (mm)
50 x 29 x 47
Weight : 220Kg (485lbs)
Special features
Selection of original type

Letter mode : standard
Letter/Photo mode : standard
Photo mode : standard
Pale mode : standard
Generation copy : standard
Job program : standard (20 jobs)

Interrupt job : standard
Paper selection : Auto Paper Selection (standard)
Auto magnification selection : standard
Editing : Overlay, Mirroring, Negative/Positive, Erase, Image
Shift, Double copy, Repeat copy
Margin adjustment : standard 0 to +/- 500mm (by 1mm step)
26
Electronic sort : Number of pages to be stored
Size Standard Memory Optional HDD(4.3GB)
A0/E 1 50
A1/D 2 100
A2/C 4 100
A3/B 8 100
A4/A 16 100
(1) With optional HDD, the number of pages to be stored
is minimum.
(2) The number is subject to the image coverage.
(3) Inch: ANSI
Restart key : standard

Emergency Stop : standard (key)
Proof copy : standard
Check copy : standard
Paper size*
Original size *
SEF: Short Edge Feed LEF:Long Edge Feed

Metric version
Original size Original table
SEF LEF
A0(841x1189) ? X
A1(594x841) ? ?
A2(420x594) ? ?
A3(297x420) ? ?
A4(210x297) ? ?
B1(728x1030) ? X
B2(515x728) ? ?
B3(364x515) ? ?
B4(257x364) ? ?
B5(182x257) ? ?
Non-Standard size
Original length 182- 6,000mm
Original width 210mm-914mm
Maximum width 950mm
Original weight 20.9 157g/m2
Original thickness 0.03 1mm thickness
27
Inch version
Original size Original table
SEF LEF
Engineering E(34x44) ? X
D(22x34) ? ?
C(17x22) ? ?
B(11x17) ? ?
A(81/2x11) ? ?
Architecture E(36x48) ? X
D(24x36) ? ?
C(18x24) ? ?
B(12x18) ? ?
A(9x12) ? ?
Non-Standard size
Original length 7.2 236
Original width 81/2 36
Maximum width 37.5
Original weight 5.6 41.8lb(20.9 157g/m2)
Original thickness 1.2Mil 40Mil
Recommende d Paper sizes and types*
l Metric version
Tray Type Recommended paper Recommended paper size Remarks
type
Paper Roll Plain paper Max. Roll paper diameter: 175
52.3 110g/m2 mm
(13.9 29.3 lb) Max. Core diameter: 75.7 77
Translucent paper mm
Film Width:
210, 257, 297, 364,420, 515,
594, 660, 728, 800, 841, 880,
914 mm
Roll length: Less than 150 mm
Bypass Tray Plain paper A0(SEF), 1 sheet can be
52.3 110g/m2 A1/A2/A3/A4 (SEF/LEF), set from
(13.9 29.3 lb) B1(SEF) bypass.
Translucent paper B2/B3/B4 (SEF/LEF)
Translucent paper Paper width: 182-914mm
Paper length: 182- 2000mm
28
l Inch version
Tray Type Recommended Recommended Remarks
paper type paper size
Paper Roll Plain paper Max. Roll paper diameter: 1
52.3 110g/m2 Max. Core diameter:
(13.9 29.3 lb) Width:
Vellum
Film Roll length:
Bypass Tray Plain paper Engineering 1 sheet can be

52.3 110g/m2 E(34x44):SEF set from
(13.9 29.3 lb) D(22x34):SEF/LEF bypass.
Vellum C(17x22) :SEF/LEF
Translucent paper B(11x17) :SEF/LEF
A(81/2x 11) :SEF/LEF
Architecture
E(36x48):S EF
D(24x36):SEF/LEF
C(18x24) :SEF/LEF
B(12x18) :SEF/LEF
A(9x 12) :SEF/LEF
Operation Panel
Feature Selection :Touch Panel LCD (240 x 640 dot)
Guidance languages (6) : English, French, German, Italian, Spanish, Dutch
Major difference with Mita Xi 8020 or Ricoh 7037W
Specification Model D Cetus

Resolution 600 dpi 400 dpi
Copy speed 4cpm @A0, 3.8cpm@E 1.9 cpm @A0
7cpm @A1/D 3.6 cpm @A1
MCV 6,500m 1,500m
Life time 390,000 m 60,000 m
Standard memory 160MB Option
Max copy length 6,000 mm 5,000 mm
(from Roll paper tray)
Concurrent print & scan Yes No, Print and Scan
29
Product Information Guide

RW-470 PRINTER CONTROLLER
OVERVIEW
Mission
Accelerate AD conversion
Replace Wide Format inkjet plotters
Positioning of Dolphin
CONTROLLER OPTION CONFIGURATION
PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS
Printer specification
Client softwares
Print data flow
Printer features
Client / Features matrix
Others
SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS
Scanner specifications
Scanner features
MILESTONES
STANDARD ACCESSORY LIST
CODE LIST
30
Overview
Mission
Accelerate AD conversion
The needs of wide format users are now moving to electronic formats such as CAD.
The target of Printer controller Type RW- 470 is to accelerate Analogue to Digital
conversion of Wide Format products and offer Wide Format users high quality printing,
scanning and archiving solutions.
Replace wide-format inkjet plotters

Printer Controller Type RW-470 will enable Dolphin to replace wide- format plotters. One of
the most popular wide format printing device is ink jet plotters.
But most of the inkjet plotters take minutes to print out 1 page of A1/D size document.
In contrast the A070 will offer high productivity of 7ppm(A1/E) output with 600dpi crisp
image quality and also save cost by using toner instead of expensive ink cartridges.
Positioning of Dolphin
Please refer to the Mainframe PIG for A070 positioning.
RW-470 is developed by Ratio, a German company, which has much experience in wide
format plotter development. They also provide a wide range of scanning and software
solutions.
31
Controller option configuration
Products notes
(Type 470 Interface Option) Mandatory to connect Dolphin mainframe and printer
controller(server PC).
Printer Controller Type RW-470 Printer controller board with drivers and utilities.
(Scanner Option) Option to enable scanner function.
(PostScript 3 Option) Option to enable printing PostScript files.
(CGM Option) Option to enable printing CGM files.
(Operation Manual Kit) Included with printer controller on CD
Server PC (procured locally) Not included in the controller.
Required PC spec is:
OS: Windows2000 Professional
CPU: PentiumIII 750Mhz or higher
HDD: 10GB or more
RAM: 256MB or more
FSB: 133Mhz
Display Controller: 1024x768 pixels resolution
CD-ROM drive
Network Interface
Dolphin mainframe Server PC
Plot Control
Software
Dolphin Engine Server PC
Engine I/F Controller

Board Board
Internal
Video I/F
IMPORTANT!
Scanner option, PS3 option and CGM option only include licence document.
Software modules for these options are already installed in the controller board, but protected
by key codes (they cannot be activated unless you type in the key code)
The licence document has individual licence numbers printed.
Customer (or dealer) should access Ratio WEB site and submit their licence number to
receive key codes.
To receive the key code, you need to type in Controller Board serial number and licence
number.
32
Printer Specifications
Printer specification
Type RW-470 Remarks

Controller type External (server PC type) Requires Win2000
Professional
Interface slot PCI2.0 or higher 3.3V or 5V auto PCI slot must accept
adaptive, maximum load 5A. BUSMASTER
transfer.
Maximum continuous 7ppm@A1/D size
print speed 4ppm@A0, 3.8ppm@E size
Maximum print size 914mm x 6,000mm
note) max. length depends on RAM &
status.
Scan
Only: Plot: Simultaneous :
256MB 2072 2072 1036
512MB 6000 6000 3140
768MB 6000 6000 6000
1GB 6000 6000 6000
Paper capacity Please refer to the Dolphin mainframe

specification.
Output capacity Please refer to the Dolphin mainframe
specification.
CPU PentiumIII 750Mhz or higher required. Depends on server PC
specification.
RAM Minimum 256MB required Depends on server PC
specification.
HDD Minimum 10 GB required Depends on server PC
Features using HDD are, specification.
l Collation
l Click charge management
l Data maintenance (Job history)
l Spooling, cache for print
l Sample print,
l Secure print
Network protocol TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, lpr/lpq, HTML, SMB Depends on server PC
specification.
Resolution 600dpi
Output file format <Standard>
TIFF(uncompressed/G3/G4), T6X,
BMP, CIT, RLC, HPGL/2, HP/RTL,
Calcomp906/907, PCX, WMF, CALS,
DWG
<Option>
PostScript 3, CGM
33
Client softwares
On this controller, different clients (printer drivers) are supplied. Every print must be created
by one of following clients.
Type Description Platform

PLOTCLIENT Standalone client software Win95/98, NT4.0, 2000, Me
WINPRINT Windows printer driver Win95/98, NT4.0, 2000, Me
PLOTCLIENT/ACAD AutoCAD system driver AutoCAD13 / 14 / 2000
/ 2000i / LT2000 / LT2000I
PLOTCLIENT/WEB HTML client for Netscape Navigator 4.0 or
internet/intranet access higher
MS internet Explorer 4.0 or
higher
LPR Unix driver UNIX
CFG spool Single file spooler with open syntax Win95/98, NT4.0, 2000, Me
Mac OS9
SSL spool Job spooler with open Win95/98, NT4.0, 2000, Me
syntax Mac OS9
SCANTOOL Standalone scanning tool Windows 2000 professional
(server PC)
Print data flow

HTML UNIX Shell ftp, Windows AUTOCAD SCAN
BROWSER nfs, Application Application
Win -explorer
PLOTCLIENT lpr WinPrint PLOTCLIENT PLOT
/WEB /ACAD CLIENT
PLOT PLOT PLOT

CLIENT CLIENT CLIENT
CLIENT
SERVER
CFG or SSL-Spool
CFG-READER SSL-READER
USER INTERFACE
Command and process
JOB QUEUE / control (security and test
PRIORITY DATABASE print)
PLOT
CLIENT
RIP cache JOB --> Single page EXTERNAL

DWG
converter/sorter/rasterizer CONVERTE
R
34
Printer features
Feature Description
Auto paper size select Automatically determines the size of actual image data dimension and selects
smallest paper size available.
Media selection Controller offers selection of following media types.
(Paper type selection) Ignore (= any of the followings)
Plain paper
Recycled paper
Transparent
Film
Roll select Specifies the tray.
Auto
1 (roll)
2 (roll)
3 (roll)
Bypass
Limitless paper feed 3 setting available.
-OFF (no limitless paper feed.)
-SAME SIZE (switching only to alternative roll of same size and media.)
-SMART (switching to any alternative which gives same output.)
Image rotation Automatically rotates the image to fit to the paper size.
Output tray select Client can select output tray from front tray, back tray or system default.
Default: front tray
Multiple copy 1-99
Collation Sorted automatically in server PC under windows printer driver.
Maximum 5 pages of A0/E size document as 1 set.
Secure print By specifying from driver, server holds the data without paper output and start
output by operating from server PC.
Trial print By specifying from driver, printer only outputs one copy of multiple set, and
(sample print) holds the data. After trial, the rest of the copies will be output by operating
from server PC.
Image rotation By 0, 90, 180, 270 degrees.
Automatic rotation available for paper saving and SMART limitless print.
Magnification (zoom) By standard size
By percent value (1-999%)
By specified size
Border setting Prints frame around the image.
Mirror setting Available X and Y direction.
Pen setting In case of output of vector data, pen setting can be defined by user.
HPGL/HPGL2, Calcomp 906/907
Pen numbers 0 to 255
Pen thickness in mm or inches or pixels
Grey scale level 0 to 100%
Stamp setting Text Stamp
9 positions (top left, top centre, top right, centre left, bottom right)
font style and size selectable
Enhanced stamp
Macro stamping (time, date, filename, etc.)
User defined position
Stamp rotation available (0 359 degrees)
Text-Logo merge and multi stamp available
35
Client / Feature matrix
Feature Plot WIN Lpr Plot Plot CFG SSL SCAN

Client PRINT Client Client Spool Spool Tool
ACAD WEB
Auto paper size Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
select
Medium selection Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
(Paper type
selection)
Roll select Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Limitless paper feed Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Image rotation Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Output tray select Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Multiple copy Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Collation No Yes No No No No No No
Secure print Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Trial print Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
(sample print)
Magnification Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
(fixed format)
Magnification Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
(percentage)
Magnification Yes No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes
(custom dimension)
Border setting Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Mirror setting Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Pen setting Yes No Yes No Yes Yes Yes No
Text Stamp Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Enhanced stamp Yes No No No Yes No Yes Yes
Others
Feature Description
CFG spool TBA
SSL spool TBA
Click charge utility Utility software is installed on server PC and manages the following
items.
l User name or ID code
l Media type
l Paper size (length and width)
l Number of print
l Time record
Status monitor Utility software is installed in client PC and available to confirm the
printer status on network.
l Working/error status
l Controller hardware configuration
l Controller software configuration
Batch output utility TBA
36
Scanner specifications
Scanner specification
Type RW-470 Remarks

Controller Type Same as printer controller spec.
Max. continuous 7ppm@A1/D size SEF
scan speed
Resolution 150 1200dpi
Scan size 210 x 182 914 x 6,000
File format TIFF(uncompressed/G3/G4),
T6X, BMP, RLC, HP-RTL, PCX,
CALS1&2
Scanner software SCANTOOL software Scanning software for server
PC.
Scanner features
Feature Description
Contrast setting Auto, level to 7
Reading area setting Auto, Fixed form, User define
Mirror Mirror in X axis.
Invert Black <-> White invert
Rotation 0, 90, 180, 270 degrees
Scan modes Single copy mode
Scans one original into memory.
Set copy mode
Scans one original into the memory and waits for next original
until operator hits the stop button. Controller automatically
generates a set of scan data.
Batch scanning mode
Scans one original into the memory and waits for next original
until operator hits the stop button. Controller automatically
generates the file name and saves all data to the disc.
Scan to archive mode
Same as Batch scanning mode, except that after every scan,
controller asks the operator to fill in file name.
Integrated editor Zoom in and out
Crop image to user defined extent
Crop data to predefined format
Cut and paste between Windows applications
Merge data with other image data
Erase rectangle
Fill rectangle
Draw line
Enter text in four orientations
Erase data by eraser utility
37
Milestone
Item Date Notes

Production
Sample production April, 2001
Sample shipment May, 2001
Mass production (Tokyo) August, 2001
Mass production (Germany) August, 2001
Market launch September, 2001
Code List
Product Interface Option

Model Name Type 470W Interface Option
Production site Ricoh, Japan
Brand Non Brand
Buyer Ricoh USA / Europe
Savin / Gestetner USA
NRG Europe
(TBD: Ricoh Asia/HongKong)
Product Printer Controller Scanner option

Model Name Printer Controller RW-470 TBA
Production site Ratio, Germany Ratio, Germany
Brand Non Brand Non Brand
Buyer Ricoh USA / Europe Ricoh USA / Europe
Savin / Gestetner USA Savin / Gestetner USA
NRG Europe NRG Europe
(TBD: Ricoh Asia/HongKong) (TBD: Ricoh
Asia/HongKong)
Product PostScript 3 option CGM option

Model Name TBA TBA
Production site Ratio, Germany Ratio, Germany
Brand Non Brand Non Brand
Buyer Ricoh USA / Europe Ricoh USA / Europe
Savin / Gestetner USA Savin / Gestetner USA
NRG Europe NRG Europe
(TBD: Ricoh Asia/HongKong) (TBD: Ricoh
Asia/HongKong)
38
Version 1.11
Printers
C7005P C7006 C7006W C7006DW
PMR26 PMR26N
Memory Matrix
WFW Home NPS

PCR5P Product Information Guide
PRODUCT
INFORMATION GUIDE
PCR5P
Nashuatec C7005p
Rex Rotary C7005p
Gestetner C7005p

1
Introduction
C7005p is the second Ricoh-manufactured colour laser printer to be launched by The Group
in June 1999. C7005p is an A3 colour laser printer for the specialist / professional colour user.
Ricoh Colour Laser Printer Launch Plan

Speed
Fresa Fresa
6 Win PS
6/24 6/24 6/24
Fresa Fresa Fresa

5/17
5/17 Win + PS + Win ++
5
4 4/16 4/16 4/16
Pomelo Pomelo Pomelo

3 Win + Win ++
1999 2000 2001

= we dont sell
The Colour Market

Colour Page Printers
W. European Market Forecast 1996 - 2002
Unit Shipments (000s)
200
Rest of Europe
UK
150 Switzerland
Sweden
Spain
Portugal
100
Norway
Netherlands
Italy
50 Germany
France
Finland
0 Denmark
1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 Belgium
Year Austria
The colour printer market grew by 42% in 1998

End user prices are massively eroded
Distinct categories are now established both vertically (home and professional markets)
and horizontally (inkjet, electrophotographic and thermal transfer markets).
The thermal transfer market is being squeezed out
Price points are low in the inkjet market, but there are marked improvements in output
quality.
There are few manufacturers and brands in the desktop colour page printer market.
2
Product Overview
Specification Fresa Win C7005p

Engine Speed (FC/BW) 5/17 5/17
First print speed 30/14 secs 30/14 secs
(FC/BW)
Warm-up time 450 secs. 450 secs.
Paper Capacity 300 sheets std. 300 sheets std.
1,300 sheets max. 1,300 sheets max.
Paper Weight 64 163 g/m2 64 163 g/m2
Paper Size A3 / 11 x 17 A6 A3 wide / 13 x 18 A6
By-pass tray Std. 50 sheets Std. 50 sheets
Print volume (month) 25,000 mono 25,000 mono
6,250 full colour 6,250 full colour
NIC Optional Ethernet Std. Ethernet
100BaseTx 10/100BaseTX / 10Base5
Token Ring Not supported Optional
Memory (Std./Max) 32 MB / 96 MB 32 MB / 160 MB
HDD Not supported Optional 1.6 GB
PDL IPDL-C Adobe PostScript 3
PostScript 2 (Ricoh clone) PCL5C/5e
PS font Clone Adobe
Resolution 600 x 600 dpi 600 x 600 dpi
Gradation 1, 2 bit 1, 2 bit
Colour Management Simple driver Colour PostScript CRDs
Management Press simulation control
Device profiles
Calibration Only in SP mode Visual Colour Calibration
(VisualCal)
Network Management Aficio Manager Aficio Manager
Utility Fiery Web Tools
Key Selling Points
High Speed Printing

High Image Quality
EFI Controller
Fiery WebTools
Versatile Paper Handling
A3 Full bleed printing on A3 oversize paper
High Image Quality on heavier media
Compact Footprint
3
Target Market
Segment: Specialised businesses: Graphic design companies, and advertising agencies,

for example, and Copy/Print Shops, and in-house copy centres.
Main usage: Colour proofs, catalogues, leaflets, presentations, direct mail, greeting cards,
A3 size, for example.
Monthly volume: Average: 2,000 5,000 prints
Colour Ratio: 50%
4
Product Overview
Line Drawings
Mainframe
Mainframe and optional paper feed units
Operation Panel
Bypass Tray
(50 sheets)
Standard Paper Tray

(300 sheets)
Optional Paper Units

(2 x 500 sheets)
5
Operation Panel
LCD Characters 16 x 2
Language English
Language can be selected by the user at the control panel French
Italian
German
Spanish
Dutch*
No. of Keys 8
*Dutch driver is not available.
Paper Handling
Paper Capacity
The C7005p comes standard with a 250 sheets paper feed unit which will handle media from
A5 to A3 oversize (13 x 18) and from 60-105 g/m2. A standard Bypass tray will also take
50 sheets (80 g/m2) and will handle A6 to A3 oversize (13 x 18) and heavier media (60-163
g/m2) such as OHPs and card stock.
Up to two optional 500 sheets paper feed units can be added to the C7005p enabling a
maximum of 1,300 sheets input capacity and a variety of up to four types of media to be
installed in the paper trays for total flexibility. For example, A3 oversize paper, headed note
paper, white A4 copy paper and OHPs can all be stored in the C7005p printer enabling a
workgroup to print on a variety of media over the network without having to change paper
within the trays.
OHP Mode / Thick Paper Mode
When the user selects OHP Mode or Thick Paper Mode in the printer driver, the fusing speed
decreases to ensure high image quality on OHPs or thicker paper. This results in a slower
print speed as shown below:
6
Media Type Full Colour Print Speed Mono Print Speed

A4 paper 5 ppm 17 ppm
A3 paper 2.5ppm 11 ppm
OHP (A4) 1.1ppm 1.6 ppm
Thick media (A4) 2.3ppm 3.8 ppm
When the OHP transparency mode is selected, paper is automatically inserted between each
OHP transparency to prevent them from being stuck together.
Paper Sizes
PostScript PPD OEM Feeding Dimension Europe

Name Name Direction (mm or inches) Std. Tray Bypass Opt.
Tray Tray
Tabloid Extra A3 Wide Short 12"x 18" Y X
- Short 13 x 18 Y* X
A3 A3 Short 297mm x 420mm Y X Y
A4 A4 Short 210mm x 297mm
A4 Rotated A4 Long 297mm x 210mm Y X Y
A5 A5 Short 148mm x 210mm
A5 Rotated A5 Long 210mm x 148mm Y X
A6 A6/post card Short 105mm x 148mm X
B4 B4 Short 257mm x 364mm Y*d X Y*
B5 B5 Short 182mm x 257mm
B5 Rotated B5 Long 257mm x 182mm Y* X Y*
B6 B6 Short 128mm x 182mm X
Tabloid Ledger Short 11"x 17" Y* X Y
Legal LG Short 8.5"x 14" Y* X Y
Letter LT Short 8.5"x11"
Letter Rotated LT Long 11"x 8.5" Y X Y
Statement HLT Short 5.5"x 8.5"
- HLT Long 8.5"x 5.5" Y* X
Executive EXE Short 7.25"x 10.5"
- EXE Long 10.5"x 7.25" Y* X Y
- F Short 8"x 13" Y* X Y*
Folio Folio Short 8.25"x 13" Y* X Y*
FanFold Foolscap Short 8.5"x 13" Y X Y*d
GermanLegal
Y: Selected by paper size select dial.

Y*: Select * on a size select dial and set a paper size on control panel.
Y*d means default size.
X: Selected by Printer driver or control panel setting.
7
Controller (by EFI)
Controller Specifications
CPU R4700
CPU Frequency 133MHz
Compression ECT
Total DIMM slots for ROM/RAM 4 (2 for standard, 2 for optional RAM)
Printer Description Language Adobe Postscript level 3, PCL5C/5e
Network Protocol TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, SMB and AppleTalk
Standard ROM / RAM 32 / 32 MB
Upgrade Memory (DRAM DIMM) 64 MB, Up to 160MB (32 MB std.+64 MBx2)
Model Type DIMM (Dual In-Line Memory Module)
Memory Type PC100 SDRAM (precisely described as PC100
Rev1.0 compatible)
Number of Pins 168 pins
Access Time (Frequency) 100 MHz
CAS Latency 2
DIMM slots for Upgrade 2
Hard Disk Drive 2.5/1.6GB (Option)
Connectivity
Parallel (B connector) IEEE 1284
Ethernet (RJ45) 10BaseT, 100BaseTX
Ethernet (DB9) 10 Base 5
10Base2 is supported, but an external transceiver must
be prepared by the user
Token Ring Optional
Calibration Visual Calibration & Adjustment
Power Consumption 5V, 5A (Max.)
8
Calibration
Calibration by the user is required when selling to professional colour users who need to
ensure colour consistency across different print jobs.
Visual Colour Calibration (VisualCal Calibration)
The Visual Colour Calibration feature allows experienced users to calibrate the engine
themselves (or service personnel). This kind of calibration will allow users to overcome the
colour drift in printers that is typically due to ageing or adverse environmental conditions.
The person doing the calibration is asked to enter certain values into the front panel, after
which the calibration is completed. The process for calibrating the engine involves the
printing of two pages from the front panel.
The first page is used to determine the Min. and Max. densities the engine is printing.
This page has 9 colour strips printed with ten toner densities.
1. There are two strips for each CMYK colour and one for a grey balance at 30% density.
2. For each strip, the user determines what density best matches the surrounding colour strip.
3. This value is inputted through the front panel.
The next page is for doing grey balance calibration by matching a CMY grey to the grey
produced by the K of the engine.
1. The user sees a number of colour patches surrounded by a grey background.

2. The grey background is printed with pure black ink only.
3. The patches are printed with CMY inks.
4. One of these patches shows the user the current grey balance calibration of the engine.
5. If the current CMY grey of the engine does not match the background, the user picks a
different colour patch that better matches the surrounding grey.
6. The row and column numbers of the patch are inputted through the front panel.
Visual Colour Adjustment
The Colour Adjustment feature provides creative control to increase or decrease the
brightness of an image, or the density of each colour; red, yellow, green, cyan, blue, or
magenta by using the operation panel keys.
9
Colour Management System
The controller has a full complement of colour management technologies built-in. Since
effective colour management requires both client environment and controller support, EFI has
leveraged its extensive colour expertise into the following components :
Standard Colour Management Components
Component Description Location / Platforms

PostScript colour CRDs optimized for photos, In controller ROM /
rendering graphics, presentation objects; Flash
Dictionaries paper / transparency media types
Press simulation control Lookup tables to simulate Controller SRAM
Density characteristics of
Offset printing processes
Device profiles ColorSync 2/ICM profiles Macintosh / Windows
Compatible with Macintosh and 95
Windows colour management
systems
Compression Method
The controller uses EFIs proprietary ECT compression technology to compress typical office
documents in a loss less manner. Loss less compression ensures the highest level of print
quality is achieved. A highly compact page representation enables many pages to fit within
the page buffer memory pool and facilitate continuous print. The compression level , and
therefore the image quality achieved for a system with a given memory configuration is
dependent upon the complexity of pages that are being processed. The table below identifies
classes of page complexity, associated document types and estimated compression ratios.
Page Description Typical Compression

complexity document ratio estimates
Level
A Text-only / text Letter, legal 200-300
with simple graphics brief
B Text with complex Presentation, 100-200
graphics / small report, newsletter
photos
C Complex graphics Illustrations, maps 50-100
D Complex page Magazine spreads 25-75
Layouts professional brochures
E High resolution Graphic arts 6-20
Photos or photo proofs
10
Hard Disk Drive (optional)
The Hard Disk drive enables C7005p to enjoy various functions such as Check and Print,
WebSpooling, Job Logging, and Electronic Collation.
Check & Print allows you to print a single copy of a multiple copy job that can be visually
checked before printing additional copies. When the Check and Print copy has been printed,
you can specify the number of additional copies of the job to print using the Check and Print
screens on the printer's operation panel. You can also use the Fiery WebSpooler to print
remaining copies of spooled Check and Print jobs.
Electronic Collation allows the pages of each copy of a print job to be printed in sequence. If
this mode is off, multiple copies of each page of a print job are printed in sequence. The
C7005p without the hard disk has RIP Once & Send Once-Print Many capabilities without
collation.
WebSpooler (one of the WebTools) allows you to view, manipulate, reorder, reprint, and
delete jobs currently spooling, processing, or printing on the C7005p. All jobs are stored on
the hard disk.
With WebSpooler, you can view and print a log of all the jobs printed to the C7005p. You can
also export the Job Log as a tab-delimited text file and import into a database, spreadsheet or
word processing application for job accounting purposes.
Other features of WebTools (WebStatus, WebLink, WebDownloader, WebSetup) are

available even without the hard disk.
Utility
The Fiery Web Tools are a collection of utilities that allow users to monitor the printer and
job status remotely through a corporate Intranet or the Internet. Web Tools, are Java-based
and can be used on any platform through any Internet browser that suports frames, such as
Netscape Communicator v 4.06 and later with Java enabled (both for Windows & Macintosh)
and Microsoft Internet Explorer v 4.x and later with Java enabled (for Windows only).
Requirements are as follows:

TCP/IP-enabled network with valid IP address for the printer
TCP/IP-enabled client workstation with valid IP address
Internet browser that supports Java and frames (such as Netscape Communicator v4.06 or
Microsoft Internet Explorer v4.x) installed on client workstation.
The Fiery Web Tools include:

Fiery Web Status
Fiery Web Spooler (Available only with the Hard Disk Drive)
Fiery Web Link
Fiery Web Down loader (Not supported for Macintosh)
Fiery Web Setup (Not supported for Macintosh)
11
Fiery Web Status

This utility allows the user to monitor the Fierys basic spooling (if available), RIPping and
printing status while using a minimum of monitor space. This utility polls the printer every 20
seconds and displays the current RIPping and Printing information.
Fiery Web Spooler

This utility displays greater detail than the Status. It allows the user to manipulate jobs
(duplicating / copying / deleting held or printed jobs) on the Fiery and allows the user access
to the Fiery Job Log (status, document name, user name, file size, media type, number of
colour pages, number of B & W pages, total number of pages, number of originals, PDL).
This utility can only be used when the printer has a hard disk drive.
Fiery Web Link

Selecting the Web Link button will link the user to a remote WWW site in a new Browser
window, provided the Internet Browser is connected to the Internet.
Fiery Web Down loader (Not supported for Macintosh)

This utility allows the user to send a PostScript or PCL file from a personal computer to the
printer without first opening the file in another application. Downloading PostScript Type 1
fonts and Adobe Type 1 fonts is also available.
Fiery Web Setup (Not supported for Macintosh)

This utility allows a user to view and modify remotely the printer configuration in a graphical
environment.
- System Setup
- Network Setup
- Printer Setup
12
Page Description Language
The C7005p comes standard with Adobe PostScript 3 and PCL5C.
The following tables describe the client tools available in both the diskless and disk based
systems.
Diskless System (without Hard Disk)

Client Tools PCL PostScript
Parallel Network Parallel Network
Printer Driver and PPDs
PCL5 Driver Y Y - -
PostScript Driver - - Y Y
Client Internet Tools
Fiery Web Spooler - - - -
Fiery Web Down loader - Y - Y
Fiery Web Status - Y - Y
Fiery Web Setup - Y - Y
Fiery Web link(HTTP based - uses browser) - Y - Y
Check & Print Y Y Y Y
Miscellaneous Files and Color Enhancement Tools
Pantone Color Reference Books - - Y Y
CMYK Reference File - - Y Y
ICC/ICM Device Profiles - - Y Y
Disk-based System (with Hard Disk)

Client Tools PCL PostScript
Parallel Network Parallel Network
Printer Driver and PPDs
PCL5 Driver Y Y - -
PostScript Driver - - Y Y
Client Internet Tools
Fiery Web Spooler - Y - Y
Fiery Web Down loader - Y - Y
Fiery Web Status - Y - Y
Fiery Web Setup - Y - Y
Fiery Web link(HTTP based - uses browser) - Y - Y
Check & Print Y Y Y Y
Miscellaneous Files and Color Enhancement Tools
Pantone Color Reference Books - - Y Y
CMYK Reference File - - Y Y
ICC/ICM Device Profiles - - Y Y
13
Connectivity
The C7005p comes with a standard Parallel port and Ethernet 10/100BaseT network interface
port. There is an optional Token-Ring network interface card. All I/O ports are bi-directional
and have drivers that support multiple independent logical channels.
Supported Operating Systems:

- Windows 95/98: Adobe PostScript Printer Driver for Windows v4.2 or later
- Windows NT 4.0: Adobe PostScript Printer Driver for Windows NT4.0 v.5.0 or
later
- Apple Macintosh, Power Macintosh: System OS 8.0 or later, Adobe PostScript
Printer Driver v. 8.5 or later
Parallel IEEE 1284 compliant parallel port connection

The physical connection is a standard parallel-B connector
The following IEEE 1284 modes are supported:
Compatibility
Nibble
ECP
Ethernet 10/100 Mb/s

The following list highlights the Network Operating Systems supported as well as associated
frame types:
NetWare 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.x, IPX/SPX
Ether Talk, TCP/IP
Frame types: 802.2, 802.3, SNAP, Ethernet-II
The following are not supported :
NetBEUI/NetBIOS
DLC
Local Talk
Token Ring
This connectivity requires an optional network card.
Protocol stacks
Network Frame Type Protocol Stack LPD PServer PAP SMB
Ethernet Ethernet 802.2
(10/100Mbps) Ethernet 802.3 IPX/SPX - Y - -
Ethernet II
Ethernet SNAP
Ethernet II TCP/IP Y - - Y
Ethernet SNAP Apple Talk - - Y -
Token Ring Token Ring 802.2 IPX/SPX - Y - -
(4/16Mbps) Token Ring SNAP
Token Ring SNAP TCP/IP Y - - Y
- Apple Talk - - - -
14
Service
Services include printing applications as well as other network services such as HTTP and
SNMP. All of the services are capable of running over any interface that their underlying
protocol can run on. There are two general categories of services; Printing services and
Management services.
Printing Services
This provides native printing services for all supported protocol stacks and various network
environments. In particular, the following printing protocols are supported:
LPD (Line Printer Daemon)
Allows printing in TCP/IP networks using an LPR client.
PServer (Print Server)
Allows printing in NetWare networks. Capable of running in bindery and NDS modes
simultaneously. Supports connections to up to eight bindery servers plus an NDS connection.
PAP (Printer Access Protocol)
Allows printing in AppleTalk networks.
SMB (Server Message Block)
Allows printing in Windows networks. This is Microsofts File Sharing Protocol, which
allows a printer to be shared in a Windows workgroup.
The following table provides a matrix view of the available print support in various network
environments.
Novell UNIX AppleTalk Windows

NetWare TCP/IP Network TCP/IP
(Pserver) (LPD) (PAP) (SMB)
Win NT 4.0 IPX/SPX Y - -
TCP/IP - Y - Y
AppleTalk - - Y -
Win 95/98 IPX/SPX Y - -
TCP/IP - - - Y
Macintosh AppleTalk - - Y -
Management Services
Management services refer to application level protocols that allow remote management of
the controller. This service is an HTTP server, which allows management of the controller
through a standard Web browser. Please refer to the Fiery WebTools, pg.8/9 for details.
15
System Software
The controller comes loaded with system software in the boot flash and ROM. The system
software falls into three broad categories:
Boot System
The boot system includes all parts of the system required to startup and test the controller.
Components include: boot code, diagnostics and operating system.
Print System
The print system includes all parts of the system required to print a job.
Components include: drivers, networking, IO manager, print manager, PDL & PDL
resources (PostScript, PCL, Fonts Color Management, etc.), page manager and video
manager.
Device Management System
The device management system includes all parts of the system required to control and
administer the printer.
Components includes: drivers, front panel, administrative utilities, IO manager and device
manager.
System software is upgradable by the replacement of the masked ROM DIMMs.
Fonts
PostScript Interpreter Standard in base, PS3

Roman fonts 136 (117 Adobe Type 1,
19 True Type)
PCL5C Interpreter Standard in base
Roman fonts 35 Intelli fonts
10 True Type
1 bitmap LP
16
Supplies
Black Toner Approx. 15,000 prints / cartridge (400g)

C,M,Y Toner (each) Approx. 15,000 prints / cartridge (400g)
PCU Approx. 60,000 developments / unit
Fuser Oil Bottle Approx. 20,000 prints / bottle
Waste Toner Bottle Approx. 20,000 developments / bottle
Fusing Unit as replacement parts (service parts) Approx.60,000 prints / unit
A4 (LEF)/ 5% Chart is used to measure the above yield based on the job condition of 5
P/J (5 continuous prints per one print job).
The condition is standard temperature and humidity.
This yield number may change depending on the circumstances and printing conditions.
Starter toner for C,M,Y,K are about half content(mono:210g,color:150g) of Std. The
estimated yield for the starter toner: 6K prints for black, 3K prints for C,M,Y
17
Main Specifications
Engine Specifications
Configuration Desk Top

Technology Laser Beam & Dry, Single-Component Electro-Photographic
Printing
Resolutions 600dpi x 600dpi, 2bits/pixel
Throughput A4/LT (LEF) F/C: 5 ppm B/W: 17 ppm
A3 F/C: 2.5 ppm B/W: 11 ppm
Transparency F/C: 1.1 ppm B/W: 1.6 ppm
Thick media F/C: 2.3 ppm B/W: 3.8 ppm
First print speed F/C: Less than 30 sec. , B/W: Less than 14 sec.
Dimensions (WxDxH) 660 x 575 x 475mm (26.0 x 22.6 x 18.7) without
expander tray
Weight Less than 62Kg 136.7 lbs.)
Input capacity Standard: 250 sheet cassette
+50 sheet bypass tray (80g/m2, 20lb.Bond)
Optional: 500 sheet Paper Tray x 2 (80g/m2, 20lb.Bond)
Max.: 1,300 sheets
Output capacity Face down stacking: 250sheets (80g/m2, 20lb.Bond) A4
100 sheets (80g/m2, 20lb.Bond) for paper larger than A4
Paper Size A3 wide (330mm x 457mm :13 x 18)
- A6 (105mm x 148mm: 4.13x 5.83)
Duplex printing None
Max. Printable Area 321.7 mm x 448.7 mm (12.6 x 17.6)
Non Printable Area 4.3 mm, 1/6 (This may vary depending on paper size, printer
language and printer driver settings. For thick paper, 7 mm for
Trailing edge.
Paper Weight Tray (Friction Pad) : 64-105g/ m2, 17 lb. Bond-28 lb. Bond
Bypass (FRR) : 64-163g/ m2, 17 lb. Bond-90 lb. Index
Rating Power Spec. US version : 115V, 60Hz
EU version : 220/240V, 50/60Hz
Power Consumption Max. : Less than 1,200W
Energy Star Mode : Less than 45W
(Possible set-up; Every 30, 60, 120, 180 min. and Off)
Warm-up Time Less than 450 secs.
Safety Standard U.S. version :UL1950, CSAC22.2 No.950
EU version :EN60950
Laser/EMI Standard U.S. Version :CDRH Class 1 / FCC Part 15, Clause B Class B
EU Version :EN60825/ EN55022:1994+A1:1995, EN50082-1
Duty(prints/month) 15K prints for monochrome, 3.75K prints for colour
Can be increased to 25 K prints for monochrome/ 6.25K prints
for colour with a remark that if continuous prints of multiple
pages are made, toner scattering may occur.
Durability(Life) 300,000 prints (based on colour ratio 50%) or 5 years
whichever comes first.
18
Mechanical Noise Level

(Based on the Ricoh internal measurement. Sound Power Level)
Stand-by : 43dB or less

In Operation : 64dB or less

(Based on the Ricoh internal measurement)
Avg. Density : 0.04 mg / m3 or less
Dust Level
(Based on the Ricoh internal measurement)
Avg. Density : 0.075mg / m3 or less
19
Market Situation
On-Demand Colour Printing

The most obvious use for colour printers may be to spruce up black/white documents,
however, these machines can also offer an alternative to commercial printing. Instead of
having colour brochures printing on an offset machine, a user could start producing them on a
just-in-time basis on their own laser machine.
While the per-page cost of an on-demand colour laser print may not be any lower, the user
could avoid the storage costs and wastage typically associated with producing long runs of
promotional literature. Materials can also be kept up-to-date, and personalised to the needs of
recipients.
More Vendors
The number of vendors in the desktop colour laser printer market has lately been increasing.
As recently as 1994, the only vendors were QMS and Xerox. Today, however, there are
about 15 vendors although some are finding it tough (Sharp recently cancelled plans to sell
a machine under its own name, for example).
Many vendors use other companies machines, e.g., Xeroxs latest model uses a Sharp engine,
and Lexmark uses Minolta and Casio ones. This does not mean that two printers sold under
different brand names, but using the same engine, are more or less the same. While they may
share certain things in common, there can be important differences (some examples of which
are highlighted in the vendor and product profiles).
20
Market Statistics
Highlights of 1998
The colour printer market grew by 42%.
Western European Market Forecast

1996 - 2002
CAP Ventures 1998
160 Rest of Europe
140 UK
Switzerland
120 Sweden
Spain
100
Portugal
80 Norway
Netherlands
60
Italy
40 Germany
France
20 Finland
0 Denmark
1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 Belgium
Austria
Year
End user prices are massively eroded.
Distinct categories are now established both vertically (home and professional markets)
and horizontally (inkjet, electrophotographic and thermal transfer markets).
The thermal transfer market is being squeezed out.
Price points are low in the inkjet market, but there are marked improvements in output
quality.
There are few manufacturers and brands in the desktop colour page printer market.
21
Technology Trends
The colour printer market has grown rapidly from 7.7 million units in 1996 to 10.9 million
units in 1997, a 41.6% growth. However, there has been massive erosion of end-user prices
during the year, and revenue growth is projected to remain slow.
Thermal Transfer Printers
The market for thermal transfer printers (thermal wax transfer and dye sublimation) has been
severely impacted by performance and image quality improvements in both inkjet and
electrophotographic technologies. The decline has been dramatic: 18,700 units in 1996 down
to 4,600 in 1997. Leading vendors in this field, such as Tektronix, have shifted focus to
colour page printers to a wider range of office applications.
Inkjet Printers
The inkjet market has changed dramatically over the past year. Improved colour quality,
achieved by providing additional colour inks (six colours instead of four), has given vendors
the opportunity to produce some exciting visual material. Price points are at an all-time low,
and severe price erosion looks set to continue.
The home market now accounts for 40% of all inkjet printer sales up from 34.1% in 1996.
Although inkjet technology is being used in the professional office environment, its general
slow printing speed, especially in colour, limits its market potential.
The desktop colour page printer market is still relatively young, and has been characterised by
a limited number of print engines and vendor brands. This is changing, and more vendors are
entering the market. The market is segmenting into three classes of product, depending on
controller configuration and intended marketplace. The entry point, currently at $2,500,
consists of products fitted with limited-ability controllers these printers are under threat
from inkjet products. The middle sector, at about $4,500, will be targeted at the general
workgroup office environment, providing good network support with an integrated controller.
The high end products, upward of $7,500, will be targeted at professional graphic markets,
where colour consistency and A3 (or higher) paper capability will be of great importance.
22
Vendor Market Share
W.European Colour Inkjet and Page Printer Market Shares by

Vendor, 1997
Vendor Units (K) Percent Share Revenue ($M) Percent Share
Segment: All Colour Inkjet Printers
HP 4,566.62 42.2% 1,540.10 46.1%
Canon 2,600.28 24% 653.23 19.6%
Epson 2,484.12 22.9% 841.73 25.2%
Lexmark 758.76 7% 188.56 5.6%
Olivetti 281.12 2.6% 65.35 2%
Others 142.46 1.3% 49.86 1.5%
Total 10,833.35 100% 3,338.83 100%
Segment: All Colour Page Printers
HP 16.60 30.7% 104.64 28.8%
Tektronix 15.69 29% 114.83 31.6%
Lexmark 6.08 11.3% 34.88 9.6%
Xerox 5.50 10.2% 44.94 12.4%
Minolta 3.77 7% 13.43 3.7%
Others 6.41 11.9% 51.07 14%
Total 54.05 100% 363.79 100%
Source: DQ July 1998
Colour Printer Market Statistics By Technology, 1997 2002
W.European Colour Printer Market Statistics by Technology, 1997-2002

1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 CAGR
97-2002
All Colour Page <29ppm
Total units shipped (K) 54.06 77.80 110.84 151.04 200.91 259.98 36.9%
Average selling price ($K) 6.47 4.79 3.93 3.53 3.18 2.86 -15.1%
If-sold value ($M) 349.97 372.72 435.09 533.62 639.07 744.30 16.3%
All Colour Inkjet

Total units shipped (K) 10721.07 12897.89 14809 16887.63 18792.63 20477.40 13.8%
Average selling price ($K) 0.31 0.31 0.29 0.28 0.28 0.27 -2.6%
If-sold value ($M) 3300.40 3944.78 4328.51 4774.87 5216.58 5518.78 10.8%
Source: DQ July 1998
23
Colour Laser Printers moving up to Connected Colour

Copier Market
Traditionally, digital colour copiers have offered faster speeds than desktop colour printers
and more sophisticated paper handling. However, now some of the latest single-function
laser printers are giving them a run for their money:
In the past, all desktop laser printers printed at speeds of just 3-4ppm. Today, speeds rise
to 6-12ppm. The only way to get a faster speed engine on a copier-based product is to pay
nearly a six-figure sum.
No desktop model could print in colour on 11 x 17 paper. Today, however, several
have the ability to do so and some can even print full bleed on A3 oversize paper.
Desktop colour printers rarely had paper trays holding more than 250 sheets. Today,
several have 500 sheet trays as standard and some go up to 2,000 sheets.
Until recently, no desktop colour printer could perform automatic duplex. Now, however,
several are able to do so.
The result of these advancements is that fewer people are going to have to migrate upward to
a connected colour copier just to get more upscale printing, although we should still
remember that the best colour quality matched with speed is generally from a colour copier.
There is a threat to our future colour business from the likes of Hewlett-Packard with their
colour laser printers. Therefore, it is important that we are able to offer a complete colour
range both copiers and printers so that we can satisfy any customers needs, whether it is
in the low-end of the colour market or the high-end. If we get the customer at the start of
their colour usage, we can then provide the customer with future colour products as their need
and volume grows.
Copier-printer convergence
Recognising that not everyone who needs the upscale colour printer performance of a
connected colour copier also needs the copier function itself, copier manufacturers are starting
to consider introducing defeatured printer-only versions of those machines. These look like
regular copiers with the top sliced off. Minolta are the first with such a product (see vendor
profile section).
If this represents something of a convergence of the copier and printer worlds, the same
phenomenon can be observed from the other direction; several colour printers can now be
configured with optional integrated scanners that effectively turn them into multifunctional
printer-copiers. Canon provide such a model (see vendor profile section).
In the colour world, as in the black-only market, the difference between printing and copying
is becoming blurred. With digital technology, copying and printing simply involve different
ways of delivering an electronic image to a laser engine, but the underlying technology is the
same. In the future, there will be increasingly modular systems, with buyers able to configure
the input methods local scanning, cross-network scanning, network print controllers, and
modems, according to their individual preferences.
24
Laser Printers: Colour Basics
Laser Basics
As with mono machines, colour laser printers work by having a light source etch an image on
a photosensitive drum, which then attracts toner; the toner is transferred to paper, heated, and
fused, and an image is created. The difference is that with mono lasers, the process is
completed with one pass through the machine, but with colour models, the imaging usually
takes place a total of four times one for each of the process colours out of which all
composite colours are formed.
Solid Inkjet Laser Class Alternative
Solid inkjet technology shouldnt be confused with thermal inkjet, the much more common
and less expensive variety. The image quality, full colour speed, and price of solid inkjet, all
place it in the laser class.
This technology relies on a solid block, or crayon, of ink thats melted in a slot and dropped
onto the paper. The ink resolidifies immediately in a process designed to maintain its clarity.
As very little ink soaks into the paper, solid inkjets deliver more brilliant colours than regular
inkjets. Speeds are fairly brisk by full colour standards.
Solid inkjets work fine with regular copier and laser printer paper, and tend to create a slightly
embossed feel. One benefit of the technology is that the output doesnt smudge if it gets wet.
A drawback, however, is that jams often occur when a user tries to run solid inkjet printed
pages through the ADF of a copier.
With the reduction of laser printer prices, solid inkjet no longer has a price benefit, so
emphasises faster speeds and brilliant colours as advantages.
At present, Tektronix and Brother are the only vendors that offer products using solid inkjet
technology.
The Colours
All colour print technologies involve mixing three or four basic colours to create millions of
colour combinations. Often a three-colour palette is abbreviated to CMY (Cyan, Magenta,
Yellow). To form a composite black, CMY printers combine the three primary colours.
However, most colour printers now have a separate, true black. This four-colour palette is
referred to as CMYK, and its preferable to the three-colour variety. CMYK models
typically generate richer-looking black text than those that combine the CMY colours to
create composite black. The colours themselves, come in the form of different substances
depending on the print technology in the case of lasers, it is toner.
Computer monitors use a different palette to mix their colours red, green, blue (RGB). To
reconcile the two colour sets, some printers include colour matching software that lets users
specify which monitor they have, enabling the printer to adjust the output to match the
monitor.
25
How Important is Resolution?
The best way to judge print quality is simply to look at it.
In the black/white printer market, the main reference point on a specification sheet when it
comes to image quality is a printers resolution. This is measured by numbers of rows and
columns of dots per square inch (dpi) that make up an image.
Today, most colour and b/w printers produce 600dpi output, and a handful work at 1,200dpi.
It is widely felt that higher numbers mean better quality.
However, according to HP, dpi is an inadequate measure of quality in the colour market, as it
focuses all attention on the number of dots that make up an image. Of equal or greater
importance, HP argues, is the ability to layer varied amounts of all four toner colours on a
single spot and to vary the size and position of dots. HP has come up with a heavily patented
technology called ImageREt 2400 that supposedly delivers 2,400dpi-grade results from a
600dpi engine. Cynics might argue that HP is obliged to argue this as a defensive position
against the fact that it cannot match the 1,200dpi resolution offered by Tektronix, its main
rival in the colour laser market.
Basically, a higher resolution can be helpful, but it is not the final solution also, never
forget, that image quality is very much in the eye of the beholder too.
Dithering and Continuous Tone
Dithering refers to having a huge concentration of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (CMYK)
dots placed next to each other in close proximity, so that the eye detects a toned colour effect.
Continuous Tone is where you layer dots of the four basic colours on top of each other. With
continuous tone, there can be less dots, but dithering requires as many as possible to create the
desired effect.
True High Resolution
Some printers offer resolutions higher than 600dpi (Tektronix and Panasonic both have
models offering 1,200dpi).
However, some laser printers that boast resolutions higher than 600dpi, are actually based on
what were originally designed to be 600dpi engines, but they use software that causes the
laser beam to create a higher-resolution image by placing tens of thousands of additional tiny
dots. This process is sometimes known as software interpolation or modulation. A few
engines are designed from the ground up to work at resolutions higher than 600dpi (Tektronix
and Panasonic).
Note, that true 1,200dpi resolution when available can result in much slower print speeds.
The 1,200dpi models from Tektronix and Panasonic work at half their normally quoted engine
speed when 1,200dpi is selected.
26
Laser Printers: Operating Costs

In the colour market, numerous variables can enter into a cost-per-page analysis. For
example, the cost of a printed page depends not only on the size of the image area, but on the
colour mix and the type of image being printed. A number of vendors use their idea of a
standard page, on which they base their page-cost figures. The problem is that all standards
are different. Therefore, when comparing costs, do not just rely on the figures provided in the
promotional material from the vendors.
Better Buys for Business
The research consumer guide Better Buys for Business (this organisation provided the
Vendor and Product Profile information) has adopted a standard page definition. The
assumption is that there is 5% coverage of each of the four colours in the CMYK palette.
They take into account all consumable items that need replacing every 100,000 pages or less.
Using this method, the per-page costs of the most recently introduced colour printers fall in
the 10-12cent range. Black/white costs typically fall within the 2.0-2.3cent range.
Laser Printers: More About Features
PostScript
PostScript is whats known as a page description language it is software that resides

within the printer that governs the way in which the machine handles instructions from the
computer.
A customer using serious desktop publishing programs (Adobe PageMaker, QuarkXPress,

etc.) and graphics programs (Adobe Illustrator), definitely needs PostScript.
A PostScript printer is not necessary with only word-processing and business packages such
as Microsoft Word and Excel.
All PostScript printers offer at least Adobe PostScript Level 2 compatibility, and many new
machines now have PostScript 3, which offers various detailed enhancements.
Some printers dont have the original Adobe PostScript, but instead use a PostScript-
compatible print language developed by a third party.
Memory and Processors
More memory and powerful controllers enhance a printers speed and are essential for more
ambitious types of work.
Many laser printers are now sold with at least 32MB of memory as standard, but there is
always ample scope for upgrades.
27
Most printers use controllers that are proprietary to the individual model, however, an
increasing number are using ones developed by EFI. The presence of an EFI controller on a
desktop printer is a good indication that the machine has sufficient horsepower to deal with
some serious workloads in terms of the complexity of files and the quantity being sent in
close succession.
Paper Handling
Typically, desktop lasers come with 250 sheet paper trays, and allow a second one to be
added as an option. A few models offer larger maximum paper capacities.
Sometimes, a multipurpose tray holding 100-150 sheets supports the standard 250 sheet tray.
As well as offering the convenience of a second active paper source, this can often take
heavier paper weights than the main tray.
In the past year, a number of machines have hit the market that are able to take 11 x 17
paper. Typically, they can actually take oversize paper a little larger than that in order to give
the capability of printing 11 x 17 images with full bleed. Among other things, this is very
helpful for producing proofs of layouts that are being sent out to a commercial printer.
Another recent arrival on the paper-handling front is automatic duplex. A few machines now
offer this, usually as options. Previously, even manual duplex was not typically
recommended on desktop colour lasers.
All models can print onto transparencies, but most require special ones that cost a lot more
than the regular variety. Printing onto transparencies always works more slowly than on
regular paper.
Interfaces and Network Connectivity
All colour printers come with parallel interfaces as standard; this ensures that they are
compatible with all Windows PCs. In addition, PostScript models can generally work with
Mac OS using a LocalTalk interface sometimes this is standard with the PostScript versions,
but often its an optional extra.
All workgroup colour printers can be fitted with network interface cards that allow you to
connect them directly to Ethernet and Token Ring networks. These days, Ethernet is
increasingly being offered as standard, even towards the bottom of the price ladder, though
some vendors continue to treat it as an option.
28

Product Range Plan
Ricoh Colour Laser Printer Launch Plan

Speed
Fresa Fresa
6 Win PS
6/24 6/24 6/24
Fresa Fresa Fresa

5/17
5/17 Win + PS + Win ++
5
4 4/16 4/16 4/16
Pomelo Pomelo Pomelo

3 Win + Win ++
1999 2000 2001

= we dont sell
The C7005p is the second of a range of Ricoh manufactured colour laser printers to be
launched by the Group. The C7005p will be upgraded after 18 months. The upgrade will
include an increase in speed and is likely to include a controller upgrade, although the engine
design will remain similar allowing transferability of supplies. Along with design upgrade the
list price of the C7005p is targeted to fall by 15%
29
Product Positioning
Professional Colour Solutions Positioning
Cattleya
Speed
10 Cattleya Edit
Basic
Lilac ED
6 Lilac BD
Iris
Fresa PS
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
The C7005p is an A3 colour laser printer targeted at the more professional colour user. This is
due to the Fiery print controller and A3 full bleed capability.
In the chart above the C7005p has been positioned against the Iris, Lilac & Cattleya Colour
Solutions. This is because, although among the Colour Solutions, the Iris & Lilac are
positioned as general office Colour Solutions, they can also be positioned at the low end of
the professional colour spectrum for users with lower volume requirements that do not justify
the Cattleya.
The C7005p can be offered to the customer as an A3 colour print-only device when the
customer does not want to pay the higher price of the Iris and Lilac Colour Solutions.
However as the cost-per-page of the C7005p is more expensive than the Iris and Lilac Colour
Solutions, those customers who are on a click-based contract are more likely to prefer the
positioning of the Iris and Lilac Colour Solutions.
30
Target Customer & Channels
Target Customers
Segment: Specialised businesses
Graphic design companies, and advertising agencies, for example, and
Copy/Print Shops, and in-house copy centres.
Main usage: Colour proofs, catalogues, leaflets, presentations, direct mail, greeting cards,
A3 size, for example.
Specialist Business Environment
Colour application and usage of colour already exists in this environment, and the
customers requirement for quality and productivity is forever on the increase.
Main colour requirements for these users include very high image quality; PC
connectivity; cross-mark printing; and reliability.
Typical businesses/departments are: Graphic Designers; Advertising Agencies; Planning
Office; Engineers; Copy Service.
There can be a much higher instances of Macintosh computers over PCs in this
environment (different to the general office environment where PCs are king).
Application software will include Adobe Photoshop; QuarkXpress; Adobe Illustrator; and
Adobe PageMaker, for example.
DTP is the mainstream of digital printing in this environment, but the print-for-pay market
is also expanding.
Another rapidly developing area is that of the Internet and Intranet, Web Publishing and
printing.
Target Market by Page Volume
25000
20000
15000
10000
5000
0
Colour (000s) 0 625 1250 1875 2500 3750 4375 5000 5625 6250
Black (000's) 25000 22500 20000 17500 15000 10000 7500 5000 2500 0
31
Target Channels
Western Europe Colour Page Printers Distribution Channels 1998
% Unit Shipments 1998
1 2 97 0
Direct Dealers Distributors 3 Retailers
1 96 94 3
Small Multiple PC Elec General

Mail Order Sales Force VARs Dealers Dealers Stores Stores
Off-the-page
0 1 91 3 2 2 0 1
Users
CAP Ventures 1999
Note: Colour page printers includes all colour laser and solid ink printers from 1-13 ppm full colour speed.
Based on estimates July 1999.
CAP Ventures have made the following comments on the Channel Map above:
Colour page printers were mainly sold in Western Europe in 1998 through distributors. 97%
of all placements went from Vendor to distributor in the first tier. 2% from vendors to dealer
and 1% from vendor direct through direct sales. The trend towards two tier via distributors
has been continuing and increasing over the last few years not least due to the price fall and
consequent margin erosion.
In the second tier, 96% were sold through dealer channels, predominantly the VAR channel
(91%) and a small number of small and multiple dealers. This reflects the similar strategy of
the major players in the colour paper market. The colour page printer still requires
assistance with installation and therefore cannot be served wholly by the plug-and-play retail
channel.
The drivers of the colour page market in 1998 were:

1. Continued and increased network saturation. As users on the network gain access to
additional output devices they typically utilise them more. The opportunity of printing in
colour drives the need.
2. Perceived need to print in colour to conform and be up to date. Particularly important in
internal corporate applications such as finance, marketing and sales.
3. Hardware/ Capital investment cost falling. Down 25% in 1998 versus 1997 automatically
means more buyers.
4. Information sources. As input to documents comes more and more from electronic
sources, i.e. digital camera, scanner, web, the need to print in colour increases.
32
Whats driving the channel map?

1. The Players the top four players in 1998 captured 74% of the market (Tektronix, HP,
QMS, Lexmark). All are traditional printer players with a history and experience in two
tier through distributors and two tier to VARs.
2. Hardware price down = margins are squeezed and two tier is most cost effective method
for vendors.
NRG makes 60% of it's unit sales through the direct sales force and 40% through
dealers. Of our dealer base, some are capable of selling and supporting printers but many are
traditional copier dealers making slow progress with connectivity on Colour Copiers & MFPs.
We have virtually no sales going through the VARs who channel 91% of printers in Europe,
or any relationship with the IT dealers and VARs who account for 96% of units sold.
So there is a very poor fit between our channel structure and the current colour laser
printer market structure. Also, we cannot generate pull without significant advertising
expenditure, which is out of the question. Therefore we have to do the following to ensure
that we take a share of the colour laser printer market with the Fresa printers and our print-
capable Colour Solutions:
Direct Salesforce Actions
All direct salesforces must be capable of selling Colour printers and connected
Colour Solutions together using a consultancy-selling approach
Requires significant training and a "MindShift" project for most operations
Requires the formulation of a standardized consulting system for each operation
Sales and marketing effort must target the key decision makers in the printer buying
organisation, who are invariably different to our traditional contacts
Some sales people may be put off selling current Colour Solutions due to fear of
selling colour products. However, the Fresa printers are simple and easy-to-use,
dispelling the sales persons fear that colour products are more complicated.
There must be a focus on our major accounts to displace installed competitor colour
printers and replace them with a mix of colour printers and Colour Solutions
Indirect Channel Actions
For our current office equipment dealers

Develop those colour dealers who are capable of moving to networked products and
progress them from Colour Solutions towards printers
For competitor's OA dealers who already sell Colour Solutions and printers
Focus to switch them to our product range by offering a more complete and
competitive lineup.
Sell the opportunity to achieve greater hardware margins and more secure supplies
revenue from our printer products compared to their current printer suppliers
The IT dealer channel including VARs
Recruit dealers from the IT channel through our unique offering:
Increased hardware margins
Secure after-sales supplies and service revenue
Access to a full product range of Colour Solutions and printers
33
Key Selling Points

High Speed Printing
F/C : 5ppm
B/W : 17ppm (A4 LEF)
The first print speed of Fresa is much faster than that of the current and new competitors
models thanks to its Short Paper Path design. This is particularly useful when printing one-
off proofs. (The figures for QMS 330 and Phaser 780 are based on Epsons model using the
same Fuji Xerox engine. The figures for HP CLJ8500 are based on Canons model using the
same Canon engine.)
C7005p HP CLJ Xerox QMS 330, Phaser 780,

8500 C55 Xerox-4LP, Epson LP8000C
First print Mono 14 19 - 25
speed (sec.) Colour 30 35 - 48
PPM Mono 17 24 12 16
Colour 5 6 3 4
High Image Quality

600dpi x 600dpi
The Fresa prints with an outstanding image quality all kinds of colour data including colour
photographs and drawings, thanks to 600 x 600 dpi resolution and 256 colour gradations. The
toner particles are as small as 5.5m. (HP CLJ8500: 6.5m). Black text is pleasant to the eyes
because it is not glossy compared with current existing competitors colour laser printers. Thin
Line mode available in the Fresa Win IPDL-C driver is not supported by C7005p. However,
selecting the Detail setting for Halftone Graphics tab in the PostScript driver will help to print
fine lines or thin diagonal lines clearly, which is very useful for CAD drawing or design
offices.
EFI Controller
The C7005p has an embedded EFI Fiery controller enabling reliable, high performance colour
printing. Genuine Adobe PostScript 3 ensures compatibility with all software applications and
accurate colour management. Reliable network connectivity comes as standard enabling
workgroup colour printing direct from the desktop. With an optional hard disk, the Check &
Print function is also available.
Fiery WebTools
Ideal for both Internet and corporate intranet applications, Fiery WebTools enable job
management from any platform via a Java-enabled Web browser. All job control options
such as job merging, editing, and previews, as well as information on the status of jobs are
accessible through Fiery WebTools. With WebSetup, administrators can even configure a
Fiery remotely.
34
Versatile Paper Handling
Up to two optional 500 sheets paper feed units can be added to the C7005p enabling a
maximum of 1,300 sheets input capacity and a variety of up to four types of media to be
installed in the paper trays for total flexibility. For example, A3 oversize paper, headed note
paper, white A4 copy paper and OHPs can all be stored in the C7005p printer enabling a
workgroup to print on a variety of media over the network without having to change paper
within the trays.
A3 Full bleed printing on A3 oversize paper
The C7005p achieves A3 full bleed printing on A3 oversize paper up to 13 x 18. Therefore,
the user can print proofs, floorplans, etc. Advertising agencies, graphics designers, etc will
appreciate this feature.
High Image Quality on heavier media
When the user selects OHP Mode or Thick Paper Mode in the printer driver, the fusing speed
decreases to ensure high image quality on OHPs or thicker paper. This results in a slower
print speed. When the OHP transparency mode is selected, paper is automatically inserted
between each OHP transparency to prevent them from being stuck together.
35
Compact Footprint
C7005p has a surprisingly small footprint for an A3 printer when compared against the
competition.
Fresa Epson A3 CLP (Japanese Ver.)
Toner
exchange 575mm Output Bypass 641mm
space Mainframe (22.6) Tray Mainframe Tray (25.0)
Paper Tray &

Jam Removable Space
Paper Tray &
Jam Removable Space
660mm (26.0)
728mm (28.4)
1368mm (53.4)
C7005p
Epson A3 CLP (Japanese Ver.)
36
Product, Options & Consumable Logistics

Codes
Mainframe
Short Description Voltage Gestetner Rex-Rotary Nashuatec
Name Model Number Model Number Model Number
PCR5P C7005p 220-240V C7005p C7005P C7005p
50/60Hz
Options
DPFU17 500 sheets paper feed unit Fresa Win/PS
TBC Token Ring Kit C7005p
DHD505 1.6 GB Printer Hard Disk C7005p
DME27 32 MB RAM C7005p
DME28 64 MB RAM C7005p
PLS3D German Operating Instructions C7005p
PLS3F French Operating Instructions C7005p
PLS3GB English Operating Instructions C7005p
PLS3I Italian Operating Instructions C7005p
PLS3NL Dutch Operating Instructions C7005p
PLS3ES Spanish Operating Instructions C7005p
Supplies
Short Name Description Versatility Yield
CT305BLK Black toner Fresa Win/PS 15,000 prints / cartridge @ 5%
CT305CYN Cyan toner Fresa Win/PS 15,000 prints / cartridge @ 5%
CT305MGT Magenta toner Fresa Win/PS 15,000 prints / cartridge @ 5%
CT305YLW Yellow toner Fresa Win/PS 15,000 prints / cartridge @ 5%
DFO305 Fuser oil Fresa Win/PS 20,000 prints / bottle
TDB305 Waste toner bottle Fresa Win/PS 20,000 developments / bottle
DMU305 Photoconductor unit Fresa Win/PS 60,000 developments / unit
Fusing Unit as replacement parts (service parts) Approx.60,000 prints / unit
A4 (LEF)/ 5% Chart is used to measure the above yield based on the job condition of 5
P/J (5 continuous prints per one print job).
This yield number may change depending on the circumstances and printing conditions.
Starter toner for C,M,Y,K are about half content(mono:210g,color:150g) of Std. The
estimated yield for the starter toner: 6K prints for black, 3K prints for C,M,Y
37
Whats in the box?
Mainframe
Power cable
Quick Installation Guide (English)
CD-ROM (Drivers & Utilities (5 languages):
- Adobe PostScript Driver
- PCL Printer Driver
- PostScript Printer Description files (PPDs)
- PostScript Screen Fonts
- Adobe Type Manager (ATM)
- Colour Management files
- Colour Reference files
Starter toner kit:
1 x black toner cartridge (210 g); 6,000 prints @ 5%
1 x cyan toner cartridge (150 g ); 3,000 prints @ 5%
1 x magenta toner cartridge (150 g ); 3,000 prints @ 5%
1 x yellow toner cartridge (150 g ); 3,000 prints @ 5%
1 x Fuser oil
1 x Waste toner bottle
1 x Photoconductor unit
Operating manual
1 x Nashuatec C7005p branding label
1 x Rex-Rotary C7005P branding label
1 x Gestetner C7005p branding label
Branding Considerations
There has been one version of the C7005p developed for the whole of the European market.
This means that in addition to applying branding labels at the point of preparation of the
machine prior to despatch to the customer / dealer / distributor there are some additional
branding considerations. The packaging of the C7005p is non-branded.
Firmware and Labels
The printer firmware is multi-branded. Therefore, the printer can be set up to be either NRG,
Nashuatec, Rex-Rotary, Gestetner or Ricoh branded. When you receive the printer from
NRGI it will be Ricoh branded in the firmware. Therefore, the following steps need to be
taken to implement your own brand:
1. Lift packaging cover off machine. (Printers are packed on a pallet with a cardboard cover
over the printer and pallet).
2. Plug in the printer.
3. While pressing the online key and the left arrow key at the same time, turn the printer
on at the mains switch.
4. Operating panel displays Self Start in English.
38
5. On the Version Info display, press the Menu key to select the Change OEM
Default display.
6. Press the Enter / # key and select the desired brand: NRG, Nashuatec, Rex-Rotary or
Gestetner from the sub menu.
7. Turn the machine off and on at the mains switch to reset.
8. The language can also be changed at this point from English to French, Italian, German,
Spanish or Dutch.
9. Remove Ricoh branding label and apply Nashuatec, Rex-Rotary or Gestetner branding
label contained in Operating Instructions package. Apply Colour Cigars decal below
Aficio brand.
10. Re-package printer.
11. Please note: It is estimated by CSS, that the method outlined above will take
approximately 20-25 minutes per machine, if this can be done in batch handling.
39
PCR6 Product Information Guide
PRODUCT
INFORMATION GUIDE
PCR6
Nashuatec C7006
Rex Rotary C7006
Gestetner C7006
and the specifications are subject to change. If in doubt or further
details are required, please contact NRGI Guernsey.
1
Executive Summary
The PCR6 is the first Ricoh A4 colour laser printer to be launched by the Group. It is a
Hitachi engine with a Ricoh controller, which is an upgrade to the current Pomelo printer
launched by Ricoh in Q2 1999. NRG launc hed the first Ricoh colour printers in Q3 1999 with
the PCR5P/W. We have seen a lot of growth in the Ricoh colour laser printers during 2000
and subsequently have a lot of demand from customers for an A4 colour laser printer to
complete the range. Indeed it is in the A4 colour laser printer market where we expect to see
exponential growth during the next few years. To date we have been selling the Lexmark A4
colour laser printer successfully in RR France & N Benelux.
Colour Laser Printers

Launch Plans 2001
Model J Model J
28 / 38 CF unit
Scarecrow
24/24
Blue Jay
20/20
C1200
12/12
Model-U
P1b
C7006dw 10/32
6/24
Model-U
P1a
C7006dw 8/24
6/24
C7005p
5/17
Pomelo III
6/24
C6003
3/16
2000 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 2001 Q1
The PCR6 will be available for launch in March 2001. It is a 6 ppm col / 24 ppm mono printer
for general office users. The current Pomelo printer was not launched by the Group as it was
considered competition would be too fierce from QMS who were launching it as one of their
price competitive Magicolor printers. However, now QMS have joined forces with Minolta
they will launch a new Minolta engine so will not be launching their own version of the
PCR6.
Product Overview
6 ppm FC printing / 24 ppm mono printing

1200 x 600 dpi print resolution
IPDL-C / PostScript Level 2
Optional duplex capability
R5261-200MHz processor
Compact design
2
Key Selling Points
Compact design compared to HP / Tektronix competition

Consuambles are easy to install by end-user
High Image Quality
Versatility & Productivity (envelope printing / optional duplex / twin colour mode)
Good performance: 17.5 seconds first mono print speed / 25 seconds first colour print
speed
Comparison to Lexmark Silver
Lexmark Silver PCR6

Print Speed 3/16 ppm 6/24 ppm
First Print Speed 16 secs (Black) 17.5secs (Black)
35 secs (Colour) 25 secs (Colour )
Resolution 1200 x 1200 dpi / 1200 Image 1200 x 600dpi
Quality / 600 x 600 dpi
Page Description PCL6 mono / PCL5c / PostScript 3 IPDL-C / PostScript Level 2
Language
High-light Colour Yes Yes
Duplex Yes (Option) Yes (Option)
Input capacity Max. 800 Max.750
Memory 32 MB (Max. 384 MB) 32 MB (Max.160 MB)
Processor 200 MHz QED RISC R5261-200MHz
Supplies 10,000 prints per cartridge TBC
Dimensions 470 x 570 x 405 mm 500 x 520 x 410 mm
(W x D x H)
Weight 35.8 kg 39 kg
Conclusion
2001 will be a busy year for colour printers and the new Hybrid products. The PCR6 will
complement the current PCR6W/DW laser printers. In April 2001 we will launch the PCR38
which is the first of the new range of Hybrid products. This will be followed by the
PCR8/10 colour laser printers in September 2001. Ricoh Japan do not intend to develop any
A4 colour laser engines, despite the fact this is where the real growth is in the European low
end colour laser market.
3
Product Overview
Product Image
LCD operating panel
Output Tray (250 Sheets)
Input Tray (250 Sheets)
Operation Panel
US version EU version
LCD Languages 2 rows

x 16 characters
English
French
Italian
German
Dutch
Spanish (Newly added)
Japanese
Key 8 Keys
4
Specifications
Engine Specifications
Configuration Desk Top
Technology Laser Beam & Single Component Electro-Photographic Printing
Resolution 1200 dpi x 600 dpi
Speed (ppm) colour Mono
A4/LT
Simplex 6 ppm 24 ppm
Duplex 3 ppm 12 ppm
Legal
Simplex 6 ppm 12 ppm
Duplex 3 ppm 6 ppm
Transparency & Thick Paper
Simplex 2.7 ppm 4.1 ppm
Duplex 1.4 ppm 2 ppm
First print speed A4 / LT colour Less than 25 secs
Mono Less than 17.5 secs
Warm-up Time 210 sec. maximum (from power on)
After printing OHP sheets, there will be 120 sec. of warm-up time.
After printing 60 continuous prints in mono colour, there will be 90
sec. of warm-up time.
Dimensions (W x D x H) 500 x 520 x 410 mm (19.7 x 20.5 x 16.1)
500 x 520 x 555 mm (19.7 x 20.5 x 21.9) with Optiona l Paper unit
500 x 605 x 605 mm (19.7 x 23.8 x 23.8) with Optional Paper unit
& Duplex unit
Weight Approx. 39 kg (86 lbs.) with starter consumables / without packing
Input capacity Standard: 250 sheets (80g/m2 )
Optional: 500 sheets A4/Letter Paper unit (80g/m2 )
Max: 750 sheets
Output capacity Face down stacking: 250sheets (80g/m2 )
Paper Size Std: Max. A4/Letter (210mm x 297mm / 8.5x11)
Opt: Max. Legal (8.5x14)
Duplex printing Option (Duplex unit & Paper unit are required)
Non Printable Area Simplex Duplex
Side: Approx. 5mm Approx. 7mm
Leading & Tailing Edge: Approx. 5mm Approx. 7mm
(The printable area may
vary depending on paper
size, paper type, printer
language and printer driver
settings)
Paper Weight Paper mode: 64-90g/m2 , 18-24 lbs.
Thick mode
Simplex: 90-160g/ m2 , 24-90(Index) lbs.
Duplex : 90-105g/ m2 , 24-28 lbs.
*Print media such as Thick stock, Labels, Transparency, Envelopes
can be fed through the standard paper tray.
Rating Power Spec. 220-240V, 50Hz
Power Consumption Max 1,000W
Energy Star Mode: 25W
(Possible set-up; Every 5, 15, 30, 45, 60 min and Off)
Duty (prints/month) 20,000 prints for Monochrome
5,000 prints for Colour
5
Target Monthly Volume Avg. 1.5K prints / Max. 2.0K prints (Colo ur 50%)
Target Colour ratio 50%
Durability(Life) 300,000 prints for Monochrome / 75,000 prints for Colour or 5 years
whichever comes first.
If used for 5 years, MPV (Max print volume per month) is 5,000
prints for Monochrome and 1,250 prints for Colour
Safety standard
Product safety: EN60950:1992
+A+A2+A3+A4+A11
EMI: EN55022:1998,Class B
EN61000-3-2,Class A (From01/2001)
EN61000-3-3 (From 01/2001)
Controller Specifications
CPU R5261
CPU Frequency 250MHz
Additional DIMM slots for 1
RAM
Printer Description Language IPDL-C, PostScript Level 2
Network Protocol TCP/IP, IPX/SPX(NetWare)
Standard RAM 32 MB
Upgrade Memory (DIMM) 32 / 64 / 128 MB, up to 256MB
Type: SDRAM (SO-DIMM) 66/100 MHz 64 bit Non-ECC/Parity
144 Pin, Access Time 6 ns
DIMM slots for Ricoh PostScript 1 (In case of 256MB, standard 32MB must be removed)
Hard Disk Drive None
Connectivity
Std: Parallel Bi-Centronics (IEEE 1284)
Opt: Ethernet (RJ45) 100BaseTX
OS
PDL Win 3.1 Win 95/98 Win Me*1 Win NT4.0 Win 2000 Mac *2 UNIX *3
IPDL-C No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
RPS No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
*1 WinMe Win95/98 driver can be used on WinMe
*2 Mac OS Use Laser 8.0 or later
*3Unix Solaris 2.5.1/2.6/7/8, HP-UX 8.x/9.x/10.x/11.0, Red Hat Linux 6.x/7
Calibration (SP-Mode)
Calibration is operated at the Operation panel in SP-Mode (Push On-Line key and Reset
key when powering up)
Each colour, CMYK, has a Ricoh standard gamma correction curve. You can customise the
gamma curve at each colour and each dither pattern in SP-Mode.
These defaults are linear.
The general user can adjust the density of each colour on the Operation panel.
Utility
Aficio Manager & Port Navi: please, refer to the PIG for Aficio Manager
MPD3 (MultiDirect Print) will be available with the PCR6
6

IPDL-C
IPDL-C is a Windows GDI based page description language developed by Ricoh. IPDL-C
stands for Intelligent Page Description Language-Colo ur.
Data is transferred to the Printer as an image (every line or piece of text) without any
additional printing systems or memory. Ordinarily, our competitors GDI printers transfer the
data page by page, requiring more time & memory. IPDL-C focuses on performance through
Windows applications. Ricoh unique colo ur matching is supported.
As a major feature, IPDL-C has Auto Page detection function, which is an advantage in terms
of print speed and cost when printing documents that have separate colo ur and black & white
pages. When IPDL-C receives mixed colo ur and black & white pages in one document, black
& white pages are printed at the 24 ppm engine speed even if colour mode has been selected
as a default.
PostScript Level 2
PostScript Level 2 is a clone developed by Ricoh that supports the same applications as true
Adobe PostScript Level 2
Roman Fonts 39
Ricoh has developed its own fonts, so these fonts are not compatible with that of
Adobe PostScript Level 2.
Connectivity
Parallel
The physical connection is a standard parallel-B connector.

The following IEEE 1284 modes are supported:
Compatibility
Nibble
Ethernet
The following list highlights the Network Operating Systems supported as well as associated
frame types:
NetWare , IPX/SPX
Ether Talk
TCP/IP
NetBEUI / NetBIOS
The following are not currently supported :
DLC
Local Talk
7
(Based on Ricoh internal measurements)
Stand-by: less than 48 dB
In Operation: Less than 55 dB
Max. Density: 0.1PPM (0.2mg/m3)*
*This standard number is calculated as 8 hours time -weighted average concentration as defined in UL1950/1995
third edition.
Paper Size
Short Edge Feed only

PostScript OEM Feeding Dimensions Std. Opt.
PPD Name Name Direction (mm or inche s) Tray Tray
Tabloid Extra Legal wide Short 12" x 18"
- A3 wide Short 330 x 470 mm
A3 A3 Short 297 x 420 mm
A4 A4 Short 210 x 297 mm Y (Default) Y
A5 A5 Short 148 x 210 mm Y*
A6 A6/post card Short 105 x 148 mm
B4 B4 Short 257 x 364 mm
B5 B5 Short 182 x 257 mm Y Y
B6 B6 Short 128 x 182 mm
Tabloid Ledger Short 11" x 17"
Legal LG Short 8.5" x 14" Y w/t LG cassette
Letter LT Short 8.5" x 11" Y Y (Default)
Statement HLT Short 5.5"x 8.5"
Executive EXE Short 7.25" x 10.5" Y Y*
- F Short 8" x 13" Y* w/t LG
Folio Folio Short 8.25" x 13" Y* w/t LG
FanFold Foolscap Short 8.5" x 13" Y* w/t LG
German Legal
Envelope Com10 Short 4.125 x 9.5 Y*
DL Short 110 x 220 Y*
Free (Max.) 216 x 297 mm Short 8.5" x 11.7" Y*
14 w/t LG cassette
Free (Min.) 100 x 210 mm Short 4" x 8.2" Y*
*Non printable area: 0 (Other paper sizes: each 5mm)
Duplex Printing : A4, B5, LT, EXE, LG
8
Printable Area
Name Dimensions IPDL-C IPDL-C R-PS
(mm or inches) 300 dpi 600 dpi
Standard Enlarge* Standard Enlarge* 300 DPI 600 DPI
A4 210 x 297mm 197.7x285.8 201.5x288.4 197.7x285.8 201.5x288.4 203.2x287.5 201.8x288.5
B6 182 x 257mm 169.9x248.4 173.4x248.4 169.9x248.4 173.4x248.4 176.1x246.5 174.7x247.9
Legal 8.5"x 14" 8.0"x 13.5" 8.1"x 13.6" 8.0"x 13.5" 8.1"x 13.6" 8.2"x 13.6" 8.2"x 13.6"
Letter 8.5"x11" 8.0"x 10.5" 8.1"x 10.6" 8.0"x 10.5" 8.1"x 10.6" 8.2"x 10.6" 8.2"x 10.6"
Executive 7.25"x 10.5" 6.7"x 10" 6.9"x 10.1" 6.7"x 10" 6.9"x 10.1" 6.9"x 10.1" 6.9"x 10.1"
* Standard: Compatible with PCL5

* Enlarge: Compatible with PCL6 (XL)
When selected Enlarge Printable Area on IPDL-C Driver. (Set-up-
Enhanced-MISC)
Paper Feed
(SEF)
ABC
ABC
Paper Feed ABC

Portrait Landscape Landscape
IPDL-C : All applications IPDL-C: All applications RPS2/Windows: PageMaker
RPS2/(Win/Mac): RPS2(Win/Mac): RPS2/ Mac: All applications
All applications All applications except for PageMaker
9
Memory Capacity and Paper Size
Resolution Memory A4 B5 Legal LT

210x297 182x257 8.5"x14" 8.5"x11"
300x300 32MB O O O O
64MB O O O O
96MB O O O O
128MB O O O O
160MB O O O O
192MB O O O O
256MB O O O O
600x600 32MB ? ? X ?
64MB O O O O
96MB O O O O
128MB O O O O
160MB O O O O
192MB O O O O
256MB O O O O
1200x600 32MB X X X X
64MB ? ? ? ?
96MB O O ? O
128MB O O O O
160MB O O O O
192MB O O O O
256MB O O O O
O: Possible for both simplex & duplex printing

? : Possible for simplex printing only
X: Impossible for both simplex & duplex printing
10
Target Supply Yield

Black Toner Approx. 12,000 prints /cartridge
C,M,Y Toner (each) Approx 7,200 prints / cartridge
PCU Approx. 60,000 developments / unit
Fuser Oil Bottle Approx. 12,000 prints / bottle
Fuser Cleaning Roller Approx. 12,000 prints/unit
Waste Toner Bottle Approx. 12,000 developments / bottle
*A4 (Letter) / 5% Chart will be used to measure the above yield.

*This yield number may change depending on the circumstances and printing conditions.
*Starter kits for C,M,Y,K toner
Black Toner Approx. 5,000 prints / cartridge
C,M,Y Toner (each) Approx. 3,000 prints / cartridge
*Remarks
Fuser Cleaning Roller and Fuser Unit life change based on covered image area on printed
page.
Photo Conductor Unit life change based on the number of pages per job.
1. Fuser Cleaning Roller
If Life is 12,000 pages
Coverage* Rating Life

- 20% 1 12,000
20% - 40% 1/2 6,000
40% + 1/3 4,000
* Coverage ratio of Image area on page
2. Fuser Unit (must be provided as parts)
If Life is 60,000 pages
Coverage* Rating Life

- 12.5% 1 60,000
12.5% - 20% 1/1.2 50,000
20% - 40% 1/1.5 40,000
40% - 60% 1/2 30,000
60% + 1/3 20,000
*Coverage ratio of Image area on page
11
3. Photo Conductor Unit
If Life is 50,000 developments
Pages / Job* Rating Life

1 page 1/2.50 20,000
2 1/2.27 22,000
3 1/2.08 24,000
4 1/1.72 29,000
5 1/1.61 31,000
6 1/1.47 34,000
7 1/1.39 36,000
8 1/1.35 37,000
9 1/1.28 39,000
10 1/1.25 40,000
11-25 1 50,000
*Colour ratio: 50%
Counter
Counter display Can select development/print counter menu

Can select display on the operation panel on/off by SP mode.
1. Display on operation panel (When click charge mode is selected by SP mode,

can display counter (Black/Colour) on the operation panel by menu key
2. 2 types counter menu: can select development/print count menu by SP mode
Development Count
Black 1C 2C 3C F/C
Black +1 +1
Colour +3 +3 +3 +3
Print Count
Black 1C 2C 3C F/C
Black +1
Colour +1 +1 +1 +1
12
Market Overview
The colour page printer market continues to grow at a significant pace. In 1998, the Western
European market increased by approximately 70 %, with total shipments reaching slightly
more than 92,000 units. In 1999, the market experienced a dramatic upturn of almost 94 % to
reach in excess of 178,000 units. With such a rapidly expanding market place, many new
players are entering this market to establish themselves as colour laser printer vendors.
Major product introductions were seen in this space at the end of 1998, while 1999 saw the
top players trying to take advantage of these new product lines. As Table 1 shows, HP
reasserted itself as a market leader in this segment by growing market share from 26.3 % to
34.7%. The LaserJet 4500 that began shipping in the fourth quarter of 1998 came into its own
in 1999 HP shipped in excess of 53,000 units in its first full year of shipments. Similarly,
HP shipped more than 8,600 LaserJet 8500 printers in its first full year of shipments. Table 2
illustrates that not only has HP been able to repel competition from the combined might of
QMS / Minolta in second position and Xerox / Tektronix in third, but it has also increased the
gap between itself and the rest of the pack. This feat can be attributed to the success of the
LaserJet 4500 and 8500 products. QMS / Minolta did well, moving into second position with
its strategy of leading with price. The aggressively priced Magicolor 2 DeskLaser helped to
drive sales for the company. HP and QMS / Minolta outperformed the overall market growth,
but Xerox / Tektronix showed only a comparatively modest increase in sales and
consequently lost market share.
Table 1
Western European Colour Page Printer Vendor Shares,
1998 and 1999
Vendor 1998 1998 1999 1999 1998-1999
Shipments (K) Share Shipments (K) Share Growth
Hewlett- 24.26 26.30% 62.08 34.70% 155.90%
Packard
QMS 14.9 16.20% 36.58 20.50% 145.40%
Tektronix 24.16 26.20% 30.44 17.00% 26.00%
Lexmark 10.46 11.30% 16.15 9.00% 54.40%
Minolta 4.6 5.00% 8.24 4.60% 79.30%
Xerox 5.92 6.40% 5.74 3.20% -3.10%
Brother 2.78 3.00% 5.2 2.90% 87.10%
Tally - N/A 3.42 1.90% N/A
Canon 0.1 0.10% 2.73 1.50% 2655.60%
Konica 0.96 1.00% 2.52 1.40% 163.60%
Others 4.15 4.50% 5.65 3.20% 36.20%
Total 92.28 100.00% 178.74 100.00% 93.70%
N/A = not applicable
Source: Dataquest (June 2000 Estimates)
13
Table 2
Showing the Combined Forces of QMS/Minolta and Xerox/Tektronix,
1998 and 1999
Vendor 1998 Shipments 1998 1999 1999 1998-1999
(K) Share Shipments (K) Share Growth
Hewlett- 24.26 26.30% 62.08 34.70% 155.90%
Packard
QMS/ 19.5 21.10% 44.82 25.10% 129.90%
Minolta
Xerox/ 30.08 32.60% 36.17 20.20% 20.30%
Tektronix
Lexmark 10.46 11.30% 16.15 9.00% 54.40%
Brother 2.78 3.00% 5.2 2.90% 87.10%
Tally - N/A 3.42 1.90% N/A
Canon 0.1 0.10% 2.73 1.50% 2655.60%
Konica 0.96 1.00% 2.52 1.40% 163.60%
Oki 0.78 0.80% 1.42 0.80% 81.90%
Epson 0.11 0.10% 0.95 0.50% 759.10%
Others 3.26 3.50% 3.28 1.80% 0.80%
Total 92.28 100.00% 178.74 100.00% 93.70%
NA = not applicable
Other factors which helped to stimulate the growth of this market segment in 1999 were as
follows:
The continued decrease in the cost of acquisition

New models with faster print speeds and improved paper- handling capabilities
A3 colour stimulated new applications
Average selling prices decreased as a result of lower-cost models and increased
competition
An increasing number of documents became available in electronic form
Continued widespread use of colour at home
Colour as a competitive advantage
While the market is growing solidly, several factors inhibited greater market growth:
Acquisition cost for a colour printer is still higher than that for a comparable monochrome
printer
The cost of operating a colour printer still creates concern; cost of operating includes the
cost of consumables and the costs associated with supporting colour printers
Colour is still more complex than monochrome
Many users have no real need to print colour
Several factors will impact the future of this segment. Newer products based on tandem-
engine technology will continue to bring faster solutions to users. In addition, a new category
of low-cost colour page printers will help to increase print volume. Manufacturers will
continue to address the ease-of-use aspects of these products and more colour page printers
with multifunction capabilities will be brought to market (such as the HP Colour LaserJet
14
8550). All of these trends will help to fuel market growth. On the other hand, cost per page
and cost of supporting these devices is expected to continue to inhibit greater growth. Also
continued education and exposure to colour will be necessary to convert the majority of users
to colour.
At present, only about 4% of the shipments of workgroup page printers in the 1 ppm to 30
ppm range are in colour. Dataquest believes that vendors will continue to promote colour as
an alternative to monochrome, which will raise this proportion to more than 27% in 2004 (see
Figure 1). As Figure 2 shows, while increased A3 colour printer availability will stimulate
new colour applications, A3 colour printers will not grow as quickly as A4 colour printers.
Figure 1 Colour Printers vs. Mono Printers Forecast
7000
6000
5000
Units (000's)
4000 Colour
Mono
3000
Total
2000
1000
0
1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
Year Source:
Dataquest (June, 2000)
Shipments of colour page printers will not overtake those of monochrome page printers in the
next five years. From the perspective of the installed base, the number of colour page printers
in use is a drop in the ocean compared with the number of monochrome page printers.
15
Figure 2
Colour A4 vs. A3 printers
2000
Units (000's)
1500
A4
1000
A3
500
0
1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
Year Source:
Vendors should continue to educate users about the value of using colour. At the same time,
vendors need to work towards destroying the remaining barriers to the use of colour
technology. The increasing use of the Internet, coupled with the availability of more
documents in electronic form should help to drive usage in the future.
16

Launch Plans 2001
Model J Model J
28 / 38 CF unit
Scarecrow
24/24
Blue Jay
20/20
C1200
12/12
Model-U
P1b
C7006dw 10/32
6/24
Model-U
P1a
C7006dw
8/24
6/24
C7005p
5/17
Pomelo III
6/24
C6003
3/16
2000 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 2001 Q1
The PCR6 will be the first Ricoh A4 colour laser printer to be launched by the Group. At
the time of launc h it will sit below the A3 PCR6W/DW printers as an A4 general office
colour laser printer to complete our colour laser printer line up.
For those subsidiaries selling the Lexmark C6003, the PCR6 will sit above that model as it is
double the colour print speed.
17
Target Customers & Channels
PCR6
? Color Printer Segmentation

?
No. of Users / Shared printer
Production Vertical General Office Personal
30- High Speed

Connectivity
High Speed
Processing Processing
10-29
High Quality Compact
Paper Handling
Needs Ease to install
5-9
Low Cost
-4
The target customers for the PCR6 are general office customers with the following
requirements:
Connectivity
High speed processing
Compact design
Easy installation
Low cost
The target number of users is from 3 to 30 users in the general office environment.
Our first priority with the PCR6 is to sell it through our existing channels to customers with
an A4 colour laser printer requirement. Additionally we should aim to sell this product
through printer resellers, although as this engine may be sold by several other vendors,
possibly at a lower cost, we may find this more difficult.
18
Key Selling Points

Major Features & Benefits
Compact Desk Top size
410
mm
520
mm
500 mm
Competition (W x D x H)
HP LaserJet 4500: 391 mm x 500 mm x 569 mm
Tektronix Phaser 740: 507 mm x 464 mm x 501 mm
Consumables: Easy to install
This model has only 5 consumables: Toner, PCU (Photo Conductor Unit), Fuser oil, Fuser
cleaning roller and Waste toner bottle.
All consumables are easy to install by the end user.
High image quality
1200dpi x 600pdi
Useful functions
Envelope printing
Duplex printing (option)
High Light (Twin Colo ur) printing
19
Good Performance
Vendor Ricoh Ricoh / NRG HP Xerox QMS Tektronix

Model Pomelo W PCR6 CLJ4500 NC60 DeskLaser Phaser 740
First Mono 19 17.5 - - -
Print
(Sec.) Colour 30 25 - - -
PPM Mono 16 24 16 12 16 16
Colour 4 6 4 3 4 5
Key Selling Points
High performance
Print Speed: F/C: 6ppm B/W: 24ppm (A4 LEF)

First Print : F/C: 25sec. B/W: 17.5sec.
Processor: R5261-200MHz
High Image Quality
1200dpi x 600dpi
PostScript Level 2 as standard
Many users in the general office environment print PDF files (through the Internet / Digital
camera, etc). In addition, competitor colour laser printers tend to have PostScript as a standard
PDL. The PCR6 has PostScript Level 2 as a standard PDL.
Duplex Printing
Many users have duplex printing needs for colour applications such as fliers / mailers, etc.
Furthermore if the user is going to use the printer as a general office mono & colour device a
duplex option is required. The PCR6 supports duplex printing with the optional Duplex unit.
Envelope printing
The PCR6 supports envelope printing.
Versatile paper handling options
- Paper Feed Unit for high capacity paper requirements

- Duplex Unit
20
Product Options, Consumables, Supplies Logistics

Output Capacity : 250 sheets
Controller Options
Memory:
Pomelo 32MB DIMM
64MB DIMM
128MB DIMM
Duplex Unit
(*Installed in Rear side. Connectivity:
Std.250 1
Optional paper tray is required.) 100Base-TX
Paper Tray
500 1
Max. Input Capacity : 750 sheets
Codes
Mainframe
Short Description Gestetner Nashuatec Rex-Rotary First Arrival
Name Model No. Model No. Model No.
PCR6 Colour laser printer C7006 C7006 C7006 April 2001
Peripherals
Short Name Description Versatility Est. Fit Rate to First Arrival
Mainframe
Type206 500 sheets Paper Feed PCR6 33% March 2001
Unit Type 206
AD390 Duplex unit Type 206 PCR6 13% March 2001
DMETYPEBP32 32 MB RAM Type B PCR6, 0% Dec. 2000
PMR26/N,
PCR38, PMR32
RC-210RAM64MB 64 MB RAM Type B PCR6, 0% Dec. 2000
PMR26/N,
PCR38, PMR32
RC-210RAM128MB 128 MB RAM Type B PCR6, 0% Dec. 2000
PMR26/N,
PCR38, PMR32
DIF53 Network Interface PCR6/W/DW 50% Oct. 2000
Board
21
Supplies
Short Description Versatility Qty. Qty. Yield First Arrival
Name Inner Outer
Type206 Black Toner PCR6 1 10 12,000 March 2001
prints
Type206 Cyan Toner PCR6 1 10 7,200 prints March 2001
Type206 Magenta Toner PCR6 1 10 7,200 prints March 2001
Type206 Yellow Toner PCR6 1 10 7,200 prints March 2001
Type206 Photoconductor PCR6 1 10 60,000 March 2001
unit developments
Type206 Fuser Oil PCR6, Pomelo 1 20 12,000 prints Available Now
Type206 Waste Toner PCR6 1 20 12,000 March 2001
Bottle developments
Type206 Fuser Cleaner PCR6 1 20 12,000 prints March 2001
Language set
PLSP6D Language set - German
PLSP6GB Language set English
PLSP6F Language set French
PLSP6I Language set Italian
PLSP6NL Language set Dutch
PLSP6E Language set Spanish
PLSP6DK Language set Danish
PLSP6S Language set Swedish
PLSP6N Language set - Norwegian
Whats in the box?
Mainframe
Power Cable (EU Type C)

Starter Toner Kit (CMY toner yield is 3.000 prints; K toner yield is 5.000 prints)
PCU / Fuser Oil / Cleaner / Waste Toner
Peripherals
Please note: drivers and O/Is will be supplied in 9 languages:

English / French / Italian / German / Dutch / Spanish / Swedish / Danish / Norwegian
22
PCR6W/DW Product Information Guide
PRODUCT
INFORMATION GUIDE
PCR6W/PCR6DW
Nashuatec C7006w/C7006dw
Rex Rotary C7006w/C7006dw
Gestetner C7006w/C7006dw
This document was initially prepared by NRG Group Head
Office and the specifications are subject to change. If in
doubt or further details are required, please contact NRGI
Guernsey.
1
Executive Summary
High performance A3 Colour Printing for Office Applications
With enhanced features, such as higher print speed, duplex printing, and enhanced
image quality, we have the opportunity to expand our colour printer sales in the
General Office environment, where colour print demand is still expected to continue
growing.
Indeed, the two versions of the PCR6W and PCR6DW (simplex and duplex), will
replace the current PCR5W, offering new print capabilities to Windows end-users.
The main differences between old and new models have been summarised in the table
below:
C7005W Simplex / Duplex

C7006w / C7006dw
Print speed (FC/mono) 5 / 17 ppm 6 / 24 ppm
First print time (FC/mono) 14 / 30 sec 13 / 26 sec
Resolution 600x600 dpi 600x600
(1800x600dpi, with improved tech.)
Memory std. 32MB 32 / 64MB
Memory opt. max 96 MB max 256 MB
PDL std. IPDL-C std. IPDL-C and PS2
opt PS2
Paper size max A3 max A3+ (A3 full bleed)
Duplex NO manual on Simplex vers.
automatic on Duplex vers.
For network environments, the PCR6W/PCR6DW can also be equipped with a Fast
Ethernet device and, thanks to the Aficio Manager tool, either operators or network
administrators can easily monitor the printer status.
2
Product Overview
Product Image
Mainframe
Expander tray
Paper path in
automatic duplex
printing
Inverter section
Simplex Model Duplex Model
Duplex Mainframe and Optional Paper Feed Unit
Bypass Tray (50 sheets)
Mainframe
Std. Paper tray: 250 sheets
Invert section in duplex

printing
2 x optional paper feed

units: 500 sheets
3
Operation Panel
Panel design is identical to the PCR5W
Language can be selected by the user at the operation panel.
LCD Characters 16 x 2
Language English
French
Italian
German
Dutch
Spanish (New)
Japanese
Key 8 Keys
PCR6W/PCR6DW Major Improvements
Improved Performance
Faster first print speed

Faster continuous print speed: F/C: 6ppm; B/W: 24ppm (A4 LEF)
Improved warm-up time
PostScript Level 2 (standard)
A3 full bleed printing on A3 oversize media
First Print Speed and Continuous Print Speed Comparison

PCR5W PCR6W/PCR6DW HP CLJ 8500 QMS 330 QMS 6100N
Phaser 780
Xerox-4LP
EpsonLP8000C
First Print Mono 14 13 19 25 N/A
(secs) Colour 30 26 35 48 N/A
ppm Mono 17 24 24 16 24
Colour 5 6 6 4 6
4
Fast first print speed
One of the key strengths of the PCR5W/PCR6W/PCR6DW engine is a fast first print
speed thanks to its Short paper Path. As the first print speed in monochrome
printing is much faster than competitors models, the PCR6W/PCR6DW can also be
recommended to replace conventional B/W LP.
(Please note: The competitive figures for QMS330, Phaser780, Xerox-4LP,

EpsonLP8000C are based on Epsons model using the same Fuji Xerox engine. The
figures for HP CLJ8500 are based on Canons model using the same Canon engine. )
Fast continuous print speed
F/C: 6ppm, B/W: 24 ppm

The PCR6W/PCR6DW continuous print speed (F/C: 6ppm, B/W:24ppm) is faster
than the PCR5W and several other competitors models.
Improved warm-up time
Ricoh Japan carried out an end user survey of colour laser printers in 1999 and one of
the key points with which end users are dissatisfied is a slow warm up time. With the
PCR6W/PCR6DW, the warm- up time has been improved from 450 secs. to 380 secs.
5
Duplex Printing
Many users in the general office have duplex printing needs. Duplex printing is not
available with the PCR5W model, and for this reason it cannot be recommended to
users who would like to print booklets, fliers, mailers, etc. in duplex. With the
PCR6W/PCR6DW, a duplex model has been developed to meet market needs.
Paper path in Fusing unit

Automatic duplex printing
Transfer belt
OPC belt
PCU
Toner
Paper tray
Inverter section
Automatic duplex printing process
Feed paper from Paper tray

Print 2nd page first and then go to paper path in automatic duplex printing at back
side of mainframe
Reverse paper in Inverter section
Feed paper again from Inverter section
Print 1st page
Printing on both sides is completed
6
Duplex printing availability
Simplex Model Duplex Model

Paper Source Manual Duplex Auto Duplex Manual Duplex Auto Duplex
Std./Optional No No No Yes (A5
Tray -A3/DLT)
Bypass Yes No Yes No
Duplex model
Automatic duplex printing unit is standard
Continuous duplex printing speed is F/C: 5.5ppm, B/W: 21.7ppm.
Bypass tray does not support automatic duplex printing
Simplex model
Supports manual duplex printing (printing on reverse side) only
Duplex unit option is not available.
Please Note: When the user needs to print on the reverse side, they need to select
bypass tray from the paper tray menu, and backside from paper type menu in
driver. Reverse side printing using the standard or optional paper trays is not
supported. This is because the fusing oil on the front side will damage the paper tray
friction pad.
Improved Image Quality
600dpi x 600dpi
(1800dpi x 600dpi equivalent)
2 bit/pixel data processing
1800dpi x 600dpi equivalent image quality is realised thanks to the following

technologies:
Improved line frequency
PCR5W PCR6W/PCR6DW
Photograph 106 lpi 180 lpi
Graphics 106 lpi 106 lpi
Text 211 lpi 268 lpi
Line frequency has been improved with the PCR6W/PCR6DW. The most suitable
print mode for each type of image should be selected by the user to achieve the most
suitable line frequency and hence the perfect printed output.
Photograph mode
Line frequency is improved from 106lpi to 180lpi. This improvement is effective on
photo image printing e.g. digital camera data. With the PCR6W/PCR6DW, smoother
and more detailed photo images are realised.
7
Graphics
Line frequency remains the same as the PCR5W to avoid unevenness in solid images.
Text
Line frequency is improved from 211lpi to 268lpi to realise sharper text images.
Different dither patterns

With the PCR6W/PCR6DW, a different dither pattern has been employed to realise a
smoother print image.
Colour targets
Targets more natural colouring closer to PC image display.
Moderate glossy image

Glossy ratio is reduced compared to the PCR5W. Black text printing is pleasant to
the eyes.
Support Printing on 12 x 18 paper
Supports printing on 12x 18 by bypass tray

Supports 11x17/ A3 full bleed printing
Drivers (IPDL-c and RPS2) GUI supports 12x18 paper sizes.
Note:
- It does not support standard/optional paper tray
- It does not support automatic duplex printing
- Max printable area is equal to 12x18 (304.8 x 457.2 mm) paper size, however,
data within 1 mm from the top and the left edges will not be printed.
- Not only the print quality in 1/6 (4.2 mm) margin from all edges are out of
guarantee, but the prints on these areas may cause some quality problem on the
following pages. (Toner will be attached on the transfer roller, leading to the dirty
lines on the following pages.
Support printing on Envelope
Envelope feeding is supported by bypass tray

Driver (IPDL-C, RPS) GUI supports com10 / DL envelope
Note
1. Does not support standard/optional paper tray.
2. The smooth-surface high quality envelopes are recommended.
3. Leave at least 2.54 mm (0.1) from all edges as unprinted areas.
To get better print quality, it is recommended to leave 20 mm (0.8) from all edges.
8
How to load envelopes?
ABC
ABC
Feeding Direction
RPS2/Mac: all application

IPDL-C: all application
RPS2/Windows: PageMaker
RPS2/Windows: all except
PageMaker
New driver User Interface
User friendly driver User Interface (IPDL-C)

Additional functions
Additional 4 languages are available
Flat tab layout

Driver user interface has been re-designed with easy to find tabs to give user faster
access to functions.
N-up Watermarks Overlay Auto duplex mode
N-up mode - Up to 4- up is available through the drive r.

Watermark
Overlay
Languages (User Interface, Help) English, French, Italian, German, Dutch,
Spanish, Swedish, Norwegian, Danish
9
Counter display
Either development count or print count can be selected

In SP mode can select to display counter on the operation panel
Two types of counter menu

Two types of counter menu can be selected at any time in SP mode.
The counting menus are as follows:
Development Count (Can select A3 double count menu on/off by SP mode)

Black 1C 2C 3C F/C
Black +1 +1
Colour +1 +2 +3 +3
Print Count (Can select A3 double count menu on/off by SP mode)

Black 1C 2C 3C F/C
Black +1
Colour +1 +1 +1 +1
10
Main Specifications
Engine
Configuration: Desk Top

Technology: Laser Beam and Single Component Electro-Photographic
Printing
Resolutions: 600 dpi x 600 dpi, 2 bits/pixel
Speed: A4 (LEF) F/C: 6 ppm Mono: 24 ppm
A3 F/C: 3 ppm Mono: 12 ppm
Transparency F/C: 1.2 ppm Mono: 1.7 ppm
* When OHP slip-sheet mode is on.
Thick media F/C: 2.9 ppm Mono: 4.5 ppm
*Duplex
A4 (LEF) F/C: 5.5 ppm Mono: 21.7 ppm
A3 F/C: 2.7 ppm Mono: 8.5 ppm
First print speed: A4 Mono: Less than 13 sec.
F/C: Less than 26 sec.
Dimensions (W x D x H):
W D H
Simplex model 660mm/26.0 575mm/22.6* 475mm/18.7
(Duplex model) (660mm/26.0) (652mm/25.7)** (610mm/24.0)
With 1 optional paper
feed unit 660mm/26.0 575mm/22.6* 601mm/23.7
With 2 optional paper
feed units 660mm/26.0 575mm/22.6* 727mm/28.6
*With expander output tray
Simplex: 625mm (24.6)
**With expander output tray
Duplex: 695mm (27.4)
Weight Simplex model Approx. 62Kg (136.7 lbs.)

Duplex model Approx. 82Kg (180.8 lbs.)
Input capacity Standard: 250 sheets cassette

+50 sheet bypass tray (80g/m2 , 20 lb. Bond)
Optional: 500 sheet paper tray x 2 (80g/m2 , 20 lb. Bond)
Max: 1,300 sheets
Output capacity Face down stacking: 250 sheets (80g/m2 , 20 lb. Bond) for A4
*100 sheets (80g/m2 , 20 lb. Bond) for paper larger than A4
11
Paper Size Std: Max. A3 (420mm x 297mm) / 11x17

(See 2.4. Paper Size) -A6 (105mm x 148mm)
Custom: Min 99x148mm (3.6x6)
Max 304.8x457.2 (12x18)
Pre-set size: 12x18 (305x457mm)
Envelope (Com10, DL)
Auto duplex printing: Max: A3/11x17 - Min.: A5 (LEF)
Duplex printing Simplex model: Only manual duplex is available
Optional duplex unit is not available
Duplex model: Both manual and auto duplex is available
Automatic duplex unit is pre- installed.
Non Printable Area 4.3mm (1/6)
*It may vary depending on paper size, printer language and
printer driver settings. For thick paper, 7mm for Trailing edge.
Paper Weight Tray (Friction Pad) : 64-105g/ m2 , 17 lb. Bond 28 lb. Bond
Bypass (FRR) : 64-160g/m2
17 lb. Bond - 90 lb. Index
Rating Power Spec. EU version : 220-240V 50/60Hz
Power Consumption Max. : 1,200W
(Max.) Energy Star Mode : Less than 45W
(Possible setup; Every 5, 15, 30, 45, 60 min and OFF)
Warm-up Time Less than 380 sec
Safety Standard EU version : TUV (IEC950)

Laser/EMI StandardEU Version : IEC825/ CISPR
Duty (prints/month) 15K prints for monochrome, 3.75K prints for colour
Can be increased to 25 K prints for monochrome/ 6.25K prints
for colo ur with a remark that if continuous prints of multiple
pages are made, toner scattering may occur.
Durability (Life) 300,000 prints (based on colour ratio 50%) / 750K
developments or 5 years whichever comes first.
Controller
CPU R4310
CPU Frequency 177 MHz
Additional DIMM slots for RAM 2 (1 slot is used by std. RAM.)
Printer Description Language IPDL-C, PostScript level 2
Network Protocol TCP/IP, IPX/SPX (Netware),
NetBEUI,EtherTalk, IPP
Standard RAM Simplex Model: 32 MB
Duplex model: 64MB
Upgrade Memory (DIMM; 144 pin) 32/64/128 MB, Up to 256MB (To use
256MB, Std. RAM should be replaced
with 128MB DIMM)
32 and 64MB RAM has compatibility
with Stinger-C, PII, Russian-C, and P
Optional slots for Upgra de 2
Hard Disk Drive Connectivity None
12
Std: Parallel Bi-Centronics (IEEE 1284-B ECP,

Nibble, Compatible)
Opt: Ethernet (RJ45) 100BaseTX
Parallel Centronics (IEEE 1284-B Compatible)
Token Ring None
Operating Systems Compatibility
IPDL-C RPS2
Win 3.1 No No
Win 95/98/NT4.0/2000 Yes Yes
MAC OS 7.6.1 or later, 8.x, 9.x No Yes
UNIX No Yes *
*In case of using the LPR and FTP commands
Calibration
Calibration is carried out through the operation panel of the PCR5W in SP mode.
Users can also adjust the density of each colour in maintenance mode.
Utilities
Aficio Manager: Please refer to the Aficio Manager PIG.

Port Navi: Please refer to the Port Navi PIG.
MDP3 (Multi Direct Print) is available with the PCR6W/PCR6DW.
IPDL-C
IPDL-C is a Windows GDI based Intelligent Page Description Language developed
by Ricoh. Data is transferred to the printer as an image (every line or text) without the
requirement for additional printing systems and memory. Ordinarily, competitors
GDI printers transfer the data page by page, which slows down the processing speed
and requires additional memory. IPDL-C focuses on improving performance through
Windows applications. Due to low performance, Windows ICC profiles are not
supported. Instead, Ricohs unique colo ur matching is supported.
As a major feature, IPDL-C has an Auto Page detection function, which improves
print speed and reduces print cost when printing documents that have separate colour
and black and white pages. When IPDL-C receives mixed colour and black and white
pages in one document, black and white pages are printed as true black and white
pages at 24 ppm engine speed even if colo ur mode (default) has been selected.
PostScript Level 2
The PCR6W/PCR6DW has PostScript level 2 emulation. This PDL is a clone
developed by Ricoh and supports to the same level as Adobe PS level 2. This clone
has been sold in Japan since 1986.
13
Connectivity
Parallel
The physical connection is a standard parallel-B connector. The following IEEE 1284
modes are supported:
ECP
Nibble
Compatibility
Ethernet
The following list highlights the Network Operating Systems supported as well as
associated frame types:
NetWare , IPX/SPX
Ether Talk
TCP/IP
NetBEUI
IPP
The following are not current ly supported : DLC - Local Talk
Token Ring
Not supported
Fonts
PostScript Level2 Fonts

Roman Fonts 39
The types of fonts supported by RPS2 are the same as those by Adobe PS2 (vers.
2013), but since Ricoh has its own developed fonts, these fonts are not fully
compatible with those of Adobe PS Level2
IPDL-c
No resident fonts. Software emulation (Soft fonts) only.

Based on the Ricoh internal measurement. Sound Power Level
Stand-by : 43dB or less
In Operation : 65dB or less

Based on the Ricoh internal measurement
Max. Density : 0.04 mg/m3
14
Paper Size
Paper Size
Paper Name Feeding Dimension

Direction (mm or inches) Std. Bypass Opt.
Tray Tray Tray
A3 Short 297mm x 420mm Y X Y
A4 Short 210mm x 297mm
A4 Long 297mm x 210mm Y X Y
A5 Short 148mm x 210mm
A5 Long 210mm x 148mm Y* X
A6(Post Card) Short 105mm x 148mm X
B4 Short 257mm x 364mm Y* X Y*
B5 Short 182mm x 257mm
B5 Long 257mm x 182mm Y* X Y*
B6 Short 128mm x 182mm X
B6 Long 182mm x 128mm
DLT(Ledger) Short 11"x 17" Y X Y
LG (Legal) Short 8.5"x 14" Y X Y
LT (Letter) Short 8.5"x11"
LT (Letter) Long 11"x 8.5" Y X Y
HLT (Statement) Short 5.5"x 8.5"
HLT Long 8.5"x 5.5" Y* X
EXE (Executive) Short 7.25"x 10.5"
EXE Long 10.5"x 7.25" Y X Y
F Short 8"x 13" Y* X Y*
Folio Short 8.25"x 13" Y* X Y*
Foolscap Short 8.5"x 13" Y*d X Y*d
Custom (Max.) Short 12x18, 304.8mm x 457.2mm X*
Custom (Min.) Short 3.6"x 6", 90mm x 148mm X*
Custom (12x18) Short 12x18(304.8mm x 457.2mm) X
Custom (Envelope) Com10, DL X
Y: Selected by paper size select dial.

Y*: Select * on a size select dial and set a paper size on control panel.
Y*d: Default size for *.
X: Selected by Printer driver or control panel setting.
X*: Input print size.
15
Paper Feed
(SEF)
ABC
ABC
ABC
Paper Feed
Portrait Landscape Landscape
IPDL-C: All applications IPDL-C: All application RPS2/Windows: PageMaker
RPS2/(Win/Mac): All application RPS2(Win/Mac): All application RPS2/ Mac: All applications
(LEF)
ABC
ABC
ABC
Paper Feed
Landscape Portrait Portrait

IPDL-C: All applications IPDL-C: All applications RPS2/Windows: PageMaker
RPS2(Win/Mac): All RPS2/Windows: All except RPS2/ Mac: All applications
applications PageMaker
16
List Prints
The PCR6W/PCR6DW has the following menu of list print.
Configuration Page
Statistic Report
Job Log
Configuration Page
17
Statistics Report
User code can be set when printer driver is installed. The number of pages printed can be
tracked by user code.
18
Job Log
The Job Log shows the time of each print job, the number of pages, and the current print
status of each job. Since Used ID is shown together, it is easy to find the job in the log.
19
Market Overview
The colour page printer market continues to grow at a significant pace. In 1998, the
Western European market increased by approximately 70 %, with total shipments
reaching slightly more than 92,000 units. In 1999, the market experienced a dramatic
upturn of almost 94 % to reach in excess of 178,000 units. With such a rapidly
expanding market place, many new players are entering this market to establish
themselves as colour laser printer vendors.
Major product introductions were seen in this space at the end of 1998, while 1999
saw the top players trying to take advantage of these new product lines. As Table 1
shows, HP reasserted itself as a market leader in this segment by growing market
share from 26.3 % to 34.7%. The LaserJet 4500 that began shipping in the fourth
quarter of 1998 came into its own in 1999 HP shipped in excess of 53,000 units in
its first full year of shipments. Similarly, HP shipped more than 8,600 LaserJet 8500
printers in its first full year of shipments. Table 2 illustrates that not only has HP been
able to repel competition from the combined might of QMS / Minolta in second
position and Xerox / Tektronix in third, but it has also increased the gap between itself
and the rest of the pack. This feat can be attributed to the success of the LaserJet 4500
and 8500 products. QMS / Minolta did well, moving into second position with its
strategy of leading with price. The aggressively priced Magicolor 2 DeskLaser helped
to drive sales for the company. HP and QMS / Minolta outperformed the overall
market growth, but Xerox / Tektronix showed only a comparatively modest increase
in sales and consequently lost market share.
Table 1
1998 and 1999
Vendor 1998 1998 1999 1999 1998-1999
Shipments (K) Share Shipments (K) Share Growth
Hewlett- 24.26 26.30% 62.08 34.70% 155.90%
Packard
QMS 14.9 16.20% 36.58 20.50% 145.40%
Tektronix 24.16 26.20% 30.44 17.00% 26.00%
Lexmark 10.46 11.30% 16.15 9.00% 54.40%
Minolta 4.6 5.00% 8.24 4.60% 79.30%
Xerox 5.92 6.40% 5.74 3.20% -3.10%
Brother 2.78 3.00% 5.2 2.90% 87.10%
Tally - N/A 3.42 1.90% N/A
Canon 0.1 0.10% 2.73 1.50% 2655.60%
Konica 0.96 1.00% 2.52 1.40% 163.60%
Others 4.15 4.50% 5.65 3.20% 36.20%
Total 92.28 100.00% 178.74 100.00% 93.70%
N/A = not applicable
20
Table 2
Showing the Combined Forces of QMS/Minolta and Xerox/Tektronix,
1998 and 1999
Vendor 1998 Shipments 1998 1999 1999 1998-1999
(K) Share Shipments (K) Share Growth
Hewlett- 24.26 26.30% 62.08 34.70% 155.90%
Packard
QMS/ 19.5 21.10% 44.82 25.10% 129.90%
Minolta
Xerox/ 30.08 32.60% 36.17 20.20% 20.30%
Tektronix
Lexmark 10.46 11.30% 16.15 9.00% 54.40%
Brother 2.78 3.00% 5.2 2.90% 87.10%
Tally - N/A 3.42 1.90% N/A
Canon 0.1 0.10% 2.73 1.50% 2655.60%
Konica 0.96 1.00% 2.52 1.40% 163.60%
Oki 0.78 0.80% 1.42 0.80% 81.90%
Epson 0.11 0.10% 0.95 0.50% 759.10%
Others 3.26 3.50% 3.28 1.80% 0.80%
Total 92.28 100.00% 178.74 100.00% 93.70%
NA = not applicable
Other factors that helped to stimulate the growth of this market segment in 1999 were
as follows:
The continued decrease in the cost of acquisition

New models with faster print speeds and improved paper- handling capabilities
A3 colour stimulated new applications
Average selling prices decreased as a result of lower-cost models and increased
competition
An increasing number of documents became available in electronic form
Continued widespread use of colour at home
Colour as a competitive advantage
While the market is growing solidly, several factors inhibited greater market growth:
Acquisition cost for a colour printer is still higher than that for a comparable
monochrome printer
The cost of operating a colour printer still creates concern; cost of operating
includes the cost of consumable s and the costs associated with supporting colour
printers
Colour is still more complex than monochrome
Many users have no real need to print colour
Several factors will impact the future of this segment. Newer products based on
tandem-engine technology will continue to bring faster solutions to users. In addition,
21
a new category of low-cost colour page printers will help to increase print volume.
Manufacturers will continue to address the ease-of-use aspects of these products and
more colour page printers with multifunction capabilities will be brought to market
(such as the HP Colour LaserJet 8550). All of these trends will help to fuel market
growth. On the other hand, cost per page and cost of supporting these devices is
expected to continue to inhibit greater growth. Also continued education and exposure
to colour will be necessary to convert the majority of users to colour.
At present, only about 4% of the shipments of workgroup page printers in the 1 ppm
to 30 ppm range are in colour. Dataquest believes that vendors will continue to
promote colour as an alternative to monochrome, which will raise this proportion to
more than 27% in 2004 (see Figure 1). As Figure 2 shows, while increased A3 colour
printer availability will stimulate new colour applications, A3 colour printers will not
grow as quickly as A4 colour printers.
Figure 1 Colour Printers vs. Mono Printers Forecast
7000
6000
5000
Units (000's)
4000 Colour
Mono
3000
Total
2000
1000
0
1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
Year Source:
Shipments of colour page printers will not overtake those of monochrome page
printers in the next five years. From the perspective of the installed base, the number
of colour page printers in use is a drop in the ocean compared with the number of
monochrome page printers.
22
Figure 2
Colour A4 vs. A3 printers
2000
Units (000's)
1500
A4
1000
A3
500
0
1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
Year Source:
Vendors should continue to educate users about the value of using colour. At the same
time, vendors need to work towards destroying the remaining barriers to the use of
colour technology. The increasing use of the Internet, coupled with the availability of
more documents in electronic form should help to drive usage in the future.
23
Product Range Plan and Positioning

Launch Plans 2000
Model J Model J
28 / 38 CF unit
C1200
12/12
Model -U
P1b
10/32
C7006dw Model -U
6/24 P1a
8/24
C7006w
C7005p 6/24
5/17
C7005w
5/17 Pomelo III
6/24
C6003
3/16
2000 Q3 Q4 2001 Q1 Q2 Q3
The PCR6W/PCR6DW printers will directly replace the current PCR5W printer. At
higher speeds than the PCR5W and with A3 oversize print capability the
PCR6W/PCR6DW printers will sit alongside the current PCR5P printer which will
not be upgraded to a higher speed device.
Furthermore the PCR6W/PCR6DW duplex model with 24 ppm mono print speeds has
the same paper handling capability to replace workgroup mono laser printers.
The PCR6W/PCR6DW printers will also sit alongside the I-2 and L-2 Colour
Solutions as print only devices for the General Office.
24
Target Customer and Channels
PCR6W/PCR6DW
Colour Printer Segmentation
Production Vertical General Office Personal
Colour needs in the general

30- office are increasing
No. of
employees 10-29 A4 CLP
5-9 A3CLP
-4 A4 CIJ
A3 CIJ
Primary Target Segment
General Office Segment: Corporate users in Administration, Sales, Marketing,

Public relations, Finance/Accounting,
Research/Strategic planning, Engineering/RandD depts.
Applications: MS Office (Word, Excel, PowerPoint)
Output: Presentation material to clients or internal executives
e-mail/internet
Excel worksheet with highlighted colo ur
Drawings
Project timing charts
Secondary Target Segment
Vertical (Niche) Markets: Specialised or customised colour application users, to

provide a specific service to customers in colo ur output
such as travel brochures, estate agency brochures,
financial plan proposals, etc.
Applications: MS Word + Digital camera, Photoshop, Illustrator,
Corel Draw, Pagemaker etc.
Target User by Print Volume
Monthly Volume: Avg. 2.5K prints Max. 5K prints

Colour Ratio: 50%
25
Key Selling Points
Fast Colour and Mono Printing
The PCR6W/PCR6DW prints at 6 ppm full colour and 24 ppm black or single colour
printing. IPDL-C enables fast printing as follows:
Job Overlap enables fast processing
Page Detection enables fast printing of black pages at 24 ppm within colour
documents
Versatile Media Handling
Media from A5 to A3 full bleed on A3+

Double-sided printing on duplex model
Bypass tray will handle 64-163 g/m2
High maximum paper capacity and up to four media sources for media flexib ility
OHP Mode inserts paper between OHPs to prevent them sticking together
Thick paper mode for high quality on card
Flexible Features
Fit to Paper Size through driver

Scale to Paper Size (%) through driver
Up to 4-up is available
Watermark printing through driver
High Image Quality
The PCR5W prints at 600 dpi. High Image Quality is also achieved as follows:
Area Separation Processing
Fine Line Mode
Edge Smoothing
Image Printing Setting
Easy to use Colour Management System
Graphic Mode
Graphic Mode is useful at a pre-press stage to simulate printing one or two colour
planes.
Aficio Manager Network Management Utility
The PCR5W comes with Aficio Manager network management software, allowing IT
staff to monitor printer performance remotely giving maximum productivity.
26
Product, Options and Consumables Logistics
Codes
Mainframes
Short Name Description Gestetner Rex-Rotary Nashuatec
Model No. Model No. Model No.
PCR60W PCR6W simplex C7006w C7006W C7006w
PCR62W PCR6W duplex C7006dw C7006DW C7006dw
Options
DPFU17 500 sheets paper feed unit PCR5W, PCR5P,
(Up two units can be attached) PCR6W, PCR6DW
DME185P32 32 MB RAM DMR15/18, PMR16/21,
(144 pin DIMM) DMR22/27, PMR27,
PCR6W, PCR6DW
DME185P64 64 MB RAM DMR15/18, PMR16/21,
(144 pin DIMM) DMR22/27, PMR27,
PCR6W, PCR6DW
DME37 128 MB RAM PCR6W, PCR6DW
(144 pin DIMM)
DIF53 100BaseTx Network interface Type 306 PCR6W, PCR6DW
DIF54 IEEE 1284 Parallel Board Type 204 PCR6W, PCR6DW
Supplies
Short Name Description Yield Versatility
DMU306 Photoconductor unit 72K developments PCR6W, PCR6DW
CT306BLK Black toner 17K prints PCR5W, PCR5P,
(410 g/cartridge) PCR6W, PCR6DW
CT306CYN Cyan toner 17K prints PCR5W, PCR5P,
CT306MGT Magenta toner 17K prints PCR5W, PCR5P,
CT306YLW Yellow toner 17K prints PCR5W, PCR5P,
TDB306 Waste toner bottle 72K developments PCR6W, PCR6DW
DCU1 Charger unit 24K developments PCR6W, PCR6DW
DFO306 Fuser oil 20K prints PCR5W, PCR5P,
PCR6W, PCR6DW
Fusing Unit as replacement parts (service parts). Yield = approx. 60K prints / unit
A4 (LEF)/ 5% Chart is used to measure the above yield based on the job condition
of 5 P/J (5 continuous prints per one print job)
This yield number may change depending on the circumstances and printing
conditions.
27
Supplies included with mainframe:
1 x black toner cartridge (210g); 6K prints @ 5%

1 x cyan toner cartridge (150g); 3K prints @ 5%
1 x magenta toner cartridge (150g); 3K prints @ 5%
1 x yellow toner cartridge (150g); 3K prints @ 5%
1 x Fuser oil (400497)
1 x Waste toner bottle (400495)
1 x Photoconductor unit (400490)
1 x Charger unit (400496)
Language Set (options)

PLS7GB Language set - English PCR6W, PCR6DW
PLS7D Language set - German PCR6W, PCR6DW
PLS7I Language set Italian PCR6W, PCR6DW
PLS7F Language set French PCR6W, PCR6DW
PLS7N Language set Norwegian PCR6W, PCR6DW
PLS7S Language set Swedish PCR6W, PCR6DW
PLS7DK Language set Danish PCR6W, PCR6DW
PLS7NL Language set Dutch PCR6W, PCR6DW
PLS7E Language set Spanish PCR6W, PCR6DW
Whats in the box
Mainframe
Power Cable
Quick Installation Guide
Branding model name decal
Energy Star Decal (affixed to front cover)
Aficio Logo sticker (affixed to front cover)
Consumables
The optional Language Sets include:
Operator Instructions (A5 document)
CD ROM with: Driver IPDLC-c and RPS2 (English, French, Italian,

German, Dutch, Spanish, Swedish, Norwegian, Danish)
Utility: Aficio Manager, PortNavi, Multidirect Print (MDP)

Manual: Printer Reference, NIB, Ricoh-Script2
(English, French, Italian, German, Dutch, Spanish,
Swedish, Norwegian, Danish).
28
PMR26/N Product Information Guide
PRODUCT
INFORMATION GUIDE
PMR26/N
Nashuatec P7026/n
Rex Rotary P7026/N
Gestetner P7026/n
This document was initially prepared by NRG Group Head Office and the
specifications are subject to change. If in doubt or further details are
1
Executive Summary
The PMR26/N is a family of 26 ppm A3-capable mono laser printers. There are two versions, the
PMR26N, which has an Ethernet card fitted as standard and the PMR26, for which the Ethernet card
is an option. Apart from the Ethernet card, the two versions have similar specifications.
These machines replace the 21 ppm PMR21 printer. The A4- format 16 ppm PMR16 will continue
through 2001
To have all direct-selling subsidiaries marketing the complete range of Aficio printers bundled
together with the Aficio MFPs using a consultative selling approach which combines analysis of
customer needs, an offering that combines different function products to fulfil those needs and a
bundled supplies/service/support package.
To enter the IT dealer, VAR and Systems Integrator channels in key European markets with the
Aficio printer range.
Marketing Communication Objectives
To position the Ricoh- manufactured printers within the Aficio range as high-performance networked
workgroup solutions for applications that require single-function printing. To support the MFP
range.
To increase awareness of NRGI's "multiple original network printing" solutions and build awareness
of NRGI's ability to offer a complete hardcopy output service to the networked environment, thereby
increasing the print volume made on our products.
Product Outline
- 26 ppm (printing A4) A3-size laser printer

- Duplex option
- 1200 x 1200 dpi resolution
- PCL5, PCL6 and Adobe PostScript 3 as standard
- 10/100 Ethernet interface as standard (option on the PMR26)
- Up to 1,350 pages paper capacity (with options)
- Shift tray for collating output (option)
- 4-bin mailbox (option)
Key Selling Points
- High speed printing for individuals and workgroups

- 1200 dpi quality
- Compact, front access design
- Duplex capability (option)
2
- Versatile paper storage

- Network ready (PMR26N)
- High standard specifications (PS3 and Ethernet)
Target Markets
The PMR26/N is suitable for individual and workgroup printing requirements in the general office
environment. It can be used for single or multi- user use, either directly attached or via the network.
We expect the majority of installations to be made in a networked environment.
The PMR26/N is an ideal major-account machine, as many printer tenders are for products in the
15-32ppm range. As we have aggressive price-positioning, we should be able to compete on both
specifications and price.
As with the other Aficio printers, the real opportunity with the PMR26/N is to combine it with our
print-capable MFP range and to offer customers a full line-up of Aficio Printing Solutions. This
approach enables sales organisations to target customers according to their enterprise printing needs,
rather than just looking at their desktop printer needs.
So far this has proved hard to do. It appears that sales people are reluctant to offer a single- function
printer when they could be selling a print-capable MFP. During the second half of 2000, we are
focussing on encouraging sales companies to invest in the infrastructure, training and incentive
schemes to make this transition successfully.
Sales Channels
The PMR26/N will be sold mainly through our direct sales force and international distributors. It will
also be sold by those of our dealers who are capable of handling networked products.
The PMR26/N offers opportunities in the IT Reseller channel, including Value Added Resellers
(VARs) and Systems Integrators (SIs). However, as we do not have many of these IT dealers, we do
not expect to make a great deal of sales though the indirect channel at first. A small number of
subsidiaries are in the process of entering this channel, while most operations do not yet have a
channel marketing strategy for printers. In Europe, more than 96% of page printers above 12ppm are
sold indirectly so it is essential that we continue to build a presence in the IT channel, leading with the
printers range and then following through with the MFP products.
3
Production Schedule and Launch Timing
Sample Production
Short Name Description Model Production Expected
Number Month Arrival
PMR26N PMR26N printer P7026N July 2000 August 2000
Note: Samples will be Ricoh brand, but supplied with the necessary parts to convert to NRG-version
Mass-Production
Short Name Description Model First Production Expected First Expected
Number Month Arrival Launch
PMR26N PMR26N printer P7026N October 2000 December 2000 January 2001
PMR26 PMR26 printer P7026 October 2000 December 2000 January 2001
Challenges for our network printer business
One year after launching the first Aficio mono printer, the biggest issue we face is still that of
incentivising/enabling the direct sales force to market network printers and overcome the brand
loyalty and "channel loyalty" that printer buyers have to HP and the IT dealer channel. To overcome
this requires extensive and ongoing sales training, development of local cons ultative selling systems
to enable a multi-technology sale, investment in local support infrastructure and integrated marketing
communications plans to communicate our unique product and support offering.
Secondly, subsidiaries must plan their activities with the IT dealer channel and find ways to sell into
this channel while avoiding conflict with the direct sales force and those printer-capable office
equipment dealers who will sell these products.
In short, all sales operations must have a comprehens ive Strategic Marketing Plan for the printer
business. It is clear at this stage that not all sales companies have developed such a plan.
Conclusions
The PMR26/N is a great product in terms of basic specifications and price/performance, and it is an
attractive machine for demanding individual users and small workgroups.
The copier and printer markets are converging very quickly. Across Europe, copy volume continues
to reduce at a rate of 3-4% per year, while print volume increases at 10-15%. Using the assumption
that the electronically- generated and distributed document will ultimately replace the hard-copy
document, it is essential that we capture a significant share of the printed document volume over the
next 2-3 years to be prepared for the next paradigm shift to electronic document management.
The Aficio printer range combined with the print-capable MFP range, enables us to position our
brands as offering a complete print solution for all common business environments from single users
right through to centralised printing applications. This is an essential message to communicate to the
market in our transition from being a copier vendor to being an IT and document communications
solutions provider.
4
Product Overview
The PMR26N and the PMR26 are 26 ppm, 1200 x 1200 dpi network laser printers. The PMR26N has
a standard Ethernet NIB, while this is an option with the PMR26. There is a wide range of paper
handling options, including duplex, mailboxes and a shift tray.
PMR26/N Configuration
The standard configuration of the PMR26/N includes a 250-sheet paper drawer, a 100-sheet bypass
and an Ethernet interface (for the PMR26N):
Standard Bypass Tray

(100 sheets)
Standard Paper Tray

(250 sheets)
Optional Paper Feed Unit

(500 sheets x 2)
5
As shown on the previous page, a maximum of two optional Paper Feed Units (500 sheets each,
A3/DLT) can be attached to PMR26/N.
Other options include a Duplex Unit an Envelope Feeder (which goes in the place of an optional
Paper Feed Unit, similarly to PMR14/16/20/21), a 4-bin Mail Box and a 1-bin Shift Tray. These last
two options cannot be installed at the same time:
Optional 4-bin Mail Box
Optional 1-bin Shift Tray
Optional Duplex Unit
6
External Options
Kir-P3b/P3c
4-bin Mail Box 1-bin Shift Tray
BypassTtray: 100
Duplex Unit
Base Unit
Envelope Feeder 250
250 A3/DLT size Printer
(P3b/P3c: 26ppm)
500
500-sheet Paper Feed Unit
500 500-sheet Paper Feed Unit
Note: All the external options are unique to the PMR26/N and have no interchangeabilty with PMR14/16/20/21 or
DMR15/18.
See Section 8 for codes, short names and versatility.
Internal Options
Interface Options
- 10Base-T/100Base-TX automatic switching (Option on the PMR26, Standard on the
PMR26N)
- IEEE1394 FireWire
* Customers can select one of the above interface options.
Memory Unit TypeB (64MB) : common with RC-210, Russian-P2, Pomelo3, Model-J and
Adonis-C2
- Additional memory DIMM
- Memory type: PC100 SDRAM
- Number of pins: 144 pins, Access time: Maximum 6 ns.
Hard Disk Drive

- 6.0GB or less
- 2.5 inch, IDE-Interface
- Font downloading (PCL and PS), Collation, Locked Printing and Sample Printing
7
Option List
O: Can be installed, Std: Standard
No. Item Description For For Compatibility
PMR26 PMR26
N
1 Paper Bank (A3/DLT) Paper Feed Unit for max. A3 size / DLT , 500 O O Unique to PMR26/N
sheets
2 4-bin Mailbox Total 200sheets. 50 sheets stack for each bin O O Unique to PMR26/N
3 1-bin Shift Tray 250 sheets stack. For collation and job sorting O O Unique to PMR26/N
st
4 Duplex Unit 23 ppm from standard and optional 1 tray O O Unique to PMR26/N
5 Envelop Feeder Optional tray for the envelopes *1 O O Unique to PMR26/N
6 Network Interface Board Ethernet board (10Base-T / 100Base-TX) O *2 Std. *2 Unique to PMR26/N
7 IEEE 1394 Board *3 IEEE 1394 interface board O *2 O *2 Unique to PMR26/N
8 SD-RAM (64MB) *4 64MB additional memory DIMM O O Common with RC-210, PMR32,
DMR35A/45A, PCR6 and PCR38,
9 HDD 6.0GB Hard Disk Drive O O Unique to PMR26/N

10 Maintenance Kit PM parts for user maintenance O O Unique to PMR26/N
11 AIO 20K AIO O O Unique to PMR26/N
*1: Envelope Feeder requires the installation of Paper Feed Unit.

*2: Network Interface Board" and "IEEE1394 Board " cannot be attached to the mainframe at the
same time. As for NIB standard model, the PMR26N, you have to uninstall the standard NIB which is
built- in as standard, in case of wishing to install IEEE1394 Board
*3: A 6 pin 6 pin and a 6 pin 4 pin IEEE 1394 cable is included.
*4: The memory upgrade is recommended to print a two-sided, large size page at the highest
resolution.
Controller Overview
The PMR26/N has a new controller design with a 200MHz RM5231 processor. It has 32MB RAM as
standard and one optional RAM slot capable of taking a 64MB SDRAM DIMM to give a maximum
memory capacity of 96MB. The controller can be fitted with an optional 6GB hard disk which
enables collation, sample printing, font downloading and locked printing.
PCL5, PCL6, Adobe PostScript 3 and a new Ricoh PDL printer language called RCPS (Refined Print
Command Stream) are supported and drivers are provided to print from Windows 3.1x (PCL only),
Windows 95/98, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, and Mac OS 7.5 or later (PostScript only).
There is a single parallel port which is bi-directional and IEEE1284 compliant and a standard
Ethernet 10/100BaseT network interface (optional on the PMR26). Both machines have two
expansion interfaces which can be used for the Hard Disk, Ethernet NIB (in the case of the PMR26)
and the IEEE1394 interface.
Full specifications of the controller are in Appendix B.
Drivers Overview
The PMR26/N supports PCL5e, PCL6, PostScript 3 and a new Ricoh PDL. Details of the drivers for
PCL6, PostScript 3 and the new Ricoh PDL are as follows:
8
PCL 6 emulation
PCL 6 is the latest version of the PCL family. The firmware of the PMR26/N printer controller
supports both PCL 5e and PCL XL commands. PCL XL commands are designed to match Window's
GDI (graphical device interface) commands closely. This gives users several performance and
print-quality benefits which are especially noticeable for complex graphics:
1. Improved graphical performance

2. Refined document integrity through font synthesis
Resource: Software 2000

Supported OS: Windows 95/98
Windows NT4.0
Windows 2000
Languages: 14 Languages supported
Adobe PostScript 3
A PPD (PostScript Printer Description) file is provided for the PMR26/N. This file defines the
specific features of the printer (such as paper handling options, paper size range, and so on) and the
user interface built into the driver.
Supported OS: Windows 95/98,

Windows NT4.0
Windows 2000
Macintosh system 7.5 or later
Languages: 5 Languages supported
Ricoh PDL: Refined Printing Command Stream (RPCS)
What is Ricohs new PDL ?

New PDL made by Ricoh (a successor of IPDL-C)
Common PDL for use in future BandW and Colo ur printers and MFPs, especially the
GW-architecture-based products
Optimal PDL for Windows client (dedicated for use under Windows)
Major Advantages
Faster throughput speed than HPs PCL XL
Compatible with future Ricoh Document Solution software solutions such as Job Binding
and Batch Printing in DeskTopBinder
Comprehensible GUI
- Preset GUI provided in addition to conventional type GUI with many tabs
- Preset type (new)
Some typical icons are provided as defaults, and also customers can create and register
additional icons to their own specifications, such as combinations of 2 in 1 with duplex
mode. So customers can print any kind of job by clicking a single icon.
- Tab type (conventional)
More convenient for customers who are accustomed to manipula ting a PCL driver.
9
Ricoh Japans objectives in introducing a new PDL into the market

To differentiate from competitor models with a new and attractive PDL.
- PCL driver is also provided to maintain HP Compatibility for users who are
accustomed to manipulating PCL drivers.
Print setting flow when using the Preset Type User

Example print job: 2 in 1 with duplex printing
STEP-1
To open print dialogue window, select Print in
File menu. Click properties button.
(This is the normal procedure in any printer
driver)
10
STEP-2
Select the pre-set icon for Duplex, 4 pages per
sheet in Pre -Settings area, and then click
OK to return to the print dialogue window.
Typical Preset Icons such as 2

in 1 and Duplex are presented
as defaults.
If you cannot find a preset icon
that matches the job you want to
use, new icons can be created
and registered through the New
Pre -Settings or Change
Pre -Settings buttons. Once
your favorite icon is registered,
the icon will appear in the
Pre-Settings area.
STEP-3
Click OK in the print dialogue window and your job
will run.
Note: The User Interface, including the terminology used, is not the final version and will be fixed
later.
11
Market Situation
European Market Trends
1999 2000 2001 2002

Segment K unit share K unit share K unit share K unit share
1-6 ppm 500.8 13.9% 59.0 1.5% 0.0 0.0% 0.0 0.0%
7-12 ppm 2,126.5 59.0% 2,756.3 71.3% 2,917.3 72.2% 2,947.3 71.1%
13-20 ppm 862.7 23.9% 894.3 23.1% 927.9 23.0% 957.9 23.1%
21-30 ppm 93.2 2.6% 121.5 3.1% 156.6 3.9% 194.4 4.7%
31-49 ppm 19.7 0.5% 28.2 0.7% 35.9 0.9% 40.9 1.0%
50+ ppm 4.2 0.1% 4.7 0.1% 5.0 0.1% 5.3 0.1%
Total 3,607.1 100.0% 3,864.0 100.0% 4,042.7 100.0% 4,145.8 100.0%
(Source : InfoSource Spring 1999)
The 21-30 ppm segment has grown strongly since 1998. Vendors have driven the product availability
in this range particularly with HP and Lexmark marketing 24 ppm machines. The market share
situation in 1999 was as follows:
7% CANON
3%
21% 1% EPSON
HP
8% KYOCERA
9% 4% LEXMARK
2% MINOLTA
OKI
QMS
XEROX
45%
OTHERS
12
Product Range Plan

By December 1999, we had a mono printer range which stretched from 14 to 45 pages per minute.
Since then we have launched the 16 and 21 ppm upgrades to the PMR14/16/20/21, and we will
replace the PMR21 with the 26 ppm PMR26/N models and introduce the Russian-P2:
Aficio Mono Printer Range Plan

PPM
45
45 45 Sept
40
35
32 32
30 Dec/Jan Dec
27 26 26
25 26 26
Dec/Jan Nov
20 20 21 X
May
15
14 16
May
10
2000 2001 Shows Launch Month 2002
13
Target Customers and Channels

Target Customers
With our bias towards direct sales channels and our inc reasing use of cross-selling sales concepts, the
Aficio printer range will most often be sold as part of a total package that includes MFPs and copiers.
The PMR26/N is at the low-mid end of the range between the PMR16 (16ppm) and PMR32 (32ppm).
It is suitable for demanding individual users and small workgroup applications requiring fast network
printing.
Sharing Group Network Environment

Size of Office
Large
Centralized
(shared by (100+)
50-100 users)
Work Group (30-99)

(20-30)
Small Work
(5-29)
Group
(3-10)
(1-4)
Business Personal Small Network 1 to 1 Standalone

(LAN) Peer-to-Peer
Network Environment
As it is equipped with a multiple protocol NIB (option with the PMR26), the PMR26/N can be used in
the following network:
- TCP/IP
- IPX/SPX
- NetBEUI
- AppleTalk
14
Sales Channels
The chart below is based on data from Cap Ventures. It shows the channel structure for all page
printers over 12 ppm sold in Europe. Each box shows the percentage of units sold through that
channel member during 1997 (the situation has not change significantly since these figures were
published):
% Unit Shipments 1997
4 21 71 4
Direct Dealer 69 Distrib 2 Retail
4 90 6
Mail Sales VAR Small Multiple PC/Elec General Off the

Order Force Dealer Dealers Stores Stores Page
0 4 30 23 47 4 1 1
Users
Cap Ventures made several comments on these figures as follows:
"Compared to 1996, in 1997 we saw a move away from direct sales and towards multiple dealers
as well as the retail channel. Note that the retail channel at 4% is on par with direct sales. Direct
sales are most likely to have lost out because of the high costs involved with keeping such a force, as
well as the competition from multiple dealers and VARs both offering Added Value to the sale,
particularly in providing network solutions. Multiple dealers have gained significantly in
percentage of shipments sold via the dealer channel firstly because they have strong buying power
which can compete with the retail channel as well as the distributor and secondly because they offer a
wider range of vendor products. Smaller dealers are more dependent on the vendor, and if they cannot
supply a full range of products, the smaller dealer's offering is incomplete.
"Why the retail channel and specifically the PC/Electrical stores channel should gain in importance is
a sign of the times - consumers and small businesses understand more about printers today and
so are more willing to forfeit the service and consultancy a dealer offers , in addition to the
obvious price advantage.
"Lastly, as a general rule, page printers are getting faster. If 6ppm was the entry level of the home user
in 1996, then it was 8ppm in 1997. This means the segment of the market (>12 ppm) is not necessarily
100% SME (small and medium size enterprises) and corporate users."
In this market, it is the vendors who hold the power. HP has such a large market share that it dictates
the actions of the channel. Furthermore, the printer market is driven by pull marketing, with
advertising and sales promotion practices by companies like HP generating demand which is then
"pulled" through the channel.
15
NRG makes 60% of its unit sales through the direct sales force and 40% through dealers. Of
our dealer base, some are capable of selling and supporting printers but many are traditional copier
dealers making slow progress with connectivity on MFPs. We have a very small amount of sales
going through the IT distributors who channel 71% of printers in Europe, and few relationships with
the dealers and VARs who account for 90% of units sold.
So there is a very poor fit between our channel structure and the current printer market
structure. Also, we cannot generate pull without significant advertising expenditure, which is out of
the question. Therefore we have to do the following to ensure that we take a share of the printer
market with the printer products and our print-capable MFPs:
Direct Salesforce Actions
- All direct salesforces must be capable of selling printers and MFPs together using a
consultancy-selling approach
- Requires significant training and a "MindShift" project for most operations.
- Requires the formulation of a standardized consulting system for each operation.
- Sales and marketing effort must target the key decision makers in the printer buying
organisation, who are invariably different to our traditional contacts.
- There must be a focus on our major accounts to displace installed competitor printers and
replace them with a mix of printers and MFPs.
Indirect Channel Actions
- For our current office equipment dealers

- Develop those dealers who are capable of moving to networked products and advance
them from MFPs towards printers
- For competitor's OA dealers who already sell MFPs and printers

- Focus to switch them to our product range by offering a more complete and competitive
lineup
- Sell the opportunity to achieve greater hardware margins and more secure supplies
revenue from our printer products compared to their current printer suppliers.
- The IT dealer channel including VARs

- Recruit dealers from the IT channel through our unique offering:
- Increased hardware margins
- Secure after-sales supplies and service revenue
- Access to a full product range of MFPs.
16

High Speed
Fast Printing Speed
The PMR26/N engine runs at 26ppm (A4/LT LEF) and achieves a first print speed of 6.5 sec./A4 or
LT.
Short Operating Time (Front-Access Operation)
Once installed, a user can do everything from the front panel adding the paper by opening the
standard and optional trays, checking the LCD and pushing the buttons when messages appear on the
LCD panel, recovering from paper jams and replacing Toner Cartridge s.
Network Ready
Printers in this market segment are likely to be used as shared printers in a small workgroup (3 to 10
people). One of the top requirements for printers in this segment is that they are network ready,
therefore there are two versions of the PMR26/N, one with a standard NIB, and the other with an
optional NIB.
Additionally, the PMR26/N officially support the following Unix Operating Systems:
Solaris 2.5.1, 2.6, 2.7 and 2.8
HP UX 8.x, 9.x, 10.x and 11.0
Red Hat Linux 6.2
Many Options
With a variety of paper handling options, the PMR26/N series enables users to complete their print
jobs efficiently.
- 4-bin Mail Box
- 1-bin Shift Tray
- Paper Feed Units
- Duplex Unit
Standard PostScript 3
In addition to PCL6 emulation, the PMR26/N comes with genuine Adobe PostScript 3 as standard.
Users can expect better quality and faster performance than PostScript Level 2. For complex
documents, PostScript Level 3 processes each component as a separate object to optimize imaging
throughput. This means that Russian-P2 can support the Mac environment as well. Also, PDF files
can be printed faster than on PCL-only or PostScript Level 2 printers.
17
High Image Quality
Provides consistent quality output with crisp images and text.
A) 1200 x 1200 dpi

Resolution is a true 1200dpi, giving excellent quality output of all types of documents.
B) PCL6
PCL6 is a combination of PCL5e and XL commands. PCL XL provides improved printing for
complex graphics. It closely matches the Windows GDI, which is used by main applications and
gives the user a more faithful reproduction of the original.
C) Adobe PostScript 3 (Standard)

Simply better quality and more accurate WYSIWYG than other print languages.
Security
The PMR26/N has a Locked Print function, so confidential prints can be secured with a user
password. Using this function, documents will be not be printed out automatically, and the user must
input their valid ID number at the printer after sending print job.
Note: The optional HDD must be installed for this.
Network Utilities
Aficio Manager (including PortNavi), consisting of an Administration and Client version and
Multidirect Print will be provided on the Driver CD-Rom.
18

Marketing Communication Objectives
These objectives refer to the Aficio printer range as a whole:
- To position the Ricoh- manufactured printers within the Aficio range as high-performance
networked workgroup solutions for applications that require single- function printing. To support the
MFP range.
- To increase awareness of NRGI's "multiple original network printing" solutions and build
awareness of NRGI's ability to offer a complete hardcopy output service to the networked
environment, thereby increasing the print volume made on our products.
Communications Brief
The following section has been taken from the document used to brief our marcoms agency to
produce the original brochures, Ads and DM pieces for the Aficio Printers. It has been included in this
document so you can see the direction of the brief:
"User / Customer - Typical characteristics of the user/buyer, decision maker. Who will use or buy
this product? (Size and type of organisation they work for) Why and How will they buy?
The IT/MIS Manager is our primary target. Printers have traditionally been specified and
bought by the IT manager and increasingly the IT manager is responsible for mixed
MFP/printer purchases as well. As more of our products become print- focussed and
network-capable, then the importance of the IT manager within the DMU (Decision Making
Unit) will increase. However, where consultancy selling systems are used (e.g. Paperflow) the
DMU is often influenced primarily by a financial individual or general manager higher up in
the purchasing organisation.
These products, together with the multifunctional Aficio products, will be targeted at
corporate buyers from SME (Small and Medium Sized Enterprises) up and
governmental/administrative bodies. The focus should be on presenting the whole solution of
combined copy/print/fax/scan MFPs together with single- function printers so that the customer
clearly understands that our product range can meet the diverse needs of all the users in the
organisation. In addition to this, the package under which the multi-product sale is made is
measured in terms of cost of ownership and ease of management improvements that the
customer can achieve compared to purchasing from multiple vendors.
In addition to using our current direct sales force and that part of our dealer base that is capable
of selling networked products, we will also be recruiting IT dealers, VARs and Systems
Integrators as resellers of our printers and connected MFPs. The presentation therefore needs to
be clearly "IT" rather than "copier company" in its style."
Launch Pack containing 4pp brochures
There will be a new 4pp brochure for the PMR26/N which covers both versions of the machine. The
19
style and layout will be similar to that used for the PMR32 and PMR45. This design has been used for
all of the colour and mono Aficio printers and is distinct from our other brochures in that it is more
IT-oriented.
The centre pages of this brochure will contain a picture of the machine, fully configured, with small
bulleted sections to explain the features and benefits. The overall design is easy to read quickly and
delivers the message more concisely than large sections of descriptive text.
The back pages of the brochure will contain the specifications, an exploded line drawing of the
machine and its options and two screen-shots of the drivers.
Press advert and Direct Mail concepts on CDROM
These pieces were published in Q4 2000 and are on the theme of Aficio Network Printing
Solutions. They are not product specific. They are aimed at IT/MIS managers and have a strong
cost and control message. There are three treatments to chose from and the three themes are used on
both advert and DM pieces. All six pieces are designed for the any of the brands to be dropped in.
Aficio Printing Solutions Electronic brochure

This Electronic Brochure is called "Aficio Printing Solutions". It is not specific to the printer range,
but covers the benefits of satisfying a customers overall printing requirements with a selection of
products from the Aficio range.
The messages are IT oriented and cover networking, total cost of ownership, support and other areas
that are critical in IT purchasing decisions. One section of the electronic brochure lists all the mono
and colour products in the Aficio range so that, as we launch more products, the electronic brochure
will be continuously updated.
Sales Motivation Audio Cassette
This audio programme was published in July 1999 and is called "Selling Aficio Network Printing
Solutions". The content of this audio programme was aimed entirely at sales people who are
struggling with the new dynamics of the market and the need to sell to IT professionals.
The cassette explains how network printing fits into our product offering and how the Aficio MFPs
and Aficio printers complement one another. In addition to listing some key differentiators of our
products, services and support packages, it also covers some of the main issues IT managers may
raise with a sales person.
20
Mainframe, Option and Consumable Logistics

Mainframe carton contents

- Starter toner cartridge with 6K yield (normal cartridge is 20K)
- Brand plaques x 3
- Other contents TBC
Maintenance Kit
- 1 x Fusing Unit (for the mainframe)
- 1 x Transfer Roller (for the Mainframe)
- 3 x Friction Pad (one for the mainframe and others for optional Paper Feed Unit)
- 3 x Paper Feed Roller (one for the mainframe and others for optional Paper Feed Unit)
Packaging and Branding
Mainframe Packaging
The mainframe carton is unbranded. As there is only one model name for all three brands, there is just
one model name and one set of brand label placement marks on the carton. The carton is of a new
design that can be opened and resealed easily. This is so the branding operation can be done
without damaging the carton, as is the case with the original PMR14/20.
Three branding labels are included in the box with the machine. These can be placed on the top left
corner of the front panel of the printer.
Options Packaging
All options have neutral packaging with no branding.
Supplies Packaging
The toner cartridges are unique. There are three branded versions.

These have the Aficio logo and the model name on the front cover, but no brand is mentioned. Unlike
most of our other language kits, these have just one front page and no tear-off sections.

Manufacturers Group Short Gestetner Rex Rotary Nashuatec
Aficio AP2600N PMR26N P7026n P7026N P7026n
Aficio AP2600 PMR26 P7026 P7026 P7026
Paper Handling Options

DPFU25 Paper feed unit Type 2600 - 500-sheet PMR26/N only
CS380 4-Bin Mailbox Type 2600 PMR26/N only
DIF2600SS 1-bin shift sort tray Type 2600 PMR26/N only
AD410 Duplex unit Type 2600 PMR26/N only
DEFU8 Envelope feeder Type 2600 PMR26/N only
21
Connectivity Options
DIF2600E Ethernet 10/100BaseT NIB Type 2600 PMR26/N only
DIF2600FW IEEE1394 Printer Option Type 2600 PMR26/N and PCR38
DHD2600 6GB Hard Disk Drive Type 2600 PMR26/N only
RC-210RAM64MB Printer memory expander Type B 64MB PMR26/N, PCR38, DMR35A/45A, PMR32,
PCR6, PCR6W/DW, RC-210
Note: The memory option above is an SDRAM DIMMs. It is a Ricoh product and will be available from NRGD.
However, this type of memory will also be available from third parties at a lower cost. NRGD will make these products
No More when they are available locally.
Supplies
Short Name Description Yield Qty. Qty. Versatility
at 5% Inner Outer
DT32BLK Nashuatec toner cartridge (xxxg) 20,000 1 TBC PMR26/N only
DT32BLK Gestetner toner cartridge (xxxg) 20,000 1 TBC PMR26/N only
DT32BLK Rex Rotary toner cartridge (xxxg) 20,000 1 TBC PMR26/N only
DMK9 Maintenance Kit 90,000 1 1 PMR26/N only
Language Kits
PLS26D P7026/P7026N Language Kit German PMR26/N
PLS26GB P7026/P7026N Language Kit English PMR26/N
PLS26F P7026/P7026N Language Kit French PMR26/N
PLS26I P7026/P7026N Language Kit Italian PMR26/N
PLS26NL P7026/P7026N Language Kit Dutch PMR26/N
PLS26E P7026/P7026N Language Kit Spanish PMR26/N
PLS26P P7026/P7026N Language Kit Portuguese PMR26/N
PLS26DK P7026/P7026N Language Kit Danish PMR26/N
PLS26S P7026/P7026N Language Kit Swedish PMR26/N
PLS26PL P7026/P7026N Language Kit Polish PMR26/N
PLS26N P7026/P7026N Language Kit Norwegian PMR26/N
PLS26SF P7026/P7026N Language Kit Finnish PMR26/N
PLS26CZ P7026/P7026N Language Kit Czech PMR26/N
PLS26H P7026/P7026N Language Kit Hungarian PMR26/N
22

The Service Training Plan is a summary from the Service Launch Guide that will be available with
your Technical Departments.
Service Concept
New Developments
Use of the new GW (ground-work) architecture
Dual component AIO cartridge
New development system
IEEE1394 option
Fast warm-up time
GW Architecture:
The PMR26/N is the first printer of Ricoh to use the new GW (ground-work) architecture. It uses
resources common with future machines such as the Adonis-C2, Model J and Russian-C2.
Maintenance:
The PMR26/N uses a dual component AIO cartridge. Together with the Maintenance Kit, it enables
users to maintain the machine themselves.
Dealers can choose maintenance either by customer or service.
The PM interval is 90K prints.
IEEE 1394 Interface:

This machine is the first Ricoh printer to adopt the IEEE1394 standards, providing more ways for
connectivity.
Firmware Release:
Firmware files will be delivered using a web server. New firmware can be downloaded using a flash
memory card.
23
Advantages for Service Activities

It is now possible to upgrade the software of the controller, engine, NIB from one IC card slot. The
methods of upgrading the firmware will be common for all items.
User installation of main unit and all optional units, including internal options such as HDD and
IEEE1394 interface.
User replacement of the (AIO) cartridge
There will be fewer visits by technicians, as can be seen from the above items.
Service Information
The following requirements should be considered when assigning field engineers for this model:
Experience on printer maintenance in field
Basic knowledge of digital laser (B/W) printing process
Basic skills for network printers, including installation to a network (NetWare, Windows NT,
TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, AppleTalk) and printer driver installation and usage.
Curriculum
An appropriate training curriculum should be prepared based on the instructors guide.
Depending on the field experience and technical knowledge of trainees, the period and curriculum of
the training can be adjusted.
Training must cover the following subjects:
Specifications
Print process control
Service program mode, test mode
PM items
Service tools
Troubleshooting
IEEE1394
Drivers (PCL6/PCL5e/RPCS)
NIB
Terminal Server
UNIX
User/Sales/Service remarks
24
Materials
The following materials are supplied from Ricoh.
Service Manual
Parts Catalogue
Point-to-point Diagram
Circuit Diagrams
Instructors Guide
Operation Manuals
Field Information
Purpose/Issuing requirements:
Verify the symptom before reporting. Then, field problems should be reported to Ricoh Co. using the
Global FPR (Field Problem Report) system. Print samples, Configuration Page, System Management
Report (printer engine service mode Service Report), and information such as type of application
and network being used may be required.
Required information for issue:

Symptom description
Possible cause
Action taken and results
Counter values
Additional requirements:
Print image problems:
Copy samples
PC Connectivity problems
PC specifications (manufacturer, model, type, CPU, memory)
OS used
Application used
Technical Information
The following technical documents will be sent periodically or when required. Please ensure tha t all
of these documents are promptly delivered to appropriate groups or individuals, especially during the
IFAP period.

MB Notifies design change information with Field engineers
(Modification Bulletin) part numbers, interchangeability, and
production cut- in serial numbers.
RTB Provides troubleshooting information, Field engineers
(Ricoh Technical Bulletin) Service Manual change information.
Firmware Release Note Provides firmware update information and Technical support
the firmware files via internet web server.
Driver and Utility Update Provides driver/utility update information Technical Support
and the files via internet web server.
25
Service Time Estimation
Installation Time
30 minutes
(Full system: installing two PFUs, 4-bin mailbox, and duplex unit)
Maintenance Time
Product EE EU Inci- Target Recomm Target Total Target Estimat- Target Total
Ratio Ratio dence PM -ended PM PM EM ed EM EM
(%) (%) (EExEU) Interval PM MTTR MTTR Interval EM MTTR MTTR
(prints) Calls per (min./ (min./ (prints) Calls (min./ (min./
1,000k call) 1,000k) per call) 1,000k)
Prints 1,000k
(calls/ prints
1,000k) (calls/
1,000k)
Main unit 100 100 1.00 90k 11.11 15 166.7 200k 5 30 150
PFU 20 50 0.1 90k 11.11 3 33.3 400k 0.25 30 7.5
4-bin
Mailbox 15 40 0.06 --- --- --- --- 200k 0.30 30 9.0
1-bin
Shift 8 10 0.008 --- --- -- --- 300k 0.027 30 0.81
Tray
Duplex 15 30 0.045 --- --- --- --- 300k 0.15 30 4.5
Main Unit 11.11 166.7 --- 5.0 --- 150
Full System
--- 11.11 --- 233.3 --- 5.95 --- 178.5
(4-bin Mailbox/duplex/ 2 PFUs)
1) The target EM intervals are calculated under the operable environment and the target monthly
usage (average).
2) The target PM MTTR is estimated assuming that the fusing unit is replaced at the customer site as
a unit, not as individual parts.
Service preparation Schedule
Preparation Date
Service Manual - Draft September 8th, 00
Service Manual - Final October 11th, 00
Training in Tokyo September 4th to 8th, 00 (5 days)
Parts Catalogue October 13th, 00
Schematics October 13th, 00
P to P Diagram October 13th, 00
Service Launch Guide November 10th, 00
Initial Parts Shipment End of November 00
PM Parts
User Maintenance
All PM items can be done by the customer, using the maintenance kit. The maintenance kit contains
the following items.
When the maintenance counter reaches 90K, "Replace Maintenance Kit" is displayed. After replacing
the parts in the maintenance kit, the machine automatically resets the PM (fusing) count.
26
Item Quantity Remarks

Fusing unit 1
Transfer roller 1
Paper feed roller for the standard tray 1
Paper feed rollers for the optional PFU 2 Optional PFU
Friction pad - standard tray 1
Friction pads - optional trays 2 Optional PFU
Service Maintenance
The following tables describe the PM items when the PM is done by service.
Symbol key: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricate, I: Inspect
Main unit
Item 90K EM Remarks
Paper Feed
Paper Feed Roller R C Clean with water
Friction Pad R C Clean with water
Registration Mylar C C Clean with water
Around the Drum
Transfer Roller R
Fusing Unit and Paper Exit
Hot Roller R
Pressure Roller R
Hot Roller Strippers R
Fusing Thermistor R Clean with alcohol if necessary
Bushing Fusing Roller R
Bushing Fusing Pressure R
Fusing Entrance and Exit Clean with water or alcohol.
C
Guide Plates
Paper Tray Unit

90K EM NOTE
Friction Pad R C Dry cloth
Bottom Plate Pad C C Clean with water.
Four-bin Mailbox
90K EM NOTE
Paper Feed Unit
Friction Pad R C Dry cloth
Bottom Plate Pad C C Clean with water.
27
Reliability
Items Description
APV 4K/Month
Max PV 10K/Month
Duty 100K/Month
Unit Life 600K or 5 years whichever comes first
MPBF 200K
The figures above are calculated based on the following:
Machine is used under average monthly usage

PM is regularly performed
Recommended papers are used
The machine is installed under operable environmental conditions
28
Appendices
A. Engine Specifications
B. Controller Specifications
C. Controller Overview
D. Network Interface Board Specifications
E. IEEE 1394 Interface
F. Paper Handling Option Specifications
G. Target Supplies Yield
H. Target Print Volume and Reliability
I. Multi- language Preparation
J. Meter Click Counter Questions
K. Competitive Specifications
29
Appendix A Engine Specifications

Configuration Desktop
Technology Laser beam scanning and Electro photographic printing

Dual component toner development
Resolution 1200/600 dpi
Smoothing Yes (on,off)
Continuous Print Speed 26 ppm (A4/LT-LEF)
First Print Speed 6.5 sec. or less (A4/LT - LEF, Std. Tray)
Dimensions (W x D x H) (excluding standard tray) 468 x 410 x 305mm, 18.4x 16.1x 12.0
(including standard tray 468 x 437 x 305mm, 18.4 x 17.2 x 12.0
Weight 18kg or less, 39.7 lb. or less
Input Capacity Standard Tray: 250 sheets (80g / m2, 20 lb.)

Std. Bypass Tray: 100 sheets (80g / m2, 20 lb.), 10 envelopes
Paper Feed Unit: 500 sheets x 2 (80g / m2, 20 lb.)
Envelope Feeder: 60 envelopes
Output Capacity 250 sheets
Duplex Printing 23ppm from Standard Tray and optional 1st Paper Feed Unit
20ppm from optional 2nd Paper Feed Unit
A3 / 11x17 A5 SEF
Input Paper Size Std. Tray: A3 / 11x17 A5 LEF

Optional Paper Tray: A3 / 11x17 A5 LEF
Bypass Tray: A3/11x17 A6
Bypass Tray (Custom Paper Size):
148 x 432 90 x 305 mm (5.8 x 17 3.5 x 12)
Com#10, C5, C6, DL, Monarch
Envelope Feeder: Com#10, C5, C6, DL, Monarch
Paper Weight Paper Tray (Std./Opt.): 60 - 105 g/m2 (16 28 lb.)

Bypass Tray : 52 - 162 g/m2 (14 43 lb.)
Rating power specifications US version : 120V, 60Hz

EU version : 220-240V, 50/60Hz
Power Consumption (US version) Main unit (including NIB) Full system
Max: 870W or less 940W or less
Printing: 610W or less 650W or less
Energy Saver 17W or less 22W or less
(EU version) Main unit (including NIB) Full system
Max: 870W or less 940W or less
30
Printing: 610W or less 650W or less

Energy Saver 17W or less 22W or less
Warm-up Time Less than 19 sec. (23C, 73F)
Safety Standard US version : UL1950, cUL

EU version : EN60950
EMI US version : FCC Class B

EU version : EN55022 Class B
Environmental Standard US version : Energy Star Tier1 specifications

Sound Power Level Printing: 64dB or less
(ISO7779) 68dB or less (full system)
Stand-by: 40dB or less
Energy Saver: 40dB or less
Printable Area (depend ent on PDL and paper size)
Less than 4.2 mm or 1/6
Printable
Area
Less than 4.2 mm or 1/6
31
Appendix B Controller Specifications

CPU RM5231-200
Printer Languages PCL6 (5e and XL) emulation, RPCS, Adobe PS3 (genuine)
Resolution PCL XL: 1200 / 600 dpi

RPCS: 1200 / 600 dpi
PCL 5e: 600 dpi
PS3: 1200 / 600 dpi
Fonts For PCL: 35 Intellifonts 10 TrueType fonts, 1 bitmap font

For PS: 136 fonts (24 Type 3 and 112 Type 14 fonts)
Font Manager and 31 additional fonts for PCL, to be loaded to PC
Memory Standard 32MB SDRAM, up to 96MB (with optional SDRAM DIMM)
HDD Optional 6.0GB
ROM Flash: 8MB (coding, PCL and PS fonts)

Mask: -
Drivers PCL 6: Win 3.1x *1, 95 / 98 / ME, Win NT 4.0, 2000

RPCS: Win 95 / 98 / ME, Win NT 4.0, 2000
PCL 5e: Win 3.1x *1 , 95 / 98 / ME, Win NT 4.0, 2000
PS3: Win 95/ 98 / ME, NT 4.0, 2000 *2,
Mac OS 7.6.1 or later
*1: PCL 6 and PCL 5e for Win 3.1x will be provided from web site.
*2: PS3 for Windows 2000 is a MicroSoft-driver, not an Adobe
Interface Standard: Bi-directional IEEE1284- compliant parallel x 1

10Base-t/100Base-t (PMR26N only)
Optional: IEEE1394 (FOR PMR26/N)
10Base-T / 100Base-TX (for the PMR26 only)
(10Base- T/100Base-TX automatic compatible)
Open two expansion interface for the following options :
(1) HDD and (2) either IEEE1394 or Network Interface
Board. Network Interface Board and "IEEE1394 Board " cannot be
attached at the same time.
Network Protocol Network Interface Board supports following protocols:

TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI (only supported by Multi- Direct Print
(peer-to-peer environment))and AppleTalk
The controller supports SNMP-MIBII and industry standard MIB
(RFC1759)
Network OS Novell Netware 3.11 or later, 4.1 or later, 5.0 and 5.1
Windows NT4.0 and Windows 2000
Unix OS: Solaris 2.5.1, 2.6, 2.7 and 2.8
HP-UX 8.x, 9.x, 10.x and 11.0
32
Red Hat Linux 6.2

Protocol: lpd, rsh, rcp and ftp
Network Utilities AficioManager 3.5 (including PortNavi) for Win 95 / 98 /Me and Win NT
4.0 / 2000
Multi-Direct-Print (MDP3)
Other Utilities Printer utility for Mac

Agfa Font Manager
1394 Utility (IEEE 1394 printers removal utility)
Operation Panel 16 characters x 2 line LCD + 4 LEDs + 8 Hard keys
Supported Language US version: English

EU version: Following 14 languages
English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch,
Norwegian, Danish, Swedish, Polish, Portuguese,
Finnish, Hungarian and Czech
33
Appendix C Controller Overview

C1 Printer Languages
The PMR26/N series controller has the following languages as standard. The details are in table as
below.
Language Resource Specifications

PJL Ricoh Basic format : Compatible with HP LJ 4000.
RPCS Ricoh -
PCL XL OAK(Xionics) LJ 4000 (protocol level 2) compatible
PCL 5e OAK (Xionics) LJ 4000 compatible
PostScript Adobe Level 3, 3011
C2 Resident Fonts
The PMR26/N series have 46 PCL fonts and 136 PS fonts as standard. The details are as follows.
PCL 46 fonts (10 TrueType fonts, 35 Intellifonts, 1 Bitmap font)

PS 136 fonts (Type 2 : 24 fonts, Type 14 : 112 fonts)
PCL
Symbol sets Roman-8, ISO L1, ISO L2, ISO L5, PC-8, PC-8 D/N, PC-850, PC-852,
PC8-TK,
Win L1, Win L2, Win L5, Desktop, PS Text, VN Intl, VN US, MS Publ,
Math-8,
VN Math, Pifont, Legal, ISO 4, ISO6, ISO 11, ISO 15, ISO 17, ISO21,
ISO 60,
ISO 69, Win 3.0
PS
Supporting Encoding Standard Encoding and ISO Latin1Encoding
C3 Euro Currency glyph :

Available (both PCL fonts and PS fonts)
PCL
Supports all fonts except Windings, Symbol, Line Printer, Stick Font and Arc Font.
Symbol Set PCL5e: 19U, 9E, 5T, 19L (Win31 Latin 1, 2 and 5), 0x80
PCL XL: 19U, 9E, 5T, 19L (Win31 Latin 1, 2, 5 and Baltic), 0x80
PS
Compatib ility Adobe PS3 3011
Code 0xa0
Supporting Encoding Standard Encoding and ISO Latin1 Encoding
34
C4 Paper Input
Paper size and tray
The paper sizes listed on the following table are supported by Model K-P3b/c.
Paper name Direction (Edge) Paper Size Main Unit / Bank Bypass Tray Env. Feeder Duplex
width x length
NA EU NA EU NA/EU NA/EU
A3 Short Edge 297x420 mm D/* D/D S S N Y
B4 Short Edge 257x364 mm */* */* S S N Y
A4 Short Edge 210x297 mm D/* D/D S S N Y
A4 Long Edge 297x210 mm D/D D/D S S N Y
B5 Short Edge 182x257 mm */* */* S S N Y
B5 Long Edge 257x182 mm */* */* S S N Y
A5 Short Edge 148x210 mm N/N N/N S S N N
A5 Long Edge 210x148 mm */* M/M S S N Y
B6 Short Edge 128x182 mm N/N N/N N N N N
B6 Long Edge 182x128 mm N/N N/N N N N N
A6 Short Edge 105x148 mm N/N N/N S S N N
A6 Long Edge 148x105 mm N/N N/N N N N N
11x17 Short Edge 11x17 inch D/D D/* S S N Y
Legal Short Edge 8.5x14 inch D/D D/* S S N Y
Letter Short Edge 8.5x11 inch D/D D/D S S N Y
Letter Long Edge 11x8.5 inch D/D D/D S S N Y
Half Letter Short Edge 5.5x8.5 inch N/N N/N S S N N
Half Letter Long Edge 8.5x5.5 inch N/N N/N N N N N
Exective Short Edge 7.25x10.5 inch N/* N/* S S N N
Exective Long Edge 10.5x7.25 inch */* */* S S N Y
F Short Edge 8x13 inch */* */* S S N Y
Foolscap Short Edge 8.5x13 inch D/* */* S S N Y
Folio Short Edge 8.25x13 inch */* */* S S N Y
Com10 Short Edge 4.125x9.5 inch N/N N/N S S D N
Monarch Short Edge 3.875x7.5 inch N/N N/N S S D N
C6 Short Edge 114x162 mm N/N N/N S S D N
C5 Short Edge 162x229 mm N/N N/N S S D N
DL Env Short Edge 110x220 mm N/N N/N S S D N
8k Short Edge 267x390 mm N/* N/* S S N Y
16k Short Edge 195x267 mm N/* N/* S S N Y
16k Long Edge 267x195 mm N/* N/* S S N Y
Custom Width (Bank) 182-297 mm N/N N/N - - N N
Length(Bank) 148-432 mm N/N N/N - - N N
Width(Bypass) 90-305 mm - - S S N N
Length(Bypass) 148-432 mm - - S S N N
D: Paper size is specified by using dial.

*: Paper size is specified from the panel after the dial is set to *.
S: Paper size is entered on the panel display.
Y: Paper Feed is supported
N: Paper Feed is not supported.
M: Size Sense feature is available only for Standard.
35
Short Edge Feed Long Edge Feed

<- Width -> <- Width ->
Length
Length
Main Unit and Optional Paper Feed Units

Standard paper sizes are supported by setting paper size on the operatio n panel or selecting a dial.
When using RPCS, the paper size and the feed direction that match the tray settings have to be used in
the printer driver.
Bypass Tray
Both Standard size and Custom size paper are supported. When specifying and setting
custom size, size will be either mm or inch in accordance with drivers setting under PCL XL, 5e PS
and RPCS.
Paper Type
The following types of paper can be set up for each paper tray from the operation panel.
Standard Tray/Bank: Plain, Recycled, Specia l, Color, Letterhead, Preprinted,

Prepunched, Bond, Card Stock
Bypass Tray: Plain, Recycled, Special, Color, Letterhead, Preprinted,
Prepunched, Bond, Card Stock, Labels, Thick, Transparency
Paper Tray Select

When Auto Tray Select is selected in the driver, the tray in which the paper of the specified size/type
is loaded, is selected.
The printer starts searching from the Default Tray. In case of no appropriate tray, the tray is looked for
with the following order:
Default Tray -> 1 -> 2 -> 3 -> Multi bypass ->

Multi Bypass Tray
1 B4 Default Tray
2 A4 Short Edge
3 A4 Long Edge
When A4 size is specified in the above conditions, Tray2 is selected.
Limitless Paper Feed

In case of out-of-paper, the printer will try to search for the tray with specified paper size and type and
the printer will select the tray with the proper paper size and type based on the setting of the default
36
tray.
If there is no valid tray available, the printer starts searching fo r a tray in accordance in the following
order:
Default input tray -> 1 -> 2 -> 3 -> Multi bypass ->
Limitless Paper Feed is not available if a tray is selected in the driver.
Tray Lock
If a customer uses different kinds of paper, trays can be locked to prevent printing on wrong paper
such as letterhead or coloured paper. When Auto Tray Select is selected, the locked trays will not be
used.
Auto Continue
If Auto Continue is enabled, in case the printer runs out of paper of the specified paper size and type,
the printer ignores the error and proceeds with printing in the following ways:
1. Auto Tray Select

If the specified tray is not available and Auto Continue is OFF, printing is paused until user sets
the specified tray.
If the specified tray is not available and Auto Continue is ON, printing is proceeded with
accordance with Auto Tray Select order.
If specified paper is still not found, an alert message appears warning that specified paper size and
paper type is not detected, and then the printing is terminated.
The printer feeds the paper from the default tray, when all tray are locked.
2. Tray Select
If the specified tray does not meet the condition, and Auto Continue is OFF, printing pauses until
user sets the paper.
Even if the specified tray does not meet the condition, and Auto Continue is ON, the printer tries
to feed the paper from the tray (or in case of no paper in the tray, and Auto Continue is ON, the
printer pauses printing until user sets the paper.).
C5 Paper Output
Paper size and output tray

The following chart shows the output paper sizes according to the selected paper trays:
Size Name Direction Page Size Main Unit 1bin 4bin

(Edge) width x length
A3 Short Edge 297x420 mm Y Y Y
B4 Short Edge 257x364 mm Y Y Y
A4 Short Edge 210x297 mm Y Y Y
A4 Long Edge 297x210 mm Y Y Y
B5 Short Edge 182x257 mm Y Y Y
B5 Long Edge 257x182 mm Y Y Y
A5 Short Edge 148x210 mm Y N N
A5 Long Edge 210x148 mm Y Y Y
B6 Short Edge 128x182 mm Y N N
B6 Long Edge 182x128 mm Y N N
A6 Short Edge 105x148 mm Y N N
A6 Long Edge 148x105 mm Y N N
37
11x17 Short Edge 11x17 inch Y Y Y

Legal Short Edge 8.5x14 inch Y Y Y
Letter Short Edge 8.5x11 inch Y Y Y
Letter Long Edge 11x8.5 inch Y Y Y
Half Letter Short Edge 5.5x8.5 inch Y N N
Half Letter Long Edge 8.5x5.5 inch Y N N
Executive Short Edge 7.25x10.5 inch Y Y Y
Executive Long Edge 10.5x7.25 inch Y Y Y
F Short Edge 8x13 inch Y Y Y
Foolscap Short Edge 8.5x13 inch Y Y Y
Folio Short Edge 8.25x13 inch Y Y Y
Com10 Short Edge 4.125x9.5 inch Y N N
Monarch Short Edge 3.875x7.5 inch Y N N
C6 Short Edge 114x162 mm Y N N
C5 Short Edge 162x229 mm Y N N
DL Env Short Edge 110x220 mm Y N N
8k Short Edge 267x390 mm Y Y Y
16k Short Edge 195x267 mm Y Y Y
16k Long Edge 267x195 mm Y Y Y
Custom Width 90-305 mm Y N N
Length 148-432 mm Y N N
Y: Output supported.
N: Output not supported.
Output Tray
Model K-P basically has only one standard output tray. The 1-bin Shift Sort Tray and the 4-bin Mailbox are
optional. The following shows the load and sensor specifications.
Output Tray Paper output amount with Paper output amount Paper Tray Shift
option installed* per option* Remaining Full feature
Standard output 250 N/A N Y N
tray
1bin** 500 250 Y Y Y
4bin** 450 50 x 4 Y Y N
* : A4/ LT **: 1bin and 4bin are not simultaneously installed.
Default Output Tray

The default output tray can be designated from the operation panel. If the output tray is not designated
on the printer driver, paper will be output to the default tray unless that paper size is
not available for the default tray.
All paper will be output to standard tray when error occurs.
Sequential Stack
The sequential stack mode is applicable when:
1. Auto Tray Switch is specified for the standard output tray via printer system setting when the 4-bin
Mailbox or the 1-bin Shift Tray is installed.
2. An output tray is specified via system default setting from the driver.
Operation
When the standard output tray becomes full, output is in bin 1 (output bin is shifted in sequence through
bin 4).
When the last available output tray becomes full, printing is terminated after an alert message.
When the current specified output tray becomes full during output and the next available output tray
(searched in numerical order) has paper, printing is terminated after the alert message is shown. Output is
38
continued by automatically switching to the next available tray, even if all output paper is removed from
the specified tray.
When paper is removed from the next available tray, it is automatically enabled to be used for output.
When the next sequential stack job is received, the tray of the smallest number, excluding the paper full
tray, is set for the output bin.
When the additional output is required after all the output trays become full, the print job is paused until all
paper is removed. In case of the output tray without the paper remaining detect function, however, the
printer restarts output using standard output tray after all paper has been removed and repeats from step 1.
Finishing Capability
Any of the following trays can be selected as an output tray from the driver, and the following finishing
functions are available in that case:
Standard Tray : Collation
4-bin Mailbox : Collation
1-bin Shift Sort Tray : Collation, Job Separation *1
*1 With this feature "On", the print jobs are printed shifted to right and left. If the Job Separation feature is
disabled at the operation panel, separation is not applied.
C6 HDD Specifications
The following 3 functions are available with optional HDD. This HDD has a 6.0 GB capacity and
it is divided into 2 areas for each function.
Capacity Area Size Usage Remarks
6.0GB File System1 500MB Font download Remains after Power down/up.
Image Tmp 5400MB Collation, Sample Print, Deleted at Power down.
Locked Print 1000 pages in total.
Collation (Non-rotate Collate)

When Collate is specified on PJL or each printer language, the extended image is compressed and
memorized in the HDD (or RAM) on the printer. The memory is used for multiple copies from the
second copy. The shift feature is simultaneously available with the 1-Bin Shift Sort Tray.
Max. storing pages: 1000 pages*

Max. storing capacity: 5.4GB*
* These figures are total sum for Collation, Sample Printing and Locked Printing.
Sample Print ing

This function helps users to make multiple copies of the documents directly from their PC. When
printing documents with this function, only the first set of documents will be printed out
automatically. If this first set is printed correctly, the remaining sets will be printed by pressing the
button of the printer. In this case, users do not have to go back to own client PC to continue printing.
This function is only available when the optional HDD is attached.
Max. job storing: 30
Max. overflow job record: 20
Max. storing capacity (HDD): 5.4GB*
39
Locked Print ing

This function offers users confidentiality when printing in a shared environment. By using this
function, documents will not be printed unless the user enters a valid password at the printer control
panel, previously entered in the Printer Driver when sending the print job. This function is only
available when optional HDD is attached.

Max. job storing: 30
Max. overflow job record: 20
Max. storing capacity (HDD): 5.4GB*
Font Downloading
Some PCL fonts can be downloaded to HDD (or RAM memory) Also, some PS fonts can be
downloaded to the HDD by using the Printer Utility for Mac. The portion of the HDD available for
this function is 500MB out of 6.0GB.
The following table shows the available fonts to download to HDD.
Language Font format Remarks

PCL5e PCL encapsulated Bitmap Download by PJL
PCL encapsulated Outline
PCL encapsulated TrueType
PostScript Type1 Adobe Roman Font Download by Printer
Type2 CFF: Compact Font Format Utility for MAC
Type3 User Defined Font
Type9
Type10
Type11
Type14 Chameleon Font
Type32 Bitmap Font
Type42 TrueType Font
7 Memory (RAM) Specifications
Memory Preference Settings

This function has to be used to specify the priority for the areas of printer language and image on the
memory allocation basis. This is specified from the system setting on the panel.
Page Preference: image area takes priority.

User Preference: printer language area takes priority.
The following table shows each memory area size per installed memory capacity. For the image area,
the minimum guaranteed value is applied, the printer language values are corresponding to these. The
printer language area and image area are language-dependent.
40
Conditions Total Memory Capacity Resident 32MB + 64MB

32 MB 96 MB
Page Preference System Area 10 MB 16 MB
Printer Language 6.0 MB 12.6 MB
Image Area 16 MB 67.4 MB
Others 0 MB 0 MB
User Preference System Area 10 MB 16 MB
Printer Language 12.6 MB 21.5 MB
Image Area 9.4 MB 58.5 MB
Others 0 MB 0 MB
The following chart provides the definition of the valid resolution in simplex print and duplex print on
the basis of the installed memory capacity.
Simplex
Memory Usage Page User
Total Memory Capacity 32MB 96MB 32MB 96MB
Image Memory 18MB 67.4MB 9.4MB 58.5MB
Resolution Paper Size Page Size Required Capacity
1200x1200 A3 297x420 33.5MB R A Y A
B4 257x367 25.4MB R A R A
A4 210x297 16.8MB A A R A
B5 182x257 12.6MB A A R A
A5 148x210 8.4MB A A A A
Postcard 100x148 4.0MB A A A A
DLT 11"x17" 32.4MB R A Y A
Legal 8.5"x14" 20.7MB R A R A
LT 8.5"x11" 16.2MB A A R A
Longer 305x432 100.5MB N N N N
600x600 A3 297x420 8.6MB A A A A

B4 257x367 6.3MB A A A A
A4 210x297 4.3MB A A A A
B5 182x257 3.2MB A A A A
A5 148x210 2.1MB A A A A
Postcard 100x148 1.0MB A A A A
DLT 11"x17" 8.2MB A A A A
Legal 8.5"x14" 5.2MB A A A A
LT 8.5"x11" 4.1MB A A A A
Longer 297x432 25.2MB R A R A
Size
LT 8.5"x11" 1.0MB A A A A
Longer 297x432 6.3MB A A A A
Size
A: Assured Image quality is assured even in the worst conditions (Compression rate = 0).
R: Recommended Most images of over compression rate =3 are valid for printing.
Also, the number of pages available for the sequential print is ensured with
the standard images of over compression rate =9.
Y: Printable There is the case that printing of some complex images is invalid,
or the number of pages available for the sequential print is not ensured with
the standard images.
N: Unprintable
41
Duplex mode
Memory Usage Page User
Total Memory Capacity 32MB 96MB 32MB 96MB
Image Memory 18MB 67.4MB 9.4MB 58.5MB
Resolution Paper Size Page Size Required Capacity
1200x1200 A3 297x420 67.0M B Y A Y R
B4 257x367 50.8M B R A Y A
A4 210x297 33.6M B R A Y A
B5 182x257 25.2M B R A A A
A5 148x210 16.8M B A A A A
DLT 11"x17" 64.8M B Y A Y R
Legal 8.5"x14" 41.4M B R A Y A

LT 8.5"x11" 32.4M B R A Y A
600x600 A3 297x420 17.2M B A A R A

B4 257x367 12.6M B A A R A
A4 210x297 8.6MB A A A A
B5 182x257 6.4MB A A A A
A5 148x210 4.3MB A A A A
DLT 11"x17" 16.4M B A A R A
Legal 8.5"x14" 10.4M B A A R A
LT 8.5"x11" 8.2MB A A A A
A: Assured Image quality is assured even in the worst conditions (Compression rate = 0).
R: Recommended Most images of over compression rate =3 are valid for printing.
Also, the number of pages available for the sequential print is ensured with
the standard images of over compression rate =9.
Y: Printable There is the case that printing of some complex images is invalid,
or the number of pages available for the sequential print is not ensured with
the standard images.
N: Unprintable
42
C8 Operation Panel
PMR26/N Operation Panel Layout
6 Characters x 2 line lCD + 4 LEDs + 8 Hard keys
NA EU
NNN
C9 LED Specifications
LED Color Appearance Meaning

Power Green Off Power off or in Energy Saver mode
Flashing Warming up
On Power on and not in Energy Saver mode
Data In Green Off No data
Flashing Data being received or processed
On Data being received or processed; more data coming
Online Green Off Printer off- line
Flashing Going off- line
On Ready to print
Error Red Off No messages or error conditions requiring attention
On Printer requires service
43
Using the Menu Protect function, the user can prevent unauthorised access to the following menu
items on the operation panel:
Function Menus Level 1 Level 2

Paper Input N Y
Maintenance Y Y
System Y Y
System (EM) Y Y
Host Interface Y Y
Program N Y
Language Y Y
44
Appendix D Network Interface Board Specifications

LAN Interface 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T
Frame Type EthernetII, IEEE802.2, IEEE802.3, SNAP
Protocol TCP/IP : Windows 95, 98, ME, NT 4.0, 2000

IPX/SPX : NetWare 3.11 or later, 4.1 or later, 5.0 and 5.1
and InternetWare
NetBEUI* : Windows 95, 98, ME, NT 4.0, 2000
* Only supported by Multi- Direct-Print (MDP3)
AppleTalk : Mac OS 7.6.1 or later
SNMP MIB-II, Printer MIB, Host Resource MIB, Ricoh Private MIB
Please note that the IEEE1394 interface must be removed before adding the NIB
45
Appendix E IEEE 1394 Interface
This option enables customers to print through IEEE1394 Interface and the following are typical
connection types.
(1)
1394
1394
(2)
1394
1394
(3)
1394
1394
Note 1: Printing feature through IEEE1394 I/F is available only with PCs running on Windows
2000.
Note 2: Recent PCs and IEEE1394 Expansion cards for PCs have a couple of IEEE1394 ports. The
connection types depend on numbers of IEEE1394 ports on each device.
Note 3: IEEE1394 Expansion cards for PCs must support Windows 2000.
Note 4: In case of using the 6 pin 4 pin cable, IEEE does not recommend that a device at the 4
pin-side connects to any other devices.
Hardware Specification
Interface IEEE1394 (6pin)
Number of ports 2 ports
Data Transmission speed 400Mbps / 200Mbps / 100Mbps
46
System requirement
Connectable devices 1. PCs
OS: MS-Windows2000*
with IEEE1394 port
* MS Windows 2000
Professional with Service
Pack 1 and MS Windows
2000 Server with Service
Pack1
2. IEEE1394 Repeaters
Number of Hops 16 hops (Max.)
Length of cable 4.5m between devices (Max.)
Note: IEEE1394 interface includes two types of IEEE 1394 cables. One is a 6 pin 4 pin cable and
the other is a 6 pin 6 pin cable. The length of these cables is 2.0 meters.
There are two types of ports in the IEEE1394 Standard: a 4 pin and 6 pins port. The IEEE1394 option
for the PMR26/N has a 6 pin port.
A 1394 Utility will be included on the Drivers and Utilities CD-ROM.
47
Appendix F Paper Handing Option Specifications

Paper Feed Unit
(Unique for Kir-P3 series)
Paper size: A3/11x17 A5 LEF
Paper weight: 60 - 105 g/m2 , 16 - 28 lb.
Paper capacity: Max. 500 sheets
Dimensions (W x D x H): 468 x 412 x 130mm, 18.4x 16.2x5.1
Weight 5.5 kg, 12.1 lb.
Envelope Feeder
Paper size (Envelope): Com#10, C6, C5, DL, Monarch
Envelop capacity: 60
Dimensions (W x D x H): 468 x 412 x 127mm, 18.4x 16.2x 5.0
4-bin Mail Box

Paper stack: 50 sheets / bin (80g/m2)
Paper weight: 60 105 g/m2, 16 28 lb.
Dimensions (W x D x H): 465 x 395 x 285mm, 18.3 x 15.6 x 11.2
1-bin Shift Tray

Paper stack: 250 sheets / bin (80g/m2)
Dimensions (W x D x H): 465 x 395 x 160mm, 18.3x 15.6 x 6.3
Duplex Unit
Paper size: A3/11 x 17 A% LEF
Dimensions (W x D x H): 419 x 378 x 257mm, 16.5 x 14.9 x 10.1
48
Appendix G Targeted Supplies Yield

Consumable Items
Toner : AIO
Mainframe automatically stops printing at 100 prints after toner
end message blinks.
Maintenance Kit : To be replaced every 90k prints

Includes the following materials:
(1) 1 x Fusing Unit (for the mainframe)
(2) 1 x Transfer Roller (for the Mainframe)
(3) 3 x Friction Pad (one for the mainframe and
others for optional Paper Feed Unit)
(4) 3 x Paper Feed Roller (one for the
mainframe and others for optional Paper
Feed Unit)
* The above items are all unique to the PMR26/N.
Target Supply Yield
Toner: Average 20K/ ctrg. (A4/5% coverage)
Starter AIO: 6K /ctrg. (A4/5% coverage)

(packed with Mainframe)
49
Appendix H Targeted Print Volume and Reliability
Monthly Print Volume Average: 4K

Max: 10K
Duty 100K / month
Estimated Unit Life 5 years or 600K prints whichever comes first
PM 90K (by user)

*PM parts are provided as a Maintenance Kit
MPBF (EM Cycle) 200K
MTTR Ave. 30 minutes (by service)
Please note that the above figures are design targets and will be confirmed only through
laboratory tests.
The actual yields and reliability may vary depending on the customers operating and
maintenance conditions and servicing.
50
Appendix I Multi Language Preparation
North American version

LCD Display O/I PCL Driver RPCS Driver PS Driver
English Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
German Yes No Yes Yes Yes
French Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Italian Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Dutch Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Swedish Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Norwegian Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Danish Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Spanish Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Finnish Yes No Yes Yes No
Portuguese Yes No Yes Yes No
Czech Yes No Yes Yes No
Polish Yes No Yes Yes No
Hungarian Yes No Yes Yes No
European version
LCD Display O/I PCL Driver RPCS Driver PS Driver
English Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
German Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
French Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Italian Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Dutch Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Swedish Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Norwegian Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Danish Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Spanish Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Finnish Yes Yes Yes Yes No
Portuguese Yes Yes Yes Yes No
Czech Yes Yes Yes Yes No
Polish Yes Yes Yes Yes No
Hungarian Yes Yes Yes Yes No
51
Appendix J Meter Click Counter

Model K-P supports the click charge business by means of a software counter. This software
counter can be recognised on the configuration sheet or on the operation panel.
Default: OFF (set to ON in SP mode)
The click is registered at the point of time when the paper passes through the fusing unit.
Counter clearance function is not supported
Max. count is 99999999 (8-digit decimal scale counter).
A3 or 11 x 17 can be changed to double count by SP mode.
Duplex print will be counted double.
The following items are not counted.

1: The blank back side page in duplex print.
2: The blank of the front cover/slip sheet.
3: Report sheet ex. configuration sheet
4: Printing in the Service Mode (Service Summary and Engine Maintenance Report).
5: The notification sheet auto print in an error occurrence (Error Report).
52
Appendix K Competitive Specifications
Note: First Print Speed: the figures are application and system dependent.
Ricoh HP HP
Kir-P3b/c LaserJet 4050 LaserJet 5000
Input Paper Capacity TOTAL: 1,350 TOTAL: 1,100 shts TOTAL: 1,100 shts
Std. Paper Tray 250 shts x 1 500 shts x 1 O 250 shts x 1 O
Std. Bypass Tray 100 shts 100 shts 100 shts
Envelop Feeder Std. & Opt. Std. & Opt. *** Std. ***
Input Paper Size
(Standard Tray) 11"x17"/A3-A5 (SEF) A4-A5 (LEF) O 11"x17"/A3-A5 (SEF) ***
Input Paper Size
(Optional Tray)
Print (Engine) Speed 26ppm/A4,LT (LEF) 17ppm/A4 (SEF) O 17ppm/LT (LEF) O
First Print Speed (A4)* 6.5 sec. 13 sec. O 13 sec. O
Duplex Printing Opt. Opt. *** Opt. ***
Printing Resolution 1200 dpi 1200 dpi *** 1200 dpi ***
Memory (Std. / Max. with 16MB / 80MB 8MB / 200MB *** 4MB / 100MB ***
Opt.)
HDD Opt. Opt. *** Opt. ***
1xBi-centronics 1xBi-centronics
Interface 1xBi-centronics
(IEEE1284), O (IEEE1284), O
(IEEE1284), 10Base-
1 x RS232C 1 x RS232C
T/100Base-TX
Ethernet Interface Opt. Opt. *** Opt. ***
HP PCL5e/XL, PS level3 HP PCL5e, HP PCL6, HP PCL5e, HP PCL6,
emulation, Ricoh new PS level2 emulation O PS level2 emulation O
Printer Language PDL
Utility Aficio Manager, PortNavi Web Jet Admin Web Jet Admin
Dimensions (W x D x H) 468x410x305(mm) 390x493x343(mm) 475x585x375(mm)
18.4x16.1x12.0 (inch) 15.3x19.4x13.5 (inch) O 18.7x23.0x14.8 (inch) O
Weight less than 17Kg/37.5 lb 16.4Kg / 36.2 lb *** 23Kg / 50.8 lb O
Duty 100K / month 65K / month O 65K / month O
Consumable Yield AIO: 15K AIO: 10K O AIO: 10K O
53
Version 1.11
Color Multifunctional
CCR060A CCR132 E710
Memory Matrix
WFW Home NPS

CCR060A/62A Product Information Guide
PRODUCT
INFORMATION GUIDE
CCR060A / CCR062A
Nashuatec CS525/531
Rex Rotary CS825/831
Gestetner CS225/231
Guernsey.
1
Executive Summary
Office Standard MFP - Colour and BW Solution

The CCR060A and the CCR062A are the replacement general office products for the
CCR060 and CCR062/68 Colour Solutions. When launching the CCR060 and the
CCR062/68, we re-positioned our colour copier range as Colour Solutions. The
CCR060A and the CCR062A are the first product range which we shall reposition as
Black and White and Colour capable Multi- functional products.
Product Overview
There are only 2 replacement models for the new range. The CCR060A replaces the
CCR060 and the CCR062A replaces the CCR062/68 models. The CCR062A has an
optional editing board which will facilitate logistics.
Major improvements from CCR060/62/68 are as below:
Resolution in true 600dpi for copying, printing and scanning.

CCR062A edit model is not planned. Area-editing function will be provided as
option.
Film Projector will be eliminated due to lack of marketability. (Current SPU4
cannot be used with model CCR060A/CCR062A due to difference of scan
resolution)
BW copy speed and BW/FC print speed is increased
Image rotation is new function
BW FAX option for model CCR062A
Comparison with CCR060/62/68
CCR060 Model CCR062/68 Model

CCR060A CCR062A
Copy Resolution 400dpi 600dpi 400dpi 600dpi
Scan Resolution 400dpi 600dpi 400dpi 600dpi
BW copy Speed 21cpm 25cpm 28cpm 31cpm
FC Print Speed 4ppm 6ppm 4ppm 6ppm
BW Print Speed 14ppm 25ppm 18ppm 31ppm
Image Rotation N/A Yes. N/A Yes.
Both in FC/BW Both in FC/BW
Area Editing N/A N/A Edit Model Option
BW FAX Option N/A N/A N/A Yes
Film Projector Unit Yes N/A Yes N/A
2
Product Positioning
For price conscious customers
Model CCR060A (FC:6cpm / BW:25cpm)

Affordable machine cost
Entry Model
Easy Operation
Good performance in BW/FC
Expandability to Printer
For customers who require productive features and expandability
Model CCR062A (FC:6cpm / BW 31cpm)

High-performance Colour MFP
Wide Touch Panel Display with GUI
Auto Duplex Capability
Area Editing Capability (with editing option)
Expandability to Printer and BW FAX
Model Numbers
As we are positioning the new CCR060A and CCR062A as multifunctional black
and white / colour MFPs we will take the mono print and copy speed as the basis for
the model numbering but still following the Colour Solution concept using CS.
Gestetner Nashuatec Rex-Rotary

CCR060A CS225 CS525 CS825
CCR062A CS231 CS531 CS831
Conclusion
The CCR060A and the CCR062A are the beginning of the shift from a colour digital
product range to a black and white / colour digital product range. This shift will be
continued with the Model J printer based hybrid product. As we have already invested
a lot in developing the Colour Solutions concept and greatly increased our unit sales
and connectivity ratio using this theme we shall continue using the Colour Solutions
concept to launch the CCR060A and the CCR062A. However, the CCR060A and the
CCR062A will be the agent to change the focus to the black and white benefits of a
Colour Solution.
3
Product Overview
Product Image
Model CCR060A Image

Mainframe
Configuration: Mainframe / Platen Cover / 3 Tray Paper Bank / Interface Unit
(Behind)
Platen Cover (Option): Controller Interface

Non-Folding type Unit (NEW/Option):
platen cover Necessary to install
print controller
500 sheet x 1 Paper

Tray 3 Tray Paper Bank
Standard with model Unit: (Option)
CCR060A mainframe 500 sheet x 3
* Copy (output) Tray is a standard accessory of the mainframe (even though it is

missing in above illustration)
Operation Panel (with Guidance Display for Printer Operation)
Guidance Display for Printer Option
4
Model CCR062A Image
Mainframe
Configuration: Mainframe / Platen Cover / 3 Tray Paper Bank / Interface Unit

(Behind)
Platen Cover (Option) Controller Interface

Non-Folding type platen Unit (NEW/Option)
cover Required to upgrade
model CCR062A with
printer and/or FAX
*New Front Cover option
Auto Duplex Unit

Standard equipment 3 Tray Paper Bank
for model CCR062A Unit : (Option)
mainframe 500sheet x 3
* Smoother curve line from LCD to front cover.

** Copy (output) Tray is a standard accessory of the mainframe (even though it is
missing in above illustration)
Operation Panel (with Operation Panel for FAX)
Guidance Display for Printer attached here Wide Colour LCD Display (26.42 cm)
Fax Operation Keys Copy / FAX Function Switch

(Accessory of fax option)
Full Colour touch panel of model CCR062A simultaneously serves as copy operation
panel, colour display editor (with editing option) and fax operation panel (with
optional FAX controller).
5
Mainframe Specification
General Features
Originals: Sheet / Book / Object

Original Size: Max. 11 x 17 / A3
Scan Resolution: 600dpi
Copy/Print Resolution: 600dpi
Gradation: 256 gradations
Copy Size: Max.: 11 x 17 /A3 full bleed on 12 x 18
(Max. Image area: 297 x 432mm)
Min.: 5 x 8 / A6 SEF
Paper Size: Paper Tray Feed:
Imperial: 11 x 17(DLT), 8 x 14(LG),
8 x 13(F4), 8 x 13(F), 8 x 11(LT)
LEF/SEF, 5 x 8 (HLT) SEF,
Metric: A3, B4, A4 LEF/SEF, B5 LEF/SEF, A5
SEF
Bypass Tray Feed: Max. 305mm x 457mm
Min. A6 SEF / 100x148mm
First Copy Speed (LT / A4 LEF):
Normal Mode: FC: 22.4 sec. / BW: 8 sec.
OHP / Thick Paper Mode: FC: 35 sec./ BW: 23 sec.
Copy Speed (LT / A4 LEF)
Model CCR060A: Normal Mode: FC: 6cpm / BW: 25cpm
OHP / Thick Paper Mode: FC: 3cpm/ BW: 5cpm
ADF 1 to 1 Speed: FC: 4cpm / BW: 25cpm
Model CCR062A: Normal Mode: FC: 6cpm / BW: 31cpm
OHP / Thick Paper Mode: FC: 3cpm/ BW: 5cpm
ADF 1 to 1 Speed: FC: 4cpm / BW:28cpm
Warm-up Time: approx. 4.5 min.
Multiple Copying
Simplex: Model CCR060A: Up to 99copies
Model CCR062A: Up to 100copies
Auto Duplex (Model CCR062A): Single colour copy: Up to 30copies (DLT/A3)
Up to 50copies (Other
size)
Full Colour copy: Up to 20copies
Paper Capacity: (Stand Alone)
Model CCR060A: 500sht. + 50sht from Bypass Tray (with 100g/m
paper)
Model CCR062A: 50sht. from Bypass Tray (with 100g/m paper)
Max. Paper Capacity: (with PS390 / 3 tray paper bank)
Model CCR060A: 2,050shts.
Model CCR062A: 1,550shts.
Copy Paper Weight: Normal Tray: 17 - 28lbs / 64 - 105g/m
Bypass Tray: 14 - 43lbs / 52 - 160g/m
6
Repro duction Ratio:

Inch Version: 7 Reductions, 5 enlargements plus 2
Programmable Ratios from 25% to 400%
400, 200, 155, 129, 121, 100, 93, 85, 78, 73, 65,
50, 25
mm Version: 7 Reductions, 5 enlargements plus 2
Programmable Ratios from 25% to 400%
400, 200, 141, 122, 115, 100, 93, 82, 75, 71, 65,
50, 25
Zoom: From 25% to 400% in 1% Steps
Non Reproduction Area: Leading Edge: Less than 0.2 0.08 (5mm
2mm )
Side: Less than 0.08 0.08 (2mm
2mm)
Trailing Edge: Less than 0.08 + 0.08 / - 0.06
(2mm + 2mm / -1.5mm)
Three side full bleed: Yes
Duplex Copy:
Model CCR060A: Manual
Model CCR062A: Auto / Manual
Duplex Unit: (Model CCR062A) Paper Weight: 17-28lbs / 64-105g/m
Paper Size: 11 x 17 (DLT), 8 x 14
(LG), 8 x 13 (F), 8 x 11 (LT) LEF/SEF,
5 x 8 (HLT) LEF, A3, B4, A4 LEF/SEF,
B5 LEF/SEF, A5 LEF
Tray Capacity:1C: 30shts (11 x 17/A3) /
50shts (Other size) 2C, 3C, FC: 20shts
Dimension (W x D x H):
Model CCR060A: 24.4 x 26.7 x 24.4 / 620 x 680 x 620mm
Model CCR062A: 24.4 x 29.3 x 24.4 / 620 x 744 x 620mm
Weight:
Model CCR060A: 231lbs / 109 kg (EU/Asia model)
Model CCR062A: 237lbs / 112 kg (EU/Asia model)
Power Source: US Model: 120V 12A, 60Hz
Euro and Asia Model: 220 - 240V 8A,
50/60Hz
Taiwan Model (CCR060A only): 110V 12A,
60Hz
Max. Power Consumption: Less than 1.5KVA
Operation Panel:
Model CCR060A: Hard Key Type
Model CCR062A: 10.4 Full Colour LCD
7
Copy Speed Matrix
Model CCR060A
Copy Mode Bk copy, FC Copy, 1C Copy: 1C Copy: R
3C Copy B or G 2C Copy:
Bk+Y Bk+M
Bk+C
Normal Paper: LT/A4 LEF: 25cpm 6cpm 9cpm 7cpm
LT/A4 SEF: 18cpm 3cpm 4.5cpm 4.5cpm
LG/B4/F4: 14cpm 3cpm 4.5cpm 4.5cpm
DLT / A3: 13cpm 3cpm 4.5cpm 3.5cpm
12 x 18: 12cpm 3cpm 4.5cpm 3.5cpm
OHP/Thick Paper LT/A4 LEF: 5cpm 3cpm 4cpm 3.5cpm
LT/A4 SEF: 3.5cpm 1.5cpm 2.5cpm 2.5cpm
LG/B4/F4 2.5cpm 1.5cpm 2cpm 2cpm
DLT / A3: 2.5cpm 1.5cpm 2cpm 1.5cpm
12x18 2.5cpm 1.5cpm 2cpm 1.5cpm
ADF 1 to 1 LT/A4 LEF: 25cpm 4cpm - -
Model CCR062A
Copy Mode Bk copy, FC Copy, 1C Copy: 1C Copy: R
3C Copy B or G 2C Copy:
Bk+Y Bk+M
Bk+C
Normal Paper LT/A4 LEF: 31cpm 6cpm 9cpm 7cpm
LT/A4 SEF: 21cpm 3cpm 4.5cpm 4.5cpm
LG/B4/F4 17cpm 3cpm 4.5cpm 4.5cpm
DLT / A3: 15cpm 3cpm 4.5cpm 3.5cpm
12x18: 14cpm 3cpm 4.5cpm 3.5cpm
OHP/Thick Paper LT/A4 LEF: 5cpm 3cpm 4cpm 3.5cpm
LT/A4 SEF: 3.5cpm 1.5cpm 2.5cpm 2.5cpm
LG/B4/F4 2.5cpm 1.5cpm 2cpm 2cpm
DLT / A3: 2.5cpm 1.5cpm 2cpm 1.5cpm
12x18 2.5cpm 1.5cpm 2cpm 1.5cpm
ADF 1 to 1 LT/A4 LEF: 28cpm 4cpm - -
1st Copy Time (Model CCR060A/CCR062A)

Copy Mode Bk copy, FC Copy, 1C Copy: 1C Copy: 1C Copy: R
3C Copy Blue Green 2C Copy:
Bk+Y Bk+M
Bk+C
Normal Paper LT/A4 LEF: 8sec. 22.4sec. 19sec. 16sec. 16sec.
DLT/A3 10sec. 24sec. 21sec. 17sec. 21sec.
OHP/Thick Paper LT/A4 23sec. 35sec. 30sec. 27sec. 27sec.
LEF:
DLT/A3: 32sec. 43sec. 39sec. 35sec. 39sec.
8
Special Feature
Copy Mode: Auto Text and Photo Separation Mode / Photo Mode /
Text Mode / Special Original Mode: Map Mode,
Highlight Pen Mode, Inkjet Original Mode (3 types of
IJ printers can be selected).
Photo Type Selection: In Auto Text and Photo Separation Mode and Photo
Mode, the following 3 photo types can be selected:
-Press Print Mode
-Glossy Photo Mode
-2nd Generatio n Mode
Paper Selection: Auto Paper Selection (APS): Yes.
Bypass Tray:
Paper Type: - Normal Paper Mode
- Thick Paper Mode
- OHP Transparency Mode
Manual Duplex: - Duplex Copy Backside Mode
Paper Size: - Normal Size
- Custom Size
Colour Mode: Auto Colour Selection (ACS) / Full Colour / Black and
White / Single Colour / Twin Colour
Single Colour:
Model CCR060A 48 colours + BK
*Preset Colour 12 colours (x 4 levels density
selection)
User Colour Memory N/A
Scan Colo ur N/A
Model CCR062A 108 colours + BK
*Preset Colour 12 colours (x 4 levels density
selection)
User Colour Memory 15 colours (x 4 levels density
selection)
Scan Colour N/A
Twin Colour: BK and Other colours
Red and Black
* Preset colour pallet: Red, Green, Blue, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Yellow
Green, Orange, Beige, Pink, Purple and Marine Blue
Density Selection: ADS: Yes
Manual Density Selection: 9 levels
Image Rotation Yes (Default On)
Custom Size Original: Yes
Energy Saver Mode: 3 levels (Default = level 1)
Pause / Interrupt: Yes
(Previous Copying Mode) Recall: No
Job Program: Yes (5 Programs)
Reduce / Enlarge: Auto Magnification Selection: Yes
Size Magnification: No
Directional Magnification: Yes
Directional Size Magnification: Yes
Poster Mode: No
9
Shift / Erase / Book Copy: Centering: Yes

Cornering: Yes (CCR062A only)
Margin Adjustment: Yes (0-20mm / 1mm step)
Erase Center: No
Erase Border: No
Erase Center / Border: No
Book Copy: Yes
Series Copy: Yes (with ADF)
Combine 2 originals: Yes (with ADF)
OHP Slip Sheet: Yes (Blank paper only)
Cover Sheet: Yes
User Code: Yes (Max. 50 codes)
Auto Tray Switching: Yes
Image / Colour Adjustment: Sharp / Soft: Yes
Contrast: Yes
Background Density Control: Yes
Pastel Image: Yes
UCR Adjustment: Yes
Colour Separation Adjust: Yes
Auto Text and Photo Separation Adjustment: Yes
Colour Balance Adjustment: Yes
Colour Balance Memory: Yes
Colour Balance Sample: No
ACC Yes
Full Image Copy: No
Duplex Copy (Model CCR062A Only): 1 sided originals to 2 sided copies
2 sided originals to 2 sided copies
Book original to 2 sided copies
Multiple book originals to 2 sided copies
Colour Creation:
Model CCR060A: Colour Conversion, Colour Erase
Model CCR062A: Colour Conversion, Colour Erase, Colour
Background
Image Creation: Mirror / Positive Negative
Scan Colour: No
Counterfeit Prevention: Bill recognition function: Yes.
Invisible Marking Function: Yes.
Tray Assignment: (Priority Tray Registration)
Full Colour Copy Mode: Max. 3 trays
Fax (CCR062A Only): Yes
Scan Once Copy Many Yes (Mono-colour copy mode in BW, Cyan,
Magenta and Yellow/ One page of mono-colour
image can be stored at once)
10
Area Editing (Model CCR062A with Edit Option)
Area Shape: Rectangle / Right Angle Polygon / Polygon / Closed

Loop / Multi Closed Loop / Line
Input Area: Max. 500 points.
Max. No. of Areas: Max 500 areas (by closed loop)
Max. Group: 20 groups
Area Edit: Colour Conversion, Colour Erase, Colour Background,
Paint, Positive / Negative, Save Area, Delete Area,
Shift, Image Adjustment
Colour Pallet: 108 colours + BK + White
FAX Features (Model CCR062A with Fax controller)
General Features
Circuit: PSTN, PBX, ISDN (Option)

Compatibility: ITU-T (CCITT) G3, G4 (Option)
Resolution: G3: Standard Mode: 8 x 3.85 L/mm, 200 x 100 dpi
Detail Mode: 8 x 7.7 L/mm, 200 x 200 dpi
Fine / Superfine Mode (Option): 8 x 15.4 mm,
16 x 15.4 L/mm 400 x 400 dpi (Superfine)
G4 (Option): Standard Mode: 200 x 100dpi
Detail Mode: 200 x 200dpi
Superfine Mode (Option): 400 x 400dpi
Compression: MH, MR, MMR, SSC, JBIG (option)
Scanning Speed (A4/LT SEF): Standard Mode: 0.7 secs
Detail Mode: 0.7 secs
Super Fine Mode (Option): 2.6 secs
Continuous Scanning Speed (A4/LT SEF/Memory TX/ITU-T #1chart/Stamp
Off): Standard Mode: 14.5 ppm
Detail Mode: 14.5 ppm
Super Fine Mode (Option): 10.0 ppm
Modem Speed: G3: 33.6K / 31.2K / 28.8K / 26.4K / 24K / 21.66K /
19.2K / 16.8K / 14.4K / 12K / 9.6K / 7.2K / 4.8K / 2.4K
bps
G4 (option): US model: 56K bps / EU model: 64K bps
Max Transmission Speed: G3: 3.0sec. (ITUT #1 chart SEF, TTI Off, Memory
Transmission)
G4: 3.0sec. (ITUT #1 chart SEF, TTI Off, Memory
Transmission)
Max. Original Size: 297 x 432 mm / 11 x 17
Paper Size: Imperial version: 11 x 17 (DLT), 81 /2 x 14
(LG), 8 x 13 (F4), 8 x 13 (F), 81 /2 x 11 (LT)
LEF/SEF, 51 /2 x 81 /2 (HLT) SEF
Metric version: A3, B4, A4 LEF/SEF, B5
LEF/SEF, A5 SEF
SAF Memory: 2MB (+4MB SAF Memory Option, +80MB HDD
Option)
Page Memory: 2MB (+ 2MB PMU Option)
11
Memory Backup: One Hour

Stamp: Option
TTI/RTI: Yes
CSI: Yes
Quick Dial: 56 numbers
Speed Dial: Standard: 100 numbers
Up to 1,000 numbers with optional 4MB SAF memory
Group Dial: Standard: Up to 9 groups.
Up to 30 groups with optional 4MB SAF memory
User Program: Yes
Redial: Yes
AI Short Program: Yes
Direct FAX Number Entry: Yes
Dual Access: Yes
Auto Document: 6 documents, up to 18 documents with optional 4MB
SAF memory
Telephone Directly: Yes
Page Count: Yes
Auto Reduction: Yes
Wild Cards: Yes
Summer Time: Yes
(Day light saving time)
ID Code Programming: Yes (Four Digits)
User Function Key: Yes (Five Keys)
Energy Saver: Yes
Remaining Memory Indication: Yes
Time Indicator: No
Clock Adjustment: Yes
User Parameter Setting: Yes
Dry Line: Yes
Memory File Transfer: Yes
Transmission Features
Immediate Transmission: Yes

Memory Transmission: Yes
Serial Broadcasting: Yes (Max. 200 numbers)
Send Later: Yes
Error Correction Mode: Yes
Page Transmission: Yes
Economy Transmission: Yes
Forwarding: Option
Batch Transmission: Yes
Parallel Memory Transmission: Yes (Default = OFF)
Image Rotation: Yes
Book FAX: Yes
Transmission Deadline: Yes (Default = OFF)
Closed Network (Transmission): Yes
Confidential Transmission with ID: Yes
Transfer Request: Yes
12
Transfer Transmission: Yes

Multi-step Transfer: Option
Polling Transmission: Yes
Double sided Transmission: Option (with ARDF)
Transmission Reserve: Yes
Reception Features
Automatic Reception: Yes

Manual Reception: Yes
Substitute Reception: Yes
Authorised Reception: 30 patterns. Upgrade to 50 with 4MB SAF Memory
Multi Copy: (1 to 10 sets with sorting)
Option (with 4MB SAF Memory)
Reverse Order Printing: Yes
Memory Lock: Yes
Confidential Reception: Yes (with 4MB SAF Memory)
Special Reception Numbers:30 numbers. Upgrade to 50 with 4MB SAF memory
Closed Network: Yes
Polling Reception: Yes (Max. 200 senders)
Poll Later: Yes (Max. 200 senders)
Polling from Memory: Yes
Multi-polling Reception: Yes
Continuous Polling: Yes
Reception Time Printing: Yes
Center Mark: Yes
Checkered Mark: Yes
2 in 1 (Two in one) Yes
Duplex Reception: Option (with 4MB SAF Memory)
Telephone Features
Telephone Connection: Yes

Monitor Speaker: Yes
On Hook Dial: Yes
Tone Transmission: Yes
Pause: Yes
Pulse: Yes
Pulse / Tone Selection: Yes
Chain Dialing: Yes
Busy Tone Detection: Yes
13
Memory Features Matrix
Standard Memory: 2MB

FAX Feature Expander Type 450: 4MB SAF Memory
FAX Feature Expander Type 4000: 80MB HDD
2MB 2MB + 4MB 2MB + 4MB +

80MB HDD
Memory Capacity (MB) 2MB 6MB 80MB HDD
Memory Capacity (*page) 160 pages 480 pages 3,000 pages
User Code 20 50 50
Group Dial 9 30 30
Auto-Document 6 18 18
Speed Dial 100 1,000 1,000
Memory File 200 1,000 1,000
Number of senders when N/A 50 50
forwarding
Authorised reception settings 30 50 50
Special reception numbers 30 50 50
* ITU-T No.1 Chart
14
Option Specification
DF64 / ARDF
Original Size: Imperial: 11x17(DLT), 8x14(LG), 8x11(LT),

5x 8(HLT)
Metric: A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, B6
Original Weight: SADF / ADF mode: 11lbs - 34lbs (40 - 128g/m)
Auto reverse mode: 14lbs - 28lbs (52 - 105g/m)
Combine originals mode: 14lbs - 34lbs (52 - 128g/m)
Stack Capacity: 50 shts. with 80 g/m paper or less than 6mm
Power Consumption: DC24V from copier
Dimensions (W x D x H): 24.0x 20.0x 5.1(610 x 507 x 130mm)
Weight: 23.1lbs / 10.5kg
ST10 / Ten Bin Sorter Stapler
Number of bins: 10 bins + Proof Tray (Moving type)

*Paper Size: Proof tray: Max.: 11x17(DLT) / A3
Min.: 5x 8(HLT)SEF / A6 SEF
Sort / Stack: Max.: 11x17(DLT) /A3
Min.: 5 x 8 (HLT)SEF / A5 SEF
Paper Weight: 14 - 43lbs (52-160g/m)
Bin Capacity: Proof Tray: All size:
100shts with 80g/m paper
Sort: 8 x11( LT) / A4 or smaller size:
30 shts with 80g/m paper
8 x14(LG)- 11x17(DLT) / B4-A3:
25 shts. with 80g/m paper
Stack: 8 x11(LT) / A4 or smaller size:
8 x14(LG)- 11x17(DLT) / B4-A3:
Stapling Capacity: Number of pages:
2-20 shts. with 20lbs paper (80g/m)
Paper Size: Max.: 11 x 17(DLT) / A3
Min.: 8 x 11(LT) / B5
Time: Less than 3.0 sec. / bin
Position: One position (horizontal)
Replenishment:
Cartridge change (2000 pieces/cartridge)
Paper Weight: 14-21lbs (52-80 g/m)
Power Source: DC24V from copier
Dimension (W x D x H): 15x21.6x17.5(381 x 548 x 443mm)
Weight: 29.4lbs (13.3kg)
* ST10 cannot accept 12x18 paper. A3 full bleed copy / print is impossible when
ST10 is attached.
15
ST32 / Twenty Bin Sorter Stapler
Number of bins: 20 bins + Proof Tray (Moving type)

Paper Size: Proof tray:
Max: 12x18 (A3 wide: 305mm x 457mm)
Min.: 5 x8 (HLT) SEF / A6 SEF
Sort / Stack:
Max: 12x18 (A3 wide: 305mm x 457mm)
Min: 5 x8 (HLT) / A5 SEF
Bin Capacity: Proof Tray: All size:
100shts with 80g/m paper
Sort: 8 x11/ A4 or smaller size:
8 x14 - 12x18/ B4-A3wide:
Stack: 8 x11 / A4 or smaller size:
8 x14-12x18/ B4-A3wide:
Stapling Capacity: Number of pages:
2-30 shts. (80g/m) or less than 3mm
Paper Size: Max.: 11 x 17(DLT) / A3,
Min.: 8 x 11(LT) / B5
Time: Less than 3.0 sec. / bin
Position: One position (Change horizontal or 35
by manual)
Replenishment: Cartridge change (2000
pieces/cartridge)
Power Source: DC24V from copier
Dimension (W x D x H): 16.9x22.4x26.8(430 x 570 x 680mm)
Weight: 48.4lbs (22kg)
CS160 / Three Bin Unit
Number of bins: 3 bins + Auto reverse tray

Face-Down Print: Yes. (Only for printing)
Paper Size: Max: 12 x 18 (A3 wide: 305mm x 457mm)
Min: 5 x 8 (HLT) SEF /A6 SEF
Paper Weight: 1st tray: 14 - 42lbs (52-160g/m)
2nd and 3rd tray: 14 - 28lbs (52-105g/m)
Face-down Printing: 17 - 28lbs (64-105g/m)
Bin Capacity: 1st tray: 500 shts. with 8 x11(LT) /A4 and
80g/m paper
250 shts. with 11x17(DLT)/A3 and
80g/m paper
2nd and 3rd tray: 250 shts. with 8 x11(LT)/A4 and
80g/m paper
16
125 shts. with 11x17(DLT)/A3 and

80g/m paper
Power Source: DC24V, 5V from copier
Weight: 30.8lbs(14kg)
PS390 / Three Tray Paper Bank
Number of trays: 500 shts. tray x 3 (with 100g/m paper)

Paper Size: Imperial:11 x 17(DLT), 8 x14(LG), 8
x13(F4), 8x13(F), 8 x11(LT) LEF/SEF, 5
x8 (HLT) SEF
Metric: A3, B4, A4 SEF/LEF, B5 SEF/LEF, A5 SEF
Paper weight: 17-28lbs (64-105g/m)
Weight: 81.4lbs (37kg)
PS380 / Two Tray Paper Bank
Number of trays: 500 shts. tray x 2 (with 100g/m paper)

Paper Size: Imperial: 11 x 17(DLT), 8 x14(LG), 8
x13(F4), 8x13(F), 8 x11(LT) LEF/SEF, 5
x8 (HLT) SEF
Metric: A3, B4, A4 SEF/LEF, B5 SEF/LEF, A5 SEF
Paper weight: 17-28lbs (64-105g/m)
Weight: 70.4lbs (32 kg)
17
Supply Yield and Supply Interchangeability
Target Supply Yield
Toner
Cartridge Capacity (4 colours): 220g / CTRG
Target Yield / CTRG:
With 5% chart with 6% chart with 8.75% chart

Black 9.000 outputs 7.500 outputs 5.142 outputs
Cyan / Magenta / Yellow 8.000 outputs 6,666 outputs 4.571 outputs
Developer
Capacity (4 colours): 380g / Bag

Target Yield:
Black: 60,000 development
Cyan/Magenta/Yellow: 45,000 development
Supply Interchangeability
CCR060A/062A CCR060/62/68 CCR100/106 CCR031/32/36

Black Toner for CCR060/62/68 OK OK NG NG
Cyan Toner for CCR060/62/68 OK OK NG NG
Magenta Toner for CCR060/62/68 OK OK NG NG
Yellow Toner for CCR060/62/68 OK OK NG NG
Black Developer for CCR060/62/68 OK OK NG NG
Cyan Developer for CCR060/62/68 OK OK NG NG
Magenta Developer for CCR060/62/68 OK OK NG NG
Yellow Developer for CCR060/62/68 OK OK NG NG
OK: Can be used for this machine
NG: Cannot be used for this machine
18
Environmental Specification
Sound level
Stand-by:
Mainframe: 50dB(A) or less
Full system: 54dB(A) or less
Operating:
Mainframe: 68dB(A) or less
Ozone emission level
Average: 0.02PPM or less
Dust level
0.1mg/m or less
Environmental standard
Model Type Standard

US Model Safety CSA C22.2 No.950, UL1950
Standard
Laser 21 CFR Subchapter J Part 1040
EMI FCC Part 15 Subpart B, IC class B(ICES-003 CSA C108,
8-M1983)
Europe Model Safety TUV (IEC950)
Standard
Laser EN60825-1+All:1996
EMI VDE0871 class B
CE Mark EN60950: 1992+A1+A2+A3+A4+All:1997, EN60825,
EN55022 class B, EN61000-3-2,
EN61000-3-3, EN55024
Asia/Pacific Model - AS/NZS3548 class B, TUV
Taiwan Model - CNS13438 (Otsu-rui)
19
Supplementary Information
Languages
Firmware Language List for Model CCR060A / CCR062A

Languages Model CCR060A Model CCR062A CCR062A Fax Option
1 English Yes Yes Yes
2 French Yes Yes Yes
3 German Yes Yes Yes
4 Italian Yes Yes Yes
5 Spanish Yes Yes Yes
6 Dutch Yes Yes Yes
7 Danish Yes Yes Yes
8 Swedish Yes Yes Yes
9 Portuguese Yes Yes Yes
10 Norwegian Yes Yes Yes
11 Czech Yes Yes Yes
12 Polish Yes Yes Yes
13 Taiwan Chinese Yes No No
14 Brazilian Yes No No
Portuguese
15 Russian Yes No No
Release schedule:
Languages Firmware for Release Date
1st Release English Model CCR060A End of August
French Model CCR062A (Mass-production)
German CCR062A Fax
Italian
Spanish
2nd Release Dutch Model CCR060A End of October
Danish Model CCR062A
Swedish CCR062A Fax
Portuguese
Norwegian
Czech
Polish
Brazilian
Portuguese
Russian
Taiwan Chinese
20
Counter Specification
Counter style (Development Count or Copy Count )
Style Counter Remarks

*Development Count Count number of development (scan) Same as current NRG colour copiers
Copy Count Count number of copied/printed pages Same as Canon colour copier
*Default Counter Style is Deve lopment Count
Development count
BK counter Colour counter
Full colour copy 1 click 3 click
BW copy 1 click
1C copy 1 click
2C copy 2 click
3C copy 3 click
Full colour print 1 click 3 click
BW print 1 click
1C print (CMYK format)* 1 click 3 click
FAX (Black Toner) 1 click
FAX (Cyan / Magenta Toner) 1 click
Copy count
Colour Copy BW Copy Colour Print BW Print Colour Total BW Total
BW copy 1 click 1 click
1C copy 1 click 1 click
BW print 1 click 1 click
1C print 1 click 1 click
FAX (Black Toner) 1 click 1 click
FAX (Colour Toner) 1 click 1 click
Special Cases
The counter doesnt click in the cases below:

Situation Remarks
OHP Slip Sheet Copying / Printing OHP slip sheet
Cover Sheet Mode Copying / Printing blank cover sheet
SP Mode Copying from SP mode TEST COPY is printed on page so
customers are not charged for copies made
by service engineers.
ACC Printing ACC test pattern
21
Market Situation
US and European Colour MFP Placement

We cannot expect high
( K Units ) growth in Production and
140 Specialised Business
segment, because the
120
market is saturated and
100 many users have already
acquired colour output
80
devices. This market is
60 made up of replacement
machines
40
20 The high growth in the

0 colour MFP market will
1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 occur in the General
General Office Specialized Production
Office segment.
Total unit : Dataquest[US], Infosource[EU]
We have previously talked about convergence of the copier and printer market. This
market trend led to the launch of Colour Solutions whereby we have combined the
functions of printing and copying (and scanning) into one device.
The convergence of the copier and printer colour market has followed closely behind
the convergence of the copier and printer mono market which drove the massive
growth of connected digital BW MFPs.
Many vendors in both the traditional copier and printer market are positioning their
general office colour devices as BW devices with colour capability. As copier vendors
begin to develop their own print controllers (e.g Xerox with the Document Centre
Color 50) they are positioning their colour machines predominantly as BW digital
devices. Furthermore, by positioning colour devices with a low black cost per page,
the customer is persuaded of the benefits of having dual capability in one device.
It is in the general office that we shall see a massive growth in colour capable devices
as customers replace their analogue or digital devices with black and white / colour
capable digital MFPs with a BW digital cost-per-page.
22
Product Range Plan / Positioning

Model CCR060A / CCR062A are replacement products for the current CCR060 and
CCR062/68 models. Both models are general office BW / Colour devices.
Colour Solutions Launch Plans 2000

CCR106 CCR132
Edit 10 cpm 13 cpm
CCR100
Basic 10 cpm
CCR068 CCR062A
6 cpm 6 cpm
CCR062
6 cpm
CCR060 CCR060A
6 cpm 6 cpm
2000 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 2001 Q1
However, it is important to consider the positioning of the CCR060A and CCR062A

as BW MFP solutions against our current range.
p Printer
s Scanning
75 f Fax/PC fax
70 t p t Tandem
6565 t p
55 t 55 t p
55 p
4545 45 p
f p s s
35/s
35/s
35 f
27 f
25 p s
22
18 p
15 15 p
1998 1999 2000 2001
As the BW print and copy speeds of the CCR060A and CCR062A are 25 ppm and 31
ppm respectively the CCR060A and CCR062A will compete directly with the
DMR22/27 and beneath the DMR35/45 series. At present we have no replacement
BW MFPs for the Russian-C series. The CCR060A and the CCR062A represent the
start of the shift from a separate colour and BW digital product range to combined
black and white and colour capable products.
23

Target Market
Segmentation
Number of users Number of Employees Target Market of Model CCR060A /

who share the machine CCR062A
Centralized
L2/L1/M2 Number of Employees:
More than 100
More than 100
S2 - M1 (5 - 99)
Division
50-100
M1 Number of Users:
30-99 Small Work - Work Group (3-30)
Work Group
20-30
Target of I-2/L2 Business Type:
Small Work Group
1. General Office
S2
3-10 2. Small production office and
5-29
specialised business office with low
Business Personal S1
1-4 volume requirements
Target Market
User Profile
Number of Employees: S2 - M1 (5-99)

Number of users : Small Work Group - Work Group (3-30)
Business Type: 1) General Office
2) Small production office and specialised
business office with low volume requirements
Typical Applications: Presentation Materials, Catalogue, Reports, DM,
Greeting Card etc.
Colour Original: Inkjet Printed Document, Catalogue, Map, Photo
etc.
Computer: IBM PC or Compatible (Networked)
Application Software: MS Office, Lotus Smartsuite
Controller Attachment Ratio:
Printer Controller: 80 %
FAX Controller: 25% (of CCR062A)
Target Model:
Colour Copier Azalea, Lily, X5750, MajestiK, CLC7/800

BW copier 20-31cpm analogue / digital BW copier
*FAX upgraded BW MFP could be a
replacement target of model CCR062A. .
24
Target Market by Copy Volume
Model CCR060A Model CCR062A

ACV (outputs) 3,000 outputs 5,000 output
ACV (developments) 7,500 dev. 12,500 dev.
Max. CV (outputs) 12,000 outputs 12,000 outputs
Max. CV (development) 30,000 dev. 30,000 dev.
Color Ratio 50% 50%
25
Key Selling Points

BW / Colour Multi-Functional Product
Expandability
With installation of the optional controller unit, model CCR060A / CCR062A serves
as a high performance colour / BW printer, colour / BW scanner, and FAX.
Function Matrix
FC/ BW Printer FC/ BW Scanner FAX
Model CCR060A O O / *X X
Model CCR062A O O / *X O
* Not supported in RICOH made printer controller
Please see Print Controllers product information for details of printer functions.
FAX Option
With the optional FAX unit, Model CCR062A can be upgraded to a high performance
FAX as well giving the machine true multifunctionality. Since no competing colour
model has a fax option, this will be a strong selling point. CCR062A is the only
colour copier in the market that can replace BW MFP with fax capability.
Furthermore, this fax option allows both black and single colour output. Please note
that this fax option is not a full colour fax solution.
Superior performance FAX capability
Super G3
Model CCR062A FAX is equipped with 33.6K bps. modem. Transmission of A4
paper takes just 3 seconds when sending to a super G3 FAX.
ISDN G4 (Option)
The ISDN option ensures fast and clear digital transmission. Three-second
transmission is possible in 200 x 200dpi mode.
JBIG
The 400dpi option, type 450 helps to send a clear image faster with JBIG
compression. It allows you to send documents with photos or small text faster
especially in detail mode (200x200dpi) or super fine mode (400 x 400dpi).
AI Protocol
Even when sending to a 14.4Kbps fax, you can still achieve 6-seconds transmission
speed regardless of the manufacturer. Moreover, if the other machine is a RICOH
manufactured fax, the AI protocol can further save time and money.
Parallel Memory Transmission
A conventional fax machine does not start initiating contact with the receiving
terminal until all of the documents are scanned and stored in the memory. The FAX
option for model CCR062A initiates contact with the receiving terminal while the
documents are being scanned. If the receiving terminal is busy, the fax unit
automatically switches from parallel memory transmission to regular memory
transmission.
26
Mono-Colour Print and Toner Switch

To identify a fax message easily, you can select the print colour for fax from black,
cyan and magenta. Even if the selected toner runs short, the machine can switch print
colour automatically to a second selected toner. You can register the fax print colour
in 1 to 3 slots.
Mono- Colour Print
Print You can easily find fax messages in

y
Cop y Print a stack of output.
FAX
Cop y Print FAX
Cop FAX
You can select a 2nd print
colour for fax output.
For customers who dont like
Toner Switch to use colour toner for FAX
output, this function can be
FAX FAX FAX disabled.
FAX FAX FAX In this case, the fax messages
FAX FAX FAX
are kept in memory and
printed immediately after
nd
2 toner not selected. new toner bottle is set.
Page images are kept in memory
27
High Image Quality
True 600dpi / 8bit both in Copying and Printing
Model CCR060A/CCR062A resolution is true 600dpi/8bit both in copying and

printing. This realises smooth gradation and more precise reproduction quality.
CCR060/62/68: 400dpi / 8bit Model CCR060A/CCR062A: 600dpi / 8bit
Colour Depth = 8 bit:

Capable to etch 28 = 256 levels
of gradations per dot.
Competitive Comparison: Copy Resolution

Model Copy Resolution Color Depth
CCR060A / CCR062A 600dpi 8bit
CCR060/62/68 400dpi 8bit
Canon CP680 (HP8550) 600dpi 2 or 4bit (not clear)
XEROX X575x (Acolor62x) 400dpi 8bit
Canon CLC 7/8/900 400dpi 8bit
MINOLTA CF910 400dpi 8bit
28
600dpi Scanner: 10bit input
Model CCR060A/CCR062A scans originals in 600dpi / 10 bit. After image

adjustment, original data is converted into 600 dpi 8 bit data and then transported to
IPU. The reproduction quality of halftone and gradation is significantly improved by
this scanner.
600dpi/10bit input and 600dpi/8bit Output (image illustration)
Mechanical noise exists in scanned data.

The scanned data is converted into 8bit data
and mechanical noise will be removed.
10bit data Noise Noise
8bit data
Can get clear and precise 600dpi/8bit data by
extracting from 10bit data.
High Productivity
Copy Speed
Model CCR060A/CCR062A offer a competitive copy speed both in FC and BW.

Even though the copy resolution has been raised from 400dpi to 600dpi,
CCR060A/CCR062A offer even faster BW copy speed than CCR060/62/68. FC copy
speed remains at 6cpm.
Competitors Comparison: FC/BW Copy Speed (A4/LT LEF)
BW Copy Speed FC Copy Speed Copy Resolution

Model CCR060A 25cpm 6cpm 600dpi
Model CCR062A 31cpm 6cpm 600dpi
CCR060 21cpm 6cpm 400dpi
CCR062/68 28cpm 6cpm 400dpi
Azalea 21cpm 3cpm 400dpi
XEROX X5750 24cpm 6cpm 400dpi
Canon CP680 (HP8550) 24cpm 6cpm 600dpi
MINOLTA CF910 23cpm 6cpm 400dpi
Canon CLC7/8/900 28cpm 7cpm 400dpi
1st Copy Speed
First copy speed of model CCR060A/CCR062A remains 8.0 sec, while the copy
resolution is raised to 600dpi. 1st copy speed is especially important for this type of
model, with which the customer will make small numbers of copies per original.
29
Competitors Comparison: FC/BW 1st Copy Speed (A4/LT LEF)
BW 1st Copy Speed FC 1st Copy Speed Copy Resolution

Model CCR060A/062A 8.0sec. 22.4sec. 600dpi
CCR060/62/68 8.0sec. 22.4sec. 400dpi
Azalea 15sec. 32sec. 400dpi
XEROX X5750 8.9sec. 23.9sec. 400dpi
Canon CP680 (HP8550) 18sec. 34.0sec. 600dpi
MINOLTA CF910 14sec. 30.0sec. 400dpi
Canon CLC7/8/900 17sec. 27.0sec. 400dpi
Print Speed
CCR060/62/68 lowered the engine speed during printing to realise 600dpi printing.
Model CCR060A/CCR062A offers 600dpi both in copying and printing, so the
productivity in printing has been significantly improved.
Print Speed (A4/LT LEF)
CCR060 CCR062/68 Model CCR060A Model CCR062A

FC Print 4ppm 4ppm 6ppm 6ppm
BW Print 14ppm 18ppm 25ppm 31ppm
FC Print Speed BW Print Speed
50 % up 72.2% up
78.5% up
31cpm
6cpm
25cpm
4cpm
18cpm
14cpm
Iris/ I-2 / Iris I-2 Lilac L-2

Lilac L-2
Productivity in printing is significantly improved both in FC and BW.
30
Image Rotation
The new image rotation feature accelerates actual productivity in your office.
This function is already available in CCR100/106, but is not available in FC mode. In

model CCR060A/CCR062A, image rotation is available both in FC and BW mode.
Therefore there is no need to set A4/LT SEF paper in the machine.
Image Rotation
A4 SEF to A4LEF
(LT SEF to LT LEF)
Satisfactory
Copy Speed
Reduction copy from No sacrifice in
A3 to A4 image quality
(DLT to LT)
31
Useful Features
Paper Tray Assignment
This is a useful tool for general office users who use the machine for both BW and FC
copying. As the new image rotation feature saves paper tray use (no need to set
A4/LT SEF paper), the user can set same size and same direction paper in multiple
trays. However, expensive colour copy paper can be put in one tray and ordinary copy
paper for BW copies / prints / fax can be put in a second tray
In CCR060A/CCR062A, the tray policy can be registered to solve user problems as

below:
Priority Tray for Full Colour Copy Mode
User Problem
We need high qua lity output in colour copying.
We dont like to use high cost colour copy paper for daily BW copying.
Solution
You can pre-assign any or all of the paper trays for Full Color Copy Mode,
and set colour copy paper in the assigned tray. The machine automatically
selects the assigned tray where colour copy paper is located whenever Full
Colour Copy Mode is selected.
Paper Type Policy (APS on / Original Size is A4/LT)
APS on and
*Auto Colour Normal
Selection (ACS) Paper
BW Copy Mode The assigned
A4/LT LEF
Single Colour Colour
Mode Copy A4/LT LEF tray for FC mode
Paper
Twin Colour
A3/DLT
Mode
APS on and
FC Copy Mode
*In Auto Colour Selection mode, the paper is fed from normal paper. This is
because paper is fed from paper tray before machine determines colour mode.
FAX Priority Paper Tray
You can assign the paper tray for fax as well. For example, you can print fax
messages on yellow paper by setting it in the priority tray, so that you can identify fax
at a glance.
32
Auto-Duplex Copying and Printing (Model CCR062A only)
Auto-duplex is the standard feature for model CCR062A.

Auto-duplex saves paper use, reducing both cost and filing space requirements.
New Twin Colour
Twin colour is a useful function to make a point colour copy quickly. In addition to
current twin colour capability, new twin colour feature allows user to select the
combination of the colour output.
Current Twin Colour (Black and Other Colours)
Black part on the original: Copied in Black (User can select col.)
Other Colour part on the original: Copied in Red (User can select col.)
Original Copy
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
Current twin colour function separates original image into black part
and colour part and changes the colour of each part.
Newly added Twin Colour (Red and Other Colours)
Red part on the original: Copied in Red (Fixed)

Other Colour part on the original: Copied in Black (Fixed)
Original Copy
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
New twin colour function separates original image into red part and
other colour part to highlight red part on the original. Unlike current twin
colour mode, the user cannot change the colour in this mode. The red part
of the original is copied as red and the other part is copied as black.
33
New Energy Saver Mode
Machine enters energy saver mode automatically to decrease power consumption after
non-operation. CCR060/62/68 has this function, but some customers complain about
long recovery time. In Model CCR060A/CCR062A, user can select power
consumption and recovery period from 3 selections.
Power Consumption* Recovery Time

Level 1 Operation Panel = Off 0 sec.
Level 2 Approx. -25% Approx. 80sec.
*Default: Level 1
Scan Once Copy Many in Mono -Colour Copying
The CCR060A/CCR062A is equipped with 80MB page memory, in which 1 page of

mono-colo ur scanned image can be stored. This makes scan once copy many possible
in BW and single colo ur copy mode in Cyan, Magenta and Yellow.
"Benefit"
Stable reproduction quality by making copies from same scan image
User can bring original back before copy job finish
* Unlike BW MFP, CCR060A/CCR062A cannot store multiple page images at the
same time.
34

The CCR060A and CCR062A are updates to the current CCR060/062/068 Models.
However, due to the increased multifunctionality of the products and the re-
positioning statement emphasising the black and white functionality of these models
the marketing communications material needs to reflect those changes.
Group Marketing shall be produce the following marketing communication material:
1 x 6 pp brochure to include both models

2 x 2pp print controller brochures (on CD)
Training Slides
BandW / Colour Press Shots
Colour Transparencies
Line Drawing
Product Poster
Pocket Product Card Insert
PR Pack
The Colour Solutions CD-ROM will be updated in time for the launch of the C-2 in
Q1, 2001.
35
Configuration and Option Interchangeability
Configuration
Model CCR060A and CCR062A have a variety of options as below:
No. Item Short Name Comments

1 Platen Cover Platen Cover Type Common with CCR060/62/68/100/106
100
2 ARDF DF64 Common with CCR060/62/68/100/106 and
BW models
3 Original Tray Original Tray Type Common with CCR060/62/68/100/106 and
F BW models
4 10 Bin Sorter Stapler ST10 Common with CCR031/32/36/60/62/68 and
BW models
5 3 Bin Unit CS160 Common with CCR060/62/68
6 20 Bin Sorter Stapler ST32 Common with CCR060/62/68
7 3 Tray Paper Bank PS390 Common with CCR060/62/68
8 2 Tray Paper Bank PS380 Common with CCR060/62/68
9* Editing Option Type 4000 NEW
Area Editing Function can be added to
model CCR062A by inserting this unit into
scanner IPU board.
10 Controller Interface Unit Type H NEW
2 slots for Printer Controller and FAX unit
Necessary to install Printer and/or FAX
11* Fax Controller Type 4000 NEW
For Model CCR062A only
Please see Other options for fax function
* Only For Model CCR062A
** Product information of printer controller provided in separate Information Guides.
36
Other Options for FAX Function
No. Item Product Name Comments

1 G4 Option ISDN Option Type 450 Common with DMR35/45
2 SAF FAX Feature Expander Type 4MB SAF memory
Memory 450 Common with DMR35/45
3 HDD FAX Feature Expander Type NEW 80MB Fax HDD.
Memory 4000 Must be installed with SAF memory
option
4 FAX Stamp FAX Stamp Type 4000 NEW
ARDF must be installed together
5 JBIG Option FAX 400dpi Option Type 400dpi memory + JBIG feature
450 Common with DMR35/45
Option Interchangeability
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 Platen Cover X
2 ARDF X
3 Original Tray
4 10 Bin Sorter Stapler X X
5 3 Bin Unit X X
6 20 Bin Sorter Stapler X X
7 3 Tray Paper Bank X
8 2 Tray Paper Bank X
9 * Editing Option
10 CTL I/F Unit M M
11 Printer Controller **
12 * Fax Controller
13 * G4 Option M M
14 * SAF Memory M M
15 * HDD Memory M M M
16 * FAX Stamp M M M
17 * JBIG Option M M
* Only for Model CCR062A

M Must be installed together
X Cannot be installed together
** With the Fiery controller, you have also to order the printer operation panel
Type E310, supplied as separated item.
The operation panel for the RC-210 is supplied with the controller, so you do
not need to order further item.
37
Codes

CCR060A CCR060A Colo ur Solutions 6 cpm N/A
colour / 25 cpm mono
CCR062A CCR062A Colour Solutions 6 cpm N/A
colour / 31 cpm mono
Options
PC100 Platen cover CCR060/62/68/100/106/60A/6
2A
DF64 ARDF CCR060/62/68/100/106/
Swallow II / Falcon II / Eagle
II / AD3II / SP3II / AD50 /
CCR060A/CCR062A
ST10 10 Bin Sorter Stapler CCR060/62/68 / Phoenix /
CCR060A / CCR062A
ST32 20 Bin Sorter Stapler CCR060/62/68 / CCR060A /
CCR062A
CS160 3 Bin Sorter CCR060/62/68 / CCR060A /
CCR062A
PS390 3 Tray Paper Bank: 3 x 500 sheets CCR060/62/68 / CCR060A /
CCR062A
PS380 2 Tray Paper Bank: 2 x 500 sheets CCR060/62/68 / CCR060A /
CCR062A
Type F Original Trays CCR060/62/68/100/106/60A/6
2A/
CMR512B/602B/702B
Type H Controller Interface Unit CCR060A / CCR062A
Type 4000 Edit Option CCR062A
Type 4000 Fax Option CCR062A
Type 4000 Fax feature expander (Fax HDD) CCR062A
Type 4000 Fax stamp CCR062A
Type 450 ISDN Option (G4) DMR35/45 / CCR062A
Type 450 Fax feature expander (SAF Memory) DMR35/45 / CCR062A
Type 450 Fax 400 dpi option DMR35/45 / CCR062A
Supplies
Toner
CT114BLK Nashuatec Black CCR060/62/68 / CCR060A /
CCR062A
CT114YLW Nashuatec Yellow CCR060/62/68 / CCR060A /
CCR062A
CT114MGT Nashuatec Magenta CCR060/62/68 / CCR060A /
CCR062A
CT114CYN Nashuatec Cyan CCR060/62/68 / CCR060A /
CCR062A
CT114BLK Rex-Rotary Black CCR060/62/68 / CCR060A /
CCR062A
CT114YLW Rex-Rotary Yellow CCR060/62/68 / CCR060A /
38
CCR062A
CT114MGT Rex-Rotary Magenta CCR060/62/68 / CCR060A /
CCR062A
CT114CYN Rex-Rotary Cyan CCR060/62/68 / CCR060A /
CCR062A
CT114BLK Gestetner Black CCR060/62/68 / CCR060A /
CCR062A
CT114YLW Gestetner Yellow CCR060/62/68 / CCR060A /
CCR062A
CT114MGT Gestetner Magenta CCR060/62/68 / CCR060A /
CCR062A
CT114CYN Gestetner Cyan CCR060/62/68 / CCR060A /
CCR062A
Developer
CD112BLK Black CCR060/62/68 / CCR060A /
CCR062A
CD112YLW Yellow CCR060/62/68 / CCR060A /
CCR062A
CD112MGT Magenta CCR060/62/68 / CCR060A /
CCR062A
CD112CYN Cyan CCR060/62/68 / CCR060A /
CCR062A
Drum
COPC17 OPC Drum CCR060/62/68 / CCR060A /
CCR062A
Language Set (options)
CCDK356GB Operating Instructions Kit English CCR060A
CCDK356F Operating Instructions Kit French CCR060A
CCDK356D Operating Instructions Kit German CCR060A
CCDK356I Operating Instructions Kit Italian CCR060A
CCDK356E Operating Instructions Kit Spanish CCR060A
CCDK356NL Operating Instructions Kit Dutch CCR060A
CCDK356S Operating Instructions Kit Swedish CCR060A
CCDK356N Operating Instructions Kit Norwegian CCR060A
CCDK356DK Operating Instructions Kit Danish CCR060A
CCDK356PL Operating Instructions Kit Polish CCR060A
CCDK356P Operating Instructions Kit Portuguese CCR060A
CCDK356CZ Operating Instructions Kit Czech CCR060A
CCDK456GB Operating Instructions Kit English CCR062A
CCDK456F Operating Instruc tions Kit French CCR062A
CCDK456D Operating Instructions Kit German CCR062A
CCDK456I Operating Instructions Kit Italian CCR062A
CCDK456E Operating Instructions Kit Spanish CCR062A
CCDK456NL Operating Instructions Kit Dutch CCR062A
CCDK456DK Operating Instructions Kit Danish CCR062A
CCDK456S Operating Instructions Kit Swedish CCR062A
CCDK456P Operating Instructions Kit Portuguese CCR062A
CCDK456N Operating Instructions Kit Norwegian CCR062A
39
CCDK456CZ Operating Instructions Kit Czech CCR062A

CCDK456PL Operating Instructions Kit Polish CCR062A
FAX4000OPENG Fax Operating Instructions English CCR062A
FAX4000OPFR Fax Operating Instructions French CCR062A
FAX4000OPGER Fax Operating Instructions German CCR062A
FAX4000OPIT Fax Operating Instructions Italian CCR062A
FAX4000OPSPA Fax Operating Instructions Spanish CCR062A
FAX4000OPNL Fax Operating Instructions Dutch CCR062A
FAX4000OPDAN Fax Operating Instructions Danish CCR062A
FAX4000OPSWE Fax Operating Instructions Swedish CCR062A
FAX4000OPPOR Fax Operating Instructions Portuguese CCR062A
FAX4000OPNOR Fax Operating Instructions Norwegian CCR062A
FAX4000OPCZE Fax Operating Instructions Czech CCR062A
FAX4000OPPOL Fax Operating Instructions Polish CCR062A
40
Supplies
Toner
Cartridge Capacity (4 colours): 220g/cartridge
Target yield/cartridge:
with 5% chart with 6% chart with 8.75% chart

Black 9,000 outputs 7,500 outputs 5,142 outputs
Cyan/Magenta/Yellow 8,000 outputs 6,666 outputs 4,571 outputs
Developer
Capacity (4 colours): 380g/bag
Target yield:
Black: 60,000 developments
Cyan/Magenta/Yellow: 45,000 developments
Whats in the box?
Mainframe
1 Platen Cover No (Option)
2 Copy Tray Yes
3 Drum Yes
4 Operation panel Symbol
5 Language ROM Standard
6 Language (Pre- installed) 1.English; 2.German; 3.French; 4.Italian
7 Operation Instruction No *
8 O/I Holder Yes
9 Favourite Key Decal Yes (Symbol)
10 Inner Instruction Sheet (Non word) Yes
11 NECR No
12 User Survey Card No
13 Drum Warranty Sheet No
14 Machine Warranty Sheet No
15 Branding Plaque Yes (Gestetner / Nashuatec / Rex Rotary)
16 Brand Decal on Operation panel Yes (Gestetner / Nashuatec / Rex Rotary)
17 Caution Decal (Prevention against Yes
Counterfeit) English
18 Instruction Procedure Sheet Yes
(Prevention against counterfeit) (English/German/ French/Spanish/ Italian)
19 Toner Replacement Tool Yes
* Supplied with the language set
41
Service Plan
Target Reliability
Model Model CCR062A

CCR060A
ACV (colour ratio 50%) 3,000 outputs 5,000 outputs
Colour Ratio 50% 50%
Max CV (development) 30,000 dev. 30,000 dev.
Max CV (outputs / colour ratio:50%) 12,000 outputs 12,000 outputs
PM Interval 60,000 dev. 60,000 dev.
EM Interval 30,000 dev. 30,000 dev.
MCBC Target (mainframe ) 20,000 dev. 20,000 dev.
Unit Life 1,440K dev. or 1,440K dev. or
5 years 5 years whichever
whichever comes first
comes first
Max. CV (Number of Outputs by Colour Ratio)

Outputs
35000
30000
BW
25000
20000
Target Colour Ratio
15000 Colour
10000
5000
0 Colour Ratio
0%
1 10%
2 320% 430%5 40%
6 50%
7 60%
8 970% 1080%11 90%
100%
Colour ratio 0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
BW 30000 20769 15000 11053 8181 6000 4286 2903 1765 812 0
Full Colour 0 2308 3750 4737 5454 6000 6429 6774 7059 7297 7500
TTL 30000 23077 18750 15790 13635 12000 10715 9677 8824 8109 7500
42
CCR132 Product Information Guide
PRODUCT
INFORMATION GUIDE
CCR132
Nashuatec CS513d
Rex Rotary CS813D
Gestetner CS213d
Office and the specifications are subject to change. If in doubt
or further details are required, pl ease contact NRGI Guernsey.
1
Executive Summary
Advanced C olou r f or Quality C onsci ous Cust om ers

Since the launch of the CCR100/106, competition among Mid-Range colour products
has become more intense. In this range, various manufacturers participate in the
colo ur market. This market has traditionally been dominated by Canon and Xerox,
though new players including Toshiba and Sharp have developed new products at
ground-breaking speeds.
In this market segment the first priority customer requirement is image quality. To
meet such requirements, the CCR132 has enhanced image quality and reliability for
quality conscious customers in Specialised Business and Production Business
Segments.
Using current and newly developed technologies the CCR132 has enhanced
sharpness, smoothness, and gradation in image quality. The CCR132 also delivers
improved productivity, such as speed and paper capacity increase, to improve
acceptance in the Production Business Segment, particularly the On Demand Printing
market.
Marketing Objective
Expand colour market and increase CV/PV by offering higher image quality,
productivity and more expandability.
A) To expand the portion of NRGIs full colour copier MIF in the Specialised Business
Segment
Objectives;
1. 100 % replaceme nt of the MIF of CCR66A/67A (MIF protection)
2. Aggressive attack on the MIF of competitors models.
B) To win copy and print volume from competitors MIF and expand our business
With its very competitive specification and its high productivity, the CCR132 has
the capability to capture competitors CV / PV, which will lead to increased profit.
C) To find new opportunities in the On Demand Printing market

As in the general office market, the On Demand Printing market is expecting
continuous growth. In order to cope with the quick change in market trends, machines
must be able to print short runs of variable data at high quality. On Demand Printing
opportunities exist not only in the Production Business Segment but also in the
General Office Segment
2
Launch Schedule
The CCR132 will be manufactured in December 2000 ready for launch in February
2001. The CCR132 will use the current controllers E-700 and E-800A although a new
controller interface will be required.
Major Improvements
CCR100/106 CCR132
FC CPM / PPM 10 13
BW CPM / PPM 40 51
Scan Resolution 400 dpi / 10 bit 600 dpi / 10 bit
Bypass Capacity 50 sheets 250 sheets
1st Copy Speed FC: 16.5 sec. FC: 14 sec.
Image Rotation 1 Colour Full Colo ur
Feed from Bypass, 2nd and
Extra Thick Paper Feed from Bypass Tray
3rd Tray
Editing Option X : Edit Model O : Edit Option Kit
Conclusion
The CCR132 is the replacement product for the CCR100/106 Colour Solutions with
many improvements to overcome Image Quality problems and improve product
performance.
3
Product Overview
Appearance
A) The CCR132 Mainframe
600 dpi / 10 bit Controller

Single Scan Interface Unit
Embedded or
External
600 dpi / 8 bit (New/Option)
Engine
Colour: 13cpm 250 sheet
BW: 51cpm Bypass Tray
Available to 1st Copy Speed

feed Extra
Colour: 14 secs.
Thick Paper
Rear View with

Embedded I/F Unit
External
Controller I/F
comes out from
here Embedded
Controller I/F Unit
(Option)
4
B) Operation Panel
Printer 10.4 inch Colo ur Editing Pen

Operation Panel LCD Touch Panel * Enclosed with Edit Option
5
Mainframe Specifications
General Feature
Configuration: Console
Process: Dry Electrostatic Transfer System
Originals: Sheet / Book / Object
Original Size: Max. 11 x 17 / A3
Resolution:
Scan: 600dpi / 10bit
Copy: 600dpi / 8bit
Single Scan: Yes
Gradation: 256 gradations
Copy Size: Max.: 11 x 17 / A3 full bleed on 13 x 19
Min. : 5 "x8 " / A6 (Lengthwise)
Maximum Imageable Area: 323 mm x 473 mm, 12.7 x 18.6
Paper Size:
1st Tray Feed: 8 x11, 5 x8 (S)
(small tray) A4, B5, A5 (S)
2nd and 3rd Tray Feed:11 x 17(L), 11 x 15(L), 10x 14(L), 8 x11,
8 x14(L),8 x13(L), 8 x 13(L),8 x 10 (L),
8 x 10(L), 5 x8 (S)A3(L), B4(L), A4, B5,
A5 (S)
Bypass Tray Feed: 13 x 19(L), 12 x 18(L), 11 x 17(L), 8 x11,
5 x8 , 330mm x 483mm, 305mm x 457mm,
A3(L), B4(L), A4, B5, A5, B6 (L), A6 (L)
(Available custom paper size: L: 148 - 483mm,
S: 100- 330mm)
Note - L : lengthwise, S : sideways
First Copy Speed:
Normal Mode: FC: 14 sec. or less / BW: 7.3 sec. or less
Thick Paper Mode: FC: 22 sec. or less / BW: 15 sec. or less
Extra Thick Paper Mode: FC: 29 sec. or less / BW: 22 sec. or less
Copy Speed:
Normal Mode: FC: 13 cpm / BW: 51 cpm
OHP / Thick Paper Mode: FC: 5.5 cpm / BW: 8.5 cpm
Extra Thick Paper Mode: FC: 4cpm / BW: 5.5 cpm
ADF 1 to 1 Speed: FC: 8cpm / BW: 31cpm
Warm-up Time: Less than 8.5 min.
Multiple Copying: Up to 999
Paper Capacity: 1750sht.
Paper Tray 3 x 500sht
Bypass Tray 250sht.or 32mm/1.26 or less
(with 28lb / 100 g/m)
Copy Paper Weight:
1st Paper Tray: 17 - 28lbs / 64 - 105 g/m
nd rd
2 and 3 Paper Tray: 17 - 68lbs / 64 - 256 g/m
Bypass Tray: 17 - 68lbs / 64 - 256 g/m
6
Auto Duplex Tray 17 - 28lbs / 64 - 105 g/m

Reproduction Ratio:
Inch Version: 7 Reductions, 5 Enlargements plus 100%
400, 200, 155, 129, 121, 100, 93, 85, 78, 73, 65, 50, 25
mm Version: 7 Reductions, 5 enlargements plus 100%
400, 200, 141, 122, 115, 100, 93, 82, 75, 71, 65, 50, 25
Programmable Ratio: Two Programmable Ratios from 25 to 400 %
Zoom: From 25% to 400% in 1% Steps
Non Reproduction Area:
Leading Edge: Less than 0.16 0.08 (4 mm2 mm )
Side: Less than 0.08 0.08 (2 mm2 mm)
Trailing Edge (Normal Paper Mode): Less than 0.08 0.08 (2 mm2 mm)
Trailing Edge (Thick Paper Mode): Less than 0.16 0.08 (4 mm2 mm)
Three side full bleed: Yes
Duplex Copy: Auto
Duplex Stack: FC-20 sheets (all sizes)
BW, 1C-2C:
A3 / DLT : 30 sheets
less than B4 : 50 sheets
Dimension(W x D x H): 29.5 x 30.7 x 38.6 / 750mm x 780mm x 980mm
(Exclude Platen Cover)
Weight: Less than 245kg (545lb)
Power Source:
US Model: 120V 60Hz 16A
Euro.and Asia Model: 220 - 240V 50/60Hz 8A
Taiwan Model: 110V 60Hz 16A
Max. Power Consumption: Less than 1.75 KVA
Copy Speed
Paper Mode
Normal Paper : 64 g/m ~ 105 g/m : 17 lbs ~ 28lbs
Thick paper : More Than 105 g/m ~ 157 g/m : More Than 28lbs ~ 42lbs
Extra Thick Paper : More Than 157 g/m ~ 256 g/m : More Than 42lbs ~ 68lbs
FC copy 1C copy; 2C copy; 2C copy; 2C copy;
Copy Mode *5-F
3C copy CMYBk G, B, BK+Y R ,Bk+C Bk+M
Normal Paper
less than LT/A4 (S): 13cpm 51cpm 17cpm 13cpm 16.5cpm
less than DLT/A3 (L): 6.5cpm 24cpm 8.5cpm 6.5cpm 8.5cpm
less than 13 x 19 : 6.5cpm 24cpm 8.5cpm 6.5cpm 8.5cpm
OHP/Thick Paper
less than LT/A4 (S): 5.5cpm 8.5cpm 7cpm 6cpm 6cpm
less than DLT/A3 (L): 2.5cpm 4cpm 3.5cpm 3cpm 3cpm
less than 13 x 19 : 2.5cpm 4cpm 3.5cpm 3cpm 3cpm
Extra Thick Paper
less than LT/A4 (S): 4cpm 5.5cpm 5cpm 4.5cpm 4.5cpm
less than DLT/A3 (L): 2cpm 2.5cpm 2.5cpm 2cpm 2cpm
less than 13 x 19 : 2cpm 2.5cpm 2.5cpm 2cpm 2cpm
ADF 1 to 1
7
less than LT/A4 (S): 8cpm 31cpm 8cpm 8cpm 8cpm

less than DLT/A3 (L): 5cpm 15cpm 5cpm 5cpm 5cpm
Auto Duplex (Normal Paper)
less than LT/A4 (S): 13cpm 45cpm 17cpm 13cpm 16.5cpm
less than DLT/A3 (L): 6.5cpm 24cpm 8.5cpm 6.5cpm 8.5cpm
Note - L : lengthwise, S : sideways
8
First Copy Speed
Copy Mode FC copy 1C copy; 1C copy; 1C copy; 2C copy; 2C copy;

(Pre-Scan mode)* 3C copy CMYBk G, B R Bk+M Bk+C
BK+Y
Normal Paper 14sec. 7.3sec. 9.3sec. 9.3sec. 9.3sec. 9.3sec.
(A4 sideways from 1st tray) or less or less or less or less or less or less
Thick Paper 22sec. 15sec. 17sec. 17sec. 17sec. 17sec.
(A4 sideways from 2nd tray) or less or less or less or less or less or less
Extra Thick Paper 29sec. 22sec. 24sec. 24sec. 24sec. 24sec.
(A4 sideways from 2nd tray) or less or less or less or less or less or less
*Because of increase of Bypass Tray capacity, Bypass Tray adopts tray rise system.
Therefore, OHP mode is slower than Thick Paper mode while the bypass tray rises.
(Max5 sec) A3 wide paper is also slower
*Copy Mode of Thick Paper and Extra Thick Paper is fed from Paper Tray.
* As a result of CPM increase, only Pre-Scan mode is available.
Advanced Features
Colour Mode : Auto Colour Selection (ACS) / Full Colour / Black and White
/ Single Colour / Twin Colour
Single Colour:
-User Colour : 60 colours
(15 user colours x 4 density levels)
-Pre-set Single Colour :48 colours
(12 single colours x 4 density levels)
[Red, Green, Blue, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Yellow
Green, Orange, Beige, Pink, Purple, Marine Blue ]
-Scan Colour : 1 colour (With Editing Option)
Twin Colour:
-Black + Other colours
(Black can also be changed to one of single colours)
-Red + Black
(red colo ur extraction)
Image Density Selection: Auto (ADS)
Manual (9 steps)
Copy Mode : Auto Original Type Selection
Auto (Text/Photo Separation) Mode
(one of the following original types can be selected)
- Press Print Mode
- Glossy Photo Mode
- 2nd Generation Mode
Text Mode
Photo Mode
- Press Print Mode
- Glossy Photo Mode
- 2nd Generation Mode
Special Original Mode
- Map Mode
9
- Highlight Pen Mode

- Inkjet Original Mode
Paper Selection: Auto Paper Selection (APS)
Manual Paper Selection (Paper Trays 1-3)
By-pass Feed Selection
Paper Type
-Normal Paper
-Thick Paper
-Extra Thick Paper
-OHP transparencies
-OHP Slip Sheet
Manual Duplex
-Duplex Backside
Paper Size
-Normal Size
-Custom Size
Large Capacity Tray (LCT)
Full Size/AMS Full Size : 100%
Auto Magnification Selection (AMS)
Sorting/ Stacking/ Stapling: Yes (with optional item - Sorter/ Stapler)
Image Rotation: Yes: 90 rotation (Max. A4 size)
Reduction and Enlargement: Preset R/E (7R5E+2User R/E)
Zoom (25-400%, 1% step)
Directional Size Magnification
Directional Magnification
Poster Mode
Shift / Erase / Book: Shift
Centering
Cornering
Margin Adjustment
Erase
Erasing Center
Erasing Border
Erasing Centering and Border
(A4/A3 version: 1-20mm in 1mm steps)
(LT/DLT version: 0.04 -7.87 in 0.04steps)
Book / Series
Book Original to Two 1-sided Copies
2-sided Originals to Two 1-sided Copies
Combine two Originals on One Sheet*
Combine four Originals on One Sheet*
*ADF is required.
The cornering function is not available for use with 13 X 19 paper. (Always shift center)
Cover Page Mode Front Cover
Front and Back Cover
See below for the Cover Page Mode
Front Cove r Copy Selectable: Copy/Do not copy/Do
Cover Page
Back Cover not insert back cover
10
Front and Back Bypass Tray

Paper Feed Cover Paper Tray
Inner pages
Colour Mode ACS or one colour mode can be set .
Paper transfer Front and Back Thick Paper Mode (fixed)
mode Cover Normal Paper Mode
Inner pages
*ARDF is required
11
Duplex: 1-sided Originals to 2-sided Copies

2-sided Originals to 2-sided Copies
Book Original to 2-sided Copies
Multiple (Book Original) to 2-sided Copies
Colour Creation: Colour Conversion
Colour Erase
Colour Background
Paint*
Colour Line*
Frame Line*
*Available only with Area Editing Option.
Image Creation: Outline Image
Positive / Negative Image
Shadow Image (Block/ Offset)
Mirror Image
Slanted Image
Repeat Image
Type Mask
Colour Balance: Colour Balance Adjustment
Colour Balance Memory
Colour Balance Sample
Image Adjustment: Sharp/ Soft
Contrast
Background Density Control
Pastel
UCR Adjustment
A.C.S. Sensitivity Level
Auto Text and Photo Sensitivity
User Colour Memory: Max 15 colours
Area Editing
Area Shape: Rectangle / Right Angle Polygon / Polygon / Closed
Loop / Multi-Closed Loop / Line
Input Area: Max. 500 points
Maximum No. of Areas: 500 areas (500 points)
Up to 30 points per one area
Maximum Groups: 20 groups
Colour Image Overlay:
Area Image Overlay Yes Max. Original Size: A4 / LT
Full Image Overlay No
Opacity No
Text Image Overlay: No
Editing Function Comparison

Feature CCR100/106 CCR132
Opacity Edit model Not Available
Text Image Overlay Edit model Not Available
Full Image Overlay Edit model Not Available
12
Area Image Overlay Edit model Edit Option

Area Editing Edit model Edit Option
Paint Edit model Edit Option
Colour Conversion Basic model Standard
Colour Erase Basic model Standard
Colour Background Basic model Standard
Slanted Image Basic model Standard
Mirror Image Basic model Standard
Positive/Negative Basic model Standard
Outline Image Basic model Standard
Shadow Image Basic model Standard
Type Mask Basic model Standard
Repeat Image Basic model Standard
Auto Colour Calibration(ACC) Yes (Copy / Print)

Job Program Yes (5 Programs)
Special Mode Program Yes (2 Programs)
Recall: Yes
Custom Size Original: Yes
Energy Saver Mode: Yes (3 Levels)
Pause / Interrupt: Yes
User Code: Yes (Max. 200 codes)
Auto Tray Switching: Yes
Full Image Copy: Yes
Counterfeit Prevention: Bill recognition function
Invisible Marking Function
13
Option Specifications
DF64 / ARDF
Original Size: 11x17, 8 x14, 8 x11, 5 x8
(A3, A4, A5,B4, B5, B6)
Original Weight: SADF / ADF mode: 11lbs - 34lbs (40 - 128g/m)
Auto reverse mode: 14lbs - 28lbs (52 - 105g/m)
Combine originals mode:14lbs - 34lbs (52 - 128g/m)
Stack Ca pacity: 50 shts. with 80 g/m paper or less than 6mm
Power Consumption: DC-24V from copier
Dimensions (W x D x H): 24.0 x 20.0 x 5.1 (610 x 507 x 130mm)
Weight: Less than 23.1 lbs. /10.5kg
ST33 / Twenty Bin Sorter Stapler
Number of bins: 20 bins + Proof Tray
Paper Size:
Proof tray: Max: 13x 19
Min: 5 x8 /A6
Sort / Stack: Max: 13x 19
Min: 5 x8 / A5 (lengthwise)
Paper Weight: Proof tray : 17 - 42 lbs. / 64 - 157 g/m
Sort / Stack : 17 - 68 lbs. / 64 - 256 g/m
Bin Capacity:
Proof Tray: 250 sheets (80g/m /20 lbs. paper)
Sort /Stack 50 sheets / bin (80g/m 20 lbs. paper)
Stapling Capacity:
Number of pages: 2-50 sheets. (80g/m , 20 lbs.)
Paper Size: Max.: 13 x 19
Min.: 8 x 11 /B5
Paper Weight: 17-68lbs (64 - 256 g/m)
Time: Less than 2.5 sec. / bin (one position)
Less than 3.5 sec. / bin (two positions)
Position: Three positions
Replenishment: Cartridge change (5000 pieces/cartridge)
Power Source: DC-24V from copier mainframe
Dimension (W x D x H): 600 x 615 x 980 mm (23.7 x 24.3 x 38.6)
Weight: 65kg (143 lbs.)
Country of Origin : South Korea
RT36 / Large Capacity Tray (LCT)
Paper size: A4 (LEF), LT (LEF)
Paper weight: 60-105g/m, 20-28lbs
Paper capacity: 1500 sheets
Noise (Power level): Operating: less than 71 dB(full system)
Stand-by: less than 40 dB(full system)
Dimensions (W x D x H): 390 x 500 x 390mm, 15.4x19.7x15.4
Weight: Less than 17 Kg, 37.5lbs.
Remarks: LCT Adapter is required for installation.
14
Supply Yield
Toner
Cartridge Capacity (4 colours): 270g / CTRG
Target Yield / CTRG

With 5% chart with 6% chart with 8.75% chart
Cyan/ Magenta/ Yellow/ Black 10,000 outputs 8,333 outputs 5,714 outputs
Developer
Capacity (4 colours): 700g / Bag

Target Yield:
Black: 60,000 development
Cyan/Magenta/Yellow 48,000 development
Supply Interchangeability
CCR132 CCR060A/62A CCR100/106 CCR066A/67A

Black Toner for CCR132 OK NG OK NG
Cyan Toner for CCR132 OK NG OK NG
Magenta Toner for CCR132 OK NG OK NG
Yellow Toner for CCR132 OK NG OK NG
Black Developer for CCR132 OK NG OK NG
Cyan Developer for CCR132 OK NG OK NG
Magenta Developer for CCR132 OK NG OK NG
Yellow Developer for CCR132 OK NG OK NG
OK: Can be used for this machine
NG: Cannot be used for this machine
15
Environmental Standard
Sound level
Stand-by: Mainframe: 52dB(A) or less

Operating: Mainframe: 69.9dB(A) or less
Ozone emission level
Average: 0.02mg/m or less (when using new filter)

Max. 0.04mg/m or less (when the filter is changed in PM)
Dust level
0.075mg/m or less
Environmental Standard
Model Type Standard

US Model Safety Standard UL1950, cUL1950
Laser CDRH class I
EMI FCC class B / ICES class B
Europe Model Safety Standard TUV (IEC950)
Laser IEC 825 / VDE0837 class 1
EMI VDE0871 class B
CE Mark EN60950, EN60825, EN55022, EN61000-3-2,
EN61000-3-3, EN55024
Taiwan Model - CNS13438 (Otsu-rui)
Language
Languages : CCR132
Languages CCR132
1 English Yes
2 French Yes
3 German Yes
4 Italian Yes
5 Spanish Yes
6 Dutch Yes
7 Danish Yes
8 Swedish Yes
9 Portuguese Yes
10 Norwegian Yes
11 Czech Yes
12 Polish Yes
13 Taiwan Chinese Yes
14 Brazilian Portugue se Yes
15 Russian Yes
16
Recommended Paper
EU
Manufacturer Description Paper Paper Remarks
Weight Size
RICOH Copy Paper for 100g/m2 A3, A4
Aficio Color
AUSSEDAT REY AR Color 100g/m2 A3, A4
AUSSEDAT REY R DE REY 100g/m2 A3, A4
ENSO 4CC: 80 80g/m2 A3, A4
TERVAKOSKI
ENSO 4CC: 100 100 g/m2 A3, A4
TERVAKOSKI
Neusiedler Color Copy 100 g/m2 A3, A4
Neusiedler Color Copy 100 g/m2 12 X 18 From bypass tray
Papier 250PC 1845,1844 120 g/m2 A3, A4
Clairefontaine
Papier 250PC 1843,1842 160 g/m2 A3, A4
Clairefontaine
Papier 250PC 1838,1837 190 g/m2 A3, A4
Clairefontaine
Papier 250PC 1811 120 g/m2 12 X 18 From bypass tray
Clairefontaine
Clairefontaine
Clairefontaine
Transparency
Manufacturer Description Size Remarks
Folex X355 LT / A4 From bypass tray / Select OHP
X356 mode
3M PP2260 LT / A4 From bypass tray / Select OHP
mode
Note: Folex X356 was not recommended for CCR060A/62A due to paper jam. But
CCR132 can handle both X355 and X356.
17
Counter Specification
Style Counter Remarks

*Development Count number of developments Same as current RICOH colour
Count (scans) copiers
Copy Count Count number of copied/printed Same as Canon colour copier
pages
*Default Counter Style is Development Count
Development count
BK counter Colour counter
BW copy 1 click
1C copy 1 click
2C copy 2 click
3C copy 3 click
BW print 1 click
1C print (CMYK format)* 1 click
2C print (CMYK format)* 2 click
1C-2C / 3C (RGB format)* 1 click 3 click
*While number of colour(s) used for print equals to counter clicks under CMYK
format, it is always 3 clicks for colo ur and 1 click for BK counted under the RGB
format no matter how many colo urs are printed. (CMYK format is applied to DTP
type of software. All others are generally using RGB format.)
Copy count
Colour BW Colour BW Colour BW
Copy Copy Print Print Total Total
BW copy 1 click 1 click
BW print 1 click 1 click
Special Cases
The counter doesnt click in the following cases:
Situation Remarks
Copying / Printing OHP
OHP Slip Sheet
slip sheet
Cover Sheet Copying / Printing blank
Mode back cover sheet
18
Not to charge customers for copies

SP Mode Copying from SP mode made by service engineers. TEST
COPY is printed on whole page.
ACC Printing ACC test pattern
Market Overview
The marketplace for Workgroup Colour Copiers (3-23cpm) grew in placement terms
by 13% in 1999 over 1998. In 1999, 38,920 units were placed versus 34.408 units in
1998. Of those units shipped in 1999, 100% were digital devices, and 100% were
used in a multifunction environment.
EP, Workgroup, Colour, Copiers - Total Europe: 38,92K units
1999 Market Shares
Other
Danka
Konica
Lanier
Oce
NRG
Minolta
Ricoh
Xerox
Canon
0% 5% 10% 15% 20% 25% 30% 35%

Source: CAP Ventures Europe
Figure 22
(Source: CAP Ventures 2000)
Canon remains the dominant force in the colour workgroup environment taking 34%
market share in 1999. This is however, a decline over 1998 where Canon captured
38%. Each year Xerox gets closer and closer, in 1999 up to 23% followed by Ricoh
with 13%.
NRG remained in 5th place with a 7% market share.
To conclude, in the colour copier market, the workgroup segment continues to show
strong growth expected to be further fuelled by newly introduced models offering new
speeds. Canon still leads, but it is questionable for how long.
19
Product Range Plan and Positioning

The CCR132 will succeed the CCR100/106 models. Its specifications will be
significantly upgraded in several areas. The CCR132 has only 1 version. This is an
Auto Duplex version without the Edit function. The edit function is obtained by an
optional Edit ROM kit.
Cattleya Range Plan
Cattleya Edit C-2

10 cpm 13 cpm
Cattleya Basic
10 cpm
E-800A
E-700
E-650
2000 Aug Sept Oct Nov Dec Jan Feb Mar
The current EFI controllers E-700 and E-800A will work with the CCR132.
Major improvements from the CCR100/106
CCR100/106 CCR132
FC CPM / PPM 10 13
BW CPM / PPM 40 51
Scan Resolution 400 dpi / 10 bit 600 dpi / 10 bit
Bypass Capacity 50 sheets 250 sheets
st
1 Copy Speed FC : 16.5 sec. FC : 14 sec.
Image Rotation 1 Colour Full Colo ur
Extra Thick
Feed from Bypass Tray Feed from Bypass, 2nd, and 3rd Tray
Paper
Editing Option X : Edit Model O : Edit Option Kit
20

Target Market
Market Segmentation
Below is the market segmentation chart of the CCR132. The primary target of the
CCR132 is the Specialised business market and Production business market. The
secondary target is General Office market.
Users Production Specialized General Office
100 or more
Target
50 - 100
Segment
of
CCR132
20 - 30
3 - 10
Number of users Number of Employees

who share the machine
Centralized
L2/L1/M2
More than 100 More than 100
Division
50-100
M1 Target of the
30-99 CCR132
Work Group
20-30
Small Work Group

S2
3-10 5-29
S1
Business Personal
1-4
21
Target Market
User Profile
Business Type: 1)Specialised business office, Production business
office
2)General office
Number of Employees: 10 - 100 employees
Number of Users: 20 - 100 users (Work Group - Division)
Typical Applications: Colour Proofs, Catalogues, Leaflets, Presentation
Materials, Direct Mail, Greeting Cards etc.
Colour Original: Photo, Drawings, Maps, Catalogues,
Colour Printed Document, etc.
Computer (OS): Macintosh, Windows
Application Software: Adobe PhotoShop, Quark XPress,
Adobe Illustrator, Adobe PageMaker, MS Office etc.
Print Controller Attachment Ratio: 80%
Target Model: Replacement : NRG: Lily

Competitors: CLC700/800/900series, X5760
X5790, CF900
Competition : CLC1120/1150, DocuColor1250, CF910
Toshiba FC-22, Sharp ARC150
Target Market by Copy Volume
CCR132
10,600 outputs
ACV (outputs)
(colour ratio 80%)
ACV (developments) 34,000 developments
23,528 outputs
Max. CV (outputs)
(colour ratio 80%)
Max. CV (development) 80,000 developments
Colour Ratio 80%
Thick Paper Ratio 25% or less
Coverage of Chart 50% or less (each Colour 12.5% )
22
Key Selling Points

Enhanced Image Quality
The CCR132 has many image quality enhancements based on current and newly
developed technologies. Its stability and durability are also improved.
Its excellent quality level is achieved by brushing up the fundamental image

processing system as follows.
New Technologies and Improvements

New CCD: 7300 Pixel -600 dpi / 10 bit Scanner
Mechanical noise exists in 10 bit scanned data. The scanned data is converted into
8 bit data and mechanical noises will be removed.
Smooth Gradation
New Dither Pattern
Phase Control Dither Pattern
New dither pattern contributes to the image quality of gradation and smoothness.
Sharpness
New Development Method
Narrow Gap Development method
New development system enables better reproduction quality of dots in highlight area.
Glossiness
Improved Paper Transfer Method
Three Paper Transfer Speed
In order to achieve sufficient glossiness image on thick paper and extra thick paper,
the CCR132 transfers paper at three different speed for each weight range.
23
High Productivity
The CCR132 offers higher performance in copying and printing productivity

compared with the CCR100/106. The engine speed is increased by 30%. Full Colo ur
Image Rotation provides better performance. With the optional 20 bin sorter stapler
and 1500 sheets LCT, the CCR132 offers higher productivity.
13 CPM / PPM in Full Colo ur

51 CPM / PPM in BW
14 sec. Full Colo ur 1st Copy
Full Colo ur Image Rotation
Full Colour Image Rotation
A4 SEF to A4LEF
(LT SEF to LT LEF)
Reduction copy
from A3 to A4
(DLT to LT)
Improved performance without sacrificing image quality
Comparison
Item Model CCR100/106 CCR132

Scanner 400 dpi / 10 bit 600 dpi / 10 bit
Full Colo ur CPM / PPM 10 cpm 13 cpm
BW CPM / PPM 40 cpm 51 cpm
1st Copy Speed in FC 16.5 sec. 14 sec.
Image Rotation Bk, 1C Full Colo ur
Wider Paper Capabilities
Model the CCR100/106 has very strong advantages in Paper Handling Capabilities.
Thanks to ST paper transfer system, the CCR132 can also handle extra thick paper. In
order to strengthen this advantage, the paper capacity in the Bypass Tray is increased
to 250 sheets (100g/m2 ). In addition, the CCR132 can feed extra thick paper
24
(256g/m2 , 68lbs) from 2nd and 3rd tray. These features assist the total productivity
improvement.
*There are three paper weight modes for the CCR132. The paper weight setting
should be changed in User Tools every time you change the weight range of the
paper. Otherwise the machine may be damaged at fusing unit and so on.
250 sheets
(100gsm)
Up to 256
g/m2 ,68lbs. Paper
*Paper tray
setting should be
changed in User
Tools.
256 g/m2 , 68lbs paper from 2nd and 3rd tray.

By adopting newly designed parts, the CCR132 handles Extra Thick Paper (up to
256g/m2 ) from 2nd and 3rd tray.
Bypass tray lift system

In order to increase bypass tray capacity, the CCR132 adopted paper tray lift
system. Therefore 1st copy time from bypass tray is delayed by up to 5 seconds
while the tray lifts up to feeding position. Once the tray lifts, the tray maintains
the position for up to 25 seconds to avoid productivity loss.
Improved Paper Transfer Path

Dipping up-hill Paper Path
In order to increase capability of
versatile paper handling, the
CCR132 adopts new paper transfer
path, Dipping up-hill Paper Path.
This system contributes to stabilising
high image quality.
25
Note: please see the Service Documentation for further details.

Two Types of Controller
Two types of EFI controller will be available for the CCR132. One is the E-710
embedded type controller, which is a lower cost solution. The other one is the E-810
external type controller, designed to achieve high performance.
Please see Printer Controllers product information for details of printer functions.
The embedded controller and external controller cannot be attached together.
New Twin Colour
Twin colour is a useful function to make a point colour copy quickly. In addition to
the current twin colour capability, a new twin colour feature allows user to select a
combination of the colour output.
Current Twin Colour (Black and Other Colours)
Black part on the original: Copied in Black (or other selected colours)
Other Colour part on the original : Copied in Other selected Colours
Original Copy
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
Current twin colour function separates original image into black part and colour part
and changes the colour of each part.
Newly added Twin Colour (Red and Black)
Red part on the original: Copied in Red

Other Colour part on the original: Copied in Black
Original Copy
26
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
New twin colour function separates original image into red part and other colour part
to highlight red part on the original.
New Energy Saver Mode
The CCR132 enters energy saver mode automatically to decrease power consumption
after a certain period of non-operation. The CCR100/106 has this function, but some
customers complained about a long recovery time. With the CCR132, the user can
select the power consumption and recovery period from 3 different selections.
Power Consumption Recovery Time

Level 1 Operation Panel = Off 0 sec.
*Default: Level 1
27
User Familiar Features
Priority Copy Mode for BW Copying
Most customers select Text Mode for BW copying. However the CCR100/106 could
not pre-assign copy mode (e.g. text, photo or etc.) for BW copies. In the CCR132, you
can pre-assign Text Mode for BW Copies.
Priority Tray for Full Colour Copy Mode
This feature enables customers to pre-select suitable types of paper. Many customers
change type of papers according to the output requirement. When output is Colo ur,
you would choose high quality paper for colo ur. When output is BW, you dont want
to choose high quality and high cost paper. In CCR132, you can pre-assign any or all
paper trays (includ ing the LCT) except Bypass tray in Full Colo ur Copy mode.
When you select ACS / Auto Colour Selection mode, this feature is not available,
because the paper is already fed from a certain paper tray before the CCR132 selects colour
mode automatically in ACS mode.
28
Product, Options and Consumables Logistics
Configuration and Option Interchangeability
Configuration
2
1
4
9 Edit
8
Item
Platen Cover Common with CCR060/62/68/100/106
DF64 / ARDF Common with CCR060/62/68/100/106
20 bin sorter stapler Common with CCR100/106
need to replace the ROM for the CCR132
(please refer to Service documentation)
Original Tray Common with CCR060/62/68/100/106
Large Capacity Tray(LCT) Common with CCR100/106
LCT Adapter Common with CCR100/106
Controller Interface New : For Embedded Controller
Controller Interface New : For External Controller
Editing Kit New : ROM Kit for Area Editing
29
Option Correlation
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1. Platen cover X
2. DF64 / ARDF X
3. 20 bin SS
4. Original Tray
5. LCT M
6. LCT Adapter M
7. Controller I/F Emb X
8. Controller I/F Ext X
9. Editing Kit
X: Cannot be attached together
M: Must install together
Option Interchangeability
Model
CCR132 CCR100/106 CCR060A/62A CCR060/62 BW Copier
Item
Platen Cover OK OK OK OK
CMR221B,
DF64 / ARDF OK OK OK OK CMR271, CMR352,
CMR406/506
20 bin SS OK * OK NG NG
LCT OK OK NG NG DMR35/45
LCT Adapter OK OK NG NG
Original tray OK OK OK OK CMR512B/602B
Embedded
Controller OK NG NG NG
Interface
External
Controller OK NG NG NG
Interface
Editing Unit OK NG NG NG
OK: Can be used for this model

NG: Cannot be used for this model
* need to replace the ROM
30
Codes

CCR132
Options
PC100 Platen Cover
DF64 ARDF
ST33 20 Bin Sorter Stapler
CSC80 Staples for ST33
Type F Original Trays
RT36 Large Capacity Tray 1500 sheets
Type A LCT Adapter
Type I Embedded Controller Interface
Type J External Controller Interface
Type 6000 Edit Option
Supplies Branded
CT115BLK Gestetner Black Toner
CT115YLW Gestetner Yellow Toner
CT115MGT Gestetner Magenta Toner
CT115CYN Gestetner Cyan Toner
CT115BLK Nashuatec Black Toner
CT115YLW Nashuatec Yellow Toner
CT115MGT Nashuatec Magenta Toner
CT115CYN Nashuatec Cyan Toner
CT115BLK Rex-Rotary Black Toner
CT115YLW Rex-Rotary Yellow Toner
CT115MGT Rex-Rotary Magenta Toner
CT115CYN Rex-Rotary Cyan Toner
Supplies Generic
CD113BLK Black Developer
CD113YLW Yellow Developer
CD113MGT Magenta Developer
CD113CYN Cyan Developer
COPC20 OPC Drum
Language sets

CCDK132GB Language set - English
CCDK132F Language set French
CCDK132D Language set German
CCDK132I Language set Italian
CCDK132E Language set Spanish
CCDK132NL Language set Dutch
CCDK132DK Language set Danish
CCDK132S Language set Sweden
CCDK132P Language set Portuguese
CCDK132PL Language set Polish
CCDK132N Language set Norwegian
CCDK132CZ Language set - Czech
31
Whats in the box?
CMR Code CCR132

Model name Gestetner CS213
Nashuatec CS513
Rex Rotary CS813
1 Platen Cover No (Option)
2 Copy Tray Yes
3 Drum Yes
4 Operation panel Symbol
5 Language ROM Standard
6 Language 1.English
(Pre-installed) 2.German
3.French
4.Italian
7 Operation Instruction No
8 O/I Holder Yes
9 Favourite Key Decal Yes
Symbol
10 Inner Instruction Sheet (Non Yes
word)
11 NECR No
12 User Survey Card No
13 Drum Warranty Sheet No
14 Machine Warranty Sheet No
15 Branding Plaque Yes
Gestetner / Nashuatec / Rex Rotary
16 Brand Decal on Operation panel Yes
Gestetner / Nashuatec / Rex Rotary
17 Caution Decal Yes
(Prevention against Counterfeit) English
18 Instruction Procedure Sheet Yes
(Prevention against counterfeit) (English/German/ French/Spanish/ Italian)
19 Touch Panel Pen No (Accessory of Edit Option)
20 Energy Star Sticker Yes
32
E-710 Product Information Guide
PRODUCT
INFORMATION GUIDE
E-710
Fiery Print Controller
Guernsey.
1
Executive Summary
The E-710 Fiery Print Controller is the new embedded controller for the colour copier
model CCR132. It is the replacement of the current E-700 and it is not compatible
with the CCR100/106 series.
The E-700 has been upgraded to be compatible with the CCR132 copier and the
model name has been changed to E-710.
The upgrade is related to the software release - and not to the hardware - so that most
of the specifications and features of the E-710 are the same as the current E-700.
It is also possible to convert the existing E-700 to the E-710, with a convert kit,
available as an option.
2
Product Overview
Product Image
Mainframe
Rear View of the CCR132
The controllers
operation panel,
which is included
in I/F Type I, can
be attached to the
copiers operation
panel.
E-710 can be installed in
the interface kit, which is
attached to the backside of
the copier.
Connectivity and Option
CCR132+ E-710*+ Controller Interface TypeI**
AppleTalk, TCP/IP, IPX, on Ethernet 10/100baseT
IBM PC compatible Macintosh Unix Workstation
* Main component of E-710 - Motherboard, documents, User CD, Printer Manager CD, Dongle
** Main component of Controller Interface Type I Interface unit, LCD panel, covers, cables
3
Product Outline
Basic Specification
Model Colour Controller E-710

Memory 256MB standard
Direct Access Storage Device
Internal HDD 8.4GB EIDE drive
ZIP Drive None
CD-ROM Drive Optional (For System Install only)
Motherboard
CPU Intel Celeron 366MHz
Interface RS232C (DB9) serial port (Not Used)
RJ45 for Ethernet 10/100 base T
Slots 32 bit PCI for Copier I/F
Operating System Windows NT v4.0
Compression ECT Compression Technology (Always ON)
Page Description Language PostScript 3
Fonts Expanded 136 Adobe Type 1
Power Supply 110 / 220V
Network Protocol Apple Talk, TCP/IP, Novell IPX
(Auto switching )
Utility Fiery Scan, Fiery Down Loader, Fiery Web Tools,
ColourWise Pro Tools, Fiery Unidriver, Fiery Link
Fiery Spooler (for Mac only),
Command WorkStation software (option for Windows
only )
Colour Management Tools ICC Profile, PANTONE Certification, Colour Chart,
CMYK Colour Reference Pages, RGB Colour Tests,
Trapping and Overprinting Support, ColourWise Pro
Tools (Calibrator, Colour Editor, Profile Manager,
Colour Setup)
Calibration Auto CAL2, Client-base Calibration,
Print Resolution 600 x 600 for all paper size
Enhanced 4800 x 600 dpi with Smoothing
Scan Resolution Max 600 dpi with software compression
4
Controller Functions
Printing Features
Postscript 3
Electronic Collation / Reverse Order Printing can be selected in the PPD for each job,
or can be set up as default in the server.
600dpi / 13 ppm
In both copier and printer mode, the CCR132 is 600dpi at 13ppm/cpm (FC)
51ppm/cpm (BW).
In addition, print resolution can be enhanced to 4800 x 600 dpi with Smoothing. This
can be achieved by setting Smoothing to ON in the PPD option.
Continuous Print
Because E-710 stores the entire document in RAM before it is sent to the copier, the
engine does not pause or cycle down to wait for the E-710 to finish processing the
data. This technology saves time and allows E-710 to drive the CCR132 at its highest
speed.
Rip-While-Print
This technology increases throughput by allowing E-710 to begin processing new
documents while the current document is printing. Rip-While-Print is not supported
with reverse order printing and electronic collation, which require processing of the
entire job before printing.
ECT Compression Technology

This compression techno logy of EFI optimises memory storage by blending a
combination of loss less and lossy compression techniques, choosing the best
technique for each portion of image. However to a human eye, the net result is
visually loss less compression.
Colour Management
Same as E-800A/E-700/E-310, the E-710 supports ColourWise2.0. In addition to the

feature set of ColourWise1.0, the ColourWise2.0 allows users to download ICC
monitor profiles to E-710, which fully integrates E-710 into industry level. It also
includes ColourWise Pro Tools utility, which replaces the Fiery Print Calibrator.
Calibration Methods
The following calibration methods are available.

- AutoCAL2
- Calibration via Client
CMYK Simulation
Converts all CMYK data to match selected colourspace parame ters

(DIC/Euroscale/SWOP coated/None). When CMYK Simulation is enabled, CMYK
Simulation method is TBA.
5
Pure Black Text/Graphics
Define RGB (0,0,0) blacks to be printed as 100% black toner.

Using Press Standard mode, black text may be printed at a lower density than user
expects. By setting this feature ON, user can obtain more deep black text.
Black Overprint / Combine Separation (Trapping/Overprinting)
Composite PostScript printing devices typically knock-out background layers when

drawing on top of them. By using Black Overprint, black text and graphics are
rendered over the background (solid colour, blend, or Image) as overprint. By this, it
prevents unpleasant results such as hollowing regardless of application.
This mode is always On, but ignored if Pure Black Text/Graphics are Off.
By using Combine Separation feature, E-710 supports trapping and overprinting
commands sent with QuarkXpress, Illustrator and Pagemaker files and will recombine
desktop colour separated (DCS) files into composite images. This mode is not
compatible with Spot Colour Matching.
RGB Separation
Simulates RGB data based on CMYK Simulation profile. In ColourWise 2.0 RGB
Separation allows RGB data to be converted first to an intermediate CMYK colo ur
space representing another printing device, then passes through the Simulation path
along with CMYK data. This feature is an important advance for Pre-Press/Graphics
environments where there is a strong desire to utilise RGB workflows. Enabled
only when CMYK Simulation is enabled.
Spot Colour Matching
Look-up tables on the E-710 are used to provide the most accurate simulation of
Named Colours for each output device. Initially, Pantone tables will be provided,
but the mechanism supports the existence of multiple tables for variously Named
Colour Systems.
Downloadable ICC Profiles
To support user downloadable ICC Profiles is a core feature of ColourWise2.0. Users

can download ICC profiles to replace the function of EFIs printer profile. This allows
advanced users to define the CMYK values when converting from RGB or when
simulating another printing device. Application of the ICC Profiles is further
described in the Profile Manager of ColourWise Pro Tools.
Networking/Connectivity
Same as E-800A/E-700/E-310, the E-710 supports NetWise2.0. NetWise2.0 allows

users to set-up quickly and easily E-710 within any network environment. It also
supports the management service including SNMP agent to support variety of MIBs.
6
Network Protocol, Printing services, Frame Type
Protocol Printing Frame Type Platform

Service
Novell IPX/SPX Pserver Ethernet 802.2 WindowsNT4.0
Ethernet 802.3 Windows95/98/Me/
Ethernet-II Windows2000
Ethernet SNAP
TCP/IP LPD Ethernet-II WindowsNT4.0
Windows2000
Windows95/98/Me
Solaris 2.x
SunOS
TCP/IP SMB Ethernet-II WindowsNT4.0
Windows95/98/Me
Windows2000
Apple Talk PAP Ethernet SNAP WindowsNT4.0
(EtherTalk Phase 2 only) Macintosh
Note: 1) LPD and PServer printing support for Windows95/98/Me requires additional
user-provided software.
Note: 2) Support for IPX/SPX is for printing, not for utilities
Note: 3) Fiery communicates to Netware and not with client OS
Note: 4) This covers support for printing.
Printing Service
LPD (Line Printer Daemon)

Pserver (Print Server)
PAP (Printer Access Protocol)
SMB (Server Message Block)
Management Service
HTTP Daemon
SNMP agent
Supported MIBs
Host Resource MIB - system, storage, and device groups only

Printer MIB - customised for support of specific engine features
MIB-II - TCP/IP interface
EFI MIB - Fiery specific support
Auto-detect 10 and 100 BaseT Ethernet
E-710 motherboard has an Auto-detect 10/100 BaseT port as standard.
7
Novell NDS Support
In addition to Bindery mode, E-710 supports NDS simultaneously in NetWare

network.
SMB
E-710 supports direct printing from Windows 95 / 98/Me/2000 and Windows NT.
Auto Configure IP
E-710 supports DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol-the protocol which

enables auto setup for the client on TCP/IP network) which automatically
communicates with a DHCP server and obtains information directly from the network
when the IP Auto radio button has been selected.
This feature allows users to set-up the E-710 quickly and easily.
Printer Manager Support (SNMP Support)
The E-710 supports Printer Manager (e.g. Aficio Manager 3.5) for printing solution
utility. This enables E-710 to broadcast reports to agent software on the network
regarding the Fiery configuration and status. E-710 provides support for a variety of
MIBs over the UDP protocol and conforms to version 1 of SNMP.
Macintosh is not supported. For the basic feature of Printer Manager please refer to
the NPLI for Aficio Manager (Peripheral Manager V3.5).
Following are the limitations of using Printer Manager over E-710.
NIB setup is not available.

Printer Manager basically supports 14 languages, but installing languages except
for English, French, German, Spanish and Italian may cause unexpected character
description in some part. This is because Fiery only supports above mentioned 5
languages.
Only the default product bitmap will be displayed.
Job Statistics shows job log information based on controller log, not on copier log.
So the total count of Job Statistics may not match with that of copier.
Scanner information cannot be monitored or managed.
Energy save control is not supported.
8
Supported Copier Functions
Sort/ Staple
Sort/Staple with 20bin sorter is supported.

Staple positions: three positions
Please see the following chart for supported paper size.

20 bin
Paper Duplex
Paper Direction size Unit Sorter Stapler
Plain Thick Extra Plain Thick Extra
A3 SEF 297x420 O O O O O O O
B4 SEF 257x364 O O O O O O O
A4 SEF 210x297 O O O O O O O
A4 LEF 297x210 O O O O O O O
B5 SEF 182x257 O O O O O O O
B5 LEF 257x182 O O O O O O O
A5 SEF 148x210 X X X X X X X
A5 LEF 210x148 O X X X X X X
B6 SEF 128x182 X X X X X X X
A6 SEF 105x148 X X X X X X X
Hagaki SEF 100x148 X X X X X X X
Double-PC SEF 148x200 X X X X X X X
DLT SEF 11x17 O O O O O O O
LG SEF 8.5x14 O O O O O O O
F4 SEF 8.5x13 O O O O O O O
LT SEF 8.5x11 O O O O O O O
LT LEF 11x8.5 O O O O O O O
HLT SEF 5.5x8.5 X X X X X X X
HLT LEF 8.5x5.5 O X X X X X X
12X18 SEF 12x18 X O O O O O O
13X19 SEF 13x19 X O O O O O O
O The paper size which can be used.

X The paper size which cannot be used.
If a user requests more than 20 sets of copies in Sort Mode, the bin max of 20-bin
sorter will be exceeded. The user is requested to resend any additional copies required
after removing the paper from the output bins.
If a print job exceeds the maximum bins capacity, which is approximately 20 pages
per bin for plain paper, the job will resume printing after the output bins are cleared.
9
Auto Duplex Printing
Auto duplex printing with the CCR132 copiers is supported.
E-710 offers two binding modes in duplex printing, Top Binding and Side Binding.
Supported paper sizes for auto duplex print are:

LT, DLT, A3, A4, B4, B5, LG, A5 (LEF), HLT (LEF), F4 (8x13)
(Please see caption 2.9)
Auto Duplex Printing with Sort/Staple
E-710 offers two binding modes in duplex printing, Top Binding and Side Binding.
In the PPD option, please select appropriate combination of paper size (LEF, SEF),
landscape/portrait, Rotation on/off, stapler mode, and Top Binding and Side Binding.
11x17 / A3 Full Bleed Printing on 12x18 Paper,

11x17 / A3 Full Bleed Printing with crop mark on 13x19 Paper
E-710 supports printing on a very wide format. The 11x17/ A3 full bleed print is
possible with 12x18 paper. Moreover, the 11x17 / A3 full bleed print with crop
mark is possible on 13x19 paper.
* 11x17 / A3 Three sides full bleed printing will NOT be supported.
OHP Slip Sheet
Blank paper can automatically be inserted between OHP transparencies when they are
printed out.
You can choose Transparency + Slip sheet as Media Type in the PPD option.
Auto Tray Switching
When the user sends a job with tray set to Auto Select and the tray runs out of paper
during printing, it automatically switches to another tray including LCT (but not by-
pass tray) with the same paper size/direction.
Supported Copier Peripherals
Printer Copier
ARDF Scanning from ARDF is available with Available
limitation.
20bin sorter Available Available
Large Capacity Tray Available Available
Key Counter Not available Available
10
Supported Media Types
Plain paper
Thick paper (2nd / 3rd /bypass tray)
Extra Thick paper (2nd / 3rd /bypass tray)
Transparency (Bypass tray only)
The CCR132 supports Thick/Extra Thick paper from 2nd and 3rd trays.
You can choose the media types in the PPD to print from 2nd and 3rd trays, as well as
bypass tray.
(When printing Thick/Extra Thick paper/Transparency from bypass tray, make sure
that the actual media type set in the bypass tray matches the media type selected in E-
710s properties dialog box to avoid paper jam etc.)
Fiery Utilities
There are some utilities that E-710 will not support, although E-800A supports them.
See Features NOT supported with E-710 below for such utilities.
Fiery Downloader
This allows users to:
Download PS files, EPS files and PDF files to Fiery.

Check the status of Fiery
Manage and display the PostScript printer fonts stored on the Fiery hard disk
Drag PostScript files and Type1 fonts onto the Fiery Downloader icon to download
them (Windows95 /Me/98 only)
Fiery Scan
This allows users to scan documents from Copier-glass or ARDF.
Supported applications
The Fiery Scan plug- in is supported for use with Adobe Photoshop ver4.0 or later.
Other Twain-compatible application for both Macintosh and Windows may work with
the Fiery Scan plug- in, but they will not be evaluated nor supported.
Scanning feature
Maximum scan resolution is 600 dpi with software compression. The Fiery Scan
reads the document from the copier-glass at 600 dpi but uses software compression
inside the Fiery depending on the combination of selected resolution, scanning size,
scan mode, and data type. Therefore, the maximum resolution is A3/Tabloid 600 dpi,
but it is software enhanced 600 dpi. User can adjust brightness to lighten or darken the
images. Threshold is supported only if Black and White is selected, to specify certain
level as threshold.
11
ARDF support
Scanning from ARDF is supported with limitations. E-710 will initially attempt to
scan a docume nt from the ARDF. If no document is present in the ARDF, E-710 will
scan from the Copier-glass.
After the user prescans and scans a page, whether from the ARDF or platen, the Fiery
Scan plug- in module closes to return the page to the application. To scan each
subsequent page, whether the next page of the ARDF job or a new job in the platen,
the user needs to reopen the Fiery Scan plug- in module to prescan and scan the page.
Fiery Link
The Fiery Link is a utility designed to give the user up-to-date status on printer jobs
and connected Fierys from their workstations. It tracks the status of each print job sent
by the user and alerts the user to any error reported by E-710. The Fiery Link includes
the following tools that can be used to monitor either a users print job or a connected
E-710.
Status (Shows the state of the job)

Queue Position (Shows the number of remaining jobs queued to print
on the E-710)
File Info (Displays the file name, when it was sent, target Fiery
and number of copies)
Input Trays (Shows paper levels in all trays)
Toner (Shows the level of available toners)
Fiery Info (Shows Model name, amount of memory, HDD space,
software version of E-710)
Support (List the contact names for the E-710 and the engine)
Fiery Unidriver
Fiery Unidriver is a unified printing interface for use with Adobe PSDriver for
Windows 95/98. The collapsible bars in the Fiery Printing tab serve as a control
centre for all frequently used printing functions. By locating infrequently used
features in other tabs, Fiery Printing reduces the total number of tabs that are needed
in the driver and provides visual feedback to the users.
With E-710, colour setting is available from Unidriver. It can be selected by clicking
Expert Setting button in ColourWise.
12
ColourWise Pro Tools
In replacement of Fiery Print Calibrator, The ColourWise Pro Tools (CWPT) are the
primary mean for the user to utilize the advanced capability of ColourWise 2.0. The
CWPT are composed of the following modules.
Calibrator
Calibrator option is designed to make calibration as simple as possible. There are 2
modes in this option, Standard Mode and Expert Mode. Users can select measurement
method, check print settings, etc.
Profile Manager
Profile Manager allows users to download/upload ICC profiles between Client
Profiles (ICC profiles on the clients workstation) and Server Profiles (ICC profiles
resident on E-710).
Colour Editor
By clicking the Colour Editor icon, users can customize a specific profile. Users can
customize the curves of CMYK, Brightness, D-max, and Dot Gain in this Colour
Editor.
Colour Setup
Colour Setup is used to set the default ColourWise settings for the E-710 and can be
accessed by clicking its icon in the ColourWise Pro Tools main window. For most
users, the factory defaults result in optimal colour output.
Fiery WebTools
The Fiery WebTools reside on the Fiery Colour Server and are loaded into the
working memory of a client workstation for use through any Internet browser that
supports frames and Java such as Netscape Navigator or Microsoft Internet Explorer
(please refer to the requirements below.)
13
Requirements
Usage of the Fiery WebTools requires the following:
The enablement of TCP/IP with a valid IP address on the Fiery

Installation of TCP/IP on the users workstation with a valid IP address
The installation of an Internet Browser that supports Java and frames, such as
Netscapes Navigator or Microsofts Internet Explorer, on the users
workstation. The recommended version of each browser is to be announced.
The Fiery must have TCP/IP enabled and a valid IP address entered. No DNS name is
required. The user is responsible for all inter and intranet security issues.
Fiery WebTools consist of 6 applications:

Status
WebSpooler
Installer
WebLink
Web Downloader
WebSetup
Fiery Status
Fiery Status displays Printing and Ripping information updated every 30 seconds by
the Fiery.
WebSpooler
The Fiery WebSpooler provides the same functionality as the stand-alone Fiery
Spooler with the following exceptions:
Authorisation
This determines the level of authorisation from the initial connection from the users
browser to the Fiery Server. Administrator and Operator logins can view and modify
all print jobs on the Fiery; Guest logins can only view print jobs on the Fiery.
JobLog
It is not possible to retrieve the error message through the WebSpoolers Job Log
when double-clicking on an entry in the Job Log that generated an error while
printing.
*Thumbnail and DocBuilder will not be supported nor functional, though Thumbnail
preview is displayed.
Installer
The PostScript printer drivers shipped with the Fiery are also shipped on the Fiery
hard drive. User can access these drivers by clicking the appropriate link in the Install
WebTool window. Also the Installer WebTool allows users to easily download Fiery
Link from E-710 to your workstation.
14
WebLink
Selecting the WebLink WebTool links the user to a remote site in the Tool Frame.
Web Downloader
Allows users to download PostScript, EPS, and PDF files to the E-710.
Web Setup
The Fiery Web Setup allows a user to configure the Fiery remotely in a graphical
environment.
*The Fiery Web Setup cannot be accessed from Macintosh.
Fiery Spooler (for Mac only)
The basic functions of the Fiery Spooler are:
Override current job option setting

Delete jobs and cancel processing
Duplicate or rename jobs
RIP a job and hold the raster data
Hold jobs in the spooler area or the RIPped area
Remove raster data from RIPped files
Change the priority of jobs
Display, print, save, or delete the Job Log
Note: Fiery Spooler is available on Macintosh only.

Windows users can use the same feature through Web Spooler or Command
WorkStation software (Option), installed in the client Windows computer.
*Thumbnail and DocBuilder will not be supported nor functional, though Thumbnail
preview is displayed.
15
Command WorkStation software (Option)
This software is available as an option. Command WorkStation can be installed to

Windows 95/98//Me/NT4.0/2000 to manage Fierys centrally on a TCP/IP network.
Up to 5 Fierys can be connected to Command WorkStation.
Command WorkStation extends control beyond Fiery Spooler, features of
Downloader and ColourWise Pro Tools is available. It also enables data archiving to
the E-710 hard disk, or network connected drives.
Thumbnail is displayed but it is not functional.
Note 1: The software version of Command WorkStation for E-710 is different from
Command WorkStation for E-700. EFI states that the Command WorkStation should
be upward compatible, and therefore it should be possible to use this latest version for
both E-700 and E-710. However, due to the fact that EFI does not test the newer
version to the earlier EFI products, it is recommended to use the correct version for
each product.
Note 2: Thumbnail and DocBuilder function will not be supported nor functional,
though Thumbnail preview is displayed.
16
Available Utility by platform
Macintosh Win 3.1 Win 95/98/Me Win NT4.0/

Win 2000
Fiery Downloader Apple Talk N/A TCP/IP TCP/IP
Fiery Scan Apple Talk N/A TCP/IP TCP/IP
Fiery Spooler TCP/IP N/A N/A N/A

Java
Command N/A N/A TCP/IP TCP/IP
WorkStation
Data Archive N/A N/A TCP/IP TCP/IP
Fiery Link TCP/IP N/A TCP/IP TCP/IP

Java Java Java
Fiery Unidriver N/A N/A Available N/A
ColourWise Pro TCP/IP N/A TCP/IP TCP/IP

Tools Java Java Java
Fiery Web Tools Available except N/A Available Available
WebSetup
Software Version
Macintosh Win 95/98/Me Win NT4.0/Win 2000

Fiery Downloader 3.2.038 3.2.038_2 3.2.038_2
Fiery Scan 3.4.1 3.4.3 3.4.3
Fiery Spooler 4.5.108 N/A N/A
Command WorkStation N/A 3.4.20 3.4.20
Fiery Link 1.0.026 1.0.026 1.0.026
Fiery Unidriver N/A 1.2.092.2 N/A
ColourWise Pro Tools 1.1.045 1.1.045 1.1.045
Fiery Web Tools
- Web Setup 1.95.8 1.95.8 1.95.8
- Fiery Web Spooler N/A 4.5.108 4.5.108
Features NOT supported with E-710
- Dual copier
- Plotter
- Face down Printing
- Fiery FreeForm
- DocBuilder Pro
- Thumbnail and DocBuilder Function
17
Controller/Copier Compatibility
Following combinations are NOT supported :
Current controllers (i.e. E-300, RC-200, RC-210, E-800A) to the CCR132

E-710 to copiers other than the CCR132 (i.e.
CCR060/62/68/066A/067A/100/106)
E-700 without Convert kit to the CCR132
Note
* Since the copier engine speed and specification will be different for the
CCR100/106 and the CCR132, the E-700 needs to be converted to connect to the
CCR132. For details about upgrade, please refer to the following chapter.
Convert the E-700 to the E-710
E-700 Conversion Kit includes:
System CD
E710 Media Pack (User CD / English Manuals) (*)
Dongle (**)
Install Guide for Conversion Kit
The E-700 needs to be converted with the E-700 Conversion Kit to be connected to
the CCR132, because the copier engine speed and specification will be different for
the CCR100/106 and the CCR132.
In case you convert the E-700 to connect it to the CCR132, Interface for E-710
(Interface Type I - NEW) will be necessary.
(*) Italian, French, German and Spanish E-710 Media packs have to be ordered
separately
(**) With the Dongle, this controller is recognised as E-710. So the Dongle is
necessary with the E-710 and it will be delivered with the new controller itself.
18
Printable Paper size
O : The paper size that can be used.

X : The paper size that cannot be used.
Paper Size Paper Paper Tray Bypass Media Type

Tray 1st 2nd-3rd Tray** (Thick/Extra
Thick)
Paper Tray
2nd-3rd
A3 SEF 297x420 X O O O
A4 SEF 210x297 O O O O
A4 LEF 297x210 O O O O
A5 SEF 148x210 X X O X
A5 LEF 210x148 O O O O
A6 SEF 105x148 X X O X
B4 SEF 257x364 X O O O
B5 SEF 182x257 O O O O
B5 LEF 257x182 O O O O
B6 SEF 128x182 X X O X
11x17 (DLT) SEF 11x17 X O O O
8.5x14(Legal) SEF 8.5x14 X O O O
8.5x13(Legal) SEF 8.5x13 X O O O
8.5x11(Letter) SEF 8.5x11 O O O O
11x8.5(Letter) LEF 11x8.5 O O O O
5.5x8.5 (HLT) SEF 5.5x8.5 X X O O
8.5x5.5 (HLT) LEF 8.5x5.5 O O O O
12x18 SEF 12x18 X X O X
13x19 SEF 13x19 X X O X
*Hagaki (SEF) 100x148 X X O X
* Double Postcard (SEF) 148x200 X X O X
Custom 100x140- X X O X
330x483
*Hagaki and Double Postcard, are Japanese standard postcard / double-postcard

sizes.
** Make sure that paper size selected in E-710s properties dialog box matches the
actual paper size set in the bypass tray to avoid unexpected result.
19
Printable Area / Non-printable Area
Paper Size Printable Area (mm)

Leading near edge
edge
A3 SEF 293 412
A4 SEF 206 289
A4 LEF 293 202
A5 SEF 144 202
A5 LEF 206 140
A6 SEF 101 141
B4 SEF 253 356
B5 SEF 178 249
B5 LEF 253 174
B6 SEF 124 174
11 x 17 (DLT) SEF 275 424
8.5 x 14 (Legal) SEF 212 348
8.5 x 13 (Legal) SEF 212 322
8.5 x 11 (Letter) SEF 212 271
8.5 x 11 (Letter) LEF 275 208
5.5 x 8.5 (HLT) SEF 136 208
8.5 x 5.5 (HLT) LEF 212 132
12 x 18 SEF 301 449
13 x 19 SEF 323 473
Hagaki SEF 96 140
Double Postcard SEF 144 192
Custom 96 x 133 323 x 473
Non-printable Area
All sizes (except for 13 x 19);

(Leading ) (Near) (Far) (Trailing)
4mm x 2mm x 2mm x 4 mm ( 2 mm)
20
Print Speed
(A4 LEF / LT LEF)

Full Single Colour Single Colour Single
Colour (C, M, Y, K) (G, B) Colour (R)
Simplex Plain Paper 13ppm 51ppm 16.5ppm 13ppm
OHP/Thick paper 5ppm 8ppm 6ppm 5ppm
Extra Thick paper 4ppm 5ppm 5ppm 4.5ppm
Duplex Plain Paper 13ppm 45ppm 16.5ppm 13ppm
E-710 supports plain, thick, extra thick and transparency media types due to Model C-
2 specification.
Transparency: only selectable from the bypass tray

Tray 2 and 3 support Thick and Extra Thick papers in Duplex model.
Make sure that media type selected in the printer driver matches the actual paper type
set in the selected tray to avoid unexpected results.
Counter
Two kinds of counting style can be selected at machine installation, Development

Count (number of development (scan)) and Copy Count (number of copied/printed
pages).
Development Count (*Note 1)

Colour Combination Printer Mode Copier Mode
Counter increment Counter increment
Black Colour Black Colour
C+M+Y+K +1 +3 +1 +3
C+M+Y +1 (*Note 2) +3 (Note *2) 0 +3
C+M+K +1 (*Note 2) +3 (Note *2) +1 +2
C+Y+K +1 (*Note 2) +3 (Note *2) +1 +2
M+Y+K +1 (*Note 2) +3 (Note *2) +1 +2
C+M 0 +2 0 +2
C+Y 0 +2 0 +2
M+Y 0 +2 0 +2
C+K +1 +1 +1 +1
M+K +1 +1 +1 +1
Y+K +1 +1 +1 +1
C 0 +1 0 +1
M 0 +1 0 +1
Y 0 +1 0 +1
K +1 0 +1 0
Slip Sheet 0 0 0 0
(*Note 1) The Copy Count and the counter in Copier Mode will remain the same
(*Note 2) The movement is different from the Copier Mode Counter increment due to
the restriction of the Interface.
21
Copy Count
Colour BW Colour BW Colour BW Total*
Copy Copy Print Print Total*
Full colour copy +1 +1
BW copy +1 +1
1C copy +1 +1
2C copy +1 +1
3C copy +1 +1
Full colour print +1 +1
BW print +1 +1
1C print +1 +1
2C print +1 +1
3C print +1 +1
Slip Sheet 0 0 0 0
Mechanical counter displays Colour total and BW total.
System Requirement
Macintosh System
Macintosh System can be used with an Ethernet network.
Hardware supported:
All currently available Power Macintosh models with at least 32MB of RAM.
Software supported:
Apple System Software version 8.1 or later

Adobe PostScript Printer Driver version 8.5 or later (version 8.6 is
included with the user software)
To use Fiery utilities (Fiery Downloader, ColourWise Pro Tools, Fiery Link, and
Fiery Spooler), you also need:
at least 64 MB of RAM.
A Mac OS based computer with Apple System Software version 8.1 or later (8.6
is recommended)
To use Fiery Scan, you need Mac OS 8.5 or later (8.6 is recommended) and Adobe
Photoshop version 5.0 or later.
To use Web Tools, you also need Netscape Communicator v4.5 or later, with Java
enabled, or Internet Explorer v4.0.1 or later, with Java enabled.
Note: Netscape continues to release frequent updates to its browser. As support

cannot be guaranteed for all versions, use the version specified above for best results.
22
IBM PC or Compatible PCs
Hardware supported:
A PC with an 80486, AMD or Pentium processor

Win 95/98/Me/2000 or Win NT 4.0
You also need:
At least 16MB of RAM for Win 95

At least 32MB of RAM for Win Me
At least 32MB of RAM for Win NT 4.0
Software supported:
MS-Windows 95/98/Me with IPX/SPX or TCP/IP networking protocol and
You also need:
Adobe PS printer driver for Windows version 4.2 or later (version 4.3.1 is
MS-Windows NT 4.0 and Windows 2000 with IPX/SPX, TCP/IP or Apple Talk
networking protocol
You also need:
For MS-Windows 2000, MS PS printer driver (included with your Windows 2000
OS)
For MS- Windows NT 4.0, Adobe PS printer driver version 5.0 (version 5.1 is
* Even though it may be possible to print out from Windows NT TSE, it is not
officially supported by EFI.
To use Fiery utilities (Fiery Downloader, ColourWise Pro Tools, and Fiery Link), you
also need:
Windows 95/98/Me/2000 or Windows NT4.0 with NT Service Pack 5 or later

At least 48 MB RAM; 56MB -RAM is recommended
To use Fiery Scan, you also need Adobe Photoshop version 4.0 or later.
To use Fiery Web Tools, you also need either Netscape Communicator version 4.5 or
later, and Java enabled or Microsoft Internet Explorer version 4.0.1 and Service Pack
1, or later, with Java enabled.
23
UNIX
A workstation with standard TCP/IP connectivity (for example, Sun

SPARCStation or Silicon Graphics workstation with Solaris version 2.x, 7.x, or
SunOS version 4.1.x software)
TCP/IP printing software that conforms to RFC 1179(Berkeley lpd protocol)
Command WorkStation software CD option
To run the Command WorkStation from a remote workstation, you need:
A Windows-based computer with a 200 MHz Pentium or higher processor

Windows 95/98/Me, or Windows NT4.0 with NT Service Pack 5
TCP/IP networking protocol installed
A video adapter card with at least 2MB of video memory
At least 32 MB of RAM
An 850MB (or greater) hard disk drive
At least 2x (or greater) CD-ROM Drive
A 17 monitor that supports 16-bit colour at a minimum resolution of 1024 x 768
Safety Standard and Emission
Safety approval
- UL 1950/CSA950 edition3
- EN 60950 edition2 (CE Mark and BAUART Mark)
Emissions approval
- FCC Class B
- EN55022 Class B
- VCCI Class B
- AS/NZS 3548 Class B
EMC approval
- EN55024
24

Positioning
Current range New range
Launch: Beginning of March 01
CCR100/106 CCR132 copier

copier
Launch: April 01
E-710
E-700 Embedded controller
E-700 convert kit
Launch: July 01
E-800A E-xxx
The E-710 is the Fiery embedded Print Controller for the CCR132 Colour Solutions;
it replaces the E-700 Print Controller and it is not compatible with the CCR100/106
series.
The E-710 will offer the same functionality and application as the current E-700.
From April, we can also convert the existing E-700 to the E-710, with an optional
convert kit.
Also a new external controller will be available to replace the current E-800A, next
summer. Further information about this new controller will be provided with a
different P.I.G.
25
Comparison Table Fiery Range
If a function is available, the tool to make settings of it is written on the table.

CWPT: ColourWisePro Tools, CP: Control Panel, PD: Printer Driver
N/A: Not available
Colour
E710/ E310 v1.0 E700 E650 E800A
E310 v1.1 v1.0
Colour Mode CP/PD (*) CP/PD CP/PD CP/PD CP/PD
(Printer default/
CMYK/
Greyscale)
RGB Source CWPT/CP/PD CWPT/CP CWPT/CP CP/PD CWPT/CP/

Profile PD
Rendering Style CWPT/CP/PD CWPT/CP/PD CWPT/CP/PD CP/PD CWPT/CP/

PD
RGB Separation CWPT/CP/PD CWPT/CP CWPT/CP N/A CWPT/CP/

PD
CMYK Simulation CWPT/CP/PD CWPT/CP CWPT/CP CP/PD CWPT/CP/

Profile PD
CMYK Simulation PD/CP PD/CP PD/CP PD/CP PD/CP

(Quick/Full) (Quick/Full) Full: On/Off) (Quick/Full) (Quick/Full)
Spot Colour CWPT/CP/PD CWPT/CP CWPT/CP CP/PD CWPT/CP/

PD
Pure Black CWPT/CP/PD CWPT/CP CWPT/CP CP/PD CWPT/CP/

Text PD
Black Overprint CWPT/CP/PD CWPT/CP CWPT/CP CP/PD CWPT/CP/

PD
Output Profile CWPT/CP/PD CWPT/CP CWPT/CP N/A CWPT/CP/

PD
Combine PD PD N/A PD PD
Separation
Print by Colour N/A N/A PD (C/M/Y/K) N/A N/A

Selection
(*) Colour Mode/Print Mode

from Windows driver: Print Mode (Standard Expert/Expert Colour/ Greyscale)
from Mac OS driver: Expert Mode
26
Image Quality
E710/ E310 v1.0 E700 E650 E800A v1.0

E310 v1.1
Toner Reduction CP/PD CP/PD CP CP CP/PD
Dithering PD PD PD PD PD
Smoothing PD PD PD PD PD
Brightness PD PD PD PD PD
Others
E710/ E310 v1.0 E700 E650 E800A v1.0

E310 v1.1
Two way N/A (No N/A (No N/A (No N/A (No N/A (The
communication display on display on display on display on checkbox is
For Printer config. The driver) the driver) the driver) the driver) displayed but
doesnt work)
ADF Scan 1 by 1 sheet 1 by 1 sheet 1 by 1 sheet N/A 1 by 1 sheet

can be can be can be can be
scanned and scanned and scanned and scanned and
saved (No saved (No saved (No saved (No
support for support for support for support for
Multi-TIFF) Multi-TIFF) Multi-TIFF) Multi-TIFF)
Command Option Option Option N/A Standard

WorkStation (Thumbnail (Thumbnail (Thumbnail (Thumbnail
Is displayed Is displayed Is displayed works)
but not but not but not
functional functional functional
27
Performance Test Data
Test Conditions: Using Fiery Downloader, the RIP time (from Hold queue to
Printing) was measured. Test was done three times, and the average RIP time is
shown on the graph below.
E-710 performance test was done with the latest X3e software version.
A4 Graphics A4 Letter A3 Photo

File Name Pp21.eps Letter.eps Photo2.eps
File Size 570KB 1,653KB 18,473KB
No. of pages 3 pages 1 page 1 page
E710
Celeron 366MHz 256MB 4.0 sec 3.3 sec 19.3 sec
E310
E310
E700
E300
R5000 200MHz 160MB 8.6 sec 7.0 sec 41.6 sec
E800A
PenIII 500MHz 320MB 4.0 sec 3.3 sec 16.0 sec
X12
XP12
PenIII 500MHz 512MB 5.0 sec 5.3 sec 22.7 sec
Note 1: X12 and XP12 were tested under different network environment (Software
version unknown). The result with latest v ersion of these products may differ from the
above information.
28
Target Customer & Channels
Target Customers
Number of users Number of Employees
Centralised
More than 100 More than 100
Division Target of Model C-2 +

50-100 External Controller
30-99
Work Group
20-30 Target of Model C-2 + E-710
Small Work Group 5-29
3-10
1-4
(1) Specialised Business (Primary target)
Demand for superior image quality, fast speed, A3/11x17 full bleed (Crop
Mark Print), PS controller and specific price/performance goals.
Type of Business: Graphic and Industrial design, Advertisement
(2) Production Office (Primary target)
Demand for a fast speed, superior image quality, reliability, thick paper
support, A3/11x17 full bleed (Crop mark Print), PS controller and specific
price/performance goals.
Type of Business: Print / Copy Shop, In-plant Print / Copy Centre,
(3) General Office (Secondary target)
Demand for a high productivity, paper capacity, and variety of finishing

options, reliability, and specific price/performance goals.
Type of Use: Shared Printer for a department or a division
29
Product & Options Logistics

Codes
Short Name Description Available

Mainframe E-710 Colour Controller E-710 (256Mb) April 2001
Current E300CD E Series CD-ROM Drive Option Now
Option Kit
New Option DDPAE-710F E-710 Doc. Pack, French May 2001
New Option DDPAE-710D E-710 Doc. Pack, German May 2001
New Option DDPAE-710I E-710 Doc. Pack, Italian May 2001
New Option DDPAE-710E E-710 Doc. Pack, Spanish May 2001
New Option DSWE710CWS Command WorkStation software April 2001
CD option 3
New Option 405305 Controller Interface Type I March 2001
New Option E700CONVKIT E-700 to E-710 Conversion Kit April 2001
The E-710 Local Document Packs have to be ordered separately.

Please note that the previous name Upgrade Kit has been changed to Conversion
kit.
Interfaces
To connect the E-710 and the E-700+Conversion kit to the new CCR132, the
controller interface type I is needed (code 405305).
30
Whats in the box?
Description Whats in the Box?

E-310 Print Controller Controller (366MHz, 256MB)
Screws x 4
Dongle
End-User License Agreement
Media Pack
v User CD Software
v Greyscale strip
v Doc Pack English
- Getting Started
- Colour Guide
- Job Management Guide
- Printing Guide
- Configuration Guide
- Release Note
- Windows NT certificate
Printer Manager CD
v Printer Manager Installation Guide
v Printer Manager Release Notes
Labels (Fiery, PS3)
Command Workstation Command Workstation CD
Software CD (Option 3) Command Workstation Notes for E-710
E-700 to E-710 Media Package English (E-710)
Conversion Kit System Software
Dongle
Install Guide for Conversion kit to E-710
Doc Pack, French Printing Guide
Doc Pack, German Getting Started
Doc Pack, Italian Job Management
Doc Pack, Spanish Configuration Guide
Colour Guide
Release Notes
31
Version 1.11
Valid Until : Augsut 2003
Scanners
SMR30dc
Memory Matrix
WFW Home NPS

SMR30dc Product Information Guide
PRODUCT
INFORMATION GUIDE
SMR30DC
Nashuatec SC430dc
Rex Rotary SC430dc
Gestetner SC430dc
1
Executive Summary
Overview
The SMR430dc is a new Colour Scanner, which can scan at up to 30ppm B/W and 10ppm Colour. It
is a direct replacement for the SC01 (24ppm B/W), which ceased production in December 2000 due
to EMC regulation changes.
The SMR430dc also comes with the option of a Network Interface Board to allow it to be connected
directly into a network. This is a significant change for NRG as previously launched Scanners have
all been B/W and not directly connectable to a network.
The other important feature about the SMR430dc is that it can form part of an integrated solution.
There are currently 3 main solutions available:
1. Document Distribution System Using ScanRouter Lite V2

2. Document Management Using Docuware
3. Forms Recognition Using Eyes and Hands Form Recognition
To enter successfully the general office market that is currently dominated by Fujitsu
To replace the existing SC01 with a higher specification model
To provide a complete network solution to end users
To provide an opportunity for further sales of NRG products (both Hardware and Software) eg
Scan Router Professional v2 or Network Printers
To target successfully a growing niche in the market for a colour, networkable scanner
Key Selling Points
B/W Speed
B/W Speed 30ppm, Colour 10ppm
B/W Speed gives an average scanning volume of 4,000 pages per month or a maximum of
10,000 pages per month
Duplex capability through the ARDF
Networkable
Allows electronic data to be shared on a network simply and efficiently
Scan to email from the mainframe over the network, allowing world-wide distribution of
documents
Colour Capability
10ppm
Up to 600dpi
2
Colour Speed is fastest on market in Workgroup segment
IEEE1394 I/F
Fire Wire
Faster Connection than SCSI (100Mbps, 200Mbps, 400Mbps)
Protocol: SBP2
Software
Bundled with Scan Router Lite v2 and Scan Router Browser v2
Colour and OCR capability in Software
Supported Image Formats:
B/W TIFF, Multi Page TIFF, TIFF-F, DCX, PDF Compression
Colour JPEG, PDF Compression
Unbranded TWAIN which features Scan Counter
User Friendly
Mainframe has been designed to allow the general office user to send and receive scanned
images simply
No training or dedicated member of staff required to use system
A Complete Solution
Document Distribution System Using ScanRouter Lite V2
Document Management Using Docuware
Forms Recognition Using Eyes and Hands Form Recognition
Target Markets
With a B/W speed of 30ppm and a SRP of around $3500, the SMR430dc is placed in the Workgroup
segment of the scanner market. This segment includes any scanner with a speed of 20-36ppm and at a
cost of $2-6k. Key trends within this segment include:
During 1999, 15,258 workgroup scanners were shipped in Europe. Over the forecast period 1999
to 2004 the European market is expected to maintain a CAGR (Compound Average Annual
Growth Rate) of 26%
Colour machines are forecast to increase by 33% between 99-2004, with colour capability
overtaking B/W in 2001
During 1999, the largest markets, in terms of the percentage of total devices shipped, were
Germany (29.3%), the UK (26.2%), France (10.5%) and Italy (9.6%)
Across the entire scanner market, networked machines are forecast to rise at CAGR of 67%
Within the workgroup segment there are 2 different types of user who will use the machine in very
different ways:
1. SCSI Users These will be users looking for a B/W Scanner. They will generally use the machine
for archiving and document management. B/W speed is the most important aspect, with colour and
3
networking only secondary factors. These users will therefore be interested as much in the software
e.g. Docuware or Eyes and Hands Form Recognition as they are in the mainframe.
2. Network / Colour Users These will be users from the general office. These people will require
the Scanner for its network/colour functionality and will use it to distribute digital information around
the office. While the B/W speed may be important to them, it is the colour network functionality that
is key.
Sales Channels
The SMR30dc will be sold through both direct and indirect channels.
Sales Quantities
SC01 - Last 6 months sales

SC01 December January February March April May
Sales (units) 2 11 3 6 2 2
Although sales over the last 6 months have been slow, it is important to remember that many
operations (eg Benelux, UK, NRGI) have only recently launched scanners within their markets. The
other important factor is that many scanner sales come incrementally from software sales eg.
Docuware. Many operations are currently in the process of launching this software. Eyes and Hands
Forms Recognition will be launched in the next few months.
4
Product Overview
Product Concept
The SMR430dc is a new Colour Scanner, which can scan at up to 30ppm B/W and 10ppm Colour.
The product also has the option of a Network Interface Board to allow it to be connected directly into
a network. This is a significant change for NRG as previously launched Scanners have all been B/W
and were not directly connectable to a network.
The idea for this product is to have effectively 2 different versions. One version will be positioned as
a SCSI B/W Scanner with Colour Capability (replacing the SC01), while the other will be a Network
Scanner for shared workgroups.
5
Quality
The SMR430dc offers high image quality with real 600dpi optical resolution and a colour depth of
36-bit input. The maximum output resolution is 2400dpi.
Shared use under network
With the optional NIB, the SMR430dc offers an input solution for shared workgroup devices running
under a network environment. Once the image has been captured, the Cherry (Scan Router V2)
software then allows the distribution of stored scanned images across the network to the workstation
or a shared server. The system also includes compression technology to avoid network performance
problems.
Display addresses
Store and organise documents into
Select address
folder, Administer address book
Scan image
Server
Server
Software
Client Windows
Software File
View or download stored document from the server,

Automatic document reception,
Client document management
6
The system is also fully upgradable after purchasing the full version of the Cherry software.
Store and Organise documents within folders

Distribute documents Administer
Administrate
Administer Address Book scanned documents
Apply to multiple scanners
Server
Server Upgrade Server Upgrade Software
Software Software
Lotus Notes
Windows MS Exchange
Client File e-Mail Web Browser
Software
View or download stored document to the server,

Automatic document reception,
Client document management
Duplex Scanning
A built- in 50-page ARDF (Auto Reverse Duplex Feeder) delivers inexpensive duplex scanning.
Paper is fed and turned mechanically through the ARDF therefore only one CCD is required for
duplex scanning (a second, expensive CCD, is not required).
Ease-of-Use
The SC430dc has been designed with the general office worker in mind and is therefore very easy to
use. Features include:
Friendly easy to understand TWAIN and ISIS Driver (both TWAIN and ISIS operate under Win
95, 98, ME, NT4.0 and 2000)
Simple design of operation panel (One button push to Scan to e- mail)
Easy manual scanning with a start key function. This allows manual scanning at the push of a
button
Auto Size Detection through both ARDF and in Book mode
Broad Compatibility and Support
Based on the customers environment and or requirements a Network Interface or IEEE1394

(FireWire) Interface can be selected.
The optional Network I/F board, allows the SC430dc to connect to a network. This means that the
7
scanner can then be used as a shared network device.
The IEEE1394 I/F board offers high-speed data transfer for users who require a higher speed data
transfer than SCSI (this interface only complies with Win 2000 and Win Millennium Edition).
In addition to these options, there is an internal slot to allow for a third party vendors video card.
Product Configuration and Options
Configuration
1. Network Interface Board
NIC Specifications Physical I/F Ethernet 100Base-TX

Protocol TCP/IP
Compression Functions TIFF (G3 FAX MH, MR MMR)

JPEG
PDF
IEEE1394 I/F Protocol SBP2

Transfer Speed 100Mbps, 200Mbps, 400Mbps
No. of connector pins 6
Number of ports 2
Coexistence of I/F SCSI + NIC Available

IEEE1394 + NIC Available
SCSI + IEEE1394 Can co-exist physically
Cannot co-exist functionally
Only one I/F can be used
SCSI +IEEE1394 + NIC Can co-exist physically
Combination of:
NIC + SCSI
NIC + IEEE1394
Can be use at the same time
2. Image Processing Unit
The image processing unit is shared with the SC450 and SC450d. Functionality is therefore exactly
the same as with these older models.
Colour B/W
Auto Photo/Letter NO YES
Dynamic Threshold NO YES
Section Area NO YES
3. Optional Memory
8
There are 3 optional memory upgrades available for the SC430dc: 32MB, 64MB and 128MB
Features of memory
1. When the SC430dc is connected under a network environment and used as a distribution scanner,
scanning can be performed without any initial slow down. In a standard case, up to 3 pages can be
scanned without slowing, however, from the 4th page, scanning speed is lowered.
(The data volume of A3/200dpi/full colo ur is approximate 22MB and it is compressed with JPEG up
to 2.2MB)
If 128MB memory is mounted, up to 60 pages of documents can be scanned without slow down.
2. When large size of data that is over the capacity of SAF (8MB), scanning operation can be
performed without incremental time (When Network TWAIN driver is used or the SMR430dc is
used as Distrib ution scanner).
(The data volume of A3/400dpi/full colo ur is approximate 88MB and it is compressed with JPEG up
to 8.8MB)
In standard case, an incremental image is produced. However, if 128MB memory is added, A3/
600dpi/ full colour data can be scanned without incremental time.
Outline of memorys function
1. After an image has been scanned by the SC430dc, the image data is stored in the frame memory
of controller board through the APIP I/F.
SC430dc -> Frame memory (16MB) -> SAF (8MB) -> Shared memory with NIC (8MB)
2. The stored image data that is stored in frame memory is compressed and stored in SAF. SAF can
store multiple numbers of images.
3. The stored image in SAF is transfe rred to Shared memory with NIC and then sent to the PC
through FTP.
The optional memories (DIMM) are used to increase the memory capacity of SAF (8MB).
Specification of Drive rs
TWAIN Driver Available in 7 languages (English, French, German, Italian, Spanish,

Portuguese and Dutch)
ISIS Driver English only
9
SCSI I/F ASPI
Network Winsock / Winsock 2
IEEE1394 SBP2
Operating Systems Windows 95

Windows NT3.51
Windows NT4.0
Windows 98
Windows 2000
IEEE1394
The IEEE1394 standard is designed to support high-bandwidth requirements of devices such as

digital video equipment and high performance mass storage. It is basically a serial bus that supports
speeds of 100 mbps, 200 mbps and up to 400 mbps.
TWAIN Driver Features
The new TWAIN will support the following features:
Duplex Capability through the TWAIN

Software Endorsement (Characters data, time, letter and number can be added to the scanned
image)
Rotation
Skew Correction
Job Separator Sheet
7 languages (English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese and Dutch)
Service Approach
Hardware is the same as the SC01

Software same as Scan Router V1
Software
Cherry Lite
Cherry Lite is a document distribution system which enables the distribut ion of scanned images from
the Scanner to the client PC through the network. The functionality of Cherry Lite is almost the same
as ScanRouter.
Specifications of Cherry Lite
Supported Image Format
B/W TIFF (MH, MR, MMR, Uncompressed)
10
Multi Page TIFF (MH, MR, MMR, Uncompressed)

Tiff-F, PDF
Colour JPEG, PDF
Language: 5 languages (English, French, German, Italian and Dutch)
Address Book: The total address to be managed in the list is 99.
Function of Cherry Station
Cherry Delivery Server has a function of distributing scanned images from the SC430dc through the
network. This is in accordance with user settings.
Data In-Tray
Save as
Sorting of Windows File
User/Group
Undelivered
Data In-Tray
The destination list, which is made in Cherry Delivery Server, can also be displayed in the operation
panel. The user can then choose the destination from the operation panel. When the destination is
selected, scanning is started after pressing the Start Key.
The scanned image is sent to the Cherry Delivery server through the network. The image is then
stored in one of three ways:
1. Data In-Tray
2. Windows file in Users PC
3. Undelivered Data In-Tray
1. Data In-Tray When the user name is listed on the destination list, the
Located in Cherry Delivery Server Data In-Tray will be made automatically.
The image format is not changeable from the scanned
format.
2. Windows file in User PC The folder made in User PC on the network.
The image format is changeable from the scanned format.
3. Undelivered Data In-Tray When the client PCs (which is set as Save to file in
distribution type) power is OFF, the image will be
registered to this tray.
Docuware
Currently all NRG Scanners are bundled with Docuware Intro. However the version bundled has now
been superseded by a new version. NRG is currently in negotiation with Docunet to develop a new
11
version of the software to bundle with the SC430dc.
The latest version of Docuware has colour functionality so there will be no problems with this feature
on the SC430dc.
Eyes and Hands Forms Recognition
This software will form part of the Partner + Program and should be available to the field in
August/September. NRG is currently in negotiation with Read Software to supply a demo version of
the software to bundle with the SC430dc.
12
Market Situation
Segmentation
With a B/W speed of 30ppm and a SRP of around $3500, the SMR430dc is placed in the Workgroup
segment of the scanner market. This segment includes any scanner with a speed of 20-36ppm and at a
cost of $2-6k.
Market Overview
The combined shipment total across all segments in Europe grew by approximately 23% from 27,258
shipped units at the end of 1998 to 33,414 units at Q4 1999.
Using actual shipments for 1999, by Q4 2000, the overall European market is forecast to grow by a
further 35% to 45,176 shipped units 1 .
In terms of $ value, at the end of Q4 1998, the total European high speed scanning market was worth
$150.35 million. During 1999 this value grew by approximately 15% to $172.71 million and by Q4
2004 forecasts predict the market to be worth over $365 million.
Overall device configuration is also due to change dramatically over the next 4 years:
Device Total European Market (Unit

Configuration Shipments)
1999* 2002 2004 99-2004
(CAGR)
Duplex 15,871 50,099 89,051 33%
Networked 2,310 24,436 50,156 67%
SCSI 23,459 44,939 61,683 17%
Video 7,645 11,265 9,612 4%
Colour 12,709 47,932 71,701 33%
*The figures for 1999 represent actual shipments
Black and White Vs Colour
The penetration of colour across the European market remains very much at an early phase. During
1998 approximately 27% of all devices shipped in Europe were colour capable. In 1999 the growth in
shipments of colour units increased to 38%. This is forecast to continue to increase over the period
99-2004 at a CAGR of 33%.
Workgroup segment
During 1999, 15,258 workgroup scanners were shipped in Europe. Over the forecast period 1999 to
2004 the European market is expected to maintain a CAGR
(Compound Average Annual Growth Rate) of 26%.
At the end of Q4 1999, the value of European shipments in the desktop and workgroup scanner
1
European Scanning Program April 2000
13
market sectors was $74.19 million. Taking into account a forecast growth of approximately 36%
across these sectors by Q4 2000, overall shipment value is expected to grow by a further 26% to
$93.18 million.
During 1999, the largest markets in Europe, in terms of the percentage of total devices shipped, were
Germany (29.3%), the UK (26.2%), France (10.5%) and Italy (9.6%).
Major Competitors
In the Workgroup segment, Fujitsu dominates, with a market share of about 65%. Other competitors
include Canon, HP, Bell and Howell and Panasonic.
Fujitsu M3092/M3093/M3096 Panasonic KV-SS25

Canon DR 3020/4046 HP 9100C Digital Sender
14
Product Range Plan and positioning
Product Plan Map
Low Volume
Production
SC450d
36-50ppm; $6-12k
New Model
SC450
SC420 Workgroup
20-36ppm; $2-6k
SC01 SC430dc New Model
2000 2001 2002 2003
SC430dc SC01
Scanning mode Colour and B/W B/W
Max Document Size A3 11x17 A3 11x17
Optical resolution 600 dpi 400 dpi
Output resolution 100 2400 dpi 100-600 dpi
Grayscale 12 bit (input) 8 bit
8 bit (output)
Duplex Scanning Yes (through ARDF) Not Available
Throughput
B/W 30ppm 24ppm
Colour 10ppm N/A
ADF capacity 50 sheets 30 sheets
Min Doc Size through ADF A5 A5
Standard I/F SCSI 2 SCSI 2
Options Image Processing Unit Image Processing Unit
Network Interface Kit
IEEE1394 I/F
Memory Card Expanders (32MB, 64MB,
128MB)
15
Competitors Comparison
Main competitive models:
Hewlett Packard - HP 9100C Digital Sender

Fujitsu M3092DC
SC 430dc HP 9100C M3029DC

Scanning Mode Colour and B/W Colour and B/W Colour and B/W
Max Doc Size A3 A4 A4
Optical Resolution 600dpi 400dpi 600dpi
Grayscale Yes Yes Yes
Simplex/Duplex Duplex Duplex Duplex
ADF Capacity 50 50 50
Throughput
B/W 30ppm 15ppm 15ppm
Colour 10ppm 4ppm 5ppm
Interface SCSI, IEEE1394 or SCSI or NIB SCSI or Video
Video
Monthly Scan Volume
(pages per month) 10,000 10,000 9,000
Options
IPU Option Not Available Not Available
Endorser Through Software Not Available Not Available
NIB Option 1.1.1.1 Standard Not Available
Operation Panel Option Standard Not Available
IEEE 1394 I/F Option Not Available Not Available
Product Range Price Positioning
SC430dc will directly replace the SC01. The current pricing indications from Ricoh Japan indicates
that the SC430dc Mainframe will be priced at a similar level to the
SC01:
SC01 Mainframe / SCSI SRP $3400

SC430dc Mainframe / SCSI SRP $3450
IEEE1394 I/F Board Type 350 SRP $500

Network I/F Board Type 350
(Includes Operation Panel and ScanRouter Lite) SRP $1000
16
Target Markets
General Office Document Imaging Market
Mission Critical Use Document
Management
Environment Network 1 to 1(SCSI I/F or 1 to 1(SCSI I/F or
IEEE1394) IEEE1394)
Purpose of use Image Capturing, Scanning (inputting) Archiving, Filing,
Distribution, OCR fixed from documents OCR
Type of documents Any paper based Fixed form (Bank checks, Any paper based
documents in general Applications, Agreements, documents in general
office invoices) office
Main application Document distribution Customised application Document
Software utility management software
User Workgroup in general Dedicated Operator Dedicated Operator or
office workgroup
Sales Channel OA dealer channel System Channel System Channel
(VAR/VAD/SI), OEM (VAR/VAD/SI), OEM
channel channel
Vertical Markets and Characteristics
The SC430dc should be targeted at 2 different types of user. Within these user groups there is then
specific vertical markets to allow further targeting:
1. SCSI Users These will be users looking for a B/W Scanner. They will generally use the machine
for archiving and document management. B/W speed is the most important aspect, with colour
and networking capability only secondary factors. Vertical markets here would be similar to the
SC01 eg Market Research Firms, Distribution Centres, Mail Rooms and Recruitment Consultants
2. Network / Colour Users These will be users from the general office. These people will require
the Scanner for its network/colour functionality and will use it to distribute digital information
around the office. Besides the general office users, possible vertical markets for this proposition
would be Advertising Agencies, Architects and Design Companies
Distribution Channels
The SC430dc will be sold through both the direct and indirect channel.
17
B/W Speed
B/W Speed 30ppm, Colour 10ppm
B/W Speed gives an average scanning volume of 4,000 pages per month or a maximum of
10,000 pages per month
Duplex capability through the ARDF
Networkable
Allows electronic data to be shared on a network simply and efficiently
Scan to email from the mainframe over the network, allowing world-wide distribution of
documents
Colour Capability
10ppm
Up to 600dpi
Colour Speed is fastest on market in Workgroup segment
IEEE1394 I/F
Fire Wire
Faster Connection than SCSI (100Mbps, 200Mbps, 400Mbps)
Protocol: SBP2
Software
Bundled with Scan Router Lite v2 and Scan Router Browser v2
Colour and OCR capability in Software
Supported Image Formats:
B/W TIFF, Multi Page TIFF, TIFF-F, DCX, PDF Compression
Colour JPEG, PDF Compression
Unbranded TWAIN which features Scan Counter
User Friendly
Mainframe has been designed to allow the general office user to be able to simply send and
receive scanned images
No training or dedicated member of staff required in order to use system
A Complete Solution
Document Distribution System Using ScanRouter Lite V2
Document Management Using Docuware
Forms Recognition Using Eyes and Hands Form Recognition
18
Marketing Support Material
The launch of SC430dc is critical if NRG wishes to develop as a total solution provider. Many of our
competitors already have colour scanners on the market and are considering networking their
machines. In the target market segment the SC430dc is superior to all of the competitor models that
currently have colour or network functionality. There is therefore a great opportunity to significantly
enter the market
To successfully enter the general office market that is currently dominated by Fujitsu
To replace the existing SC01 with a higher specification model
To provide a complete network solution to end users
To provide an opportunity for further sales of NRG products (both Hardware and Software) eg
Scan Router Professional v2 or Network Printers
To successfully target a growing niche in the market for a colour, networkable scanner
To position SC430dc as both a SCSI based B/W Scanner with Colour Capability and a Network
Colour Scanner
Increase awareness of NRG's Scanner portfolio in terms of both Hardware and Software.
Thereby increasing the potential for incremental sales on both sides
Introduce the productivity and efficiency benefits NRG can offer to customers with the SC430dc
19
Product and Supply Logistic Data
Codes and Contents
Mainframe
Group Short Name Gestetner Model Name Rex Rotary Model Name Nashuatec Model Name
SMR30dc SC430dc SC430DC SC430dc
Options
SIF350NIF Network I/F Kit Type S
SIF350IEEEIF IEEE1394 Interface Board Type S
SPU2 Image Processing Unit (Common with SC450)
DMETypeBP32 Memory Unit Type B (32MB) (Common with DMR35A/45A, PCR38,
PMR26/N and PMR32)
RC-210RAM64MB Memory Unit Type B (64MB) ) (Common with DMR35A/45A, PCR38,
PMR26/N and PMR32)
RC-210RAM128MB Memory Unit Type B (128MB) ) (Common with DMR35A/45A,
PCR38, PMR26/N and PMR32)
Standard Accessory List

Mainframe
Terminator YES (Internal)
SCSI Cable *1 NO
Power Cable YES (C type)
Screwdriver YES
Installation Procedure YES
Safety Instruction Sheet (19 languages) YES
Safety Instruction Sheet for US NO
CD-ROM Operating Instruction for SCSI and IEEE 1394 (7 languages) *2 YES
TWAIN Driver for SCSI I/F by Ricoh (7 languages) *3 YES
TWAIN Driver for IEEE1394 I/F by Ricoh (7 languages) *3 YES
TWAIN Driver Manual NO
ISIS Driver by Pixel Translations (English) YES
ISIS Driver Manual NO
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite (14 languages) YES
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite Manual (PDF file) YES
*1 SCSI Cable is removed from 220V model of the SMR430dc.
*2 Operating Instruction will be provided with PDF format. No paper manual is bundled.
*3 TWAIN driver will be generic.
IEE1394 I/F
EDP Code 400675
IEEE1394 board YES
IEEE1394 Cable YES
Screws (2 pieces) YES
20
Installation procedure YES
Network Interface Kit

Network Interface YES
Operation Panel + screws YES
Screws (2 pieces) YES
Installation Procedure (7 languages) YES
CD-ROM TWAIN Driver for Network I/F by Ricoh (7 languages) YES
ScanRouter V2 (5 languages) YES
Operating Instructions YES
Aficio Manager for Admin YES
Aficio Manager for Client YES
Web Status Monitor Help YES
IPU (Image Processing Unit Type A)

Installation Procedure YES
Packaging Information
Machine Branding
Front Decal Ricoh Branded - Labels will be provided for each NRG brand
Outer Carton Non-Brand
Shipping Information
Product Mainframe
Model Name SC430dc
Weight Net 27.7kg
(Kg) Gross 32.2kg
Packing Method CTN
Packing (mm) W 708
WxDxH D 632
H 402
Measurement (M3) 0.179877312
21
Driver and Utility Schedule
Bundle
Distribution at web site
<Main Unit>
Type Language Schedule
Dec Jan Feb Mar Apr May
Main Unit Mass Production
Driver TWAIN for SCSI/IEEE1394 7

7-language version will be bundled from December
ISIS 1
English version will be bundled from December
Utility DeskTop BinderV2 Lite English
English version will be bundled in main unit from February
Final 14
Other 13 languages can be downloaded at the web site from April
14-language version will be bundled from May
<Network I/F kit>

Type LanguageSchedule
Dec Jan Feb Mar Apr May
Network I/F Mass Production
Kit
Driver TWAIN for Network 7
7-language version will be bundled from February
Utility ScanRouter V2 English
English version will be bundled in NIC kit from February
Final 5
Other 4 languages can be downloaded at the web site from April
5-language version will be bundled from May
Language
Number of languages
TWAIN driver 7 languages (English, German, French, Italian, Spanish,
ISIS driver 1 language (English only)
Display on Operation 7 languages (English, German, French, Italian, Spanish,
Panel Portuguese and Dutch)
O/I 7 languages (English, German, French, Italian, Spanish,
ScanRouter V2* 5 languages (English, French, German, Italian, Dutch)
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite Minimum 14 languages (English, French, German, Italian,
Spanish, Dutch, Norwegian, Hungarian, Czech, Polish, Portuguese,
Danish, Swedish, Finnish)
*The number of supported language for ScanRouter V2 is changed from 14 to 5.
22
Driver Specifications
The table below shows the O/S supported by the ISIS and TWAIN driver of SC430dc:
Type O/S
For SCSI I/F ISIS* Windows95, 98, 98SE, Me, Windows NT 4.0 and 2000
TWAIN Windows95, 98, 98SE, Me, Windows NT3.51, 4.0 and 2000
For IEEE1394 TWAIN** Windows 2000 and Me
For Network I/F TWAIN Windows95, 98, Me, Windows NT 3.51, 4.0 and 2000
*ISIS driver for SCSI I/F doesnt support Windows NT3.51. ISIS driver supports only XGA
(1024 x 768 pixels) or higher
**TWAIN driver for IEEE1394 supports only Windows 2000 and Me since these O/S do not
support scanners with IEEE1394 I/F.
Note: TWAIN driver for SCSI and IEEE1394 (STI driver) do not support MS certificate.
Improvements of TWAIN driver from the current version (V2) to the new version (V3)
There are 3 major improvements of TWAIN driver:
1) Start-up time of driver has been shortened as below.
Current (sec.) New (sec.) Shortened ratio

SCSI Initial start-up time 4.69 2.75 58.60%
Start- up time when the scanner is 4.07 2.27 55.80%
used from the second time.
Network Initial start-up Time 7.58 4.18 55.10%
TWAIN Start- up time when the scanner is 6.67 2.40 36.00%
used from the second time
2) Improve the maximum data size that can be scanned with standard PC in general office.
For example, in the following environment, the maximum data size is improved by 30 times
compared to the current TWAIN driver.
PC memory size: 128MB,

Virtual memory size in Windows2000: 16MB
Application: Photoshop5.5
Vacant volume of HDD: 5.2GB
Current (V2) Up to 30MB (A4, B/W Grayscale, 580dpi)

New (V3) Up to 900MB (A4, Full Color, 1800 dpi)
3) Colour Matching feature
Colour data can be adjusted to be matched with PC display by ICC profile.
Utility Specifications
As for the detailed specifications or features of DeskTopBinder V2 Lite and ScanRouter V2 Lite,
please refer to the PIG on MIDAS.
23
No. GTS-001-0321
Service Launching Guide

for SC430dc
(Draft Version)
Issued on: September 8th 2000

Technical Service Department
Global Technical Support Division
Marketing Group
24
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. PRODUCT INFORMATION 26
1-1. TECHNOLOGIES 26
1-2. B ASIC SPECIFICATIONS 26
2. SERVICE CONCEPT 27
3. SERVICE INFORMATION 27
3-1. REQUIREMENTS FOR ASSIGNING ENGINEERS 27
3-2. SERVICE TRAINING COURSE 27
3-3. TRAINING M ATERIAL 27
3-4. FIELD INFORMATION PLAN 28
3-5. TECHNICAL INFORMATION PLAN 28
4. RELIABILITY TARGETS 29
5. STORAGE / TRANSPORTATION / INSTARATION REQUIRMENT 29
6. SPECIAL TOOLS 30
7. USER MAINTENANCE 5
8. DEPOT REPAIRE 31
8-1.EVALUATION SYSTEM 6
8-2.REPAIR UNIT 6
9. USER / SALES / SERVICE REMARKS ERROR! BOOKMARK NOT DEFINED.
25
PRODUCT INFORMATION
Technologies
The machine uses the technology of DMR22/27 and HS2P (IS420) as much as possible.
q Scanner : Iris2/Lilac2 SBU
q ADF : Russian ARDF
q CPU : Same image processing chip (IPU) which is used in the HS2P
Basic Specifications
Type Flat-bet with ADF

Light Source Xenon lamp (Simplex mode)
Document Type Book, Sheet
Scanning Area Main Scan : Max. 297 mm (11.7 inches)
Sub Scan (B/W) : Max. 2000 mm (17.0 inches)
Sub Scan (Color) : Max. 630 mm
Throughput B/W : 30 ppm (A4 portrait, Binary and simplex
mode)
Color : 10 ppm (A4 portrait, Binary and simplex
mode)
Grayscale 12 bits/pixel internal
8 bits/pixel external
Interface SCSI 3, NIB, IEEE1394
Warm-up Time Max. 20s
Power Supply 120V (US)
220-240V (EU)
Power Consumption Stand-by : Simplex mode: Max. 50W
Duplex mode: Max 90W
Operating : Simplex mode: Max 80W
Duplex mode: Max 120W
Low Power Mode: Less than 12W
Dimensions 590 mm (W) x 546 mm (D) x 265 mm (H)
18.5 inch (W) x 26.7 inch (D) x 10.9 inch (H)
Weight Less than 28 kg
26
SERVICE CONCEPT
1. Common technology
Most mechanical parts of ARDF are common with Russian ARDF
2. Scanner adjustment free
Just replace the lens block assembly
3. Firmware update
Use the flash ROM to update the firmware by IC card
4. Evaluation software
Work with Windows
5. Color adjustment
No adjustment required due to correspond to sRGB by hardware
6. Transportation
The scanner lock is added
SERVICE INFORMATION
7. Basic practical skills for scanners should have been acquired.

8. High capability of customer instruction and consulting.
9. High motivation toward job completeness.
10. High capability in problem diagnosis and reporting.
11. Good time management and job planning.
Service Training Course
Service training should be completed before the first machine is delivered to the distributor or
dealer. Service training should be conducted as follows:
Length: 2 days
Requirements:
Trainees should have attended a HS2P training course and basic color knowledge.
Training Materials
12. Service Manual

13. Operating Instructions
14. Parts Catalog
15. Driver and Utilities CD
16. Instructors Guide
27
Field Information Plan
All field problems should be reported to Ricoh using a Global FPR (Field Problem Report) as
soon they occur. Depending on the type of problem, the following information is required.
Always
Scan Problems
Printed scanned image sample and data file
Mechanical Problems
Detailed problem description
Defective part(s)
PC Connectivity Problems
PC specifications (manufacturer, CPU, memory)
OS used
Application used
Technical Information Plan
The following technical documents will be sent periodically or when required.

Modification Bulletin (MB)
Notifies design change information with part numbers, interchangeability, and production
cut-in serial numbers.
Ricoh Technical Bulletin (RTB)
Provides troubleshooting information and service manual change information.
Software information plan
Updated scanner firmware and driver are supplied by Web server.
28
RELIABILITY TARGETS
The reliability data in this section is for operation under the recommended environment, with
the recommended operating materials and scheduled parts replacement. Failures caused by
operational mistakes are not included.
Item Specification Remarks

MTBF 5000 hours MTBF and MSBF are calculated under the
following conditions.
MSBF 312,500 sheets Number of scans : 500 sheets/day
Power-on time : 8 hours/day
20 days/month
MTTR 15 minutes
Machine Life 5 years, 600,000 scans
whichever comes first
STORAGE / TRANSPORTATION / INSTALLATION

REQUIRMENTS
Item Condition
Storage Temperature: -30 ~ 40 C
Humidity: Less than 80 %RH
Storage Period: Less than 18 months after production
Transportation Temperature: -30 ~ 50 C
Humidity: Less than 90 %RH
Installation Temperature: 10 ~ 32 C
Humidity: 15 ~ 80 %RH
Input Voltage : 102Vac ~ 138Vac (US model)
187Vac ~ 276Vac (Europe model)
Frequency : 45 Hz ~ 65 Hz
Machine Level : Within 5
29
SPECIAL TOOLS
The following tools should be prepared to maintain the new model purely in the field.
Item Part Number Description Qty Remarks
1 A0069104 Scanner Positioning Pin (4pcs/set) 1 Common with
other model
2 TBA
3
4
5
6
User Maintenance
No user maintenance items.

The following items should be clean by users.
No Item Cycle Procedure
.
1 Exposure Glass Always keep Clean it with a damp cloth
clean
2 DF Exposure Glass Always keep Clean it with a damp cloth
clean
3 White Sheet Always keep Clean it with a damp cloth
clean
4 White Plate (ADF) Always keep Clean it with a damp cloth
clean
5 Feed belt Always keep Clean it with a damp cloth
clean
6 Pick- up Roller Always keep Clean it with a damp cloth
clean
7 Separation Roller Always keep Clean it with a damp cloth
clean
30
DEPOT REPAIR
Evaluation system
Image evaluation after repair is checked using special evaluation software (working with
Windows). Refer to the Image Evaluation for the SMR430dc service manual.
Repair Unit
SCU (Scanner Control Unit)

VIOB (Video Interface Board)
31
Version 1.11
Analogue Copiers
CMRA041
Memory Matrix
WFW Home NPS

A040/41 Product Information Guide
PRODUCT
INFORMATION GUIDE
CMRA040/A041
Nashuatec A040/A041
Rex Rotary A040/A041
Gestetner A040/A041
1
Executive Summary
Our current low-end Wide Format (A0) copiers, CMRA08A & B, will be discontinued after May
2001 production and replaced by two new versions A040 and A041.
Background
Wide Format Copiers are sold by the Group in most markets. Germany, Benelux, Spain, Italy, Ireland
and Austria treat it as a low-priority product range, selling the machine directly or through dealers
(50:50). UK and Rex France sell units when demanded by their clients. For NRG-I, Wide Format is
a strategically important product, especially in Russia and the Middle East.
Sales have risen over 3 years to reach almost 600 units in 2000 (actual expected). This is about 40 %
of Ricohs European business. Together, Ricoh & NRG have a 20% Market Share in Europe,
although this share varies widely from the mean in countries such as Spain (MS=50%) and Austria
(MS=4%). Competition comes from Oc (50%), Xerox Engineering Systems (10%) and KIP (10%).
Most units are sold by specialist engineering sales people.
The current models have proven to be cheap and reliable machines and are positioned at the bottom
end of the market. They are particularly popular for their Price, Image Quality and Office- and
User- friendliness. This is more and more important as inexperienced, non-specialists become the
typical user.
It is now intended to upgrade the models with a step up into the mid-range of wide format, a 2-roll
option, where CMRA07 is an expensive but best-selling model. We will therefore have the cheapest
copier, the cheapest multi-copier, the cheapest 2-roll copier and the best mid-range copier.
Marketing Objectives of new Products
To continue to increase NRGs market share, targeting those countries where NRG/REBV
total is below 10%, by offering more competitive models
To maintain the total number of units sold in a declining market, by increasing the range
of customers willing to buy our range with the introduction of a low-cost 2-roll option.
2
New Product Changes
Both Versions
New plaques (the new square style located centrally on the machine)
New colour plastic
3.6 m/min engine speed
New 2-roll feeder option
Both roll- feeders now built into table (not separate option)
Same consumables toner, developer, drum - as all our other Wide Format MIF
Key Selling Points
Noticeably better copy quality than selenium-drum (Xerox) machines

Easy to use, even for first-time users
Office- friendly, compact, relatively quiet, light, on wheels, front-operational
Environmentally fr iendly OPC drum, toner in a cartridge, Energy Star, Energy Saver mode
Target Market
The primary target markets for the A040 and A041 are:
Architects
Engineers
Design Agencies
Utilities
Local Government
Copy shops
We should approach customers who are currently using an A0 copier, or who are paying money to a
Print/Copyshop. Likely models to replace are:
Any table-top Diazo machine

Xerox 2510/2515/2520/2520RF, 3000 series
Oce 7050/7000 series
KIP (Shacoh) 1800
Ricoh FW740 (OEMd as Regma 910, Ozalid EF1001, K+E3036) to upgrade to
multi-copy, roll- fed options
3
Product Overview
A040
The A040 is functionally the same as the current CMRA08A which it replaces directly, with the
additional feature of the 2 roll- feeder option. It has the following options available:
Two Roll Feeder
One Roll Feeder
Table (for no roll feeder)
Roll Cutting Rail
Side Guides
The roll feeders incorporate the table, unlike the predecessor models which required the table to be
bought separately.
New features include the increased engine speed from 3 to 3.6 m/min; the flange-type paper setting,
making it even easier to change paper; and the faster warm- up & first copy time.
A041
The A041 is similar to the A040, but has the following differences:
Face down original setting
Full Auto Synchro-cut
Multiple copy 1- 10 A0
An additional option for the A041 is:

Copy Stacker
The table and the roll cutting rail are not available options. A041 must be configured with a
roll- feeder which has a built in table.
New features include the increased engine speed from 3 to 3.6 m/min; the flange-type paper setting,
making it even easier to change paper; and the faster warm- up & first copy time.
4
Market Situation
General Background
The Wide Format market in Europe continues to be affected by 2 trends:
1. A general decline in the overall market of about 10 % year on year

2. A move from analogue to digital technology
As we launch these two new models into this market we therefore have to adopt a prudent approach.
It is true that the above trends are for Europe, and the US and rest of the world markets do not show
the first trend at all. However, any action by NRG will be affected in Europe by these trends.
NRG-Is main markets have shown volatility but also the prospect of growth.
Analogue Wide Format Europe Sales Results
14000
12000
10000
8000
Digital
6000 Analogue
4000
2000
0
1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003
Source Infosource: No Mita or XES data; Estimates 00-03.
5
Suppliers
Oc
Oc, with its European manufacturing base, is the key player in the European wide format market.
Oc has a market share of about 50 % in the analogue market, partly as a result of having the largest
MIF of Diazo machines. Oc has not updated its product range for many years, but has maintained its
competitiveness through price and options; effectively, Ricoh have been catching up, and now are
preparing to challenge the highest-spec Oc model 7056 with its 2 Roll Feeder option.
Xerox
Xerox has a range of updated models based on the older and environmentally less friendly Selenium
drum technology, which also suffers from poorer copy quality than the more modern organic photo
conductor units. Altho ugh it has the oldest product range, they also have the widest product range of
any of the 4 major manufacturers. Xerox sales are in decline and has dropped from about equal
second with 20 % MS to perhaps as little as 10 %.
Ricoh
Ricoh, although a leader in the Japanese market, has only a limited range in the European market, and
NRG currently takes the full Ricoh range of analogue products. Currently it takes about 20 % of the
European market.
Kip
Kip is the fourth manufacturer, with a 10 % market share. Kip is the European brand for Katsuragawa
Electric Co Ltd. In the US they have been sold as Shacoh, although this company and its brand have
been bought out by Kip. Shacoh also distributed Kip in Europe, but they have been bought out by
management and now call the mselves Europoint. With a strong focus on the solution, and a very
wide range of product from many manufacturers, the Kip channel has grown over the past few years,
at the expense of the box-moving badgers like Regma, Ozalid and Neolt.
Mita
Mita sells mainly in Germany under its own brand and that of Utax, as well as other Germany-only
distributors like Sihl. In the rest of Europe it does not have a strong channel to distribute product. As
Germany is the largest market in Europe, this gives Mita a disproportionately large market share.
6
European Wide Format Market Shares
70
60
50
40
% Analogue
30 Digital
20
10
0
Kip Ricoh Xerox Oce Mita
As one of only 5 major manufacturers, Ricoh intends to continue to grow market share at the expense
of the major MIF holder Oc and weaker companies such as XES. Ricohs strong analogue range
partly explains its market share in this area; its absence in the digital market encourages focus on the
analogue products, and explains its 0% digital share, though this will soon change with the launch of
the DMRA07 digital AO model. (Both Xerox and Mita market shares are suspect, but the indication
from Infosource is that they are in the right area)
7
Channels
Although both Oc and Xerox employ a large direct specialist sales force, both they and their
competitors mainly sell analogue copiers through a large specialist dealer network, which adds local
or applications support. A good example of how manufacturer support is provided is from the
following recruitment advertisement from Oc UK.
Consultant Wide Format Printing Systems

Strategic Major Accounts Group
This role is required within the Wide Format Printing Systems (WFPS) Division of
Oc (UK) Limited, to build strategic partnerships within a complex market that has
complex selling cycles. This position will introduce "added value" to the sales process
by facilitating a consultancy service, which will enable a solution sell. The key focus
will be to provide high level support to the Account Managers and Regional Managers
within Oc WFPS and to utilise new technology to exploit information management.
Areas of expertise will include:
Document Flow Analysis
Network Needs Analysis
Document Conversion Analysis
Solution Design incorporating third party products
Ideally you will have a complete understanding of the WFPS market, also you will
need to have a good understanding of business and information distribution processes,
full IT literacy is a pre-requisite for this position.
Your personal qualities will include: high communication skills at all levels, good
co-ordination / organisational skills and the ability to work under pressure to tight
deadlines whilst balancing the needs of several stakeholders.
The advertisement stresses the added value of a consultancy approach needed to succeed in this
business, as well as the business knowledge to understand both the customers document flow and the
technological process of document conversion.
8
NRG Sales History
Unit Totals Wide Format

0
60
0
50
0
40
0
30
0
20
0
10
0
1997 1998 1999 2000

CMRA03 CMRA08A CMRA08B CMRA07
note 2000 figures are 1-10 y-t-d
Room for Improvement
Although NRG-I is the largest seller of Wide Format

in the NRG group, Scandinavia remains an area of NRG BENELUX BV
opportunity. Gestetner Sweden will not launch an
analogue product, so NRG-Is distributors in Finland, 15
Sweden, Norway and Iceland can take advantage of
being the only channel selling the Ricoh product. 10
5
Austria has also little Ricoh presence. NRG Benelux NRG/Ricoh
sells in Holland through Repromat, a Ricoh dealer.
The result is that in Ocs homeland, Ricoh has a market
0
1997
MS 7%
1998 1999 2000
share of only 7 %. Both Operations could grow.
NRG INTERNATIONAL GESTETNER AUSTRIA
400 20
300 15
200 10
100 5
0 0
1997 1998 1999 2000 1997 1998 1999 2000
CMRA03 CMRA08A CMRA08B CMRA07
MS 4%
NRG/Ricoh
Sweden MS 5%
Norway MS 2%
9
The Opportunity
While most Operations take wide format business as an add-on, some have been lucky to find suitable
channels to push large numbers of units. Spain and Ireland, with a limited effort, have achieved
considerable market presence. In Spain, NRG & Ricoh now have a market share of over 50 %.
Other Operations should take these targets as achievable, given the weakness of Xerox and Kip
distribution channels and the weakness of the Oc analogue product range.
IRELAND NRG SPAIN
30 120
25 100
20 80
15 60
10 40
5 20
0 0
1997 1998 1999 2000 1997 1998 1999 2000
MS 16% MS 31%
10
Product Range Plan
Wide Format Mass Production
DMRA07
CMRA07 A041
June 01
CMRA08B A040
CMRA08A
2000 2001 2002 2003
Competitive Analogue Ranges
Feature NRG New NRG Old Oc Xerox Kip

A040 A040 CMRA08A 7050 3001 1030
1 Roll A040 CMRA08A 7055 3030 1880
A041-Multi-copy A041 CMRA08B 7051 3001 1880
2 Rolls A041 7056 3040
Mid Volume CMRA07 CMRA07 Digital 3050 3400
The addition to our range of a 2 Roll Feeder option, will enable us to increase our sales at the expense
of Oc and Kip, because up to now we have had to offer the expensive CMRA07 whenever there has
been a 2 roll requirement. Now, we can offer a choice of the higher volume CMRA07, or the cheaper
A041. Oc and Kip can only offer one or the other. Even Xerox should suffer, as the 3040 should be
more expensive.
11
Target Customer
Any person creating or reproducing paper documents bigger than A3 (420x297mm).
Document Volumes
The volume of paper/film can be anything from 100 copies per month to about 1000 copies per month
for regular users signing a 3-5 year contract. Special projects may require a high volume over a
relatively short period, for example, up to 10,000 copies made over 3 months. Higher volumes than
this would typically require more than one machine or a faster/higher volume model such as
CMRA07.
Document Types
These can be:

handmade drawings in pencil
ink drawings
CAD plots
Blue prints
Diazo prints
Sepia prints
Offset prints
(Although modern large documents are typically (re)produced on robust paper, older types of
documents can be flimsy, fragile, damaged and often changed by paste-ups which make copying
harder.)
Industry Types
In the creation of large documents, for the design areas of many industries, such as:
Engineering automotive, aerospace, oil & gas, plant (process & production factory),
Construction civil engineers, architects, contractors, labourers
Housing architects, designers, decorators, landscape gardeners, housing associations
Utilities supply electricity, water, gas, oil
Government land registries, utility management, town planning
Copy & Print shops supplying services to the above
Libraries company, private & public storing these records, typically for over 100 years
12
Replacing Equipment
Target customers will already be using:
Diazo copier and dont like the difficulty, the environmental impact, or the special paper
Diazo copier but user needs to copy from opaque materials
Toner copier but they dont have the room, multi-copy facility or enough roll- feeders
Copyshop services but they spend more than 100 or 100 copies per month
Inkjet plotter and they have to print out more than 1 plot for archive, drawing office, project
office, site, customer
Inkjet plotter and they have to take the plot outdoors where it often gets wet and smudged
Special Cases
There may be special cases where a company specialising in document archiving or scanning wishes
to make a good quality copy of a large library of drawings. CMRA040 would be ideal for this type of
project. Or, in a war/disaster zone, the need to make multiple copies of maps, utility services,
construction drawings etc, may be present. The CMRA041 would also be ideal for a project such as
this.
13
Copy Quality
Although often used, here the A040/A041 are really the best toner copiers on the market. Copy
Quality is a major concern in the engineering market, where engineering drawings are often drawn to
scale. The major issue for all toner or ink based copiers is the fact that Diazo, for all its faults,
produces the best quality copy of any copying technology.
Problems with Diazo:
Can only use translucent originals

Environmentally unfriendly, especially requiring special chemicals
Needs reasonably experienced user to get good results
Diazo copies need to be frequently re-copied
Diazo paper, though cheap, has a limited shelf life
No paste ups, duplex originals, or writing on the back possible
Many diazo copies include greyscales, because the diazo technology allows this
Key Copy Quality problems that users face include:
Shrinking of paper over time (many drawings are kept for 100 years or more)
Shrinking of copy paper especially when being fused
Changes in copies over a long run, caused by changes to the original, toner run out
Fading of ink drawings over time
Fading of diazo copies over time
Reproduction of diazo greyscales
Smudging of ink-based drawings when handled or used in the rain/damp
The need to copy with an increased margin on the leading and/or trailing edge to allow for
binding, folding, labeling etc
A040 & A041 achieve consistent, high copy quality on the widest copy media range on the market, by
a combination of engine design items, which cannot be easily copied by our competitors:
Organic PhotoConductor
A0 Wide Toner Cartridge distribution system
Mid-temperature with Pressure Fusing
Black Toner
Glass Contact Sensor
OPC Drum
A major competitor, Xerox, still uses Selenium drum technology for its wide format analogue
copiers, a reflection of the age of the engine as well as its environmental unfriendliness. The key
quality result of using such old technology is the loss of detail, especially for fine lines and halftones,
which are almost impossible to reproduce. A040/A041 uses the most advanced drum on the market,
organic photoconductor. Image Density control of 14 steps gives this system the widest user control
on the market. Partial copy function can be used to ensure that the best selection is made before
making a copy of the whole original.
14
Toner
Oc has developed a rapid fusing system, which is also used in other Oc machines, and similar
technology is used by Canon in office copiers. One characteristic of these systems is the grey
quality of the toner once deposited. This has the effect of making further copies even greyer, with a
consequent reduction in accuracy.
Toner Cartridge
Oc supply the toner in a bottle, which is placed at one end of the machine. The toner then runs along
the entire length of the drum. On long copy runs, the toner may struggle to reach the far end of an A0
copy and so later copies may have less toner on one side than the early copies.
A040 and A041 have A0 long toner cartridges, which are not only cleaner to use toner always
remains sealed but also ensure that toner is always available across the length of the copy.
Fusing
The ideal fusing should combine low heat with low pressure to ensure that the copy paper does not
stretch nor shrink, together with high temperature and high pressure to make sure that the toner is
firmly welded to the paper.
Oc tries to compromise with a very hot fuser system (the Toast Rack), and no pressure at all. The
result is that any paper jams in the fuser section lead to a small fire (the fragility of the Ocs insides
makes this much more likely than with a roller type fuser in the NRG models). All Oc digital copiers
(which copy more than twice as fast) come with a fire extinguisher for these emergencies. Even with
this system, the grey toner does not bond with the paper and is easily scratched off.
Xerox combines high pressure with low temperature, but does not make up for the basic engine
problems mentioned above.
A040 and A041 have a heat and pressure system which is a better compromise than the Oc system,
and is supported by much better optics, drum and toner than Xerox provide. The fusing can also be
controlled by the user, allowing selection to be made depending on the copy paper type. This means
that NRG copiers can also handle much wider paper weight and film thickness ranges than other
machines.
Contact Sensor
The contact sensor (scanner) of the Oc models is made of plastic, and as originals are frequently
pasted up, or dusty, this can be easily scratched. Once scratched, this will affect copy quality. NRG
copiers have contact sensors made of glass which will withstand much rougher treatment than plastic.
15
Ease of Use
Again, this term is much used, and again in the case of A040 and A041 this is absolutely true. If the
problems with Diazo are that an experienced hand is required to get the best quality, toner copiers
should provide a suitable alternative for normal, office staff.
A040 is the easiest copier in the world to use:
Face up original feeding

Original & copy side guides
Flange roll paper setting
Manual or Automatic original feed
Most productive
Face Up Feeding
For Wide Format users, there is often a requirement to copy part of a drawing; it is much easier to
select the required part if the original is actually visible. The user of A040 can feed the original in as
far as the starting point, and then start the copy, and complete the copy as soon as it has reached the
desired end point. Users of all other copiers can select the start point with only a little more trouble,
but once started the desired end will be almost impossible to control as it passes on the underside.
Side Guides
The optional side guides help users to align the original in the centre of the copy roll. Amazingly,
this option is not available on other manufacturers copiers making it very difficult to feed large
pieces of paper centrally. Expert users typically find them a distraction. A040 has optiona l side
guides for original feeding and copy paper feeding. A041, with its requirement for a roll feeder, does
not require copy paper feeder guides, but has as standard original feeder guides. Side guides can be
bought for A041 as an option for the manual bypass feeding of copy paper.
Flange-type Roll Paper Setting
Current wide format feeders require that the paper roll is threaded onto a metal pole, and centered by
eye. This can result in mis-registration. The A040 and A041 have a revolutionary flange-type
mechanism that simplifies the changing of rolls, and allows inexperienced users to change rolls easily
and to have multiple rolls, even with only 1 feeder.
Manual or Automatic Original Feeding
First-time users will take more time than experienced ones to align a large original before starting to
copy. Automatic original feeding is necessary, especially for those making many copies. However,
Oc models only have a manual feed button and take the original as soon as this button is pressed,
while the user has only one hand on the original skews are the natural result with large originals.
Previous NRG wide format models had a variable delay after setting the original, but obviously if
there were many users this would only be optimised to one user. Now, the automatic feeding on the
A041 can be changed to manual feeding, so that any user can be confident that the original can be
placed in their own time.
16
Productivity
Although Xerox, Oc and Kip all sell copiers with engine speeds around 3-4 m/min, tests have shown
that NRGs copiers will outperform similar engine speed machines. This is partly due to the ease of
setting the originals, and partly due to the faster return of the machine to ready after a copy and partly
due to the much faster first copy time.
Even before the 20 % increase in speed with the A040 and A041, both predecessor models could
easily beat the market benchmark 7056 in real productivity tests.
Differences with the A041
The A041 is functionally similar to the A040 but there are a number of differences. The A041 allows
up to 9 copies to be made from an original (this number can be increased by service intervention, but
is normally left at this level because of the danger if large originals are left to feed on their own.
The differences with side guides has already been mentioned above, making the A041 more suitable
for regular users.
The biggest difference is in the feeding the A040 is face up, and therefore the best for first-time
users, or those who regularly do partial copying.
17
Office Friendliness
More and more wide format machines are installed in normal office environments, close to staff,
users, customers and buyers. Copyshops are typically office working environments and do not want
the environmental hazards of diazo machines near workers who are co- located for a full working day.
A040 and A041 combine the most office, user and

environment-friendliness of any analogue wide format
device.
Office Friendly
Unlike some competitors machines, the A040 and A041

come with wheels, and as they are relatively light, they can
be installed and moved around an office easily. For
cleaning, recabling, or any other move, NRGs copiers do
not require special equipment nor burly labourers.
Even the installation can be made against a wall, as both

models are fully front operational. The Oc needs space at
the side for toner replenishment.
User Friendly
A040 and A041 are the smallest, quietest copiers on the market. However, they are also friendly to
users in other ways.
When it is time to change toner, the cartridge system ensures that users never come into contact
with the toner.
In an emergency (for example, a misfeed) the Emergency Stop button is easily found on the
Operation Panel, stopping the feeds immediately.
Any mis-feeds are easily cleared from the clamshell and rotating drum system, unlike the Oc
models, which also require clearing of the dangerously hot toast rack fuser system or the
Xerox.
Inexperienced hands can also be reluctant to open up the fragile Oc models, but A040 and
A041 are simple and robust.
Setting new paper rolls, or changing from one roll to another is also made easier with the new
flange type system.
A roll can weigh anything up to 26 lb/12 kg; with a A040/41, the user simply lifts out and
drops in the new roll - with competitive models the user has to crouch down and place the roll
Environment Friendly
The drum is of the environmentally- friendly organic type; Xerox still uses selenium drums. The toner
comes in a cartridge, making it much easier to dispose of cleanly than the bottle type Oc. Both
models are Energy Star rated and have a selectable Energy Saver mode. All plastic parts are marked
for recycling.
18
Marketing Communications Materials
Marketing Communications Objectives
1. Position this range of wide format copiers to extend into the 2 Roll Requirement.
2. Stress the:
Image Quality and Office & Environment Friendliness to Diazo users.
Ease of Use to those thinking of first-time buying.
3. List the full features of both models for anyone who considers a competitors machine.
19
Mainframe, Options & Consumables Logistics
Item Contents Comments

Mainframe Mainframe Plaques (new
cartons Drum Cyclops-style) will be
Branding Plaques x 3 (N, R, G) provided in the box
English- language operatio n panel decals from the factory.
Installation instruction sheet (international)
Operating English, French, German, Spanish, Italian will be Note no English manual
Instructions available only as separate items. Includes in the box.
Operation Manual
Used Toner warning decals
Packaging & Branding
Mainframe Packaging
The mainframe carton is unbranded.
Options Packaging
All options have neutral (common) packaging with no branding.
Supplies Packaging
All supplies are existing supplies.
The OI manuals have three front covers with the model number and the brand on them. They can be
torn off to leave the one correctly branded cover.
20
Mainframe
Manufacturers Short Gestetner Rex Rotary Nashuatec First Arrival

B047-22 CMRA040 A040 A040 A040 August 2001
B048-22 CMRA041 A041 A041 A041 August 2001
Notes: Unitechno Factory
Mechanical Peripheral Options
Note: Estimated Fit Rate for options is our expected average fit rate which is used for Group purchasing.
Short Description Versatility Est. Fit Rate First Arrival
Name to Mainframe
Table A040 only 5% August 2001
1 Roll Feeder A040 & A041 60 % August 2001
2 Roll Feeder A040 & A041 40 % August 2001
Copy Stacker A041 only 100 % August 2001
Roll Cutting Rail A040 5% August 2001
Side Guides A040 & A041 100 % August 2001
(A040 original & copy: A041 copy
only)
Notes: All options are new. They have a different colour and should not be mixed with old
machines/peripherals.
Fit rates for Roll Cutting Rail should be taken from the existing option. Fit rates for Copy Stacker
should be taken from existing 2 copy stackers.
Fit rate for Table should not be taken from existing model, as roll feeders now have table built in.
Supplies
Short Name Description Contents (g) Yield at 5% Qty. Qty. Versatility

Inner Outer
CT109 Toner 750 g 1,860 A1 copies 1 10
CMRA03/40/41,
CD109 Developer 1 kg 20 k A1 1 6 CMRA07/8A/B
CDR109 OPC Drum 50 k A1 1 1
Language Kits

CDKA040D A040 Language Kit German A040
CDKA041D A041 Language Kit German A041
21
Product Discontinuations
The table below lists all the products that are permanently discontinued once A040/1 is launched:
Mainframe
Manufacturers Group Short Gestetner Rex Rotary Nashuatec Final Mass

Model Name Generic Model Name Model Name Model Name Production
FW750 CMRA08A 281A0 881A0 581A0 May 2001
FW760 CMRA08B 282A0 882A0 582A0 May 2001
Options & Supplies
Short Name Description Versatility Last Mass

Production
CCAB760 Table Type 760 CMRA08A/B May 2001
CCT760 Copy Stacker Type 760 CMRA08B May 2001
CCT760S Copy Stacker Type 760S CMRA08B May 2001
CCAB740 Table Type 740 CMRA08A & B May 2001
400180 Roll Feeder Type 740 CMRA08A & B May 2001
400181 Side Guide Type 740 CMRA08A & B May 2001
400182 Roll Cutting Rail Type 740 CMRA08A only May 2001
Notes: All supplies remain in production.
22
Environmental Improvements
(all data below are maximum figures: actual figures achieved in predecessor models are in brackets)
1. Sound Power Level
A040 A041
(Working) 72dB (70.7 dB) 75db (70.7 dB)
(Waiting) 57dB (54.7 dB) 57db (54.7 dB)
2. Ozone Emission Level
less than 0.02mg/m3 (0.008 mg/m3)
3. Dust Level
less than 0.075mg/m3 (0.015 mg/m3)
4. Styrene Emission Level
5. Identification of Plastic Components
TBA (All plastic components which weigh more than 50 g are identified according to ISO11469.)
6. Environmental Regulation
BAM Energy Star Swan Energy 2000

No Yes TBA TBA
23
Specifications
(SEF: short-edge feed, LEF: long-edge feed)
Technology
Configuration A040 version : Desk top

A041 version : Console (with Roll Feeder unit)
Copying Process : Electrostatic transfer system
Photo-conductor : OPC drum (970mm x 80)
Drum yield : 50K/A1/D (30Km)
Development system :Magnetic Brush / Dual component dry toner system
Developer Yield 20,000 copies/2 kg(1kg/1bag x 2) @A1/D, LEF
Toner replenishment Cartridge (750g/ cartridge)
Toner consumption 1,860 copies (A1/D, LEF), 6% chart
Fusing Heat & Pressure

Roller Heat Roller & Pressure Roller
Roller material Heat Roller : Teflon
Pressure Roller : Silicon Rubber
Fuser oil No
Machine life 60K @A1/D (36,000m) or 5 years whichever comes first

PM cycle 3.6K @ A1/D (2,160 m), LEF
AMCV 750 copies or 450 m
24
Main Specification
Original feed Sheet original

Original set position Centre
A040: face-up set
A041: face-down set
Original image (scan) size : Maximum 914mm(36) x 3,000mm (3m)

Minimum 210mm(8.3) x 297mm(11.7)
Copy size Maximum 914mm(36) x 3,000mm (3m)
Minimum 210mm(8.3) x 297mm(11.7)
Max. original width 960mm
Original paper thickness A040: (Front) 35-187 (micron)
(Rear) 35 (micron) ~ 3mm
A041: (Front) 35 ~ 187 (micron)
(Rear) 35 (micron) ~ 1mm
Copying speed 3.6m/min.

2 cpm@A0/E (SEF)
4 cpm@A1/D (LEF)
(A040: Roll Feeder, A041: Roll feeder and repeat copy)
Paper feed Bypass (A041 & A040)

Optional Roll Feeder (1 Roll & 2 Roll)
Reproduction ratio 1: 1, +/- 0.5%

Reduction/Enlargement Not available
Zoom Not available
Image density manual (14 steps)
Warm up time less than 3 minutes (23C, US:120V, EU:230V)

First copy time A040 less than 21 sec. @A1/D
A041 less than 25 sec. @A1/D
No. of repeat copy A040 Not available

A041 1-10 (Ten key input)
Paper capacity (Roll paper) Max. Diameter: 170mm, Max. length:150M (500ft)
Bypass feed
Copy Paper Thickness 68~148 (micron)
Output tray capacity Front : 99 sheets @A1/D (Plain paper)
10 sheets @A1/D (Application paper)
Rear : 1 sheets @A0/E
Paper cut method Synchronized (A040 only, with Roll Feeder),

Preset (A040 & A041), Variable cut (A040 & A041)
Power source EU 220/230/240V, 50/60Hz, 7A
25
Maximum Power Consumption A040 less than 1.4KVA (Mainframe + table)

less than 1.4KVA (Mainframe + Roll Feeder)
A041 less than 1.5KVA (Mainframe + 1-Roll Feeder)
less than 1.5KVA (Mainframe + 2-Roll Feeder)
Dimensions (Wx D x H) A040 1,080 x 670 x 1,310 (mm)

A041 1,200 x 803 x 1,140 (mm) (with roll feeder)
Weight A040 76Kg (Mainframe)

A041 less than 79Kg (Mainframe)
26
Special features
Clear Mode :standard

Auto start :standard
Auto Clear :standard, default: 2min,
Auto-shut-off :default 30min. (US version only)
Job program :standard
Auto Paper selection :Not available
Auto Image density : No (manual)
Margin adjustment :standard ( 99mm/4.0 by 1mm/0.1)
- Add Margin (Leading/Trailing edge) in Synchronized cut mode
*Trailing edge margin adjustment is available for A040ple version only.
- Image Shift in Preset cut mode/Variable cut mode.
Partial copy :standard

Emergency Stop :standard
Fusing temperature adjustment :standard (High/Normal/Low)
100% Ratio Tolerance Adjustment: available to the vertical direction only
1.0% ~ +1.0% by 0.05% (default 0%)
Job interrupt :Not available

Sample copy :Not available
User code :Not available
Cut length adjustment :standard -25mm(1.0) ~ +25mm (1.0) by 1mm or 0.1
Operation Panel
Feature Selection :Sheet key

Diagnostics : Replace consumables
Original/Paper misfeed
Service Diagnostics
27
Version 1.11
Software Solutions
DeskTop Binder V2 Professional
ScanRouter V2 Professional
SmartNet Monitor
Printer Cost & Security Manager
Print Observer
eCabinet 2.1
eCabinet 2100
Memory Matrix
WFW Home NPS

DeskTopbinder V2 Professional Product Information Guide
PRODUCT
INFORMATION GUIDE
DeskTopBinder V2 Professional
1
Introduction
For the best understanding of DeskTopBinder V2 Professional please read the PIG of the Lite
versions first (see Appendix 1 for this document).
In Ricoh Japan a division exists that is called System Products Business. The mission of this division
is as follows:
To develop and provide the core software and the system products for Image Communication
and to reinforce Office Solutions Business.
As part of the future for the Ricoh group they envisage a concept called Ricoh Document Highway. In
the future, there are two basic elements for what they call is the e-society:
Next generation Aficio products and

Document Solutions Software.
On the verge of these two basic building blocks is the digital highway, an Internet/Intranet-based
vehicle that integrates the resources on the network and lets users perform different activities, like
outputting, inputting, delivery, storage, retrieval and so on.
For the near future, Ricoh Japan has announced several key software applications that will be critical
in the creation and establishment of this digital highway. Two of the most important new software
applications will be:
DeskTopBinder V2 Professional, an XML-based web-portal for document management and

retrieval and
ScanRouter V2 Professional, a software solution for electronic delivery of documents over the
digital highway.
To offer customers real network scanning and an integrated messaging solution
To increase mainframe sales in the field by offering a tool which can enable them to run more
effectively and develop them into true networked input-output systems
To position NRG as a Total Solution Provider by offering hardware and software as a combined
document management package
To increase secondary revenue streams through additional income from support, installation and
training and pre/post sales consultancy
2
Product Concept
Document Solutions - Overview
Document Management and Distribution
ScanRouter V2 Professional allows end- users to efficiently digitise and distribute paper-based
documents in a cost-effective manner. With the DeskTopBinder V2 Professional, retrieving,
archiving and managing electronic documents for distribution and/or printing is an effortless process.
The technology is designed as an open architecture platform designed specifically to allow the
development, deployment and integration of NRGs software and hardware with Independent
Software and Hardware Vendors.
Document Workflow
Input Distribute Edit Storage Retrieve Output
ScanRouter V2 Pro
DeskTopBinder V2
Pro
Oak, eCabinet
Product Name
Development Name Product Name Description

Plumeria Lite DeskTopBinder V2 Lite Bundled Product
Plumeria Full DeskTopBinder V2 Professional Package product
Plumeria Full (5 License) DeskTopBinder V2 Professional (5 License) Licensed product
Plumeria Full (10 License) DeskTopBinder V2 Professional (10 License) Licensed product
Product Outline
The main positioning of DeskTopBinder V2 Professional is as a personal document management

solution.
Compared with DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, this product is focused on server-based document

management, as well as the Document Server located on the GW-support MFP and/or Delivery
Server (ScanRouter Professional).
3
DeskTopBinder V2 Professional also supports more advanced document management functions than
DeskTopBinder Lite. Features include:
1. Ability to handle both image data and application files seamlessly with application viewer,
image-to-text conversion (Image OCR Conversion), etc.
2. Ability to share documents in thumbnail view with other DeskTopBinder V2 Professional users.
Competition
ScanRouter Professional:
Comparable solutions are:

HP Digital Sender
Axis Scanserver
Xerox Document Centre and CentreWare
DeskTopBinder:
Document Management Systems, like PaperMaster
Combination:
Unique
4
Product Concept

DeskTopBinder V2 Pro
Tivoli/OpenView & UniCentre
Oak
Doc-Q-Manager/CRD-PFP & Velocity

E Cabinet
Document
Document
and Network
Network
Information Print
Print
Information
Management Management
and
and Maple , Laurel & Print Observer
Control
Control
PCSM / ACM
Document
Host Printing
Solutions
Forms Document
Document
Processing Distribution
Distribution
Workflow
Workflow
Formscape
ScanRouter Pro
Forms 5 ScanRouter V2 Pro
Segmentation
Document server for enterprise
Next generation
Products 02.7
Cedar-SE1
Division Document server

01.8
for division 02.8
Oak Oak-SD2
00.06
eCabinet
Document server
for workgroup
01.1 02.1
00.03
Workgroup ScanRouter V2 Pro Cherry-SG2
ScanRouter Professional Full Full
00.03 Lite Lite

ScanRouter Standard distribution type
01.1 02.1
00.06 DeskTopBinder V2 Plumeria-CW2
DeskTopBinder
Personal Client software for Windows
01.7 02.7
DeskTopBinder Lite Plumeria-CI2
Client software for browser
1999 2000 2001 2002
Positioning
ScanRouter V2 Professional and DeskTopBinder V2 Professional are positioned as software, which

can add value to NRGs hardware product range. It should also enable NRG to further position both
its products, and the company as a whole, as one of the leading providers of document solutions for
the networked environment.
5
Target Markets, Channels and Positioning
Target Markets
ScanRouter V2 Professional and DeskTopBinder V2 Professional will be released to all NRG

operating companies, including NRGI.
Target Channels
The software will be sold in all channels, although the direct channel will have particular emphasis.
Target user
The main target users for ScanRouter V2 Professional and DeskTopBinder V2 Professional will be
current/future users of DMR22/27, DMR35A/45A, SC430dc, PCR38, E99 and all future GW
supported machines.
These users will be introduced to the software through the bundled Lite versions. These have limited
functionality, for example, neither software package supports scan-to-e-mail, fax distribution or
web-browser operation.
These users could be from a variety of different sized organisations:
Divisions (50-100 employees)

Larger Workgroup s (20-30 employees)
Smaller Workgroups (3-10 users)
Division Large Office

50-100 employees (0ver 100 workers)
Work Group Middle Office

20-30 employees (30-99 workers)
Small Work Group

3-10 employees Small Office
(1-29 workers)
Business Personal
6
System Environment
Network environment, Intranet environment, Using Mailing System
Support
Support of this product will have to be done through the normal support route:
First level: Operating Company

Second level: CSS
Third level: ESSC
7
DeskTopBinder V2 Professional Key Sales Points
DeskTopBinder V2 Professional supports more advanced document management functions,
compared with DeskTopBinder Lite:
1. Available to handle both image data and application files seamlessly with application
viewer, image-to-text conversion (Image OCR Conversion), etc.
2. Available to share documents in thumbnail view with other DeskTopBinder V2 Professional

users.
MFP/ GW-support MFP

Scanner/Fax Document Server
LP
Scanner
DeskTopBinder DeskTopBinder
V2 Professional V2 Professional
LP Scanner ScanRouter V2
Lite / Professional
Delivery Server
Network Connection Local Connection
8
Outline of DeskTopBinder V2 Professional
As mentioned in the PIG for DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, the software can be used as personal document
management software, to manage various types of documents (image data, application files, etc.)
saved in each clients PC.
The window below appears when you start DeskTopBinder V2 Professional.
Top (3)
(3)
Input Icon
(1) (3)
Output Icon
(2)
(1) Document Explorer (Tree View)
DeskTopBinder V2 Professional enables you to access the following servers from your client PC:
Document Server HDD in GW-supported MFPs
Delivery Server Server controlled by ScanRouter V2 Lite/Professional
You can view documents in servers with thumbnails.
Local and network drives (E:, F: ) are displayed under My Computer, just like Windows
Explorer.
My Cabinet and folders managed by DeskTopBinder V2 Professional are displayed under My

Workroom.
To display Document Server, Delivery Server and My Computer with DeskTopBinder V2

Professional, Extended Features settings are required in advance.
9
(2) Document List View
Documents stored in the selected cabinet or folder are displayed. In Document List View, one of the
following view modes is available:
Thumbnail View
Icon View
Details View
Calendar View (Monthly/Weekly)
You can combine two or more different types of files

(e.g. Word, Excel, scanned image data) together and
handle them as one Multi-Section document. You can
flip each section (file) to see its thumbnail, or put a note
for your reference. When you use a printer that supports
RPCS print driver, that document can be printed as one
document with various print options such as
header/footer, staple, and so on.
Clipped document Notes

includes two or more
sections (files)
10
(3) Toolbar
Various functions can be selected easily by clicking icons on toolbars.
Toolbar Location Category Functions

Top Document Management Change view mode
List document properties
Search etc.
Left Document Input Add new document
Scanner input etc.
Right Document Output Print, Fax,
File Conversion Convert to image etc.
The following shows the major Icons and names.
Top
: View Icon
: Attach Note
Left
: Create File
: Import File
: Scan
Right
: Print
: Easy Print
: Convert to Image
: OCR conversion
: PDF conversion
: Export Section
11
Main Features
Product Advantages compared to previous version

The followings are main advantages of DeskTopBinder V2 Professional compared with
DeskTopBinder.
Supports GW-supported MFP
You can access the Document Server located on the DMR35A/45A or other GW-supported MFPs,
and operate stored documents from your PC remotely.
Supports Advanced Print Functions (with RPCS -support printers/MFPs)
Batch Printing
When you print a Multi-section document, which contains two or more files (e.g. Word,
Excel, PowerPoint, image file, etc.), with RPCS-support printers/MFPs, various print
settings such as header/footer, page, staple and punch will be available for the whole
document.
Job Binding (Temporary Print File Print)

When you print a document with RPCS-support printers/MFPs, you have an option to create
a temporary print file and to save it in the PC. You can select two or more print files from the
list, and print them as one document with various print options.
Easy Print
You can register your customised print settings and can use them by just clicking icons on
the toolbar.
Supports distribution to Delivery Server [with ScanRouter V2 Professional]

DeskTopBinder V2 Professional supports ScanRouter V2 Professional as the Delivery Server. In
combination with ScanRouter V2 Professional, a user can distribute documents from their PC,
Document Management Server, or Delivery Server, to others that are registered to the Delivery
Server. From a client PC, destinations can be selected from the address list of ScanRouter V2
Professional.
Data can be exported or imported as HTML files

Data in DeskTopBinder V2 Professional can be exported to a Windows folder as an HTML file.
The user can then see the information eve n if they do not have DeskTopBinder V2 Professional
installed on their PC.
12
Comparison List between DeskTopBinder V2 Professional and DeskTopBinder
Differences are listed in blue.
Functions DeskTopBinder V2 Professional DeskTopBinder

System
OS Win 95/98/ 98SE Win 95/98
Win NT 4.0 Win NT 4.0
Win 2000 Professional Win 2000 Professional
Win 2000 Server
Windows ME
Mail Application
MS Exchange 5.0 MS Exchange 5.0
MS Outlook 97/98/2000 MS Outlook 97/98/2000
Document Management
Register Scanner input Scanner input
Windows files Windows files
(Including shortcuts) Distributed documents
Distributed documents Create application file
Create application file
Registered as linked files.
Import HTML files
Search Browse by cabinet icons, folder icons and Browse by folder icons and
document thumbnails document thumbnails
Specific search by keyword Specific search by keyword
Broad (Quick) Search
View Thumbnail Thumbnail
(image/application file) (image/application file)
Icon Icon
Detailed Detailed
Calendar
Update Section update Section update
Combine/Separate Combine/Separate
Manage Copy/Move/Rename/ Copy/Move/Rename/
Delete/Export Delete/Export
Change document property Document property
Output Normal print Normal print
Conversion Conversion
Send by mail (mail software) Send by mail (mail software)
Send by Fax (PC-FAX)
RPCS Print Functions*
(Batch Printing/Job binding/Easy Print etc.)
Export HTML file
Export Document properties Summary in
CSV format
*Only available with RPCS-supported

printers/MFPs.
13

Viewer
Display Image file Image file
Application file Application file
(displayed in simplified contents of the file) (displayed in simplified contents of
the file)
Edit Image data Image data
Auto skew (image data) Auto skew (image data)
Client DM Server
Supported Add, Search, View, Update, Edit, Output N/A
Functions
Client Delivery Server
Supported Servers ScanRouter V2 Professional ScanRouter Professional
Supported View/Retrieval View/Retrieval
Functions Auto retrieval and register to Auto retrieval and register to
DeskTopBinder V2 Professional* DeskTopBinder*
Delivery notification* Delivery notification*
Distribution** *ScanRouter Client Software is required
Direct print from Delivery Server**
*ScanRouter V2 Link is required
**Only available with ScanRouter V2 Professional
Client I/O Products
Supported Server Document Server in GW-support MFPs N/A
Supported Thumbnail display N/A

Functions Copy/Delete documents
View/Change properties
View/Cancel request
Re-print/Re-fax
Entry Assistant
*Password is required for
password-protected documents
Data Conversion DeskTopBinder Converter
(From DTB to DTB
V2) see below
Collaboration with SmartNetMonitor Aficio Manager (Print Manager)
utilities
Notes
Shortcut function can be used only when connecting to the Document Management Server.
You should have DeskTopBinder and DeskTopBinder V2 Professional coexisting in the same PC
if you are using ScanRouter/ScanRouter Professional as Delivery Server
If you select to overwrite the old version, documents managed by DeskTopBinder will be
automatically converted into DeskTopBinder V2 Professional documents.
14
Installation of DeskTopBinder V2 Professional
The setup interface of DeskTopBinder V2 Professional is a little different from DeskTopBinder V2

Lite. DeskTopBinder V2 Professional, Job Binding and ScanRouter V2 Link are all installed at the
same time rather than individually.
DeskTopBinder Converter
DeskTopBinder Converter is a document conversion tool that allows you to convert DeskTopBinder
data to use with DeskTopBinder V2 Professional. This software can work in any environments where
DeskTopBinder V2 Professional can work.
Important: Only the following documents can be converted:
(1) DeskTopBinder data stored in a folder that was used as a DTB-Shared Cabinet.
(2) DeskTopBinder data that has been backed up by the backup functionality of DeskTopBinder
(3) DeskTopBinder data that has not been converted into DeskTopBinder V2 Professional data as
you perform co-existing installation of DeskTopBinder V2 Professional.
Starting up
1. Click the Start button.
2. Point to Programs, DeskTopBinder V2 and then select DeskTopBinder Converter.
15
Product Advantages compared with Bundled Product
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite will be bundled with NRGs GW-supported MFPs, printers and scanners
such as DMR35A/45A, PCR38, DMR15S/18S and SC430dc.
The following table gives an overview of the main advantages of DeskTopBinder V2 Professional
compared with DeskTopBinder V2 Lite.
File Conversion
DeskTopBinder V2 DeskTopBinder V2
Professional (Package) Lite (Bundled)
Image to Image TIFF/BMP/JPEG TIFF/BMP/JPEG
Application to Image TIFF/BMP/JPEG X
OCR (Image to Text) O X
PDF Conversion O X
O: Available X: Not available
DM Server Access
DeskTopBinder V2 DeskTopBinder V2
Professional (Package) Lite (Bundled)
Document Server:
GW-support MFP O O
Delivery Server:
ScanRouter V2 Lite/Pro O O
Shared Cabinets
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite does not have the File sharing function.
Now, you can share documents (with thumbnail view), which are stored in the Windows shared
folders, with other DeskTopBinder V2 Professional users.
Mail Transmission (with Mail Software)

In DeskTopBinder Lite there is no function for email transmission in order to send a document to
others. When using DeskTopBinder V2 Professional, you can send documents as attachments by
using MAPI support software.
Application Viewer
Supported application files are displayed as blank with DeskTopBinder V2 Lite viewer, however,
with DeskTopBinder V2 Professional, they are displayed with Easy Viewer (quick viewer) and
DeskTopBinder V2 viewer.
Specific Search
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite only supports broad, quick and simple searches. A more specific search
by various conditions is available with DeskTopBinder V2 Professional.
16
Overall Comparison Chart
DeskTopBinder V2 DeskTopBinder V2 Lite

Professional (package) (Bundled)
FILE CONVERSION
Image to image TIFF/BMP/JPEG TIFF/BMP/JPEG
Application to image TIFF/BMP/JPEG X
OCR (image to text) O X
PDF Conversion O X
SHARED CABINETS
File sharing function allows documents O X
stored in Windows folders to be shared
with other DeskTopBinder V2
Professional users, via thumbnails view.
MAIL TRANSMISSION
Mail transmission function allows sending O X
of documents as attachments using MAPI
support software
APPLICATION VIEWER
Display of application files uses Easy O X
Viewer (quick viewer) and
DeskTopBinder V2 Viewer.
SPECIFIC SEARCH
Specific search by various conditions O X
(instead of only Broad Search).
Note: Also see the Appendix for the comparisons between Lite, Pro and V1.
17
Connection with Document Server in GW-supported MFP
With DeskTopBinder V2 Professional, you can handle documents stored in the Document Server of a
GW-supported MFP from your PC remotely. Also, these documents can be output by print, or be
re-faxed with the operations from your PC. In other words, you can use Document Server functions
from your PC.
The operations available through DeskTopBinder V2 Professional are exactly the same as for the Lite
version.
Input Storage
Copy * For output

Printer operations from
MFPs operation
Fax (Transmission) HDD panel, please see the
PC-Fax (Transmission) 8.0GB PPLI of
Scanner DMR35A/45A.
Network
Connection
Operations with DeskTopBinder V2 Professional

View document list
Copy documents to DeskTopBinder V2 Professional
DeskTopBinder Print documents
V2 Professional Search documents
Delete documents
View document properties:
File Name/Expiration/Application, etc.
Change document properties:
File Name/Password/User ID
Re-fax (transmit) documents
18
In DeskTopBinder V2 Professional, the Document Server is displayed in a tree view. When you store
documents to the Document Server of the MFP, you can input additional information - User Name .
By specifying that User Name, in the Extended Features of DeskTopBinder V2 Professional, User
Name and All User folders are displayed separately under Document Server, and documents are
categorised by storage method (Copy/ Facsimile/Printer/Scanner).
The following is the image of Document Servers tree view.
(1)
(2)
1) Document Server Name
2) Only documents with a specified
User Name are displayed.
3) All documents stored in the
Document Server are displayed.
(3)
Note
Documents displayed in the Document Server are Copy, Facsimile, and Printer
documents. Scanner documents are NOT included in the Document Server.
Document data of the Scanner can be seen only from DeskTopBinder V2 Professional, not
from the GW-supported MFP.
* All User Folder includes the documents under User Name Folder too.
View Documents List
From the tree view, documents in the Document Server are displayed in thumbnail, icon or details
view.
Note: Password-protect documents are displayed in blank.
19
Copying Documents to DeskTopBinder V2 Professional
You can copy documents from the Document Server to DeskTopBinder V2. When documents are
copied from the DMR35A/45A Document Server, copied files will be converted as follows:
Storage Method Original File Format Copied File Format
Copy Unique format TIFF-MMR
Facsimile TIFF TIFF
Printer Unique format TIFF-MMR
Scanner TIFF, JPEG TIFF, JPEG
Note
Each page of a multi-page image document will be added as a section.
You cannot copy documents stored in PCs to Document Server in MFP.
Documents stored in Document Server cannot be moved anywhere. You can move documents to
your PC by copying.
Depending on the original file format, it may take some time to copy documents from Document
Server.
Print Documents
You can print documents in the Document Server directly from the MFP from where the Document
Server is located.
Note: With DMR35A/45A, scanner documents stored in the Document Server cannot be printed out.
To print the documents, you need to copy them to a local PC.
Search Documents
The following key items can be used for search:

Storage Method (Document Server / Copy / Facsimile / Printer)
Document Name
User Name
Available combinations of key items are as follows:
Storage Method and Document Name
Storage Method and User Name
Delete Documents
From DeskTopBinder V2 Professional, you can delete documents by selecting the thumbnails of the
documents.
View/Change Document Properties
You can change Document Name and User Name in the Document Properties dialogue box
displayed below.
Re-Fax (Transmit) Documents
Only fax data (Fax/PC-Fax) stored in the Document Server can be transmitted.
Document Security
A password is required when you make an operation with any password-protected document.
20
Connection with Delivery Server (ScanRouter V2 Professional)
ScanRouter V2 Professional is a network scanning and distribution system, which allows the
following operations:
View/Copy Documents
Auto-Receive/Auto-Registration (with ScanRouter V2 Link)
Print delivered documents from a printer connecting to Delivery Server
Deliver documents from DeskTopBinder V2 Professional to other users who are registered to
View/Copy Documents
Delivered image documents on the Delivery Server can be viewed as thumbnails. You can edit these
documents after adding them to DeskTopBinder V2 Professional.
Auto-Receive/Auto-Registration (With ScanRouter V2 Link)
When using ScanRouter V2 Link (Delivery Server monitoring and data reception utility), documents
in the Delivery Server can be retrieved from the server. Documents can be registered automatically
under My Work Folder of DeskTopBinder V2 Professional, or saved as Windows files.
ScanRouter V2 Link
(ScanRouter V2 Link is the successor model of ScanRo uter Client Software -currently included in the
ScanRouter/ScanRouter Professional CD-ROM)
ScanRouter V2 Link will be installed from the DeskTopBinder V2 Professional installation menu. Its
installed location image is as follows:
ScanRouter V2 Link monitors selected In- Tray(s) located on ScanRouter V2 Lite/Professional

Delivery Server, and retrieve s or saves the documents on the client PC. While this software is
running, its icon stays on the taskbar.
21
ScanRouter V2 Link Properties
From the [Properties] menu, you can configure two types of settings : In-Tray settings and monitoring
settings. You can create In-Tray settings for each user, and apply monitor settings to In-Trays to be
monitored here.
Add or Remove
the In-Trays to be
monitored
To change settings, select the user then

click [Change Settings].
In-Tray Settings
In-Tray settings enable you to define how to receive documents on the In-Tray of Delivery Server.
Delivered documents on the In- Tray

will be added as DeskTopBinder V2
Professional documents
automatically.
* When Monitor In-Tray option is

selected, [Launch DeskTopBinder V2]
button will appear on the notification
message.
22
The following In-Tray settings are available:
Category Options Description

Control settings Monitor In-Tray Only notifies a user of document
(Both options selectable) delivery
(Not receive a document)
- Pop-up
- Sound
- Flashing Icon
Auto-receive from In-Tray Retrieve documents from the In-Tray
with the Save as/Add method.
Save as/Add Save as Windows file Save received documents with the
(Alternative option) specified file format on the location
which is specified in Save in option
Add as DeskTopBinder V2 Add received documents to My Work
document Folder of DeskTopBinder V2
Save in -- - Enabled when Save as Windows file
is selected
- Specify a file location to be saved
Format for received data Black and White Available file formats:
- Leave format as is
- Multi-page TIFF
(MMR/MR/MH)
- TIFF (MMR/MR/MH/No
Compression)
- TIFF-F
- PDF
Grayscale/Colour Available file formats:
- JPEG
- TIFF (No Compression)
- PDF
Monitoring Settings
When you select the Monitor In- Tray option in the [In-Tray] settings dialogue box, monitoring
settings can be configured:
Document Security
You can display other users In-Tray on the DeskTopBinder V2 Professional tree view. Each In-Tray
can be protected by a password.
23
Extended Features
In DeskTopBinder V2 Professional, optional features can be added from the Extended Features menu.
For example, you can set up the ScanRouter V2 Delivery Server, Document Server in a
GW-supported MFP or customise print/scan settings. To use these features, you should set these
features in advance.
Extended Features Dialog Box
(1) (2)
(3)
(1) Setting menu (Input/Output/Conversion/Network etc.) can be switched here.

(2) Features available for use
(3) Features currently set
24
The following is a list of Icons and optional functions that can be set from Extended Features:
Optional Function List
Icon Function
Input Scan
Easy Scanning
Output Print
Easy Print
Send By Fax
Deliver
Send By E- mail
Convert Convert To Text (with OCR)
Convert To PDF *
Convert To Image
Network My Workroom **
Document Server
Delivery server
My Computer
Tools Print Document Summaries ***
Export Document Summaries in CSV format
Entry Assistant ****
Exporting HTML
Import HTML
* Convert to PDF: Convert the DeskTopBinder V2 Professional data into PDF format
** My Workroom has been set as default setting.
*** Print Document Summaries: Print out the data list in cabinet /Folder
**** Entry Assistant: Automate the scanning and OCR conversion of multi-page documents
How to connect with Document Server in GW-supported MFP
1. From the Tools menu, select Extended Features

2. Select the Network icon and Document Server in the Selectable Function(s) list, and then click
Add. The Document Server Properties dialog box appears
3. Select the server name by browsing, or typing the server name/IP address
4. Type in the user name and User code registered to GW-supported MFP and click OK
5. Then, machines name appears in the Available Function(s) list and click OK
6. Document Server appears in the tree view of DeskTopBinder V2 Professional
Note: When you enter User Name of Document Server Properties, User Name has to be the
same as that registered on GW-supported MFP. If you enter wrong User Name (e.g. Ron instead of
ron), another User Name (Ron) folder is produced. This way, you cannot see any of the documents,
which are stored under your name in the Document Server.
25
How to connect with ScanRouter V2 Lite/Professional Delivery Server
1. From the Tools menu, select Extended Features

2. Select the Network icon and ScanRouter V2 Delivery Server in the Selectable Function(s) list,
and then click Add. The Delivery Server Properties dialogue box appears
3. Select the server name by browsing, or type in the server name/IP address directly
4. Select a Delivery Server and click OK
5. Click Add and after selecting the In-Tray to be displayed on DeskTopBinder V2 tree view, click
OK
6. To change each users document delivery settings, select the user name and click Delivery
Settings on the Delivery Server Properties dialogue box
7. Select the document delivery type and click Add. Then click OK
8. Delivery server appears in the Available Function(s) to use and click OK
9. Then, Delivery Server appears in the tree view of DeskTopBinder V2 Professional
26
Main Functions of DeskTopBinder V2 Professional
INPUT
Drag and Drop Documents from Tree View (Import)
From the tree view, you can easily add documents located on servers or a client PC to DeskTopBinder
V2. Windows files can be also imported by selecting [Add Document] on the [File] menu.
Note: Depending upon the location of the original document and the method of copy, thumbnails may
not be created automatically. To create a thumbnail, please select the document and then select
[Create Thumbnail] in [Document] menu.
Delivery From Delivery Server (ScanRouter V2 Lite/Professional)
Delivered image documents on Delivery Server can be viewed in thumbnails or with a viewer. You
can edit these documents after adding them to DeskTopBinder V2 Professional. When you use
ScanRouter V2 Link, documents on Delivery Server can be registered to DeskTopBinder V2
Professional automatically.
Scanner Input
You can input paper documents from a scanner that supports a TWAIN driver and then save them as
image file documents. Documents are saved as DeskTopBinder V2 Professional documents in the
selected folder.
When you select Scan menu in DeskTopBinder V2 Professional, the TWAIN driver screen is
displayed for scanning.
Easy Scanning
You just click the [easy scanning] icon to start scanning with your favourite settings (density, colour,
resolution, original document size, etc.). It enables you to scan the same fo rmat documents quickly
and easily. Documents are saved as DeskTopBinder V2 Professional documents in the specified
folder. If preferred, registered settings can be displayed before starting scanning to configure the
settings temporarily.
You can also select the scanner from a list of applicable scanners on the network.
Note: To use this function, Extended Features setting is required.
The following TWAIN Drivers currently support Easy Scanning:
Type270/Type450 TWAIN Driver Ver. 2

IS330DC SCSI/1394 TWAIN Driver Ver. 3
Type1045 TWAIN Driver Ver. 3
TWAIN Driver Ver. 3 is required for selecting applicable scanners from the list.
27
Creating a New Application Document
With DeskTopBinder V2 Professional, you can create a new MS-Office document (or supported
application document) without starting the application, and save it as a DeskTopBinder V2
Professional document. A fixed form can be also saved as a user template for your convenience. You
can manage several types of application documents with thumbnails from the DeskTopBinder V2
Professional window.
OUTPUT (Print)
With DeskTopBinder V2 Professional, documents can be printed in various ways as described below.
When you use RPCS-support printers/MFPs, you can use expanded print functions as well.
* To use the functions with a description of [with RPCS Driver], RPCS print driver must be installed
in the PC.
Batch Printing [with RPCS Driver]
DeskTopBinder V2 Professional can combine various image/application files and handle them as one
Multi-section Document, so the document can be printed by just one print order instead of printing
one by one.
Various print options are available for the Multi-section Document such as:
Output Tray Sort

Staple Punch
Duplicate Header/Footer
Job Binding (Print from Print File List) [with RPCS Driver]
When using RPCS-support printers/MFPs, you have a Print-to-File option that saves files as
temporary Temporary print files (.RMP). You can select two or more print job files from the list,
and print them as one document with various print options as described above. You can also start this
function from the [Start] menu.
Word Word
PAGE1 PAGE1
PAGE2 TIFF PAGE2

PAGE3 TIFF
PAGE3
28
For example, you can insert image document between page 2 and 3 of one Word document and print
them with print options such as duplex and staple.
In this case, you need to create three temporary print files as listed below, and print them together
using Job Binding.
1. Word file 1-2 page(2page)

2. TIFF image document (1page)
3. Word file 3 page (1page)
There are two methods to create print job files as follows:
1. With Application - Select [Send to Job Binding] in RPCS-support printers print properties
window.
2. With DeskTopBinder V2 Professional - Select [Send to Job Binding] on [Print] menu.
Print Job Files List
Selected files are

displayed here, and
can be printed as one
document.
29
Easy Print [with RPCS Driver]
You can just click the icon to start printing with your favourite settings (printer to be used, print
properties, header/footer, etc.). It enables you to use various types of print settings quickly and easily.
If preferred, registered settings can be displayed before starting printing so that you can configure
these settings temporarily.
Note: To use this function, [Extended Features] setting is required.
Print Application Files
When printing an application file (Word, Excel or PowerPoint) with DeskTopBinder V2 Professional,
the user does not have to start the application. They simply select the thumbnail or icon of the
document, and start printing.
Note: To print application files, the associated application must be installed in the PC.
Print Multi-Section Document
A multi-section document, which includes various image/application files, can be printed in just one
print, instead of printing each file with the associated application.
Print from DM/Delivery Server [with RPCS Driver]
By creating a print order in DeskTopBinder V2 Professional, documents that are located on the
DM/Delivery Server can be printed directly with a servers printers/MFPs. In other words, you can
make a remote print with DeskTopBinder V2 Professional as a client. You can also bind documents
and print them with various print options.
Print jobs in the server can be displayed so that you can cancel your print job from the list.
* Regarding Delivery Server, this function is only available with ScanRouter V2 Professional.
* To use this function, [Extended Features] setting is required.
* To print a file created with an application from the PC/server, the associated application should be
installed in the PC/server.
Print from the Document Server in GW-supported MFP [with RPCS Driver]
By making a print order from DeskTopBinder V2 Professional, documents that are stored in
Document Server in GW-supported MFP can be printed out. You can select two or more documents
and print them with various print options as well.
Note
To use this function, [Extended Features] setting is required.
Scanner data stored in the Document Server cannot be printed out. To print the data, you need to
copy it to a local PC.
30
OUTPUT (Other)
Delivery via delivery server
From DeskTopBinder V2 Professional, documents located on PCs or DM/Delivery Servers can be

delivered to users who are registered to ScanRouter V2 Professional.
* This function is only available with ScanRouter V2 Professional.

* To use this function, [Extended Features] setting is required.
Process
1) Select the data of My Workroom or In-tray of ScanRouter V2 Professional server to be sent.
2) Right click and [Output] and [Deliver] or select deliver icon.

3) [Select Destination] dialogue box appears and select the destination and click [ok].
4) Data is delivered.
Procedure s of Deliver setting

1. From the [Tools] menu, select [Extended Features].
2. Select the [Output] icon and [Deliver] in the [Selectable Function(s)] list and then click
[Add].
3. The [Delivery properties] dialogue box appears.
4. Select [server] and type in [Name] and [E- mail address] of client PC.
Note: If you set delivery type of scanned document as sending by mail with ScanRouter V2
Professional server, the clients information is attached to the mail by above step.
Drag and Drop Documents from Tree View (Export)
Documents on the PC or on DM/Delivery Server, or Document Server in GW-support MFPs, can be

changed to Windows files by using "Drag and Drop" action.
31
Send by mail
If you are using Mail software such as MS Exchange Client or MS Outlook, documents located on the
PC or DM/Delivery servers can be sent via e-mail as an attachment. Self- extract file format is
available for the attachment.
This function is only available with ScanRouter V2 Professional.

To use this function, [Extended Features] setting is required, and mail software should be set as
default in Windows.
Send by Fax
Documents located on the PC or DM/Delivery servers can be transmitted with a PC-Fax driver.
To use this function, [Extended Features] setting is required, and PC-FAX driver should be
installed in the PC.
Other
l File Conversion
An image document can be converted to the following image file formats, and you can add it as a
DeskTopBinder V2 Professional document, or as a Windows file.
When you save converted documents as Windows files, self-extract format is available to compress
its data size.
File Type Compression Type Colours

TIFF Uncompressed Black/White (1bit)
256 Colours (8bit)
Grayscale (8bit)
Full Colour (24bit)
MH Black/White (1bit)
MR Black/White (1bit)
MMR Black/White (1bit)
JPEG Grayscale (8bit)
Compression Level: Full Colour (24bit)
1 (Better Quality) to 5 (Better Compression)
BMP No Compression Black/White (1bit)
256 Colours (8bit)
Grayscale (8bit)
Full Colour (24bit)
JPEG (JFIF) Compression Level: Grayscale (8bit)
1 (Better Quality) to 5 (Better Compression) Full Colour (24bit)
Note
This function is only available for image documents (TIFF, JPEG, BMP), and application
documents cannot be converted into image documents.
32
OCR conversion
Image data can be converted into text with the simple OCR function.
Steps:
1. Select the Image data that you want to convert.
2. Right click and select [Convert] and [Convert to text (with OCR)] or select icon.
3. Then, [Convert to text] dialogue box appears.
4. User has to select a language among 10 languages with which the Image data can be written. Then
click [ok].
Data can be exported / imported as an HTML file
Data in DeskTopBinder V2 Professional can be exported to a Windows folder as an HTML file. This
means that even a PC without DeskTopBinder V2 Professional installed view the data with a standard
browser. Also the HTML data can be imported to the DeskTopBinder V2 Professional.
Export the data
1. Select the folder or section, which you want to export.

2. From the [Tools] menu, select [Export HTML] then type in home page tile.
3. And click [OK].
4. Select an empty folder which has been already made at client local PC.
5. Then, select order of documents when viewed by a web browser.
6. Finally, you are asked if you want to start process. Clicking [Proceed], then data will be exported
with HTML format,
Import the HTML data
On the other hand, an HTML file, which is produced by DeskTopBinder V2 Professional, can be also
imported to the folder of My cabinet.
33
Viewer
On image documents (TIFF, JPEG, BMP) you can make simple edits such as partial move, copy,
drawing figures (e.g. line, rectangle, and oval), stamp, and text input. You can insert/delete sections
(files) to/from the document currently displayed on the viewer.
You can also see simplified contents of image documents quickly with easy viewer in case
thumbnail views are not enough.
Edit Image Document with DeskTopBinder V2 Viewer
Stamps Text Input
Drawing
l Combining Documents (Multi-section Document)
With DeskTopBinder V2 Professional, two or more files (sections), such as scanned image data and
application files, can be combined to one DeskTopBinder V2 Professional document. You can use
"Drag and Drop" action to make various types of files (e.g. Word, Excel, BMP, and TIFF) one
document, and print with one print order. It is just as easy as clipping paper documents.
A Combined document can be easily separated as well.
[Example]
Word Excel Power Power

ABC DEF
Point Point
Co. Co.
Proposal / Comparison Chart / Presentation / All related documents can be
Information (Newspaper and Magazine clip) managed as one document
etc. easy to view and easy to find!
34
Note
You can put a note on a document, or each section (file) of a Multi-section document. Comments on a
note (up to 32 characters) or note colo ur (9 colo urs) are available for your reference.
Shared Cabinet
You can register Windows shared folders on the network in the DeskTopBinder V2 Professional
"Shared Cabinet". You can put documents to the cabinet directly, or put/create folders under it. It is
effective to share documents with thumbnail view to others who are using DeskTopBinder V2
Professional.
The followings are the main functional limitations of documents in Shared Cabinet:
DeskTopBinder V2 Professional Shared Cabinet

Create Thumbnails O X
View Thumbnails O O
Open from Application O X
Change Document Name/ O O
Expiration/Document Status
Edit Document O X
Steps for making a shared cabinet:
1. Create a new Folder and set it [shared] on Windows

1. With DeskTopBinder V2 Professional, from file menu select [Shared cabinet] and [Add to tree]
2. Then [Add Shared cabinet to tree] dialogue box appears
3. Choose the folder that you already created and type in the name you want to display on
DeskTopBinder V2 Professional.
Note: When user makes shared cabinet, the folder has to be empty. If any data already exists,
DeskTopBinder V2 Professional cannot specify it as shared cabinet
Document Search
Search methods in DeskTopBinder V2 Professional are as follows:
Specific Search
You can search among cabinets on the PC or shared cabinets by various key items such as Document
Name, Section Name, data size, Note Colo ur, Note Comments and so on.
Broad Search
You can search quickly with keyword text (Document name/ Document properties summary) and
date settings (Date Added/ Date Modified/Expiration).
35
Collaboration with Network Monitoring Utilities
You can check the detailed status of a selected printer by clicking [Printer Info] on [Print] menu.
The following network monitoring utilities are available:
- Aficio Manager
- Lanier Net Manager.
- infotec NetPrint Manager
- Net Vision
- PrintObserver
- SmartNetMonitor
36
Logistics
History Product Name Description

DeskTopBinder DeskTopBinder V2 Professional Software application
DeskTopBinder 5 License DeskTopBinder V2 Professional 5 License Software application
DeskTopBinder 10 License DeskTopBinder V2 Professional 10 License Software application
Distribution
DeskTopBinder will be made available through NRGD. It will come as 3 versions: the standard one
license version, a 5-license package and a 10- license package. All versions should be ordered in the
usual way and against the particular EDP code.
Timings
Software Launch Date

ScanRouter V2 Professional September 2001
DeskTopBinder V2 Professional September 2001
Localisation
EU Version English, French, German, Italian, Dutch*

*Dutch has replaced Spanish in ScanRouter V2 Professional
System Requirements
PC IBM PC/AT Compatible

OS Windows 95 (OSR2 or later)
Windows 98/98 SE
Windows NT Workstation V4.0 (Service Pack 5 or later)
Windows NT Server V4.0 (Service Pack 5 or later)
Windows 2000 Professional
Windows 2000 Server
Windows 2000 Millennium Edition
CPU Pentium 133 MHz minimum
(Pentium II 266 MHz or faster recommended)
Memory 48MB minimum
64MB or more recommended
HDD 200MB or more free disk space is recommended for saving
documents (depending on users)
* 50MB of free disk space is required for the program.
Support Software Document Editing Applications
MS Office 97/2000 (Word, Excel, PowerPoint)
MS Word 98
Related NRG ScanRouter V2 Lite
Products ScanRouter V2 Professional
Printer Local printers or network printers are available for print.
(Depending on the current PC settings.)
Scanner TWAIN supported scanners
37
Specifications of DeskTopBinder V2 Professional
Document Management
Management System
File System Displayed by tree view
Cabinet Folder - (Subfolder) Document - Section (File)
Supported Image File Format TIFF, TIFF-F, JPEG, BMP
Supported Application File Format DOC, RTF, TXT, PPT, XLS
*1
Shared Cabinet Supported
Registration
Add file to DeskTopBinder V2 Scanner input
Professional Windows files
Add from Document Server
Distributed documents
New Application file
Search
By browsing Icon View / Detailed View / Thumbnail View / Calendar View
Search Broad Search
Search by text keyword and date items
Specific Search
Search by following items are available.
Folder / Document Name / Section Name / Keyword / Note /
Document Status / Date Added / Date Modified
View
Document View Thumbnail View / Icon View / Detailed View / Easy Viewer
When two or more sections are combined, each thumbnail of these
sections can be flipped.
Section View The viewer will be used for viewing sections.
Thumbnail and Section Image / Section Image
Update
Operations for Section Add / Delete / Replace / Move / Copy / Update
Other Combine / Separate documents
Edit
Operations for Document Copy / Move / Delete / Edit Annotation / Export
Other Change document properties
Output
Print Document print
Section print
Convert and Output TIFF *2 (Uncompressed, MH, MR, MMR, JPEG), BMP, JPEG
Send by Mail MAPI support mail software
Send by Fax PC-Fax application
Other
Export/Import data with HTML
Export document properties summary in CSV format
Entry assistant
Maintenance
Backup Folder auto-backup / Restore
Auto-delete Search and delete expired documents
*1 Some restrictions may apply depending on applications.

*2 When converting a document into TIFF format, Multipage TIFF conversion is selectable.
38
Viewer
View
Image Document The following files can be displayed by document viewer and easy
viewer:
TIFF (MH, MR, MMR, Uncompressed)
Multipage TIFF (MH, MR, MMR), TIFF-F, BMP, JPEG
Application Document Supported Document Editing Application Files
Edit
Image Document Line, Horizontal/Vertical Line, Rectangle, Round-corner Rectangle,
Oval, Polygon, Freehand, Text, Stamp, Rotate, Erase, etc.
Save
File Format TIFF (MH, MR, MMR, Uncompressed)
Multi-page TIFF (MH, MR, MMR), TIFF-F, BMP, JPEG
Add from Viewer Register/Update as DeskTopBinder V2 Professional Document
Cabinet
Cabinet Folder Document - Section

# of Cabinets One cabinet per system
Shared Cabinet Up to 49 Shared Cabinets
Cabinet Name Fixed
# of Folders Up to 100 folders per cabinet recommended
# of Folder Levels Up to 10 levels recommended
Folder Name Up to 32 characters
# of Documents Up to 1000 documents per cabinet recommended
# of Sections Up to 1000 sections per document recommended
Section Name Up to 100 characters
Document Attribute
Document Number N/A
Document Name Up to 100 characters
Date Added 8 characters (date) and 6 characters (time)
Expired Period 8 characters (date)
Creator Up to 37 characters
Note One Note per Section. 9 colours. Up to 64 characters for Note
Comment
Document Status Up to 20 characters
Document Size Numeric
Memo N/A
Extended Options N/A
Other
Recycle Bin One
Shortcut Shortcuts of Oak documents are available.
Up to 1000 shortcut per system recommended
Edition N/A
Shortcut Attribute
Server Name Up to 128 characters
Cabinet Name Up to 32 characters
Shortcut Name Up to 50 characters
Date Created 8 characters (date) and 6 characters (time)
39
Delivery
Product Configuration
DeskTopBinder V2 Professional is released as a software package.
Item Contents
CD-ROM DeskTopBinder V2 Professional
Job Binding
ScanRouter V2 Link
Operating Instructions PDF file
Readme TXT file
Information about other items will be announced later.
Product Appearance
1.DeskTopBinder V2 Professional
One CD-ROM Paper Box: (colour printed)
Size W x D x H = 190 x 264 x 48 (mm)

Volume 2408 (cm3)
Weight About 240g
2.DeskTopBinder V2 Professional (5 License) /(10 License)
Licence sheet Envelope
Size W x D x H = 230 x 300 x 5 (mm)

Volume 345 (cm3)
Weight About 50g
40
Sound Power Level
N/A
N/A
Dust Level
N/A
N/A
Power Consumption
N/A
N/A
41
APPENDIX A COMPARISONS
The comparison tables below are designed to allow quick reference when comparing the various
versions of DeskTopBinder.
Comparison List between DeskTopBinder V2 Pro and DeskTopBinder

System
OS Win 95/98/ 98SE Win 95/98
Win 2000 Server
Windows ME
Mail Application MS Exchange client 5.0 MS Exchange client 5.0
MS Outlook 97/98/2000 MS Outlook 97/98/2000
Document Management
(Including shortcuts)
Distributed documents Distributed documents
Create application file Create application file
Registered as linked files.
Import HTML file
Search Browse by cabinet icons, folder icons Browse by folder icons and
and document thumbnails document thumbnails
Specific search by keyword Specific search by keyword
Broad (Quick) Search
Icon Icon
Detailed Detailed
Calendar
Change document property Document property
Send by mail (mail software) Send by mail (mail software)
Send by Fax (PC-FAX)

RPCS Print Functions*
(Batch Printing/Job Binding/Easy
Print etc.)
Export HTML file
Export Document properties
Summary in CSV format
Printing document properties
Job Binding
*Only available with RPCS supported
printers.MFPS
42
Viewer
Application file Application file
(displayed in simplified contents of (displayed in simplified contents of
the file) the file)
Supported Servers ScanRouter V2 Professional ScanRouter Professional
Supported Functions View / Retrieval View / Retrieval
Auto retrieval and register to Auto retrieval and register to
DeskTopBinder V2 Professional* DeskTopBinder*
Delivery notification*
Distribution ** Delivery notification*
Direct print from Print from Delivery * ScanRouter Client Software is
Server ** required.
* ScanRouter V2 Link is required.
** Only available with ScanRouter
V2 Professional
Client - I/O Products
Supported Server Document Server in GW-support N/A
MFPs
Supported Functions Thumbnail display N/A
Copy / Delete documents
View / Change properties
View / Cancel request
Re-print / Re-fax
Entry Assistant
* Password is required for
password-protected documents.
Other
Collaboration with Ricoh utilities SmartNetMonitor Aficio Manager
(Print Manager)
Data Conversion (From DTB to DeskTopBinder Converter N/A
DTB V2) (see detail P16)
Shortcut function can be used only connecting to Doc Management Server.

You can have DeskTopBinder and DeskTopBinder V2 Professional coexisting.
If you select to overwrite the old version, documents managed by DeskTopBinder will be
automatically converted into DeskTopBinder V2 Professional documents after installation.
43
TOTAL COMPARISONS of DeskTopBinder Pro and Lite.
Overview of the functional differences between Lite and Pro:
DeskTopBinder V2 DeskTopBinder V2 Lite

Professional (package) (Bundled)
FILE CONVERSION
Image to image TIFF/BMP/JPEG TIFF/BMP/JPEG
Application to image TIFF/BMP/JPEG X
OCR (image to text) O X
PDF Conversion O X
SHARED CABINETS O X
Document Management
Registered as linked files O X
Import HTML O X
Specific search O X
Output conversion O X
Export to HTML O X
Export document properties O X
summary in CSV format
Print document properties summary O X
Distribution O X
Direct print from delivery server O X
MAIL TRANSMISSION O X
Supported applications MS Exchange client 5.0
MS Outlook 97/98/2000
APPLICATION VIEWER O X
Entry Assistant O X
SPECIFIC SEARCH
Specific search by vario us conditions O X
(instead of only Broad Search)
O: Available X: Not Available
Note: System requirements are the same for Lite and Pro. The possible numbers for shared folders
are the same for Lite and Pro.
44
Appendix 1
Product Concept
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite is the successor to DeskTopBinder. As with the previous version it is

designed as a personal document management package that can manage both image data converted
from a paper document and application files saved on a users PC.
The software is not available for purchase and is bundled with a number of mainframes (e.g.
SC430dc).
The purpose of this PIG is to outline the features of this software. For a more detailed overview of the
software please refer to the PIG for DeskTopBinder V2 Professional.
This PIG has not been split into sections, as much of the information is not applicable in the usual
format.
Product Name
Development Name Product Name

Plumeria Lite DeskTopBinder V2 Lite
Plumeria Full DeskTopBinder V2 Professional
45
Outline of DeskTopBinder V2 Lite
The window below appears when you start DeskTopBinder V2 Lite.
Top (3)
(3)
Input Icon
(1) (3)
Output Icon
(2)
(1) Document Explorer (Tree View)
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite enables you to access the following servers from your client PC:
Document Server HDD in GW-supported MFPs
Delivery Server Server controlled by ScanRouter V2 Lite/Professional
You can view documents in servers with thumbnails.
Local and network drives (E:, F: ) are displayed under My Computer, just like Windows
Explorer.
My Cabinet and folders managed by DeskTopBinder V2 Lite are displayed under My Workroom.
To display Document Server, Delivery Server and My Computer with DeskTopBinder V2 Lite,
Extended Features settings are required in advance.
46
(2) Document List View
Documents stored in the selected cabinet or folder are displayed. In Document List View, one of the
following view modes is available:
Thumbnail View
Icon View
Details View
Calendar View (Monthly/Weekly)
You can combine two or more different types of files

(e.g. Word, Excel, scanned image data) together and
handle them as one Multi-Section document. You can
flip each section (file) to see its thumbnail, or put a note
for your reference. When you use a printer that supports
RPCS print driver, that document can be printed as one
document with various print options such as
header/footer, staple, and so on.
Clipped document Notes

includes two or more
sections (files)
47
(3) Toolbar
Various functions can be selected easily by clicking icons on toolbars.
Toolbar Location Category Functions

Top Document Management Change view mode
List document properties
Search etc.
Left Docume nt Input Add new document
Scanner input etc.
Right Document Output Print, Fax,
File Conversion Convert to image etc.
Followings show the major Icons and names.
Top
: Vie w Icon
: Attach Note
Left
: Create File
: Import File
: Scan
Right
: Print
: Easy Print
: Convert to Image
: Export Section
48
Main Features
Product Advantages compared to previous version
The following are the main advantages of DeskTopBinder V2 Lite compared with DeskTopBinder.
Supports GW-suppo rted MFP
You can access the Document Server located on the DMR35A/45A or other GW-supported MFPs,
and operate stored documents from your PC remotely.
Supports Advanced Print Functions (with RPCS -support printers/MFPs)
Batch Printing
When you print a Multi-section document, which contains two or more files (e.g. Word,
Excel, PowerPoint, image file, etc.), with RPCS-support printers/MFPs, various print
settings such as header/footer, page, staple and punch will be available for the whole
document.
Job Binding (Temporary Print File Print)

When you print a document with RPCS-support printers/MFPs, you have an option to create
a temporary print file and to save it in the PC. You can select two or more print files from the
list, and print them as one document with various print options.
Easy Print
You can register your customised print settings and can use them by just clicking icons on
the toolbar.
49
Comparison List between DeskTopBinder V2 Lite and DeskTopBinder
Differences are listed in blue.
Functions DeskTopBinder V2 Lite DeskTopBinder

System
OS Win 95/98 Win 95/98
Win 2000 Server
Win 2000 ME
Mail Application N/A MS Exchange
MS Outlook
Document Management
Input Scanner input Scanner input
(Including Shortcuts) Distributed documents
Distributed documents Create application file
Create application file
Search Browse by cabinet icon, folder iconsBrowse by folder icons and document
and document thumbnails thumbnails
Broad (Quick) Search Title search by keyword
(including Notes)
Icon Icon
Details Details
Calendar
Change document property Change Document property
Image-to-image conversion Image-to-image conversion
Send by Fax (PC-FAX) Application-to-image conversion
RPCS Print Functions * OCR (image-to-text conversion)
(Batch Printing/Job Binding/ Easy PDF conversion*
Print etc.) *PDF writer is not included
* Only available with RPCS- Send by mail
support printers/MFPs. (with mail software)
Viewer
Application file *
(* displayed in simplified contents of
the file)
Save To DeskTopBinder V2 Lite To DeskTopBinder
Supported Servers ScanRouter V2 Lite/Professional ScanRouter
ScanRouter Professional
50
Supported Functions View / Retrieval View / Retrieval
Auto retrieval and register to Auto retrieval and register to
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite* DeskTopBinder*
Delivery notification* Delivery notification
* ScanRouter V2 Link is required. * ScanRouter Client Software is
Document Distribution ** required.
** Only available with ScanRouter
V2 Professional
Supported Server Document Server of GW-supported N/A
MFPs
Supported Functions Thumbnail display N/A
Copy / Delete documents
View / Change properties
View / Cancel request
Re-print / Re-fax
Password is required for
password-protected documents.
Other
Collaborate with RICOH utilities Aficio Manager Aficio Manager
SmartNetMonitor
Notes
Because comparing DeskTopBinder V2 Lite (bundled product) and DeskTopBinder (package
product), some functions of the DeskTopBinder are not included in the DeskTopBinder V2 Lite.
These functions are included in the DeskTopBinder V2 Professional (package product).
You should have DeskTopBinder and DeskTopBinder V2 Lite coexisting in the same PC if you are
using ScanRouter/ScanRouter Professional as Delivery Server
In case you select to overwrite the old version, documents managed by DeskTopBinder will be
automatically converted into DeskTopBinder V2 Lite documents.
51
Connection with Document Server in GW-supported MFP
With DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, you can handle documents stored in the Document Server of a
GW-supported MFP from your PC remotely. Also, these documents can be output by print, or be
re-faxed with the operations from your PC. In other words, you can use Document Server functions
from your PC.
Input Storage
Copy
* For output
Printer operations from
Fax (Transmission) MFPs operation
PC-Fax (Transmission) HDD panel, please see the
PPLI of
Scanner 8.0GB
DMR35A/45A.
Network
Connection
Operations with DeskTopBinder V2 Lite

View document list
Copy documents to DeskTopBinder V2 Lite
DeskTopBinder Print documents
V2 Lite Search documents
Delete documents
View document properties:
File Name/Expiration/Application, etc.
Change document properties:
File Name/Password/User ID
Re-fax (transmit) documents
52
In DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, Document Server is displayed in a tree view.
When you store documents to the Document Server of the MFP, you can input additional information
- User Name .
By specifying a User Name in the Extended Features of DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, User Name and
All User folders are displayed separately under Document Server, and documents are categorised
by storage method (Copy/ Facsimile/Printer/Scanner).
The following is the image of Document Servers tree view.
(1)
(2)
1) Document Server Name
2) Only documents with a specified
User Name are displayed.
3) All documents stored in the
Document Server are displayed.
(3)
Note
Documents displayed in the Document Server are Copy, Facsimile, and Printer
documents. Scanner documents are NOT included in the Document Server.
Document data of the Scanner can be seen only from DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, not from the
GW-supported MFP.
All User Folder also includes the documents under User Name Folder.
View Documents List
From the tree view, documents in the Document Server are displayed in thumbnail, icon or details
view.
Note: Password-protect documents are displayed in blank.
53
Copying Documents to DeskTopBinder V2 Lite
You can copy documents from the Document Server to DeskTopBinder V2 Lite. When documents
are copied from the DMR35A/45As Document Server, copied files will be converted as follows:
Storage Method Original File Format Copied File Format

Copy Unique format TIFF-MMR
Facsimile TIFF TIFF
Printer Unique format TIFF-MMR
Scanner TIFF, JPEG TIFF, JPEG
Note
Each page of multi-page image document will be added as a section.
You cannot copy documents stored in PCs to Document Server in MFP.
Documents stored in Document Server cannot be moved to anywhere else.
You can take documents to your PC by copying.
Depending on the original file format, it may take time to copy documents from Document Server.
Print Documents
You can print documents in the Document Server directly from the MFP from where the Document
Server is located.
Note: With the DMR35A/45A, scanner documents stored in Document Server cannot be printed out.
To print the documents, you need to copy them to a local PC.
Search Documents
The following key items can be used for search:
Storage Method (Document Server / Copy / Facsimile / Printer)

Document Name
User Name
Available combinations of key items are as follows:
Storage Method and Document Name

Storage Method and User Name
Delete Documents
From DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, you can delete documents by selecting the thumbnails of the
documents.
View/Change Document Properties
You can change Document Name and User Name in the [Document Properties] dialog box
displayed below.
54
Re-Fax (Transmit) Documents
Only fax data (Fax/PC-Fax) stored in the Document Server can be transmitted.
Document Security
A password is required when you make an operation with any password-protect document.
Connection with Delivery Server (ScanRouter V2 Lite/Professional)
ScanRouter V2 Lite/Professional is a network scanning and distribution system. With

DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, the following operations are available:
View/Copy Documents
Auto-Receive/Auto-Registration (with ScanRouter V2 Link )
View/Copy Documents
Delivered image documents on the Delivery Server can be viewed as thumbnails. You can edit these
documents after adding them to DeskTopBinder V2 Lite.
Auto-Receive/Auto-Registration (With ScanRouter V2 Link)
When using ScanRouter V2 Link (Delivery Server monitoring and data reception utility), documents
in the Delivery Server can be retrieved from the server. Documents can be registered automatically
under My Work Folder of DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, or saved as Windows files.
ScanRouter V2 Link
(ScanRouter V2 Link is the successor model of ScanRouter Client Software -currently included in the
ScanRouter/ScanRouter Professional CD-ROM)
ScanRouter V2 Link will be installed from the DeskTopBinder V2 Lite installation menu. Its
installed location image is as follows:
ScanRouter V2 Link monitors selected In- Tray(s) located on ScanRouter V2 Lite/Professional

Delivery Server, and retrieve s or saves the documents on the client PC. While this software is
For a detailed overview please see either the PIG for ScanRouter V2 Lite or ScanRouter V2
Professional.
55
Extended Features
In DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, optional features can be added from the Extended Features menu. For
example, you can set up the ScanRouter V2 Delivery Server, Document Server in a GW-supported
MFP or customise print/scan settings. To use these features, you should set these features in advance.
Extended Features Dialog Box
(1) (2)
(3)
1) Setting menu (Input/Output/Conversion/Network etc.) can be switched here.

2) Features available for use
3) Features currently set
56
How to connect with Document Server in GW-supported MFP

2. Select the [Network] icon and Document Server in the [Selectable Function(s)] list, and then
click [Add]. The [Document Server Properties] dialogue box appears.
3. Select the server name by browsing, or typing the server name/IP address.
4. Type the user name registered to GW-supported MFP. Among stored documents in Document
Server, only documents with its user name can be displayed separately on DeskTopBinder V2
Lite tree view.
5. Configure other options if necessary, and click [OK].
Note: When you enter the User Name in the Document Server Properties menu, the User Name
has to be the same as the one, which has been registered on GW-supported MFP. If you enter wrong
User Name, another User Name folder is produced. This means that you cant see any of the
documents, which are stored under your name on the Document Server.
How to connect with ScanRouter V2 Lite/Professional Delivery Server

2. Select the [Network] icon and ScanRouter V2 Delivery Server in the [Selectable Functio n(s)]
list, and then click [Add]. The [Delivery Server Properties] dialogue box appears.
3. Select the server name by browsing or typing the server name/IP address directly.
4. Click [Add] to select the In-Tray to be displayed on DeskTopBinder V2 Lite tree view. After
selecting the In-Tray, click [OK]. Added In-trays can be removed, or changed their display orders
in tree view.
5. To change each users document delivery settings, select the user name and click [Delivery
Settings] on the [Delivery Server Properties] dialogue box. Notification of document delivery can
be set here by clicking [Notify as Recd].
57
Main Functions of DeskTopBinder V2 Lite
INPUT
Drag and Drop Documents from Tree View (Import)
From the tree view, you can easily add documents located o n servers or a client PC to DeskTopBinder
V2 Lite. Windows files can be also imported by selecting [Add Document] on the [File] menu.
Note: Depending upon the location of the original document and the method of copy, thumbnails may
not be created automat ically. To create a thumbnail, please select the document and then select
[Create Thumbnail] in [Document] menu.
Delivery From Delivery Server (ScanRouter V2 Lite/Professional)
Delivered image documents on Delivery Server can be viewed in thumbnails or with a viewer. You
can edit these documents after adding them to DeskTopBinder V2 Lite. When you use ScanRouter
V2 Link, documents on Delivery Server can be registered to DeskTopBinder V2 Lite automatically.
Scanner Input
You can input paper documents from a scanner that supports a TWAIN driver and then save them as
image file documents. Documents are saved as DeskTopBinder V2 Lite documents in the selected
folder.
When you select [Scan] menu in DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, the TWAIN driver screen is displayed for
scanning.
Easy Scanning
You just click the [easy scanning] icon to start scanning with your favourite settings (density, colour,
resolution, original document size, etc.). It enables you to scan the same format documents quickly
and easily. Documents are saved as DeskTopBinder V2 Lite documents in the specified folder. If
preferred, registered settings can be displayed before starting scanning to configure the settings
temporarily.
You can also select the scanner from a list of applicable scanners on the network.
The following TWAIN Driver currently supports Easy Scanning:
Type270/Type450 TWAIN Driver Ver. 2

IS330DC SCSI/1394 TWAIN Driver Ver. 3
Type1045 TWAIN Driver Ver. 3
TWAIN Driver Ver. 3 is required for selecting applicable scanners from the list.
58
Creating a New Application Document
With DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, you can create a new MS-Office document (or supported application
document) without starting the application, and save it as a DeskTopBinder V2 Lite document. A
fixed form can be also saved as a user template for your convenience. You can manage several types
of application documents with thumbnails from the DeskTopBinder V2 Lite window.
OUTPUT (Print)
With DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, documents can be printed in various ways as described below. When
you use RPCS-support printers/MFPs, you can use expanded print functions as well.
* To use the functions with a description of [with RPCS Driver], RPCS print driver must be installed
in the PC.
Batch Printing [with RPCS Driver]
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite can combine various image/application files and handle them as one
Multi-section Document, so the document can be printed by just one print order instead of printing
one by one.
Various print options are available for the Multi-section Document such as:
Output Tray Sort

Staple Punch
Duplicate Header/Footer
Job Binding (Print from Print File List) [with RPCS Driver]
When using RPCS-support printers/MFPs, you have a Print-to-File option that saves files as
temporary Temporary print files (.RMP). You can select two or more print job files from the list,
and print them as one document with various print options as described above. You can also start this
function from the [Start] menu.
Word Word
PAGE1 PAGE1
PAGE2 TIFF PAGE2

PAGE3 TIFF
PAGE3
59
For example, you can insert image document between page 2 and 3 of one Word document and print
them with print options such as duplex and staple.
In this case, you need to create three temporary print files as listed below, and print them together
using Job Binding.
4. Word file 1-2 page (2 page)

5. TIFF image document (1 page)
6. Word file 3 page (1 page)
Easy print [WITH RPCS DRIVER]
You can just click the icon to start printing with your favourite settings (printer to be used, print
properties, header/footer, etc.). It enables you to use various types of print settings quickly and easily.
If preferred, registered settings can be displayed before start printing so that you can configure these
settings temporarily.
Print Application Files
When printing an application file (Word, Excel or PowerPoint) with DeskTopbinder V2 Lite you
dont have to start its application. Just select the thumbnail or icon of the document and start printing.
Print Multi-Section Documents
Multi-section documents, which include various image/application files, can be printed by just one
print order, instead of printing each file with the associated applications.
Print from the Document Server in GW-supported MFP
By making a print order from DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, documents that are stored in Document Server
in GW-supported MFP can be printed out. You can select two or more documents and print them
with various print options as well.
Note
Scanner data stored in the Document Server cannot be printed out. To print the data, you need to
copy it to a local PC.
60
OUTPUT (Other)
Drag and Drop Documents from Tree View (Export)
Documents on the client PC or on Delivery Server, or Document Server in GW-supported MFPs, can
be changed to Windows files by using "Drag and Drop" action.
Send by Fax
Documents located on the PC or Delivery servers can be transmitted with a PC-Fax driver.
Note: To use this function, [Extended Features] setting is required, and PC-FAX driver should be
installed in the PC.
Other
File Conversion
An image document can be converted to the following image file formats, and you can add it as a
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite document, or as a Windows file.
When you save converted documents as Windows files, self-extract format is available to compress
its data size.
File Type Compression Type Colours

TIFF Uncompressed Black/White (1bit)
256 Colours (8bit)
Grayscale (8bit)
Full Colour (24bit)
MH Black/White (1bit)
MR Black/White (1bit)
MMR Black/White (1bit)
JPEG Grayscale (8bit)
Compression Level: Full Colour (24bit)
1 (Better Quality) to 5 (Better Compression)
BMP No Compression Black/White (1bit)
256 Colours (8bit)
Grayscale (8bit)
Full Colour (24bit)
JPEG (JFIF) Compression Level: Grayscale (8bit)
1 (Better Quality) to 5 (Better Compression) Full Colour (24bit)
Note
This function is only available for image documents (TIFF, JPEG, BMP), and application
documents cannot be converted into image documents.
61
Viewer
Image documents (TIFF, JPEG, BMP) can be viewed as images with DeskTopBinder V2 viewer.
You can make a simple edit such as partial move, copy, drawing figures (e.g. line, rectangle, and
oval), stamp, and text input. You can insert/delete sections (files) to/from the document currently
displayed on the viewer.
You can also see simplified contents of image documents quickly with easy viewer in case
thumbnail views are not enough.
Edit Image Document with DeskTopBinder V2 Viewer
Stamps Text Input
Drawing
l Combining Documents (Multi-section Document)
With DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, two or more files (sections), such as scanned image data and
application files, can be combined to one DeskTopBinder V2 Lite document. You can use "Drag and
Drop" action to make various types of files (e.g. Word, Excel, BMP, and TIFF) one document, and
print with one print order. It is just as easy as clipping paper documents.
A Combined document can be easily separated as well.
[Example]
Word Excel Power Power

ABC DEF
Point Point
Co. Co.
Proposal / Comparison Chart / Presentation / All related documents can be
Information (Newspaper and Magazine clip) managed as one document
etc. easy to view and easy to find!
62
Note
You can put a note on a document, or each section (file) of a Multi-section document. Comments on a
note (up to 32 characters) or note colo ur (9 colo urs) are available for your reference.
Broad Search
You can search quickly with keyword text (Document name/ Document properties summary) and
date settings (Date Added/ Date Modified/Expiration).
Collaboration with Network Monitoring Utilities
You can check detailed status of a selected printer by clicking [Printer Info.] on [Print] menu.
Available network monitoring utilities are as follows:

- Aficio Manager
- Lanier Net Manager.
- infotec NetPrint Manager
- Net Vision
- SmartNetMonitor
63
Specifications
System Requirements
PC IBM PC/AT Compatible

Windows 98/98SE
Windows Me
Windows NT Workstation V4.0 (Service Pack 5 or later)
Windows NT Server V4.0 (Service Pack 5 or later)
Windows 2000 Server
Windows 2000 Millennium Edition
CPU Pentium 133 MHz minimum
(Pentium II 266 MHz or faster recommended)
Memory 48MB minimum
64MB or more recommended
HDD 200MB or more free disk space is recommended for saving documents
(depending on users)
50MB of free disk space is required for the program.
Support Software Document Editing Applications
MS Office 97/2000 (Word, Excel, PowerPoint)
MS Word 98
Related Ricoh ScanRouter V2 Lite
Products ScanRouter V2 Professional
Printer Local printers or network printers are available for print.
(Depending on the current PC settings.)
Scanner TWAIN support scanners
64
Specifications of DeskTopBinder V2 Lite
Document Management
Management System
File System Displayed by tree view
Cabinet Folder - (Subfolder) Document - Section
(File)
Supported Image File Format TIFF, TIFF-F, JPEG, BMP
Supported Application File Format *1 DOC, RTF, TXT, PPT, XLS
Shared Cabinet Supported
Registration
Add file to DeskTopBinder V2 Lite Scanner input
Windows files
Add from Document Server
Distributed documents
New Application file
Search
By browsing Icon View / Detailed View / Thumbnail View / Calendar
View
Search Broad Search
Search by text keyword and date items
View
Document View Thumbnail View / Icon View / Detailed View / Easy
Viewer
When two or more sections are combined, each
thumbnail of these sections can be flipped.
Section View The viewer will be used for viewing sections.
Thumbnail & Section Image / Section Image
Update
Operations for Section Add / Delete / Replace / Move / Copy / Update
Other Combine / Separate documents
Edit
Operations for Document Copy / Move / Delete / Edit Annotation / Export
Other Change document properties
Output
Print Document print
Section print
Convert & Output TIFF * (Uncompressed, MH, MR, MMR, JPEG), BMP,
JPEG
* When converting a document into TIFF format,
multipage TIFF conversion is selectable.
Send by Fax PC-Fax application
Maintenance
Backup Manual backup / Auto backup / Restore
Auto-delete Search and delete expired documents
*1 Some restrictions may apply for the operations above depnding on applications
65
Viewer
View
Image Document The following files can be displayed by document viewer
and easy viewer:
Application Document N/A
Edit
Image Document Line, Horizontal/Vertical Line, Rectangle, Round-corner
Rectangle, Oval, Polygon, Freehand, Text, Stamp, Rotate,
Erase, etc.
Save
File Format TIFF (MH, MR, MMR, Uncompressed)
Add from Viewer Register/Update as DeskTopbinder V2 Lite document
Cabinet
Cabinet Folder Document - Section

# of Cabinets One cabinet per system
Shared Cabinet N/A
Cabinet Name Fixed
# of Folders Up to 100 folders per cabinet recommended
# of Folder Levels Up to 10 levels recommended
Folder Name Up to 32 characters
# of Documents Up to 1000 documents per cabinet recommended
# of Sections Up to 1000 sections per document recommended
Section Name Up to 100 characters
Document Attribute
Expired Period 8 characters (date)
Creator Up to 37 characters
Note One Note per Section
9 colours
Up to 64 characters for Note Comment
Document Status In progress/ Complete
66
Schedule
The DMR35A/45A is the target machine for DeskTopBinder V2 Lite. After that, all GW-support
models and scanners/LPs will have DeskTopBinder V2 Lite as a portal tool bundled with them.
Delivery
DeskTopbinder V2 Lite is released as a bundled product.
Type Contents
CD-ROM DeskTopBinder V2 Lite
o DeskTopBinder V2 Lite
o Job Binding
o ScanRouter V2 Link
Setup Guide PDF file
Instruction Guide PDF file
Readme TXT file
ScanRouter V2 Link Guide PDF file
Compatible device list TXT file
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite will be bundled with the following machine models.
Model Name Mass Production

English (CD) 14 Languages (CD)
DMR35A/45A February, 2001 April, 2001
PMR26/N - TBA
PCR38 - TBA
SC430dc (SCSI) February, 2001 TBA
PCR6 - TBA
DeskTopBinder V2 is not bundled with PMR26/N
Localisation
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite supports 14 languages:
English French German

Italian Spanish Dutch
Norwegian Hungarian Czech
Polish Portuguese Danish
Swedish Finnish
Note: DeskTopBinder V2 Professional (package products) supports 5 languages: English, French,
German, Italian and Dutch
67
Competitor Comparison List
The following are comparison lists between DeskTopBinder V2 Lite and Visioneer PaperPort.
The main differences between DeskTopBinder V2 Lite are as follows:
Supports de facto standard file formats

You can manage various types of documents with their original file formats
(TIFF/BMP/JPG/DOC/XLS/PPT, etc.)
Full line-up for total document solution

To comply with the requests of users, various combinations of document solution software, DM
servers and I/O products can be provided.
[Comparison List: Visioneer PaperPort]
Functions DeskTopBinder V2 Lite Visioneer PaperPort

System
OS Win 95/98 Win 95/98
Win NT Win NT
Win 2000 Professional
Win 2000 Server
Document Management
Distributed documents Distributed documents
(Centre Ware)
Web page
Search Browsing Browsing
Broad (Quick) Search Title search by keyword
Combine/Separate Combine/Separate [Max]
Manage Copy/Move/Rename/ Copy/Move/Delete etc.
Delete/Export Edit [Max]
Change document property Change document property
Edit (Notes, Drawing etc.) Edit [Max]
Send by mail Send by mail
Fax transmission (with mail software)
Batch Printing * Fax Transmission
Job Binding * OCR
* Only available for RPCS
support printers.
Viewer
Display Image file Image file [Max]
68
Functions DeskTopBinder V2 Lite Visioneer PaperPort

Edit Image data Annotation [Max]
Auto skew (image data)
Annotatio n (Notes, Drawing etc.)
Save as DeskTopBinder V2 Lite PaperPort document
document Save to File [Max]
Supported Servers ScanRouter V2 Lite/Professional DocuCentre + CentreWare
Supported Functions Auto document register Auto document register

Auto retrieval
Delivery notification
Local Storage Operations Thumbnail display N/A
Document operation
Output orders
I/O Storage Status Monitor Collaborate with N/A
SmartNetMonitor
Some updates may apply to this chart
69
ScanRouter V2 Professional Product Information Guide
PRODUCT
INFORMATION GUIDE
1
Introduction
For the best understanding of ScanRouter V2 Professional please read the PIG of the Lite
versions first (see Appendix 1 for this document).
In Ricoh Japan a division exists that is called System Products Business. The mission of this
division is as follows:
To develop and provide the core software and the system products for Image
Communication and to reinforce Office Solutions Business.
As part of the future for the Ricoh group they envisage a concept called Ricoh Document Highway.
In the future, there are two basic elements for what they call is the e-society:
Next generation Aficio products and

Document Solutions Software.
On the verge of these two basic building blocks is the digital highway, an Internet/Intranet-based
vehicle that integrates the resources on the network and lets users perform different activities, like
outputting, inputting, delivery, storage, retrieval and so on.
For the near future, Ricoh Japan has announced several key software applications that will be
critical in the creation and establishment of this digital highway. Two of the most important new
software applications will be:
DeskTopBinder V2 Professional, an XML-based web-portal for document management and

retrieval and
ScanRouter V2 Professional, a software solution for electronic delivery of documents over the
digital highway.
To offer customers real network scanning and an integrated messaging solution
Increase mainframe sales in the field by offering a tool which can enable them to run more
effectively and develop them into true networked input-output systems
To position NRG as a Total Solution Provider by offering hardware and software as a combined
document management package
Increase secondary revenue streams through additional income from support, installation and
training and pre/post sales consultancy
2
Product Concept
Document Management & Distribution
ScanRouter V2 Professional allows end- users to efficiently digitise and distribute paper-based
documents in a cost-effective manner. With the DeskTopBinder V2 Professional, retrieving,
archiving and managing electronic documents for distribution and/or printing is an effortless
process.
The technology is designed as an open architecture platform designed specifically to allow the
development, deployment and integration of NRGs software and hardware with Independent
Software and Hardware Vendors.
Product Name
Document Workflow
Input Distribute Edit Storage Retrieve Output
ScanRouter V2 Pro
DeskTopBinder V2
Pro
Oak, eCabinet
Development Name Product Name Description

Plumeria Full DeskTopBinder V2 Professional Package Product
Cherry Full ScanRouter V2 Professional Package Product
Note: ScanRouter V2 Professional and DeskTopBinder V2 Professional are package products.

These package products will be supported only in English, French, German, Italian and Dutch.
Product Names of related software functions

Delivery Server Administration Utility ScanRouter V2 Administration Utility
Cherry Delivery Server ScanRouter V2 Delivery Server
Client Software ScanRouter V2 Link
Plumeria Full DeskTopBinder V2 Professional
3
Product Outline
Outline of ScanRouter V2 Professional
ScanRouter V2 Professional allows you to deliver document data that is scanned or received by fax
to multiple destinations. This can be via e- mail or sent to specific folders on the client PC. You can
also save the data received in an In-tray in the delivery server.
The functions of ScanRouter V2 Professional are almost the same as ScanRouter Professional.
However, V2 has been designed specifically to co-operate with GW supported machines.
This software is consists of four modules:
ScanRouter V2 Delivery Server Delivery Server

Administration Utility Function of Administration Utility
Fax Delivery Software Fax Environment
Web Document Viewer Web Document Viewer
Differences Between ScanRouter V2 Pro & ScanRouter Pro
Items ScanRouter Professional ScanRouter V2 Professional

OS Windows NT 4.0 (Server) Windows NT 4.0 (Server)
Windows 2000 (Server) Windows 2000 (Server)
Necessity of exclusive server Yes Yes
Number of registration in one address Sender/Destination 200 Sender200/Destination200
Delivering import fax Yes Yes
Delivery types* In-tray save Yes Yes
Save as Windows file Yes Yes
Send by mail Yes Yes
Web Browsing Yes Yes
Notify by e-mail No Yes
Co-operating with DeskTopBinder V2 Yes Yes
Professional
Deliver documents from DeskTopBinder V2 No Yes
Professional
Additional handling Auto-adjust image No Yes
orientation
Extract words for No Yes
file name
Description Package Product Package Product
*From ScanRouter V2 Professional, you can choose multiple delivery types per User/ Group.
4
Differences Between ScanRouter V2 Pro and ScanRouter V2 Lite
Items ScanRouter V2 Lite ScanRouter V2 Professional

OS Windows 95/98/ME Windows NT 4.0 (Server)
Windows NT 4.0 (Server) Windows 2000 (Server)
Windows 2000 (Server)
Necessity of exclusive server No Yes
Number of registration in one address Sender100/Destination100 Sender200/Destination200
Delivering import fax No Yes
Delivery types In-tray save Yes Yes
Send by mail No Yes
Web Browsing No Yes
Notify by e-mail No Yes
Professional
Deliver documents from DeskTopBinder V2 Yes Yes
Professional
Additional handling Auto-adjust image No Yes
orientation
file name
Description Bundled Product Package Product
ScanRouter V2 Professional Supported Machines
ScanRouter V2 Professional supports following machines:
GW supported machines DMR35A/45A, PCR38

Non-GW supported machines SC430dc NIC Option
DMR22/27 Scanner Option
E99
Functional Differences Among Each of the Supported Machines
DMR22/27 E99 SC430dc DMR35A/45A

Necessity of I/O device settings NO NO NO YES
Index settings NO NO NO YES
Number of letters for
14 NO 14 16
destination
Automatic update address YES YES YES NO
Availability of Attaching
Subject Name when sending NO NO NO YES
by e-mail
Management of Sender
NO NO NO YES
Address Book
Fax Environment Connect with RS232
LAN - LAN
Cable
Fax Delivery Software YES NO - NO
Fax delivery ID 4 digits 4 digits - 20 digits
5
Competition
ScanRouter Professional:
Comparable solutions are:

HP Digital Sender
Axis Scanserver
Xerox Document Centre and CentreWare
DeskTopBinder:
Document Management Systems, like PaperMaster
Combination:
Unique
6
Product Concept

DeskTopBinder V2 Pro
Oak
E Cabinet Doc-Q-Manager/CRD-PFP & Velocity
Document
Document
and Network
Network
Information
Information Print
Print
Management Management
and
Control
Control
PCSM / ACM
Document
Host Printing
Solutions
Forms Document
Document
Distribution
Workflow
Workflow
Formscape
ScanRouter Pro
Segmentation
Document server for enterprise
Next generation
Products 02.7
Cedar-SE1
Division Document server

01.8
for division 02.8
Oak-SD2
Oak
00.06
eCabinet
Document server
for workgroup
00.03 01.1 02.1
Workgroup ScanRouter V2 Pro Cherry-SG2
ScanRouter Professional Full Full
00.03 Lite Lite

ScanRouter Standard distribution type
01.1 02.1
00.06 DeskTopBinder V2 Plumeria-CW2
DeskTopBinder
Personal Client software for Windows
01.7 02.7
DeskTopBinder Lite Plumeria-CI2
Client software for browser
1999 2000 2001 2002
Positioning
ScanRouter V2 Professional and DeskTopBinder V2 Professional are positioned as software, which

can add value to NRGs hardware product range. It should also enable NRG to further position both
its products, and the company as a whole, as one of the leading providers of document solutions for
the networked environment.
7
Target Markets, Channels and Positioning
Target Markets
ScanRouter V2 Professional and DeskTopBinder V2 Professional will be released to all NRG

operating companies, including NRGI.
Target Channels
The software will be sold in all channels, although the direct channel will have particular emphasis.
Target user
The main target users for ScanRouter V2 Professional and DeskTopBinder V2 Professional will be
current/future users of DMR22/27, DMR35A/45A, SC430dc, PCR38, E99 and all future GW
supported machines.
These users will be introduced to the software through the bundled Lite versions. These have
limited functionality, for example, neither software package supports scan-to-e-mail, fax
distribution or web-browser operation.
These users could be from a variety of different sized organisations:
Divisions (50-100 employees)

Larger Workgroup s (20-30 employees)
Smaller Workgroups (3-10 users)
Division Large Office

50-100 employees (0ver 100 workers)
Work Group Middle Office

20-30 employees (30-99 workers)
Small Work Group

3-10 employees Small Office
(1-29 workers)
Business Personal
8
System Environment
Network environment, Intranet environment, Using Mailing System
Support
Support of this product will have to be done through the normal support route:
First level: Operating Company

Second level: CSS
Third level: ESSC
9
Product Overview
Features & Benefits
Overview
Specific features and benefits of ScanRouter V2 Professional include:

Network Scanning
Delivery Notification
Automatic fax delivery to the desktop
Colour Network Scanner support
Inbound/outbound faxing
Web Document Viewer
Ease of Use
Windows-based user interface

Paperless delivery of documents all over the Web
Integration with messaging systems, like Notes and exchange
Scan to e-mail, Fax to e- mail - Documents scanned by the machine or received by fax can be
delivered to a selected destination by mail.
The settings and addresses for a document can be selected by the user from the operation panel
of the mainframe;
Receiving/Opening Documents, both scanned images and incoming fax messages, can be saved
in the Delivery Server, and then read or downloaded from the client PC
Lines from a document can be extracted and then used to reflect a document name
Ease of Administration
ScanRouter V2 Professional has a user interface that is similar to Windows Explorer. This
enables easy administration and quick file transfer in an environment that is familiar to the user.
Productivity & Efficiency
Documents can be sent to addresses more quickly and without redundant steps.
10
Main features of ScanRouter V2 Professional
Scan to e-mail, Fax to e-mail
Documents scanned or received by fax can be delivered to a selected via the email system.
2
FAX
3
ScanRouter
Professional V2
Delivery Server
Client
(RS232)
SCN FAX
SCN FAX
SCN FAX
Delivered by Mail
1 Client
Mail Server
1. GW supported machines
Fax documents are forwarded to Delivery Server through the network.
2. Non-GW supported machines
Fax documents are forwarded to Delivery Server through the RS232 cable.
3. With ScanRouter V2 Professional, you can make a delivery to the following mail servers:
POP/SMTP Server
Microsoft Exchange 5.0 or later
Microsoft Mail 3.51 or later
Lotus Notes 4.5x or later
11
Receiving/Opening Documents
Documents scanned or received by fax can be saved in the Delivery Server, and can be read or
download from the client PC.
1. You can see the documents saved in the Delivery Server by using DeskTopBinder V2 and
confirm the contents by using DeskTopBinder V2 File Viewer. You can also move or copy
the documents from the Delivery Server to the DeskTopBinder V2 folder.
2. Saved documents can be received using ScanRouter Client Software and can be viewed
with the appropriate application. After you have received the data, the In- Tray will be
empty.
3. Saved documents can be viewed using the WWW browser. The documents can be also
downloaded.
Saved to
Viewed using
In-Tray
FAX WWW browser
ScanRouter Professional V2
Delivery Server WWW
Server
Client
SCN FAX
SCN FAX
Client Client Client
DeskTopBinder V2
Viewed using Saved to Received using

DeskTopBinder V2 Windows File Client Software
12
Relation with DeskTopBinder V2 Professional
Overview
Thumb- nail viewing

Auto Adjust Image orientation
Extract Key Words from Scan for file naming
Ability to rotate, stamp and add text input onto documents
Capable of supporting over 200 file formats
By using DeskTopBinder V2 Professional in conjunction with ScanRouter V2 Professional, the

following enhanced features are obtained:
1. View the image data in the In-Tray of the Delivery Server

2. Move or Copy the image data to DeskTopbinder V2 folder
3. Print out the image data from the In-Tray
These extra features create a system of input to output that is almost seamless.
13
Previous Model Comparison Detail
1. Change to the Administration Utility
In ScanRouter Professional, administration was undertaken through a web browser while

Maintenance of the system was through a Windows based system.
In ScanRouter V2 Professional, both administration and maintenance of the system can be carried
out in one Administration Utility Window. The left side of the Window displays a Delivery Info
Table, which contains information such as:
Destination
Sender
Undelivered Data In-Tray
Various login tree views
On the right side of the Window, the same information can also be seen (see screen shots for
details).
Since you can handle every movement in a single Window, it is much easier to operate than the
ScanRouter Professional Administration Utility.
Installing the Administration Utility
In a normal installation, the administration utility will be installed automatically with the rest of
ScanRouter V2 Professional. It is possible, however, to install the administration utility to another
PC and to manage the delivery server remotely (For details see Settings in Administration Utility
later in this section of the PIG).
14
ScanRouter Professional Administration Utility Window
ScanRouter V2 Professional Administration Utility Window
15
2. Two Types of Address Book
ScanRouter Professional had only one address book, which included information on both the
destination and the sender. In ScanRouter V2 Professional, there are two types of address book (a
destination book and a sender book) both displayed in the Administration Utility.
16
Multiple Selection of Delivery Types
ScanRouter V2 Professional, allows you to select multiple delivery types at Delivery type settings
Auto-adjust image (fax/scan) orientation
Adjusts the top and the bottom of the distributed document automatically. This handling will be
effective to all delivery methods.
Extract words for file name
This handling extracts words from the scanned document and reflects them in the document name
of the distributed document. When this is not selected at [Additional Handling], the document name
will be the name, which the device has attached. Extract words for file name will be effective to
In-tray save , Send by SMTP mail and Send by MAPI mail.
Note: Extract words for file name cannot be adapted to all documents as it depends on the type
of document.
Delivery Types
Scanned images and incoming faxes are sent to the delivery server through the network. The image
data is then delivered as one or more of the following types:
1. In-tray save
2. Mail delivery (Scan to e-mail)
3. Mail notification
4. Save as Windows file (Scan to file)
You can set more than one delivery type to a single destination or set one delivery type multiple
times (on the same destination or multiple destinations). However, the In-tray can only have one
delivery type set at a time.
17
Delivery Process
When the user name is listed in the destination list, an In-tray save is
carried out automatically. The image format is not changeable from the
scanned image.
In-tray save
When Extract words for title is set in the additional handling options,
the results are used for the document name. If not, the device assigned
name will be used instead.
The mail, to which the image data is attached, will be sent to a specified
address.
The applicable mail systems are:
1. SMTP/POP3
2. Microsoft Exchange 5.0 or later
3. Microsoft Mail 3.51 or later
4. Lotus Notes 4.5 or later (except for 4.56 and 4.57)
The title of the Subject: will be as follows:
Message from XXX [YYY]
*XXX Sender Name, YYY File Name set at the operation panel
Mail delivery
of machine.
(Scan to e- mail)
The user can specify the attached image format as follows:
Black/White
No change
Single Page TIFF (MH, MR, MMR, Uncompressed)
Multi Page TIFF (MH, MR, MMR)
TIFF-F, PDF
Grayscale
No change
JPEG, TIFF (Uncompressed), PDF
When Extract words for file name is specified from the Additional
Handling Options, it will be attached to the document name as text data.
Link object will be attached (Link to In-Tray) to the mail, and will be
sent to the specified address.
Mail notification
The additional handling and applicable mail systems are the same as with
Mail Delivery.
18
The scanned document or incoming fax document can be saved in a

Windows folder. Specified folders on the file server must be set to share
beforehand.
The following folders may be selected as a destination:
1. A shared folder on the file server in the network

2. A folder on the delivery server
Note:
To deliver documents to the file server, a network drive must be mapped
on the selected folder in the file server.
The image format is changeable from the scanned format as follows:

Save as Windows file
(Scan to file)
Black/White
No change
Single Page TIFF (MH, MR, MMR, Uncompressed)
Multi Page TIFF (MH, MR, MMR)
TIFF-F, PDF
Grayscale
No change
The file name will be:
Senders name_MMDDhhmmss_NNN. (tif/jpg/pdf)
MMDDhhmmss is the date and time, and NNN is the page number.
Delivery from DeskTopBinder V2
DeskTopBinder V2 can forward the documents to the Delivery Server from its own local cabinet
and the Delivery Sever In- Tray. From the Delivery Server, the documents will be delivered to the
destination chosen from the address.
19
Delivery Image Format
Black/White TIFF(MMR) / TIFF(Uncompressed)

Grayscale JPEG/TIFF(Uncompressed)
Black/White Do not change image data format

Single Page
Scan TIFF (MH,MR,MMRUncompressed)
Multi Page TIFF(MH,MR,MMR)
Fax, TIFF-F,PDF
Grayscale Do not change image data format
TIFF
GW, JPEG, TIFF(Uncompressed)

MFP In-Tray
TIFF ScanRouter Client

Software
Delivery Server
All Sorts of format
depending
on the sender
Save to Client PC
Windows
DeskTopBinder V2
File
All Sorts of
image format Black/White Do not change image data format
supported in Single Page TIFF(MH,MR,MMR
Uncompressed)
DeskTopBinder V2
TIFF-F,PDF
Grayscale No Change
Mail Server Black/White Do not change image data format

Single Page TIFF(MH,MR,MMR
Uncompressed)
TIFF-F,PDF
Grayscale No Change
Client PC
20
Incoming Fax Image Delivery
Fax Reception
The way of sending a fax received data image to the Delivery Server is different depending on the
type of machine.
Fax documents are forwarded to the Delivery Server through

GW supported machines
the network including information of Fax Forwarding ID or
TSI.
Fax documents are forwarded to Delivery Server through the
Non-GW supported machines
RS232 cable.
Specifying Delivery Destination for Incoming Fax
There are 2 methods of specifying the delivery destinations for documents received by fax - using a
fax delivery ID or a TSI code.
1. Delivery by fax delivery ID (see diagram below)
In this method a sender specifies a desired destination when sending a fax. To deliver a fax using
this method, a fax delivery ID needs to be assigned and registered within each user and group
destination on the delivery system (in advance). The ID is then to be specified by the sender when a
fax is sent.
2. Delivery with a TSI (see diagram below)
This is a method of delivering documents received by fax using the TSI of a facsimile at the sending
point. The TSI must be registered and the desired destinations must be assigned in advance.
Documents faxed with TSI will always be delivered to the assigned destinations for the TSI. Once
the delivery server receives a faxed document, a fax TSI will be registered to the TSI table in the
delivery system.
21
Delivery by fax delivery ID
2
1234 5678
FAX FAX
5678 Undelivered
4 FAX
data tray
1234 5678
Delivery Server
FAX FAX
3
1234 5678 1234
FAX FAX FAX
1 1234 Registered in the

FAX
user/group tray
Client Client
1. The fax delivering ID is registered in the user/group tray.

2. The sender selects the fax delivering ID for transmission.
3. The document is forwarded to the user/group tray where the selected fax delivering ID has been
registered. The way documents are delivered depends on the delivery procedure set in the trays.
4. If the Fax forwarding ID is not registered in any tray, the documents are sent to the Undelivered
data tray. At this time, Error Log will be made. Only the administrator can check the contents of
the tray.
22
Delivery with a TSI
2
B
A 1
TSI table
FAX FAX
TSI: 81312340001
TSI: 81312340002 TSI: 81450129999 TSI: 81312340002
Delivery Server
A B
FAX FAX
A
Fax In-Tray FAX
B
FAX 3
Client Client 4 Client
1) Register a senders *TSI and forwarding destina tion to the TSI table.
2) Sender sends the Fax using a receivers fax number.
The TSI will be sent automatically to the receiver with no additional operations.
3) If the TSI of the senders fax has been registered to the TSI table, the applicable user tray or
becomes the forwarding destination.
4) If the TSI is not registered in TSI table, the documents are saved in the Fax In-Tray.
*TSI stands for Transmitting Station Identification
Delivery procedure will be as same as Delivery of Scanner.

In addition to the above two methods, reception fax will be delivered to Fax Reception Tray
23
ScanRouter V2 Link
ScanRouter V2 Link is an updated version of the ScanRouter Client Software, which is currently
included in the ScanRouter/ScanRouter Professional CD-ROM.
ScanRo uter V2 Link is installed from the DeskTopBinder V2 installation menu and its installed
location image is as follows:
ScanRouter V2 Link monitors selected In-Tray(s) located on ScanRouter V2 Lite / Professional

Delivery Server, and retrieves or saves the documents onto the client PC. While this software is
From the Properties menu, you can configure two types of settings : In-Tray settings and monitoring
settings. You can allocate In-Tray settings for each user, and monitoring settings are applied to all
selected In-Trays*.
*The password of each In-tray will be set from Administration Utility.
Add or Remove the In-

Trays to be monitored

24
In-Tray Settings
In-Tray settings enable you to define how to receive documents in the In-Tray on the Delivery
Server.
The following In- Tray settings are available:

(Both options selectable) delivery (Not receipt of a document)
- Pop-up
- Sound
- Flashing Icon
Add as DeskTopBinder V2 Add received documents to My Work
document Folder of DeskTopBinder V2
Save in -- - Enabled when Save as Windows file
is selected
Format for received data Black & White Available file formats:
- TIFF (MMR/MR/MH/ Uncompressed )
- Multi-page TIFF
(MMR/MR/MH)
- PDF
- TIFF-F
- JPEG
- PDF
- TIFF (Uncompressed)
Monitoring Settings
When you select Monitor In-Tray option in the In-Tray settings dialogue box, monitoring settings
can be configured:
Set the interval time to monitor In-

Trays on ScanRouter V2
Lite/Professional Delivery Server.
25
26
Web Document Viewer
Web Document Viewer is a WWW application that enables customer to view, download, and print
documents that are inside the delivery server.
Web Document Viewer consist of the following three system:
WWW browser
The function of the Web Document Viewer can be used through the Web browser on the PC
Web server
The WWW server and Web Document Viewer are installed into the machine with which the
client computer directly communicates. We recommend that you set this server in the same
machine as the delivery server.
Delivery server
This machine functions as delivery server
Web browser
Web browser
Web browser
HTTP HTTP
HTTP HTTP
DCOM
WWW Server Delivery server WWW Server and delivery server
Domain
27
System Requirements
Web Document Viewer Server

Main unit PC/AT compatible
OS Windows NT Server4.0 (SP5 or later)
Windows 2000Server (SP1 or later)
CPU Pentium MMX 233MHz or faster
(Pentium III 450MHz or faster recommended)
Memory Min 64MB or more (for Windows NT, 128MB or more
recommended, for Windows 2000, 256 MB or more
recommended)
HDD At least 25MB of disk space is required for installation. In
addition, reserve 400MB for work space
Network Protocol: TCP/IP
Web Document Viewer

Client PC
Windows 98, Windows 98 Second Edition
Windows ME
Windows NT Workstation 4.0 (SP5 or later)
Display 800 x 600 pixel 64K colo urs
or more recommended
Web Browser Internet Explorer 4.01 Service Pack or later
Netscape Communicator 4.5 or later
Localization of Web Document Viewer
English, French, German, Italian and Dutch will be supported.
28
Start Page and Top Page of the Web Document Viewer
First, put in the URL of the Web Document Viewer, and the below Start Page will be shown.
URL will be as follows:
http:// DNS name or IP address of the server / rds / start_f.asp
1. Press [Start]
2. Then press [View In-Trays]
29
In-Tray List of Web Document Viewer
In-tray list, Fax In-tray and Undelivered Data tray is shown. You can start viewing inside each In-
tray from here.
30
Document List
Start from the In-tray list. You can view every delivered document under the In-tray.
Viewing methods are as follows:
List View Thumbnail View Calendar View
Document indication is as follows:
Document Name
Document Type
Document No.
Added (The date of document delivery)
Data Item(s) Modified
Expires
Size
Number of sections
Work status
31
Positioning of Web Document Viewer and DeskTopBinder V2 Professional
The Web Document Viewer can only access the ScanRouter V2 Professional delivery server. The
Web Document Viewer cannot access the Document Server of a machine or data inside
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite or Professional.
DeskTopBinder V2 will be the main client software of ScanRouter V2 Professional delivery

system, and Web Document Viewer is the supplementary application.
Advantages and disadvantages of Web Document Server
Advantages
You dont have to install new software to the client PC.
Disadvantages
Downloading the document from the delivery server takes more time than when using
DeskTopBinder V2 Professional.
Delivery Server
Function of Delivery Server
A delivery system using ScanRouter V2 Professional allows you to deliver document data that is
scanned or received by fax to multiple destinations, by sending it by e- mail or to specify folders on
client PC. You can also save the data received in an In-tray in the delivery server.
Client Software
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, DeskTopBinder V2 Professional, ScanRouter V2 Link and Web Browser

are the client software against the delivery server.
Easy Scanner Operating
The destination and sender lists, which are made in the delivery server, can also be displayed on a
GW Supported Machines operation panel. From here, the end user can choose the destination (and
sender). When these are selected, press the Start Key to start the scanning.
DMR35A/45A Operation Panel 1. Choose the destination (and

sender) from the touch panel screen.
2. Press the start key
32
Starting and Suspending the Delivery Server
There are 3 types of mode to launching the delivery server (This will be selected at the installation).
Launch from Program folder
Delivery server will operate as Windows application. Click [Delivery Server] to start. You can also
start and suspend the delivery service from Administration Utility.
Launch as Start-up
Delivery server launches automatically. To stop service see picture A.
Run in Service Mode

Delivery server launches in background regardless of the accounts during log-on. In this case,
documents cannot be delivered to the network drive.
To stop service, see picture A.
Select [Server] - [Suspend

Services]
to stop the delivery server.
Function of Administration Utility
33
Outline of Administration Utility
The Administration Utility is a tool used to control the settings, management, and maintenance of
the delivery server.
Settings in Administration Utility
You can cha nge the default settings from the Administration Utility. Once made, the setting
information will be maintained.
1. Select Server
Specify the delivery server to be administered.
Put in the PC name or IP

address of the delivery server.
2. Set Administrator
This is where to set the password of the administrator.
8 letters
34
3. Set Preferences
Default Image Format
You can set the delivery default image format from here. This is applicable for Save as Windows
file and Mail Delivery.
Black & White

Multi page TIFF (MMR, MR, MH)
Single page TIFF (MMR, MR, MH)
PDF, TIFF-F, No change
Grayscale/Colour
JPEG, PDF, TIFF (Uncompressed)
No change
Error/Disk Space
This monitors errors and the server disk space, more specifically, the amount of remaining space at
which a warning should be issued, and the amount of remaining space at which delivery will be
stopped. When it reaches the specified amount for warning level, or if a system error has occurred,
the administrator will be notified according to the chosen notification method.
Choose whether to Ignore,

Output to printer or Mail
administrator. When Output to
printer is chosen, select the printer
to output the error message. When
Mail administrator is chosen,
error message will be notified to the
administrator by mail. Default is
Ignore.
35
Schedule
Set the maintenance time from here.
Maintenance consists of the

following tasks:
Deletion of expired documents
Deletion of old error logs
Database optimisation
Web Settings
Web server settings can be made from here
Default is Dont use

Web browser to access
delivery server
Choose when Web server

and delivery server are on
the same PC.
When Web server and

delivery server are on
different PCs, input the
DNS name of the Web
server.
Input the name of link when set at the installation of Web

Document Viewer. If you have not changed the link name of
the Web page, the default is rds.
36
4. Set I/O Device
Registers the GW supported machines to be connected to the server.
Enter the IP Address

Enter the NIC (host) name (also compatible with DHCP environment)
Conduct a device search and select a GW machine from the result list.
Notes:
GW supported machines must be registered at [Set I/O Device]
Data from non-GW supported machine is accepted even though the machine is not registered
There are some limitations on device search. For example, it cannot search devices outside the
subnet
The maximum number of manageable GW machines is 64 and a maximum of 32 for accessing at
the same time
5) Set Delivery Feature Default
Undelivered Data
When Auto-delete is chosen, documents will be deleted automatically depending on the saving
term. When Notify sender of failed delivery by e- mail is chosen in the Additional Handling
options, notification will be sent by mail to the sender. In this case, e- mail address must be set for
the sender.
37
Received Fax
When Auto-delete is
chosen, the documents
inside the Fax In-tray will
be deleted automatically.
If you check here, mail will

be notified to the specified
mail address, when receiving
fax.
If a user ID is set here, all incoming faxes,

including faxes received with a fax
delivery ID will be shown. It is therefore
necessary to secure the In-tray by password
so that a general user cannot see inside the
In-tray.
Additional Handling
Choose Auto-adjust image orientation and Extract words for file name depending on the
workflow.
38
User Index
When using a GW machine, every user/group stored in the address book is displayed in a list on the
operation panel under a separate index. Every user/group must belong to one of the indexes but can
also belong to a Frequent index at the same time.
Indexes are used in common both for destination address book and sender address book.
5 or 10 indexes are available in addition to Frequent.
Frequent + 10 indexes; four characters for each index title

Frequent + 5 indexes; eight characters for each index title
Example: Frequent ABC DE FG HI JK LMN OPQ RST UVW XYZ

Frequent RE RC RA RH RCL
Choose either of the

titles.
Note:
This user index function is only
for GW supporting machines. For
non-GW machines, the User
Index tab will not appear.
39
Set Delivery Types
The delivery type used in the delivery server can be confirmed from here. The changeable settings
are Send by SMTP mail and Send by MAPI mail.
Note:
When changing the delivery type, service of the delivery server has to be resumed
When using Administration Utility remotely, delivery type cannot be changed
SMTP/POP settings can be made when Send by SMTP mail is chosen
When applicable software for MAPI mail is not set up, Send by MAPI mail cannot be chosen.
Server Information
The information about the delivery server is shown here. The capacity of the drive and the condition
of the service can be confirmed here.
User/Group Registration
You can create the address book of the destination and sender from here. Start the user settings as
follows:
Choose [Destination]
[Operations]
[Add New Destination]
[User] or [Group]
40
How to register a user to the [Destination] address book
2 3
1
5
3
8
3
7
6 3
10
3
9
3 11
(1) Enter the name (16 characters maximum)(Non-GW machines will be 14

characters maximum)
(2) You can set or change the password of each In-tray (this password will be used
when accessing from DeskTopBinder V2, and ScanRouter V2 Link)
(3) Short ID can be used when selecting the destination from the machines
(4) You can also add as sender by checking the box
(5) Input the fax delivering ID if necessary
41
(6) Choose the delivery type.
Below are the properties of each delivery type:
Choose one from here.
Note:
When Attach document link[s]
and deliver is chosen,
DeskTopBinder V2 has to be
installed in the PC to see the
contents.
42
6) After you have chosen the delivery type and set the properties, click [Add]
7) The delivery type, which you have chosen, will be shown in the box
8) Choose Auto-adjust orientation and Extract word for file name if necessary
9) Index settings can be made from here. Choose the index type [Title 1] or [Title 2]
10) By choosing Add to [Freq.](Frequency), the destination will be shown on the operation
panel of the machine at all times.
How to register groups to the [Destination] address book
Enter the name (16 characters

maximum*)
*Non-GW machines = 14 characters
maximum
Select the user from the

[Non- member List] and [Add]
to the [Group Member List].
Group name will not appear in Non-member List
43
How to register the sender to the [Sender] address book:
From ScanRouter V2 Professional, the [Destination] and [Sender] name can be managed separately.
There are two ways to register the [Sender]. One is to check [Add also as sender] when registering a
new user name at the [Destination].
Another way is as follows:

Put in the name in (16
characters maximum)
Choose [Sender]
[Operation]
[Add New Sender]
[User]
44
TSI Code
The TSI table is used to map the destination for the users/group and to map the TSI information
used for incoming fax document delivery.
List View Displays the TSI information in a list. The following functions are
available:
Add manually
Delete/Change
Import/Export
Add manually The following items can be added.
TSI (40 bytes)
Sender name (80 characters maximum)
User/group ID of forwarding destination
Add Entry Automatically When a fax is received that does not already exist in the TSI table, an
entry with the information is added to the table automatically.
Nothing is set for the forwarding destination.
Delete/Change Entry Here the user can select an entry from the list view and modify its
contents. Users can select more than one entry from the list.
Import/Export The information can be exported in CSV format. Exported CSV data
can also be imported. Imported data is overwritten and merged if the
same entry already exists. If the transfer destination does not exist,
none is set to the transfer destination.
CSV data in ScanRouter Professiona l format is also to be imported.

If the transfer destination does not exist, none is set to the transfer
destination.
45
Adding a New TSI Code
Delivery options:
Choose Do not deliver to deliver the

incoming fax to the In-Tray.
Select Delivery and then a destination
to deliver the incoming fax.
46
Undelivered Data Tray
Documents that are not delivered to an appropriate destination, due to problems on the system, are
delivered to the Undelivered Data Tray. The following items are shown in this tray:
Document name
Creator (Sender, etc.)
Date added (Date the document is added to the Undelivered Tray)
Expiry time
Number of sections
Notes: When the address between the Administration Utility and the machine has not been agreed,
the data will go into the Undelivered Data Tray. This happens when there is a time lag between
registering user/group name to the Administration Utility and the machine address. To avoid this,
you must update the address of the GW machines after changing the address in the Administration
Utility. This case will not be applied for Non-GW machines.
Log
Overview
The delivery server maintains the following logs:
Delivery results
Scanned document delivery log
Incoming fax document delivery log
DeskTopBinder V2 Professional document delivery log
Error
Error log
Specifying the Maximum Number of Log Entries
The user can specify the maximum number of entries for each log up to 1000.
Scanned Document Delivery Log
The following items are recorded in this log:
Date & time recorded

Device (IP address or NIC name)
Date & time delivered
Delivery type
Sender
Destination
Subject
Document name
Size (file size)
Number of pages
Paper size (first page)
Resolution
Sent/unsent
47
Incoming Fax Document Delivery Log

Delivery type
Sender (TSI, or sender name from TSI table)
Destination
Fax forwarding ID (20 digits)
Document name
Size (file size)
Number of pages
Image quality
Reception port
Sent/unsent
The delivery result log entry is created for each delivery. That is, if a delivery type is specified in
multiple methods, that number of delivery results log entries will be created.
DeskTopBinder V2 Pro Document Delivery Log

Delivery type
Sender name (specified in DeskTopBinder)
Reply-to: address (specified in DeskTopBinder)
Destination
Document name
Size (file size)
Number of sections
Sent/unsent
Error Log

Delivery type
Error description
Response to errors
Sender
Destination
Subject
Application type
Document name
48
List View
This displays different types of logs. To view logs you dont have to log in as an administrator.
From the log list view, the following functions can be specified:
Delete logs
Export log as CSV file
When logged in as an administrator, you can select one error log and view the first page. The
available viewer depends upon the Windows settings being used to view the page. You also can re-
deliver the selected documents.
Delete
You can specify all entries to be deleted per error.
CSV Export
You can export the specified log in CSV format.
49
Maintenance
The Administration Utility has the following maintenance functions:
Note: Make sure that delivery service is suspended before beginning maintenance.
All of the setting information and the

data saved in the delivery server will be
backed up. The information which is
backed up will return in the restoring
operatio n. It is recommended that backups
are made regularly.
Backup data will be restored.
If the delivery server loses power for any

reason, such as regular shutdown, the system
may become unstable and cause frequent
errors. To resolve the situation, recover the
delivery server.
Note: Do not use the Recover function

unless absolutely necessary
Return to Installation Defaults deletes all data and settings and returns the system to its initial
state. To start initialisation, select [Return to Installation Defaults] from the [Maintenance] menu.
50
Logistics
History Product Name Description

ScanRouter Professional ScanRouter V2 Professional ScanRouter V2 Professional Image
Distrib ution Software on CD-ROM
Distribution
ScanRouter V2 Professional will be distributed through NRGD. It comes as a fully packaged

product.
Localisation
EU Version English, French, German, Italian and Dutch*
*Dutch has replaced Spanish in ScanRouter V2 Professional
Appearance
One CD-ROM
Plastic Box:
Vinyl Sheet is fitted on this box and
printed-paper is inserted between the
plastic box and the vinyl sheet.
Size W x D x H = 195 x 274 x 39 (mm)

Volume 2084 (cm3)
Weight About 240g
51
Specifications
System Requirements of the Delivery Server
To use ScanRouter V2 Professional, the PC must meet the following system requirements:
Computer
OS Windows NT Server4.0 (SP5 or later)
CPU Pentium MMX 233MHz or faster
(Pentium III 450MHz or faster recommended)
Memory Min 64MB or more (for Windows NT, 128MB or more
recommended, for Windows 2000, 256 MB or more recommended)
HDD At least 200MB of disk space is required for installation
Limitations
Do not install ScanRouter V2 Professional on a PC used as a database or a mail server

You can not connect to ScanRouter V2 Professional from the following:
DeskTopBinder
ScanRouter Client Software
ScanRouter Browser
Do not use ScanRouter V2 Professional in a WAN environment. Depending on the network, time-
outs may occur while connected and documents may not be delivered normally
Do not install ScanRouter V2 Professional in a dial-up connection computer
ScanRouter V2 Professional can manage a total of about 1000 documents. One in-tray can receive
about 100 documents. If this limitation is exceeded, performance may deteriorate
Some processing of some images sent to ScanRouter V2 Professional may take time. These include
grayscale images, colour images, large images, and images with a resolution of 600 dpi. If you
normally use such images, we recommend that you increase the capacity of the CPU, memory, and
hard disk of server machine.
52
Upgrade Installation
If you upgrade the current delivery system to ScanRouter V2 Professional, follow the appropriate
procedure below to install ScanRouter V2 Professional.
Upgrading from ScanRouter V2 Lite to ScanRouter V2 Professional
Document data and destinations can be inherited (be sure to back up using ScanRouter V2 Lite
before upgrading).
1. Uninstall ScanRouter V2 Lite. If you want ScanRouter V2 Professional to inherit the

ScanRouter V2 Lite document data and destinations, do not delete the setting data/ content data
during uninstallation.
2. Install ScanRouter V2 Professional. Make settings to inherit the data from ScanRouter V2 Lite.
Upgrading from ScanRouter to ScanRouter V2 Professional
Only the address book can be inherited. Document data cannot be inherited and used.
1. Download all ScanRouter documents in advance using client software.

2. Install ScanRouter V2 Professional.
At this time, set a new data path for use in ScanRouter V2 Professional.
3. Convert the address book, and then uninstall ScanRouter automatically.

4. Delete the data for ScanRouter.
Upgrade from ScanRouter Professional to ScanRouter V2 Professional
The address book and document data can be inherited.
1. Back up the data with ScanRouter Professional.

2. Install ScanRouter V2 Professional
At this time, set a new data path for use in ScanRouter V2 Professional.
3. Convert the address book and document data, and then uninstall ScanRouter Professional
automatically.
4. Delete the data for ScanRouter Professional.
53
Mailing Environment
SMTP or MAPI mail is used to deliver documents or send various notifications. By e-mail, you can:
Deliver documents read by a scanner or received by fax

Notify the administrator of an error or a shortage of disk capacity
Notify the sender that documents were saved in the undelivered data tray
Notify clients that documents were saved in the fax In-tray
When the OS of the delivery server is Windows NT
Type of mail server Software required for Mail client software

MAPI mail environment
SMTP - -
Microsoft Exchange Server 5.0 Windows Messaging Microsoft Exchange Client 5.0 or
Microsoft Outlook 97/98/2000
Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5 Windows Messaging Microsoft Outlook 2000
Lotus Notes Server Windows Messaging Lotus Notes Client
When the OS of the delivery server is Windows 2000
Type of mail server Software required for Mail client software

MAPI mail environment
SMTP - -
Microsoft Exchange Server 5.0 Microsoft Outlook 2000 Microsoft Outlook 2000
Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5 Microsoft Outlook 2000 Microsoft Outlook 2000
Lotus Notes Server Microsoft Outlook 2000 Lotus Notes Client
Note: Windows Messaging can be installed from the Windows NT CD-ROM. Other software must
be obtained separately.
Fax Environment
When using a device for delivering fax documents using a network no particular environment is
required
Using a device for delivering fax documents using RS232, the MAPI mail environment is
required. The following software must be installed:
Software required to receive Software required for the MAPI

faxes mail environment
Delivery of fax documents - -
using a network
Delivery of fax documents Fax Delivery Software For Windows NT:
using RS232 (Installed from ScanRouter Windows Messaging
V2 Professionals CD-ROM) For Windows 2000:
Microsoft Outlook 2000
54
Sound Power Level
N/A
N/A
Dust Level
N/A
N/A
Power Consumption
N/A
N/A
55
Appendix A - Comparison lists
This appendix is designed to allow quick reference on specification comparisons.
Differences Between ScanRouter V2 Pro and ScanRouter V2 Lite
Items ScanRouter V2 Lite ScanRouter V2 ScanRouter Pro

Professional
Windows 95/98/ME Windows NT 4.0 (Server) Windows NT 4.0
OS
Windows NT 4.0 (Server) Windows 2000 (Server/workstation)
Windows 2000 (Server)
(Server)
Necessity of exclusive server No Yes Yes
Number of registrations in Sender 100 / Destination Sender 200 / Destination 200
one address 100 200
Delivery types
Scanned document Yes Yes Yes
Documents from No Yes Yes
DeskTopbinder V2
Professional
Fax No Yes Yes
Delivery types
Using client software Yes Yes Yes
In-tray save Yes Yes Yes
Save as Windows file Yes Yes Yes
No Yes Yes
Send by mail
Web browsing No Yes Yes
Notify by email No Yes No
Co-operating with No Yes No
DeskTopBinder V2
Professional
Number of connected 2 32 5
machines
Additional handling
Auto-adjust image No Yes No
orientation
Extract words for file name No Yes No
Supported image formats
B/W single page TIFF MH, TIFF MR TIFF MH, TIFF MR
TIFF MMR, TIFF MMR
Uncompressed TIFF Uncompressed TIFF
B/W multi page TIFF MH, TIFF MR, TIFF MH, TIFF MR
TIFF MMR, TIFF-F, PDF TIFF MMR, TIFF-F
PDF, DCX
Greyscale/Colour JPEG JPEG, Uncompressed
Uncompressed TIFF TIFF
PDF
Description Bundled product Package product Package product
For groundwork machines. Older machines have 200 in total.
56
Functional Differences among each Supported Machines
DMR22/27
E99 SMR30dc DMR35A/45A
(DMR35/45)
Necessity of I/O device
NO NO NO YES
settings
Index settings NO NO NO YES
Number of letters for
14 NO 14 16
destination
Automatic update address YES YES YES NO
Availability of Attaching
Subject Name when NO NO NO YES
sending by e- mail
Management of Sender
NO NO NO YES
Address Book
Fax Connect with RS232
LAN - LAN
Environment Cable
Fax Delivery Software YES NO - NO
Fax delivery ID 4 digits 4 digits - 20 digits
57
Appendix 1
Product Concept
ScanRouter V2 Lite is the successor to ScanRouter Lite. As with the previous version it is based on
the concept of scan, convert, and deliver - paper-to-electronic document conversion &
distribution The software is not available for purchase and is bundled with a number of NIC
options (eg SC430dc) for NRG machines.
The purpose of this PIG is to outline the features of this software. For a more detailed overview of
the software please refer to the PIG for ScanRouter V2 Professional.
This PIG has not been split into sections, as much of the information is not suitable for the usual
format.
Product Name

Cherry Lite ScanRouter V2 Lite
Cherry Full ScanRouter V2 Professional
Utilities with ScanRouter V2 Lite
Within ScanRouter V2 Lite there are a number of utilities that have specific functions. These are as
follows:

Delivery Server Administration Utility ScanRouter V2 Administration Utility
Cherry Delivery Server ScanRouter V2 Lite Delivery Server
Client Software ScanRouter V2 Link
58
Outline of ScanRouter V2 Lite
The function of ScanRouter V2 Lite is almost the same as ScanRouter. The software consists of
ScanRouter V2 Delivery Server and Administration Utility. To use ScanRouter V2 Lite,
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite must be installed in the client PC*.
*For more information on DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, see PIG DeskTopBinder V2 Lite
DMR35A/45A
Operation Panel
Received using
ScanRouter V2
Link
Delivery server 2
In-
tray
Client
Client
Access
3
1
File Server
Viewed using
DeskTopBinder V2
When documents are saved to the In-tray* (1 & 2)
When In-Tray save is selected in the user settings of the delivery server, the documents are
saved to the In-tray. There are 2 ways to view the documents from the client PC:
1. Copy and move by using DeskTopBinder V2

2. Receive the document by using ScanRouter V2 Link
*Known as Folder in previous version of ScanRouter
59
When documents are saved to a specified Windows file (Scan to file) (3)
When Save as Windows file is selected in the user settings of the delivery server, the documents
are saved to the shared Windows file. The documents can be shared through a network.
Note:
In-tray save and Save as Windows file can be chosen at the same time
Save as Windows file can be selected multiple times
Differences between ScanRouter V2 Lite & ScanRouter Lite
The table below shows the differences in functionality between ScanRouter V2 Lite and
ScanRouter Lite.
Item ScanRouter V2 Lite ScanRouter Lite

OS Windows 95/98/ME Windows 95/98
Windows NT4.0 (server) Windows NT4.0
Windows 2000 (server) server or WS
Number of addresses 2 (destination & sender) 1
Number of registration addresses 100 each 99
Both Yes No
In-tray save and
Save as Windows
file
Co-operating with DeskTopBinder No Yes
application DeskTopBinder V2 Yes No
Description Bundled product Bundled product
Only for GW supported machines
60
Differences between ScanRouter V2 Lite & ScanRouter V2 Professional
The table below shows the differences in functionality between ScanRouter V2 Lite and
ScanRouter V2 Professional.
Items ScanRouter V2 Lite ScanRouter V2

Professional
OS Windows 95/98/ME Windows NT4.0
Windows NT4.0 (server) (server)
Windows 2000 (server) Windows 2000
(server)
Exclusive server No Yes
Number of registrations in one address Sender 100/Destination Sender
100 200/Destination 200
Delivering import fax No Yes
Save as Windows Yes Yes
file
Send by mail No Yes
WEB bro wsing No Yes
application
Additional handling Auto-adjust No Yes
Fax/Scan
orientation
file name
Description Bundled product Package product
Notes: In accordance with Microsofts policy, the delivery server cannot be installed to Windows
NT 4.0 Workstation/Windows 2000 Professional.
ScanRouter V2 Lite supports the same machines as ScanRouter Lite (eg DMR22/27, DMR35/45) as
well as GW supported machines*. However, since ScanRouter V2 Lite is made for specific co-
operation with GW supported machines, there will be some limitations when using it with older
machines.
*SC430dc (NIC) is a non-GW machine and has the same limitation as ScanRouter supporting machines.
61
Main Features of ScanRouter V2 Lite - Changes from ScanRouter Lite
Change of the Administration Utility
ScanRouter Lite Administration Utility Window
ScanRouter V2 Lite Administration Utility Window
In ScanRouter V2 Lite Administration Utility, tree folder shows the Delivery Table such as
Destination, Sender, Undelivered Data Tray, Delivery Log & Error Log. In the right side of the
Window, the address book of the destination and sender, Undelivered Data Tray List and scanned
distribution log list can be seen.
Since you can handle every movement in a single Window, it is much easier to operate than the
ScanRouter Lite Administration Utility Window.
Two types of address book
ScanRouter Lite had only one address book including both destination and sender. However,
ScanRouter V2 Lite, has two types of address book (destination and sender lists), both displayed in
the Administration Utility.
62
In the address book, the user index, which categorises the user name is now in alphabetical order*.
*For ScanRouter supported machines and the SC430dc this is not the case. The display of the
address is the same as for ScanRouter Lite.
Recognition of GW Supported Machine s
When using GW Supported Machine with ScanRouter V2 Lite, you need to set up GW I/O device
on the Administration Utility. From here you can choose the machine you want to use from your
PC.
*For ScanRouter Lite supported machines and SC430dc this is not the case
63
Change of Client Software
ScanRouter Lite Client Software
You can only choose

either Automatic
Reception or No
Automatic Reception
ScanRouter V2 Link
You can choose
Monitor In-Tray or
Auto-receive from In-
Tray or both.
You can save the document

into Windows file or add as
DeskTopBinder V2 document.
You can select the format

for received data.
64
Delivery Types
The scanned image and the destination and sender information is sent to the Delivery server through
the network. From here, the scanned image will be stored as one of the following three types:
1. In-tray save
2. Save as Windows file
3. Both in-tray save and Save as Windows file
Delivery Type
1. In-tray save When the user name is listed to the destination list, the In-
Tray will be made automatically.
The image format is not changeable from the scanned
format.
2. Save as Windows file The folder, which is on the network of the delivery server.
To deliver a scanned document from the machine to a

selected folder, you must first create a folder in the
destination computer and set it as a shared folder.
A destination folder can be selected from two kinds of

folder:
A shared folder in the computer where ScanRouter V2
Lite is installed.
A shared folder in the file server located on the
network.
The image format is changeable from the scanned format

as follows:
Black and White: No change

Multi-page TIFF (MH, MR, MMR)
PDF, TIFF-F
Greyscale/Colour: No change
JPEG, PDF, TIFF (Uncompressed)
3. Both in-tray save and Save Both above
as Windows file
65
(1) In-tray save
The document sent from the machine will be saved to the appropriate In-tray of the delivery server.
ScanRouter V2 Lite
In-Tray
To view the documents from the client PC the users has 2 options:
1. Receiving the documents by using ScanRouter V2 Link

2. Copy or move the documents from the delivery server by using DeskTopBinder V2
Receiving using ScanRouter V2 Link
ScanRouter V2 Link (this is installed on the client PC) makes a receiving demand (polling) to the
In-tray of delivery server, either automatically or manually, and then receives the documents or
notice to the client PC.
Receiving Demand
In-Tray
Receive by using ScanRouter V2

ScanRouter V2 Lite Link Client PC
Copy or move the documents by using DeskTopBinder V2
Using this software you can view, copy, and move documents from the In-Tray shown in the tree
view.
View by using DeskTopBinder V2
In-Tray
Copy or move by using DeskTopBinder V2
ScanRouter V2 Lite Client PC
66
2. Save as Windows file
The document sent from the machine will be saved to the specified Windows folder(s) directly.
(Strictly, documents are delivered to the Windows folder via the delivery server)
ScanRouter V2 Lite
Windows
folder
Black and White TIFF (MH, MR, MMR, Uncompressed)

Multi Page TIFF (MH, MR, MMR, Uncompressed)
TIFF-F, PDF
Grayscale / Colour JPEG, PDF
ScanRouter V2 Link
ScanRouter V2 Link is an updated version of the ScanRouter Client Software, which is currently
included in the ScanRouter/ScanRouter Professional CD-ROM.
ScanRouter V2 Link is installed from the DeskTopBinder V2 installation menu, and its installed
location image is as follows:
ScanRouter V2 Link monitors selected In-Tray(s) located on ScanRouter V2 Lite / Professional

Delivery Server, and retrieves or saves the documents to the client PC. While this software is
67
From the Properties menu, you can configure two types of settings; In-Tray settings and monitoring
settings. You can adjust In-Tray settings for each user, and monitoring settings are applied to all
selected In-Trays*.
*The password of each In-tray will be set at Administration Utility.
Add or Remove
the In-Trays to
be monitored

68
In-Tray Settings
In-Tray settings enable you to define how to receive documents in the In-Tray on the Delivery
Server.
When Monitor In-Tray option is selected,

[Launch DeskTopBinder V2] button will
appear on the notification message.
69
The following In- Tray settings are available:

(Both options selectable) delivery
(No receipt of document)
- Pop-up
- Sound
- Flashing Icon
Add as DeskTopBinder V2 Add received documents to My
document Work Folder of DeskTopBinder V2
Save in -- - Enabled when Save as Windows
file is selected
Format for received data Black & White Available file formats:
- TIFF (MMR/MR/MH/
Uncompressed )
- Multi-page TIFF
(MMR/MR/MH)
- PDF
- TIFF-F
- JPEG
- PDF
- TIFF (Uncompressed)
Monitoring Settings
When you select Monitor In-Tray option in the [In-Tray] settings dialogue box, monitoring
settings can be configured here:
Set the interval time to monitor In-

Trays on ScanRouter V2
Lite/Professional Delivery Server.
70
Delivery Server
Function of Delivery Server
The Delivery server has the function of distributing scanned images from the machine to the PC
through the network in accordance with user settings.
In-tray
Sorting of
User/Group
Save as
Windows file
Distribution of Scanned Image
Destination and sender lists, which are made in the delivery server, can also be displayed on GW
Supported Machines operation panel. From here, choose the destination (and sender). When these
are selected, press the Start Key to start the scanning.
DMR35A/45A Operation Panel

1.Choose the destination (and sender)
from the touch panel screen.
2.Press the start key
71
Starting and Suspending the Delivery Server
There are 3 modes for launching the delivery server. (This will be selected at the installation.)
Launch from Program folder

Delivery server will operate as Windows application. Click [Delivery Server] to start. You can
also start and suspend the delivery service through the Administration Utility.
Launch as Startup - Delivery server launches automatically (to stop service see picture A)
Run in Service mode - Delivery server launches in the background regardless of the account
during log-on. In this case, documents cannot be delivered to the network drive (To stop
service, see picture A).
Select [Server] - [Suspend Services]

to stop the delivery server.
72
Function of Administration Utility
Outline of Administration Utility
The Administration Utility is a tool that allows the management and maintenance of the delivery
server.
Settings in Administration Utility
You can change the default setting from the Administration Utility. Once set, the setting
information will be maintained.
All sorts of settings will be made from here.
1. Select Server
Specify the delivery server to be administered

.
Put in the computer name or IP

address of the delivery server.
73
2. Set Adminstrator
This is where to set the password of the administrator.
(2) Set Preferences
<Default Image Format>
You can set delivery default image format from here. This is applicable only for Save as Windows
file.
74
<Error/Disk Space>
This monitors the server disk space from here. Specify the amount of remaining space at which a
warning should be issued, and the amount of remaining space at which delivery will be stopped.
When it reaches the specified amount for warning level, the administrator will be notified according
to the error procedure.
Choose Ignore or Output to
printer.
When Output to printer is
chosen, select the printer to output
the error message.
Default is Ignore .
Input the disk space for alerting

the administrator, and suspending
the delivery service. The defaults
are follows:
Issue alert at 250MB
suspend at 200MB
<Schedule>
Set the maintenance time from here. Maintenance consists of the following tasks:
Deletion of expired documents

Deletion of old error logs
Database optimisation
The default will be 1 oclock after

midnight.
75
(3) Set I/O Device
Registers the GW supported machines to be connected to this server.
Enter the IP address

Enter the NIC (host) name (also compatible with DHCP environment)
Conduct a device search and select one GW machine from the result list.
Notes:
GW supported machines must be registered at [Set I/O Device].
Data from a ScanRouter supporting machine is accepted even though the machine is not
registered.
There are some limitations on device search. For example, it cannot search devicse outside the
subnet.
(4) Set Delivery Feature Defaults
<Undelivered Data>
You set the undelivered data handling here.
<User Index>
When using GW machine, every user/group stored in the address book is displayed in a list on the
operation panel under a separate index. Every user/group must belong to one of the indexes. It can
also belong to the Frequent index at the same time.
Indexes are used in common both for destination address book and sender address book. 5 or 10
indexes are available in addition to Frequent.
Frequent + 10 indexes; four characters for each index title

Frequent + 5 indexes; eight characters for each index title
Example: Frequent ABC DE FG HI JK LMN OPQ RST UVW XYZ

or Frequent RE RC RA RH RCL
76
Choose either
The alphabet order can be changed
Notes: This user index function is only for GW supporting machines. For Non-GW machines,
UserIndex tab will not appear.
(5) Resume/Suspend Services
When changing the settings or maintaining the delivery server, please suspend the service.
(6) Server information
You can check the information of the delivery server from here.
(7) Set Delivery Type (Gray down)
This setting is for ScanRouter V2 Professional
77
User/Group Registration
You can make the address book of destination and sender from here.
Start the user settings as follows:
Choose [Destination]
[Operations]
[Add New Destination]
[User] or [Group]
78
A. How to register user to the [Destination] address book
2 3
1
6
5
1. Put in the name in 16 characters maximum (Non-GW machines will be 14 characters

maximum.)
2. You can set or change the password of the each In-tray. This password will be used when
accessing from DeskTopBinder V2, and ScanRouter V2 Link.
3. Short ID can be used when selecting the destination from the machines.
4. You can also add as sender by checking the box.
5. Choose the delivery type.

A. In tray save
B. Save as Windows file
79
Below are the properties of each delivery type.
A B
6. After you have chosen the delivery type and set the properties, click [Add].
7. The delivery type, which you have chosen, will be shown in the box.
8. Index settings can be made from here. Choose the index type [Title 1] or [Title 2].
9. By choosing Add to [Freq.](Frequency), the destination will be shown on the operation panel
of the machine at all times.
B. How to register group to the [Destination] address book
Put in the name in 16

characters maximum(Non-
GW machines will be
14 characters maximum)
Select the user from the

[Non- member List] and [Add]
to the [Group Member List].
80
How to register sender to the [Sender] address book
From ScanRouter V2 Lite, [Destination] and [Sender] name can be managed separately. There are
two ways to register the [Sender]. One is to check [Add also as sender] when registering new user
name at the [Destination]. Another way is as follows:
Put in the name in 16

characters maximum
Choose [Sender]
[Operation]
[Add New Sender]
[User]
81
Undelivered Data Tray
The documents, which were not delivered to the appropriate destination due to system errors, will
be delivered to the Undelivered Data Tray. The following items are shown below:
Document name
Creator (sender, etc.)
Date added (Date the document is added to the Undelivered Tray)
Expiring time
Number of sections
Notes: When the address between the Administration Utility and the machine is not agreed, the data
will go into the Undelivered Data Tray. This happens when there is a time lag between registering
user/group name to the Administration Utility and the machine address. To avoid this, you must
update the address of the GW machines after changing the address in the Administration Utility.
This case will not be applied for Non-GW machines.
Log
The delivery server maintains the following logs:
Delivery results Scanned document delivery log

Error Error log
The maximum number of entries for each log is 1000.
Scanned document delivery log

Delivery type
Sender
Destination
Subject
Document name
Size (file size)
Number of pages
Resolution
Sent/unsent
Delivery result log entry is created for each delivery. This means, if two or more delivery types are
specified, that number of delivery results log entries will be created.
82
Error log

Delivery type
Error description
Response to errors
Sender
Destination
Application type
Document name
Maintenance
Administration Utility has the following maintenance functions. Make sure that delivery service is
suspended before beginning maintenance.
All sorts of setting information along with the

data saved in the delivery server will be
backed up. The information, which is backed
up will return in the restoring operation. It is
recommended that backups be made
regularly.
Backup data will be restored.
If the delivery server loses power from any reason

such as regular shutdown, the system may become
unstable and cause frequent errors. To resolve the
situation, recover the delivery server.
Note: Do not use the Recover function unless absolutely
necessary.
Returning to Installation Defaults deletes all data and settings and returns the system to its initial
state. To start initialisation, select [Return to Installation Defaults] from the [Maintenance] menu.
83
Delivery
Product Configuration
ScanRouter V2 Lite is released as a bundled product.
Name Contents
CD ScanRouter V2 Lite Software
Setup Guide, Management Guide (PDF format file)
Readme (text file)
Target Model Schedule
ScanRouter V2 Lite will be bundled with the following machine models.
Model Name Mass Production

English Five Languages
DMR35A/45A Feb. 2001 Apr. 2001
P/S Option
SC430dc Feb.2001 Apr. 2001

NIC Option
Localisation
ScanRouter V2 Lite supports 5 languages English, French, German, Italian, Dutch
Note: Spanish, which was supported in ScanRouter, will not be supported in ScanRouter V2 Lite.
84
Specification
System Requirements
Delivery Server
OS Windows 95(OSR2 or later), 98/98SE
Windows ME
Windows2000Server
CPU Pentium 200MHz minimum
(Pentium 350MHz or faster recommended)
Memory Min 64MB (128MB or more recommended)
HDD At least 200MB of disk space are required for installation. In
addition, 500MB or more are is required to save documents.
Client PC
OS Windows 95(after OSR2), 98/98SE
Windows ME
Windows NT Workstation 4.0(SP5 or later)
Windows2000 Professional, Windows2000Server
CPU Pentium 133MHz or faster
(Pentium II 266MHz or faster recommended)
Memory Min 48MB (64MB or more recommended)
HDD 50MB or more (200MB recommended)
85
SmartNetMonitor Product Information Guide
PRODUCT INFORMATION
GUIDE
SmartNetMonitor
specifications are subject to change. If in doubt or further details are required,
please contact NRGI Guernsey.
1
Executive Summary
SmartNetMonitor is the latest version of Aficio Manager. As mentioned in previous Product

Information Guides, Aficio Manager was positioned to provide customers with effective
productivity to NRG network products, especially in the arena of network printing. On a
strategic level, Aficio Manager was produced to acquire more PV (Print volumes) through
MFPs, Laser Printers and Faxes.
The problem with Aficio Manager was that it could only obtain information from the Printer
function of the MFP, while many users wanted to obtain information on the entire MFP (Copier,
Fax, Printer and Scanner) and not only from the Printer portion.
SmartNetMonitor will therefore provide the following benefits to users of NRG products:
1. Effective Monitoring and Easy Analysis

2. Easy Management
3. Easy Operation
4. Reduced Network Printing Time
5. Increased Productivity
1. Enhanced TCO Strategy Total Management of the entire system
SmartNetMonitor can retrieve total counts of all MFP functions; Copy, Fax, Printer and
Scanner (Aficio Manager can only retrieve the total counts of the Printer function)
2. Encourage Users to use NRG products
Easy Operation
Easy Monitoring
2
Product Overview
SmartNetMonitor will be launched as one of the network features of DMR35A/45A. It will

also function with machines that the previous versions of Aficio Manager were designed to
work on.
The concept of SmartNetMonitor is based on 2 distinct modules:
1. Admin Module this was given the development name of Laurel

2. Client Module this was given the development name of Maple
The major differences between the new version and the Admin and Client modules of
SmartNetMonitor when compared with Aficio Manager are as follows:
Admin Module
This module is to designed to allow Network Administrators to manage all NRG MFPs, LPs,
Faxes and Scanners with both a Ricoh NIC and other Vendors NIC located in the network (LAN
segment).
Client Module
This module is a combination of three current modules; Aficio Manager for Client, PortNavi
and MultiDirectPrint (MDP3).
The module is designed to let users monitor all NRG products that contain either a Ricoh NIC
or another vendors NIC that is located in the network (LAN segment). The module is also
designed to allow the quick installation of all 3 modules at once rather than installing them on
an individual basis.
The module also enable s the user to send print jobs directly to Printer (or MFP), separate jobs
(Parallel Printing) and send jobs to another Printer (or MFP) reduc ing downtime (Recovery
Printing).
3
Major Differences from Previous Utilities
In addition to being able to monitor the total MFP (Copier, LP, Fax, Colour, Scanner),
SmartNetMonitor offers the following key benefits compared to the previous version of Aficio
Manager:
The ability to monitor the status of Toner and the Document Server* (Common to both
SmartNetMonitor for Admin and Client )
SmartNetMonitor for Admin has the following additional functionality:
Monitor System Status*

Select Device List Columns
Lock Menu of Device Operation Panel*
User Code Maintenance Tool*
Capability of tracking Copier, FAX, Printer counts in detail
Access restriction settings*
SmartNetMonitor for Client has the following additional functionality:
My Job List Menu

Notification Setting Menu
Notifications of printout/data transmission when using print server
SmartNetMonitor Port: Capability to support RPCS* and IPDL-C
Note: Functions marked with an asterisk (*) are only available with GW-supported machines.
4
Market Overview
Advantages against Competitors
The biggest advantage against our competitors is the capability of SmartNetMonitor to monitor
the entire system. Many competitor software solutions do not have this functionality:
HP WebJet Admin
Xerox - CenterWare
Lexmark - MarkVision
Canon - Net Spot
While the solutions above are capable of monitoring Printers, they cannot monitor devices such
as MFPs and Scanners.
SmartNetMonitor is also a comparatively light system for an administrator to install onto the
server:
Software Install image HDD Volume

SmartNetMonitor for Admin 10 MB 20 MB
SmartNetMonitor for Client 15 MB 30 MB
Web JetAdmin 6.0 Approx. 50 MB Approx. 80 MB
Mark Vision Pro. Approx. 50 MB Approx. 100 MB
Xerox CenterWare Approx. 30 MB Approx. 50 MB
5
Product Range Plan Solutions Overview

DeskTopBinder
Oak
E Cabinet Doc-Q-Manager/CRD-PFP & Velocity
Document
and Network
Information
Information Print
Management Management Smart Net Monitor
and & Print Observer
Control
PCSM / ACM
Document
Host Printing
Solutions
Forms Document
Workflow
Formscape
ScanRouter Pro
6
Network Print Management and Control Product Plans*
00.12 ? Print Server)

01.01 ? Editing Module ?
Other CRD/PFP-1
Solution *Bellini-C1+B
Server
00.12 02.06
Poplar-PS1 Poplar-PS2
*Adonis-C2
99.06 02.01 02.03

PM-Admin V3.5 Admin-PA1 Laurel-PA2
*Rus-P *Adonis-C2 *Uranos-C1
*GW Architecture
99.06 02.01 02.03

PM-Client V3.5 Client-PC1 Maple-PC2
*Adonis-C2 *Uranos-C1
99.08
*GW Architecture
PrintNavi
99.11
MDP-3
98.12 *MDP/IPP
MDP V2
~1999 2000 2001 2002
*The plans above are subject to change so should not be considered as fixed.
7
Target Users
The target:
All users using Ricoh products (MFP, LP, FAX and Full Colo ur Products, etc) connected by a
Ricoh NIC (Emulex, Ricoh and DPI) throughout the network.
All users (Admins, Managers) who wish to see status of RICOH MFPs, FAX, Scanner as well
as Printer over the network.
Especially users, who are interested in monitoring total counts of each function, would be able
to collect data from each connected device throughout their office by an easy operation.
(Admins, Office Managers, etc.)
8
Basic features of SmartNetMonitor for Admin
SmartNetMonitor for Admin is the successor to the previous Admin module Aficio Manager.
As previously mentioned, it has been developed to support the new generation of digital MFP,
GW (Group Work) products and is able to monitor all aspects of a MFP (Copier, Fax, Printer
and Scanner).
Functions of SmartNetMonitor for Admin (Laurel)
Note: All functions marked in red are new or modified functions compared to Aficio Manager
3.5.
All functions of SmartNetMonitor for Admin are accessible from the pull-down menus.
9
Group Menu
[New]: Creates a new device group in addition to using the Local

Network Group.
Group names are to be set to 1- 256 alphanumeric digits.
Up to 100 Groups can be created.
[Open]: Opens the existing device group.
[Close]: Closes the current device group.
[Delete]: Deletes the current device group.
[Rename]: Renames the current device group.
[Open LAN] > [TCP/IP], [IPX/SPX]: lists all devices found in the local subnet of each
network environment.
[Open Hosts file]: Opens a device group from a Hosts file*.
*The Hosts file is a list of IP or IPX address mapped to device names.

Each line or entry is return delimited and consists of three parts. The
parts consists of:
Address (the actual IP or IPX address),
Device Name (the name of the device),
Comments (additional comments).
10
Each of the three elements must be separated with a space or tab. The
comments must also be preceded with a "#".
Sample Hosts File:

192.168.15.16 printer1 #5FNSide (TCP/IP)
12345678:000074625C65 printer2 #Near Dukes desk (IPX/SPX)
[Save as a Hosts File]: Saves the listed device information into a Hosts file.
[Energy Save Mode*]: Allows user to change over to the Energy Save Mode for the devices
by group. User can also set the time to shift to or recover from the
Energy Save Mode automatically (Timer Settings).
*Note: Some models do not support this function. For details see
Appendix 1.
[Preferences]: Manages the refresh and timeout settings of a device group. Refresh
settings has been changed from 10 sec. to 60 sec.
[Exit]: Exit SmartNetMonitor for Admin
Device Menu
[Open] Opens the Device Properties of the selected device.
[Add] Adds a device to a device group. Note: A particular device group

should be opened before adding any device.
[Delete] Deletes selected device(s) from a device group.

11
[Change] Enables you to change Name, Address and Comment of the selected
device
[Open by Address] Opens a certain device by using a TCP/IP or IPX/SPX address.
Note: This function can be used in 2 situations.
( ) When user wishes to open a device which is not located on the

subnet to which the user belongs.
( ) When SmartNetMonitor fails to identify the device; for instance,
the device itself is a non-RICOH product (RICOH-OEM
products are excluded, they work in the same way as RICOH
products) or the user forgot the name of the device, but has the
IP address information.
Device Properties
12
Status Tab
Displays the status of each function of the selected device.
Note: Status tree on part (1) differs if the selected device is a GW product or non-GW product.
[Reset] Enables you to reset the device remotely. The password of

the NIC is required when resetting the device remo tely.
[Options] Enables you to change Refresh interval (refresh

automatically; from 10 sec. to 600sec.) and Timeout
Settings (from 10 sec. to 30sec.)
[Refresh] Enables the device to be refreshed manually.
Notes:
System, Copier, Fax and Scanner status is only supported when the device is a GW product.
System Status* Display status of the entire system by icons and characters.
Consists of Ready
Service Calls (System failure)
Out of Supply
Transmission Error(FAX)
No Response
Information is retrieved from the status written in the Alert Tables of Copier MIB,
FAX MIB, Printer MIB and Scanner MIB (All RICOH private MIBs)
The system status shows whether the selected device can be used or not at that time.
For current products, only status of Printer can be retrieved(System status stands for Printer
status in case of non-GW products).
13
Support to GW or current (non-GW) Products
The list below shows the how SmartNetMonitor for Admin supports GW compared with
non-GW Products.
Status
Supported Models
System Copier FAX Printer Scanner
Models after GW-MFP *1
DMR35A/45A e.g. DMR35A/45A
? ? ? ? ?
GW-Printer
e.g. DMR15S/18S, PCR38
? *2 - - ? -
Current models
(Released before
MFP
e.g. DMR22/27
? *2 ?
DMR35A/45A) Printer
e.g. PMR32
? *2 - - ? -
Scanner
e.g. SMR30dc
- - - ?
FAX
e.g. E99
? *2 - ? ? -
Competitor Printer
(with Standard MIB support) ? *3 - - ? *3 -
Other devices (PC, HUB etc.)
? Supported / Not Supported / - N/A
Note:
(*1 ): Full support of all multi-functional functions.
(*2 ): Displays Printer Status as System Status. Therefore, Printer Status stands for the
whole system status information for current products.
(*3 ): Depends on the status driven from the conditions of MIB information written on each
competitor product. Not guaranteed by RICOH.
Configuration Tab
Displays the status in detail of the selected device.
14
Major status is as follows;
Input, Output, Toner, Function, System, Document Server, Printer Language, Network I/F
(Interface)
Note: Status in red is only applicable to GW-products.
[Status of Toner] Status of Toner is displayed by graphical images; this was

not available in the previous Peripheral Manager 3.5. It can
also verify the colo urs when the device is a colour device
(eg Model-J).
This function is only available on GW-products.
Note: For some GW-products they may not work properly,

due to hardware limitations (Model KP-1).
[Status of Document Server] Status of Document Server can be monitored
[Memory Capacity] Displays the amount of Hard Disk volume. Volume is

shown in Megabytes.
[Free] Displays the amount of free disk space as a percentage (%).

Note: This is only available when the device has a
Document Server installed.
Job History Tab
Displays the Job Log information retrieved from the device, by using the User ID set on the
devices Printer Driver.
15
SmartNetMonitor gives the Job Log information of Faxes as well as Printers. For the Printer
Job Log, the following information can be obtained:
Printer Job Log Specifications - GW Products
User Name*1: Login Name of user s PC

Document Name: Name of the printed document.
Status: Status of the Job (Printing, Print Completed, Error, Cancelled)
Pages: Number of printouts.
Started at: Time when the Job started to print (actual time when data
transmission has started)
User ID*2: User ID of the user, configured by the Printer Driver
*Note 1: These items can only be retrieved when printed through IPP (Limitation of protocol).
*Note 2: User IDs are to be set to 1- 8 alphanumeric digits.
Note: Above Information cannot be retrieved when using PS Driver.
Printer Job Log Specifications non-GW Products

Pages: Number of printouts.
transmission has started)
*Note 1: User IDs are to be set to 1- 8 alphanumeric digits.
*Note: Displayed items only appear when the device supports Printer Job history function.
When the device does not support Printer Job history info, Unsupported will be displayed
on the Job History screen.
Note: Above Information cannot be retrieved when using PS Driver.
16
FAX Job Log specifications
For the FAX Job Logs, the following information could vary depending upon whether the
machine is a GW or non-GW Product:
Model Displayed Contents Retrieving Protocol
non-GW FAX Job History SNMP / MIB
GW Products FAX Job History SNMP / MIB
LAN-FAX Job History FTP
FAX Job Log specifications GW Products
User ID*: User ID of the user, configured by the LAN-FAX driver

Status: Displays the transmission results of the LAN-FAX function. The
Status in details are shown below:
Complete
Fax Transmission Error
Standby
Transmitting
Transmission Failed, Redialing
Printing Fax Report
Transmission Failed, Data Deleted
Cancelled (Error)
Executing Restoring Process
Printing
Forwarding from PC
Cancelled (Memory Full)
Cancelled (Over Job Limit)
Cancelled (Destination Not Found)
Cancelled (Line Not Found)
Saved in Document Server
Cancelled (Document Server Full)
Cancelled (Document Server Problem)
Saving
Access Restricted
Interrupted
Network Communication Error
Pages: Number of printouts when receiving and transmitting a fax.
Started at: Time when the Job started to print (Actual time when data transmission from
the PC has started)
File No. Displays the file No from 1 to 9999 effective from FCU
17
Fax Job Log Specifications - non-GW Products

Pages: Number of printouts when receiving a fax.
transmission from the PC has started)
*Note: User IDs are to be set to 1- 8 alphanumeric digits.
*Note: Displayed items only appear when the device supports Printer Job history function.
When the device does not support Printer Job history info, Unsupported will be displayed on
the Job History screen.
18
Job Statistic Tab
This tab has been removed from the Device Properties to User Code Maintenance Tool
(See User Code Maintenance Tool section).
Edit Menu
All menus are common to all Windows applications.
View Menu
[Arrange Icons] Sorts the device list window using the selected key.
(Clicking the column title of the device list window has the
same effect)
[Select Device List Columns] Enable users to add / remove columns to / from the selected
device window.
Note: The Printer status is available with all LPs and MFPs (including Colour MFP / LPs
and Faxes)
Copier, Fax and Scanner status is only available on GW-products (MFPs).
19
Tools Menu
NIB Setup Tool
Configures the NIB settings of the selected device.
The only change between the NIB Set-Up Tool (NST) for SmartNetMonitor and that of Aficio
Manager 3.5, is that RICOH will no longer use the MAP Utility (provided by DPI, Setup Tool
for DPI NICs).
The reason is that MAP will still be bundled onto the CD included with the DPI NIC Options.
Users wishing to install MAP can do so from the CD included in the NIC / NIB option.
20
General Spec to NIB Setup Tool (NST)
The NST is designed to make the configuration of Network Interface Card (NIC) easier. The
principal functions of this utility are summarised below:
1) Displays or changes current settings or information of the target NIC

2) Password protection
The NST is installed automatically when SmartNetMonitor for Admin is installed. It can be
booted in 2 different ways:
1) Self Boot (From the Start-Up Menu)

2) Booted by SmartNetMonitor for Admin (From the Tool Menu.)
Functional differences are summarized in following table:
Self execution Admin execution

Main Window of NST Displayed Not displayed
Target NIC Can be selected from Main Menu Cannot be selected.
Always use the NIC specified by Admin
Communication Protocol Can be selected from Main Menu Cannot be selected.

Use the same protocol as Admin
Multiple copies of NST can be executed at the same time. The number of devices is not
restricted and depends on PCs resources (for a list of supported NIBs please see Appendix 1).
21
Lock Menu of Device Operation Panel
Brings up the Configuration: General page of the devices built- in web server
(WebStatusMonitor).
This enables users to activate or deactivate access to the Operational Panel of the device
remotely, so that users cannot use the device freely.
This function is designed to allow administrators to give access only to those who are permitted
to use a device in a particular workgroup (eg for Colo ur Copiers which administrators may not
wish to be used by everybody because of the copy / print cost). This function is only available
on GW-products.
The selected device must be configured for TCP/IP communication. Devices found in a
IPX/SPX local network can also be configured.
Note: Password of NIC / NIB is required before entering this page. Default password is
password. Passwords can be changed through built-in web server (WebStatusMonitor). No
user name is required.
22
Paper Type Settings
Brings up the Configuration: Paper Type page of the devices built- in web server
(WebStatusMonitor).
Enables users to change the types of paper on each tray of the selected device remotely. The
user therefore no longer has to set Paper Settings from the Operation Panel of the device. This
function is only available on GW-products.
User Code Maintenance Tool
Manages the user codes and access restriction settings of the selected device.
In the previous versions of Aficio Manager, the Admin module displayed Job Statistics
information, which was retrieved from each machine. This was limited to the Printer function
only. Since SmartNetMonitor for Admin is designed to retrieve information from every
function of a GW-product, a new independent tool has been produced. This tool is used for the
storage and management of these Job Statistics as well as to manage the access restriction
settings of the selected device remotely. The tool is called User Code Maintenance Tool.
Major Functions of User Code Maintenance Tool
Monitors accumulated counts of Copier, FAX (FAX sent) and Printer on one screen (Job
Statistics).
23
Programme or control each users access rights to each function of the machine such as
copy, fax, print, scan and document server.
Basic requirements of User Code Maintenance Tool
Hardware requirements
To use all the functions of the User Code Maintenance Tool, the device must be a
GW-product. See Appendix 1 for details.
PC requirements
The client PC (as well as Server) must have Microsoft TCP/IP protocol installed and configured.
The target machine must also have TCP/IP protocol correctly configured. Only one client host
can have access to a target device for the User Code Maintenance Tool at a time(Although,
multiple client PCs can access the same device at the same time).
User Code Maintenance Tool Functions in Detail
In order to enter the User Code Maintenance Tool a password is required.
Notes:
Default password is password
As this password is also the password of NIC / NIB, passwords can be changed through the
built-in web server (WebStatusMonitor).
24
The User Code Maintenance Tool consists of 2 application windows:
User Statistics List
Displays the statistical information for each user code.
Current Version
GW-Product
25
[Access Privileges List] Displays the access restriction settings for each user code
and device function.
26
Function Menus
[File]
[Export User Statistics List] Exports the current statistical information of the selected
device to a CSV format* text file.
*Note: The contents of the CSV format file are as follows:
- Date Obtained
- Device Name: eg Adonis-C2
- Address: eg 133.139.192.110
- User Code
- User Name
- Total Printouts
- Total Printouts: Black and White
- Total Printouts: Black and White (smaller than A3)
- Total Printouts: Black and White (A3 and larger)
- Total Printouts: Single Colour
- Total Printouts: Single Colour (smaller than A3)
- Total Printouts: Single Colour (A3 and larger)
- Total Printouts: Colour
- Total Printouts: Colour (smaller than A3)
- Total Printouts: Colour (A3 and larger)
Note: Printouts without any User ID are counted as [other].
[Export User Information] Export user codes and names to a CSV format text file.
27
[Import User Information] Import user codes and names from the CSV format text file
that have been exported from the User Code Maintenance
Tool
Note: Exporting and Importing User information prevents administrators from re-arranging
User Codes to devices when moving offices, etc.
Definition to Page Counts
The information below provides details of how counts are retrieved through SmartNetMonitor
when various Printer Drivers are used.
Testing conditions
The results are based on a sample Microsoft PowerPoint 2000 file of 10 pages under various
conditions.
[RPCS Driver; Model A-C2 (GW-Product) used as sample]
Aficio 1035 RPCS Driver, ver.1.00
Pages counted at User Management Tool of SmartNetMonitor for Admin
Printed in Single Printed in 2 in 1

slides settings
Page Counts Printer Engine Printer Engine
Counter Counter Counter Counter
No settings 10 10 5 5
Duplex 10 5 5 3
Paper savings*
(Duplex and 2 in 1 settings) 5 3 3 2
PCL 6 / 5e and PS3 Driver; DMR35A/45A (GW-Product) and PMR32 (Non-GW-Product) used
as sample
Aficio 1035 PCL 6 / 5e and PS3 Driver, all ver 1.00

Aficio AP 3200 PCL 6 / 5e and PS3 Driver, all ver
28
Pages counted at User Management Tool of SmartNetMonitor for Admin
Printed in Single Printed in 2 in 1

slides settings
Page Counts Printer Engine Printer Engine
Counter Counter Counter Counter
No settings 10 10 5 5
Duplex 10 5 5 3
Paper savings*
(Duplex and 2 in 1 6 3 4 2
settings)
Conclusion
The Page count difference is caused by the different ways in which printer drivers send print
jobs to devices. Normally all printer drivers count per page but, whenever there are settings
which combine several pages into one (2 in 1 function), drivers count them as one page.
Therefore, the results indicate that RPCS Drivers count pages more accurately than current PCL
and PS Drivers. This is because RPCS Drivers do not count blank pages, while the current PCL
and PS Drivers do count blank pages.
There is also a clear difference between the Printer Counter and Engine (Total) Counter. While
the Printer Counter count s the pages driven from the Printer Driver, the Engine (Total) Counter
counts the actual pages that are printed out from the device.
29
[Edit]
[Restrict Access To Device] Activates access restriction for a device function.
B/W Colour
This function enables all users (Administrators) to place entire access restriction to a certain
device for each function.
How to restrict access to a function
1.Select [Edit] [Access Restriction to Device]

2.Select functions to which you wish to restrict access.
Unchecked (default)
No restriction. All users can use the function without entering a User Code.
30
Checked
Restricted. Only users who have access permission can use the function.
Note: If the administrator wishes to keep the device free for anyone to use, they must not check
any of the functions otherwise some clients would be unable to use them
[Automatically add user codes] (Optional Printer function only)
If a User Code is programmed into the printer driver, the

User Code is programmed to the device the first time the
user prints a document using the driver.
[Find User Code] Find a specified user code from the list. The methods are
the same as for Windows. Enter the name and start search.
[Add New User]
How to add a new user
1.Select [Edit] [Add New User] or press Ins Key.

2.Enter a User Code and User Name.
3.Click OK.
The lower field is used for access restriction. Refer to the explanation above.
31
[Delete User] Used to manage the user code list.
How to delete a new user
1.Select Users from the Access Privileges List.

2.Select [Edit] [Delete] or press Delete Key.
3.Select [Edit] [Apply Settings]
Note: Max number of users depends on the volume of NV-RAM on each device.
[User Properties] Gives access permission to a device function for selected

user.
How to modify User Properties
1.Double click any User Code user wishes to modify.

2.Modify the items.
3.Click OK.
Note: In this function, users (administrators) can modify information by user. Users can change
access privileges by clicking or not clicking the boxes, which shows the functions.
In this case, the functionality derived from clicking or not clicking on a box differ from the
ways to restrict a function (How to restrict access to a function). The example above shows that
user 0101 does not have access to Scanner and Document Server.
32
Unchecked (default)
No permission to use the function.
Checked
Allows access to a User.
Grayed Out
No access restriction (functions which were not checked when restricting the entire function
access)
[Apply Settings] Applies any changes made to the access privileges list.
Changes to information are not transmitted to the device
until [Apply Setting] is selected.
[View]
[User Statistics List]
[Access Privileges List] Switches the active tab in the application window.
[Refresh] Updates the list to the most recent status.
33
Summary of User Code Maintenance Tool
Function capability varied by devices (? Supported / Not Supported)

Devices User Statistic List Access Privilege List
GW-products ? ?
Non-GW-products ?
Differences to Access Privileges

Access privilege Checked Unchecked
Entire Access *1 Restricted Not Restricted
Individual Access*2 Not Restricted Restricted
Varied by icons
Access privilege Entire Access *1 Individual Access*2
Restricted
Not Restricted
Ticks show the differences between Restricted and Not Restricted
*1 In case of entire access, the device needs to be informed as to which function should be
restricted; therefore, boxes have to be clicked if restriction is wanted.
*2 In case of individual access, the device needs to be informed as to which function should not
be restricted; therefore, boxes have to be clicked if you want free access to the function.
Access Restriction results (varied by functions)
Copier, Fax, Scanner and Document Server functions

A valid user code with access permission must be entered at the machines operation panel,
before using these functions.
Printer function
A valid user code must be programmed in to the drivers properties. Print jobs without a user
code or jobs with a wrong user code are not printed.
Detailed access restriction results may depend on machines specifications (see Summary to
SmartNetMonitor for Admin)
Differences in file size between Aficio Manager 3.5 for Admin and SmartNetMonitor for
Admin
Aficio Manager for Admin 3.5 SmartNetMonitor for Admin
Install volume 9 MB 10 MB
HDD volume 14 MB 20 MB
34
Differences between user Codes and User IDs
Below is a list of the differences between User Codes and User IDs used in both the Admin and
Client portion.
User ID User Code

Settings [Win 9x, Me] [Win 9x, Me]
RPCS: Set at Printer RPCS: Set at dialogue

Configuration after Driver installation.
PCL Set at Setup tab PCL Set at Statistic

(6/5e) [Setup]-[Job Type]
-[Details]
PS Same as PCL PS Same as PCL
[Win 2000] [Win 2000]

RPCS: Set at Printer RPCS: Set at Printer
Configuration Configuration
PCL Set at Setup tab PCL Set at Setup tab

(6/5e) [Setup]-[Job Type] (6/5e) [Setup]-[Job Type]
-[Details] -[Details]
PS Set at General PS Set at General

tab tab
[General]-[Printing [General]-[Printing
Reference]-[Job Reference]-[Job
Log] tab Log] tab
Information Information of each Job printed Accumulated counts per each User (with a
which can be out (as well as FAX) from device. User Code) and Total Counts of printouts.
retrieved
Where it can Inside [Job History] tab of Inside User Management Tool of
be monitored Device Properties SmartNetMonitor for Admin.
(Both Admin / Client)
Statistic data can be exported via CSV
Can be set up to 16 logs formats as well.
(FIFO, no changes even NV
RAM is added) Logs are not cleared even if the Power is
turned OFF.
Logs are cleared when Power of
device is turned OFF.
Recommended Log management for each User. Page Count Management for IT Admins.
for: Also IDs are able to used for Counts varied by User or Group can be
Sample / Locked Print as well. used as guidelines.
35
Basic features of SmartNetMonitor for Client
SmartNetMonitor for Client is not only the successor of the previous Client module of Aficio
Manager but also a hybrid of MDP3 and PortNavi. It will therefore support all the features of
these previously separate utilities.
The basic functionality of SmartNetMonitor for Client is as follows:
Monitors status of a specified device (GW-products and current products) through network
Monitors device(s) in the Windows printer folder. SmartNetMonitor for Client will still
keep on running as a Windows application (Same as in Aficio Manager)
SmartNetMonitor for Client has a function to monitor the network ports (through the
functionality previously provided by PortNavi and MDP3)
Parallel and Recovery function (through the functionality previously provided by PortNavi)
Functions of SmartNetMonitor for Client
Most of the functions of SmartNetMonitor for Client are accessible by clicking the icon located
on the Task Bar.
36
[Options Menu]
Printers Folder Tab
There are no major changes from the previous version of Aficio Manager 3.5 for Client.
[Import] Opens the Host files to get IP address information
[Open Properties] Opens the Printer Driver Property of the selected device
[Port Settings] Opens the Property of Port Settings
Note: Devices which show up with an IP address automatically, indicate that the device was set
up with the following Port:
SmartNetMonitor Port (Hybrid of previous PortNavi and MDP, MDP3)

Other Port Utilities such as lpr or Microsoft TCP/IP, etc. which requires an IP address.
Otherwise, IP address of device should be set manually in order for SmartNetMonitor to

monitor the device.
37
Network Devices Tab
[Add] Adds devices onto the table above.

Name of device, IP Address and Comments can also be set
[Browse] Users are able to browse SmartNetMonitor for Client

through subnets. Or, users are able to monitor devices over
the subnet by setting an IP address manually.
Devices added on this window will be on a different

location compared to the devices which are on the Printer
Folder Window. (Printer Driver(s))
Devices selected from the Browse

button are locate here
Devices on the Printer Driver

Folder are located here.
Note: Printers selected from the Browse button cannot be selected as To be Monitored
devices of the Option Menu (Cannot be located on the Task Bar)
38
[Change] Modify the information of the selected device.
[Delete] Deletes the selected device.
General Settings tab
[Refresh Interval] Change the refresh settings. Refresh setting has been
changed from 10 sec. to 60 sec.
[Start Up Option] Options when booting SmartNetMonitor for Client can be

selected:
- Open Status List: Opens Status List when software is
booted.
- Display Splash Screen (default)
39
My Job List Menu
This is a new menu that has been added to SmartNetMonitor for Client.
All the print jobs sent from Users PC are listed on this particular screen. This function
therefore reduces the time spent searching Job Logs on several Printers.
This function requires a User ID to be set on each Printer Driver Property. If there are no
particular IDs, [?] appears on the User ID column to show that there was no User ID.
40
This was a function of PortNavi; Notification settings can now be set directly from
SmartNetMonitor for Client. There is no particular change from the previous PortNavi except
that notification through Server / Client environment is available from SmartNetMonitor for
Client.
[Notification of printout/data-transmission when using print server]
Client Host
Windows NT4.0/200
1 2
\\Server\Printer_Share SNM Port
Ethernet
Notification
Print jobs go through a Windows NT4.0/2000 print server (shared printer). Notification
messages go directly to the client host. The previous PortNavi could not send notification
directly to the PC Client.
This function is only applicable on Windows NT4.x / 2000 environments (Service Pack 5 or
later is required). Does not work with Win9x / Me shared environments.
41
SmartNetMonitor Port
As SmartNetMonitor is a hybrid of Aficio Manager 3.5, PortNavi and MDP3, the ports are now
referred to as SmartNetMonitor Port
Upgraded from the previous ports
When the previous PortNavi port or MDP / MDP3 port is upgraded into SmartNetMonitor Port,
all of the previous settings will be integrated into SmartNetMonitor Port. All of the names of the
port will also be changed into SmartNetMonitor Port.
Supported Protocols
TCP raw (port 9100) or lpr protocol (for NIB Type 185 and 2600)
Lpr port (for NIB Type 450E and 2000)
Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) on TCP/IP (for NIB Type 185 and 2600
NetBEUI (for NIB Type 185 and 2600)
Supports Parallel Printing and Recovery Printing for TCP raw port and lpr port.
Supported PDLs
The PDLs which SmartNetMonitor Port supports for Parallel Printing and Recovery Printing
are as follows:
PCL 5e
PCL 6 (XL)
Note: The SmartNetMonitor Port does not support PS (PostScript 2 / 3) for Parallel Printing
and Recovery Printing (same as PortNavi port).
Added Functions
Compatibility with RPCS

SmartNetMonitor Port will support Parallel and Recove ry Printing via a RPCS Driver (added to
GW-products - Kir-P, Adonis-C2 and Jupiter-P)
Capability to IPDL-C
SmartNetMonitor Port will support Parallel and Recovery Printing via IPDL-C Driver.
Therefore, SmartNetMonitor for Client will support colo ur products.
42
SmartNetMonitor Port for TCP/IP
The SmartNetMonitor Port browses the local subnet and lists all printers found.
Select one device from the list to create a new port.
When the device is selected, the name of the port will be as follows:
133.139.192.27@Aficio_AP2700_: (SmartNetMonitor)
SmartNetMonitor Port for TCP/IP; Recovery / Parallel settings
Most of the settings are the same as PortNavi port.

[Conduct [Recovery Printing] when ]: checkbox allows Recovery printing even if the
target printer was not ready for printing.
43
SmartNetMonitor Port for TCP/IP; Printer Group Settings:
These settings are the same as for the previous PortNavi port.
SmartNetMonitor Port for IPP
The settings are the same as previous MDP3 port. Printer URL must be in the following format:
http://<IP Address of the printer>/printer
ipp://<IP Address of the printer>/printer
IPP Port Name is optional.
44
SmartNetMonitor Port for IPP, IPP Port Settings
The settings are the same as previous MDP3 port. Printer URL must be in the following format:
http://<IP Address of the printer>/printer
ipp://<IP Address of the printer>/printer
IPP user name and password are optional.
SmartNetMonitor Port for IPP, Proxy Settings
The settings are the same as previous MDP3 port. Proxy settings are optional
45
SmartNetMonitor Port for IPP, Timeout Settings
The settings are the same as previous MDP3 port.
SmartNetMonitor Port for NetBEUI
The SmartNetMonitor for Client browses the local subnet and lists all NetBEUI printers found.
Select one from the list to create a new port.

NetBEUI protocol must be installed to the client host.
46
Summary to SmartNetMonitor for Client
Differences in server space requirements between previous software and SmartNetMonitor for
Client:
Aficio Manager SmartNetMonitor for

for Client 3.5 PortNavi MDP3 Client
Install volume 6 MB 5MB 1MB 10 MB
HDD volume 9 MB 8MB 5MB 20 MB
Total amount of 3 previous modules - 12MB in Install volume.

Total amount of 3 previous modules - 22MB in HDD volume.
Newly added functions compared to the previous Aficio Manager 3.5 for Client:
My Job List Menu

Notify printout/data-transmission when using print server
SmartNetMonitor Port
Capability to support RPCS
Capability to support IPDL-C
47
Target Customer and Users
All users of NRG products (MFP, LP, Fax etc) connected by a Ricoh NIC (Emulex, Ricoh
and DPI) through the network
All Administrators/Managers who wish to see the status of NRG products (MFP, LP, FAX
etc) as well as the Printer over the network
Users, who are interested in monitoring the total counts of each function
Channels
SmartNetMonitor is a free piece of Software and will only be available as bundled software.
There are no plans to release it as a standalone item.
48
Product Sales Points (Over Aficio Manager 3.5)
Overview
Admin Module
Monitor System Status

Monitor Status of Toner
Monitor Status of Document Server
Select Device List Columns
User Code Maintenance Tool
Capability of tracking Copier, Fax, Printer counts in detail
Access restriction settings
Client Module
Monitors status of a specified device (GW-products and current products) through network
Monitors device(s) in the Windows printer folder. SmartNetMonitor for Client will still
keep on running as a Windows application (Same as in Aficio Manager)
SmartNetMonitor for Client has a function to monitor the network ports (through the
functionality previously provided by PortNavi and MDP3)
Parallel and Recovery function (through the functionality previously provided by PortNavi)
49
Overview
History EDP Good Product Name Description

Code abbreviation
Aficio Manager 3.5 N/A N/A SmartNetMonitor Network Print Management
and Control
Timing and Delivery
SmartNetMonitor will be delivered on a CD, bundled with the Printer Driver of the device
(same as previous Aficio Manager 3.5). Delivery will be from the launch of Adonis-C2.
Upgrading from Aficio Manager 3.5
When upgrading to SmartNetMonitor there is no need to uninstall Aficio Manager 3.5,

PortNavi or MDP3
All Printer and NIC settings are converted into SmartNetMonitor
Since SmartNetMonitor is an upgrade of Aficio Manager 3.5, it will start from software
version 4.00
Basic System requirements
Specifications
The general specifications of SmartNetMonitor as shown below are correct as of 15/12/2000.

Please note that text in red indicates revisions compared to previous versions of Aficio
Manager.
50
System requirements
PC Requirements
Hardware Spec of PC
Minimum: Intel 486/33MHz systems or better
CPU
Pentium is recommended
Admin: 10 MB
Install Image Volume *1
Client: 15 MB
Admin: 20 MB
HDD Volume*2
Client: 30 MB
Memory (RAM) 32MB of RAM (Recommended)
*1.Volume when downloaded from web sites (zip files)
Note
*2.Volume needed when installing software into PC.
OS
Windows 95 (Supports all Service Packs)

Windows 98 / 98SE (Supports all Service Packs)
Windows 2000 Professional*1, *2,
Windows Millennium
Windows NT 4.0*1, *2
Windows 2000 Server*1, *2
Note SmartNetMonitor does not support the following OS
- Windows 3.x and Windows NT3.x

- All Mac OS
- UNIX, LINUX and any Solaris Systems
- Other types of OS not mentioned above.
*1: Administration Privilege is required when installing the software.

*2: SmartNetMonitor is not applicable for any Terminal Server Editions
Protocol
SNMP via TCP/IP *1 or IPX/SPX*2
*Note *1: TCP/IP is required when installing SmartNetMonitor for Client

(Maple)
*2: IPX/SPX is required to be installed when using IPX/SPX search
*2:Novell Client Module is required (should be installed) when using
IPX/SPX search
- Windows 95
Novell Client for Windows 95 ver.3.21 or later
- Windows 98 / 98SE / Millennium
Novell Client for Windows 98 ver.3.21 98/98SE), ver.3.30 (Me)
or later
- Windows NT 4.0
Novell Client for Windows NT ver.4.71 or later
- Windows 2000 Professional / Server
Novell Client for Windows NT ver.4.71 or later
51
System Requirements
The information below refers to the hardware side of the system.
MIB*1 Supported MIBs

Printer MIB based on RFC 1759*2
Host resource portion based on RFC 1759
Indicates status information of :

Standard MIB
Tray information (Input and Output)
Printer Languages (Names and versions)
Network I/F (Details of NIC; IP address, Subnet
Mask and Node address)
RICOH MIB
All RICOH unique portions such as;
Private Hardware system (Details of Hardware; Model names, Total Counter)

MIB
Function (Details of each unique function varied by the option(s)
added to the machine; Duplex, Thick Paper Printing, etc.*3)
Toner*4 (Indicates volume of Toner by graphical bars)

*1.All information is embedded in the Controller and NIC/NIB.
*2.One of the categories of worldwide MIB standards.
Notes *3.Information depends on what kinds of options are connected to the machine.
*4.This function is only available on GW products.
(For some products they may not work properly, due to hardware limitations.)
Interfaces
Ethernet ONLY
SmartNetMonitor does not support the following interface
- TokenRing Interface
- RS232C Interface
Due to technical problems which will cause serious network problems such as
terminating other network devices, RICOH has decided this Utility will not be
applicable to Token Ring NICs; NIC401-TR, NIC250-TR. Same as previous
Peripheral Manager (Aficio Manager 3.5))
52
Supported Models
Model Name (Development) Type of NIC / NIB
Aficio 401 SP-3 NIC 401-E
Aficio MP-01 V20 NIC 401-E
Aficio 200 / Aficio 250 AD-1 / -E NIC 250-E
Aficio 340 / 350 / 450 NAD 30/40 NIB 450-E
Aficio 550 / 650 SP-5 / 5L NIB 450-E
RICOH LASER AP2000 / AP1400 Stinger-P I Network Interface Board Type 2000
RICOH Colour Laser AP204 Pomelo Network Interface Board Type 204
RICOH Colour Laser AP305 Fresa-Win Network Interface Board Type 305
Aficio 150 / 180 Stinger-C NIB 185-E
Aficio 220 / 270 Russian-C NIB 185-E
Aficio AP2700 Russian-P NIB 185-E
Aficio AP3200 Russian-P II NIB 185-E
Aficio AP4500 Adonis -P NIB 450-E
Aficio FAX 5000L Kaiser 1 Network Interface Board Type 2000
Aficio Colour 3006 / 4006 / 4106 Win-A Colour Controller RC-200
Aficio Colour 3506 / 4506 Win-A+(Plus) Colour Controller RC-210
Aficio 551 / 700 (Peerless) Mojito C1b/C1c NIB 450-E
Aficio 850 / 1050 (Peerless) Bellini-C1a/ C1b NIB 450-E
Aficio AP2100 / AP1600 Stinger-P II Network Interface Board Type 2000
Aficio Colour 6010 / 6110 (EFI) PS-B Colour Controller E-800A
Aficio 551 / 700 (EFI) Mojito C1b/C1c EB-70
Aficio 850 / 1050 (EFI) Bellini-C1a/ C1b EB-105
RICOH Colour Laser AP306 Fresa Win+(Plus) Network Interface Board Type 306
Aficio Colour 6010 / 6110 (EFI) PS-A2 Colour Controller E-700
Aficio Colour 3506 / 4506 (EFI) PS-C2 Colour Controller E-310
Aficio AP2600 Model-KP1 Network Interface Board Type 2600
Aficio 1035 /1045 Model AC2 NIB-1045
Aficio AP3800C Model-J On Board (No NIC Option)
RICOH Colour Laser AP206 Pomelo-3 Network Interface Board Type 306
Aficio 1015 / 1018 Model Kir-C1 Network Interface Board Type 1080
Aficio 1085 / 1105 Bellini- C1c / C1d EB-105e
53
Versions Supported Versions by each machines

Model Name Version of CTL Version of NIC Version of Engine
Aficio 401 *1 V6.20 or higher *1
Aficio MP-01 *1 *1 *1
Aficio 200 / Aficio 250 *1 V6.21 or higher *1
Aficio 340 / 350 / 450 V1.59 or higher V2.25 or higher *1
Aficio 550 / 650 V1.73 or higher V2.31 or higher *1
RICOH LASER AP2000 / AP1400 V2.28.22 or higher V5.38or higher *1
RICOH Colour Laser AP204 V1.0.0 or higher V 3.7.5 or higher *1
RICOH Colour Laser AP305 V1.0.3 or higher V 3.7.7 or higher *1
Aficio 150 / 180 V1.2.0 or higher V3.9.2 or higher *1
Aficio 220 / 270 V1.2.0 or higher V3.9.2 or higher *1
Aficio AP2700 V1.2.0 or higher V3.9.2 or higher *1
Aficio AP3200 *1 *1 *1
Aficio AP4500 V0.66 or higher* V2.38 or higher *1
Aficio FAX 5000L *1 *1 *1
Aficio Colour 3006 / 4006 / 4106 *1 *1 *1
Aficio Colour 3506 / 4506 *1 *1 *1
Aficio 551 / 700 (Peerless) *1 *1 *1
Aficio 850 / 1050 (Peerless) *1 *1 *1
Aficio AP2100 / AP1600 *1 *1 *1
Aficio Colour 6010 / 6110 (EFI) *1 *1 *1
Aficio 551 / 700 (EFI) *1 *1 *1
Aficio 850 / 1050 (EFI) *1 *1 *1
RICOH Colour Laser AP306 *1 *1 *1
Aficio AP2600 *1 *1 *1
Aficio 1035 /1045 *1 *1 *1
Aficio AP3800C *1 *1 *1
RICOH Colour Laser AP206 *1 *1 *1
Aficio 1015 / 1018 *1 *1 *1
Aficio 1085 / 1105 *1 *1 *1
*Note The versions indicate that RICOH has tested in the Product Test to see if
SmartNetMonitor as well as the previous Aficio Manager will operate
correctly (Most of them are the first mass-production versions)
*1.Any versions from mass-production are OK.
54
Common Limitations to System
Support to EFI NICs:
As with the previous version of Aficio Manager, SmartNetMonitor will support all products
such as MFP, LP (including GW products), Faxes and Scanners manufactured by Ricoh. Thus,
SmartNetMonitor supports models connected by any NICs, NIBs (RICOH, DPI and Emulex)
and CTLs produced by Ricoh.
Please note that this product will not support most EFI products. SmartNetMonitor (as with
Aficio Manager 3.5) only supports EFI products from and after E-800A (PS-B).
Support to competitive products
SmartNetMonitor is able to retrieve status information from competitive products such as HP,
Lexmark, etc. based on their standard MIB portion (No access to their private portion).
Note: Ricoh cannot guarantee the status information of SmartNetMonitor retrieved from
competitive products (RICOH-OEM products are excluded, they are treated in the same way as
RICOH products.)
The network load of SmartNetMonitor
As SmartNetMonitor (as well as the previous Aficio Manager 3.5) is resident software, it is
necessary to explain whether SmartNetMonitor affects the local resources of the Client (as well
as the Admins) PC.
Test results for Network Load Ratio of SmartNetMonitor for Client
Testing conditions
An environment of 50 MFPs and LPs used by approx. 20 30 people. One MFP or LP to be

monitored by approx. 20 30 people at a time.
Testing results
The Network Load of SmartNetMonitor only increased 1% during the test (Default setting of
monitoring was set at every 10sec. for each target device(s))
55
Usually, when the Network Load Ratio increases up to 30%, the response of the entire Network
drops so severely that devices (PCs and devices) do not work properly.
In conclusion, we can state that SmartNetMonitor does not harm the entire Network if it is used
under the conditions listed above.
The above testing was carried out under the management of RICOH Designing Section (System
Product Designing Section).
Localisation
SmartNetMonitor will support the following languages:
Product Module Languages

English, French, German, Italian,
14 Spanish, Dutch, Norwegian, Hungarian,
Admin Module Czech, Polish, Portuguese, Danish,
Swedish, Finnish
English, French, German, Italian,
SmartNetMonitor 14 Spanish, Dutch, Norwegian, Hungarian,
Client Module Czech, Polish, Portuguese, Danish,
Swedish, Finnish
NST for English, French, German, Italian,
Emulex*1 , DPI, RICOH 14 Spanish, Dutch, Norwegian, Hungarian,
(Bundled in Admin Czech, Polish, Portuguese, Danish,
portion) Swedish, Finnish
*1: NST for Emulex is only available in the following languages; English, French,
German, Italian
56
PCSM Product Information Guide
PRODUCT
INFORMATION GUIDE
Printer Cost & Security Manager 2.5

and the specifications are subject to change. If in doubt or further
details are required, please contact NRGI Guernsey.
1
Introduction
Printing costs are much higher than many companies realise. Web printing, the proliferation of
colour printing and unrestricted access to network printers are all factors that are causing a rapid
growth of printing costs. Hardcopy cost management software is designed to help managers and
administrators control printing and copying costs by regulating and reducing hardcopy
volumes, especially on high-cost printers. By implementing such a system, an organisation can
easily save 15 to 20% of hardcopy costs.
Printer Cost & Security Manager (PCSM) is an advanced network print tracking solution that
enables users to monitor, measure and manage all network printing and copying activity.
simplifies the management of printers and both digital and analogue copiers;
offers flexible methods to charge printing costs incurred by users and
offers a powerful solution for hardcopy Total Cost of Ownership management by tracking
usage patterns, collecting copier data, and helping to identify the costs associated with
printer and copier management.
PCSM 2.5 is an important product in the Network Printing Control & Management Solutions
range we offer. It fits seamlessly in NRGs strategy to offer our customers a total solution for all
their document needs. It allows them to measure, manage, allocate and charge output costs
related to our (networked) output devices. Additionally, PCSM can be used as a consultancy
tool to help customers design their optimal output strategy, maximising the utilisation of their
network printing resources.
Objectives
The objectives for launching Printer Cost & Security Manager 2.5 are:
To increase the number of (connected) NRG network printing devices installed in the
market;
To complement NRGs offering in the network printing range with a solution for output
cost management by facilitating control over network printing costs and loads, facilitating
control over copying costs and loads and offering a Total Cost of Ownership model for
network printing and copying;
To complement NRGs offering in vertical markets with a solution that fulfils a requirement
in those segment, where needed using specific additional functionality like Client Billing,
Secure Printing and/or Credit Printing and
Promote a consultative selling approach to increase connected Aficio product sales by
providing sales people with a powerful and professional consultancy selling tool.
2
Product Overview
Introduction
Because networks often consist of a diverse collection of legacy hardware and software, it is
difficult to find an effective way of tracking and recovering print resource costs.
Printer Cost & Security Manager (PCSM) 2.5 helps customers audit and manage the cost of
networked resources by tracking printer usage on an individual or group basis. Also it provides
the infrastructure on which customers can build a secure environment for managing sensitive
documents.
Any automated accounting system must be able to identify consumers, measure resource use,
calculate costs and record transactions at the time of sale. A good accounting system will also
provide customers with an audit trail that classifies and summarises data in a way that meets the
information needs of their decision makers. PCSM 2.5 performs these tasks, and more.
Printer Cost & Security Manager can accommodate a number of accounting models, including
strategies for quota and charge-back cost-recovery. Its administrator and end-user features are
designed for flexibility and ease-of-use.
Because PCSM fully integrates with the Windows printing subsystem, it provides a secure
environment for network printing. It monitors all use of networked resources, prevents
unauthorised users from accessing them and restricts use to administrator-defined limits.
Printer Cost & Security Manager 2.5 is a network printing management product that manages
hardcopy Total Cost of Ownership in multi- vendor and multi-platform printing environments.
The attributes it manages are hardcopy costs of network printing, desktop printing, walk-up
copying and stand-alone copying.
PCSM is a server-based modular application running on a Windows NT/2000 server, while also
supporting other network environments, like NetWare and Unix. As an application, PCSM is
very robust and scalable, ranging from a small installation consisting of a single print-server
and few network printers to large installations with tens of multi-platform print servers,
hundreds of network printers and thousands of users.
How does Printer Cost & Security Manager 2.5 work ?
PCSM is a server-based software consisting of several independent and co-operating server

components (Accounting Server service, SoftwareMetrics print monitor and the accounts
database). As a package, these components enable customers to measure, monitor, manage,
control and charge for printer usage on the network. PCSMs distributed architecture is
designed for scalability, robustness and low administrator maintenance. The management
applications offer centralised configuration of the server components and an intuitive interface
to the accounts database. Client software is not needed, although PCSM includes two end-user
applications that can be added on any network workstation. These applications allow users to
query account balances, assign billing codes and transfer funds.
The Core Components
The core components of PCSM (the Accounting Server service and the SoftwareMetrics print
3
monitor) are installed on the Windows NT/Windows 2000 server. The accounts database must
be located on the accounting server.
The Accounting Server is a service that verifies users, calculates printing charges and
assigns those charges to an appropriate user or group account. Accounting Server calculates
charges using page count and job attribute information received form the print monitor,
along with printer cost defined by the administrator. It then updates account balances and
writes the transaction information to the accounts database.
There is one database for each Accounting Server service. The database stores all printer,
user, departme nt, billing code, transaction and balance information. The database can be
either a JET, SQL Server or Oracle database, although only the JET-database comes as a
standard with the package. The Accounts Manager application is used to modify account
and transaction information in the database. This subset of the larger database is referred to
as the accounts database.
The Software Metric Print Monitor manages communications with the physical printing
devices on the network. It prevents unauthorised users from accessing the printers without
paying for their use. In addition, the print monitor counts the number of pages in each print
job, and assesses job attributes, such as colour, page, size, so that this detailed information
can be sent back to the Accounting Server service. At the accounting server, accurate
printing charges are calculated from this data and charges are assigned to the proper
account.
Print job is SM Print Monitor queries the

Network Accounting Server for valid user
initiated
Client account and sufficient funds.
On completion of the print job,
SM Print Monitor the print monitor will report that
intercepts the print the job was successful.
data
SM Print
Accounting
Monitor Server Service
AS queries the
database for all user
Not Authorized account information,
Authorized and also records
transaction information
Based on the after a successful print
PAS
information found
job
by AS in the Database
database, the print
job is either sent to e le
S c t
the printer, or
S D
discarded.
11x 81/2
11 x17
4
The server components work together in the following way:
The SoftwareMetrics Print Monitor performs the measuring function. It communicates with
the attached printers to determine the size and attributes of each print job, then passes this
information back to the Accounting Server. Because the SoftwareMetrics print monitor is
fully integrated with the Windows printing environment, the result is high-accuracy page
counts and high printing throughput on the network.
The Accounting Server works with the print monitor to track the use of the defined network
printers. When a print request is received, the print monitor checks with the Accounting
Server to ensure that the user who sent the request has a valid printing account. Accounting
Server, in turn, checks the accounts database for the administrator-defined list of users with
valid printing accounts. Once the job has completed printing, Accounting Server records
use in the accounts database.
All PCSM Accounting Server components work together to help customers managing their
print costs. PCSM can be set up to conform to a number of accounting models. By setting
up printing accounts for users and groups and assigning to printers, customers can recover
resources based on printer use.
Besides the server components, PCSM provides applications for managing network printing.
Two of these applications, System Manager and Accounts Manager, can be installed on any
server or workstation on your network. Cashier is designed for use on a workstation with
restricted access.
The System Manager is a tool for configuring and managing the PCSM Accounting Server
components and SoftwareMetrics Print Monitor.
System Manager has an interface similar to Windows Explorer, with expandable and
collapsible menus.
While it is used mainly to configure system components (like printer registrations, printer
port configurations, selecting page count methods and licensing), System Manager also
allows customers to:
o Assign costs to individual printers;
o Create and assign printer charging schedules;
o Select special no-charge and no-limit status for groups;
o Customise user notification messages and pop-ups and
o View event messages from the accounting server and the print monitor.
The Accounts Manager is a tool that allows customers to manage users, department, and
billing code accounts in the accounts database, including the set up of accounting rules and
charging schedules for advanced job attribute charging. It also includes a scheduling
function that allows customers to set up recurring events in the accounts database, such as
account transactions, database archives and automatic reports.
PCSM 2.5 contains a comprehensive reporting facility, the Reports Manager, that allows
customers to produce reports on accounts, account activity and printer use on a yearly,
quarterly, monthly, bi- weekly, weekly, daily or custom basis. Reports can be saved in
HTML- format to make them accessible through a web-browser. Customers can use these
reports to recover costs, to identify patterns of use by individuals or departments, or to
identify the load on a particular printing device. By generating a set of appropriate reports,
customers can demonstrate areas of organisational strength or system wide problems.
The tool displays a preview of the report allowing easy selection of the correct report, with
the column headers being customisable. When the administrator chooses to execute a
certain report, the Report Manager queries the database for the most current information.
5
The Reports Customisation Tool allows administrators to change the look of the reports.
Report titles, window titles, headers, standard report page text, footers and column headings
can be customised to specific needs. A bitmap picture (such as the customers logo) can also
be included as a standard.
Aficio Counter Manager has been developed to provide the total output volume (copy, print
and fax) for the NRG Aficio-devices, per defined period, based on the actual counter
information. Also, Aficio Counter Manager feeds serial number information back to the
system, making it a valuable tool for organisations and/or departments that are managing
large installed bases of machines, even when they are in separate locations (as long as these
are connected through a Wide Area Network).
Based on the data gathered by Aficio Counter Manager, 15 reports, not available in the
standard SoftwareMetrics PAS- version can be generated.
The Cashier is a small application that is designed for use by staff members who have a role
in managing account balances. Cashier allows customers to add and subtract funds from
user accounts.
Finally, there are workstation applications within PCSM, which can be installed on the network
workstations as necessary.
Desktop Printing: this tool is installed on the workstation to track printing to a

non-networked, local printer. The print job transaction is recorded in the database, as if it is
networked. This allows customers to include these desktop printers in their charging and
evaluation of print costs. With this feature, Client Billing (see Add-ons) will also work on
desktop printers. Desktop Printing is standard in Printer Cost & Security Manager 2.5, but is
an option for the SoftwareMetrics PAS- version.
The Client Tool is an end- user application that allows users to view their printing account
balances, transfer funds between printing accounts and select a default billing code for their
jobs.
The Web Tool is also an end- user application, with which users can access their accounts
from remote workstations using a web browser. They can transfer funds to another account,
view their account balance and select a default billing code for their print jobs.
Deposit Station: Deposit Station is a workstation add-on that allows network users to
deposit funds from an existing payment card system to a PCSM account. Deposit Station
has a simple interface and eliminates the need for staff to supervise simple account deposits.
Analysis Toolkit: This is a powerful tool used to examine the data gathered by Printer Cost
& Security Manager. The toolkit allows customers or NRG Sales Consultants to create
scenarios and manipulate print variables to forecast changes in printing behaviour, printing
costs and usage rates. This will add customers or NRG Sales Consultants in designing a
print strategy that will increase the customer's efficiency. Alternative scenarios can be
saved on disk, to allow off-site analysis. There is also a separate, additional Analysis Tool
that is NRG specific. This additional tool can be used to investigate further a customers
output environment.
Deployment Tool: This tool allows NRG as the provider and integrator of the solution to
prepare the implementation and configuration of PCSM off-site. All the accounts, billing
codes, charging models, etc. can be prepared off-site and then installed at the customers
site in one, easy operation, without much interruption of a customers printing environment.
6
The Add-ons
Besides the core components, mentioned above, there are add-on software modules that
integrate with them. Each add-on is licensed separately. There are two categories of add-ons:
Print Servers: As a standard, Printer Cost & Securit y Manager 2.5 supports one Windows
NT4, Windows 2000, Novell NetWare or Unix print server. In case a customer wants to
install additional print servers on his network, the Print Server add-on is required.
By default, an Accounting Server is also a print server. However, an administrator might
choose to distribute the activity associated with network printing depending on the number
of users, physical layout of the network and physical location of the print devices. Setting
up remote print servers helps to distribute network traffic, limit bottlenecks and increase
response times. PCSM printers may also be available through an Intranet or Internet
connection.
Services:
o Client Billing Services: The Client Billing service is a client-server software add-on that
provides print-time billing code selection functionality. Client Billing makes project
resource management easy by prompting users to assign billing codes when they print
their document. Client Billing can be used when printing from a Windows NT,
Windows 2000 or Novell Netware environment, but not with Unix print servers;
o MacIntosh Services: This service provides comprehensive printing management
services for mixed Windows-MacIntosh environments. It eliminates the need for third
party software to ensure authenticated printing from MacIntosh workstations to the
Windows server. Additionally, MacIntosh Services allow customers to assign printing
costs to user accounts or billing codes at print time;
o Secure Document Release Services: This module adds document control capabilities on
a print server where the SoftwareMetrics Print Monitor is installed. When SDR is
installed, documents sent to the print server are held in a proprietary queue until they are
released using one of two remote mechanisms: hardware (NTS device) or software
(Release Station, see below) and
o NTS services: These services manage Network Transaction Station (NTS) devices on a
customers network. NTS devices are vending units that control access to either copiers,
printers or both copiers and printers. NTS Services interface with the Accounting Server
service so that vending activity at NTS devices can be tracked in the database.
When NTS Services are installed without the Secure Document Release add-on, NTS
devices can control access to copiers only. When installed with the add-on, a single
NTS-device can control access to both copiers and printers.
Another feature provided by the NTS Services is My Print, in the market also known
as follow- me printing. A customers user has the ability to pull a print job queued for
output on one device to another device and collect it there. To do so, the customer needs
to have the NTS services running and needs to identify Printer Pull and Release Groups
in the Systems Manager. When creating these printer pull groups, it is necessary to
ensure that the destination printer is compatible with all of the printers in the pull group.
Workstation components:
o Release Station: this add-on allows customers to set up a network workstation as a point
of controlled document release. Using Release Station, network users can release to the
printer documents that are held on an SDR-enabled print server.
In the former version of PCSM, 2.1, there was an additional set of add-on software modules that
were related to the print server (Netware Print Server and Unix Print Server). These add-ons
have now been integrated in the core components and come as a standard with PCSM 2.5.
7
Product Features & Benefits
Benefits
Printer Cost & Security Manager 2.5 provides many customer benefits. It is known as an
excellent leading-edge hardcopy cost management system that is designed to suit the needs of
customers in diverse computing environments. The following are the benefits PCSM offers:
Transparency: the system is not intrusive, time-consuming nor does it require any extra
training for the end-user. It offers the benefit of being server-based, thereby greatly
reducing the workload of the network administrator and being completely invisible to
end-users. Also, PCSM does not demand expensive client-side software or extra
configuration requirements.
Ease and flexibility: PCSM 2.5 provides the tools both to manage the accumulated
hardcopy data and to produce comprehensive reports. It collects and integrates data about
printing and copying, it includes a wide variety of reporting options to fit different
information requirements and it summarises detailed information into a manageable form.
When charging or allocating costs, Printer Cost & Security Manager offers a flexible
amount of accounts, billing codes or departments to be used, while it also supports a wide
variety of cost recovery strategies.
Connectivity: a companys printing environment may include several different Operating
Systems and various hardware devices of different makes and models, including plotters.
Printer Cost & Security Manager 2.5 is flexible enough to track users at all workstations
using all printing and copiers.
Scalability: PCSM works with any number of print servers and in multiple locations, while
maintaining a centralised management facility for easy administration. PCSM is
upgradeable in order to grow with the customers company.
Features
The following features are well-known in both the current (2.5) and former version (2.1) of
Printer Cost & Security Manager:
Full Windows security integration

Complete audit trail of all transactions
Support for unlimited printers
Synchronous page counting mechanism
User account query/transfer capability
Windows domain import/verify
Scalability to multiple print servers
Support for Microsoft SQL Server
Extended job pricing schedules
Account management for multiple sites
Desktop Print monitor (Desktop Server)
8
The following features are new to PCSM 2.5:
Printer Subsystem:
o Additional Printer Language Support: CPCA, LIPS, ESC/Page;
o Support for IIP Printing;
o Support of pricing for folding;
o Support of pricing based on job-size;
Client Billing:
o Additional billable non-billable checkbox in pop-up;
o Support of pop-ups when printing to NetWare support;
o Support of pop-ups when printing to desktop printers;
o Option to disable Client Billing pop-up on a per-printer basis;
Wizards:
o Enhanced Configuration Wizard;
o Windows 2000 TCP/IP port support in Printer Conversion Wizard;
o Card swipe Wizard support for low-cost keyboard wedge card readers;
System Manager:
o All installed software versions can be reviewed using the System Manager;
o System Manager can stop and re-start services;
NTS:
o Support for existing XCP devices;
Accounts Manager:
o Import users from Microsofts Active Directory or Novells NDS;
o Verify users against Microsofts Active Directory or Novells NDS;
o Run now capability for scheduled events;
Reports Manager:
o Improved report selection interface;
o More than 70 reports, such as comparative reports versus previous year, quarter or
month, time-of-day device usage reports and billable non-billable reports;
o Save reports as HTML;
o Ability to customise report and column headings;
o Ability to specify a custom logo in reports;
Analysis Toolkit:
o Scenario manager for creating what if scenarios;
o Comparison of actual costs with scenarios;
Internal Web Server:
o A built- in web-server for easier installation and support;
o User account statements available through the web-server;
Others:
o ODBC database interface for a smaller download, reduced re-boot requirements and
improved supportability;
o Deposit Station included as a standard interface;
o Workstation licenses will be required for Client Billing
9
Product Functions
Printer Cost & Security Manager 2.5 provides the following primary functions
Printing cost management, containment and recovery tool
Printer Cost & Security Manager can be used by many organisations to manage network
printing costs, user quota, printer access, and/or to optimise the usage of hardcopy resources. Its
comprehensive charging system enables administrators to set prices for, and accurately charge
for all printing activities on the network. This allows organisations to control or recover their
printing costs, whether from users, departments or from their own clients or customers.
Network printing management
Where cost management is not the overriding concern for the organisation, Printer Cost &
Security Manager is typically used to manage the overall network printing environment. Using
a combination of the cost reporting and printer usage reporting, network administrators can
begin to understand the printing patterns, printer usage and consumable use within their
organisation. Once this information is understood, it is then possible for the organisation to
either optimise its printing activities, or to switch to the cost containment option.
Customer billing tool
PCSM can generate monthly reports for billing customers on a cost-per-page basis. The reports
can be automatically e-mailed at the end of the month to an accounting department to be
imported by billing and invoicing software packages. The Client Billing add-on is required to
make this function available.
The Client Billing add-on uses billing codes to charge back print jobs. Client Billing prompt
users at their workstation for a billing code each time they attempt to print a document. Billing
codes can be applied to a project, a customer number or an internal tracking account.
Client Billing also allows a user to distinguish between billable and non-billable printing for the
billing code the user has entered. The PCSM Accounting Server tracks usage by billing code for
effective cost recovery through integrated reporting and billing code account statements.
Using the Reports Manager, administrators can produce comprehensive reports, accurately
illustrating printing activity for billing code. Scheduled reports can be automatically e-mailed
in CSV-format for accounting personnel for easy import into existing accounting applications.
Other add-ons and modules, like the NTS device (for tracking walk-up copying), MacIntosh
Services (to enable identical functionality on MacIntosh workstations) and Desktop Printing (to
use billing codes for desktop printing on Windows-based workstations) integrate seamlessly
with Client Billing
Secure Document Release
Secure printing is a very important application in environments where the confidentiality of the
documents has to be maintained. PCSM can allow for documents only to be released if the
appropriate code is entered via the Network Transaction Station, connected to the print server.
A workstation-based document release station can be used as an alternative solution. The
Secure Print add-on is required to make this function available.
10
Pre-sales investigation - analysis and consultancy tool
PCSM can be used to collect data on network printing usage prior to selling hardware or
software to the end user. The software can be installed on a 45-day free trial license, which
incorporates about 45 standard reports covering almost any aspect of network printing. Printing
costs and usage pattern reports can subsequently be used to analyse the customers printing
environment to offer the best printing solutions to them. The customer would usually find one
of the other functions a sufficient motivator to purchase the software as well.
The following table demonstrates which PCSM add-ons are required for specific application:
Print Accounting Copy Accounting Secure Document Release

CORE S/W
DEMO S/W Demo/Eval. only Demo/Eval. only Demo/Eval. only
NTS
Secure
Document
Release
Release Station (only if release station used)
11
Supported Devices
Printer Cost & Security Manager 2.5 provides a multi- vendor platform for measuring, tracking
and allocating printer costs. The version marketed by NRG has, as a special feature, to increase
the accuracy and completeness of the collection of printer data, Aficio Counter manager
included. The following products from the NRG product range are evaluated on their
compatibility with Printer Cost & Security Manager 2.5 and Aficio Counter Manager (the list of
tested models will be updated regularly):
Product PCSM 2.5 Aficio Counter Manager

B&W Multi-functional
DMR15S/18S 4
DMR15/18 4 4
DMR20/25 4
DMR22/27 4 4
DMR35A/45A 4
DMR35/S/45 4 4
DMR40 4
DMR55/65 4 4
DMR55A/70A 4
DMR85/105 4
EB105 4
B&W Printers
PMR14/20 4
PMR16/21 4
PMR26/N 4
PMR32 4
PMR45 4 4
PMR45A 4
Colour Copiers
CCR031/32/36 4
CCR060 4
CCR060A/62A 4
CCR066/A 4
CCR132 4
Colour Printers
PCR6 4
PCR5P 4
PCR6W/DW 4
12
System Requirements
Accounting Server
Operating System Windows NT4, Windows 2000
Hardware Requirements IBM Compatible
Intel Pentium 200MHz or faster
64MB RAM or more
30MB RAM Harddisk space available
Print Server
Operating System Windows NT4, Windows 2000,
Novell NetWare 4.x, 5.x (with NPDS)
Sun Solaris 7, 8
RedHat Linux 6.x, 7.x
Hardware Requirements IBM Compatible
Intel Pentium 200MHz or faster
64MB RAM or more
100MB RAM Harddisk space available
TCP/IP Networking
Workstation
Operating System Windows 3.x, for Workgroups 3.x
Windows 95/98/Me
Windows NT 3.x/4, Windows 2000
Unix
Apple MacIntosh 8.x, 9.x
(requires MacIntosh add-on)
Printers
Printer Query PJL, NPA
Printer Language PostScript Level 1, 2, PostScript 3
PCL6 (PC XL) 1.1, 2.0
PCL5, 5e, 5c, 4, 3, 3+
HP-GL, HP-GL2
Ricoh IPDL-C, RPS2
Canon LIPS
Epson ESC/PageP, ESCP/P2
Printer Emulations Canon BubbleJet
IBM Proprinter
Genicom LinePrinter
Text
Printing Devices NRG devices
HP LaserJet devices
All other PCL5, 6 & PostScript devices
Printer Connectivity NRG NIBs
JetDirect adapters
All other LPR-compatible adapters
Document Information Time, date, User, account, printer, number of

pages, paper size, media type, input tray,
duplexing, finishing (staple, punch, fold)
13
Market Situation
In this chapter, a brief description of the changes that have occurred in the networked, hardcopy
output market will be presented.
Driving Forces
The traditional copier and printer market has changed dramatically over the last couple of years.
The major driving forces behind these changes have been:
The proliferation of the Internet/Intranet:

Since the early 90s, the Internet has taken off. Every company has a basic networking
infrastructure in place by now, while most of them have direct access to the web. The result
of this is that all mid-range and high-end hardcopy devices will be networked. This not only
enhances a companys productivity and efficiency by the sharing of resources, but also
introduces new issues, like document security, where confidential documents could become
readily accessible to everyone from the networked output device.
Windows Operating System Dominance:
After a slow start, Windows has established itself as the leading network operating system
for the corporate office environment, overtaking Novells NetWare.
Windows NT4 has been a huge success, offering the stability and functionality required
from a heavily used Operating System, while it is expected that with the introduction of
Windows 2000 this dominant position will only be reinforced. It is safe to say that Windows
NT/2000 is emerging as the de facto standard for network printing.
Convergence of hardcopy devices and colour proliferation:
Stand-alone copiers, printers and faxes are replaced by multifunctional devices in the office
environment. With the price of colour devices coming down and the forthcoming
introduction of hybrid colour black & white models, it is safe to assume that colour
functionality will be more widespread through the office environment, leading (on average)
to an increase of the output costs.
New purchasing models:
The connection of the hardcopy output devices to the corporate network changes their
position: from a stand-alone device they become system peripherals, meaning that different
people will be involved in the decision making, e.g. IT- managers and network
administrators. This means that the selling method will change, towards a model that also
addresses concerns of these important players in the decision making unit, like scalability,
stability and manageability.
Market Overview
Printing costs are much higher than many companies realise. Web printing, the proliferation of
colour printing, and unrestricted access to network printers are all factors that are causing a
rapid growth of printing costs. Printing cost management software is designed to help managers
and administrators control printing costs by regulating and reducing printing volumes,
especially on high-cost colour printers. By implementing such a system, an organisation can
easily save 15 to 20% of printing costs.
The paperless office is a myth: by the year 2002, the yearly usage is expected to jump to one
and a half times that! (Lyra Research)!
14
With more pages being printed, the variable costs of printing are rapidly rising. The printing
cost equation is made up of the fixed hardware costs and the variable costs of printing each page.
Over the past few years, the bulk of total printing costs has shifted dramatically towards
variable costs. Printing hardware costs are no longer the major part of the printing investment.
The continuous fall in hardware prices gave the illusion of declining printing costs. But in
reality companies spend a lot of money on the variable costs of printing.
Two factors now affect the variable-to-fixed cost relationship:
Falling Colour Printer Prices

Printing hardware prices have dropped dramatically over the past few years. These colour
printers, although cheaper than they used to be, have high variable costs per page. Many
companies taking advantage of the low initial investment do not realise colour printings
effect on total printing costs until it is too late.
Rising Consumable Costs

Today, consumable costs make up more of the total printing costs then ever before. People
are printing more pages on each printer, and the average cost per page is increasing due to
the proliferation of costly colour printing. There are three main reasons for the comparative
increase in consumable costs:
Networked printers: now several employees share one printer, causing it to be used
more heavily. This is an excellent way to save on hardware costs, but many companies
do not realise the danger of assuming that printing costs are falling. Just as much output
is generated, and consumable costs are just as expensive as before. In fact, because it is
now easier to print a hardcopy at the nearest networked printer; more pages are printed,
increasing consumable costs.
Colour printing also changes the total printing cost equation. Printing a colour page
costs considerably more than printing a page in black and white. With more colour
printers being purchased and networked, it is easier for employees to print these
expensive colour pages. Unrestricted access to colour printers often leads to more
colour printing, which has noticeably increased the average cost per page. Many
documents that would have been printed in black and white, like drafts and department
reports, are now being printed in colour. Many companies also print colour logos on the
bottom of pages as well as printing more colour overheads for presentations.
Web printing: the volume and variety of information on the Internet increases daily.
Although the information is available on the screen, many people feel the need to read
and analyse information on paper, so they print hardcopies of all relevant information.
This is greatly increasing the number of pages printed, where before only the
information needed would be photocopied from a single hardcopy.
Up-front hardware costs no longer make up the bulk of printing costs, as consumable costs are
quickly exceeding the purchase price of network printers. With consumable costs quickly
becoming a greater proportion of total printing costs, companies need to find a way to contain
and control them.
With the increase in hardcopies being printed, one might expect the amount of copying to go
down. This is true, although on an absolute basis, the copy volume in the market only declines
very slowly, remaining an important part of the total hardcopy/output costs. Companies will
look to manage and control this volume as well.
Hardcopy cost management software can help customers to manage their output costs by
15
limiting or charging for printer and copier use. They can use several methods to recover or
contain costs:
Full Cost Allocation:

This method allows a company to allocate costs to employees, departments or even projects
according to their printing policy. The charges for different types of printed or copied
output are decided when the system is implemented. This allows departments to budget
their printing and copying usage and fully control these costs. This method is an excellent
way to implement activity-based accounting of hardcopy costs that would otherwise be
allocated manually.
Partial Cost Allocation:

With this system, a company determines an initial quota of pages that will be allotted to an
employee or a department, free of charge. After they have used their quota, they cannot
print or copy more pages without incurring additional costs. This method is useful where
activity centres are charged for fixed and variable hardcopy costs separately. A customer
can allow a certain number of printouts or copies free of variable charges, based on the
portion of fixed costs that the centre bears. Centres will be more inclined to make accurate
estimates of printer and copier usage when buying new hardware in order to avoid variable
hardcopy costs.
Cost Containment:
Each employee or department is only allowed to print or copy a specified number of pages,
after which no pages will be accepted until the quota is reset. A company may decide to
reset quotas automatically every month, week or even every day. This method is useful
when a company wants to prevent employees from printing indiscriminately.
The hardcopy cost management a company chooses is dependent on their overall objectives and
policies. A software application needs to be able to support all these scenarios, while NRG
could act as a consultant to decide together with the customer which allocation method will
meet their requirements the best.
16
Competitive landscape
Hardcopy cost containment has received a lot of interest from the major players in the 'Office
Automation market. Being relatively close to the core business, many vendors have
developed or sourced solutions that allow them to offer a solution to their customers.
With the take-over of SoftwareMetrics by EquiTrack, on the supply-side a huge concentration

has taken place, meaning that many vendors do have Printer Accounting Server 2.5 in their
portfolio of solutions.
However, it should be remembered that Printer Accounting Server and Printer Cost & Security
Manager are not the same product. Although they share the same core, Printer Cost & Security
Manager features some aspects that are unique to NRG/Ricoh:
Aficio Counter Manager is included, offering serial number and counter-based volume
feedback (copy, print and fax) of Aficio-devices through a Wide Area Network, allowing
for central resource management;
Desktop Printing is standard;
Deployment Tool is included and
Additional Analysis Tool is included.
Competitive products
Currently, there are several competitive products available in the market. Some of these
products are part of a network printing management suite, while others are specifically
designed to offer volume monitoring, cost allocation and charging and security:
Specifically designed products:
JAS: a highly modular solution that offers functionality very similar to PCSM 2.5. It
looks very similar to PCSM 2.5, but the integration with Windows is less advanced.
Currently, it is being offered by Minolta as part of their Partner Programme;
Safecom: this well-designed solution from I-Data has a lot of functionality in
common with PCSM 2.5. Its is designed in the form of a hardware-box, looking very
attractive. It is included in the portfolio of Lanier, Minolta, Konica and Toshiba;
Vendor-specific solutions:
PageRouter: a Canon-solution by SoftwareMetrics, that offers a less-specified
PAS-version in an appliance concept, a small server with 10 connections that can be
fitted into a rack, ready to go;
NetSpotAccountant: as an add-on to the NetSpot network printing management suite
from Canon, this solution offers basic volume tracking and allocation;
MarkTrack: this add-on module to Lexmarks MarkVision Professional offers
extended cost allocation, but is limited to Lexmark products;
JetAdmin: this HP network printing management application has a reasonably
well-specified volume monitoring and allocation function as a standard.
17
The table below shows a comparison of the main features.
Specialised products Included versions

PCSM 2.5 JAS Safecom MarkTrack JetAdmin
Compatibility
Hardware
Copiers 4 4 4 0 0
Printers 4 4 4 4 4
Faxes 4 0 0 0 0
Software
PDLs 4 4 4 4 4
MIBs 4 4 4 4 4
LPT-capture 4 4 0
Network
OS 4 4 4 4 4
Protocols 4 4 4 4 4
Peer-to-peer 4 0 0 0 4
LAN 4 4 4 4 4
WAN 4 4 4 4 4
User Friendliness
Web-client 4 0 4 4 4
Web-admin 0 0 0 4 4
Wizards 4 0 0 4 4
Multiple charging models 4 4 4 4
Rule-based printing 4 4 0 4
Secure printing 4 4 4 0 4
Deposit station 4 4 4 0 0
Follow- me printing 4 4 0 0 0
Reporting
Automated reports 4 4 4 4 4
Distribution of reports 4 4 4 4 4
Error status reports 0 0 0 4 4
Customisable reports 4 4 4 4 0
Invoice format 0 0 0 0 0
Audit trails 4 4 0 0 4
Export to spreadsheet 4 4 4 4 4
Graphs 0 4 4 0 4
Administration
Printer settings 4 0 4 4 4
Login names 4 4 4 4 4
Queue management 0 4 0 4 4
Problem solving 0 0 0 4 4
Scalability 4 4 4 4 4
Task scheduling 4 4 4 4 4
Analysis Tool 4 0 4 0 4
Trial version 4 4 4 0 4
18
Product Range & Positioning

Printer Cost & Security Manager 2.5 is an important product in the Network Printing Control
& Management Solutions range we offer. It fits seamlessly in NRGs strategy to offer our
customers a total solution for all their document needs. It allows them to measure, manage,
allocate and charge output costs related to our (networked) output devices. Additionally, PCSM
can be used as a consultancy tool to help customers design their optimal output strategy,
maximising the utilisation of their network printing resources.
Solutions Product Range

Plumeria
Oak
Doc-Q-Manager/CRD-PFP & Velocity

E Cabinet
ate
Document
Document
Network
Network
oth ssoluti ter/scc ax/rad opypr lour c opier/ orpor
and
and
Print
Print
Information
Information
mfp
Management
Management
c
Management
Management
and
Control
eerr
c
ooppii
PCSM / ACM
Document
err
co
iinntte
Host Printing
Solutions
neerr iiuuss
Document
c
Forms
Forms
d
Distribution
Processing
f
aannn
Workflow
Workflow
prin
ons
Formscape
ScanRouter
eerr
Forms 5 Cherry
Printer Cost & Security Manager 2.5 provides the following primary functions
Printing cost management, containment and recovery tool

Printer Cost & Security Manager can be used by many organisations to manage network
printing costs, user quota, printer access, and/or to optimise the usage of hardcopy
resources. Its comprehensive charging system enables administrators to set prices for, and
accurately charge for all printing activities on the network. This allows organisations to
control or recover their printing costs, whether from users, departments or from their own
clients or customers.
Network printing management
Where cost management is not the overriding concern for the organisation, Printer Cost &
Security Manager is typically used to manage the overall network printing environment.
Using a combination of the cost reporting and printer usage reporting, network
administrators can begin to understand the printing patterns, printer usage and consumable
use within their organisation. Once this information is understood, it is then possible for the
organisation to either optimise its printing activities, or to switch to the cost containment
option.
19
Customer billing tool

PCSM can generate monthly reports for billing customers on a cost-per-page basis. The
reports can be automatically e- mailed at the end of the month to an accounting department
to be imported by billing and invoicing software packages.
Secure printing is a very important application in environments where the confidentiality of
the documents has to be maintained. PCSM can allow for documents only to be released if
the appropriate code is entered via the Network Transaction Station, connected to the print
server. A workstation-based document release station can be used as an alternative solution.
Pre-sales investigation - analysis and consultancy tool
PCSM can be used to collect data on network printing usage prior to selling hardware or
software to the end user. The software can be installed on a 45-day free trial license, which
incorporates about 45 standard reports covering almost any aspect of network printing.
Printing costs and usage pattern reports can subsequently be used to analyse the customers
printing environment to offer the best printing solutions to them. The customer would
usually find one of the other functions a sufficient motivator to purchase the software as
well.
20
Target Customers & Channels

Market Segments
Academic Professional Corporate
High interest High interest Medium interest

Large
Large potential Large potential Very large potential

Mature market Maturing market Immature market
Medium
High interest High interest Medium interest

Medium potential Medium potential Large potential
Low interest Medium interest Low interest

Small
Small potential Small potential Small potential

Academic/educational (most mature market)
Includes universities, college s and primary/secondary schools

Already acknowledged a requirement for controlling printing costs
Usually have some NT servers
Needs to sell to IT managers and departments heads.
Primary use: Printing quotas or pre-paid printing for students
Professional (quickly maturing market)
Maturing with some global companies

Internal factor: Printing Cost recovery is a driving factor
External factor: Precise client billing and cost estimates
Need to sell to IT managers and Principals
Moving to NT servers
Already bills costs back to clients but needs better tools for tracking and reporting on
printing activities.
Primary use: Charging clients for documents produced for them
Market sub-segments :
Architectural and Engineering

Reprographics and Print Shops
Marketing and Advertising Agencies
Law and Accounting Firms
Real-estate offices
21
Corporate/government (largest market)
Includes corporations and general businesses, and government institutions of all types
Immature with many global companies - may not yet have acknowledged a need to control
costs
In many cases, the organisations know only that they consume large quantities of paper, but
have no further understanding
Factors: Operating Efficiencies, ISO, Security
Need to sell to IT managers, Business Mgrs, Purchasing
Almost all companies have some NT servers + UNIX and NetWare
Primary use: Managing and understanding network printing costs
Business Drivers by Market Segment
General Business Drivers
Companies that have a high cost-per-page printing

Need to have client-billing codes tied to print jobs, in order to generate detailed customer
billing statements
Need for audit trails for printers, security reasons, ISO standards or specific account reasons
such as controlling information leaks, such as in a pharmaceutical company controlling
their R&D information
Very often the purchasing of a new colour laser printer precipitates the need to look for a
printing management tool
Specific Points by Market Segment
Architectural/ Engineering Market
Large format printers are expensive to buy and run. Need PCSM to manage both the device
and consumables
Need a way to control end user, entering project codes every time plot files are printed.
These can than be allocated back to the appropriate project or department for billing
Project future printing costs and budget for them, across their entire network infrastructure
Reprographics Printing Market
This group needs to know print patterns at customer sites. This is used to bill back the
printing ticks correctly and also allows them know their clients print needs better then the
clients themselves. This is a great advantage when they come back to re-sell to the account
Files are often transferred back to the Reprographics Office for printing. Plot files (pages,
toner) need to be counted and billed back to hundreds of different accounts and across many
diverse printing devices. Some Printing Manufacturers have methods to track printing on
their own devices. They need a solution to work at the NT server level, with the ir varied
applications and print devices
22
Marketing Firms
Work with many of the graphics packages and different colour printers.
Many production runs for customers need to be captured and billed back to the respective
clients
Clients usually get miscellaneous billing statements for the printing done for them.
Billing statements are usually manually created by the IT group going through print logs
and associating these print jobs and costs, with client accounts
This process is both time consuming and prone to errors, which costs the accounts money
and ultimately customer satisfaction
Sales channels
PCSM 2.5 can be classified as a typical solution product, which requires close interaction with
customers, consultancy approach and good knowledge of printing environments. It is
recommended that PCSM is offered to a customer as one of the following:
Component of the complete solution: PCSM is regarded as a tool to sell more Aficio
products by allowing the sales consultants to prove that centralised networked Aficio
machines are the most cost effective solution for the customer. The complete solution
delivered consists of Aficio machines, PCSM software solution and consultancy, support
and other professional services.
In many cases the customer is not interested in the type of output devices he is buying. He
needs a complete solution, which allows him to deliver all printing to his organisation
efficiently and effectively. PCSM will monitor all printing and copying activities and
associate relevant printing and copying costs.
Consultancy tool - pre sales investigation: The trial- version can be used as a consultancy
tool to help NRG to sell more Aficio products. The PCSM-trial version installed on a
customer network will deliver extensive information about a customers printing
behaviour. The reports can be analysed by the NRG consultant and a cost saving scenario
including Aficio machines could be recommended.
Facilities management tool: for organisations providing facilities management services
PCSM will be the tool used internally to minimise printing cost, optimise the system and
maintain high profitability. In combination with Aficio Counter Manager, PCSM 2.5 offers
a powerful tool to manage large installed bases of Aficio devices, even remote ones, from
one central location.
These applications show that for NRG the direct channel is most suitable to sell PCSM.
However, it is possible to sell PCSM through the indirect channel, either using a similar
business model as described above (for advanced indirect partners) or as an off- the-shelf
product. Potential dealers/distributors will have to have high level of expertise in customer
printing environments particularly including Windows NT, TCP-IP and overall software
solution sales capability.
23

Printer Cost & Security Manager 2.5 provides many customer benefits. It is known as an
excellent leading-edge hardcopy cost management system that is designed to suit the needs of
customers in diverse computing environments. The following are the benefits PCSM offers:
Transparency: the system is not intrusive, time-consuming and does not require any extra
training for the end-user. It offers the benefit of being server-based, thereby greatly
reducing the workload of the network administrator and being completely invisible to
end-users. Also, PCSM does not demand expensive client-side software or extra
configuration requirements.
Ease and flexibility: PCSM 2.5 provides the tools both to manage the accumulated
hardcopy data and to produce comprehensive reports. It collects and integrates data about
printing and copying, it includes a wide variety of reporting options to fit different
information requirements and it summarises detailed information into a manageable form.
When charging or allocating costs, Printer Cost & Security Manager offers a flexible
amount of accounts, billing codes or departments to be used, while it also supports a wide
variety of cost recovery strategies.
Connectivity: a companys printing environment may include several different Operating
Systems and various hardware devices of different makes and models, including plotters.
Printer Cost & Security Manager 2.5 is flexible enough to track users at all workstations
using all printers and copiers.
Scalability: PCSM works with any number of print servers and in multiple locations, while
maintaining a centralised management facility for easy administration. PCSM is
upgradeable in order to grow with the customers company.
Features
The following features are well-known in both the current (2.5) and former version (2.1) of
Printer Cost & Security Manager:
Full Windows security integration

Synchronous page counting mechanism
User account query/transfer capability
Windows domain import/verify
Support for Microsoft SQL Server
Desktop Print monitor (Desktop Server)
The following features are new to PCSM 2.5:
Printer Subsystem:
Additional Printer Language Support: CPCA, LIPS, ESC/Page;
Support for IIP Printing;
Support of pricing for folding;
Support of pricing based on job-size;
24
Client Billing:
Additional billable non-billable checkbox in pop-up;
Support of pop-ups when printing to NetWare support;
Support of pop-ups when printing to desktop printers;
Option to disable Client Billing pop-up on a per-printer basis;
Wizards:
Enhanced Configuration Wizard;
Windows 2000 TCP/IP port support in Printer Conversion Wizard;
Card swipe Wizard support for low-cost keyboard wedge card readers;
System Manager:
All installed software versions can be reviewed using the System Manager;
System Manager can stop and re-start services;
NTS:
Support for existing XCP devices;
Accounts Manager:
Import users from Microsofts Active Directory or Novells NDS;
Verify users against Microsofts Active Directory or Novells NDS;
Run now capability for scheduled events;
Reports Manager:
Improved report selection interface;
More tha n 70 reports, such as comparative reports versus previous year, quarter or month,
time-of-day device usage reports and billable non-billable reports;
Save reports as HTML;
Ability to customise report and column headings;
Ability to specify a custom logo in reports;
Analysis Toolkit:
Scenario manager for creating what if scenarios;
Comparison of actual costs with scenarios;
Internal Web Server:

A built- in web-server for easier installation and support;
User account statements available through the web-server;
Others:
ODBC database interface for a smaller download, reduced re-boot requirements and
improved supportability;
Deposit Station included as a standard interface;
Workstation licenses will be required for Client Billing
25
Establish NRGs position as a company that can offer Total Document Solutions
To position PCSM as an integrated part of NRG's network printing management and control
solutions.
To create awareness of NRG's advanced network printing solutions.
To position PCSM 2.5 as the possible solution for specific customer requirements:
Client Billing
Credit Printing
26
Logistics
Codes
The following items can be ordered from NRG Distribution:
Short name Description

PASNTS Network Transaction Station
PCSM25NFR Printer Cost & Security Manager 2.5 Demo-version
PCSM25LIC Printer Cost & Security Manager 2.5 Full License
Note (1): EDP-code 923532 is only a license agreement. In order to install a full version of
Printer Cost & Security Manager 2.5 at the customer site, both 923530 (Demo-version) plus
923532 (License agreement) are required.
Note (2): The core application, the 45-day trial version and the Network Transaction Station
should be ordered and forecast on NRGD through the 'normal' logistic processes, using their
EDP-codes.
Note (3): When installing the core application or the 45-day trial version, the system will ask for
a key-code. This code can be obtained from the support area of the web-site
www.metrics.com/essc/ by entering the serial number of the software and the name of the
server the software will be installed on. The code will then be provided to you by email,
allowing you to complete the installation of the software.
Web-ordering
The following items are available from the SoftwareMetrics website (www.metrics.com):
Short name Description Remarks
Add-ons
PAS25PS Add-on Print Server License Additional license (Windows
NT4/2000, Netware, Unix)
PAS25MC Add-on MacIntosh Services
PAS25CB Add-on Client Billing Server Requires workstation licenses
License
PAS25SR Add-on Secure Document Release
PAS25RS Add-on Release Station Additional License
27
Client Billing Workstation Licenses

PAS25WS25 25 Workstation Licenses
PASWS500 500 Workstation Licenses
PAS25WSU Unlimited Workstation Licenses
Upgrade Products (from PCSM 2.x to PCSM 2.5)

PAS25COU Upgrade Core
PAS25MCU Upgrade MacIntosh Services
PAS25CBU Upgrade Client Billing Including 100 Workstation Licenses
PAS25PSU Upgrade Print Server
PAS25SDRU Upgrade Secure Document Release
Note (1): Options are available within the core-application, but have to be 'released'. First an
option will have to be ordered from the order area of the web-site www.metrics.com/essc/,
which will provide you by email with a serial number for the option. When installing, the serial
numbers of the core-software and the options plus the server name need to be entered on the
support area of the web-site. One key-code will be generated for the whole system, allowing
you to complete the installation.
Upgrading
Customers that have ordered PCSM 2.x between 1 October 2000 and 15 May 2001 can be
upgraded to PCSM 2.5 for free. The process to claim the free upgrades will be announced
through MIDAS.
28
Specifications
Specifications
Operating System Accounting Server:

Windows NT4.0, Windows 2000
Print Server:
Windows NT4.0, Windows 2000,
Novell NetWare 4.x, 5.x (with NPDS)
Sun Solaris 7, 8
RedHat Linux 6.x, 7.x
Workstation:
Windows NT 3.x/4.0, Windows 2000
Windows 3.x, Windows for Workgroups 3.x
Windows 95/98/Me
Unix
Apple MacIntosh 8.x, 9.x
(requires MacIntosh add-on)
Protocol TCP/IP
Printer Query PJL, NPA
Printer Language PostScript 3

PostScript Level 2
PostScript Level 1
PCL6
PCL5e, PCL5c, PCL5
PCL 4, PCL3+, PCL3
HP-GL, HP-GL2
Ricoh IPDL-C, RPS2
Canon LIPS
Epson ESC/PageP, ESCP/P2
Canon BubbleJet
IBM Proprinter
Genicom LinePrinter
Text
Printing Devices NRG Aficio devices

All other PCL5, PCL6 and PostScript devices
Document Information Time, date, user, account, printer, number of pages, paper
size, media type, input tray, duplexing, finishing (staple,
punch, fold)
We reserve the right to make amendments to the technical specifications and external
appearance of this software.
All brand and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.
29
Features Printer Cost & Security Manager 2.5
Management & Administration

Synchronous page counting
Remote administration and configuration
Scheduling for transactions and archiving
Active Directory integration
NDS domain integration
Configuration wizard
Multilingual support
Product Structure

Tracking of copy, fax and print output
Feedback of serial numbers
Desktop printing support
Secure printing of confidential documents
Full Windows NT and 2000 integration
Netware NDPS integration
Unix integration
Macintosh support
Optional support for Oracle and SQL Server
Charging Model Support
Declining balance (print quotas)

Timed quotas
Charge back to users or departments
Billing codes (job, client, project)
Reporting
Over 85 standard reports

Scheduled report generation
Open, documented database
Export to HTML, CSV, RTF
30
PrintObserver 2.0 Product Information Guide
PRODUCT
INFORMATION GUIDE
PrintObserver 2.0
1
Introduction
18 Months ago, NRG launched AficioManager, a suite of network printing
management applications that allow both users and administrators to monitor and
control the networked output devices.
AficioManager was and is an integral part of NRGs network printing strategy,
completing the offering.
However, one of the shortfalls of AficioManager has proven to be its design. This was
mainly directed at the workgroup environment, therefore, AficioManager could not
provide a satisfactory alternative for big networks. PrintObserver will.
This new network printing management application has been designed by EDSC to
give users and administrators in large, enterprise-wide networks, full visibility of their
printers and their printing. By employing advanced technologies, it is much more
efficient than AficioManager in the way it transports this information over the
network, making it an ideal solution for the larger networks.
PrintObserver has been announced for a while, but NRG is now in a position to
launch the solution. It will further our position as a supplier of printing solutions in
the corporate environment and will turn out to be an important tool for retaining large
major accounts.
Complete NRGs offering in the network printing market with a network printing
management solution dedicated to the large enterprise-wide networks.
Increase the number of connected devices by offering a tool to monitor them on

the network.
Increase secondary revenue streams by additional income from support,

installation and training and pre- and after sales consultancy.
2
Product
Concept
PrintObserver is a client-server-based network printing management solution that

maximises the integration of network printers into the enterprise-environment.
PrintObserver is easy to install, offers constant feedback on the status of network
printers and the progress of print jobs.
The PrintObserver-suite consists of 5 separate applications:

PrintObserver Primary Publisher
PrintObserver Secondary Publisher
PrintObserver Subscriber
PrintObserver Config
Administrators Adaptation Kit (AAK).
Together they offer users and network administrators a comprehensive set of tools to
monitor printers and print jobs on the network.
The Primary Publisher is installed and maintained by the network administrator. The
primary Publisher should be installed on a Windows NT4.0/2000 print-server. It polls
information from all network printers connected to this server. Subscribers or
secondary Publishers can subscribe to this information and are then automatically
notified about changes in the printer status. If a number of subscribers are located in
the LAN through a gateway or low bandwidth connection, one of these subscribers
can be assigned as a secondary publisher: instead of distributing the information from
the primary Publisher to every Subscriber, it is only distributed to this secondary
Publisher. The secondary Publisher then distributes the information to the Subscribers
in the LAN.
A Secondary Publisher can also be used to distribute the work burden of the Publisher
on more than one PC. The Subscribers will automatically be evenly distributed on all
available Publishers in a LAN.
Notes:
There can be multiple Publishers for one single device.
One Publisher can publish info rmation of multiple devices.
Publisher polls information from a device and pushes this together with the job
status of all queued print jobs to the Subscribers.
Publisher requires Microsoft Windows NT or Windows 2000 print server to run.
This server should hold the print queues of all the printers which need to be
monitored.
The client version of PrintObserver, Subscriber, has to be installed on every PC in the

network. Subscribers are informed by a Publisher about changes in the status of a
network printer they are using, without causing any noticeable network traffic on the
network (because of the push-protocol used).
PrintObserver Subscriber displays an icon in the bottom right corner of the users task
bar for each printer installed on your computer. This icon visualises the status of the
printer (idle, warning or attention). Clicking on one of these icons will open the
3
PrintObserver applet that provides more detailed information of the status and
configuration of the printer.
Task -bar icons for each installed printer driver on the client system
The 'Status' tab of the 'Printers' tab of the PrintObserver applet
The 'Input' tab of the 'Printers' tab of the PrintObserver applet
Starting from the moment a print job is spooled, a progress bar displays its
progress and shows the number of pages that still need to be printed.
4
Preceding jobs are also monitored, so the jobs position in the spooler is also
displayed.
The 'Documents' tab of the PrintObserver applet
The 'Print log' tab of the PrintObserver applet
The 'Job progress bar' of the PrintObserver Job control Bar
5
Note:
Publisher(s) are automatically selected by the subscriber out of a list of available
Publishers for the device concerned. It will try to select a Publisher according to
the following criteria:
The Publisher with the optimal availability.
The Publisher with the minimal virtual distance to the information-source
The Publisher with the minimal workload
There can be multiple Publisher(s) functioning as an information source for one
device.
Publisher can publish information of multiple device(s).
PrintObserver Config is the tool provided to configure the Publishers and Subscribers.
Using this tool, users can enable or disable the monitoring of some of the network
printers they are using or alter the list of Publishers that the Subscriber of Secondary
Publisher should use as an information source. Finally some changes can be made to
the notification method PrintObserver uses to signal events.
The 'Printers' tab of the PrintObserver Config tool
6
The 'Configuration' tab of the PrintObserver Config tool
Finally, with the Administrators Adaptation Kit, the network administrator can enable
or disable a set of features of the PrintObserver installation files. These settings can be
saved in an .ini-or .reg- file, which can be used during subsequent installations.
The 'Administrators Adaptation Kit Wizard' start page
7
Competition
General
All printer vendors offer tools to manage and monitor printers in the networked
environment:
HP: JetAdmin (workgroup and enterprise);
Xerox: CentreWare (workgroup) & PrintMap (Enterprise);
Lexmark: MarkVision (workgroup and enterprise);
Canon: NetSpot (workgroup).
However, unlike most of the above that claim to support Administrators and Users,
PrintObserver is mainly targeted at the network- users, whilst making the
Administrator's life easier. This will enable NRG to be an IT friendly solution
provider.
PrintObserver
WAN
Network Size
v2.0
JetAdmin
MarkVision
LAN
Administrator User
Target User
8
Comparison
Network Printer Manager (IBM)
Aficio Manager v1.x (Ricoh)
PrintObserver v2.0 (Ricoh)

MarkVision (Lexmark)
JetAdmin/WIN95 (HP)
JetAdmin/NT (HP)
Unique features
Installation
Automatic installation (no configuration, no IP address know-how)
Supports printing through NT server
Installs automatically with the driver using same network address (Direct Print)
Compatibility
Supports automatically all printers with full industry standard printer MIB implementation
User Interface
Display of the Device Front Panel
Alert Notification
Popup
Plays a Sound
Network Functionality
Discover/Explore/Look-up network for devices
subnet Broadcast
subnet Ping
Supported Network Protocols
TCP/IP
IPX
Information Retrieval
SNMP polling
PJL (through Parallel port)
Pushing printer status directly to client (non client/server architecture)
Pushing remote printer status to other clients (client/server architecture)
Distributing data from client to client (distributed computing)
Information Retrieved & Displayed
Print Job Information over print server
shows all jobs (Publisher)
shows own jobs only (Subscriber, security)
shows jobs in progress / in queue
shows completed jobs
shows job name, pages, copies
shows job progress in queue(pages preceding this job in queue and printer)
shows job progress (in percent, pages-printed/number-of-pages)
Notifys job print start/end
WAN oriented feature

LAN oriented feature
Administrative oriented feature
9
Positioning
PrintObserver is targeted at the large enterprise network environments with more than
100 users.
>25
Employees/printer
PrintObserver
25
Aficio Manager
1 100 >100
Employees
The following issues are important in these environments:

Reduced network traffic
Automated installation
Remote device status view
Network Print Job progress information
Support of network printers from multiple vendors.
PrintObserver offers Network Administrators ease of installation and, due to its

unique design, high efficiency on network traffic. Network users have instant
feedback on the status of their network printing devices and the progress of their
network print-jobs.
When compared to our second network printing management tool AficioManager,

PrintObserver is designed to be more efficient in larger environments.
WAN
PrinObserver
Network Size
Network
v2.0
Printer
Manager
Admin v3.5
Manager
Aficio
Aficio
Manager
LAN
Client v3.5
Administrator User
10
Target Markets & Channels
Target Markets
PrintObserver will be released for all NRG regions, including NRGI.
Target Channels
PrintObserver is mainly targeted at the enterprise environments, i.e. corporate

network environments with 100 users or more. Therefore, it is to be expected that
most of the sales will take place in the (European) Major Account and Direct Sales
Channel.
Sales Approach
We propose to sell PrintObserver by offering customers a free-of-charge version of

the software. Once they decide to use it on a permanent basis, the customer will have
to buy a server-license, which is dependent on the number of servers on which the
customer wants to install PrintObserver. The customer has a choice from a one- five-
and unlimited server-license.
11
Features & Benefits

Ease of use
If a Publisher is installed on the print server, it can obtain from the so-called Spooler
Agent all information on queued and printing jobs. Additionally, PrintObserver uses a
Print-Job-Analyser to extract information from the spooled documents to predict the
progress of each document in the queue and on the printer. PrintObserver uses the
print server's spool information and printer's internal status to decide the progress of
each printing document in the print server queue or its printing progress in the printer.
Subscriber Publisher
Standard
Application Spooler
Print Port
Spooler
Agent
Print Print
Printer
Observer Observer
Polling using SNMP

Pushing over TCP/IP
Printing through server
Print job information extraction inside the print server
This way, the user will have an estimate of how long it will take before his job will be
printed and this is displayed in the Job Status Bar: it shows the progress of each print
job in an easy to understand graphical user's interface. It displays user's own print jobs
as well as others, which are in the print server queue and the printer.
The Job Status Bar
12
Ease of Installation
PrintObserver supports an automatic installation/configuration procedure at the client

side where a client prints through a Microsoft Windows NT or Windows 2000 print
server queue. Information about the network address of the used printer is not needed.
To enable this feature PrintObserver makes use of:

Its client/server architecture
The Automatic-IP-Sensing1 feature
The Automatic-IP-Distribution2 feature
PrintObserver needs an IP address of a printer to communicate with the device.

Instead of an IP address, in some network environments it is possible to use a host-
name instead.
PrintObserver retrieves the IP address or host-name of a printer without the

interaction of the user in two ways:
It can automatically sense this information on the computer it runs on via
AutomaticIP Sensing (AIP) or
It can automatically receive this information from a Publisher during an Automatic IP
Distribution (AID) process.
Additionally, the user can insert this information with the Configuration tool shipped
with PrintObserver.
Besides this, PrintObserver has been designed and tested to support SMS installations.
SMS is the Microsoft Systems-Manager-Service, which enables administrators of
large enterprise networks to install or upgrade PrintObserver on each client PC with
the push of one button.
Reduced network traffic
PrintObserver uses a unique concept called Publisher-Subscriber. Common printer

monitoring applications uses SNMP to poll at intervals the status of a printer on the
network. This produces small network packages for each check. If every computer in
a WAN does this, this increases the network traffic dramatically.
1
PrintObserver can automatically sense the IP address or host-name of a printer when one of the
following is fulfilled:
PrintObserver is running on a Microsoft NT 4.0 or Windows 2000 operating system and the printer
driver is using an LPR port to print directly to the printer.
PrintObserver is running on an Microsoft NT 4.0 or Windows 2000 operating system and the printer
driver is installed from a print server using Add Printer and the print server is using an LPR port to
print directly to the printer.
2
Automatic IP Distribution is enabled when:
The host name of a computer is the same as the network Computer Name'. This is automatically
the case when a DHCP service is used in the network.
Printing through a print server. This is also true for bigger networks in most cases.
PrintObserver Publisher is installed on each print server in the network. The print-server where
PrintObserver is installed should be either Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 or Windows 2000.
13
PrintObserver, on the other hand, polls the status of a printer using SNMP and then
publishes the information to the subscribers in the network. Computers can subscribe
to this Publisher using the Subscriber version of PrintObserver.
The communication between a Publisher and its Subscribers is based on a special

push protocol over TCP/IP. This protocol enables the Subscriber to wait most of the
time for a notification of the Publisher; it will only notify them if there is a change in
the status of the printer or the print job. This reduces network traffic tremendously
and the workload of the printer. The more users share same network printer, the
bigger benefit the Publisher-Subscriber concept delivers.
Printer A Printer B Printer C Printer D Printer E Printer F
Publisher 1 Publisher 2
Subscriber Subscriber Subscriber Subscriber Subscriber Subscriber Subscriber
Polling
Pushing
Data flow from printer to Publisher to Subscriber
Compatibility with industry standards
In an enterprise network compatibility with different printer models and brands is

very important.
PrintObserver has been designed to be compatible with the industry standards for
printer management SNMP. SNMP is supported by most modern network printers,
regardless of the brand.
PrintObserver supports:
Systems MIB (RFC1697);
Host Resources MIB (RFC 1514);
Printer MIB (RFC 1759) and partly the new version 2.0 implemented.
The first HP model that has implemented these MIBs is the LaserJet 5Si. Most of
NRGs latest Aficio products support this as well. Since the implementation of the
14
standard is the responsibility of each vendor, level of information for each product is
slightly different.
The supported printer description languages are:

PostScript level 2 & 3
PCL 3 - PCL 6
IPDLC
Finally, PrintObserver requires Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 or Windows 2000 print-

server to enable job status monitoring. There is a trend using Windows NT or 2000 as
print-server. PrintObserver is designed around these standard operating systems and
provides more detailed information about print jobs than any other printer-monitoring
tool.
The reason for this is that standard printer-status- monitoring tools usually require the
users to print directly to the printer, thereby loosing the benefit of print server
features. PrintObserver allows the users to use a print-server. Users are able to have
control over all their print jobs, while benefiting from the print-server architecture.
Windows NT server market-share based on number of employees
94%
100%
90%
84% NT Server
76% 74%
80% Netware
70%
60% Unix
50% IBM
40%
30%
20%
10%
0%
Total <100 Emp. 100-499 Emp. 500+ Emp.
Applications
PrintObserver works perfectly in the PAS environment: each user that has
implemented PAS in their printing workflow will benefit from PrintObserver.
The reason for this close integration is that PAS uses the same Microsoft Windows
NT4.0/2000 print-server architecture as PrintObserver. Moreover, PrintObserver
supports PAS's special Aficio Network Printer Monitor as well as Windows standard
Print Monitor to monitor printing jobs.
15
Logistics
There will be four items for PrintObserver.
PrintObserver v2.0
This is the actual application. This item can be used for demonstration, promotion
and trial purpose. If a customer wants to implement PrintObserver, he also needs
to have one of the licenses mentioned below.
1 Sever license
This is a license card that gives a customer a license to use PrintObserver on one
print server in their network. The customer needs at least one PrintObserver
package plus this license card.
5 server license-pack
This is a license card that gives customer a license to use PrintObserver on up to
five print servers. The customer needs at least one PrintObserver package plus this
license card.
Enterprise license
This is a license card that gives customer a license to use PrintObserver on
unlimited number of print servers. The customer needs at least one PrintObserver
package plus this license card.
Histor y Good Product Name Description

abbreviation
New POBSERV20 PrintObserver v2.0 Printer device status monitoring
system (No License included)
New POBSERVLIC1 1 Server license Use license for one print server
New POBSERVLIC5 5 Server license-pack Use license for up to five print servers
New POBSERVENT Enterprise license Use license for unlimited print servers
When a customer orders PrintObserver V2.0, he will receive an envelope with a CD-
ROM in a box. This allows him to install PrintObserver as a test-version. When he
wants to start using PrintObserver officially, he will have to order one of the license
packages. These come in an envelope, which holds a license card and a floppy disk
that enables the registration.
The user can only install a PrintObserver as many times as the server-license he
has agreed to buy.
16
Language support
Item Timing
User Interface
English At time of launch
German TBD
French TBD
Italian TBD
Swedish TBD
Dutch TBD
Other TBD
Administration Guide
German TBD
French TBD
Italian TBD
Swedish TBD
Dutch TBD
Other TBD
Installation Guide
German TBD
French TBD
Italian TBD
Swedish TBD
Dutch TBD
Other TBD
Users Guide
German TBD
French TBD
Italian TBD
Swedish TBD
Dutch TBD
Other TBD
17
eCabinet 2.1 Product Information Guide
PRODUCT
INFORMATION GUIDE
eCabinet 2.1

Guernsey.
1
Introduction
In order to survive, business develops systems to manage the flow of information
throughout their organisation. From metal filing cabinets to todays multi- million Euro
computer-based document management systems, businesses strive to make the tasks
associated with creating, storing and managing their documents simpler, available to
everyone in their organisations and more cost-effective.
Within organisations, a hierarchy of information has always existed: a continuum of

documents ranging from high- value, high- volume structured documents considered
mission critical to low-volume, low- value ad hoc personal documents.
Early document management systems were developed to address the high value,
mission critical applications area, where customers were most willing to pay to solve
problems. More recently, personal document management solutions were built to
address the inadequacies of the OS-level file find function. Though useful, the
limitations of these products have so far restricted their market acceptance in the
business environment.
The middle ground, where documents are mid-volume, mid-value and a mix of
structured and ad- hoc, has the broadest potential market for document management
solutions and, to date, has been underserved. This area is called Workgroup Document
Management.
At the same time, in these offices, information exists in a variety of different formats,
which broadly segment into paper and electronic. While technology has rapidly
increased the number of electronic documents used within organisations, analysts
confirm that 80% of all information users interact with, still exists on paper. The ability
to manage both seamlessly defines the usefulness of document management systems.
At each step in the traditional document management process, substantial costs are
incurred. In recent years, shifts in office technology have made document management
solutions progressively simpler, cheaper and more efficient. But, while major progress
has been made in many areas, specific gaps remain. Most importantly, capture
technology is not yet cheap enough, easy enough or subject to accepted standards.
Products that successfully address this issue stand to benefit from a large market
opportunity in Workgroup Document Management.
Thats where RSVs Network Office Appliance (NOA) comes into the play: it directly
addresses the Workgroup Document Management opportunity. In contrast to high-end
mission-critical document management solutions, the NOA will require minimal user
maintenance and administration, it will feature easy-to-use client functionality for
simple and quick information access and will scale to the needs of the workgroup. The
resulting dramatic reduction in the total cost of ownership offers NRG the chance to
take an early lead in this market.
The NOA-concept has materialised in an innovative product called eCabinet. The

existing version is widely recognised as a totally new approach that might change the
office environment dramatically. With a unique and modern design, eCabinet 1.1 and
eCabinet 2.1 bring document capability to every office.
2
Establish NRGs position within the Document Management market by introducing

an easy to use, network-based, document storage and retrieval solution for office
environments
Enhance the value of NRG office equipment with intelligent, networked storage and
retrieval management solutions that empower companies to make efficient and
effective use of their information.
Establish a range of appliance-based solutions for the document- and information

requirements of small, mid-sized and larger companies.
Establish NRGs position as a company that can offer Total Document Solutions.
Increase the value, turnover and profits per customer by capturing a larger share of
the document cycle.
3
Product Overview
Concept
eCabinet is the first of the so-called Network Office Appliances. A Network Office
Appliance (NOA) can be characterised by three things:
Network: it is connected to a network, be it the Internet or an Intranet;

Office: it is targeted at the workgroup environment and
Appliance: it is as easy to use and install as a normal home appliance, while it
adheres to market standards to ensure the openness of the system.
Within the NOAs, eCabinet is more specifically an Information Appliance, since it will
be used by organisations to manage the information within their organisation more
effectively.
The eCabinet is an intelligently designed software and hardware package that

specifically addresses the needs of both small businesses and the enterprise workgroup
customer. In contrast to existing, high-end, mission-critical document management
solutions, eCabinet requires minimal user maintenance and administration, features
easy-to- use client functionality for simple, quick information access and scales to the
needs of the workgroup.
Most importantly, eCabinet addresses the capture and retrieval problem by leveraging
existing digital multifunctional peripheral technologies. In contrast to dedicated
scanners and high labour overhead required in traditional document management
systems, eCabinet uses enhanced MFPs, as well as network-attached scanners, faxes,
printers, copiers and client PCs to allow for simple, low-cost, unconscious and
intuitive document capture.
Fax Scanned
Management Document
Management
Fax Scanner
Forms
Handling
Printer Foundation Archival

Product File
Integrated Solution
eCabinet Index
Demanded by Offsite
Customers Print Driver Backup Storage
Management
Print Management
4
Product Overview: The eCabinet Solution
The design of eCabinet directly addresses the Workgroup Document Management

marketplace. In contrast to existing high-end, mission critical document management
solutions, eCabinet requires minimal user maintenance and administration, features
easy-to- use client functionality for simple, quick information access, and scales to the
needs of the workgroup.
Most importantly, a key design strategy for eCabinet is to facilitate easy document
capture and retrieval by leveraging existing digital Multi-Function Product (MFP)
technologies. In contrast to the dedicated scanners and high labour overhead required in
traditional document management systems, eCabinet harnesses the power of enhanced
MFPs, as well as network-attached scanners, faxes, printers, copiers, and client PCs to
allow for simple, low-cost document information management.
eCabinet Major Components
The major components of the eCabinet solution include:

eCabineta dedicated thin server that stores captured documents from MFPs, from
client PCs, or from other sources (i.e. network-attached scanners, FAXes, printers,
and copiers). The eCabinet includes a keypad interface for easy network
configuration and a DVD read/write drive for off- line storage for the eCabinet or a
CDROM for the eCabinet 2100.
The PC Capture softwarea program installed on a Windows-based PC that

enables the user to capture selected electronic documents, files, and archived Web
pages to the eCabinet.
A standard PC-based Web browser (i.e. Netscape Navigator or Microsoft Internet

Explorer)used to search the eCabinet for captured documents. Once found, the
user can retrieve a copy of the document to his/her PC. Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.0 is
also provided in addition to the Web browser software (IE 5.5 and Netscape 4.61.)
Note: When retrieving more than one document at the same time, a .zip file is
created so a de-compression software such as WinZip is required.
Note: Users can also capture outgoing or incoming e- mail messages by sending
them directly to a user on the eCabinet.
5
Main Features list
Localization
- eCabinet System Language

eCabinet comes in six system languages, including Dutch, German, English US,
English UK, French, and Italian.
Install eCabinet on your network, and then select the language to use for the
interface. The document database indexing, the browser-based user interface, the
LCD display, and the date and time will all correspond to both the language and
conventions of the country selected.
Note: If French is selected the date format used is the French date format and not the
Quebecois date format.
- PC Capture Language
PC Capture UI is now localized in Dutch, German, English US, English UK,
French, and Italian.
6
Backup and archiving
Backup and archiving of documents captured on the eCabinet takes place in one of the
following ways, or a combination of several of the following ways:
- Document Backup
eCabinet 2.x provides document security by automatically backing up all your
documents to a preferred secure storage media, including built- in, removable
DVD*, on-site NFS, encrypted Internet-based HTTP, and SEC compliant WORM
media.
*Original eCabinet model only, not eCabinet 2100
- Intelligent Document Archiving

eCabinet's ability to archive documents intelligently enables it to accommodate even
the most demanding capture environment. The hard drive holds 25 million
document pages for the eCabinet and 50 million document pages for the eCabinet
2100. Should its hard drive near capacity, however, eCabinet and eCabinet 2100
begin to clear space by purging older, rarely-accessed files. But because everything
is backed up automatically to secure storage on any one or a combination of
removable DVD*, on-site NFS, and Internet-based HTTP, eCabinet and eCabinet
2100 can still find and retrieve a pur ged document by searching its permanent
indexed location information to point to the back up copy. By archiving the location
information on its index, eCabinet and eCabinet 2100 provide unlimited storage
space.
* Original eCabinet model only, not eCabinet 2100
Email Notification
eCabinet and eCabinet 2100 automatically alert via email about any problems it has
capturing or processing documents. By entering an email address (or the address of an
administrator), emails will be automatically sent for certain eCabinet or eCabinet 2100
status notifications including: DVD Full, DVD Insertion Required for Restore, and
Backup Target. eCabinet and eCabinet 2100 will continue to email daily until the
problem has been resolved and the task can be performed.
7
Centralized Data Sharing across Workgroups And Remote Offices - Data
Replication
Data Replication allows both remote and local eCabinet 2.x users to exchange files
easily by automatically forwarding encrypted information from one eCabinet to a
network of other eCabinets. Multiple eCabinets can even be configured to replicate
their data to just one eCabinet, creating a central repository that authorized users can use
to access all workgroup documents. With a high level of fault tolerance, eCabinet 2.x
provides the ideal solution for the management and sharing of documents in an efficient
yet secure manner.
a. Uni-directional In which one eCabinet (the capturing eCabinet) replicates

all, or selected documents, to another eCabinet;
Unidirectional
Replication
b. Bi-directional In which two eCabinets are actively capturing documents

with each eCabinet replicating its captured documents (or selected
documents) to the other eCabinet;
Bi-directional
Replication
c. One-to-Many In which one eCabinet replicates all, or selected, documents

to multiple target eCabinets (effectively de-aggregation);
One-To-Many
Replication
d. Many-to-One In which multiple eCabinets replicate all, or selected

documents, to a single target eCabinet (effectively aggregation).
Many-To-One
Replication
8
Because Data Replication can be used to create document identical eCabinets, it also
provides an easily accessed failsafe backup. Even in the event of a catastrophic
worksite occurrence, document management can continue uninterrupted by simply
selecting a redundant eCabinet.
eCabinet with Data Replication easily provides multiple workgroups and remote offices
with both document distribution and data aggregation, coupled with a high level of
fault tolerance.
Optimization and index rate
The performance of the eCabinet cannot be measured by a single number. There are
many factors to be considered in order to determine the expected performance in a
particular scenario. The main factors that affect the performance of the eCabinet are:
The number of documents in the database

The number of simultaneous queries
The tasks that are being performed by the users, database access versus
document capture
The type of document that is being captured, whether or not it will be OCRd
The length of time that is deemed to be acceptable before captured
documents are available for use
The eCabinet is targeted at workgroups of 20 50 people. The assumption is that in an

office, the logged-on users will not be performing the same tasks at exactly the same
time. So supporting a workgroup consisting of 50 people does not mean that everyone
will perform a search query at the same time, but rather that there will be a flow of
inquiries throughout the day, with some peak hour periods, when workgroups will
access the eCabinet. The expectation is that the normal usage of the eCabinet will
represent a balanced tradeoff between retrieval speed, the ability to handle simultaneous
queries, document processing speed, and the willingness of customers to wait for
documents to be available.
The following is a list of performance numbers that can be used as a guideline for
expected levels of performance. This is meant as a calculation example and does not
give the maximum number of document that can be stored on the eCabinet.
Optimal number of supported users: 20 50

Optimal size of database: 500,000 documents (see note) or less
Optimal rate for document capture: 2-3 per minute, 5 pages/document
Expected time to OCR document: 30 seconds
Expected time for non-OCR document: 10 seconds
Expected simultaneous queries 10
Note : Document assumptions
Size of document - 5 pages on average

Page mix - 50-50 graphics-text
Text page - 250 words/page
The above numbers do not take into consideration network performance.
9
Scheduled Optimisation
As eCabinet captures and files throughout the workday, information is added to the
database to be indexed and deciphered so documents are retrieved via full-text search.
eCabinet focuses on this database during its once-a-day optimization, organizing them
to keep the database efficient. This optimized directory helps eCabinet to find the
documents needed quickly.
During the optimization process, the document processing stops (documents captured
during this brief period are queued for later capture.) Also the optimization can be
scheduled to affect the fewest users.
User-Adjustable Indexing Rate
User-Adjustable Indexing Rate lets users tailor eCabinets processing rate to match the
rate of documents captured to it on a daily basis.
Even if eCabinet is required to capture over 200 documents a day, per person, the
Indexing Rate can be set to Extremely High. On higher settings, documents take more
time to become available for retrieval, as eCabinet focuses on storing and processing
documents.
Automatic Document Routing Rules
Rule-Based Capture Control allows the user to create unique rules for each of the
networked peripherals connected to eCabinet. With Rule-Based Capture Control, it is
possible to assign captured documents automatically to an owner or group, a destination
folder, add keyword notes for simplified retrieval, and make sure that documents go
where they need to go.
By creating a rule for a fax machine, for example, all faxes from a certain phone number
are not only automatically assigned to a specific owner, they can also be transferred into
an eCabinet folder and eCabinet can alert the owner to its arrival via email. By simply
specifying a condition and the resulting actions, eCabinet helps taking control and
managing document overload.
10
User Interface
- User-Defined Folders
eCabinet 2.x has a hierarchical folder structure that allows folder nesting,
creating more inclusive folders with smaller sub-groups. Document folder
security is assured because the folder administrator controls who has the
read/write privileges, and retrieval is faster and easier when custom fields have
been designated for filing.
- Searching for and retrieving documents

With a standard web browser (i.e. Netscape or Internet Explorer), a user can
search for captured documents on the eCabinet. The search criteria can include
text content, metadata information, folder information, or any combination of
these.
A quick search field lets you launch a search from the Home page of eCabinet
A Search option lets a user quickly construct a search with the most frequently
used types of criteria.
A More Search Options page offers the full range of document information as
possible search criteria, such as title, time period, etc.
An Expert Search option allows for Boolean searches with nested expressions.
The results of a search appear in one of four possible types of view: List, Calendar,
Stream, and Thumbnail, each designed to provide a certain type of access to the set of
found documents; the first 2 give information on the document the last 2 on the date of
capture.
With a simple command, a user can retrieve a copy of a found document to a PC,
either in native or text-only format for most types of documents.
Document distribution, as long as the recipients have document privileges, is as
simple as dragging and dropping links to the file from eCabinet to your desktop;
they can be embedded in email or stored to your local fileserver.
- Thumbnails in List View

The List View is the default view for search results, and with the thumbnail option,
it is the most textually and visually rich of the four available views. Arranged in
sortable columns that are reordered by simply clicking a column title, view
preferences can be configured to include information such as creation date, file size,
11
retrieval score, document title, owner name, and thumbnails, too. So, to get as much
information as possible about search returns, just select the List View.
- One Click Re-Sort in Views

eCabinet's search results can now be reorganized at the touch of a button with One
Click Re-Sort in Views. Click one of the hyperlinked column headers to rearrange
and sort search results, reprioritize recently captured documents to the top of the list
or sort the search results alphanumerically according to document title.
- Accurate, Full-Text Retrieval

eCabinet captures and stores any file type from networked office peripherals -
digital copiers, scanners, fax machines, printers, and desktop computers - making
them available to you right away, when you need them, using intuitive and accurate
full-text retrie val.
eCabinets full-text searchable index uses the convenience of Web browsers to

search for automatically indexed and extracted document keyword notes, titles,
summaries, owners, source, dates of capture, and other related information.
Document retrieval can be personalized by entering in a summary and
keyword notes for the index to store.
- Keyword Search Templates

User-assigned keywords can be attached to documents in several easy ways. A
simple way to add keywords to a document is to highlight an already captured
document, and then choose Notes from the Actions menu. This opens the
editing option, displaying the keyword metadata to enter in new keywords, and
create a personal filing system.
12
Another useful way to use keywords is to create folders on eCabinet that contain
Custom Fields. Custom fields are folder specific keywords that are automatically
associated with every item that is filed into that folder. They can be pre-selected
and will appear in a menu whenever an item is moved into that folder. A folder
containing CVs, for example, could contain pre-selected fields such as Key skills,
Desired salary, or Years of experience, enabling resums based on these custom
field criteria to be found later.
PC Capture also allows pre-selection of keywords for documents. Any document

sent to eCabinet by PC Capture will contain keywords entered from the Default
Document Info menu as part of their metadata.
Captured documents information
Documents stored on the eCabinet include several types of information:
Indexed document content. At the time of capture, the system constructs a full text
index and word frequency count of the document contents, first performing an OCR
(Optical Character Recognition) scan of the document if necessary. Non-OCRd text
(FTPd such as PC capture files) will be indexed by a different method. eCabinet
currently supports 17 language dictionaries for the improved OCR function. The
supported languages for capture and retrieval are : English (US), English (UK),
Dutch, Irish/Gaelic, Portuguese (Brazilian), Swedish, French, German, Italian,
Norwegian, Spanish, Danish, Finnish, French (Canadian), German (Swiss),
Portuguese, and Spanish (Mexican).
CAUTION: It is recommended that no more than 2 dictionaries be invoked at any
one time in an operational environment because of potential performance impacts.
Caere Corp. developed the software used for the OCR.
Document meta information: document title, date of capture, date of creation,

capture source, notes, summary, and document owner. Title, notes, summary and
owner are editable fields.
Folder information. The eCabinet supports the creation of foldersspecial

collections of documents with user-defined custom and preferred fields. If a
document has been added to a folder, the information about it will include its folder
membership and whatever information the user has entered in the folder fields.
Fax, scanned and printer documents are ocrd and stored as tiff files. Email is
stored as .txt (attachments are stored in native format), and PC documents are
captured and stored in native format.
Note: Documents scanned, copied, or print captured at 600 dpi, are rendered at 300 dpi
at the time of capture on the eCabinet.
13
Client Application Downloads
PC Capture, Outlook, and Internet Explorer plug- ins are available for download from
either the Web, at www.rsv.ricoh.com, or directly from eCabinets hard drive from the
Home page or the Help page.
Integration with other software
- Software Developers Kit (launch will happen separately)

eCabinet Software Developers Kit (SDK) is available for creating a customized
front-end to meet the unique needs of a company. Enabling the development of
software hooks, the SDK lets VARs, VADs, and end- users develop value-added
software for personalized document, metadata, and user or group control. (this is
under review in order to establish a good support system for this)
- Web Browser
eCabinets Web browser interface is platform independent, has built- in Internet
Explorer toolbar features, opens PC files automatically in their preferred editor, and
14
enables the distribution of documents by sharing the links, all from a familiar and
intuitive interface.
Using Internet Explorer, it is possible to search eCabinet right from the browsers
toolbar. Recent document search histories are saved in a drop-down menu. (the
toolbar is only available in English)
- Outlook Integration
eCabinet is integrated with Microsoft Outlook, simplifying email management tasks.
Using the built-in Outlook toolbar, drag and drop emails directly into an eCabinet
folder, assign special Custom Fields or case number ID-based retrieval, create
summary and keyword notes, while eCabinet automatically indexes the text and
creates a summary. (integration probably only works with English Outlook)
- PC Capture
Windows-based localized PC Capture software lets the user capture documents
from a PC immediately or according to a regular capture schedule. Immediate
capture can be performed via a one-click method that allows the user to right-click
a PC document to send it to eCabinet or an eCabinet folder for indexing. When
capturing a document, it is possible to assign special custom fields for customer or
case number ID-based retrieval, create a summary and keyword annotations, while
eCabinet automatically indexes the text and creates a summary. It is also possible to
capture immediately using the drag and drop method that has default keyword and
folder filing options, and is performed by simply clicking on a document and
dropping it onto the PC Capture icon on your desktop.
Create a capture schedule for a folder on your PC, to create a regular schedule for
automatic document capture. Only new documents or new versions of older
documents that have been added to the folder will be sent to eCabinet. It is also
possible to create custom fields, keyword notes, and summaries to be added to every
document at capture.
- Batch Scanning with Kofax Ascent

eCabinet works seamlessly with Kofax Ascent to provide sophisticated batch scan
processing capabilities. Ascent Capture enables the user to verify scanned
documents, validate extracted data, index them for later retrieval, design keyword
notes and custom fields at time of capture for easy document retrieval, and route
them directly into folders on eCabinet. Ascent Capture automatically identifies
forms and performs highly accurate recognition of handwriting (ICR), machine print
(Accents OCR automatically overrides eCabinets own OCR functions), check
marks (OMR), and bar codes to extract even the toughest data from scanned images
with no problems. With the addition of Ascent Capture Internet Server, remote
offices can easily scan documents for processing at a central location, saving time
and shipping costs and eliminating the possibility of lo st documents.
Note: This is offered from the USA and is not supported by Ricoh Europe Europe
Q1 2002
15
Document security
eCabinet has strong built- in security measures which prevent unauthorized access to
both the eCabinet UI (user interface) and the stored files, while still remaining flexible
enough to allow users various ways in which to access to their documents.
These various levels of access ensure that the security of sensitive files is not
compromised, and yet documents can still be shared with ease.
Account/passwordevery user must have an account and password to access the

eCabinet and search for documents.
Ownershipcaptured documents can have an individual or a group owner. (A
group is a defined set of individual users.) A user can only search for and find
documents he/she owns, documents that are owned by a group he/she belongs to, or
documents that are public. (Conversely, an owner can classify a captured document
as public and then anyone can find it, but only the owner of a public document
can modify the document. Also document administrators can see/modify all
documents on the eCabinet, by default users belonging to the eCabinet NetAdmin
group have document administration rights.)
Note: If the capture control rules are not set, a document could have an
unknown user. Also by default, a new printer has unknown as the owner of
the documents sent to that printer on eCabinet.
Installation and setup
The eCabinet system integrates directly into an existing local area network (e.g.
Ethernet 10/100BaseT). Field service (e.g. NRG or channel), personnel (or optionally
the end user), performs the installation, which is comparable in effort to the installation
of a network-connected printer.
The eCabinet requires no software installation and provides a keypad interface for
direct network configuration.
An easy-to-use wizard is provided for installation of the PC Capture software.
The installation should also include setting up the peripherals to send documents to
eCabinet, such as automatic email forward, or capture of all faxes.
16
Administration
There are three types of administrators of eCabinet:

Network administrator who has the capability to modify system settings, monitor
the document capture and backup process, and check other system behaviours.
Document administrator who has the capability to access any captured document on
the eCabinet.
Folder administrator who administers folders.
Note: by default the NetAdmin group has all three roles. More specifically, the
administrative functions are performed via the settings screen.
The settings screen allows the administrator to perform numerous tasks including: set
time and date; change administrator passwords; create other administrators; create users
and groups; create folders; edit users; add new users; set capture control; set replication;
set up printers; configure network settings; change language dictionaries; manage
backups; set backup location; set up backup settings; recover data; recover eCabinet
settings (set at installation time) and set privileges.
Competition
The term Document Management has become a catch all term that attempts to
describe any thing and everything that can be done to a document once it is in an
electronic format. In general terms, there are six basic func tions that are traditionally
associated with Document Management Systems (DMS):
Capture, OCR and indexing, search and retrieval of typical office documents
Special document management (forms, bar codes, drawings, etc.)
Collaboration, library services (check in/out), versioning and annotation
Work flow and document distribution/routing
Archival and alternative back up solutions
Integration with legacy systems and other applications ( databases, Lotus Notes, MS
Exchange, SAP, etc)
All applications have some form of capturing or importing documents. This is the most
basic document management function. However, few of the popular DMS applications
provide a complete capture solution.
When compared to other DM systems the eCabinet will almost always have competitive
advantages associated with capturing documents. Many competitors lack the ability to
capture or schedule the capture of documents automatically. This is an important point,
since the most vocal critics of DMS claim that requiring people to change their standard
work habits is the one largest factor that limits the usefulness of DMS. Unless all
documents are effortlessly captured, i.e. without manual intervention, it is next to
impossible to maintain an accurate and complete document database. Furthermore, most
competitive systems are ill equipped to capture paper documents. The standard solution
is to require the end user to scan all hard copy documents and then route them to the
appropriate storage destination.
Since most all DMS are custom installations, designed to meet each users specific
needs, the complexity and functionality can vary widely from one installation to
another. Similarly, prices vary wildly. An entry-level DM application, which only
supports capture, of electronic documents, basic search and retrieval can be licensed for
17
Euro 500 per seat. A custom enterprise level system with all the above mentioned
functions can cost well over Euro 1,000,000. The eCabinet was not intended to be a
fully functional Document Management system. It was designed to simplify the
document capture and indexing process while at the same time, making the task of
document storage and retrieval simple and effortless. In reality, it does provide the same
functionality of several DM solutions. And generally, the eCabinet is priced lower than
systems of equal functionality. It is true that many of the so-called enterprise level
systems provide much more sophisticated tools. However, the purchase price, as well as
the cost of ownership, is often ten times higher than the eCabinet solution.
Another strong competitive advantage lies in the eCabinets appliance implementation.

The eCabinet solution can be integrated into an existing network environment in a
matter of hours. Most other solutions require extensive programming (often resulting in
extensive consulting fees), complicated and drawn out installations, and in some cases,
network configuration modifications. The eCabinet is simply attached to the network.
Furthermore, the maintenance of an appliance type solution is minimal as compared to
custom document management installations.
There are four DMS that compete somewhat directly with the eCabinet: Xerox
DocuShare, Hummingbirds PC DOCS, CyLex I-DOX and DocuWare. A brief
summary of each has been included. It should also be noted that there are many more
that fall into the enterprise level category and are therefore not really considered
direct competitors. Brief summaries of Documentum 4i eBusiness Edition, OTG
XtenderSolutions and FileNet can also be found in this chapter.
Finally, it has to be recognised that competitors are developing similar products. Xerox,
for one, is expected to launch a product in the next 6 to 9 months as well, while similar
activities can be expected from Canon. Therefore, it is important to keep first- mover
advantage.
18
XEROX DOCUS HARE
DocuShare Version 2.2 is positioned as a software-based knowledge management

product with collaborative capabilities (versioning, email notification of newly posted
documents). It supports a large number of file types including text, scanned images,
video clips, MS Office documents, sound files, executables, web links, shared calendars
and bulletin boards. Workflow capability is not part of the DocuShare package,
however, OakGrove offers a product (Flowlet) that provides basic workflow
functionality.
There are 3 versions offered of DocuShare: Basic, Office and Enterprise. All three
versions have capture capability that is limited to electronic files that are accessible via
a web browser. To add capture capability from MFPs, printers and scanners, the Xerox
FlowPort software is required.
The Basic version, priced at $1,395 for a 25 seat license and basic server software, is
browser based and is not integrated with MS Windows/Office. Further, it has limited
security and is not customisable. The Office version adds MS Office integration,
expanded security and customisation. The price for a 500 seat license and the Office
server software is $14,995. The Enterprise level package is $44,995 for the server
software and unlimited seats and offers easy integration with enterprise level
applications such a Oracle databases.
Note: Server hardware and FlowPort software not included in these prices.
The optional FlowPort Document distribution and transformation software offers

enhanced email/messaging, workflow and document management capabilities. It
reduces bottlenecks associated with paper intensive operations by merging paper
documents using network office equipment such a Xerox Document Centre
(copier/scanner/printer MFP) and Internet fax machines. It captures and integrates paper
documents into a digital workflow for future access, retrieval and distribution. This
software is required for capturing paper documents into the DocuShare Knowledge
Sharing software. It adds $7,000 per server to the price of DocuShare. Note: FlowPort
must run on a separate server.
Competitive Advantages:
Collaboration and version control

Automatic notification, via email, when content is updated or added
Ability to store documents in multiple repositories (Lotus Notes, MS Exchange,
iManage, etc.)
Simultaneous search of multiple servers
Can save complex or frequently used queries
Competitive Disadvantages:
Price: While the Basic version is very inexpensive, its functionality is quite limited.
To achieve functionality comparable to an eCabinet, the price is approximately
$27,000. Granted, the high price tag does have the collaboration and sharing
features that are not available on the eCabinet.
19
DocuShare 2.2 Comments

Positioned as Knowledge Sharing/Management
with collaboration
No. of simultaneous users Not mentioned in any
documentation/data sheets
Capture Sources
Electronic files Yes Video, audio,
Printers Optional requires FlowPort
Copiers Optional requires FlowPort
Scanners Optional requires FlowPort or PaperPort allows direct drag and drop into
Paper port DocuShare
Faxes Optional requires FlowPort
MFPs Optional requires FlowPort Xerox Document Centre, HP Digital Sender
OCR/full text indexing Yes Most popular text, WP, spread sheet and
Search by metadata Yes presentation formats (verity 2.3 engine)
Add/modify meta data Yes
Multiple server searches Yes
Collaboration Yes Email notification of updates
Create and share Yes
calendars/bulletin boards
Versioning Yes
Check in/out No (?)
Read only option Yes
Annotation No (?)
Work Flow capability Optional Requires Oak Grove Flowlet software
Integration into Microsoft Office and enterprise version only Office and Windows 2000
Office
Archiving ??
Document distribution Optional requires FlowPort
Localised Yes French, German, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese
Security Yes
Repositories Supported FTP, Lotus Notes*, Domino.doc All require FlowPort software. Support planned
for MS Exchange, iManage and Documentum
Server platforms supported NT 4.0, Solaris 2.5/2.6
Scalable Yes: to 1000s of users Pay as you go
Price**: DocuShare Basic server and 25 seat license: no integration w/ MS Office; no ability to capture
Basic $1,395 paper. Limited security
Office Office level server and 500 seat Integrated w/ MS Office, customisable, secure,
license: $14,495 requires client software
Enterprise Enterprise lever server with
unlimited seats: $44,995
Priced comparably equipped $ 27,995 $14,995 + $7,000 per server for FlowPort +
to eCabinet approximately $6,000 for server hardware (2
required)
Price: FlowPort Not clear a custom installation can cost $50,000
Support One year included
SDK Yes
Standards Supported WebDAV, ODMA
* Lotus Notes V4.6 store via SMTP email only: V5.0 store and retrieve not yet available
** Does not include server hardware
20
CYLEX, INC
CyLex Inc. is selling i- DOX, a document management solution service (ASP model)
that looks suspiciously like a subset of the Documentum product (Ttis would make
sense considering that Documentum is a major investor in CyLex.). With the i-DOX
service, you can store text, graphics, scanned images, even sound and digital movies, in
a dedicated Document vault. The service includes full text search (Verity compatible
file types only) and Meta data searching, however, the user must manually create the
Meta data for each and every document. Other features include library services for
collaboration (documents check in/out), version control, and annotation.
A release and upload script is used to capture documents, convert them into XML
format and export them to the i-DOX vault. The capture sources include PCs, file
servers and Kofax scanners, however, documents must be manually captured. Imported
documents are OCRd and indexed for future retrieval. CyLex utilises the latest
encryption and verification techniques to ensure the security of your documents. EMC
provides the storage infrastructure and the retrieval technology.
CyLex has just signed a technology and marketing agreement with ePage Solutions
(Electronic Page Solutions, Inc.), a leading software developer in the Electronic
Statement Presentment (ESP) industry. ePage Solutions provides print data stream
transformation products that transform mainframe data to .pdf files. They will also
create an XML release script that will enable .pdf content to be uploaded to the i- DOX
back-end solution. The resulting solution will enable end-users of legacy systems to use
CyLexs ASP-enabled document management solution for electronic statement
presentment.
The compelling value proposition of out-sourcing document management/storage is that

no capital (dollars or equipment) is required. The CyLex typical customer exports 5,000
to 10,000 new documents per month with an average cost of $3,000 to 6,000 per month.
The service is priced based on the number and size of the documents as well as the
number of transactions (exported documents and retrievals). It is not clear if CyLex has
a minimum service fee for low volume users. CyLex also offers a back file conversion
service.
Annotation
Remote storage location
Access via internet from any location
Supports relatively high volumes of documents
No capital equipment investment: low cost for low volumes of document
transactions
No automatic capture procedure
No capture procedure for copied documents
Meta data must be manually created
No document level permissions
21
CyLex I-DOX Comments

Positioned as document management service Company positioned as Leading
solution. document management applications
service provider
Number of simultaneous Unlimited ? Unclear how many users can
users simultaneously access one vault
Capture Sources All capture processes are manual
Electronic files Yes Capture from desktop or server (?)
Printers no
Copiers no
Scanners yes
Faxes ?
MFPs ?
Other Mainframe generated statements
OCR/full text indexing Yes
Search by metadata Yes
Add/modify meta data Yes/? Meta data must be manually generated
Multiple server searches no
Collaboration yes
Create and share no
Versioning Yes
Check in/out Yes
Read only option no
Work Flow capability no
Annotation yes
Integration into Microsoft no Import and search wizards are browser
Office based
Archiving ? Probably redundant back ups
Document distribution yes Route to other users inbox
Electronic signature no
Localised ?
Security Yes File encryption, document and group
permissions, individual log on passwords
Repositories Supported none
Server platforms N/A
supported
Scalable yes
Price: based on number of documents stored, size
New documents Variable monthly fee of docs and number of transactions
(imported and retrieved).
Back file conversion ?
Priced comparably ? Typical customer spends $3K to 6K per

equipped to eCabinet month
Support Yes; included in monthly fee Email and live chat

SDK N/A
Standards Supported XML,
22
PC DOCS
The PC DOCS suite of products were developed and sold by PC DOCS Group
International, a Canadian company that was acquired by Hummingbird in 1999.
Hummingbird, also a Canadian company, has a several other enterprise software
solutions that provide access to all business-critical information and resources,
aggregated and categorised through a single user interface. Hummingbird offers these
global enterprise solutions through the desktop and the Web using Hummingbird
Enterprise Portal Suite, the cornerstone of the firm's e-Business solutions. Solutions
include host access /network connectivity, data transformation and integration, data
mining, knowledge management, structured data base management tools, and analytical
solutions for telecoms, financial institutions and health care industries.
Their mainstream document management product is PCDOCS. The basic enterprise

suite offers document management, imaging and routing capabilities. The three main
components of the DOCS Enterprise Suite are:
DOCS Open A client-server product enabling users to store, locate and manage
information across a wide range of platforms and networks.
DOCS Imaging Tightly integrated Windows-based client to full DOCSFusion
document management functionality.
DOCS Routing Which enables the routing of documents for review, comment
addition, and status checking.
Other options include modules for linking, managing and publishing collections of
documents, access for users who are not connected to the network, integration with
Lotus Notes databases and ME Exchange public folders, and an application for mid-
sized law offices.
On the surface, the PCDOCS suite would appear to be a strong competitor to eCabinet.
They certainly cover a wide range of document management aspects. Of particular
concern, from a competitive perspective, is their ability to do workflow (e.g. versioning
and routing). The key differentiator between the eCabinet approach and PCDOCS is in
the capture area. While eCabinet has the ability to capture documents automatically
from a number of network-attached peripherals (scanners, Faxes, copiers and printers),
PCDOCS, like many other competitors must rely on the availability of electronic
documents, or must input documents via manual scanning operations.
In the area of pricing, eCabinet has some advantages. Based on a typical scenario (e.g. a
50 user work group), PCDOCS would cost in the neighbourhood of $22,450.
In September of 2000 Hummingbird announced the introduction of a new client served

based DM system, along with an aggressive program to migrate existing PCDOCS
customers to its new three-tiered document management products. The product
effectively provides the same functionality as the entire PC DOCS suite, however, it is
delivered more as a complete solution, as opposed to a core product with many add on
options.
23
There are three components of new product:
DOCSFusion the underlying engine for their solutions.

CyberDOCS the WEB connection to DOCSFusion and DOCS Open libraries. The
CyberDOCS web client, complemented by CyberDOCS Routing, facilitates
document-centric route processes among knowledge workers.
PowerDOCS the Windows-based client that provides full DOCSFusion document
management functionality. PowerDOCS also now includes flexible application
integration as well as installation and configuration wizards to simplify deployment.
The three-tier suite is strongly integrated with Hummingbird Enterprise Portal Suite.
Further, it can be easily combined with Hummingbirds existing Knowledge
Management tools. The Fulcrum KnowledgeServer suite allows users to access
disparate information repositories in a single query. Supported repositories include
Lotus Notes, MS Exchange and popular databases. Hummingbird also offers a Storage
Management Solution (SMS). The ImageBASIC SMS (Windows NT-based) supports
magneto-optical jukeboxes with RAID cache, or RAID-only systems and can be
integrated into vertical applications with as few as six lines of code.
It would appear that Hummingbird is narrowing their strategic focus to Information

Portals; they continue to customise their technologies and products to meet the needs of
very large eBusiness enterprises. If their main focus is aimed at supporting large
enterprise Information Portals, one might question how much attention will be given to
supporting future versions of client-server document management solutions.
24
PC DOCS OpenDOCS Comments

Positioned as
Number of simultaneous Not specified
users
Capture Sources
Electronic files Yes Folder management requires optional
DOCS RM application
Printers ?
Copiers ?
Scanners Yes optional DOCS Imaging application required
Faxes Yes- optional DOCS Imaging application required
MFPs ?
other Optional - AutoCAD and other Rocket Link and Rocket Review
engineering drawings applications required
Add/modify meta data ?
Multiple server searches Yes cross-repository connections can be
established
Collaboration Yes Optional DOCS Routing required
Create and share ?
Versioning Yes
Check in/out Yes
Read only option ?
Work Flow capability Yes Optional DOCS Routing required
Annotation Yes
Integration into Microsoft Yes Outlook, Windows 3.11, 95, and NT not
Office Win 98 or 2000 support
Archiving yes Additional application requires
Document distribution Yes - optional DOCS Routing application required
Electronic signature No
Localised ?
Security Yes For documents, individuals and groups
Repositories Supported Lotus Notes, MS Exchange, additional applications required
Server platforms NT Server , Novell NetWare
supported 3.x/4.x, , UNIX
Scalable Yes
Price: $349/user (plus a SQL server) for Does not include any optional modules
DOCS Open application
Priced comparably 50 users + server = approx.
equipped to eCabinet $22,450
Support ?
SDK Yes
Standards Supported
25
DOCUWARE
DocuNet AG, a German-based company, was founded in 1988 to focus on electronic

archiving applications. Their first product was a hardware offering aimed at scanner
control and compressing/decompressing graphic files. Subsequently, they released their
flagship DocuWare product, a modularised offering aimed at the document
management market. They claim over 4000 installations world-wide.
They have aligned with Xerox and NRG (Nashuatec, Rex-Rotary, Gestetner) as
strategic partners. In August 2000, DocuNet AG changed their name to DocuWare AG.
DocuWare 4 allows you to handle and administer all kinds of different scanned
documents and Windows documents. The latest version, DocuWare 4.1, contains an
optimised TIFFMAKER for the fully automatic storage of Windows documents and an
integrated client/ server database based on MS SQL 7.
The basic package provides the following functions:

Capture, manually index, and storage of electronically- generated documents
Document search
Document annotation
Storage management and archiving (Backup to CD)
Integrated MAPI and FAX functions;
Limited document routing capability
In addition to the basic package, DocuWare offers a series of add-on modules for
various additional functions. These modules include:
AUTOINDEX - Automates adding keywords based on a user defined field.

Numbers, names, or values assigned to a document by another application (i.e.
accounting software) are automatically saved as a key word assuming the users can
identify a specific field were the data is to be found.
FULL TEXT OCR and text extraction. This module is required for full content
/full text search capability. It is important to note that for networking purposes, this
capability is only supported under NT Win 95/98 can use it but only on a
standalone workstation basis.
INTERNET-SERVER 2 This capability, which is only usable with Windows NT
4.0 or Windows 2000, enables browser-based searching of multiple DocuWare
repositories over the Internet.
Barcode recognition and zone OCR capability.
COLD/READ This package provides archive of COLD media capability to CDs.
CDREQUEST: Retrieval of documents, view and print TIFF, JPEG files and COLD
records directly from an archived CD. (no client software is required)
ODBC Enables the integration of an ODBC database, such as Oracle or Microsoft
SQL Server, into the document management system as an alternative to DocuWare's
standard database.
CONNECT to R/3 interface enabler to allow search and retrieve SAP R/3 created
documents.
DocuWare has the same starting positions as other software-based document

management systems, such as a standard package that does not include OCR or text
extraction capabilities. Furthermore, scanned and electronic documents are the only
input source. DocuWares approach is to offer multiple single- function add-ons thus
26
effectively differing from eCabinets approach of providing a complete solution in a
single package.
Competitive advantages:
Automatic generation of keywords from a specific field or zone (option)
Annotation
Barcode recognition and zo ne OCR capability (option)
Integration with SAP R/3 (option)
ODBC integration (option)
Manual indexing (optional auto indexing is available)
Back up capabilities limited to CD. Back up equipment must be purchased
separately.
No automatic capture scheduling
No capture from copies or printers
27
DocuWare 4.1 Comments

Positioned as Application to handle and
administer all kinds of different
scanned documents and Windows
documents
Number of simultaneous Not specified
users
Capture Sources
Electronic files Yes
Printers No
Copiers No
Scanners Yes Captured via a PC
Faxes Yes
MFPs ?
other Optional: SAP reports, COLD
data
OCR/full text indexing Optional Standard package all indexing is
Search by metadata Yes manual. Bar code and zone OCR options
also available
Add/modify meta data Required manual process Limited zone indexing capability is
optional
Multiple server searches Optional
Collaboration No
Create and share No
Versioning No
Check in/out No
Read only option ?
Work Flow capability Yes -- Limited
Annotation Yes Overlay capability
Integration into Microsoft No
Office
Archiving CD-ROMs No juke box support
Document distribution Yes Limited
Localized 10 Languages
Security Yes
Repositories Supported SAP R/3, OBDC databases Optional: some level of programming
(Oracle, MS SQL) required for integration
Server platforms ??
supported
Scalable ?
Price: unknown
Priced comparably ?
equipped to eCabinet
Support ?
SDK ?
Standards Supported
28
DOCUMENTUM 4 I EB USINESS EDITION
Documentum 4I eBusiness Edition is a platform for building enterprise level, end to end
content management solutions, addressing content creation and mana gement, web site
management and content delivery and deployment. Documentum is converting their
core product strength of document management to web content management. They
continue to provide traditional document management functions, such as library and
document management, electronic and paper capture, document distribution, workflow,
versioning, annotation, browsing, viewing and retrieval. However, the 4i Edition adds
several key web content and management features, including web publishing, high-
speed delivery of content, site management and content personalization.
Documentum is targeting Global 2000 and Internet companies in a variety of industries

(manufacturing, pharmaceutical, financial services, engineering, construction and
telecommunications) where the need to manage content is considered mission critical.
Documentum 4i enables these e-business-critical applications:
Commerce sites fuelled by product catalogues and other Web content

Portals that transform massive amounts of disparate internal content into
organised, functional intranets, serving multiple languages and world-wide
locations
Business-to-business exchanges powered by e-business transactional content
Corporate "libraries" or "vaults" for managing published, business-critical
content in a centrally accessible repository
Compliance with standards and regulatory rulings that govern how a company
does business
The solution is primarily a development platform, as opposed to an out of the box

solution, with a getting started price tag of well over $200,000. Generally, it is not
considered a direct competitor to the eCabinet.
29
Documentum 4i Comments
eBusiness Edition
Positioned as Customized, end to end content
management solutions
No. of simultaneous users Benchmarked with 2,000 users
Capture Sources
Electronic files Browser accessible and drop and
drag from file systems
Printers ?
Copiers ?
Scanners Optional DocInput module $6,500 38,000 option
Faxes Yes
MFPs ?
other Optional: SAP reports, CAD files,
COLD data
OCR/full text indexing Yes/Yes DQL queries and zone searching
Search by metadata Yes Limit of 5 indexing fields
Add/modify meta data
Multiple server searches yes
Collaboration yes Change control notification via email
Create and share ?
Versioning Yes
Check in/out Yes
Read only option yes
Work Flow capability Yes
Annotation yes
Integration into Microsoft yes
Office
Archiving Yes: Near line and off line Migration from magnetic to optical,
optical jukeboxes or to tape back up
Document distribution yes
Electronic signature yes
Localised English, French, Japanese (Kanji)
German, Korean, Arabic
Security Yes Operating system, database, application,
user and objects
Repositories Supported Lotus Notes, SAP R/3 SAP connector: $180 300 per seat
Server platforms UNIX (Sun, HP or IBM), Win
supported NT, MS IIS
Scalable yes
Price : Basic N/A
Office N/A
Enterprise $150,00 to 200,000 minimum
Priced comparably N/A
Support ?
SDK Yes
Standards Supported XML, ODMA
30
OTG
OTG Software is a provider of online storage management and access solutions,

including a dynamic email management solution. OTGs software enables enterprises to
store, track and retrieve data over a variety of network architectures, including the Web
and storage area networks. OTG empowers storage by combining storage with access
and email management, as well as integration with popular databases. The
XtenderSolutions suite supports several applications for Windows based applications.
ApplicationXtender is the core data management solution for organising and storing
data in user-defined applications. OCR, intelligent indexing, organisation, storage and
retrieval functions are supported for virtually any type of content (images, documents,
spreadsheets, voice, video, x-rays, drawings, reports, etc.)
Other add on modules provide:

Support for remote (web based) access over a corporate intranet or the Internet,
Intelligent email storage, indexing, archiving, and retrieval for MS-Exchange, Lotus
Notes, and UNIX Sendmail email applications.
Workflow process and customisable models for collaboration and document
distribution.
Automated forms processing and management capabilities. The E&H FORMS front
end (sold separately) can read, interpret and process invoices without pre-
programming or user intervention. Forms can be captured from paper, fax or the
Internet, and then transferred to the target storage system.
Managing and accessing data recorded to CD-ROMs and CD-Rs in libraries, disc
changers, towers and single drives within the network environment.
Electronic storage, archiving, and managing computer-generated output data/reports.
A second integral part of the OTG solution is the DiskXtender solution that turns NT
and UNIX file systems into virtualised infinite disks. The solution enables data
movement and applications across the enterprise and network, while transparently
tracking and managing stored file locations. Features include customisable file
management, NTFS space management, and transparent data migration of least used
data and removable media management. They claim that the DiskXtender solution is the
only available product that supports erasable optical, WORM, CD-ROM, DVD, and
tape media under a single, heterogeneous solution. RAID to RAID (hard drive arrays)
management and integration functionality will also be available in an upcoming release.
SANXtender provides bi-directional management and access to data stored in storage
area networks (SANs).
OTG has OEM relationships with Advanced Financial Solutions, Agilent Technologies,
which is a subsidiary of Hewlett-Packard, Cerner, Data General, which is a division of
EMC, FileNet, Imation, Legato Systems and StorageTek, among others.
OTG is exploring the Internet service provider (ISP) and application service provider
(ASP) markets. Once launched, the XtenderSolutions will be available through ASPs
and ISPs for application leasing utilizing a metered utility model. Access to any variety
of remote storage media (secondary RAID, and/or removable media devices) through
workstations or corporate file servers will be leased to customers with advanced features
including authentication protocols, disk quotas, user account management, billing, and
reporting.
31
Workflow collaboration and Annotation

Integration into email applications (MAPI and Vendor Independent Mail (SMI)
Database support (OLE DB, ODBC complaint, Oracle, SQL)
Supports high volumes of scanned documents
Price: 5 user license for ApplicationXtender only - $17,500

No automatic capture procedure (copied documents must be manually scanned)
32
OTG XtenderSolutions Comments

Positioned as data storage and management positioned to take advantage of the latest
solutions Internet and e-commerce trends
Number of simultaneous ?
users
Capture Sources
Electronic files Yes Xrays, video, voice, drawings
Printers Yes LPT and Network print server
Copiers No
Scanners ISIS, Kofax Images Controls 3, automated indexing, automatic form ID
TWAIN and accurate zonal OCR and ICR with
Ascent Capture. Internet capture from
scanners at remote sites
Faxes Yes Network FAX server, Castelle FaxPress,
Right Fax
MFPs ?
other Email: MS MAPI, Vendor EmailXtender provides intelligent email
Independent Mail (SMI) storage, indexing, archiving, and retrieval
for leading email applications
OCR/full text indexing Yes Boolean search capability

Search by metadata
Multiple server searches Yes (?)
Collaboration Yes
Create and share ?
Versioning ?
Check in/out ?
Read only option ?
Annotation Yes
Integration into Microsoft Yes
Office
Archiving Yes Optical tape,, DVD-RAM, CD-ROM,
NFS, local or shared network drive
Document distribution Yes
Electronic signature ?
Localized ?
Security
Repositories Supported Tivoli Storage Manager, OLE BD ODBC compliant data bases, SQL, Sybase
SQL
Server platforms supported NT and UNIX
Scalable Yes
Price: $17,500 for 5 seats Basic Xtender application only. No storage
$78,500 for 50 users management
Priced comparably $78,500 +
Support ?
SDK Yes
33
Positioning
eCabinet 2.1 is NRGs first network office appliance. It provides superior document
consolidation, comprehensive digital indexing, and straightforward retrieval for both
paper and electronic documents. These documents may be captured from various
sources on the network, such as printers, fax machines, copiers, PCs and scanners.
Target Customers
Workgroups of 10 to 50 employees
Information intensive companies or departments
Small businesses and corporate departments
Target Decision Making Unit (DMU)
Rackmount Desktop
Financial Director Financial Director
Office Manager IT Manager
Purchase Manager Office Manager
IT Manager Purchase Manager
The target DMU for eCabinet 2.1 is the same as for version 1.1. All Marcoms and PR
material will therefore be updated to reflect the additional features of the new product
rather than to reposition it.
Target Markets
eCabinet 2.1 will be available to all operating companies.
Target Channels
eCabinet will be sold mainly through the direct sales channel. In the mid-term eCabinet
might create an opportunity to develop Value-Added-Reseller and Systems Integrator
Channels.
Sales Approach
eCabinet is an application for which a single selling strategy is hard to define: every
application in every vertical market will require a different approach, which is
application-driven. Experience in other markets has shown that in order to sell the
eCabinet successfully it is required to focus quickly on certain, well-defined
applications. The in-built flexibility of the eCabinet might lead one to sell it in a very
broad area of applications, but this will lead to customers expectations being wrong
and too high.
34
Niches in which eCabinet can be sold:
Vertical markets:
Financial institutions - contract management;
Logistics companies shipping documents;
Legal companies - contracts;
Government organisations personnel files;
Insurance companies - policies;
Construction firms drawings and designs;
Application areas:
Marketing departments advertising designs;
Human Resource departments - personnel files;
Logistics departments shipping documents;
Invoicing invoice archiving
These areas will have to be exploited with specific applications for each area.
Revenue Generation
Broadly, there are four different ways of selling the product to a customer:
Sell it as a box:
Advantage: easy to administer
Disadvantage: one-off deal with limited follow-up and customer lock-in;
Rent/lease it as a box:
Advantage: customer lock- in;
Disadvantage: not usage-driven
Rent it to a customer, while the customer is charged on a usage-measure (Pay-per-

View):
Advantage: customer lock- in and usage-driven;
Disadvantage: hard to implement and administer in current systems:
Just rent the usage, while keeping the eCabinet off-site (Application Service Provider
concept):
Advantage: best possible returns and usage of resources;
Disadvantage: very hard to implement, while concept is relatively new
However, for Operating Companies, the eCabinet will also be an important source for
extra revenue streams:
Delivery & Installation: connecting the device to the network and installation of the
PC-capture software on each client-PC;
Training: users and administrators on the use of the solution;
Support: support packages like the ones common in the IT- industry can be provided
with eCabinet;
Consultancy: based on the specific application for a specific company, eCabinet can
be configured differently (keywords, search patterns, etc.). In the future:
configurations per vertical market can be defined, thereby creating a pre-
configured tool or
with the SDK that comes with the software, integration with other systems
within a customers organisation can be realised.
35
Key Features & Benefits

eCabinet 2.1 offers the following key customer benefits:
Efficient and Easy Operation
Fast and easy document retrieval through full- text and keyword searches.
Innovative visua l display of documents for fast inspection.
Automatic OCR and indexing enables full- text search on both electronic and paper
documents.
Capture through already existing network attached peripherals, printers, scanners,
copiers, etc. faxes, e- mail, and othe r paper documents.
Automatic processing of documents.
Simple user interface, accessible through common web browser interfaces.
Office Efficiency
eCabinet can be tailored to your companys needs through classification and

organisation of documents into fo lders, the attaching of keywords, and the option of
setting up workgroups, users, etc.
Seamlessly integrates paper-based and digital documents and stores them in one
centralised location.
Low Total Cost of Ownership - Easy to Install & Maintain
Easy to install and administer because of its single-purpose design;

Easy to connect with ethernet.
No User-training needed
No license fees
Low maintenance through high reliability and automated data backup
Eliminates cost of file cabinets and storage space.
Minimises downtime because it is a reliable single-purpose appliance.
Scalability and Security
Multiple e-cabinets can be connected to allow the sharing of documents between

several workgroups within one location or for linking remote offices.
Access to system is restricted to authorised personnel only through password
protection.
Documents can be secured and made viewable to individual users, groups, or all
valid users.
Limited network traffic
36
Applications
eCabinet serves the needs of departmental workgroups in corporations and smaller

companies and is optimised to support up to 50 employees. These customers are poorly
served by today's document management systems that are either too simplistic or far too
complex and expensive to set up and use for day-to-day document handling needs.
With eCabinet, customers will finally have an office information management solution
that lets them easily access and exchange paper and electronic documents without
disrupting their existing workgroup or business environments.
However, given the flexibility of the applications for eCabinet, it becomes very hard to
sell it: customers will need more and better defined applications that relate to their
environment/business model. eCabinet will require a vertical marketing approach in
order to be sold. The following is a table of top target organisations/industries and likely
usage:
Market
Typical Applications Requirements eCabinet Advantages
Segment
Financial Audit Reports, Financial *Store duplicate and triplicate *Frees clerical staff to focus on
Statements, Proposals/Agreements, copies of documents. more valuable tasks and reduces
Invoices/Receipts, Tax Statements, need for additional staff
Expense Reports
*Maintain all client records for 7 *More efficient search and
years. retrieval process for increased
overall productivity.
*Large physical storage space *Recover lost space and facilities
requirements. for physical storage.
*Data Security. *Multiple levels of data security.
Insurance Applications, claims, policies, *Maintain copies and records of *Provides faster information
reports claims and customers. access for faster processing and
improved customer
responsiveness
*Duplicate and triplicate copies *Customer policie s and records
for back up and cross referencing. are updated in a timely manner
*Eliminate the need for multiple
copies and manual cross
referencing systems
Human Employment records, benefit *Maintain various employee files *Maintaining and updating
Resources packages, regulatory documents employee data through a single
file access
*Data Security. *Increase data security
Legal Sales and Purchase Agreements, *Extensive filing systems to hold *Reduction of physical and
Invoices/Receipts, Correspondence, various types of documents financial burden associated with
Evidence, Summons, Case manual filing systems.
References
*Client records are stored at least *Vast repository of storage
three years resources
*Information Security *Increased data security and

client privacy
Medical Patient Records and Test Results, *Multiple copies of same *Maintain up to date records
Consent Forms, Accounting documents filed under different
Statements headings
37
*Information is shared between *Eliminate need for duplicates
departments that may be and triplicate copies and manual
physically separated cross filing systems
*Information needs to be accurate *Reduce physical space for
and up to date storage and associated costs
*Reduce errors from manual data
entry
*Information Securit y *Increase data security and
patient privacy
Government Documents, Forms, and Filings that *Information is shared between *Provides a central location for
are part of every government bureau departments and needs to be records with easy access
and agency updated in a timely manner
Multiple copies are typically *Information is updated in a
maintained timely manner timely
*Data Security. *Increased data security
Real Estate Customer Data, Mortgage *Property history tracking *Easy searching by address or
Applications, Home Data Sheets customer
*Customer and property specific *Reduce physical space for
filing needs storage and associated costs
*Provides faster information
access for faster processing and
improved customer
responsiveness
38
Marketing Communications
Establish NRGs position as a company that can offer Total Document Solutions
Position eCabinet 2.1 as an easy-to-use, network-based document storage and

retrieval solution for the server environment of small to medium sized companies
Position eCabinet 2.1 as one of the first products that is representative of a new
paradigm, the Network Office Appliance
39
Logistics
Type Product Name Description
Core eCabinet 2.1 eCabinet Information appliance
(European Version) (Desktop version)
Language Support
UK English
French
German
Dutch
Italian
eCabinet Configuration - (Effective June 2001)

General Information Universal
Product Name eCabinet
Product Model C990-04
EDP Code 411068 (EU)
Software version eCabinet 2.1
6 User Interfaces (3)

eCabinet 2.1
Product Description 17 OCR Dictionaries
Multiple
Data Replication
languages
Hierarchical Folders
Company Name Branding 5 Brands
Ricoh
Nashuatec
Branding Labels (not pasted but
Rex Rotary
included)
Gestetner
Nashua, SA
Manufacturer's Name on Rating Plate Ricoh eCabinet
Serial No. Pre-fix H57
Voltage / Frequency 110V/220V, 50/60Hz
Power Source Manual Switching
LCD Display Graphic
UL/CUL
Product Safety & regulation Marks CE
(On the back of the machine) EMC/EMI
FCC Class B Digital
40
Inbox content
OS/ Application Software CD 2.1
PC Capture
SW Multiple languages for 2.1
Netscape
Client SW CD ROM Acrobat
Reader
Internet
Explore r
User Documentation CD eCabinet 2.1 Multiple languages
In-Box Contents Sheet

Installation & Administration Guide
User Reference
(4)
Printed Material - English US only Software License Agreement sheet
Product Registration Card
Hardware
CD Wallet
Power Cord (4 ft.) US or EU
LAN Cable (6 ft.) Included
Blank DVD RAM Disk 2 units Included
Package Design
Material Colour Brown
Printed Logo eCabinet
Brand Name No Brand
Ecology Mark Recycle mark
(105 mm x 80
Space for Bar Code Label (4-sides)
mm)
This side up
Keep dry
Symbols on Package box
Fragile
8 stack high
Ricoh Silicon Valley Inc.
Manufacturer's marks on box
Assembled in USA
Product Code Yes
Bar Code
EDP Code Yes
Label
Serial number code Yes
Shock Watch None
(3)
Multi - languages U/I in 6 countries = English (US), English (UK), Dutch, German, French, Italian
(4)
English (US) Only, ESSC to provide printed copies for international version
41
Component Dimensions Weight (g) Notes

Corrugated shipping container
eCabinet hardware 427mm x 492 22 lbs
mm x 309 mm
IN BOX Contents:
In Box List of Contents
User Reference 5.5 x 8.25 On CD
Administration and Installation 5.5 x 8.25 On CD
guide
Customer support card To be locally
supplied by
REBV
Hardware Warranty card TBD based on
local
requirements
Product Registration card To be locally
supplied by
REBV
2 blank single sided DVD RAM
disks in floppy style case
Software License Agreement sheet
CD Wallet:
User Documentation CD
Brief Tour
User Reference
Install & admin guide
Tutorial
Client CD ROM including:
PC Capture
Internet Explorer 5.0
Adobe Acrobat Reader
Netscape Navigator 4.x
Operating software
LAN cable 7 feet
Power cord C Type 6 feet
1 Brand Label Ricoh NRG labels ordered
separately
42
Compatible Capture Devices
eCabinet 2.1
Document Scanning Devices

Interoperability Specification:
Must support TCP/IP, 10/100BaseT connectivity and have the ability to create emails.
Examples:
SC430dc with Network Option
Axis700 and attached scanning devices
HP Digital Sender line
Faxes
Must support TCP/IP, 10/100BaseT connectivity and have the ability to send email.
Examples:
E40 (9940/P694/6994)
E99 (9980/P699/6999)
Panasonic DX-1000
Panasonic DX-2000
Document Printing Devices

Must support TCP/IP, 10/100BaseT connectivity, and must support LPR and SMB
protocol, and must support PostScript
Postscript Level 1, 2 and 3 and PCL5 and PCL6 version 1 (ver. 2 is being tested)
Paper sizes supported: 81/2 by 11, 8 by 14, A4, A5
Examples:
HP LaserJet 4050TN with network option
Xerox Docuprint N32 with network option
Ricoh AP 450 with network option
Copiers
Must support TCP/IP 10/100BaseT connectivity and have ability to send copies as
emails
Examples:
Ricoh Aficio 220 with ICB1
Notes: Peripherals meeting the Interoperability Specifications are expected to be

compatible and operate as described. Vendors are encouraged to do self-certification
via RSV's Open Certification Process. If a problem is encountered with a peripheral
AND the vendor has successfully performed self-certification, RSV will assume
responsibility for the problem.
43
Installation & Administration Overview

Installation
General Set-up Considerations and Limitations
Prior to commencing the installation of an eCabinet, it is necessary to complete a CII

(Critical Installation Information) to ensure a smooth and fast installation. The survey
includes information on the network configuration, as it applies to the LAN
environment, IP addresses, devices or peripherals to be connected to the eCabinet and
the assigning of an IP address and domain name for the eCabinet.
eCabinet
Installing and configuring the eCabinet involves the following major steps:
1. Installing the eCabinet on the network.

2. Assigning a network address to the eCabinet using the keypad.
3. Connecting/identifying the capture devices attached to the network.
4. Creating an initial set of users and/or groups.
5. Installing PC Capture on the client PCs.
6. Test the systems.
PC Capture (Client)
1. To install and configure PC Capture, on a client PC, you must have administrative
privileges.
2. Insert the eCabinet Client Software CD into the CD-ROM drive of the PC (note, in
eCabinet 2.1 you have the option to download the PC Capture software directly
from the eCabinet)
3. Follow the installation wizard instructions to install and set preferences.
4. Install (if desired) browser, Adobe Acrobat Reader and the WinZip utility.
5. Create one or more printers for print capture (If desired).
44
System Administration
An eCabinet administrator will have the capabilities to modify system settings, monitor
the document capture and back up process and check other system behaviours. In
addition, the eCabinet administrator will be able to search for and access all captured
documents.
The eCabinet administrative functions include:
Settings : Manage and edit users and group accounts, manage folders, set network
connections and configuration, and set capture control
Back up Administration: Manage backup, recover data & settings and index
management
System Status : Information about the status of media storage, document processing,
connected devices and view error messages
LCD/Keypad interface : Access disks (back up media and software upgrades),

manually configure the eCabinet address and reset the system
There are two other types of administrators set by the eCabinet administrator:
Folder Administrators: can create edit and/or delete group and user-owned folders.
Document Administrators : a so called Super User that has full rights to search for
and retrieve all captured documents, regardless of the access rights that have been
assigned by the document owners.
Additional Information
Batch Scanning with Kofax Ascent
processing capabilities. Ascent Capture enables the user to verify scanned
documents, validate extracted data, index them for later retrieval, design keyword
notes and custom fields at time of capture for easy document retrieval, and route
them directly into folders on eCabinet. Ascent Capture automatically identifies
forms and performs highly accurate recognition of handwriting (ICR), machine print
(Accents OCR automatically overrides eCabinets own OCR functions), check
marks (OMR), and bar codes to extract even the toughest data from scanned images
with no problem. With the addition of Ascent Capture Internet Server, remote
offices can easily scan documents for processing at a central location, saving time
and shipping costs and eliminating the possibility of lo st documents.
This software is available in Europe and may be launched as a +Partner in the

future.
ICB-1 Power Supply
Ricoh Ltd. has informed RSV that effective July 1, 2001 according to the new EC
regulation ICB-1 power supply will not be compliant with new regulations.
45
Applications that have a MIME type
Applications that have a MIME type can be opened within Web browsers. Either the
browser will display the file, or the native application will be launched and display the
file. These are known as helper applications. Most of the commonly used
applications (word processors, spreadsheets, graphics programs) have MIME types and
are easily opened within a browser. Application version makes no difference; only
MIME type. To check to see if an application has a MIME type:
- Internet Explorer
From the Desktop, open any folder and select the View menu and Folder Options
menu item. Select the File Types tab. Scroll to find the file type you are looking for
from the registered file types list. There are three categories: Extension, Content
Type (MIME), and Opens with. Check to see if there is a listing in the MIME field.
If so, then it should open in the browser.
- Netscape Navigator
Select the Edit menu and Preferences menu item.
Under the Navigator heading, select Applications subheader.
Scroll to find the file type you are looking for from the description list.
There are three categories: Extension, MIME Type, and Handled By. Check to see
if there is a listing in the MIME field. If so, then it sho uld open in the browser.
Applications that DO NOT have a MIME type
Applications that do not have a MIME type cannot be opened within Web browsers.
Browsers will give you the option of saving the file to disk, or possibly selecting the
appropriate application to open it, if it exists on the hard drive.
- Internet Explorer
When attempting to retrieve these files on the eCabinet, the File Download dialogue
will appear. You then have a choice whether to Open or Save the file.
If you select the Open radio button, the Open With dialogue will appear, asking you
to select the appropriate application to open the file.
If you select the Save radio button, the Save As dialogue will appear, allowing you
to save the file to disk.
46
Supported Files
Microsoft Office 95, 97, 98, 2000, ME
Applix Words 4.2
Corel WordPerfect for Windows 5.x, 6, 7, 8
Corel WordPerfect for Macintosh 2, 3
HTML 3.2 compliant
Lotus AMI Pro 2, 3
Lotus AMI Professional Write Plus all versions
Lotus Word Pro 96, 97
Lotus 1-2-3 (DOS/Windows) 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0
Lotus 1-2-3 (OS/2) Release 2
Microsoft Rich Text Format (RTF) 1.x, 2.0
Microsoft Word for Windows 2, 6, 95, 97
Microsoft Word for DOS 4, 5, 6
Microsoft Word for Mac 4.0, 5.0, 6.0
Microsoft Works all versions
Microsoft Write all versions
Text files N/A
XYWrite 4.12
Spreadsheets
Corel QuattroPro 7, 8
Lotus 1-2-3 2, 3, 4, 5, 96, 97
Microsoft Excel 3, 4, 5, 95, 97
Microsoft Works Spreadsheet all versions
Presentation Graphics
Corel Presentations 7.0, 8.0
Lotus Freelance 96, 97
Microsoft PowerPoint 4.0, 95, 97
Publishing Formats
PDF all versions
FrameMaker MIF
Graphics
GIF
Miscellaneous
Text/ascii
Text/enriched
Richtext
email RFC822
News group articles RFC822
SGML
XML
Tab-separated values
47
Compatibility list
eCabinet Peripheral Compatibility

Scanners FAX Machines Printers Copiers
Bell + Howell IS430+ 2 Ricoh FAX4800L HP Laserjet 2100TN Ricoh Aficio
PCL64 , PCL5e 4 , PS4 220 w/ICB1 1
Fujitsu ScanPartner 15C 2 Ricoh FAX5000L HP Laserjet 4050TN Ricoh Aficio
PCL64 , PCL5e 4 , PS4 270 w/ICB1 1
Fujitsu ScanPartner 600C 2 Ricoh Fax 3900L4 HP Laserjet 8100DN
PCL64 , PCL5e 4 , PS4
Fujitsu ScanPartner 93GX 2 Panasonic DX-1000 3 Lexmark Optra S 2455 5
PCL64 , PS4
Ricoh IS450 2 Panasonic DX-2000 Lexmark Optra SE 3455 5
PCL64 , PS4
HP Digital Sender 8100C HP 8100C Digital Sender4 Minolta Pageworks 25 5
PCL5e 4 , PS4
HP Digital Sender 9100C HP 9100C Digital Sender4 Xerox Docuprint N32
Xerox Docuprint N40
Ricoh Aficio 401 w/AXIS print
server (with PostScript option) 3
Aficio 150 PCL64 , PCL5e 4 , PS4
Aficio 350e PCL64 , PCL5e 4 , PS4
Aficio 401 PCL5e4
AP 204 PS4
AP 305 PS4
AP 306 PS4
AP1400 PCL64 , PCL5e 4 , PS4
AP1600 PCL64 , PCL5e 4 , PS4
AP2000 PCL64 , PCL5e 4 , PS4
AP2100 PCL64 , PCL5e 4 , PS4
AP2700 PCL64 , PCL5e 4 , PS4
AP306D PS4
AP4500 PCL64 , PCL5e 4 , PS4
AP505 PCL5c4
48
Footnotes:
1- Unannounced offering
2- Requires AXIS700/7000 Document Server (SCSI connected) between scanner and network
3- Not tested
4- Test in Progess
5- Requires network option
Peripheral Definitions:
* Scanners: Must be network ready and have the ability to create emails OR must use the Access 700/7000 front-
end as an intermediary device (SCSI connected) between the scanner and the network;
* FAX: Must be network ready and have the ability to create emails;
* Printers: Must be network ready, and must support the LPR protocol, and must support Postscript (eCabinet 1.0)
or PCL (eCabinet 1.11 );
* Peripherals meeting the above criteria are expected to interoperate trouble free. Vendors are encouraged to do self
certification through RSVs Open Certification Process. If a problem is encountered with a peripheral AND the
vendor has successfully done Open Certification, RSV will assume responsibility for the problem. Please check
with RSV prior to attaching a new device.
49
Printers Drivers
HP LaserJet 2100TN PCL6, PCL5e, PS
HP LaserJet 4050TN, PCL6, PCL5e, PS
HP LaserJet 8100DN, PCL6, PCL5e, PS
Lexmark Optra S 2455, PCL6, PS
Lexmark Optra Se 3455, PCL6, PS
Minolta Pageworks 25 PCL5e, PS
Xerox DocuPrint N32 PCL6, PCL5e, PS
Aficio 150 PCL6, PCL5e, PS
Aficio 350e PCL6, PCL5e, PS
Aficio 401 PCL5e
AP 204 PS
AP 305 PS
AP 306 PS
AP1400 PCL6, PCL5e, PS
AP306D PS
AP505 PCL5c
MMFPs
Aficio 270 / ICB-1
Other Peripherals
Axis 700
Axis 7000
FaxtraNet
50
Verity Database List
This list contains the file formats that are recognized by the Verity Database.
Document Formats Version

ASCII Text All Picture Formats Version
ANSI Text All AMI Draw Graphics (SDW)
Applix Words v4.2, 4.3, 4.4 Applix Graphics v4.3, 4.4
Groups 3 &
Executables Fax Systems (CCITT) 4
HTML v1.x, 2.x, 3.x Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM)
IBM DCA/RFT vSC23-0758-1 Corel Draw CDR (TIFF Header)
IBM Displaywrite v4, 5 Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)
Lotus AMI Pro v2, 3 Enhanced Metafile (EMF)
Lotus AMI Professional Write Plus JPEG File Interchange Format
Lotus Word Pro v96, 97, R9 Lotus Pic (PIC)
Maker Interchange Format (MIF) v5.5 Mac PICT (raster content)
Microsoft RTF MacPaint (MAC)
Microsoft Word for PC v2,to 5.5 Microsoft Excel Charts
Microsoft Word for Macintosh v4, 5, 6, 98 Microsoft Windows Animated Cursor
Microsoft Word for Windows v2.x, 6.0 Microsoft Windows Bitmap (BMP)
Microsoft Word for Windows 95, 97, 2000 Microsoft Windows Cursor/Icon
Microsoft Works v1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0 Microsoft Windows Metafile (WMF)
Microsoft Windows Write v1.0, 2.0, 3.0 PC Paintbrush (PCX)
Unicode Text Portable Network Graphics (PNG)
WordPerfect v5.x, 6, 7, 8 Sun Raster
WordPerfect for Macintosh v2, 3 SGI RGB
XyWrite v4.12 Truevision Targa
Double -Byte Formats Version WordPerfect Graphics (WPG) v1, 2
Compression, Encapsulation & Security
Lotus Word Pro V96, 97, R9 Format
Lotus 1-2-3 V96, 97, R9 GZ-compression
Lotus Freelance V96, 97, R9 Z-compression
Microsoft Word V6, 95, 97, 2000 Zip Fax Systems (CCITT)
Microsoft Excel V6, 95, 97, 2000 Bin Hex
Microsoft PowerPoint V6, 95, 97, 2000 MIME
Japanese, Korean, Simplified &
Traditional Chinese TAR
*Japanese UUencode
Spreadsheet Formats Version
Applix Spreadsheets v4.3, 4.4
Corel QuattroPro v7, 8
v2, 3, 4, 5, 96, 97,
Lotus 1-2-3 R9
Microsoft Excel v3, 4, 5, 96, 97, 2000
Microsoft Excel for Mac
98
Microsoft Works Spreadsheet v1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0
Presentation formats Version
Applix Presents v4.3, 4.4
Corel Presentations v7.0, 8.0
Lotus Freelance v96, 97, R9
Microsoft PowerPoint v4.0, 95, 97, 2000
Microsoft PowerPoint for Macintosh
51
CRITICAL INSTALLATION INFORMATION
Company: End User
Contact: VAR
Address:
City:
State: ZIP Code:
Phone: ( ) Fax: ( )
E-mail
How will this eCabinet be implemented? Select one or all that apply:
eCabinet Implementation Requirements Yes/No

To capture e-mail POP3 Server
To capture Print Jobs Network PS Printer (It is recommended to create a
second print queue to allow the choice to (1) print
and capture or (2) print and not capture)
To capture selected documents from a Clients PC Install the Client PC Capture software
To capture Fax Correspondence Internet Fax enabled Fax Machine
To capture Scan Network Scanner capable of sending e-mail
To capture Copies A MFP (Multifunction Peripheral) copier or a copier
capable of sending e-mails.
Windows NT Server environment: Unix Server Environment:

Services Yes No Services Yes No
DHCP DHCP
DNS DNS
WINS Mail Server
Mail Server
52
Network Configuration: Equipment Addresses:
Enter the network configuration information for Note name and IP Addresses for each device (i.e., networked PS printer,
eCabinet as it applies to the LAN environment. Internet fax and/or network scanner) to be configured with eCabinet:
Static IP Pathway (enter during
ECabinet IP address Equipment Host Name
addresses install)
ECabinet host name Printer #1 Aficio 270 (PS3) 127.0.0.1 Remote printer name = lp
Net Mask address
Router/Gateway address
(Primary) DNS Server address
(Secondary) DNS Server address
(ISP) DNS Server address
(Primary) WINS Server address
(Secondary) WINS Server address
Workgroup name
Broadcast address
Non-Standard Broadcast address
Mail Server address
DNS Domain
NFS server name
NFS Server IP address or host name
NFS Server storage path
HTTP server name
HTTP server URL
HTTP Authorization key
53
eCabinet 2100 Product Information Guide
PRODUCT
INFORMATION GUIDE
eCabinet 2100

1
Introduction
In order to survive, business develops systems to manage the flow of information throughout
their organisation. From metal filing cabinets to todays multi- million Euro computer-based
document management systems, businesses strive to make the tasks associated with creating,
storing and managing their documents simpler, available to everyone in their organisations
and more cost-effective.
Within organisations, a hierarchy of information has always existed: a continuum of

documents ranging from high- value, high-volume structured documents considered mission
critical to low-volume, low- value ad hoc personal documents.
Early document management systems were developed to address the high value, mission
critical applications area, where customers were most willing to pay to solve problems. More
recently, personal document management solutions were built to address the inadequacies of
the OS-level file find function. Though useful, the limitations of these products have so far
restricted their market acceptance in the business environment.
The middle ground, where documents are mid- volume, mid-value and a mix of structured and
ad-hoc, has the broadest potential market for document management solutions and, to date,
has been underserved. This area is called Workgroup Document Management.
At the same time, in these offices, information exists in a variety of different formats, which
broadly segment into paper and electronic. While technology has rapidly increased the
number of electronic documents used within organisations, analysts confirm that 80% of all
information users interact with, still exists on paper. The ability to manage both seamlessly
defines the usefulness of document management systems.
At each step in the traditional document management process, substantial costs are incurred.
In recent years, shifts in office technology have made document management solutions
progressively simpler, cheaper and more efficient. But, while major progress has been made
in many areas, specific gaps remain. Most importantly, capture technology is not yet cheap
enough, easy enough or subject to accepted standards. Products that successfully address this
issue stand to benefit from a large market opportunity in Workgroup Document Management.
Thats where RSVs Network Office Appliance (NOA) comes into the play: it directly
addresses the Workgroup Document Management opportunity. In contrast to high-end
mission-critical document management solutions, the NOA will require minimal user
maintenance and administration, it will feature easy-to-use client functionality for simple and
quick information access and will scale to the needs of the workgroup. The resulting dramatic
reduction in the total cost of ownership offers NRG the chance to take an early lead in this
market.
The NOA-concept has materialised in an innovative product called eCabinet. The existing
version is widely recognised as a totally new approach that might change the office
environment dramatically. With a unique and modern design, eCabinet 1.1 and eCabinet 2.1
bring document capability to every office. However, market research and focus group
discussions have shown concern with the concept of eCabinet 1.1/2.1, especially with IT-
managers of larger companies.
If used effectively, eCabinet will hold large amounts of information, which although not
necessarily mission-critical, will still be very valuable for the company. This is why IT-
managers of larger companies have a requirement to manage eCabinet in a similar way to
2
other data- and information manage ment services: mounted in a rack and integrated into a
secure, strictly managed environment (eg a server room).
eCabinet 2100 has been developed to target this market, offering larger companies not only an
easy-to- install, manage, use and scale solution for their organisations information sharing
needs, but also one that is fully integrated with their IT-environment.
Establish NRGs position within the Document Management market by introducing an
easy to use, network-based, document storage and retrieval solution for server based
environments
Enhance the value of NRG office equipment with intelligent, networked storage and
retrieval management solutions that empower companies to make efficient and effective
use of their information.
Establish a range of appliance-based solutions for the document- and information

requirements of small, mid-sized and larger companies.
Establish NRGs position as a company that can offer a Total Document Solution to the
IT environment.
Increase the value, turnover and profits per customer by capturing a larger share of the
document cycle.
3
Product Overview
Concept
eCabinet is the first of the so-called Network Office Appliances. A Network Office Appliance
(NOA) can be characterised by three things :
Network: it is connected to a network, be it the Internet or an Intranet;

Office: it is targeted at the workgroup environment and
Appliance: it is as easy to use and install as a normal home appliance, while it adheres to
market standards to ensure the openness of the system.
Within the NOAs, eCabinet is more specifically an Information Appliance, since it will be
used by organisations to manage the information within their organisation more effectively.
The eCabinet is an intelligently designed software and hardware package that specifically
addresses the needs of both small businesses and the enterprise workgroup customer. In
contrast to existing, high-end, mission-critical document management solutions, eCabinet
requires minimal user maintenance and administration, features easy-to-use client
functionality for simple, quick information access and scales to the needs of the workgroup.
Most importantly, eCabinet addresses the capture and retrieval problem by leveraging
existing digital multifunctional peripheral technologies. In contrast to dedicated scanners and
high labour overhead required in traditional document management systems, eCabinet uses
enhanced MFPs, as well as network-attached scanners, faxes, printers, copiers and client
PCs to allow for simple, low-cost, unconscious and intuitive document capture.
Fax Scanned
Management Document
Management
Fax Scanner
Forms
Handling
Printer Foundation Archival

Product File
Integrated Solution
eCabinet Index
Demanded by Offsite
Customers Print Driver Backup Storage
Management
Print Management
4
Product Overview: The eCabinet Solution

The eCabinet 2100 is designed for organizations with a more centralized information
technology (IT) department. The eCabinet 2100 must be installed in a standard 19- inch
computer rack system (which is not provided with the eCabinet).
As a second- generation eCabinet, the eCabinet 2100 represents a perfect marriage between
form and function. The sleek architecture of the eCabinet 2100 measures just 1.75 in height
(1U), perfectly fitting your 19 data centre rack. Like its predecessor, the eCabinet 2100
allows you to capture, file, and retrieve effortlessly any file type from your networked office
peripherals. However, with an increased storage capacity of approximately 50 million
document pages, enhanced processing speeds, and scalability, youll find that the eCabinet
2100 will become both the centrepiece and cornerstone of your IT rack.
Prototype pending release of final hardware
This model complements existing backup and storage implementations at your location.
Instead of including a DVD-RAM, this model comes standard with a CD-ROM drive for
system software installation and other software updates only. Using our new HTTP backup
functionality or an NFS server on your LAN, you can integrate the new eCabinet 2100 model
seamlessly into your existing IT infrastructure.
The design of eCabinet directly addresses the Workgroup Document Management

marketplace. In contrast to existing high-end, mission critical document management
solutions, eCabinet requires minimal user maintenance and administration, features easy-to-
use client functionality for simple, quick information access, and scales to the needs of the
workgroup.
Most importantly, a key design strategy for eCabinet is to facilitate easy document capture
and retrieval by leveraging existing digital Multi-Function Product (MFP) technologies. In
contrast to the dedicated scanners and high labour overhead required in traditional document
management systems, eCabinet harnesses the power of enhanced MFPs, as well as network-
attached scanners, faxes, printers, copiers, and client PCs to allow for simple, low-cost
document information management.
5
eCabinet Major Components
The major components of the eCabinet solution include:
eCabineta dedicated thin server that stores captured documents from MFPs, from client
PCs, or from other sources (i.e. network-attached scanners, FAXes, printers, and copiers).
The eCabinet includes a keypad interface for easy network configuration and a DVD
read/write drive for off- line storage for the eCabinet or a CDROM for the eCabinet 2100.
The PC Capture softwarea program installed on a Windows-based PC that enables the
user to capture selected electronic documents, files, and archived Web pages to the
eCabinet.
A standard PC-based Web browser (i.e. Netscape Navigator or Microsoft Internet
Explorer)used to search the eCabinet for captured documents. Once found, the user can
retrieve a copy of the docume nt to his/her PC. Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.0 is also provided
in addition to the Web browser software (IE 5.5 and Netscape 4.61.)
Note: When retrieving more than one document at the same time, a .zip file is created so a
de-compression software such as WinZip is required.
Note: Users can also capture outgoing or incoming e- mail messages by sending them
directly to a user on the eCabinet.
Main Features list

Localization
- eCabinet System Language

eCabinet comes in six system languages, including Dutch, German, English US, English
UK, French, and Italian.
Install eCabinet on your network, and then select the language to use for the interface. The
document database indexing, the browser-based user interface, the LCD display, and the
date and time will all correspond to both the language and conventions of the country
selected.
Note: If French is selected the date format used is the French date format and not the
Quebecois date format.
6
- PC Capture Language
PC Capture UI is now localized in Dutch, German, English US, English UK, French, and
Italian.
Backup and archiving
Backup and archiving of documents captured on the eCabinet takes place in one of the
following ways, or a combination of several of the following ways:
- Document Backup
eCabinet 2.x provides document security by automatically backing up all your documents
to a preferred secure storage media, including built- in, removable DVD*, on-site NFS,
encrypted Internet-based HTTP, and SEC compliant WORM media.
*Original eCabinet model only, not eCabinet 2100
- Intelligent Document Archiving

eCabinet's ability to archive documents intelligently enables it to accommodate even the
most demanding capture environment. The hard drive holds 25 million document pages
for the eCabinet and 50 million document pages for the eCabinet 2100. Should its hard
drive near capacity, however, eCabinet and eCabinet 2100 begin to clear space by purging
older, rarely-accessed files. But because everything is backed up automatically to secure
storage on any one or a combina tion of removable DVD*, on-site NFS, and Internet-based
HTTP, eCabinet and eCabinet 2100 can still find and retrieve a purged document by
searching its permanent indexed location information to point to the back up copy. By
archiving the location information on its index, eCabinet and eCabinet 2100 provide
unlimited storage space.
* Original eCabinet model only, not eCabinet 2100
Email Notification
eCabinet and eCabinet 2100 automatically alert via email about any problems it has capturing
or processing documents. By entering in an email address (or the address of an
administrator), emails will be automatically sent for certain eCabinet or eCabinet 2100 status
notifications including: DVD Full, DVD Insertion Required for Restore, and Backup Target.
eCabinet and eCabinet 2100 will continue to email daily until the problem has been resolved
and the task can be performed.
7
Centralized Data Sharing across Workgroups And Remote Offices - Data Replication
Data Replication allows both remote and local eCabinet 2.x users to exchange files easily by
automatically forwarding encrypted information from one eCabinet to a network of other
eCabinets. Multiple eCabinets can even be configured to replicate their data to just one
eCabinet, creating a central repository that authorized users can use to access all workgroup
documents. With a high level of fault tolerance, eCabinet 2.x provides the ideal solution for
the management and sharing of documents in an efficient yet secure manner.
a. Uni-directional In which one eCabinet (the capturing eCabinet) replicates all, or

selected documents, to another eCabinet;
Unidirectional
Replication
b. Bi-directional In which two eCabinets are actively capturing documents with

each eCabinet replicating its captured documents (or selected documents) to the
other eCabinet;
Bi-directional
Replication
c. One-to-Many In which one eCabinet replicates all, or selected, documents to

multiple target eCabinets (effectively de-aggregation);
One-To-Many
Replication
d. Many-to-One In which multiple eCabinets replicate all, or selected documents,

to a single target eCabinet (effectively aggregation).
Many-To-One
Replication
8
Because Data Replication can be used to create document identical eCabinets, it also provides
an easily accessed failsafe backup. Even in the event of a catastrophic worksite occurrence,
document management can continue uninterrupted by simply selecting a redundant eCabinet.
eCabinet with Data Replication easily provides multiple workgroups and remote offices with
both document distribution and data aggregation, coupled with a high level of fault tolerance.
Optimization and index rate
The performance of the eCabinet cannot be measured by a single number. There are many
factors to be considered in order to determine the expected performance in a particular
scenario. The main factors that affect the performance of the eCabinet are:
The number of documents in the database
The number of simultaneous queries
The tasks that are being performed by the users, database access versus document
capture
The type of document that is being captured, whether or not it will be OCRd
The length of time that is deemed to be acceptable before captured documents are
available for use
The eCabinet is targeted at workgroups of 20 50 people. The assumption is that in an office,

the logged-on users will not be performing the same tasks at exactly the same time. So
supporting a workgroup consisting of 50 people does not mean that everyone will perform a
search query at the same time, but rather that there will be a flow of inquiries throughout the
day, with some peak hour periods, when workgroups will access the eCabinet. The
expectation is that the normal usage of the eCabinet will represent a balanced tradeoff
between retrieval speed, the ability to handle simultaneous queries, document processing
speed, and the willingness of customers to wait for documents to be available.
The following is a list of performance numbers that can be used as a guideline for expected
levels of performance. This is meant as a calculation example and does not give the maximum
number of document that can be stored on the eCabinet.
Optimal number of supported users: 20 50

Optimal size of database: 500,000 documents (see note) or less
Optimal rate for document capture: 2-3 per minute, 5 pages/document
Expected time to OCR document: 30 seconds
Expected time for non-OCR document: 10 seconds
Expected simultaneous queries 10
Note : Document assumptions

Size of document - 5 pages on average
Page mix - 50-50 graphics-text
Text page - 250 words/page
The above numbers do not take into consideration network performance.
Scheduled Optimisation
As eCabinet captures and files throughout the workday, information is added to the database
to be indexed and deciphered so documents are retrieved via full- text search. eCabinet focuses
9
on this database during its once-a-day optimization, organizing them to keep the database
efficient. This optimized directory helps eCabinet to find the documents needed quickly.
During the optimization process, the document processing stops (documents captured during
this brief period are queued for later capture.) Also the optimization can be scheduled to affect
the fewest users.
User-Adjustable Indexing Rate
User-Adjustable Indexing Rate lets users tailor eCabinets processing rate to match the rate of
documents captured to it on a daily basis.
Even if eCabinet is required to capture over 200 documents a day, per person, the Indexing
Rate can be set to Extremely High. On higher settings, documents take more time to become
available for retrieval, as eCabinet focuses on storing and processing documents.
Automatic Document Routing Rules
Rule-Based Capture Control allows the user to create unique rules for each of the networked
peripherals connected to eCabinet. With Rule-Based Capture Control, it is possible to
assign captured documents automatically to an owner or group, a destination folder, add
keyword notes for simplified retrieval, and make sure that documents go where they need to
go.
By creating a rule for a fax machine, for example, all faxes from a certain phone number are
not only automatically assigned to a specific owner, they can also be transferred into an
eCabinet folder and eCabinet can alert the owner to its arrival via email. By simply
specifying a condition and the resulting actions, eCabinet helps taking control and managing
document overload.
User Interface
- User-Defined Folders
eCabinet 2.x has a hierarchical folder structure that allows folders nesting together,
creating more inclusive folders with smaller sub- groups. Document folder security is
assured because the folder administrator controls who has the read/write privileges,
and retrieval is faster and easier when custom fields have been designated for filing.
- Searching for and retrieving documents

With a standard web browser (i.e. Netscape or Internet Explorer), a user can search for
captured documents on the eCabinet. The search criteria can include text content,
metadata information, folder information, or any combination of these.
A quick search field lets you launch a search from the Home page of eCabinet
10
A Search option lets a user quickly construct a search with the most frequently used
types of criteria.
A More Search Options page offers the full range of document information as possible
search criteria, such as title, time period, etc.
An Expert Search option allows for Boolean searches with nested expressions.
The results of a search appear in one of four possible types of view: List, Calendar, Stream,
and Thumbnail, each designed to provide a certain type of access to the set of found
documents; the first 2 give information on the document the last 2 on the date of capture.
With a simple command, a user can retrieve a copy of a found document to a PC, either in
native or text-only format for most types of documents.
Document distribution, as long as the recipients have document privileges, is as simple as
dragging and dropping links to the file from eCabinet to your desktop; they can be
embedded in email or stored to your local fileserver.
Thumbnails in List View

The List View is the default view for search results, and with the thumbnail option, it is
the most textually and visually rich of the four available views. Arranged in sortable
columns that are reordered by simply clicking a column title, view preferences can be
configured to include information such as creation date, file size, retrieval score,
document title, owner name, and thumbnails, too. So, to get as much information as
possible about search returns, just select the List View.
- One Click Re-Sort in Views

eCabinet's search results can now be reorganized at the touch of a button with One Click
Re-Sort in Views. Click one of the hyperlinked column headers to rearrange and sort
search results, reprioritize recently captured documents to the top of the list or sort the
search results alphanumerically according to document title.
- Accurate, Full-Text Retrieval

eCabinet captures and stores any file type from networked office peripherals - digital
copiers, scanners, fax machines, printers, and desktop computers - making them available
to you right away, when you need them, using intuitive and accurate full- text retrieval.
11
eCabinets full-text searchable index uses the convenience of Web browsers to search for
automatically indexed and extracted document keyword notes, titles, summaries, owners,
source, dates of capture, and other related information. Document retrieval can be
personalized by entering in a summary and keyword notes for the index to store.
- Keyword Search Templates

User-assigned keywords can be attached to documents in several easy ways. A simple
way to add keywords to a document is to highlight an already captured document, and
then choose Notes from the Actions menu. This opens the editing option, displaying
the keyword metadata to enter in new keywords, and create a personal filing system.
Another useful way to use keywords is to create folders on eCabinet that contain Custom
Fields. Custom fields are folder specific keywords that are automatically associated with
every item that is filed into that folder. They can be pre-selected and will appear in a
menu whenever an item is moved into that folder. A folder containing CVs, for example,
could contain pre-selected fields such as Key skills, Desired salary, or Years of
experience, enabling resums based on these custom field criteria to be found later.
PC Capture also allows pre-selection of keywords for documents. Any document sent to
eCabinet by PC Capture will contain keywords entered from the Default Document Info
menu as part of their metadata.
Captured documents information
Documents stored on the eCabinet include several types of information:

Indexed document content. At the time of capture, the system constructs a full text index
and word freque ncy count of the document contents, first performing an OCR (Optical
Character Recognition) scan of the document if necessary. Non-OCRd text (FTPd such
as PC capture files) will be indexed by a different method. eCabinet currently supports 17
language dictionaries for the improved OCR function. The supported languages for
capture and retrieval are : English (US), English (UK), Dutch, Irish/Gaelic, Portuguese
(Brazilian), Swedish, French, German, Italian, Norwegian, Spanish, Danish, Finnish,
French (Canadian), German (Swiss), Portuguese, and Spanish (Mexican).
12
CAUTION: It is recommended that no more than 2 dictionaries be invoked at any one time
in an operational environment because of potential performance impacts. Caere Corp.
developed the software used for the OCR.
Document meta information: document title, date of capture, date of creation, capture
source, notes, summary, and document owner. Title, notes, summary and owner are
editable fields.
Folder information. The eCabinet supports the creation of foldersspecial collections of
documents with user-defined custom and preferred fields. If a document has been added
to a folder, the information about it will include its folder membership and whatever
information the user has entered in the folder fields.
Fax, scanned and printer documents are ocrd and stored as tiff files. Email is stored as
.txt (attachments are stored in native format), and PC documents are captured and stored
in native format.
Note: Documents scanned, copied, or print captured at 600 dpi, are rendered at 300 dpi at the
time of capture on the eCabinet.
Client Application Downloads
PC Capture, Outlook, and Internet Explorer plug- ins are available for download from either
the Web, at www.rsv.ricoh.com, or directly from eCabinets hard drive from the Home page
or the Help page.
Integration with other software
13
14
- Software Developers Kit (launch will happen separately)
eCabinet Software Developers Kit (SDK) is available for creating a customized front-
end to meet the unique needs of a company. Enabling the development of software
hooks, the SDK lets VARs, VADs, and end-users develop value-added software for
personalized document, metadata, and user or group control. (this is under review in
order to establish a good support system for this)
- Web Browser
eCabinets Web browser interface is platform independent, has built- in Internet Explorer
toolbar features, opens PC files automatically in their preferred editor, and enables the
distribution of documents by sharing the links, all from a familiar and intuitive interface.
Using Internet Explorer, it is possible to search eCabinet right from the browsers
toolbar. Recent document search histories are saved in a drop-down menu. (the toolbar is
only available in English)
- Outlook Integration
eCabinet is integrated with Microsoft Outlook, simplifying email management tasks.
Using the built-in Outlook toolbar, drag and drop emails directly into an eCabinet
folder, assign special Custom Fields or case number ID-based retrieval, create summary
and keyword notes, while eCabinet automatically indexes the text and creates a summary.
(integration probably only works with English Outlook)
- PC Capture
Windows-based localized PC Capture software lets the user capture documents from a PC
immediately or according to a regular capture schedule. Immediate capture can be
performed via a one-click method that allows the user to right-click a PC document to
send it to eCabinet or an eCabinet folder for indexing. When capturing a document, it is
possible to assign special custom fields for customer or case number ID-based retrieval,
create a summary and keyword annotations, while eCabinet automatically indexes the text
and creates a summary. It is also possible to capture immediately using the drag and drop
method that has default keyword and folder filing options, and is performed by simply
clicking on a document and dropping it onto the PC Capture icon on your desktop.
Create a capture schedule for a folder on your PC, to create a regular schedule for
automatic document capture. Only new documents or new versions of older documents
that have been added to the folder will be sent to eCabinet. It is also possible to create
custom fields, keyword notes, and summaries to be added to every document at capture.
- Batch Scanning with Kofax Ascent

processing capabilities. Ascent Capture enables the user to verify scanned documents,
validate extracted data, index them for later retrieval, design keyword notes and custom
fields at time of capture for easy document retrieval, and route them directly into folders
on eCabinet. Ascent Capture automatically identifies forms and performs highly accurate
recognition of handwriting (ICR), machine print (Accents OCR automatically overrides
eCabinets own OCR functions), check marks (OMR), and bar codes to extract even the
toughest data from scanned images with no problems. With the addition of Ascent
Capture Internet Server, remote offices can easily scan documents for processing at a
central location, saving time and shipping costs and eliminating the possibility of lost
documents.
Note: This is offered from the USA and is not supported by Ricoh Europe Europe Q1 2002
15
Document security
eCabinet has strong built- in security measures which prevent unauthorized access to both the
eCabinet UI (user interface) and the stored files, while still remaining flexible enough to
allow users various ways in which to access to their documents.
These various levels of access ensure that the security of sensitive files is not compromised,
and yet documents can still be shared with ease.
Account/passwordevery user must have an account and password to access the
eCabinet and search for documents.
Ownershipcaptured documents can have an individual or a group owner. (A group is a
defined set of individual users.) A user can only search for and find documents he/she
owns, documents that are owned by a group he/she belongs to, or documents that are
public. (Conversely, an owner can classify a captured document as public and then
anyone can find it, but only the owner of a public document can modify the document.
Also document administrators can see/modify all documents on the eCabinet, by default
users belonging to the eCabinet NetAdmin group have document administration rights.)
Note: If the capture control rules are not set, a document could have an unknown user. Also
by default, a new printer has unknown as the owner of the documents sent to that printer on
eCabinet.
Installation and setup
The eCabinet system integrates directly into an existing local area network (e.g. Ethernet
10/100BaseT). Field service (e.g. NRG or channel), personnel (or optionally the end user),
performs the installation, which is comparable in effort to the installation of a network-
connected printer.
The eCabinet requires no software installation and provides a keypad interface for direct
network configuration.
An easy-to-use wizard is provided for installation of the PC Capture software.
The installation should also include setting up the peripherals to send documents to
eCabinet, such as automatic email forward, or capture of all faxes.
Administration
There are three types of administrators of eCabinet:

Network administrator who has the capability to modify system settings, monitor the
document capture and backup process, and check other system behaviours.
Document administrator who has the capability to access any captured document on the
eCabinet.
Folder administrator who administers folders.
Note: by default the NetAdmin group has all three roles. More specifically, the administrative
functions are performed via the settings screen.
The settings screen allows the administrator to perform numerous tasks including: set time
and date; change administrator passwords; create other administrators; create users and
groups; create folders; edit users; add new users; set capture control; set replication; set up
printers; configure network settings; change language dictionaries; manage backups; set
backup location; set up backup settings; recover data; recover eCabinet settings (set at
installation time) and set privileges.
16
Competition
The term Document Management has become a catch all term that attempts to describe any
thing and everything that can be done to a document once it is in an electronic format. In
general terms, there are six basic functions that are traditionally associated with Document
Management Systems (DMS):
Capture, OCR and indexing, search and retrieval of typical office documents
Special document management (forms, bar codes, drawings, etc.)
Collaboration, library services (check in/out), versioning and annotation
Work flow and document distribution/routing
Archival and alternative back up solutions
Integration with legacy systems and other applications ( databases, Lotus Notes, MS
Exchange, SAP, etc)
All applications have some form of capturing or importing documents. This is the most basic
document management function. However, few of the popular DMS applications provide a
complete capture solution.
When compared to other DM systems the eCabinet will almost always have competitive
advantages associated with capturing documents. Many competitors lack the ability to capture
or schedule the capture of documents automatically. This is an important point, since the most
vocal critics of DMS claim that requiring people to change their standard work habits is the
one largest factor that limits the usefulness of DMS. Unless all documents are effortlessly
captured, i.e. without manual intervention, it is next to impossible to maintain an accurate and
complete document database. Furthermore, most competitive systems are ill equipped to
capture paper documents. The standard solution is to require the end user to scan all hard
copy documents and then route them to the appropriate storage destination.
Since most all DMS are custom installations, designed to meet each users specific needs, the
complexity and functionality can vary widely from one installation to another. Similarly,
prices vary wildly. An entry- level DM application, which only supports capture, of electronic
documents, basic search and retrieval can be licensed for Euro 500 per seat. A custom
enterprise level system with all the above mentioned functions can cost well over Euro
1,000,000. The eCabinet was not intended to be a fully functional Document Management
system. It was designed to simplify the document capture and indexing process while at the
same time, making the task of document storage and retrieval simple and effortless. In reality,
it does provide the same functionality of several DM solutions. And generally, the eCabinet is
priced lower than systems of equal functionality. It is true that many of the so-called
enterprise level systems provide much more sophisticated tools. However, the purchase
price, as well as the cost of ownership, is often ten times higher than the eCabinet solution.
Another strong competitive advantage lies in the eCabinets appliance implementation. The
eCabinet solution can be integrated into an existing network environment in a matter of hours.
Most other solutions require extensive programming (often resulting in extensive consulting
fees), complicated and drawn out installations, and in some cases, network configuration
modifications. The eCabinet is simply attached to the network. Furthermore, the maintenance
of an appliance type solution is minimal as compared to custom document management
installations.
There are four DMS that compete somewhat directly with the eCabinet: Xerox DocuShare,
Hummingbirds PC DOCS, CyLex I-DOX and DocuWare. A brief summary of each has
been included. It should also be noted that there are many more that fall into the enterprise
17
level category and are therefore not really considered direct competitors. Brief summaries of
Documentum 4i eBusiness Edition, OTG XtenderSolutions and FileNet can also be found in
this chapter.
Finally, it has to be recognised that competitors are developing similar products. Xerox, for
one, is expected to launch a product in the next 6 to 9 months as well, while similar activities
can be expected from Canon. Therefore, it is important to keep first-mover advantage.
XEROX DOCUSHARE
DocuShare Version 2.2 is positioned as a software-based knowledge management product

with collaborative capabilities (versioning, email notification of newly posted documents). It
supports a large number of file types including text, scanned images, video clips, MS Office
documents, sound files, executables, web links, shared calendars and bulletin boards.
Workflow capability is not part of the DocuShare package, however, OakGrove offers a
product (Flowlet) that provides basic workflow functionality.
There are 3 versions offered of DocuShare: Basic, Office and Enterprise. All three versions
have capture capability that is limited to electronic files that are accessible via a web browser.
To add capture capability from MFPs, printers and scanners, the Xerox FlowPort software is
required.
The Basic version, priced at $1,395 for a 25 seat license and basic server software, is browser
based and is not integrated with MS Windows/Office. Further, it has limited security and is
not customisable. The Office version adds MS Office integration, expanded security and
customisation. The price for a 500 seat license and the Office server software is $14,995. The
Enterprise level package is $44,995 for the server software and unlimited seats and offers
easy integration with enterprise level applications such a Oracle databases.
Note: Server hardware and FlowPort software not included in these prices.
The optional FlowPort Document distribution and transformation software offers enhanced
email/messaging, workflow and document management capabilities. It reduces bottlenecks
associated with paper intensive operations by merging paper documents using network
office equipment such a Xerox Document Centre (copier/scanner/printer MFP) and Internet
fax machines. It captures and integrates paper documents into a digital workflow for future
access, retrieval and distribution. This software is required for capturing paper documents
into the DocuShare Knowledge Sharing software. It adds $7,000 per server to the price of
DocuShare. Note: FlowPort must run on a separate server.
Automatic notification, via email, when content is updated or added
Ability to store documents in multiple repositories (Lotus Notes, MS Exchange, iManage,
etc.)
Simultaneous search of multiple servers
Can save complex or frequently used queries
Price: While the Basic version is very inexpensive, its functionality is quite limited. To
achieve functionality comparable to an eCabinet, the price is approximately $27,000.
Granted, the high price tag does have the collaboration and sharing features that are not
available on the eCabinet.
18
DocuShare 2.2 Comments

Positioned as Knowledge Sharing/Management with
collaboration
Number of simultaneous users Not mentioned in any documentation/data
sheets
Capture Sources
Electronic files Yes Video, audio,
Printers Optional requires FlowPort
Copiers Optional requires FlowPort
Scanners Optional requires FlowPort or Paper port PaperPort allows direct drag and drop into DocuShare
Faxes Optional requires FlowPort
MFPs Optional requires FlowPort Xerox Document Centre, HP Digital Sender
OCR/full text indexing Yes Most popular text, WP, spread sheet and presentation
Search by metadata Yes formats (verity 2.3 engine)
Add/modify meta data Yes
Multiple server searches Yes
Collaboration Yes Email notification of updates
Create and share calendars/bulletin Yes
boards
Versioning Yes
Check in/out No (?)
Read only option Yes
Annotation No (?)
Work Flow capability Optional Requires Oak Grove Flowlet software
Integration into Microsoft Office Office and enterprise version only Office and Windows 2000
Archiving ??
Document distribution Optional requires FlowPort
Localised Yes French, German, Italian, Spanish, Br. Portuguese
Security Yes
Repositories Supported FTP, Lotus Notes*, Domino.doc All require FlowPort software. Support planned for MS
Exchange, iManage and Documentum
Server platforms supported NT 4.0, Solaris 2.5/2.6
Scalable Yes: to 1000s of users Pay as you go
Price**: DocuShare Basic server and 25 seat license: no integration w/ MS Office; no ability to capture paper.
Basic $1,395 Limited security
Office Office level server and 500 seat license: Integrated w/ MS Office, customisable, secure, requires
$14,495 client software
Enterprise Enterprise lever server with unlimited seats:
$44,995
Priced comparably equipped to $ 27,995 $14,995 + $7,000 per server for FlowPort +
eCabinet approximately $6,000 for server hardware (2 required)
Price: FlowPort Not clear a custom installation can cost $50,000
Support One year included
SDK Yes
Standards Supported WebDAV, ODMA
* Lotus Notes V4.6 store via SMTP email only: V5.0 store and retrieve not yet available
** Does not include server hardware
19
CYLEX, INC
CyLex Inc. is selling i- DOX, a document management solution service (ASP model) that
looks suspiciously like a subset of the Documentum product (Ttis would make sense
considering that Documentum is a major investor in CyLex.). With the i- DOX service, you
can store text, graphics, scanned images, even sound and digital movies, in a dedicated
Document vault. The service includes full text search (Verity compatible file types only)
and Meta data searching, however, the user must manually create the Meta data for each and
every document. Other features include library services for collaboration (documents check
in/out), version control, and annotation.
A release and upload script is used to capture documents, convert them into XML format
and export them to the i-DOX vault. The capture sources include PCs, file servers and Kofax
scanners, however, documents must be manually captured. Imported documents are OCRd
and indexed for future retrieval. CyLex utilises the latest encryption and verification
techniques to ensure the security of your documents. EMC provides the storage infrastructure
and the retrieval technology.
CyLex has just signed a technology and marketing agreement with ePage Solutions
(Electronic Page Solutions, Inc.), a leading software developer in the Electronic Statement
Presentment (ESP) industry. ePage Solutions provides print data stream transformation
products that transform mainframe data to .pdf files. They will also create an XML release
script that will enable .pdf content to be uploaded to the i-DOX back-end solution. The
resulting solution will enable end- users of legacy systems to use CyLexs ASP-enabled
document management solution for electronic statement presentment.
The compelling value proposition of out-sourcing document management/storage is that no

capital (dollars or equipment) is required. The CyLex typical customer exports 5,000 to
10,000 new documents per month with an average cost of $3,000 to 6,000 per month. The
service is priced based on the number and size of the documents as well as the number of
transactions (exported documents and retrievals). It is not clear if CyLex has a minimum
service fee for low volume users. CyLex also offers a back file conversion service.
Annotation
Remote storage location
Supports relatively high volumes of documents
No capital equipment investment: low cost for low volumes of document transactions
No automatic capture procedure
No capture procedure for copied documents
Meta data must be manually created
No document level permissions
20
CyLex I-DOX Comments

Positioned as document management service solution. Company positioned as Leading document
management applications service provider
Number of simultaneous users Unlimited ? Unclear how many users can simultaneously access one
vault
Capture Sources All capture processes are manual
Electronic files Yes Capture from desktop or server (?)
Printers no
Copiers no
Scanners yes
Faxes ?
MFPs ?
Other Mainframe generated statements
Add/modify meta data Yes/? Meta data must be manually generated
Multiple server searches no
Collaboration yes
Create and share calendars/bulletin no
boards
Versioning Yes
Check in/out Yes
Read only option no
Work Flow capability no
Annotation yes
Integration into Microsoft Office no Import and search wizards are browser based
Archiving ? Probably redundant back ups
Document distribution yes Route to other users inbox
Electronic signature no
Localised ?
Security Yes File encryption, document and group permissions,
individual log on passwords
Repositories Supported none
Server platforms supported N/A
Scalable yes
Price: based on number of documents stored, size of docs and
New documents Variable monthly fee number of transactions (imported and retrieved).
Back file conversion ?
Priced comparably equipped to ? Typical customer spends $3K to 6K per month

eCabinet
Support Yes; included in monthly fee Email and live chat

SDK N/A
Standards Supported XML,
21
PC DOCS
The PC DOCS suite of products were developed and sold by PC DOCS Group International, a
Canadian company that was acquired by Hummingbird in 1999. Hummingbird, also a
Canadian company, has a several other enterprise software solutions that provide access to
all business-critical information and resources, aggregated and categorised through a single
user interface. Hummingbird offers these global enterprise solutions through the desktop and
the Web using Hummingbird Enterprise Portal Suite, the cornerstone of the firm's e-Business
solutions. Solutions include host access /network connectivity, data transformation and
integration, data mining, knowledge management, structured data base management tools, and
analytical solutions for telecoms, financial institutions and health care industries.
Their mainstream document management product is PCDOCS. The basic enterprise suite
offers document management, imaging and routing capabilities. The three main components
of the DOCS Enterprise Suite are:
DOCS Open A client-server product enabling users to store, locate and manage
information across a wide range of platforms and networks.
DOCS Imaging Tightly integrated Windows-based client to full DOCSFusion document
management functionality.
DOCS Routing Which enables the routing of documents for review, comment addition,
and status checking.
Other options include modules for linking, managing and publishing collections of
documents, access for users who are not connected to the network, integration with Lotus
Notes databases and ME Exchange public folders, and an application for mid-sized law
offices.
On the surface, the PCDOCS suite would appear to be a strong competitor to eCabinet. They
certainly cover a wide range of document management aspects. Of particular concern, from a
competitive perspective, is their ability to do workflow (e.g. versioning and routing). The key
differentiator between the eCabinet approach and PCDOCS is in the capture area. While
eCabinet has the ability to capture documents automatically from a number of network-
attached peripherals (scanners, Faxes, copiers and printers), PCDOCS, like many other
competitors must rely on the availability of electronic documents, or must input documents
via manual scanning operations.
In the area of pricing, eCabinet has some advantages. Based on a typical scenario (e.g. a 50
user work group), PCDOCS would cost in the neighbourhood of $22,450.
In September of 2000 Hummingbird announced the introduction of a new client served based
DM system, along with an aggressive program to migrate existing PCDOCS customers to its
new three-tiered document management products. The product effectively provides the same
functionality as the entire PC DOCS suite, however, it is delivered more as a complete
solution, as opposed to a core product with many add on options.
22
There are three components of new product:
DOCSFusion the underlying engine for their solutions.

CyberDOCS the WEB connection to DOCSFusion and DOCS Open libraries. The
CyberDOCS web client, complemented by CyberDOCS Routing, facilitates document-
centric route processes among knowledge workers.
PowerDOCS the Windows-based client that provides full DOCSFusion document
management functionality. PowerDOCS also now includes flexible application integration
as well as installation and configuration wizards to simplify deployment.
The three-tier suite is strongly integrated with Hummingbird Enterprise Portal Suite. Further,
it can be easily combined with Hummingbirds existing Knowledge Management tools. The
Fulcrum KnowledgeServer suite allows users to access disparate information repositories in a
single query. Supported repositories include Lotus Notes, MS Exchange and popular
databases. Hummingbird also offers a Storage Management Solution (SMS). The
ImageBASIC SMS (Windows NT-based) supports magneto-optical jukeboxes with RAID
cache, or RAID-only systems and can be integrated into vertical applications with as few as
six lines of code.
It would appear that Hummingbird is narrowing their strategic focus to Information Portals;
they continue to customise their technologies and products to meet the needs of very large
eBusiness enterprises. If their main focus is aimed at supporting large enterprise Information
Portals, one might question how much attention will be given to supporting future versions of
client-server document management solutions.
23
PC DOCS OpenDOCS Comments

Positioned as
Number of simultaneous users Not specified
Capture Sources
Electronic files Yes Folder management requires optional DOCS RM
application
Printers ?
Copiers ?
Scanners Yes optional DOCS Imaging application required
Faxes Yes- optional DOCS Imaging application required
MFPs ?
other Optional - AutoCAD and other engineering Rocket Link and Rocket Review applications required
drawings
Multiple server searches Yes cross-repository connections can be established
Collaboration Yes Optional DOCS Routing required
Create and share calendars/bulletin ?
boards
Versioning Yes
Check in/out Yes
Read only option ?
Work Flow capability Yes Optional DOCS Routing required
Annotation Yes
Integration into Microsoft Office Yes Outlook, Windows 3.11, 95, and NT not Win 98 or
2000 support
Archiving yes Additional application requires
Document distribution Yes - optional DOCS Routing application required
Localised ?
Security Yes For documents, individuals and groups
Repositories Supported Lotus Notes, MS Exchange, additional applications required
Server platforms supported NT Server , Novell NetWare 3.x/4.x, , UNIX
Scalable Yes
Price: $349/user (plus a SQL server) for DOCS Does not include any optional modules
Open application
Priced comparably equipped to 50 users + server = approx. $22,450
eCabinet
Support ?
SDK Yes
Standards Supported
24
DOCUWARE
DocuNet AG, a German-based company, was founded in 1988 to focus on electronic

archiving applications. Their first product was a hardware offering aimed at scanner control
and compressing/decompressing graphic files. Subsequently, they released their flagship
DocuWare product, a modularised offering aimed at the document management market. They
claim over 4000 installations world-wide.
They have aligned with Xerox and NRG (Nashuatec, Rex-Rotary, Gestetner) as strategic
partners. In August 2000, DocuNet AG changed their name to DocuWare AG.
DocuWare 4 allows you to handle and administer all kinds of different scanned documents
and Windows documents. The latest version, DocuWare 4.1, contains an optimised
TIFFMAKER for the fully automatic storage of Windows documents and an integrated client/
server database based on MS SQL 7.
The basic package provides the following functions:

Capture, manually index, and storage of electronically- generated documents
Document search
Document annotation
Storage management and archiving (Backup to CD)
Integrated MAPI and FAX functions;
Limited document routing capability
In addition to the basic package, DocuWare offers a series of add-on modules for various
additional functions. These modules include:
AUTOINDEX - Automates adding keywords based on a user defined field. Numbers,

names, or values assigned to a document by another application (i.e. accounting software)
are automatically saved as a key word assuming the users can identify a specific field
were the data is to be found.
FULL TEXT OCR and text extraction. This module is required for full content /full text
search capability. It is important to note that for networking purposes, this capability is
only supported under NT Win 95/98 can use it but only on a standalone workstation
basis.
INTERNET-SERVER 2 This capability, which is only usable with Windows NT 4.0 or
Windows 2000, enables browser-based searching of multiple DocuWare repositories over
the Internet.
Barcode recognition and zone OCR capability.
COLD/READ This package provides archive of COLD media capability to CDs.
CDREQUEST: Retrieval of documents, view and print TIFF, JPEG files and COLD
records directly from an archived CD. (no client software is required)
ODBC Enables the integration of an ODBC database, such as Oracle or Microsoft SQL
Server, into the document management system as an alternative to DocuWare's standard
database.
CONNECT to R/3 interface enabler to allow search and retrieve SAP R/3 created
documents.
DocuWare has the same starting positions as other software-based document management
systems, such as a standard package that does not include OCR or text extraction capabilities.
Furthermore, scanned and electronic documents are the only input source. DocuWares
25
approach is to offer multiple single- function add-ons thus effectively differing from
eCabinets approach of providing a complete solution in a single package.
Competitive advantages:
Automatic generation of keywords from a specific field or zone (option)
Annotation
Barcode recognition and zone OCR capability (option)
Integration with SAP R/3 (option)
ODBC integration (option)
Manual indexing (optional auto indexing is available)
Back up capabilities limited to CD. Back up equipment must be purchased separately.
No automatic capture scheduling
No capture from copies or printers
26
DocuWare 4.1 Comments

Positioned as Application to handle and administer all
kinds of different scanned documents and
Windows documents
Number of simultaneous users Not specified
Capture Sources
Electronic files Yes
Printers No
Copiers No
Scanners Yes Captured via a PC
Faxes Yes
MFPs ?
other Optional: SAP reports, COLD data
OCR/full text indexing Optional Standard package all indexing is manual. Bar code and
Search by metadata Yes zone OCR options also available
Add/modify meta data Required manual process Limited zone indexing capability is optional
Multiple server searches Optional
Collaboration No
Create and share calendars/bulletin No
boards
Versioning No
Check in/out No
Read only option ?
Work Flow capability Yes -- Limited
Annotation Yes Overlay capability
Integration into Microsoft Office No
Archiving CD-ROMs No juke box support
Document distribution Yes Limited
Localized 10 Languages
Security Yes
Repositories Supported SAP R/3, OBDC databases (Oracle, MS Optional: some level of programming required for
SQL) integration
Server platforms supported ??
Scalable ?
Price: unknown
Priced comparably equipped to ?
eCabinet
Support ?
SDK ?
Standards Supported
27
DOCUMENTUM 4I EBUSINESS EDITION
Documentum 4I eBusiness Edition is a platform for building enterprise level, end to end
content management solutions, addressing content creation and management, web site
management and content delivery and deployment. Documentum is converting their core
product strength of document management to web content management. They continue to
provide traditional document management functions, such as library and document
management, electronic and paper capture, document distribution, workflow, versioning,
annotation, browsing, viewing and retrieval. However, the 4i Edition adds several key web
content and management features, including web publishing, high-speed delivery of content,
site management and content personalization.
Documentum is targeting Global 2000 and Internet companie s in a variety of industries

(manufacturing, pharmaceutical, financial services, engineering, construction and
telecommunications) where the need to manage content is considered mission critical.
Documentum 4i enables these e-business-critical applications:

Commerce sites fuelled by product catalogues and other Web content
Portals that transform massive amounts of disparate internal content into organised,
functional intranets, serving multiple languages and world-wide locations
Business-to-business exchanges powered by e-business transactional content
Corporate "libraries" or "vaults" for managing published, business-critical content in a
centrally accessible repository
Compliance with standards and regulatory rulings that govern how a company does
business
The solution is primarily a development platform, as opposed to an out of the box solution,
with a getting started price tag of well over $200,000. Generally, it is not considered a direct
competitor to the eCabinet.
28
Documentum 4i Comments
eBusiness Edition
Positioned as Customized, end to end content management
solutions
Number of simultaneous users Benchmarked with 2,000 users
Capture Sources
Electronic files Browser accessible and drop and drag from
file systems
Printers ?
Copiers ?
Scanners Optional DocInput module $6,500 38,000 option
Faxes Yes
MFPs ?
other Optional: SAP reports, CAD files, COLD
data
OCR/full text indexing Yes/Yes DQL queries and zone searching
Search by metadata Yes Limit of 5 indexing fields
Add/modify meta data
Multiple server searches yes
Collaboration yes Change control notification via email
boards
Versioning Yes
Check in/out Yes
Read only option yes
Annotation yes
Integration into Microsoft Office yes
Archiving Yes: Near line and off line Migration from magnetic to optical, optical jukeboxes or
to tape back up
Document distribution yes
Electronic signature yes
Localised English, French, Japanese (Kanji) German,
Korean, Arabic
Security Yes Operating system, database, application, user and
objects
Repositories Supported Lotus Notes, SAP R/3 SAP connector: $180 300 per seat
Server platforms supported UNIX (Sun, HP or IBM), Win NT, MS IIS
Scalable yes
Price :
Basic N/A
Office N/A
Enterprise $150,00 to 200,000 minimum
Priced comparably equipped to N/A
eCabinet
Support ?
SDK Yes
Standards Supported XML, ODMA
29
OTG
OTG Software is a provider of online storage management and access solutions, including a
dynamic email management solution. OTGs software enables enterprises to store, track and
retrieve data over a variety of network architectures, including the Web and storage area
networks. OTG empowers storage by combining storage with access and email management,
as well as integration with popular databases. The XtenderSolutions suite supports several
applications for Windows based applications.
ApplicationXtender is the core data management solution for organising and storing data in
user-defined applications. OCR, intelligent indexing, organisation, storage and retrieval
functions are supported for virtually any type of content (images, documents, spreadsheets,
voice, video, x-rays, drawings, reports, etc.)
Other add on modules provide:

Support for remote (web based) access over a corporate intranet or the Internet,
Intelligent email storage, indexing, archiving, and retrieval for MS-Excha nge, Lotus
Notes, and UNIX Sendmail email applications.
Workflow process and customisable models for collaboration and document distribution.
Automated forms processing and management capabilities. The E&H FORMS front end
(sold separately) can read, interpret and process invoices without pre-programming or user
intervention. Forms can be captured from paper, fax or the Internet, and then transferred to
the target storage system.
Managing and accessing data recorded to CD-ROMs and CD-Rs in libraries, disc
changers, towers and single drives within the network environment.
Electronic storage, archiving, and managing computer-generated output data/reports.
A second integral part of the OTG solution is the DiskXtender solution that turns NT and
UNIX file systems into virtualised infinite disks. The solution enables data movement and
applications across the enterprise and network, while transparently tracking and managing
stored file locations. Features include customisable file management, NTFS space
management, and transparent data migration of least used data and removable media
management. They claim that the DiskXtender solution is the only available product that
supports erasable optical, WORM, CD-ROM, DVD, and tape media under a single,
heterogeneous solution. RAID to RAID (hard drive arrays) management and integration
functionality will also be available in an upcoming release. SANXtender provides bi-
directional management and access to data stored in storage area networks (SANs).
OTG has OEM relationships with Advanced Financial Solutions, Agilent Technologies,
which is a subsidiary of Hewlett-Packard, Cerner, Data General, which is a division of EMC,
FileNet, Imation, Legato Systems and StorageTek, among others.
OTG is exploring the Internet service provider (ISP) and application service provider (ASP)
markets. Once launched, the XtenderSolutions will be available through ASPs and ISPs for
application leasing utilizing a metered utility model. Access to any variety of remote storage
media (secondary RAID, and/or removable media devices) through workstations or corporate
file servers will be leased to customers with advanced features including authentication
protocols, disk quotas, user account management, billing, and reporting.
30
Workflow collaboration and Annotation
Integration into email applications (MAPI and Vendor Independent Mail (SMI)
Database support (OLE DB, ODBC complaint, Oracle, SQL)
Supports high volumes of scanned documents
Price: 5 user license for ApplicationXtender only - $17,500
No automatic capture procedure (copied documents must be manually scanned)
31
OTG XtenderSolutions Comments

Positioned as data storage and management solutions positioned to take advantage of the latest Internet and e-
commerce trends
Number of simultaneous users ?
Capture Sources
Electronic files Yes Xrays, video, voice, drawings
Printers Yes LPT and Network print server
Copiers No
Scanners ISIS, Kofax Images Controls 3, TWAIN automated indexing, automatic form ID and accurate
zonal OCR and ICR with Ascent Capture. Internet
capture from scanners at remote sites
Faxes Yes Network FAX server, Castelle FaxPress, Right Fax
MFPs ?
other Email: MS MAPI, Vendor Independent Mail EmailXtender provides intelligent email storage,
(SMI) indexing, archiving, and retrieval for leading email
applications
OCR/full text indexing Yes Boolean search capability

Search by metadata
Multiple server searches Yes (?)
Collaboration Yes
boards
Versioning ?
Check in/out ?
Read only option ?
Annotation Yes
Integration into Microsoft Office Yes
Archiving Yes Optical tape,, DVD-RAM, CD-ROM, NFS, local or
shared network drive
Document distribution Yes
Electronic signature ?
Localized ?
Security
Repositories Supported Tivoli Storage Manager, OLE BD ODBC compliant data bases, SQL, Sybase SQL
Server platforms supported NT and UNIX
Scalable Yes
Price: $17,500 for 5 seats Basic Xtender application only. No storage management
$78,500 for 50 users
Priced comparably equipped to $78,500 +
eCabinet
Support ?
SDK Yes
Standards Supported
32
Positioning
eCabinet 2100 is NRGs first rack- mountable network office appliance. It provides superior
document consolidation, comprehensive digital indexing, and straightforward retrieval for
both paper and electronic documents. These documents may be captured from various sources
on the network, such as printers, fax machines, copiers, PCs and scanners.
Target Customers
Workgroups of 10 to 50 employees
Information intensive companies or departments
Small businesses and corporate departments
Server based environments within small to medium sized companies
Target Decision Making Unit (DMU)
Rackmount Desktop
Financial Director Financial Director
Office Manager IT Manager
Purchase Manager Office Manager
IT Manager Purchase Manager
The target DMU for the rackmounted version of eCabinet is different to the standard,
DeskTop version. All Marcoms and PR material will therefore focus on targeting the
Financial Director & IT Manager, rather than Financial Director & Office Manager.
Obviously this change in DMU will also require sales people to target a slightly different
market.
33
Target Markets
eCabinet 2100 will be available to all operating companies.
Target Channels
eCabinet will be sold mainly through the direct sales channel. In the mid-term eCabinet might
create an opportunity to develop Value-Added-Reseller and Systems Integrator Channels.
Sales Approach
eCabinet is an application for which a single selling strategy is hard to define: every
application in every vertical market will require a different approach, which is application-
driven. Experience in other markets has shown that in order to sell the eCabinet successfully it
is required to focus quickly on certain, well-defined applications. The in-built flexibility of
the eCabinet might lead one to sell it in a very broad area of applications, but this will lead to
the customers expectations being wrong and too high.
Niches in which eCabinet can be sold:
Vertical markets:
Financial institutions - contract management;
Logistics companies shipping documents;
Legal companies - contracts;
Government organisations personnel files;
Insurance companies - policies;
Construction firms drawings and designs;
Application areas:
Marketing departments advertising designs;
Human Resource departments - personnel files;
Logistics departments shipping documents;
Invoicing invoice archiving
These areas will have to be exploited with specific applications for each area. In MIDAS
successful stories of other markets will be shared.
34
Revenue Generation
Broadly, there are four different ways of selling the product to a customer:
Sell it as a box:
Advantage: easy to administer
Disadvantage: one-off deal with limited follow-up and customer lock-in;
Rent/lease it as a box:
Advantage: customer lock- in;
Disadvantage: not usage-driven
Rent it to a customer, while the customer is charged on a usage- measure (Pay-per-View):

Advantage: customer lock- in and usage-driven;
Disadvantage: hard to implement and administer in current systems:
Just rent the usage, while keeping the eCabinet off-site (Application Service Provider
concept):
Advantage: best possible returns and usage of resources;
Disadvantage: very hard to implement, while concept is relatively new
However, for Operating Companies, the eCabinet will also be an important source for extra
revenue streams:
Delivery & Installation: connecting the device to the network and installation of the PC-
capture software on each client-PC;
Training: users and administrators on the use of the solution;
Support: support packages like the ones common in the IT- industry can be provided with
eCabinet;
Consultancy: based on the specific application for a specific company, eCabinet can be
configured differently (keywords, search patterns, etc.). In the future:
o configurations per vertical market can be defined, thereby creating a pre-
configured tool or
o with the SDK that comes with the software, integration with other systems within
a customers organisation can be realised.
35
Key Features & Benefits

eCabinet 2100 offers the following key customer benefits:
Efficient and Easy Operation
Fast and easy document retrieval through full- text and keyword searches.
Innovative visual display of documents for fast inspection.
Automatic OCR and indexing enables full- text search on both electronic and paper
documents.
Capture through already existing network attached peripherals, printers, scanners, copiers,
etc. faxes, e-mail, and other paper documents.
Automatic processing of documents.
Simple user interface, accessible through common web browser interfaces.
Office Efficiency
eCabinet can be tailored to your companys needs through classification and organisation
of documents into folders, the attaching of keywords, and the option of setting up
workgroups, users, etc.
Seamlessly integrates paper-based and digital documents and stores them in one
centralised location.
Low Total Cost of Ownership - Easy to Install & Maintain
Easy to install and administer because of its single-purpose design;

Easy to connect with ethernet.
No User-training needed
No license fees
Low maintenance through high reliability and automated data backup
Eliminates cost of file cabinets and storage space.
Minimises downtime because it is a reliable single-purpose appliance.
Scalability and Security
Multiple e-cabinets can be connected to allow the sharing of documents between several
workgroups within one location or for linking remote offices.
Access to system is restricted to authorised personnel only through password protection.
Documents can be secured and made viewable to individual users, groups, or all valid
users.
Limited network traffic
36
Applications
eCabinet serves the needs of departmental workgroups in corporations and smaller companies
and is optimised to support up to 50 employees. These customers are poorly served by
today's document management systems that are either too simplistic or far too complex and
expensive to set up and use for day-to-day document handling needs. With eCabinet,
customers will finally have an office information management solution that lets them easily
access and exchange paper and electronic documents without disrupting their existing
workgroup or business environments.
However, given the flexibility of the applications for eCabinet, it becomes very hard to sell it:
customers will need more and better defined applications that relate to their
environment/business model. eCabinet will require a vertical marketing approach in order
to be sold. The following is a table of top target organisations/industries and likely usage:
Market Segment Typical Applications Requirements eCabinet Advantages
Financial Audit Reports, Financial Statements, *Store duplicate and triplicate copies of documents. *Frees clerical staff to focus on more valuable tasks
Proposals/Agreements, Invoices/Receipts, Tax and reduces need for additional staff
Statements, Expense Reports
*Maintain all client records for 7 years. *More efficient search and retrieval process for
increased overall productivity.
*Large physical storage space requirements. *Recover lost space and facilities for physical
storage.
*Data Security. *Multiple levels of data security.
Insurance Applications, claims, policies, reports *Maintain copies and records of claims and *Provides faster information access for faster
customers. processing and improved customer responsiveness
*Duplicate and triplicate copies for back up and *Customer policies and records are updated in a
cross referencing. timely manner
*Eliminate the need for multiple copies and manual
cross referencing systems
Human Resources Employment records, benefit packages, regulatory *Maintain various employee files *Maintaining and updating employee data through a
documents single file access
*Data Security. *Increase data security
Legal Sales and Purchase Agreements, Invoices/Receipts, *Extensive filing systems to hold various types of *Reduction of physical and financial burden
Correspondence, Evidence, Summons, Case documents associated with manual filing systems.
References
*Client records are stored at least three years *Vast repository of storage resources
*Information Security *Increased data security and client privacy
Medical Patient Records and Test Results, Consent Forms, *Multiple copies of same documents filed under *Maintain up to date records
Accounting Statements different headings
*Information is shared between departments that *Eliminate need for duplicates and triplicate copies
may be physically separated and manual cross filing systems
*Information needs to be accurate and up to date *Reduce physical space for storage and associated
costs
*Reduce errors from manual data entry
*Information Security *Increase data security and patient privacy
Government Documents, Forms, and Filings that are part of every *Information is shared between departments and *Provides a central location for records with easy
government bureau and agency needs to be updated timely access
Multiple copies are typically maintained *Information is updated in a timely manner
*Data Security. *Increased data security
Real Estate Customer Data, Mortgage Applications, Home Data *Property history tracking *Easy searching by address or customer
Sheets
*Customer and property specific filing needs *Reduce physical space for storage and associated
costs
*Provides faster information access for faster
processing and improved customer responsiveness
37
Marketing Communications

Establish NRGs position as a company that can offer Total Document Solutions in the IT arena
Position eCabinet 2100 as an easy-to-use, network-based document storage and retrieval solution
for the server environment of small to medium sized companies
Position eCabinet 2100 as one of the first products that is representative of a new paradigm, the
Network Office Appliance
38
Logistics
Type Goods EDP Product Name Description
Abbrev. Code
Core 410836 eCabinet 2100 eCabinet Information appliance
(European Version) (Rackmounted version)
Language Support
UK English
French
German
Dutch
Italian
eCabinet Configuration - (Effective June 2001)

General Information Universal
Product Name eCabinet 2100
Product Model C990-20
EDP Code 410836 (EU) n

i
Software version eCabinet 2.1
6 User Interfaces (3)
eCabinet 2.1 17 OCR Dictionaries
Product Description
Multiple languages Data Replication
Hierarchical Folders
Company Name Branding 5 Brands
Ricoh
Nashuatec
Branding Labels (not pasted but included) Rex Rotary
Gestetner
Nashua, SA
Manufacturer's Name on Rating Plate Ricoh eCabinet
Serial No. Pre-fix H57
Voltage / Frequency 110V/220V, 50/60Hz
Power Source Auto Switching
LCD Display Graphic
UL/CUL
Product Safety & regulation Marks CE
(On the back of the machine) EMC/EMI
FCC Class B Digital
39
Inbox content
OS/ Application Software CD 2.1
PC Capture SW Multiple languages for 2.1
Netscape
Client SW CD ROM
Acrobat Reader
Internet Explorer
User Documentation CD eCabinet 2.1 Multiple languages
In-Box Contents Sheet

Installation & Administration Guide
User Reference
(4)
Printed Material - English US only Software License Agreement sheet
Product Registration Card
Hardware
CD Wallet
Power Cord (4 ft.) US or EU
LAN Cable (6 ft.) Included
Blank DVD RAM Disk DVDs not required
Package Design
Material Colour Brown
Printed Logo eCabinet
Brand Name No Brand
Ecology Mark Recycle mark
Space for Bar Code Label (4-sides) TBC
This side up
Keep dry
Symbols on Package box
Fragile
8 stack high
Ricoh Silicon Valley Inc.
Manufacturer's marks on box
Assembled in USA
Product Code Yes
Bar Code
EDP Code Yes
Label
Serial number code Yes
Shock Watch None
(3)
Multi - languages U/I in 6 countries = English (US), English (UK), Dutch, German, French, Italian
(4)
English (US) Only, ESSC to provide printed copies for international version
40
Component Dimensions Weight (g) Notes

Corrugated shipping container
eCabinet hardware TBC TBC
IN BOX Contents:
In Box List of Contents
User Reference 5.5 x 8.25 On CD
Administration and Installation 5.5 x 8.25 On CD
guide
Customer support card To be locally
supplied by
REBV
Hardware Warranty card TBD based on
local requirements
Product Registration card To be locally
supplied by
REBV
2 blank single sided DVD RAM
disks in floppy style case
Software License Agreement sheet
CD Wallet:
User Documentation CD
Brief Tour
User Reference
Install & admin guide
Tutorial
Client CD ROM including:
PC Capture
Internet Explorer 5.0
Adobe Acrobat Reader
Netscape Navigator 4.x
Operating software
LAN cable 7 feet
Power cord C Type 6 feet
1 Brand Label Ricoh NRG labels ordered
separately
41
Compatible Capture Devices
eCabinet 2.1
Document Scanning Devices

Must support TCP/IP, 10/100BaseT connectivity and have the ability to create emails.
Examples:
SC430dc with Network Option
HP Digital Sender line
Faxes
Must support TCP/IP, 10/100BaseT connectivity and have the ability to send email.
Examples:
E40 (9940/P694/6994)
E99 (9980/P699/6999)
Panasonic DX-1000
Panasonic DX-2000
Document Printing Devices

Must support TCP/IP, 10/100BaseT connectivity, and must support LPR and SMB protocol,
and must support PostScript
Postscript Level 1, 2 and 3 and PCL5 and PCL6 version 1 (ver. 2 is being tested)
Paper sizes supported: 81/2 by 11, 8 by 14, A4, A5
Examples:
HP LaserJet 4050TN with network option
Xerox Docuprint N32 with network option
Ricoh AP 450 with network option
Copiers
Must support TCP/IP 10/100BaseT connectivity and have ability to send copies as emails
Examples:
Notes: Peripherals meeting the Interoperability Specifications are expected to be compatible

and operate as described. Vendors are encouraged to do self-certification via RSV's Open
Certification Process. If a problem is encountered with a peripheral AND the vendor has
successfully performed self-certification, RSV will assume responsibility for the problem.
42
Installation & Administration Overview
Installation
General Set-up Considerations and Limitations
Prior to commencing the installation of an eCabinet, it is necessary to complete a CII (Critical

Installation Information) to ensure a smooth and fast installation. The survey includes
information on the network configuration, as it applies to the LAN environment, IP addresses,
devices or peripherals to be connected to the eCabinet and the assigning of an IP address and
domain name for the eCabinet.
eCabinet
Installing and configuring the eCabinet involves the following major steps:
1. Installing the eCabinet on the network.

2. Assigning a network address to the eCabinet using the keypad.
3. Connecting/identifying the capture devices attached to the network.
4. Creating an initial set of users and/or groups.
5. Installing PC Capture on the client PCs.
6. Test the systems.
PC Capture (Client)
1. To install and configure PC Capture, on a client PC, you must have administrative
privileges.
2. Insert the eCabinet Client Software CD into the CD-ROM drive of the PC (note, in
eCabinet 2.1 you have the option to download the PC Capture software directly from the
eCabinet)
3. Follow the installation wizard instructions to install and set preferences.
4. Install (if desired) browser, Adobe Acrobat Reader and the WinZip utility.
5. Create one or more printers for print capture (If desired).
43
System Administration
An eCabinet administrator will have the capabilities to modify system settings, monitor the
document capture and back up process and check other system behaviours. In addition, the
eCabinet administrator will be able to search for and access all captured documents.
The eCabinet administrative functions include:
Settings : Manage and edit users and group accounts, mana ge folders, set network
connections and configuration, and set capture control
Back up Administration: Manage backup, recover data & settings and index
management
System Status : Information about the status of media storage, document processing,
connected devices and view error messages
LCD/Keypad interface : Access disks (back up media and software upgrades), manually
configure the eCabinet address and reset the system
There are two other types of administrators set by the eCabinet administrator:
Folder Administrators: can create edit and/or delete group and user-owned folders.
Document Administrators : a so called Super User that has full rights to search for and
retrieve all captured documents, regardless of the access rights that have been assigned by the
document owners.
44
Additional Information
Batch Scanning with Kofax Ascent
processing capabilities. Ascent Capture enables the user to verify scanned documents,
validate extracted data, index them for later retrieval, design keyword notes and custom
fields at time of capture for easy document retrieval, and route them directly into folders
on eCabinet. Ascent Capture automatically identifies forms and performs highly accurate
recognition of handwriting (ICR), machine print (Accents OCR automatically overrides
eCabinets own OCR functions), check marks (OMR), and bar codes to extract even the
toughest data from scanned images with no problem. With the addition of Ascent Capture
Internet Server, remote offices can easily scan documents for processing at a central
location, saving time and shipping costs and eliminating the possibility of lost documents.
This software is available in Europe and may be launched as a +Partner in the future.
ICB-1 Power Supply
Ricoh Ltd. has informed RSV that effective July 1, 2001 according to the new EC
regulation ICB-1 power supply will not be compliant with new regulations.
Applications that have a MIME type
Applications that have a MIME type can be opened within Web browsers. Either the browser
will display the file, or the native application will be launched and display the file. These are
known as helper applications. Most of the commonly used applications (word processors,
spreadsheets, graphics programs) have MIME types and are easily opened within a browser.
Application version makes no difference; only MIME type. To check to see if an application
has a MIME type:
- Internet Explorer
From the Desktop, open any folder and select the View menu and Folder Options menu
item. Select the File Types tab. Scroll to find the file type you are looking for from the
registered file types list. There are three categories: Extension, Content Type (MIME),
and Opens with. Check to see if there is a listing in the MIME field. If so, then it should
open in the browser.
- Netscape Navigator
Select the Edit menu and Preferences menu item.
Under the Navigator heading, select Applications subheader.
Scroll to find the file type you are looking for from the description list.
There are three categories: Extension, MIME Type, and Handled By. Check to see if
there is a listing in the MIME field. If so, then it should open in the browser.
Applications that DO NOT have a MIME type
Applications that do not have a MIME type cannot be opened within Web browsers.
Browsers will give you the option of saving the file to disk, or possibly selecting the
appropriate application to open it, if it exists on the hard drive.
45
- Internet Explorer
When attempting to retrieve these files on the eCabinet, the File Download dialogue will
appear. You then have a choice whether to Open or Save the file.
If you select the Open radio button, the Open With dialogue will appear, asking you to
select the appropriate application to open the file.
If you select the Save radio button, the Save As dialogue will appear, allowing you to save
the file to disk.
46
Supported Files
Microsoft Office 95, 97, 98, 2000, ME
Applix Words 4.2
Corel WordPerfect for Windows 5.x, 6, 7, 8
Corel WordPerfect for Macintosh 2, 3
HTML 3.2 compliant
Lotus AMI Pro 2, 3
Lotus AMI Professional Write Plus all versions
Lotus Word Pro 96, 97
Lotus 1-2-3 (DOS/Windows) 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0
Lotus 1-2-3 (OS/2) Release 2
Microsoft Rich Text Format (RTF) 1.x, 2.0
Microsoft Word for Windows 2, 6, 95, 97
Microsoft Word for DOS 4, 5, 6
Microsoft Word for Mac 4.0, 5.0, 6.0
Microsoft Works all versions
Microsoft Write all versions
Text files N/A
XYWrite 4.12
Spreadsheets
Corel QuattroPro 7, 8
Lotus 1-2-3 2, 3, 4, 5, 96, 97
Microsoft Excel 3, 4, 5, 95, 97
Microsoft Works Spreadsheet all versions
Presentation Graphics
Corel Presentations 7.0, 8.0
Lotus Freelance 96, 97
Microsoft PowerPoint 4.0, 95, 97
Publishing Formats
PDF all versions
FrameMaker MIF
Graphics
GIF
Miscellaneous
Text/ascii
Text/enriched
Richtext
email RFC822
News group articles RFC822
SGML
XML
Tab-separated values
47
Compatibility list
eCabinet Peripheral Compatibility

Scanners FAX Machines Printers Copiers
Bell + Howell IS430+ 2 Ricoh FAX4800L HP Laserjet 2100TN Ricoh Aficio 220
PCL64 , PCL5e 4 , PS4 w/ICB1 1
Fujitsu ScanPartner 15C Ricoh FAX5000L HP Laserjet 4050TN Ricoh Aficio 270
2
PCL64 , PCL5e 4 , PS4 w/ICB1 1
Fujitsu ScanPartner Ricoh Fax 3900L4 HP Laserjet 8100DN
600C 2 PCL64 , PCL5e 4 , PS4
Fujitsu ScanPartner Panasonic DX-1000 Lexmark Optra S 2455 5
93GX 2 3
PCL64 , PS4
Ricoh IS450 2 Panasonic DX-2000 Lexmark Optra SE 3455 5
PCL64 , PS4
HP Digital Sender HP 8100C Digital Minolta Pageworks 25 5
8100C Sender4 PCL5e 4 , PS4
HP Digital Sender HP 9100C Digital Xerox Docuprint N32
9100C Sender4 PCL64 , PCL5e 4 , PS4
Xerox Docuprint N40
Ricoh Aficio 401 w/AXIS print server
(with PostScript option) 3
4 4 4
Aficio 180 PCL6 , PCL5e , PS
4 4 4
4 4 4
4 4 4
4 4 4
4 4 4
Aficio 350e PCL6 , PCL5e , PS
4 4 4
4 4 4
4 4 4
4 4 4
4 4 4
4 4 4
4 4 4
4 4 4
4
Aficio 401 PCL5e
4 4 4
4 4 4
4 4 4
4 4 4
4 4 4
4 4 4
4
AP 204 PS
4
AP 305 PS
4
AP 306 PS
4 4 4
AP1400 PCL6 , PCL5e , PS
4 4 4
4 4 4
4 4 4
4 4 4
4
AP306D PS
4 4 4
4
AP505 PCL5c
48
Footnotes:
1- Unannounced offering
2- Requires AXIS700/7000 Document Server (SCSI connected) between scanner and network
3- Not tested
4- Test in Progess
5- Requires network option
Peripheral Definitions:
* Scanners: Must be network ready and have the ability to create emails OR must use the Access
700/7000 front-end as an intermediary device (SCSI connected) between the scanner and the
network;
* FAX: Must be network ready and have the ability to create emails;
* Printers: Must be network ready, and must support the LPR protocol, and must support Postscript
(eCabinet 1.0) or PCL (eCabinet 1.11 );
* Peripherals meeting the above criteria are expected to interoperate trouble free. Vendors are
encouraged to do self certification through RSVs Open Certification Process. If a problem is
encountered with a peripheral AND the vendor has successfully done Open Certification, RSV will
assume responsibility for the problem. Please check with RSV prior to attaching a new device.
49
Printers Drivers
HP LaserJet 2100TN PCL6, PCL5e, PS
HP LaserJet 4050TN, PCL6, PCL5e, PS
HP LaserJet 8100DN, PCL6, PCL5e, PS
Lexmark Optra S 2455, PCL6, PS
Lexmark Optra Se 3455, PCL6, PS
Minolta Pageworks 25 PCL5e, PS
Aficio 401 PCL5e
AP 204 PS
AP 305 PS
AP 306 PS
AP306D PS
AP505 PCL5c
MMFPs
Aficio 270 / ICB-1
Other Peripherals
Axis 700
Axis 7000
FaxtraNet
50
Verity Database List
This list contains the file formats that are recognized by the Verity Database .
Document Formats Version

ASCII Text All Picture Formats Version
ANSI Text All AMI Draw Graphics (SDW)
Applix Words v4.2, 4.3, 4.4 Applix Graphics v4.3, 4.4
Executables Fax Systems (CCITT) Groups 3 & 4
HTML v1.x, 2.x, 3.x Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM)
IBM DCA/RFT vSC23-0758-1 Corel Draw CDR (TIFF Header)
IBM Displaywrite v4, 5 Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)
Lotus AMI Pro v2, 3 Enhanced Metafile (EMF)
Lotus AMI Professional Write Plus JPEG File Interchange Format
Lotus Word Pro v96, 97, R9 Lotus Pic (PIC)
Maker Interchange Format (MIF) v5.5 Mac PICT (raster content)
Microsoft RTF MacPaint (MAC)
Microsoft Word for PC v2,to 5.5 Microsoft Excel Charts
Microsoft Word for Macintosh v4, 5, 6, 98 Microsoft Windows Animated Cursor
Microsoft Word for Windows v2.x, 6.0 Microsoft Windows Bitmap (BMP)
Microsoft Word for Windows 95, 97, 2000 Microsoft Windows Cursor/Icon
Microsoft Works v1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0 Microsoft Windows Metafile (WMF)
Microsoft Windows Write v1.0, 2.0, 3.0 PC Paintbrush (PCX)
Unicode Text Portable Network Graphics (PNG)
WordPerfect v5.x, 6, 7, 8 Sun Raster
WordPerfect for Macintosh v2, 3 SGI RGB
XyWrite v4.12 Truevision Targa
Double-Byte Formats Version WordPerfect Graphics (WPG) v1, 2
Lotus Word Pro* V96, 97, R9 Compression, Encapsulation & Security Format
Lotus 1-2-3* V96, 97, R9 GZ-compression
Lotus Freelance * V96, 97, R9 Z-compression
Microsoft Word ** V6, 95, 97, 2000 Zip Fax Systems (CCITT)
Microsoft Excel ** V6, 95, 97, 2000 Bin Hex
Microsoft PowerPoint ** V6, 95, 97, 2000 MIME
**Japanese, Korean, Simplified & Traditional Chinese TAR
*Japanese UUencode
Spreadsheet Formats Version
Applix Spreadsheets v4.3, 4.4
Corel QuattroPro v7, 8
Lotus 1-2-3 v2, 3, 4, 5, 96, 97, R9
Microsoft Excel v3, 4, 5, 96, 97, 2000
Microsoft Excel for Mac
98
Microsoft Works Spreadsheet v1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0
Presentation formats Version
Applix Presents v4.3, 4.4
Corel Presentations v7.0, 8.0
Lotus Freelance v96, 97, R9
Microsoft PowerPoint v4.0, 95, 97, 2000
Microsoft PowerPoint for Macintosh
51
CRITICAL INSTALLATION INFORMATION

Company: End User
Contact: VAR
Address:
City:
State: ZIP Co de:
Phone: ( ) Fax: ( )
E-mail
How will this eCabinet be implemented? Select one or all that apply:
eCabinet Implementation Requirements Yes/No
To capture e-mail POP3 Server
To capture Print Jobs Network PS Printer (It is recommended to create a second print queue to allow the choice
to (1) print and capture or (2) print and not capture)
To capture selected documents from a Clients PC Install the Client PC Capture software
To capture Fax Correspondence Internet Fax enabled Fax Machine
To capture Scan Network Scanner capable of sending e-mail
To capture Copies A MFP (Multifunction Peripheral) copier or a copier capable of sending
e-mails.
Windows NT Server environment: Unix Server Environment:

Services Yes No Services Yes No
DHCP DHCP
DNS DNS
WINS Mail Server
Mail Server
Network Configuration: Equipment Addresses:

Enter the network configuration information for eCabinet as it Note name and IP Addresses for each device (i.e., networked PS printer, Internet fax and/or
applies to the LAN environment. network scanner) to be configured with eCabinet:
ECabinet IP address Equipment: Host Name: Static IP addresses: Pathway (enter during install):
ECabinet host name Printer #1 Aficio 270 (PS3) 127.0.0.1 Remote printer name = lp
Net Mask address
Router/Gateway address
(Primary) DNS Server address

(Secondary) DNS Server address
(ISP) DNS Server address
(Primary) WINS Server address

(Secondary) WINS Server address
Workgroup name
Broadcast address
Non-Standard Broadcast address
Mail Server address
DNS Domain
NFS server name
NFS Server storage path

HTTP server name
HTTP server URL

HTTP Authorization key
52
Version 1.11
CopyPrinters
CPMR 308
CPMR 308B
Memory Matrix
WFW Home NPS

CPMR308/b Product Information Guide
PRODUCT
INFORMATION GUIDE
CPMR308/b
Nashuatec CP308/b
Rex Rotary 1225/B
Gestetner 5308/b
1
Executive Summary CPMR308/b
The CPMR308/b is the direct replacement for the current CPMR306/b series machines, which is
positioned at the low-end of our CopyPrinter Product Range. We will be launching both A4
(selected markets only) and B4 versions. First production is July 2000, with final production of
CPMR306/bs in June 2000. All models are built in Korea.
The CPMR308/b is based upon the same engine and chassis as the current CPMR306 that we are
selling, with the following significant improvements:
Improved Paper Feeding

Paper Weight up to 209 g/m2
Auto Image Rotate
Combined 2-Originals (A4 + A4 = A4)
Energy Save Mode
Increased Master Eject Capacity up to 80 A4
Although the engine is the same as the old CPMR306/b, supplies are being modified to prevent
skating. NRG CPMR308/b Black Ink and Masters will only fit NRG CPMR308/bs.
A full PIG has not been created for this model as the basic product has not changed, and target
markets etc remain the same.
2
Positioning and mass production
(Price Positioning)
CPMR390 CPMR490
RUBY
CPMR385
CPMR450 CPMR450MC
RN925
CPMR329/L
CPMR327
CPMR304/L CPMR306/b CPMR308/b
1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001
Mass production of the CPMR308/b:
Mass Production Schedule: End of July 2000

Mass Production Location : Korea (Sindo-Ricoh) production
3
Markets & Applications

The Market
The low end market is the largest market segment for CopyPrinters. Since the launch of Riso's CR
Series and Duplo's DP21/23, competition has become particularly intense. In fact, market analysis
shows that 70% of the market today is concentrated on the low end machine. Therefore, the
5308/b/1225/B/CP308/b is a particularly important strategic model, as it offers further
enhancements to the current model.
The following are examples of targeted markets:
Existing account base - customers looking to replace old machines or looking for a more
feature-rich CopyPrinter at an affordable price.
Copier users whose requirements for multiple copies of the same original would make
the use of a CopyPrinter more economical.
New users with an application of high copy volume and high copy per original (i.e.
restaurants, leisure centres, auctioneers, etc.).
With added enhancements & features of the 5308/b/1225/B/CP308/b at the same price of the
5306/b/1224/B/CP306/b, we are confident that it will again be well accepted in the traditional
CopyPrinter market.
Target Market Segments
Education - Schools/Colleges/Universities
Church/Religious Organisations
Non-profit
Government
Hospitals/Medical Centres
Associations/Clubs
Leisure Industry
Research institutions
Auctioneers - information pamphlets, auction lists
Armed Forces/Police Departments
Travel and Leisure - races, events, festivals, large conference organisers
Hotels, restaurants - menus, place mats, table stands, welcome (hotel)
information, safety procedures.
Tourist Boards - maps, local information, special event listings
For our current customer base, this is a reliable, easy to use product which will further ease their
workload. For current and new printing business, it is an extremely competitive product to counter
Riso and Duplo.
4
Applications by Market Segment

Below is a list of possible applications used by a number of target segments. This list is intended as
a starting point when developing your sales strategies. The key element in your success will be
your ability to qualify these prospects in terms of their specific applications and needs.
Education
Activity Flyers Announcements

Assignment Sheets Attendance Forms
Articles from Papers Confidential Forms
Exam Results Examinations
Enrolment Forms Graphs, Charts
I. Q. Charts Lunch Menus
Maps Memos
Registration Cards Report Cards
Safety Rules Schedules
Syllabi Sponsorship Forms
Tests Timetables
Worksheets
For Social Events
Posters Programmes
Tickets
Hospitals
Various Hospital Forms Accident Reports

Account Records Appeals for Funds/Aids
Clinical Reports Diet Charts
Duty Rosters Exemption Certificates
Fire Drill Notices Insurance Forms
Medical Lectures Medical Journal Extracts
Menus Patient Charts
Property Receipts Reports
Research Information Schedules
Work Sheet X-Ray and Lab Report Forms
Estate Agents/Real Estate
Brochures Daily Bulletins

Multiple Listing Publication Open Flyers, Invitations
Rental Notices Weekly Bulletins
5
Religion
Bulletins Certificates
Church Constitutions Church Programmes
Hymn Sheets Legal Documents
Music Sheets Newsletters
Order of Service Psalm Sheets
Parish Magazines Service Schedules
Posters and Handouts Sunday School Material
Sermons Sponsorship Forms and Fund Raising
Speeches Tickets for Social Events
Unions
Meeting Schedules Reports

Application Forms Agendas
Magazines Circular to Members
Membership Cars Minutes of Meetings
Newsletters Membership Lists
Posters Notices
Associations
Activity Notices Agendas

Application Forms Budgets
Bulletins Calendar of Events
Catalogues Directories
Duty Rosters Flyers
Newsletters Memos
Personnel Forms Posters and Handouts
Programme Application Forms Programme Brochures
Sponsorship Forms Tickets
Safety Regulations Summer Camp Information
6
Sales Points and Major Features
New Features
The following four features have been added to enhance the productivity and performance of the
CPMR308/b:
Increased Printing Speed - 130cpm

The maximum printing speed, which is one of key specifications of the CopyPrinter, has been
increased from the current 120cpm (CPMR306/b) to 130cpm.
Energy Saving Feature

The CPMR308/b automatically switches itself into the energy saving mode when not being used.
It reduces about 85% of power consumption (down to below 10W). The machine becomes
immediately ready for operation, when any of the keys on the operation panel are touched.
7
Enhanced Combine two originals mode
The CPMR308/b is equipped with an image rotation feature, where the scanned image is first stored
in memory, and then rotated 90 degrees by using an image processing technology. With this image
rotation feature, the CPMR308/b is capable of combining two originals, of up to B4 size, as
follows:
Originals Output Image
B4 Machine: X B4 + B4 Y 71% B4
Y
X
Y
X A4 +A4 87% B4
Y
X
Y
X
X A4 +A4 Y 71% A4
LG Machine: LT+LT 77% LG
Y
X
X Y
A4 Machine: A4+ A4 71% A4
Y
X
X Y
* The above combinations are already programmed and can be easily selected by pressing
[Combine Copies] keys on the operation panel. Combination of other sizes is also possible.
New Optional Controller -Jasmine

The CPMR308/b has been designed to have the new optional, embedded Jasmine controller
fitted, which eases the installation process. Operators no longer have to pay special attention to the
switch on/off timing of the controller. PCL5(e) emulation mode is adapted within the Jasmine for
stable and reliable data transmission..
8
Comparison with current CPMR306/b
CPMR306/b CPMR308/b
Specifications Original Book, Sheet
Original Size 257 x 364 mm
Paper Size max: 268 x 390 mm max: 273 x 390 mm
min: 90 x 148 mm min: 90 x 148 mm
Print Area B4 drum: 250 x 355 mm
LG drum: 210 x 355 mm
A4 drum: 210 x 288 mm
Paper Weight 47.1- 157 g/m2(12.5-41.7 lbs.) 47.1-209.3 g/m2(12.5-55.6 lbs.)
Image Shift vertical: 10 mm
horizontal: 10mm
Leading edge margin 5 mm+/-3mm
Magnification 4 Reduction (NA: 93, 77, 74, 65%)
4 Reduction (93, 87, 82, 71%)
3 Enlargement (NA: 121, 129, 155%)
3 Enlargement (115, 122, 141%)
Resolution 300 dpi (Fine Mode : 300x400 dpi)
Image Mode Letter, Photo, Letter & Photo
First Print Time Less than 29.8 sec.
Master Process Time Less than 28.0 sec.
Print Speed 80-120 cpm (3 steps) <80,100,120> 80-130 cpm (3 steps) <80,100,130>
Master Capacity B4:260 masters/roll (125m)
A4:300 masters/roll (125m)
Ejected Master Capacity 40 masters (B4)
60 masters (A4)
Paper Feed Capacity 1000 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lbs.)
Delivery Capacity 1000 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lbs.)
ADF Option (30 sheets)
Power consumption (Stand Max. 250W Max. 250W (Saving mode: below
by) 10W)
Dimensions set up: 1187 x 601 x 567 mm set up: 1187 x 651 x 567 mm
stored: 607 x 601 x 567 mm stored: 607 x 651 x 567 mm
Weight 65 Kg 65kg
Features Margin Erase Available
Auto cycle Available
Skip Feed Available
Overlay Available
Program Available
Economy Mode Available
Energy Saving mode Available
Security Mode Available
Tint Mode Available
Auto background correction Available
2 up Available (SP mode) Available (additional image rotation)
B4: A4 + A4 * 87% B4
B4 + B4 * 71% B4
A4 + A4 * 71% A4
A4: A4 + A4 * 71% A4
SP Mode Available
Master Setting Very easy
Ejected Master Disposal Very easy and clean
LCD Available
ADF Available (30 sheets)
Colour Drum Available
Tape Marker Available
Controller-Jasmine Not Available Available (built-in)
EZ-1 Available (require I/F Kit) Available (require I/F Kit)
9
Summary of newly released Sales Points
The following sales points, which have proved to be already successful in the current CPMR306/b
market, will be superseded with the new the CPMR308/b.
Compact & Light Weight

The CPMR308/b has been designed for space saving and also easy installation.
65kg
1187mm (46.7)
Simplified Operation Panel

The operation panel has been designed for easy access and user-friendliness. The lay-out is simple
and LCD display assists in easy operation.
Easy Master setting

The master setting mechanism simplifies the master roll replacement process. The customer is now
able to replace the master roll in the same way as loading a film into a compact camera.
10
Book Scanner PLATEN

The Book Scanner enables for copying from any type of originals, such as books and magazines,
plus light and heavy-weight papers.
Fine Mode
Fine mode improves scanning capability. In fine mode, the sub scanning resolution is increased to
400dpi, with the result being that the CPMR308/b will produce slanting lines and small letters more
clearly.
Ink Saving Economy Mode

Economy mode reduces ink consumption by approximately 15%.
Security Mode
Security mode prevents people, apart from the operator, from printing additional copies from the
scanned master on the Drum. User can print confidential documents without worrying.
Drum Variations
The CPMR308/b has the following Drum size variations, in order to meet requirements in different
regions.
A4 Drum : Europe, Asia

LG Drum : North America
B4 Drum : China, Asia Taiwan, Latin America, Europe
11
Marketing Support Material

The launch of the CPMR308/b is critical to the continuation of the success NRG has had so far in
marketing Low-end CopyPrinter products. The CPMR308/b will replace the CPMR306/b in our
current CopyPrinter product line the CPMR306 series has been responsible for our success in re-
capturing a substantial percentage of market share through 1999. This means that this launch has to
be carefully supported by a series of MarComs materials.
Ricoh introduced the CPMR306/b into overseas markets in the second half of 1998. Through
competitive specifications and a good price/performance ratio, the CPMR306/b has contributed to
increasing our business in the low-end segment, throughout the world.
Aiming at further expansion of our business and specification advantages over competitors, the
CPMR308/b has been developed as the successor to our current, best selling model, the
CPMR306/b. Some basic features, such as maximum printing speed and paper feeding capability
are enhanced, and some new features, such as image rotation and energy saving mode have been
added.
Deliverables and purpose
Marketing Launch Pack
In three brands, containing:

4 pp brochure (in eight languages)
Press shots
Training slides
Product posters
Line drawings
Product Information Guide
These items are designed to support Product Managers of the operating companies to launch the
CPMR308/b to their sales people and the market and to be used as selling tools by the sales people
of the operating companies.
12
Product, Options and Consumable Logistics

Code List of CPMR308/b Products
MAIN FRAME (NRG VERSION)
Brand NRG
Area Europe Europe

Drum Size A4 B4
Voltage 220-240V 50/60Hz 220-240V 50/60Hz
Model COPYPRINTER COPYPRINTER
5308/1225/CP308 5308b/1225B/CP308b
Operation Panel Picture Picture
English O/I Yes Yes
Branding Plaque Yes (5308/1225/CP308) Yes (5308b/1225B/CP308b)
Manufacturing Place Sindo-Ricoh Sindo-Ricoh
Ordering Unit 1 1
Lead Time 2 months 2 months
CPMR308/b BLACK INK

Brand RICOH GESTETNER NASHUATEC REX ROTARY
BLACK INK
Model BLACK INK CPI7 BLACK INK CPI7 BLACK INK CPI7
Type JP-12
Manufacturing
GRAM GRAM GRAM GRAM
Place
600 ml / cartridge 600 ml / cartridge 600 ml / cartridge 600 ml / cartridge
Packaging
5 cartridges / case 5 cartridges / case 5 cartridges / case 5 cartridges / case
Ordering Unit * 4 cases 4 cases 4 cases 4 cases
Lead Time 2 months 2 months 2 months 2 months
13
CPMR308 A4 MASTER
RICOH GESTETNER NASHUATEC REX ROTARY
Brand
MASTER
Model MASTER CPMT16 MASTER CPMT16 MASTER CPMT16
Type JP-12S
Manufacturing
GRAM GRAM GRAM GRAM
Place
125 m / roll x 2 125 m / roll x 2 125 m / roll x 2 125 m / roll x 2
Packaging
= 1 case = 1 case = 1 case = 1 case
CPMR308b B4 MASTER
Brand RICOH GESTETNER NASHUATEC REX ROTARY
MASTER
Model MASTER CPMT17 MASTER CPMT17 MASTER CPMT17
Type JP-12M
Manufacturing
GRAM GRAM GRAM GRAM
Place
125 m / roll x 2 125 m / roll x 2 125 m / roll x 2 125 m / roll x 2
Packaging
= 1 case = 1 case = 1 case = 1 case
*: In shipment 4 cases are packed together into one shipping carton. Therefore, order should be placed in multiples of 4.
14
MEMORY FIT MATRIX BY MODEL
ORDER BRAND MODEL RICOH CODE RECOMMENDED PRODUCT NAME MEMORY
CODE NUMBERS MODEL NAME FOR DESCRIPTION
COLOUR COPIERS & CONTROLLERS
CCR060A CS225/CS825/CS525 AFC3506 I-2 SEE RC210 BELOW SEE RC210 BELOW
CCR062A CS231/CS831/CS531 AFC4506 L-2 SEE RC210 BELOW SEE RC210 BELOW
CCR100 CS210/CS810/CS510 AFC-6010 Cattleya BD NO MEMORY NO MEMORY FOR THIS MACHINE
CCR132 CS213D/CS813D/CS513D AFC6513 C-2 NO MEMORY NO MEMORY FOR THIS MACHINE
CCR081 DSc224 AFC1224C Model U-C1a PRINTER DIMM128 128MB MEMORY TYPE C
DSc224 AFC1224C Model U-C1a PRINTER DIMM256 256MB MEMORY TYPE C
DSc224 AFC1224C Model U-C1a PRINTER DMENV1 NV RAM
CCR101 DSc232 AFC1232C Model U-C1b PRINTER DIMM128 128MB MEMORY TYPE C
DSc232 AFC1232C Model U-C1b PRINTER DIMM256 256MB MEMORY TYPE C
DSc232 AFC1232C Model U-C1b PRINTER DMENV1 NV RAM
RC210 RC210 RC210 PRINTER (opt) DMEBP64 64MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
RC210 RC210 RC210 PRINTER (opt) DMEBP128 128MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
RC210 RC210 RC210 PRINTER (opt) DME38 256MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
FAXES
H1 9910/6991/P691 1400L H1 FAX FME2MB150 2MB TYPE 20 CARD
FL1a F101 1120L L1a NO MEMORY NO MEMORY FOR THIS MACHINE
FL1b F102 1160L L1b NO MEMORY NO MEMORY FOR THIS MACHINE
E20 9920/6992/P692 1800L E20 FAX FME2MB150 2MB TYPE 20 CARD W/FLASH
E99 9980/6999/P699 5000L Kaizer 1 FAX FME2MB140 2MB TYPE 140 CARD W/FLASH
E99 9980/6999/P699 5000L Kaizer 1 FAX FME4MB140 4MB TYPE 140 CARD W/FLASH
E99 9980/6999/P699 5000L Kaizer 1 PRINTER DME45P16 16MB MEMORY EXPANSION
E99 9980/6999/P699 5000L Kaizer 1 PRINTER DME45P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
E99 9980/6999/P699 5000L Kaizer 1 FAX FME40MB 40MB MEMORY EXPANSION
E99 9980/6999/P699 5000L Kaizer 1 FAX FFC140U 0.5MB FEATURE EXPANDER TYPE140
E99 9980/6999/P699 5000L Kaizer 1 FAX FFC500 FAX ON DEMAND UPGRADE UNIT
SF1 F9103/F6103/FP103 3310L Stella F1 PRINTER DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
SF1 F9103/F6103/FP103 3310L Stella F1 FAX FME4MB300 40MB FEATURE EXPANDER TYPE300
SF2 F104 4410L Stella F2 PRINTER DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
SF2 F104 4410L Stella F2 FAX DME40MB410 40MB FEATURE EXPANDER TYPE410
LFO 4210/3110/D510 Aficio FX-10 LFO FAX FME1MB150 1MB TYPE 10 CARD W/FLASH
DIGITAL COPIERS
DMR12 1202/1208/1205 Aficio 120 Stella C1a COPY/FAX or PRINT DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR12 1202/1208/1205 Aficio 120 Stella C1a PRINTER DMEBP64 64MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR12 1202/1208/1205 Aficio 120 Stella C1a PRINTER DMEBP128 128MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR12F 1202F/1208F/1205F Aficio FX12 Stella C1a/f COPY/FAX or PRINT DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR12F 1202F/1208F/1205F Aficio FX12 Stella C1a/f PRINTER DMEBP64 64MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR12F 1202F/1208F/1205F Aficio FX12 Stella C1a/f PRINTER DMEBP128 128MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR13 1302/1308/1305 Aficio 1013 Stella C1b COPY/FAX or PRINT DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR13 1302/1308/1305 Aficio 1013 Stella C1b PRINTER DMEBP64 64MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR13 1302/1308/1305 Aficio 1013 Stella C1b PRINTER DMEBP128 128MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR13F 1302F/1308F/1305F Aficio 1013F Stella C1b/f COPY/FAX or PRINT DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR13F 1302F/1308F/1305F Aficio 1013F Stella C1b/f PRINTER DMEBP64 64MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR13F 1302F/1308F/1305F Aficio 1013F Stella C1b/f PRINTER DMEBP128 128MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR15 3215S/2815S/D415S Aficio 150 Stinger C1 Lite COPIER DME185 48MB TYPE 185 MEMORY BOARD
DMR15 3215S/2815S/D415S Aficio 150 Stinger C1 Lite PRINTER DME185P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR15 3215S/2815S/D415S Aficio 150 Stinger C1 Lite PRINTER DME185P64 64MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR15 3215S/2815S/D415S Aficio 150 Stinger C1 Lite PRINTER HDD DHD185PV2 1.6GB (6GB) PRINTER HARD DRIVE TYPE 185
DMR15S 1502/1508/1505C Aficio 1015 Kir C1b COPIER DME1018 16MB COPIER FEATURE EXPANDER TYPE 1018
DMR15S 1502/1508/1505C Aficio 1015 Kir C1b COPIER DME185P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR15S 1502/1508/1505C Aficio 1015 Kir C1b PRINTER DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR18 3218/2818/D418 Aficio 180 Stinger C1 COPIER DME185 48MB TYPE 185 MEMORY BOARD
DMR18 3218/2818/D418 Aficio 180 Stinger C1 PRINTER DME185P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR18 3218/2818/D418 Aficio 180 Stinger C1 PRINTER DME185P64 64MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR18 3218/2818/D418 Aficio 180 Stinger C1 PRINTER HDD DHD185PV2 1.6GB (6GB) PRINTER HARD DRIVE TYPE 185
DMR18 3218/2818/D418 Aficio 180 Stinger C1 FAX DME185J-F 0.5MB FEATURE EXPANDER
DMR18D 1802D/1808D/1805D Aficio 1018D Kir C1c Duplex COPIER DME185P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR18D 1802D/1808D/1805D Aficio 1018D Kir C1c Duplex PRINTER DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR18S 1802/1808/1805 Aficio 1018 Kir C1c COPIER DME185P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR18S 1802/1808/1805 Aficio 1018 Kir C1c PRINTER DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR22 3222/2822/D422 Aficio 220 Russian C1a COPIER DME185 48MB TYPE 185 MEMORY BOARD
DMR22 3222/2822/D422 Aficio 220 Russian C1a PRINTER DME185P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR22 3222/2822/D422 Aficio 220 Russian C1a PRINTER DME185P64 64MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR22 3222/2822/D422 Aficio 220 Russian C1a PRINTER HDD DHD185PV2 1.6GB (6GB) PRINTER HARD DRIVE TYPE 185
DMR22 3222/2822/D422 Aficio 220 Russian C1a SCANNER DME22S32 32MB SCAN MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR22 3222/2822/D422 Aficio 220 Russian C1a FAX DME185J-F 0.5MB FEATURE EXPANDER
DMR22A 2212/2238/2205 Aficio 1022 Russian C2a COPIER (opt) DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR22A 2212/2238/2205 Aficio 1022 Russian C2a PRINTER DMEBP64 64MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR22A 2212/2238/2205 Aficio 1022 Russian C2a FAX (opt) DME185J-F 0.5MB FEATURE EXPANDER
DMR22A 2212/2238/2205 Aficio 1022 Russian C2a C/P/F/S (opt) DHD1027 6GB HDD DOC.SERVER TYPE 1027
DMR22A 2212/2238/2205 Aficio 1022 Russian C2a C/P/F/S (opt) DME1045RAM USER ACT ENHANCE TYPE A NV RAM
DMR27 3227/2827/D427 Aficio 270 Russian C1b COPIER DME185 48MB TYPE 185 MEMORY BOARD
DMR27 3227/2827/D427 Aficio 270 Russian C1b PRINTER DME185P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR27 3227/2827/D427 Aficio 270 Russian C1b PRINTER DME185P64 64MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR27 3227/2827/D427 Aficio 270 Russian C1b PRINTER HDD DHD185PV2 1.6GB (6GB) PRINTER HARD DRIVE TYPE 185
DMR27 3227/2827/D427 Aficio 270 Russian C1b SCANNER DME22S32 32MB SCAN MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR27 3227/2827/D427 Aficio 270 Russian C1b FAX DME185J-F 0.5MB FEATURE EXPANDER
DMR27A 2712/2738/2705 Aficio 1027 Russian C2b COPIER (opt) DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR27A 2712/2738/2705 Aficio 1027 Russian C2b PRINTER DMEBP64 64MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR27A 2712/2738/2705 Aficio 1027 Russian C2b FAX (opt) DME185J-F 0.5MB FEATURE EXPANDER
DMR27A 2712/2738/2705 Aficio 1027 Russian C2b C/P/F/S (opt) DHD1027 6GB HDD DOC.SERVER TYPE 1027
DMR27A 2712/2738/2705 Aficio 1027 Russian C2b C/P/F/S (opt) DME1045RAM USER ACT ENHANCE TYPE A NV RAM
DMR32A 3212/3238/3205 Aficio 1032 Russian C2 COPIER (opt) DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR32A 3212/3238/3205 Aficio 1032 Russian C2 PRINTER DMEBP64 64MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR32A 3212/3238/3205 Aficio 1032 Russian C2 FAX (opt) DME185J-F 0.5MB FEATURE EXPANDER
DMR32A 3212/3238/3205 Aficio 1032 Russian C2 C/P/F/S (opt) DHD1027 6GB HDD DOC.SERVER TYPE 1027
DMR32A 3212/3238/3205 Aficio 1032 Russian C2 C/P/F/S (opt) DME1045RAM USER ACT ENHANCE TYPE A NV RAM
DMR35 3235/2835/D435 Aficio 350 NAD 30 COPIER DME22S16 16MB MEMORY MODULE
DMR35 3235/2835/D435 Aficio 350 NAD 30 FAX (opt) DME450F 4MB TYPE 450 MEMORY BOARD
DMR35 3235/2835/D435 Aficio 350 NAD 30 FAX HDD DME460F 130MB FAX FEATURE EXPANDER TYPE 460 HDD KIT
DMR35 3235/2835/D435 Aficio 350 NAD 30 PRINTER HDD DHD450P 1.6GB PRINTER TYPE 450 HARD DISK DRIVE KIT
DMR35 3235/2835/D435 Aficio 350 NAD 30 COPY/PRINT DHD450 IMAGE ENHANCE KIT (HDD) TYPE 450
DMR35A 3502/3508/3525 Aficio 1035 Adonis C2b COPY/FAX DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR35A 3502/3508/3525 Aficio 1035 Adonis C2b PRINT/SCAN DMEBP64 64MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR35A 3502/3508/3525 Aficio 1035 Adonis C2b FAX (opt) DME185J-F 0.5MB FEATURE EXPANDER
DMR35A 3502/3508/3525 Aficio 1035 Adonis C2b C/P/F/S (opt) DME1045RAM USER ACT ENHANCE TYPE A NV RAM
DMR35B 3545/3518/3532 Aficio 2035 Adonis C3b FAX DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR35B 3545/3518/3532 Aficio 2035 Adonis C3b PRINT/SCAN DIMM128 128MB MEMORY TYPE C
DMR35B 3545/3518/3532 Aficio 2035 Adonis C3b FAX (opt) DME185J-F 0.5MB FEATURE EXPANDER
DMR35B 3545/3518/3532 Aficio 2035 Adonis C3b C/P/F/S (opt) DME1045RAM USER ACT ENHANCE TYPE A NV RAM
DMR45 3245/2845/D445 Aficio 450 NAD40 COPIER DME22S16 16MB MEMORY MODULE
DMR45 3245/2845/D445 Aficio 450 NAD40 FAX (opt) DME450F 4MB TYPE 450 MEMORY BOARD
DMR45 3245/2845/D445 Aficio 450 NAD40 FAX HDD DME460F 130MB FAX FEATURE EXPANDER TYPE 460 HDD KIT
DMR45 3245/2845/D445 Aficio 450 NAD40 PRINTER HDD DHD450P 1.6GB PRINTER TYPE 450 HARD DISK DRIVE KIT
DMR45 3245/2845/D445 Aficio 450 NAD40 COPY/PRINT DHD450 IMAGE ENHANCE KIT (HDD) TYPE 450
DMR45A 4502/4508/4525 Aficio 1045 Adonis C2c COPY/FAX DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR45A 4502/4508/4525 Aficio 1045 Adonis C2c PRINT/SCAN DMEBP64 64MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR45A 4502/4508/4525 Aficio 1045 Adonis C2c FAX (opt) DME185J-F 0.5MB FEATURE EXPANDER
DMR45A 4502/4508/4525 Aficio 1045 Adonis C2c C/P/F/S (opt) DME1045RAM USER ACT ENHANCE TYPE A NV RAM
DMR45B 4545/4518/4532 Aficio 2045 Adonis C3c FAX DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR45B 4545/4518/4532 Aficio 2045 Adonis C3c PRINT/SCAN DIMM128 128MB MEMORY TYPE C
DMR45B 4545/4518/4532 Aficio 2045 Adonis C3c FAX (opt) DME185J-F 0.5MB FEATURE EXPANDER
DMR45B 4545/4518/4532 Aficio 2045 Adonis C3c C/P/F/S (opt) DME1045RAM USER ACT ENHANCE TYPE A NV RAM
DMR55A 3355/2955/D555 Aficio 551 Mojito C1b PRINT DME700P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR55A 3355/2955/D555 Aficio 551 Mojito C1b HARD DISK DRIVE DHD850P 6.4GB HARD DISK DRIVE KOT
DMR55B 5505/5508/5502 Aficio 1055 Mojito C2 PRINT DME700P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR55B 5505/5508/5502 Aficio 1055 Mojito C2 HARD DISK DRIVE DHD850P 6.4GB HARD DISK DRIVE KOT
DMR60 6002/6008/6005 Aficio 1060 Martini C1b PRINT DIMM128 128MB MEMORY TYPE C
DMR60 6002/6008/6005 Aficio 1060 Martini C1b PRINT DIMM256 256MB MEMORY TYPE C
DMR70A 3370/2970/D570 Aficio 700 Mojito C1c PRINT DME700P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR70A 3370/2970/D570 Aficio 700 Mojito C1c HARD DISK DRIVE DHD850P 6.4GB HARD DISK DRIVE KIT
DMR75 7502/7508/7505 Aficio 1075 Martini C1c PRINT DIMM128 128MB MEMORY TYPE C
DMR75 7502/7508/7505 Aficio 1075 Martini C1c PRINT DIMM256 256MB MEMORY TYPE C
DMR85 3285/2885/D485 Aficio 850 Bellini C1a PRINT DME700P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR85 3285/2885/D485 Aficio 850 Bellini C1a HARD DISK DRIVE DHD850P 6.4GB HARD DISK DRIVE KIT
DMR85A 8502/8508/8505 Aficio 1085 Bellini C1c PRINT DME700P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR85A 8502/8508/8505 Aficio 1085 Bellini C1c HARD DISK DRIVE DHD850P 6.4GB HARD DISK DRIVE KIT
DMR90B 9005/9008/9002 Aficio 2090 Bellini C2a PRINT/SCAN DME256MB2105 256MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR105 32105/28105/D4105 Aficio 1050 Bellini C1b PRINT DME700P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR105 32105/28105/D4105 Aficio 1050 Bellini C1b HARD DISK DRIVE DHD850P 6.4GB HARD DISK DRIVE KIT
DMR105A 10502/10508/10505 Aficio 1105 Bellini C1d PRINT DME700P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR105A 10502/10508/10505 Aficio 1105 Bellini C1d HARD DISK DRIVE DHD850P 6.4GB HARD DISK DRIVE KIT
DMR105B 10515/10518/10512 Aficio 2105 Bellini C2b PRINT/SCAN DME256MB2105 256MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMRA07 A070 Aficio 370W Dolphin HARD DISK DRIVE DHDA07 HARD DISK DRIVE
PMR16 P7016 AP1600 Stinger P4II PRINTER (opt) DME185P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
PMR16 P7016 AP1600 Stinger P4II PRINTER (opt) DME185P64 64MB MEMORY EXPANSION
PMR16 P7016 AP1600 Stinger P4II HARD DISK DRIVE DHD2000 1.6GB HARD DISK DRIVE TYPE 2000
PML16B P6216 AP1610 Saranac PRINTER (opt) DME17 1MB MEMORY FLASH SIMM EXPANSION
PML16B P6216 AP1610 Saranac PRINTER (opt) DME14 8MB MEMORY EXPANSION
PML19BN P6216 AP1610 Saranac PRINTER (opt) DME17 1MB MEMORY FLASH SIMM EXPANSION
PML19BN P6216 AP1610 Saranac PRINTER (opt) DME14 8MB MEMORY EXPANSION
PMR26 P7026 AP2600 Kir P3c PRINTER (opt) DMEBP64 64MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
PMR26 P7026 AP2600 Kir P3c HARD DISK DRIVE DHD2600 6GB HARD DISK DRIVE TYPE 2600
PMR26N P7026N AP2600N Kir P3b PRINTER (opt) DMEBP64 64MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
PMR26N P7026N AP2600N Kir P3b HARD DISK DRIVE DHD2600 6GB HARD DIDK DRIVE TYPE 2600
PMR26A P7126 AP2610 Kir-P2c HARD DISK DRIVE DHD2600 6GB HARD DISK DRIVE TYPE 2600
PMR26A P7126 AP2610 Kir-P2c PRINTER (opt) DMEBP64 64MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
PMR26AN P7126N AP2610N Kir-P2d HARD DISK DRIVE DHD2600 6GB HARD DISK DRIVE TYPE 2600
PMR26AN P7126N AP2610N Kir-P2d PRINTER (opt) DMEBP64 64MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
PMR27 P7027 AP2700 Russian P PRINTER (opt) DMR185P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
PMR27 P7027 AP2700 Russian P PRINTER (opt) DMR185P64 64MB MEMORY EXPANSION
PMR27 P7027 AP2700 Russian P HARD DISK DRIVE DHD185PV2 1.6GB (6GB) PRINTER HARD DRIVE TYPE 185
PMR32 P7032 AP3200 Russian PII PRINTER (opt) DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
PMR32 P7032 AP3200 Russian PII HARD DISK DRIVE DHD185PV2 1.6GB (6GB) PRINTER HARD DRIVE TYPE 185
PMR45 P7045 AP4500 Adonis P PRINTER (opt) DME22S16 16MB DRAM SIMM
PMR45 P7045 AP4500 Adonis P PRINTER HDD DHD450P 1.6GB PRINTER TYPE 450 HARD DISK DRIVE KIT
PMR45A P7145 AP4510 Adonis PIII PRINTER (opt) DIMM64 64MB MEMORY TYPE C
PMR45A P7145 AP4510 Adonis PIII PRINTER HDD DHD4510 8GB PRINTER HARD DISK DRIVE
COLOUR PRINTERS
PCR5P C7005P AP505 Fresa PS PRINTER (opt) DME700P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
PCR5P C7005P AP505 Fresa PS HARD DISK DRIVE DHD505 1.6GB PRINTER HARD DRIVE
PCR5W C7005W AP305 Fresa WIN PRINTER (opt) DME700P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
PCR5W C7005W AP305 Fresa WIN HARD DISK DRIVE DHD505 1.6GB PRINTER HARD DRIVE
PCR6 C7006 AP206 Pomelo 3 PRINTER (opt) DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
PCR6W C7006W AP306 Fresa WIN+Simplex PRINTER (opt) DME185P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
PCR6W C7006W AP306 Fresa WIN+Simplex PRINTER (opt) DME185P64 64MB MEMORY EXPANSION
PCR6W C7006W AP306 Fresa WIN+Simplex PRINTER (opt) DME37 128MB MEMORY EXPANSION
PCR6DW C7006DW AP306D Fresa WIN+Duplex PRINTER (opt) DME185P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
PCR6DW C7006DW AP306D Fresa WIN+Duplex PRINTER (opt) DME185P64 64MB MEMORY EXPANSION
PCR6DW C7006DW AP306D Fresa WIN+Duplex PRINTER (opt) DME37 128MB MEMORY EXPANSION
PCR10 C7010 CL5000 Model U-P1 PRINTER (opt) DIMM64 64MB MEMORY TYPE C
PCR10 C7010 CL5000 Model U-P1 HARD DISK DRIVE DHD3600 20GB HARD DISK DRIVE
PCR10 C7010 CL5000 Model U-P1 USER A/C CODES DMENV1 NV RAM
PCR16 C7116 CL3000 Model AR-P1a PRINTER (opt) DIMM64 64MB MEMORY TYPE C
PCR16 C7116 CL3000 Model AR-P1a PRINTER (opt) DMENV1 NV RAM
PCR16 C7116 CL3000 Model AR-P1a HARD DISK DRIVE PHD3000
PCR16dn C7116DN CL3000DN Model AR-P1b PRINTER (opt) DIMM64 64MB MEMORY TYPE C
PCR16dn C7116DN CL3000DN Model AR-P1b PRINTER (opt) DMENV1 NV RAM
PCR16dn C7116DN CL3000DN Model AR-P1b HARD DISK DRIVE PHD3000 10GB HARD DISK DRIVE
PCR38 DSC38 AP3800C Model J PRINTER (opt) DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
PCR38 DSC38 AP3800C Model J PRINTER (opt) DME38 256MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
PCR38 DSC38 AP3800C Model J PRINTER HDD DHD38A 20GB HARD DISK DRIVE KIT TYPE 3800C20
PCR38 DSC38 AP3800C Model J PRINT/COPY HDD DHD38B 40GB HARD DISK DRIVE KIT TYPE 3800C40
PCR38 DSC38 AP3800C Model J USER A/C CODES DMENV1 NV RAM
PCR38 DSC38 AP3800C Model J FAX (opt) DME185J-F 0.5MB FEATURE EXPANDER
SCANNERS
SMR30DC SC430DC IS330DC Russian SC SCAN (opt) DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B

NRG Pigs PDF

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

NRG Pigs PDF

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Version 1.

Product Information Guides

Main Page WFW WFW-Connect

DMR15S DMR18S DMR18D DMR35A

WFW Home NPS

All figures from Infosource

Increase market share in segment one

Key Product Attributes

Separate toner and drum

Copier Selling Points

Digital = High Quality (600dpi).

Fax Selling Points

Small office users (1-4 People), replacing existing 15-18cpm machines

Digital Machines Analogue Machines

Unique Toner Cartridge

60k per unit

15/18cpm Mainframe, Fax Option and other accessories

Printer Controller Option

Key Features, Advantages and Benefits

Separate Toner, Developer and Drum

Reduced warm-up time

Less Installation Time

Easy Jam Recovery

One to one copy speed is the same as continuous copy speed.

Platen Cover ADF ARDF

15cpm 18cpm 18cpm Duplex

2 Trays Paper Bank

Copier: Fax: Printer:

Option correlation for basic copier and fax:

- must install together - cannot install together

- must install together - cannot install together

DMR18D 18cpm duplex:

- must install together - cannot install together

Average 9K copies per cartridge

Average 60k copies per bag

European Market Situation

Digital Machines Analogue Machines

Model Speed RRP Technology Duplex

Product Range Plan & Positioning

Product Plan Map

Stinger-C1 Model K-C1c Model K-C1c

Replacement Model Comparison

DMR15S/18S/18D Stinger-C1/C1 Lite

Lifetime 600k or 5 years whichever 600k or 5 years whiche ver comes

Price comparison mainframes

Cost per Copy

Kingfisher Stinger Kir

Identifying Target Markets

The DMR15S/18S/18D is targeted at the following markets.

The main selling points are:

Overall Selling Points

Copier Selling Points

Printer Selling Points

Fax Selling Points

Marketing Support Materials

Product & Supply Logistic Data

Codes & Contents

Paper handling options

Platen Cover Type 1018 Platen cover

Common items with Existing Models

Short Name Description

Short Name Description

Includes hard copy of basic fax features + fax decals.